G600

AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 October 2013 Revision L

© 2006-2013 Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries
All Rights Reserved
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted,
disseminated, downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express prior
written consent of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and
of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed and to
print one copy of this manual or of any revision hereto, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this
manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that any
unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin®, GDU™, and Garmin SVT™ are trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. FliteCharts® and
SafeTaxi® are also registered trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be
used without the express permission of Garmin.

NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; ChartView™ is a trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.;

Skywatch® is a registered trademark of L-3 Communications; and MATLAB® is a registered trademark of
The MathWorks, Inc.
Sirius®, XM®, and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
©1984 – 2013.
At Garmin, we value your opinion.
For questions or comments about Garmin aviation products, please e-mail [email protected]
For questions or comments about this manual or other Garmin technical publications, please e-mail
[email protected].
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 E. 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062 USA
Telephone: 913-397-8200
Aviation Dealer Technical Support Line (Toll Free): 888.606.5482
http://fly.garmin.com
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House
Bull Copse Road
Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, SO40 9LR, UK
Telephone: +44 (0) 870 850 1243
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Rd. SE
Salem, OR 97302 USA
Telephone: 503.581.8101

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page A
RECORD OF REVISIONS

Revision Revision Date Description

A 3/28/08 Initial Release
Incorporated feedback from the field. Added autopilots and/or flight
B 11/13/08 directors (Cessna 300B/400B/800B IFCS, Collins AP-106-107,
Honeywell KFC 275/325, S-TEC 60-2/65).
Updated for GDU 620 version 3.00. Added autopilots and/or flight
C 6/2/09 directors (Cessna 1000 IFCS, Honeywell KFC 300, Sperry 
SPZ-200/500.
Updated to clarify bonding requirements and address lightning
D 7/16/09
protection in non-metallic aircraft.
Updated to clarify various interfaces to external systems. Added
E 11/3/09 Bendix M-4C/M-4D autopilots. Added information for installation in
various Bonanza 35 models.
Clarify various external system interfaces. Include directions for
GDU 620 software version 5.00 capabilities, GSR 56 interface, Radar
F 12/6/10 Altimeter interfaces, ARINC 708 WX Radar interfaces, Video
Equipment interfaces. Miscellaneous changes to address feedback
from field installations.
Updated to include modified standby ADI TVS assembly that allows
periodic inspection rather than periodic replacement. Added
G 1/7/2011
information for installing overbraid on ARINC 708 weather radar
cabling in radome area.
Added GTN 6XX/7XX as an approved navigator. Added section
H 3/30/11 describing KFC 225 adjustments that are required following G600
installation.
Added S-TEC 1500/2100 autopilot. Added GAD 43 interface to
J 8/25/11
Century 21/31/41/2000 autopilots.
Added support for PC-12 aircraft, KFC 275/325, KAP 100/150, KFC
K 12/11/12
150 autopilots, and added compatibility with L-3 ESI.
L 10/18/13 See current revision description for a complete list of changes.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page B Rev. L
CURRENT REVISION DESCRIPTION

Section Description
Front Matter Corrected Garmin Europe address
1.2 Added mention of RVSM compliance
1.3.4 Added GWX 70 connection type
Table 2-1 Added note of required GDC 74B for RVSM
Table 2-2 Added option for RVSM in TBM 700/850
2.4.2 Added mention of GWX 70
2.4.2.3 Updated revision number
2.5.2.5 Added section for Standby Heading requirements
Added mentions of GWX 70 as options
2.5.8.3.2
Moved WX radar install requirements to Appendix E
2.5.8.7 Added GTN to note
2.5.9 Moved roll-steering requirements to Section 2.5.16.2
Moved section discussing new panel from 2.5.11.3.2
2.5.11.3
Removed Avion Research Inc. contact details
Clarified specific prerequisite STCs for Cessna models and notes for F172 series
2.5.11.3.1
aircraft
2.5.11.3.2 Clarified specific prerequisite STCs for Hawker Beechcraft models
2.5.12 Specified wiring considerations with example of high-energy sources
2.5.15 Added RVSM considerations section
2.5.16.2 Updated description of roll steering converter function
Updated support for Fast/Slow displays
2.5.17
Updated support for autopilot mode displays
2.5.25 Added mention of GWX 70
Figure 2-24 Added /70 to GWX 68
2.5.25.3 Added mention of GWX 70
3.2.3.2.5 Clarified terminal lug attachment in steps 7 and 8 of Mounting Clamps subsection
3.2.4.2 Corrected GMU 44 clearances
3.2.4.2A.1 Updated GMU 44 pigtail clearance in Figure 3-57
3.4.1.1 (New section) Added shield and connection consideration
3.7.3 Clarified and corrected notes 1 and 2 in Step 5.
3.8.1 Updated equipment bonding procedure for metal aircraft

3.8.2 Clarified non-metallic aircraft bonding to Figures 3-123 through 3-126.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page C
Section Description
Figure 3-7 Added p/n MS21055L06 to nutplate list

5.5.5 Deleted SD card removal instructions

and subs Clarified Installer Unlock Card position
5.5.5.4 Added GWX 70 to section and note
5.5.5.11 (New section) Added Static Source Error Correction
5.5.6.0A Clarified language
5.5.9.5 (New section) Added Roll Steering Converter configuration instructions
Inserted step for Century IV autopilot modes
5.5.10 Added note 6 for Century IV settings, changed note 4
Change table note references
5.5.10.1 deleted note
5.5.11.1 Add Cessna Settings
5.5.11.2 Add KFC & KDM settings
5.5.12.3 (New section) Added Configuration support for GWX 70
5.7.2.3.2 Clarified KFC 225
5.7.3 Added section
5.8.2 Moved verification to Section 5.8.2.3
5.8.2.1 Clarified verification
5.8.5.4.3 Revised post install check instructions for KAS 297 B/C emulation
5.8.5.4.4 Set a reserved section
5.8.5.4.5 Clarified instructions
5.8.5.4.6 (New section) Added GAD 43e KAS 297 emulation
Added instructions to set GROUND SPEED and GPSS VALID settings for Roll steering
5.8.5.7.1
check
5.8.5.11 (New section) Added KFC mode data checkout
5.8.5.7.2 Moved note to 5.8.5.7.2.1
5.8.10 Clarified EMI check applicability
5.8.12.1 Added text to support GWX 70
5.11.1 Added clarification on roll steering mode
5.11.2 Use standard terminology
Figure 5-22 Added RVSM note to altitude hold check
Table 5-8 Added GNC 255
Table 5-12 Added GWX 70
Table 5-17 Corrected P6203 pin numbers for input settings NAV1 through Flight Director

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page D Rev. L
Section Description
Corrected Sperry SPZ-200A description in note 4
Table 5-20
Added note 19
Updated note 1 to include purchase enablement and that the GAD 43e will support the
Table 5-21
S-TEC 44X
Table 5-24 Changed KFC 225 output to DFCS 5
Add Century IV FD Type
Added note 5 to all settings for KFC 225
Added ARINC 429 for KCP 220 -0015 and higher for KFC 275
Delineated KCP 220 versions. Removed ARINC 429 ARINC Type Setting for
Table 5-25
KFC 275/325 with KCP 220 -0012 and earlier
Enabled SVT for Manual Entry Type Setting
Deleted note 5 for Cessna 300B et. Al. and 1000 IFCS
Added note 6
Updated Flight Director Active Settings Table
Table 5-26
Added note 5 to all settings for KFC 225
Table 5-27 Update GAD configuration settings, replaced and reassigned note 7, added note 8
Add A/P KFC 200 & 250 for KAS 297
Added King KAS 297C #1 for the KFC 275
Reworded note 1
Table 5-28
added information for KAS 297C in note 3
Added note 4: Specification on autopilot preselect requirements
Added note 5: details on KAS 297C being replaced for TBM aircraft
Table 5-30 Add Honeywell KDM 706(A) entry
6.3 Added clarification regarding display of alerts
Added alert for NO AP DATA
Added alert for ADC ALT EC-ADC altitude error correction is unavailable
Table 6-2
Added reference to GWX 70
Correct AC reference
Table 6-3 Added clarification to troubleshooting Autopilot does not follow roll steering
7.1 Simplified limitation to all aircraft on the AML.
7.2 Added paragraph on RVSM
Appendix C Updated Figure C-3 and Figure C-4
E.2 Corrected GTN 6XX/7XX RS-232 and ARINC 429 channels from 1 to 2
Corrected interfacing equipment information
Simplified note 16
E.3
Added clarification for S-TEC 55X and requiring enablement and for option to use
GAD 43

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page E
Section Description
Moved KFC 275/325 to separate entries
E.4 Added Century IV, 41, and 2000
Removed note 3 from Cessna Flight directors
E.5 Added GNC 255
Added GWX 70
E.10
Added notes 3 through 6
Added Cessna models
E.14 Added GAD 43 P/N compatible with G600
Added note 9 for Century Autopilots and GAD 43 interaction
Added GMA 35 and GMA 350 to approved models
E.17
Added information for GMA 35 on its requiring a control panel
E.18 Added note 4 to contact Garmin
Add KFC 200 & 250
E.20
Updated information to Collins autopilots
Added the KDM 706(A)
E.23
Added KX 170B/175B as acceptable tuning sources
E.25 Added note to contact Garmin
Figure F-1 Updated to include note 12 referencing TBM 700/850
Figure F-3 Updated to include note 16 referencing TBM 700/850
Figure F-8 Updated to include GNC 255
Figure F-9 Updated to include GNC 255
Figure F-10 Reworded note 9 for clarity
Figure F-12 Added Century 41/2000 flight directors
Figure F-15 Corrected a pinout error for the unswitched audio inputs to the GMA 35
Figure F-23 Updated Weather Radar Interconnect to include GWX 70
Figure F-26 Added note 13 to reference the TBM700/850
Corrected AC Lo tie
Figure F-27
Split sheet 10. Added sheet 11 and accompanying notes.
Changed GAD circuit breaker value to 3A
Updated note 7 to include that existing sources of 26VAC should be used when
Figure F-28 possible
Updated note 11 to indicate that the GAD 43 cannot be used to provide the altitude
preselector function with computers using Pre-80 altitude preselector
Removed Note 9
Figure F-29 Updated note 8 to include that existing sources of 26VAC should be used when
possible

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F Rev. L
Section Description
Figure F-36 Added GWX 70 to Single GDU 620 HSDB interconnect
Figure F-37 Added GWX 70 to Dual HSDB interconnect
Figure F-39 Added note 7
Figure F-41 Added notes 7-10
Corrected Collins unit part numbers
Figure F-42
Updated to include test aid pin for KRA 405
Corrected KN 63 connector
Figure F-43
Added KDM 706(A) interconnect
Figure F-45 Added new GAD 43/43e Cessna autopilot interconnect drawing set
Appendix K Added note on row shading before Table K-1
Removed note 8 from Lovaux OA7 and Vulcanair PA7 entries
Revised note 8
Added note 9 to Cessna 172 and F172 series. Revised note 9
Table K-1
Corrected Standby Attitude Indicator Title to Standby Indicator
Clarified M7 SSA227-TT gross takeoff weight limitation
Added notes 16 and 17
Table K-2 Altered title of Standby ADI indicator to MCI Standby Attitude Indicator
Appendix P Added appendix for RVSM

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page G
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page H Rev. L
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2.1 Approved Aircraft with Systems Not Covered by the STC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2.2 Class I/II Aircraft Not Identified on the AML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2.3 Class III Aircraft Not Identified on the AML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2.4 Other Aircraft Not Covered by the G600 AML STC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2.5 Required Documentation for All Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 G600 System Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.1 G600 LRU Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.3.2 Required GPS Navigator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.3.3 Required Standby Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.3.4 Optional Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.3.5 Interface Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.4 G600 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.4.1 Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.4.2 Installation Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.4.3 Pre-Installation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.5 Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.5.1 Environmental Qualification Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.5.2 Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.5.3 Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.6 Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.7 G600 System Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.8 Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.8.1 Basemap Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.8.2 Navigation Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.8.3 FliteCharts® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1.8.4 ChartView™ Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1.8.5 SafeTaxi® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1.8.6 Terrain and Airport Terrain Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1.8.7 Obstacles Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.8.8 IGRF Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.8.9 Airport Directory Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.9 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
2 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 Pre-Installation Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.3 Available Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.3A G600 Database Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.4 Installation Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.4.1 Accessories Available from Garmin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.4.2 Materials Required but Not Supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.4.3 Software Loader Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.5 Installation Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.5.1 Minimum System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page i
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Section Page
2.5.2 Standby Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.5.3 Placards and Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.5.4 Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.5.5 Pitot-Static Plumbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.5.6 External Annunciators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.5.7 External Course Deviation Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.5.8 External Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.5.9 Autopilot/Flight Director Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2.5.10 Part 121/Part 135 Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2.5.11 Mounting Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2.5.12 Cable and Wiring Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
2.5.13 Cooling Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
2.5.14 Magnetic Compass Recalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
2.5.15 RVSM Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
2.5.16 GPSS (Roll Steering) Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
2.5.17 ADI Replacement Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
2.5.18 Aerobatic Aircraft Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
2.5.19 Altitude Encoder Function (GDU™ 620 software version 3.00 or later). . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
2.5.20 Equipment Bonding Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
2.5.21 Non-Metallic Aircraft Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
2.5.22 VFR-Only Installation Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
2.5.23 Airspeed Warning Device Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
2.5.24 ARINC 708 Weather Radar Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
2.5.25 HSDB Ethernet Architecture Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
2.5.26 Dual G600 Installation Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
2.5.27 GDU 620 Discrete Output Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
3.1 Special Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.1 Tools Needed for Magnetic Interference Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2 Equipment Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.1 GDU™ 620 Display Location and Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.2 Standby Instruments Location and Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.2.3 GRS 77 AHRS Location and Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.2.4 GMU44 Magnetometer Location and Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
3.2.5 GDC 74( ) ADC Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
3.2.6 GTP 59 Temperature Probe Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
3.2.7 GAD 43/43e Adapter Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109
3.3 Construction and Validation of Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113
3.3.1 G600 Static Test Loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113
3.3.2 (moved to 3.3.1.2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
3.3.3 (moved to 3.3.1.3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
3.3.4 Test Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
3.4 Cabling and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117
3.4.1 Wiring Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117
3.4.2 Backshell Assembly and D-Subminiature Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-119
3.4.3 TVS, Fuse and Resistor Installation (non-metallic aircraft only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page ii Rev. L
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Section Page
3.4.4 TVS 2 Assembly (non-metallic aircraft only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-136
3.5 Unit Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-138
3.5.1 GDU™ 620 Unit Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-138
3.5.2 GRS 77 Unit Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-139
3.5.3 GMU 44 Unit Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-141
3.5.4 GDC 74( ) Unit Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-142
3.5.5 Mid-Continent Electric Standby ADI System Replacement (if installed) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-142
3.5.6 GAD 43/43e Unit Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-143
3.6 Weight and Balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-144
3.7 Electrical Load Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-146
3.7.1 Aircraft with Existing Electrical Load Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-147
3.7.2 Aircraft without Existing Electrical Load Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-147
3.7.3 Performing an Electrical Load Analysis by Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-148
3.8 Equipment Bonding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-159
3.8.1 Metal Aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-159
3.8.2 Non-Metallic Aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-159
3.8.3 Aluminum Surface Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-167
4 SYSTEM INTERCONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION/CHECKOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1
5.1 System Configuration Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 Required Airframe-Specific Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2.1 PFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2.2 MFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.3 GDL 69 Audio Mute Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.4 Airspeeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.5 Airport Criteria (GDU™ 620 software version 3.00 or later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.2.6 Altitude Alerter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3 Mounting, Wiring and Power Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.4 Software Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.4.1 GDU™ 620 Software Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.4.2 LRU Software Loading Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.4.3 (Moved to 5.4.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.4.4 (Moved to 5.4.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.4.5 (Moved to 5.4.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.4.6 Software Load Confirmation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.5 System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.5.1 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.5.2 Airframe Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.5.3 Lighting Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.5.4 Manifest Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.5.5 Optional G600 Feature Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.5.6 Audio Alert Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5.5.6A Terrain/Garmin SVT™ Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5.5.6B Video Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.5.6C Discrete Output Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.5.7 GDC 74( ) Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Section Page
5.5.8 GDL 69/69A Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.5.9 Autopilot Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.5.10 Flight Director Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5.5.11 GAD 43/43e Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
5.5.12 Weather Radar Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
5.5.13 GTS 8XX Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
5.5.14 GSR 56 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
5.5.15 Miscellaneous System Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
5.5.16 Updating the Configuration Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
5.6 GRS 77 AHRS Calibration and Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
5.6.1 GRS 77 Pitch/Roll Offset Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
5.6.2 GRS 77/GMU 44 Magnetometer Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
5.6.3 Compass Swing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
5.6.4 Heading Offset Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
5.6.5 Engine Run-Up Vibration Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
5.6.6 Magnetometer Interference Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
5.6.7 Site Evaluation of Magnetic Disturbances (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
5.7 External System Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
5.7.1 ARINC 708 Weather Radars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
5.7.2 Honeywell (Bendix-King) Autopilot Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
5.7.3 Cessna 300B/400B/800B Autopilots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
5.7.4 Cessna 1000 Autopilots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
5.8 Ground Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
5.8.1 Database Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
5.8.2 Pitot-Static, ADC and Airspeed Tape Settings Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
5.8.3 GPS Receiver Interface Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
5.8.4 Navigation Receiver Interface Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
5.8.5 Autopilot Interface Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
5.8.6 Traffic System Interface Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
5.8.7 Garmin GDL 69/69A Checkout Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
5.8.8 ADF Interface Checkout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99
5.8.9 GDU™ 620 Cross-Fill Checkout Procedure (Dual G600 Installations Only) . . . . . . . . 5-99
5.8.10 EMI/RFI Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99
5.8.11 GAD 43/43e Adapter Interface Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
5.8.12 Weather Radar Interface Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
5.8.13 Synthetic Vision Check (if SVT™ enabled) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103
5.8.14 TAWS Check (if TAWS option enabled). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103
5.8.15 Transient Voltage Suppressor Checks (non-metallic aircraft only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103
5.8.16 Final G600 System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104
5.8.17 External Video Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104
5.8.18 Radar Altimeter Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105
5.8.19 GSR 56 Iridium® Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106
5.8.20 Miscellaneous System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
5.8.21 DME Distance Display Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
5.8.22 Marker Beacon Display Test (via GAD 43e) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111
5.9 Placards and Switch Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page iv Rev. L
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Section Page
5.10 Flight Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112
5.10.1 General System Flight Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112
5.10.2 Autopilot Flight Checks and Final Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112
5.11 Documentation Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119
5.11.1 AFMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119
5.11.2 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (ICA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120
5.11.3 Configuration and Checkout Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120
6 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
6.1 GMU 44 Magnetometer Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.1 Common Causes for Failures of the Magnetometer Interference Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.2 Examples of Magnetic Interference Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 G600 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.3 Autopilot Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.4 Mid-Continent Standby ADI System (if installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.5 Contacting Garmin for Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
7 LIMITATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
7.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2 STC Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2.1 Penetration of Aircraft Pressure Vessels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2.2 Equipment Interfaced to the G600 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2.3 Major Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2.4 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2.5 Installations with External TAWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2.6 Installations with Existing Overspeed Warning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2.7 Airspeed Indication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2.8 Installations Using the GSR 56 Iridium Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
8 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
8.1 Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.2 GDC 74( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.3 Lightning Protection (non-metallic aircraft only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.3.1 Transient Voltage Suppressor (TVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.3.2 Aluminum Foil Tape (if installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.3.3 Bonding Straps (if installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.4 Lightning Protection (metal aircraft only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.4.1 Lightning Strike Inspection (GMU 44 installed in a nonmetallic wingtip) . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.4.2 Lightning Strike Inspection (ARINC 708 Weather Radar Overbraid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
APPENDIX A NOT USED
APPENDIX B CONNECTOR INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
B.1 GDU™ 620 PFD/MFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
B.1.1 J6201/P6201 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
B.1.2 J6202/P6202 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B.1.3 J6203/P6203 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
B.2 GRS 77 AHRS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
B.2.1 J771/P771 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page v
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Section Page
B.3 GMU 44 Magnetometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
B.3.1 J441/P441 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
B.4 GDC 74( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
B.4.1 J741/P741 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
B.5 GAD 43/43e Adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
B.5.1 J431/P431 Connector (GAD 43/43e) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
B.5.2 J432/P432 Connector (GAD 43e Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-23
B.5.3 J433/P433 Connector (GAD 43e Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-24
APPENDIX C OUTLINE AND INSTALLATION DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
APPENDIX D SAMPLE INSTALLATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
D.1 Sample Instrument Panel Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
D.2 GMU 44 Installation Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
D.3 GDC 74( ) Installation Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
D.4 GAD 43/43e Installation Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-16
APPENDIX E EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY AND CONFIGURATION . . . . E-1
E.1 Electric Standby Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
E.2 GPS Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
E.3 Autopilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
E.4 External Flight Directors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7
E.5 Navigation Receivers (ARINC 429) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9
E.6 Traffic Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10
E.7 Data Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
E.8 2 ¼-inch Standby Airspeed Indicators and Altimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
E.9 ADF Receiver (interfaced to GDU 620) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-12
E.10 Weather Radar Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13
E.11 Lightning Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14
E.12 External TAWS Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14
E.13 GDU 620 Serial Altitude (RS-232) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14
E.14 GAD 43/43e – Autopilot Compatibility - Attitude Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15
E.15 Radar Altimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17
E.16 External Video Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17
E.17 Audio Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18
E.18 Miscellaneous Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-19
E.19 GAD 43e - Analog Navigation Receiver Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-19
E.20 GAD 43e – Autopilot Compatibility – Altitude Preselect / Vertical Speed Select . . . . . . . . E-20
E.21 GAD 43e – Analog Radar Altimeter Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-21
E.22 GAD 43e – Synchro ADF Receiver Compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-21
E.23 GAD 43e – DME Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-22
E.24 GAD 43e – Marker Beacon Receiver Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-23
E.25 Stall Protection and Warning Unit (Fast/Slow Indication) Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-23
APPENDIX F INTERCONNECT DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
APPENDIX G MAGNETIC INTERFERENCE SURVEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
G.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
G.1.1 Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page vi Rev. L
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Section Page
G.2 GLS Software Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4
G.2.1 New MATLAB Installations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6
G.2.2 Existing MATLAB Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6
G.2.3 Completing the GLS Tool Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6
G.3 Conducting the GMU 44 Location Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7
G.3.1 Aircraft and GMU 44 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7
G.3.2 GLS Tool Setup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-9
G.3.3 GLS Tool Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-11
G.3.4 GLS Data Analysis Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-14
G.4 (moved to G.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-17
APPENDIX H MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTALLATIONS. H-1
H.1 Panel Patches for GDU 620 and Accommodation of Oversize Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
H.2 Bolster Modification for Standby Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-4
APPENDIX J LIGHTNING ZONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-1
J.1 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-1
J.2 Severity of Lightning Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-1
J.3 Aircraft Zoning Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-1
J.3.1 Wings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-1
J.3.2 Fuselage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-5
J.3.3 Empennage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-14
J.4 Example Lightning Zoning Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-15
APPENDIX K MODEL-SPECIFIC INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-1
APPENDIX L GMU 44 MOUNTING IN NON-METALLIC WINGTIP . . . . . . . . L-1
L.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-1
L.2 Materials Required but Not Supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-1
L.3 Overbraid Fabrication and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-1
L.3.1 Overbraid Termination Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-2
L.3.2 Overbraid Terminal Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-2
APPENDIX M ADVANCED AIRSPEED SETTINGS
(GDUTM 620 SOFTWARE VERSION 5.00 OR LATER) . . . . . . . M-1
M.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-1
M.2 Configuration Page Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-1
M.3 Arc Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-1
M.3.1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-1
M.3.2 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-3
M.4 Markings and Bugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-3
M.5 Overspeeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-5
M.5.1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-5
M.5.2 Overspeeds Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-6
M.6 GDU 620 Airspeed Tape Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-6
M.6.1 Beechcraft Bonanza A36 (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-7
M.6.2 Columbia 400 (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-8

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Section Page
APPENDIX N HIRF AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION
IN METALLIC AIRCRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1
N.1 ARINC 708 Weather Radar Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1
N.1.1 Materials Required but Not Supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1
N.1.2 Overbraid Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1
N.1.3 Overbraid Terminal Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-2
N.2 Stick Pusher and Warntone Generator Interface (PC-12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-5
N.2.1 Materials Required but Not Supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-5
N.2.2 Overbraid Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-5
APPENDIX P RVSM GROUP AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
FOR TBM 700 SERIES AIRCRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1
P.1 Group Approval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1
P.2 System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1
P.2.1 Prerequisite Installations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1
P.2.2 RVSM Approved Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1
P.2.3 RVSM Required Avionics Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-3
P.2.4 Required Interfaces and Functions for RVSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-3
P.2.5 AM-250 Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-4
P.2.6 Pitot-Static Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-5
P.2.7 Transponder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-5
P.3 Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-6
P.3.1 Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-6
P.3.2 Pitot-Static Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-6
P.3.3 RVSM In-Flight Altitude Hold Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-9
P.4 Updating Aircraft Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-10

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page viii Rev. L
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure Page
1-1. G600 System Overview – Single Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2. G600 System Overview – Dual Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-3. G600 Interfaces – Single GDU 620. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-4. G600 Interfaces – Dual GDU 620s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-5. Typical Instrument Panel Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
2-1. GDU™ 620 ADI Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2-2. Original ADI Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2-3. GDU 620 ADI Location Requirement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2-4. Acceptable Installation Area for 3⅛-inch Standby Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2-5. Side View Stepped Panel for 3⅛-inch Standby Instruments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2-6. Acceptable Installation Area for 2¼-Inch Standby Instruments Utilizing Both
2¼-inch and 3⅛-inch Standby Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2-7. Acceptable Installation Area for Mixed Standby Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2-8. GRS 77 AHRS Location Considerations for Twin Engine Aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2-9. Acceptable Locations for GMU 44 Magnetometer (Top View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
2-10. Acceptable Locations for GMU 44 Magnetometer (Side View). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
2-11. Level Mounting of GMU 44 Magnetometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
2-12. Heading Offset Limit GMU 44 Magnetometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2-13. GDC 74( ) Air Hose Fitting Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
2-14. Acceptable Locations for GTP 59 Temperature Probe - Single Engine Aircraft . . . . . . . . . 2-43
2-15. Acceptable Locations for GTP 59 Temperature Probe - Twin Engine Aircraft . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
2-16. Location of Copilot ADI with Flight Director Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
2-17. GAD 43/43e Short and Tall Installation Orientations (GAD 43 shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
2-18. VFR Only GDU 620 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
2-19. Single G600 Installation without GTN 6XX/7XX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
2-20. Dual G600 Installation without GTN 6XX/7XX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
2-21. Single G600 Installation with Single GTN 6XX/7XX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
2-22. Single G600 Installation with Dual GTN 6XX/7XX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
2-23. Dual G600 Installation with Single GTN 6XX/7XX as GPS #1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
2-24. Dual G600 Installation with Single GTN 6XX/7XX as GPS #2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
2-25. Dual G600 Installation with Dual GTN 6XX/7XX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
3-1. Example of an Ideal Six-Pack Instrument Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-2. Example of a Non-Ideal Six-Pack Instrument Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-3. GDU 620 Installed, Non-Ideal Six-Pack Instrument Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-4. GDU 620 Recommended Connector Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-5. Trim Plate Installation, Thin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3-6. Trim Plate Installation, Thick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3-7. Structural Trim Plate Installation, Correct Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3-8. Acceptable Modifications to Edge Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3-9. Example of Installed GDU 620 - Standby Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3-10. Example of Installed GDU 620 - Standby Instruments on Stepped Part of Panel . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-11. Example of GDU 620 Installed with 2¼-Inch Standby Instruments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3-12. GRS 77 Universal Mount (Inward Facing Angle Brackets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3-13. GRS 77 Universal Mount (Outward Facing Angle Brackets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3-14. GRS 77 Universal Mount Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3-15. Hole-Pattern Configuration to Set Incline in Assembly for Aircraft Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page ix
LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure Page
3-16. Top Bracket to Angle Bracket Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3-17. Assembling GRS 77 Mounting Rack to GRS 77 Universal Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3-18. Installation of Universal Mount to Mounting Plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3-19. Mounting Location (Composite Aircraft) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3-20. Mounting Bolt Preparation (Composite Aircraft) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3-21. Mounting Bolt Installation and Alignment (Composite Aircraft). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3-22. First Cloth Installation for Mounting Bolts (Composite Aircraft) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3-23. Second Cloth Installation for Mounting Bolts (Composite Aircraft) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
3-24. Installation of GRS 77 Universal Mount in Tube and Fabric Aircraft Using Welded Tabs . 3-32
3-25. Installation of GRS 77 Univ. Mount in Tube/Fabric Aircraft Using MS21919 Clamps . . . 3-34
3-26. Using the GRS 77 Universal Mount in Locations of Previously-Installed Equipment. . . . . 3-36
3-27. Example GRS 77 Installation Using Existing Shelf Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
3-28. Installation of the Mounting Rack to the Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3-29. Installation of GRS 77 on Aircraft Stringers (Adapter Riveted to Aircraft Skin). . . . . . . . . 3-40
3-30. Installation of GRS 77 on Existing Floor Panel or Installed Support Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3-31. Installation of GRS 77 with Installed Support Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3-32. Measuring GRS 77 to Mounting Rack Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3-33. GRS 77 Final Installation Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
3-34. GMU 44 Universal Mount, Side Plate Mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3-35. GMU 44 Universal Mount, Bottom Plate Mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3-36. GMU 44 Universal Mount, Side Plate Mounted – Suspended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3-37. GMU 44 Universal Mount, Bottom Plate Mounted – Suspended. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
3-38. GMU 44 Universal Mount Level Installation Axis 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
3-39. GMU 44 Universal Mount Level Installation Axis 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
3-40. GMU 44 Universal Mount Level Installation Using Support Equipment, Examples. . . . . . 3-50
3-41. Top Plate Alignment to Aircraft Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3-42. Installation Rack Rivet Through Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3-43. Installation Rack to Top Bracket Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
3-44. GMU 44 Universal Mount Top and Bottom Bracket Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3-45. GMU 44 Universal Mount Top and Bottom Hole Patterns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
3-46. GMU 44 Universal Mount Hole Alignment, Lateral Method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
3-47. GMU 44 Universal Mount Hole Alignment, Lateral Method 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
3-48. GMU 44 Univ Mount Hole Alignment, Rotational Method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3-49. GMU 44 Universal Mount Hole Alignment, Rotational Method 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3-50. GMU 44 Universal Mount Incline Offset Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3-51. GMU 44 Universal Mount Incline Offset Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3-52. Example of a 4° Lateral Incline GMU 44 Universal Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
3-53. Example of a 6° Rotated Incline GMU 44 Universal Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
3-54. Installation of the GMU 44 into GMU 44 Universal Mount. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
3-55. GMU 44 Installation Clearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
3-56. Possible Hole-Patterns on the GMU 44 Universal Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
3-57. GMU 44 Magnetometer Mounting without Universal Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3-58. GMU44 Magnetometer Mounting On Wing Rib Without Universal Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
3-59. GMU 44 Magnetometer Mounting Bracket for Composite Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
3-60. Conductive Surface Preparation for Attachment of GMU 44 Mounting Bracket. . . . . . . . . 3-72
3-61. Attach Flange Preparation of GMU 44 Magnetometer Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page x Rev. L
LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure Page
3-62. GMU 44 Mounting Bracket Attachment to Prepared Aircraft Surface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
3-63. Final Layers of Cloth on GMU 44 Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
3-64. Final View of GMU 44 Installation on Conductive Surface in Composite Aircraft. . . . . . . 3-76
3-65. Rivet Line Method to Determine Mounting Panel Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
3-66. Dividers Used to Transfer Panel Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
3-67. Using Dividers to Transfer Panel Alignment to Underside of Aircraft Wing. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
3-68. Transferring Mounting Plate Alignment To Underside Of Wing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
3-69. Transferring Mounting Panel Line from Underside of Wing to Floor Using Plumb Bob . . 3-80
3-70. Centerline Plumb Bob Method for the Forward Fuselage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
3-71. Center Mark for the Forward Fuselage (Plumb Bob Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
3-72. Centerline Plumb Bob Method for the Aft Fuselage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
3-73. Center Line (Plumb Bob Method). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
3-74. Transferring Center Line Step 1 (Laser Square Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
3-75. Transferring Center Line Step 2 (Laser Square Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
3-76. Measuring the Heading Angle Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
3-77. 3-4-5 Triangle Method Step 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85
3-78. 3-4-5 Triangle Method Step 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
3-79. 3-4-5 Triangle Method Step 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
3-80. 3-4-5 Triangle Method Step 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
3-81. GDC 74( ) Recommended Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
3-82. GDC 74( ) Mounting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
3-83. Installation of GDC 74( ) Mounting Rack to Mounting Plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
3-84. Pitot-Static Connections for Single G600 Installation
(Aircraft with Single Pitot-Static System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
3-85. Pitot-Static Connections for Single G600 Installation
(Aircraft with Dual Pitot-Static Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
3-86. Pitot-Static Connections for G600 Installation
(Aircraft with Single Pitot-Static System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
3-87. Pitot-Static Connections for Dual G600 Installation
(Aircraft with Dual Pitot-Static Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
3-88. Drilling Hole-Pattern on Mounting Rack for Composite Aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
3-89. Pressing Mounting Rack Into Flox/Epoxy Mix (Composite Aircraft) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
3-90. Cloth lay-up for Mounting Rack (Composite Aircraft). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
3-91. GDC 74( ) Final Installation Example (Composite Aircraft) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
3-92. GTP OAT Probe Kit Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
3-93. GTP 59 Doubler ‘A’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
3-94. GTP 59 Doubler ‘B’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103
3-95. GTP 59 Temperature Probe and Doubler Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104
3-96. GTP 59 Installation in a Non-Conductive Access Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106
3-97. GTP 59 Installation in Conductive Inspection Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-108
3-98. GAD 43/43e Recommended Clearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110
3-99. GAD 43/43e Installation Options (GAD 43 shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111
3-100. Installation of the GAD 43/43e to a Mounting Surface
(GAD 43 Short Orientation Shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112
3-101. Upward Static Load Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116
3-102. Forward Static Load Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page xi
LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure Page
3-103. Shield Termination Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122
3-104. Slidelock Backshell and Shield Block Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-124
3-105. Shield Termination on Slidelock Backshell Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-126
3-106. Backshell Assembly (potted configuration module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128
3-107. Baskshell Assembly (configuration module with spacer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-129
3-108. Jackscrew Backshell and Shield Block Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-132
3-109. Shield Block Termination on Jackscrew Backshell Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133
3-110. TVS/Fuse Installation (TVS1/F1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-135
3-111. Resistor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-136
3-112. Detail of TVS Pin Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-137
3-113. TVS 2 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-137
3-114. Sample Weight and Balance Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-145
3-115. Sample Net Electrical Load Change Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-147
3-116. Ammeter Placement for Current Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-149
3-117. Blank Electrical Load Tabulation Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-153
3-118. Example of Completed Electrical Load Tabulation Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-155
3-119. Blank Emergency Power Operation Calculation Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-157
3-120. Example of Completed Emergency Power Operation Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-158
3-121. Fiberglass Insulation for Carbon Fiber Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-160
3-122. Aluminum Tape Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-161
3-123. Aluminum Tape Ground Termination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-162
3-124. GRS 77 Aluminum Tape Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-163
3-125. GDC 74( ) Aluminum Tape Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-164
3-126. GAD 43/43e Aluminum Tape Installation (Horizontal Mount, GAD 43 shown). . . . . . . . . 3-165
3-127. GAD 43/43e Aluminum Tape Installation (Vertical Mount, GAD 43e shown) . . . . . . . . . . 3-166
5-1. Airspeed Configuration Page with IAS Tape Set to Basic (A) and Advanced (B). . . . . . . . 5-3
5-2. Software Upload Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-3. Software Confirmation Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5-4. System Configuration Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5-5. ARINC PORT CONFIG Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5-6. Video Configuration Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5-7. Discrete Configuration Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5-8. Autopilot Configuration Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5-9. Autopilot Mode Annunciation Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5-10. ARINC Port Configuration Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
5-11. Discrete Configuration Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
5-12. ARINC 708 Weather Radar Configuration Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
5-13. ARINC PORT CONFIG Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
5-14. GRS/GMU Calibration Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
5-15. A708 WEATHER RADAR Configuration Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
5-16. GAD 43 Output Test Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
5-17. FLIGHT DIRECTOR CAL Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
5-18. Radar Altitude Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105
5-19. DME Distance Display - Single DME Tuning Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
5-20. DME Distance Display - Dual DME Tuning Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
5-21. Marker Beacon Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page xii Rev. L
LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure Page
5-22. Autopilot Performance Checkout Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117
5-23. G600 System Configuration and Checkout Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
6-1. Magnetic Interference Example #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-2. Magnetic Interference Example #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
8-1. TVS Assembly Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
B-1. Connector Legend (37-contact D-sub connector shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
B-2. GDU 620 Rear Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
C-1. GDU 620 Connector Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
C-2. GDU 620 Dimensions and Center of Gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
C-3. GMU 44 Dimensions and Center of Gravity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
C-4. GMU 44 Mounting Rack P/N 115-00481-00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
C-5. GRS 77 and Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
C-6. GDC 74( ) and Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity (Option I) . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C-7. GDC 74( ) and Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity (Option 2) . . . . . . . . . . C-9
C-8. GDC 74( ) Mounting Orientation Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
C-9. GDC 74( ) Vertical Surface Mounting Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
C-10. GDU 620 Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
C-11. Trim Plate P/N 115-01009-( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C-12. GRS 77 Universal Mount Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
C-13. GMU 44 Universal Mount Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
C-14. Cutout Template P/N 115-01010-00 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
C-15. GTP 59 OAT Probe Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
C-16. GAD 43 Dimensions and Center of Gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
C-17. GAD 43e Dimensions and Center of Gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21
D-1. Installation of GDU 620 with Ideal Six-Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
D-2. Installation of GDU 620 with Non-Ideal Six-Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
D-3. Installation of GDU 620 with Standby Instruments on Stepped Part
of Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
D-4. Installation of GDU 620 Using 2 1/4 Inch Backup Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
D-5. Installation of GDU 620 with Standby Instruments Below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
D-6. Installation of GDU 620 Using Both 2¼-Inch and 3⅛-Inch Backup Instruments . . . . . . . . D-6
D-7. Installation of GDU 620 in Tandem Aircraft – Front Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
D-8. Installation of GDU 620 in Bonanza Model 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
D-9. Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount, Side Mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
D-10. Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount, Side Mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
D-11. Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount,
Suspended - Side Mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
D-12. Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount- Bottom Mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
D-13. Bottom Suspended Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
D-14. Not Used
D-15. Installation of GDC 74( ) to Mounting Plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
D-16. Installation of GDC 74( ) – Horizontal Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
D-17. Installation of GDC 74( ) – Vertical Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14
D-18. Installation of GDC 74( ) – Vertical Orientation using Stringers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14
D-19. Installation of GDC 74( ) – Vertical Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15
D-20. Installation of GDC 74( ) – Vertical Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page xiii
LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure Page
D-21. Fabrication of Mounting Plate Assy for GAD 43/43e Short Orientation Installation
(GAD 43 shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-16
D-22. Short Orientation Installation of GAD 43/43e Using Fabricated Plate Assembly
on Existing Structure (GAD 43 shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17
D-23. Installation of GAD 43/43e – Tall Orientation using Existing Shelves in Aircraft
(GAD 43 shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18
F-1. Power, Lighting and Configuration Module Interconnect (Single GDU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
F-2. Power, Lighting and Configuration Module Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s). . . . . . . . . . . . F-5
F-3. Power/Config Module/OAT – GDC 74( )/GRS 77/GMU 44 Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9
F-4. Attitude and Air Data Interconnect (Single GDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13
F-5. Attitude and Air Data Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-15
F-6. GPS Source Interconnect 400W/500W/480 (Single GDU 620) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-19
F-7. GPS Source Interconnect 400W/500W/480 (Dual GDU 620s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-21
F-8. Navigation Receiver Interconnect (Single GDU 620). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-23
F-9. Navigation Receiver Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-25
F-10. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Honeywell (Bendix/King) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-27
F-11. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – S-TEC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-35
F-12. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Century. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-41
F-13. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Collins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-49
F-14. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Cessna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-53
F-15. Audio Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-59
F-16. GDL 69/69A Interconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-61
F-17. Traffic Advisory System Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-63
F-18. ADF Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-69
F-19. External Switches (GPSS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-71
F-20. Mid-Continent Electric Standby Attitude Indicator Interconnect (Integral Battery) . . . . . . F-73
F-21. Mid-Continent Electric Standby Attitude Indicator Interconnect (External Battery) . . . . . . F-75
F-22. Stormscope Provisions Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-79
F-23. Weather Radar Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-81
F-24. Serial Altitude Output Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-85
F-25. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Sperry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-87
F-26. GAD 43/43e - Power and G600 Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-91
F-27. GAD 43/43e Honeywell (Bendix-King) Autopilot Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-95
F-28. GAD 43/43e – Collins Autopilot Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-109
F-29. GAD 43/43e – Synchro Heading Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-111
F-30. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Bendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-113
F-31. GSR 56 Iridium Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-117
F-32. Radar Altimeter (ARINC 429) Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-119
F-33. External Video Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-121
F-34. GPS Source Interconnect - GTN 6XX/7XX (Single GDU 620). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-123
F-35. GPS Source Interconnect - GTN 6XX/7X (Dual GDU 620s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-125
F-36. HSDB Ethernet Interconnect (Single GDU 620) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-127
F-37. HSDB Ethernet Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-133
F-38. GAD 43/43e – Century Autopilot Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-143
F-39. Miscellaneous Equipment Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-145
F-40. GAD 43e S-TEC Autopilot Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-146

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page xiv Rev. L
LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure Page
F-41. GAD 43e Navigation Receiver (Analog) Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-147
F-42. GAD 43e Radar Altimeter (Analog) Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-149
F-43. GAD 43e DME Interconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-151
F-44. GAD 43e Marker Beacon Receiver Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-155
F-45. GAD 43/43e Cessna Autopilot Interconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-157
G-1. Magnetic Interference Survey Setup with Direct Connection to PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
G-2. Magnetic Interference Survey Setup Using RS-232 to RS-485 Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3
G-3. GLS Tool Install Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4
G-4. Install Progress Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4
G-5. Windows Installer Error Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5
G-6. MATLAB Runtime 7.6 Installation or Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5
G-7. .NET Framework Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6
G-8. Existing MATLAB Modification Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6
G-9. GLS Tool Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6
G-10. GLS Tool Main Window and Data Source Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-9
G-11. GLS Preferences Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-10
G-12. Real Time Magnetic Interference Graph Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-11
G-13. Survey Initiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-12
G-14. Graphical Display of GMU 44 GLS Calibration Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-12
G-15. Real Time Display of Magnetic Interference Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-13
G-16. Data Review DOS Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-14
G-17. Magnetic Tilt Display (Survey Passed). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-15
G-18. Magnetic Field Display (Survey Passed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-16
G-19. Magnetic Field Display (Survey Failed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-17
H-1. Instrument Panel Patches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-2
H-2. Bolster Modification for Standby Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-4
J-1. Lightning Zoning Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-1
J-2. Zoning for Wingtips on Aircraft Not Limited to VFR Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-2
J-3. Zoning for Wingtips on Aircraft Limited to VFR Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-4
J-4. Zoning for Wings Affected by Landing Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-5
J-5. Zoning for a Single Propeller (Low- or High-Wing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-6
J-6. Zoning for a Low- or High-Wing Canard with a Rear-Mounted Propeller . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-7
J-7. Zoning for a Low- or High-Wing Aircraft with a Curved Lower Fuselage . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-8
J-8. Zoning for Front-Mounted Twin Propellers (Low- or High-Wing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-9
J-9. Zoning for Rear-Mounted Twin Propellers (Low- or High-Wing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-10
J-10. Zoning for Front- and Rear-Mounted Propellers (Low- or High-Wing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-11
J-11. Zoning for High-Wing with Front and Rear Propellers Mounted Above Fuselage . . . . . . . .J-12
J-12. Zoning for Low- or High-Wing Canard with Twin Jet Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-13
J-13. Zoning for Single-Propeller Biplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-13
J-14. Zoning for Empennage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-14
J-15. Example Lightning Zoning for Single Engine Aircraft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-15
J-16. Example Lightning Zoning for Twin Engine Aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-16
L-1. GMU 44 Overbraid Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-3
L-2. GMU 44 Overbraid Termination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-4
M-1. Airspeed Configuration Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-1
M-2. Airspeed Tape Arc Range Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-3

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page xv
LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure Page
M-3. OVERSPEEDS Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-5
M-4. Current ASI and Tape Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-7
M-5. Equivalent IAS Tape and Airspeed Configuration Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-7
M-6. Current ASI and Tape Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-8
M-7. Equivalent IAS Tape and AIRSPEED CONFIGURATION Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-8
N-1. WXR Cable Overbraid Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-3
N-2. WXR Overbraid Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-4
N-3. Wire Termination in GDU 620 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-6
N-4. Shield Termination and Overbraid Preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-7
N-5. Shield Termination Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-8
N-6. Overbraid Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-9
N-7. Hose Clamp Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-10
N-8. Final Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-11
P-1. TBM700 RVSM System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-2
P-2. ADC/AM-250 Interconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-4
P-3. G600 RVSM Pitot-Static Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-5
P-4. RVSM Altitude Interconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-5

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page xvi Rev. L
LIST OF TABLES
Table Page
1-1. Pre-Installation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1-2. G600 Equipment Environmental Qualification Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1-3. G600 LRU Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1-4. LRU Current Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1-5. G600 LRU Installation Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1-6. Garmin G600 Reference Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1-7. Other Reference Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1-8. Optional Garmin System Reference Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1-9. Non-Garmin System Reference Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
2-1. Available G600 LRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-2. G600 Options Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-3. G600 Database Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-4. G600 Installation Kit P/N K10-00005-00 Accessories (with GAD 43) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-5. G600 Installation Kit P/N K10-00005-10 Accessories (with GAD 43e) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-6. Additional Installation Items Available from Garmin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-7. G600 Circuit Breaker and Switch Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2-8. Magnetic Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
2-9. Garmin LRU Ethernet Port Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
3-1. Overview of Possible GRS 77 Mounting Options with GRS 77 Universal Mount . . . . . . . 3-17
3-2. Overview of Possible GRS 77 Mounting Options without GRS 77 Universal Mount . . . . . 3-18
3-3. OAT Probe Kit P/N 011-00978-00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
3-4. GTP 59 Doubler Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
3-5. Socket Contact Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118
3-6. Recommended Crimp Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118
3-7. Slidelock Backshell Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120
3-8. Configuration Module Wire Color Reference Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-127
3-9. Configuration Module Kit 011-00979-03 (P741 and P771) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-127
3-10. Configuration Module Kit 011-00979-05 (P6202) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-127
3-11. Configuration Module Kit 011-00979-00 (P741 and P771) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128
3-12. Configuration Module Kit 011-00979-02 (P6202) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128
3-13. Jackscrew Backshell Assembly (GAD 43e only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-130
3-14. GRS 77 Calibration Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-140
3-15. Unit Weight and Balance Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-144
3-16. LRU Current Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-146
5-1. Airframe Specific Configuration Data – IAS TAPE BASIC Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-2. Airframe Specific Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5-3. LRU Software Part Numbers and Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5-4. Cross-Side GDU Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5-5. AHRS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5-6. ADC Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5-7. GPS 1/2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5-8. NAV 1/2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5-9. ADF Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5-10. Traffic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5-11. Data Link Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5-12. Weather Radar Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page xvii
LIST OF TABLES (CONTINUED)
Table Page
5-13. Adapter Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5-14. Iridium Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5-15. Radar Altimeter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5-16. Fast/Slow Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5-17. ARINC 429 Input Format Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5-18. ARINC 429 Output Format Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5-19. ARINC 708 Input Format Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5-20. GDU 620 Autopilot Type Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5-21. GDU 620 Altitude Preselect Type Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5-22. GDU 620 Manual Autopilot ACTIVE Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
5-23. GDU 620 Autopilot Mode Annunciations Type Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
5-24. GDU 620 ARINC 429 Output Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
5-25. GDU 620 Flight Director Type Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5-26. GDU 620 Manual Flight Director ACTIVE Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
5-27. GAD 43 Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5-28. GAD 43e Altitude Preselect TYPE Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5-29. GAD 43e Radar Altimeter TYPE Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5-30. GAD 43e DME Type Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5-31. Heading Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
5-32. Airspeed Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
5-33. Localizer/Glideslope Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
5-34. Flight Director Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110
5-35. Flight Director Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
5-36. Autopilot Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
6-1. GDU 620 Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6-2. GDU 620 Alert Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6-3. Autopilot Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6-4. Mid-Continent Standby ADI Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
B-1. P771 Strapping to Preserve Desired System ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
B-2. P741 Strapping to Achieve Desired System ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
G-1. PC Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
G-2. Example Survey Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-8
K-1. Aircraft Model Specific Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-3
K-2. Lightning Protection Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-22
M-1. Advanced Airframe Specific Configuration Data – Arc Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-2
M-2. Advanced Airframe Specific Configuration Data – Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-4
M-3. Advanced Airframe Specific Configuration Data – Bugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-4
P-1. Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-3
P-2. RVSM Required Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-3
P-3. RVSM Required Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-4
P-4. Air Data Test Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-8
P-5. Altitude Hold Check Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-9

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page xviii Rev. L
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1 Introduction
This manual covers the G600 system, which includes the GDU 620 display, GDC 74( ) air data computer,
GRS 77 AHRS, GMU 44 magnetometer, GTP 59 temperature probe, and optional GAD 43/43e adapter.
This manual describes the physical, mechanical and electrical characteristics, as well as instructions and
other conditions and limitations for installation and approval for all components of the G600 system. It is
intended for use by persons certified by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) to install avionics. It
includes installation and checkout procedures for the G600 to standards described in Title 14 CFR Part 43.
1.2 Scope
This installation manual applies to the modification of an aircraft to support the installation of the G600
system and the required standby instruments. Interfacing to additional equipment is also covered by this
manual; however, the installation of such peripheral equipment (traffic / weather sensors, GPS, NAV,
autopilot systems, etc.) is not covered. Those systems require other installation data and approval.
The data contained within this manual is FAA approved under the G600 AML STC SA02153LA-D, which
is applicable for implementation within Part 23 airplanes that are contained in the STC Approved Model
List. The G600 system installation covered by this STC is not appropriate for Part 25 Transport Category
aircraft, or Part 27/29 Rotorcraft. Installation of the G600 system in an aircraft imposes specific limitations
which may affect the operational capabilities of some aircraft, specifically RVSM compliance. Section 7 of
this manual lists all limitations of the STC, which should be carefully reviewed prior to any installation.
1.2.1 Approved Aircraft with Systems Not Covered by the STC
Aircraft identified on the Approved Model List have been determined to meet a minimum required
configuration for applicability of the STC. However, since some of these aircraft may have been modified
over the years or may have been manufactured with systems which are not identified or approved in this
manual for integration with the G600, it may be difficult to use the data herein to completely substantiate
the installation in compliance with the STC. It is the installer’s responsibility to make the final
determination of applicability for each aircraft. Use Section 2 of this manual to assess each installation
prior to modifying any Type Certified aircraft to ensure the applicability of the G600 AML STC.
It is permissible for installers and other appropriately certificated persons to seek approval for installation
and operational use of the G600 with systems not identified in this manual. It is the responsibility of such
persons to validate any compatibility and document any limitations of such interfaces and to provide that
data to the FAA for approval by means of a TC, STC, or Field Approval prior to returning the aircraft to
service.
1.2.2 Class I/II Aircraft Not Identified on the AML
Aircraft identified via AC 23.1309-1C as Class I or II airplanes which are not identified on the G600 AML
STC may be valid candidates for the G600 AML STC. Installers should contact Garmin Tech Support with
detailed drawings of the aircraft’s proposed installation. Engineering analysis may allow for the inclusion
of these aircraft in a future revision of the FAA Approved Model List.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 1-1
1.2.3 Class III Aircraft Not Identified on the AML
Some aircraft identified via AC 23.1309-1C as Class III airplanes have been delayed inclusion on the AML
based upon additional data required by the Small Aircraft Directorate and Aircraft Evaluation Group. Field
Approvals for this class of aircraft should not be made; instead, installers or other appropriately certificated
agencies should contact Garmin directly to develop the required data needed to support an installation of
this type under the STC.
1.2.4 Other Aircraft Not Covered by the G600 AML STC
Commuter Category Aircraft (Part 23 Class IV), Transport Category Aircraft (Part 25), aircraft with a
gross takeoff weight greater than 12,500 pounds, and Rotorcraft (Part 27/29) are not part of the G600 AML
STC. The data in this installation manual does not address these types of aircraft. Field Approvals for these
aircraft should not be made.
1.2.5 Required Documentation for All Installations
Regardless of applicability of the AML STC or alternative field approval application for installation and
operational approval, the aircraft must be returned to service in a means acceptable to the cognizant
aviation authority. An example would be submission of an FAA Form 337, Major Repair and Alteration
Airframe, Powerplant, Propeller, or Appliance to the appropriate FAA Flight Standards District Office
describing the work accomplished. The FAA Form 337 must detail the equipment and systems to which
the respective G600 System is interfaced and reflect appropriately approved or acceptable data for which
any follow-on FAA Field Approval is being sought.
See AC 43.9-1E for instructions for completing the FAA Form 337. In addition, the G600 Configuration
and Checkout Log must be completed and attached with the Instructions for Continued Airworthiness such
that any aircraft with the modifications detailed in this manual may be properly maintained.
1.3 G600 System Overview
The G600 system is designed to replace the standard “six-pack” instruments, along with any external CDIs
and ADF indicator. In many cases, the optional GAD 43/43e adapter will also allow removal of existing
attitude gyros. Standby instruments (ADI, airspeed indicator and altimeter), which are required for IFR
installations, can usually be installed in the locations vacated by the removed instruments. Standby
instruments are not required for VFR-only installations. An overview of the G600 system is shown in
Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2. Further detail on each of the LRUs is provided in the following sections.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 1-2 Rev. L
DQDORJQDYUHFHLYHUDOWLWXGH
SUHVHOHFWDQDORJUDGDUDOWLPHWHU
'0($')0DUNHU%HDFRQ

(TXLSPHQW,QVWDOOHGSHUWKLV67&
*$'HRQO\
$GDSWHU RSWLRQDO WR$XWRSLORW
*$'H

0DJQHWRPHWHU
*08

$+56 3)'0)''LVSOD\
*56
*'8
$LU'DWD&RPSXWHU
*'&

7HPSHUDWXUH3UREH
*73

$XGLR3DQHO
1R*366%$61DYLJDWRU RSWLRQDO >@
UHTXLUHG
7UDIILF
RSWLRQDO
1R*366%$61DYLJDWRU
RSWLRQDO ;0:;(QWHUWDLQPHQW
*'/$
RSWLRQDO
1R925/RFDOL]HU*6
RSWLRQDO :HDWKHU5DGDU
RSWLRQDO

1R925/RFDOL]HU*6 5DGDU$OWLPHWHU
RSWLRQDO RSWLRQDO

,ULGLXP'DWD/LQN
$XWRSLORW)OLJKW'LUHFWRU RSWLRQDO
RSWLRQDO
9LGHR6RXUFH
$') RSWLRQDO
RSWLRQDO
([LVWLQJ(TXLSPHQW
DOUHDG\LQVWDOOHGLQDLUFUDIW

6WDQGE\ 6WDQGE\ >@$XGLRSDQHOFRQQHFWLRQWR*'8LVUHFRPPHQGHGIRUWRQHVDQGDXUDO

DOHUWVJHQHUDWHGE\WKH*'87KLV0867EHFRQQHFWHGLI7$:6DQG
$LUVSHHG $WWLWXGH RU697LVHQDEOHG
>@6WDQGE\LQVWUXPHQWVDUHQRWUHTXLUHGIRU9)5RQO\RSHUDWLRQ
>@7KHVWDQGE\LQVWUXPHQWVPD\EHUHSODFHGZLWKDFRPSDWLEOHHOHFWULF
VWDQGE\LQVWUXPHQW
6WDQGE\ 0DJQHWLF >@7KHUHTXLUHPHQWIRUVWDQGE\LQVWUXPHQWVFDQEHIXOILOOHGXVLQJHLWKHU
$OWLPHWHU &RPSDVV VHSDUDWHVWDQGE\LQVWUXPHQWVDSSURYHGXQGHUWKLV67& UHIHUWR6HFWLRQV
DQG RU(OHFWURQLF6WDQGE\,QVWUXPHQWV6\VWHP (6,6 VKRZQ
WREHFRPSDWLEOHZLWKWKLV67&7KLV67&GRHVQRWDSSURYHWKH(6,6
6WDQGE\,QVWUXPHQWV LQVWDOODWLRQ5HIHUWR6HFWLRQ(IRUDOLVWRI(6,6WKDWKDYHEHHQ
>@>@>@ GHWHUPLQHGE\*DUPLQWREHFRPSDWLEOH

Figure 1-1. G600 System Overview – Single Installation

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 1-3
DQDORJQDYUHFHLYHUDOWLWXGH
SUHVHOHFWDQDORJUDGDUDOWLPHWHU
'0($')0DUNHU%HDFRQ

(TXLSPHQW,QVWDOOHGSHUWKLV67&
*$'HRQO\
$GDSWHU RSWLRQDO WR$XWRSLORW
*$'H

0DJQHWRPHWHU 0DJQHWRPHWHU
*08 *08

$+56 $+56
*56 3LORW3)'0)''LVSOD\ &RSLORW3)'0)''LVSOD\ *56

*'8 *'8
$LU'DWD&RPSXWHU $LU'DWD&RPSXWHU
*'& *'&

7HPSHUDWXUH3UREH 7HPSHUDWXUH3UREH
*73 *73

1R*366%$61DYLJDWRU 9LGHR6RXUFH
UHTXLUHG RSWLRQDO >@
$XGLR3DQHO
RSWLRQDO >@
1R*366%$61DYLJDWRU
UHTXLUHG ([LVWLQJ(TXLSPHQW
9LGHR6RXUFH
DOUHDG\LQVWDOOHGLQDLUFUDIW
RSWLRQDO 1R925/RFDOL]HU*6
RSWLRQDO >@$XGLRSDQHOFRQQHFWLRQWR*'8
LVUHFRPPHQGHGIRUWRQHVDQG
DXUDODOHUWVJHQHUDWHGE\WKH*'8
7KLV0867EHFRQQHFWHGLI
1R925/RFDOL]HU*6 7$:6DQGRU697LVHQDEOHG
RSWLRQDO >@ >@6WDQGE\LQVWUXPHQWVDUHQRW
UHTXLUHGIRU9)5RQO\RSHUDWLRQ
>@7KHVWDQGE\LQVWUXPHQWVPD\EH
$') UHSODFHGZLWKDFRPSDWLEOHHOHFWULF
RSWLRQDO >@ VWDQGE\LQVWUXPHQW
>@7KHUHTXLUHPHQWIRUVWDQGE\
6WDQGE\ 6WDQGE\ LQVWUXPHQWVFDQEHIXOILOOHGXVLQJ
$LUVSHHG $WWLWXGH
7UDIILF HLWKHUVHSDUDWHVWDQGE\
RSWLRQDO >@ LQVWUXPHQWVDSSURYHGXQGHUWKLV
67& UHIHUWR6HFWLRQVDQG
$XWRSLORW)OLJKW'LUHFWRU RU(OHFWURQLF6WDQGE\
RSWLRQDO >@ ,QVWUXPHQWV6\VWHP (6,6 VKRZQ
WREHFRPSDWLEOHZLWKWKLV67&
6WDQGE\ 0DJQHWLF 7KLV67&GRHVQRWDSSURYHWKH
$OWLPHWHU &RPSDVV ;0:;(QWHUWDLQPHQW (6,6LQVWDOODWLRQ5HIHUWR6HFWLRQ
*'/$ RSWLRQDO (IRUDOLVWRI(6,6WKDWKDYH
EHHQGHWHUPLQHGE\*DUPLQWREH
6WDQGE\,QVWUXPHQWV $5,1&:;52QO\ FRPSDWLEOH
:HDWKHU5DGDU
UHTXLUHGRQSLORWVLGHRQO\ RSWLRQDO >@ >@2SWLRQDO(TXLSPHQW&RQQHFWLRQRI
>@>@>@ RSWLRQDOHTXLSPHQWWRERWK*'8V
LVQRWUHTXLUHG)XQFWLRQV
5DGDU$OWLPHWHU SURYLGHGE\WKHRSWLRQDO
RSWLRQDO HTXLSPHQWZLOORQO\EHDYDLODEOHRQ
WKH*'8WRZKLFKWKHRSWLRQDO
HTXLSPHQWLVFRQQHFWHG
,ULGLXP'DWD/LQN 2QO\LI*'8LVQRWFRQQHFWHG
RSWLRQDO >@

Figure 1-2. G600 System Overview – Dual Installation

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 1-4
1.3.1 G600 LRU Descriptions

NOTE
All references to LRU models are generally shorthand. Please reference the G600
Equipment List, 005-00313-AY for the part numbers of LRUs approved under this STC.
GDU™ 620
The GDU 620 has dual VGA (640 x 480 pixels) 6.5-inch LCD displays.
For the GDU 620, the left side of the GDU 620 is the primary flight
display (PFD) and the right side is the multi-function display (MFD).
For the GDU 620 RH, the right side of the GDU 620 is the primary
flight display (PFD) and the left side is the multi-function display
(MFD). The PFD shows primary flight information. The MFD shows
navigation and flight plan information, traffic, weather and terrain. An
external configuration module is used, so no configuration is required if
the GDU 620 is replaced for any reason.
GRS 77
The GRS 77 is an attitude and heading reference unit, or AHRS, that
provides aircraft attitude and flight characteristics information to the
GDU 620. The unit contains advanced tilt sensors, accelerometers, and
rate sensors. In addition, the GRS 77 interfaces with both the GDC 74( )
air data computer and the GMU 44 magnetometer. The GRS 77 also
utilizes GPS signals sent from the GPS/SBAS navigator. Actual attitude
and heading information is sent using ARINC 429 digital interface to the
GDU 620 and optional GAD 43 adapter.
GMU 44
The GMU 44 magnetometer senses magnetic field information. Data is
sent to the GRS 77 AHRS for processing to determine aircraft magnetic
heading. This unit receives power directly from the GRS 77 and
communicates with the GRS 77 using an RS-485 digital interface.
GDC 74( )
The GDC 74( ) air data computer receives information from the Pitot-
static system and the GTP 59 outside air temperature (OAT) sensor. The
GDC 74( ) is responsible for providing pressure altitude, airspeed,
vertical speed, and OAT information to the G600 system. The GDC 74( )
provides data to the GDU 620 and GRS 77 using ARINC 429 digital
interfaces. The GDC 74( ) also communicates maintenance and
configuration information to the GDU 620 using an RS-232 interface.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 1-5
GAD 43
The GAD 43 adapter is an optional adapter that provides analog attitude
information for use with third-party autopilot systems. It interfaces with
the GDU 620 for configuration, alerting, and integrity monitoring, and
with the GRS 77 for attitude, heading, and yaw input information. The
GAD 43 emulates the output of a spinning-mass gyro, allowing existing
gyros to be removed when the G600 is installed. It also provides a
synchro heading output that can be used to provide synchro heading to
other systems.
GAD 43e
The GAD 43e adapter is an optional adapter that provides all of the
functions of the GAD 43. In addition, it allows the GDU 620 to receive
data from analog VHF navigation and marker beacon receivers, synchro
(ARINC 407) ADF receivers, DME systems, and analog radar
altimeters. It also allows the GDU 620 to provide altitude preselect and
vertical speed control to suitable autopilots.

1.3.2 Required GPS Navigator

At least one of the following GPS/SBAS navigators is required, although the G600 system will support
two independent navigators. For dual G600 installations, two navigators are required (these do not have to
be the same navigators).
GTN 6XX/7XX
The GTN 6XX/7XX unit is a panel-mount GPS/SBAS navigator with a
touchscreen interface and color moving map. Position and flight plan
data are displayed on the GDU 620 MFD via RS-232 and ARINC 429
interfaces. GPS position information is also forwarded to the GRS 77
AHRS in order to ensure normal AHRS operation. HSDB information
can be routed through the GTN 6XX/7XX. The GTN 650/750 also
provides LOC/GS information for display on the GDU 620 HSI via an
ARINC 429 interface.
400W/500W Series
The 400W/500W Series unit is a panel-mount GPS/SBAS navigator
with a color moving map. Position and flight plan data are displayed on
the GDU 620 MFD via RS-232 and ARINC 429 interfaces. GPS
position information is also forwarded to the GRS 77 AHRS in order to
ensure normal AHRS operation. The GNS 430W/530W also provides
LOC/GS information for display on the GDU 620 HSI via an
ARINC 429 interface.
GNS 480
The GNS 480 unit is a panel-mount GPS/SBAS navigator with a built-in
navigation receiver and a color moving map. Position and flight plan
data are displayed on the GDU 620 MFD via RS-232 and ARINC 429
interfaces. GPS position information is also forwarded to the GRS 77
AHRS in order to ensure normal AHRS operation. LOC/GS information
is provided on an ARINC 429 interface and displayed on the GDU 620
HSI.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 1-6 Rev. L
1.3.3 Required Standby Instruments
When the G600 system is installed, an independent attitude indicator, airspeed indicator and altimeter must
be installed. In many cases the existing instruments can be retained for use as standby instruments.

NOTE
If the G600 installation/operation is limited to VFR only, standby instruments are not
required. Refer to Section 2.5.22 for additional details.

1.3.4 Optional Systems

NOTE
Reference Appendix E as the authority for equipment interfaces approved under this STC.

SL30 NAV/COM
The GDU 620 can receive VOR/ILS information from an SL30 transceiver. The lateral and vertical
deviations from the navigation receiver can be displayed on the GDU 620 HSI.
Traffic Sensor
The GDU 620 can receive traffic information from various traffic sensors, including the Garmin GTX
8XX TAS/TCAS I, Garmin GTX 33( )/330( ), L3 Communications Skywatch, Honeywell TAS/IHAS and
Avidyne TAS (Ryan TCAD). Traffic information is received over an ARINC 429 interface, and optional
control is provided using discrete(s). All aural traffic alerts are still generated by the traffic system.
GDL 69/69A
The GDU 620 can receive data link information from the GDL 69/69A, which is an SiriusXM Satellite
Radio data link receiver that receives broadcast weather data. The GDL 69A is the same as the GDL 69
with the addition of SiriusXM Satellite Radio audio entertainment. Weather data and control of audio
channel and volume is displayed on the GDU 620 MFD, via a High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet
connection. The GDL 69A is also interfaced to an audio panel for distribution of the audio signal.
ADF
The GDU 620 can receive DC Sin/Cos bearing information from an ADF receiver. The ADF bearing
information can be displayed on the GDU 620 HSI on a pilot-selectable bearing pointer.
Weather Radar
The GDU 620 can receive weather radar information from the GWX 68/70 weather radar or an ARINC
708 weather radar. For the GWX 68 weather radar, data, control and stabilization is accomplished using
HSDB Ethernet connection. For the GWX 70 weather radar, data and control is accomplished using HSDB
Ethernet connection. For ARINC 708 weather radar, weather radar data is received over an ARINC 453
interface, and control is provided using ARINC 429 and discrete interfaces.

NOTE
Stabilization data must be provided to the GWX 70 over separate analog or ARINC 429
interface.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 1-7
GSR 56
The GDU 620 can provide one or more of the following functions using the GSR 56 Iridium transceiver:
• receive weather information from the GSR 56 Iridium transceiver.
• send position information to the GSR 56 for position reporting
• control the GSR 56 for sending and receiving satellite phone calls.
Radar Altimeter
The GDU 620 can receive and display radar altitude from a radar altimeter. Radar altitude information is
received over an ARINC 429 interface, and optional self-test initiation is provided using a discrete.
Video
The GDU 620 can receive and display color or monochrome composite video from an external video
source. Color video is received using an NTSC or PAL video signal, and monochrome video is received
using an RS-170 video signal.
1.3.5 Interface Summary
Summaries of the individual interface types between the LRUs in the G600 system are shown in 
Figure 1-3 (single Installation) and Figure 1-4 (dual Installation).

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 1-8 Rev. L
(TXLSPHQW,QVWDOOHGSHUWKLV67& $')
6LQ&RV9DOLG

56 $5,1&
RSWLRQDO
0DJQHWRPHWHU 56 $+56
56
*08 *56 'LVFUHWHV
7UDIILF
$5,1&
$5,1&
RSWLRQDO
$5,1&
$'& $QDORJ$XGLR $XGLR3DQHO>@
56
*'& RSWLRQDO

$5,1&
$QDORJ
;0:;(QWHUWDLQ
+6'%
7HPSHUDWXUH3UREH *'/$
RSWLRQDO
*73
1DY5HFHLYHU
$') 6\QFKUR
$GDSWHU RSWLRQDO 56 *'8 56
6/>@
RSWLRQDO RSWLRQDO
*$'H
$QDORJ $')%HDULQJ +6'%
$QDORJ5DGDOW $5,1&

RSWLRQDO *$'HRQO\ 1$9UDGDOW$')

25 :HDWKHU5DGDU
$QDORJGLVFUHWH UDGLRKHLJKW $5,1&
RSWLRQDO
$5,1&
$QDORJ9+) $QDORJ
ODWYHUWGHYLDWLRQV925EHDULQJ
1$9 $QDORJ
RSWLRQDO ODWYHUWGHYLDWLRQV925EHDULQJ $5,1& 5DGDU$OWLPHWHU
RSWLRQDO
0DUNHU%HDFRQ 'LVFUHWH 0DUNHU/LJKWV )OLJKW'LUHFWRU
RSWLRQDO 6HULDO '0(&RQWURO 56
$XWRSLORW
$5,1& $XWRSLORW
'0(
6HULDO '0('LVWDQFH 9DULRXV0RGHOV
+HDGLQJ(UURU
RSWLRQDO $5,1&
RSWLRQDO
9DULRXV$QDORJ &RXUVH(UURU
'LVFUHWH6HULDO IOLJKWGLUHFWRUPRGHDQQXQFLDWLRQ
6LJQDOV

7LPH0DUN

7LPH0DUN
([LVWLQJ(TXLSPHQW

56 0DS0;

$5,1& *36

$5,1& *361DYLJDWRU

$5,1& *36

56 0DS0;
$5,1& 1$9

$5,1& 1$9
$XWRSLORW ,QVWDOOHGRQ$LUFUDIW
>@,IDQ6/LVXVHGWKH$5,1&QDY 9DULRXV0RGHOV
FRQQHFWLRQIURPWKH*366%$61DYLJDWRULV RSWLRQDO
UHSODFHGE\DELGLUHFWLRQDO56FRQQHFWLRQ 127$//,17(5)$&(672
(;,67,1*6<67(066+2:1
>@$XGLRSDQHOFRQQHFWLRQWR*'8LV
UHFRPPHQGHGIRUWRQHVDQGDXUDODOHUWV 1R*366%$61DYLJDWRU 1R*366%$61DYLJDWRU
JHQHUDWHGE\WKH*'87KLV0867EH UHTXLUHG RSWLRQDO
FRQQHFWHGLI7$:6DQGRU697LVHQDEOHG
127(+6'%&RQQHFWLRQVQRWVKRZQ 127(+6'%&RQQHFWLRQVQRWVKRZQ
IRU*71;;;;1DYLJDWRUV IRU*71;;;;1DYLJDWRUV
56RU+6'% &URVVILOO
5HIHUWRIRUPRUHLQIRUPDWLRQ 5HIHUWRIRUPRUHLQIRUPDWLRQ

Figure 1-3. G600 Interfaces – Single GDU 620

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 1-9
RSWLRQDO RSWLRQDO
(TXLSPHQW,QVWDOOHGSHUWKLV67&
$'& $'&
RSWLRQDO $5,1& QDYUDGDOW$')

5;
0DJQHWRPHWHU 0DJQHWRPHWHU
$5,1& DLUGDWD

*08 *08

$5,1& DLUGDWD
56 56 56 56

$5,1& $5,1&
$+56 $+56
56 56
*56 3LORW*'8 +6'%
&RSLORW*'8 *56
$5,1& %LGLUHFWLRQDO $5,1&
$5,1&
5; %DURVHWWLQJ $5,1&
&',VRXUFH
7; 5DGDU$OWLWXGH 7;

$'& 1DY1DYGDWD 9/2& $'&

56 56 7;
7UDIILF
*'&$% *'&$%
$5,1&
$5,1& QDYUDGDOW$')

*'8WR*'8RQO\
$XWRSLORWPRGHV .)&
$QDORJ )OLJKW'LUHFWRU $5,1& $QDORJ
$')EHDULQJ V\QFKUR
$5,1& QDYUDGDOW$')

$5,1&

$5,1&

$5,1&

$5,1& 1$9
'LVFUHWHV

+6'%

56
6LQ&RV9DOLG

7LPH0DUN
6LQ&RV9DOLG

7LPH0DUN
$5,1& *36
$QDORJ )OLJKW'LUHFWRU

$5,1& IDVWVORZ

56 0DS0;
$5,1& *36
56 0DS0;

$5,1& *361DYLJDWRU
$5,1& 1$9
'LVFUHWHV
56

7LPH0DUN

+HDGLQJ(UURU

56
&RXUVH(UURU
$5,1& *361DYLJDWRU

56

$5,1&

$5,1&
$5,1& IOLJKWGLUHFWRUPRGHDQQXQFLDWLRQV

7LPH0DUN

+6'%RU$5,1&

$QDORJ$XGLR
$5,1& $XWRSLORW
$5,1& *36

56 0DS0;
'LVFUHWH VHOIWHVWLQLWLDWH

$QDORJ )OLJKW'LUHFWRU
56 0DS0;

$5,1& *36
2$73UREH 2$73UREH

$5,1& 1$9

$5,1& 1$9
*73 *73

$GDSWHU RSWLRQDO $') 6LQ&RV

*$'H RSWLRQDO
*$'HRQO\ ([LVWLQJ(TXLSPHQW
5DGDU$OWLPHWHU
RSWLRQDO ,QVWDOOHGRQWKH$LUFUDIW
9DULRXV$QDORJ
$QDORJ ODWYHUWGHYLDWLRQV925EHDULQJ

$QDORJ ODWYHUWGHYLDWLRQV925EHDULQJ
$QDORJ $')EHDULQJ

$QDORJ'LVFUHWH UDGLRKHLJKW

'LVFUHWH 0DUNHU/LJKWV

6HULDO '0(&RQWURO

6HULDO '0('LVWDQFH

'LVFUHWH6HULDO
6LJQDOV
7UDIILF
RSWLRQDO
$XWRSLORW
9DULRXV0RGHOV $XGLR3DQHO>@
RSWLRQDO RSWLRQDO
>@,IDQ6/LVXVHGWKH$5,1&QDY
;0:;(QWHUWDLQ FRQQHFWLRQIURPWKH*366%$61DYLJDWRU
'0( *'/$ LVUHSODFHGE\DELGLUHFWLRQDO56
RSWLRQDO FRQQHFWLRQ
RSWLRQDO
+6'%
>@$XGLRSDQHOFRQQHFWLRQWR*'8LV
$5,1& UHFRPPHQGHGIRUWRQHVDQGDXUDODOHUWV
0DUNHU 25 $5,1&
:HDWKHU5DGDU JHQHUDWHGE\WKH*'87KLV0867
%HDFRQ $5,1&
RSWLRQDO $5,1& EHFRQQHFWHGLI7$:6DQGRU697LV
RSWLRQDO HQDEOHG
1DY5HFHLYHU >@GDVKHGOLQHVKRZVGDWDWKDW
$QDORJ PD\EHFURVVILOOHGEHWZHHQ*'8VUDWKHU
6/>@ WKDQKDYLQJDGLUHFWFRQQHFWLRQWRWKH
5DGDOW RSWLRQDO *'8
RSWLRQDO

$QDORJ9+) $XWRSLORW
1DY 9DULRXV0RGHOV
RSWLRQDO RSWLRQDO
$')
6\QFKUR 6WDOO3URWHFWLRQ
RSWLRQDO :DUQLQJ8QLW
RSWLRQDO
1R*366%$61DYLJDWRU
UHTXLUHG
RSWLRQDO

127(+6'%&RQQHFWLRQVQRW
VKRZQIRU*71;;;;1DYLJDWRUV
5HIHUWRIRUPRUHLQIRUPDWLRQ

56RU+6'%
&URVVILOO 127$//,17(5)$&(672
(;,67,1*6<67(066+2:1

1R*366%$61DYLJDWRU
RSWLRQDO
UHTXLUHG

127(+6'%&RQQHFWLRQVQRW
VKRZQIRU*71;;;;1DYLJDWRUV
5HIHUWRIRUPRUHLQIRUPDWLRQ

Figure 1-4. G600 Interfaces – Dual GDU 620s

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 1-10
1.4 G600 Installation
1.4.1 Installation Overview
The G600 system is designed to replace the standard “six pack” instruments, along with any external CDIs,
ADF indicator, and the clock. Standby instruments (airspeed indicator, altimeter and usually ADI) are
required, and these usually go in the locations vacated by the removed instruments. A typical installation is
shown in Figure 1-5.

$,563(('
925,1',&$725
&/2&. .1276

9$&

'&
(/(&

(

9(57,&$/

1
63(('
)8(/47<

83

925,1',&$725

7851&225',1$725 '1
)((7

3(50,1

6
/ 5
:

0,1

(/(&&855(17

7$&+20(7(5 $')

TYPICAL INSTRUMENT PANEL BEFORE MODIFICATION

&/2&.

9$&

)8(/47<

&855(17

7$&+20(7(5

&/2&.0$<%(5(029('720$.(63$&()25$127+(5,167580(17

TYPICAL INSTRUMENT PANEL AFTER G600 INSTALLATION

Figure 1-5. Typical Instrument Panel Modification

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 1-11
1.4.2 Installation Configurations
The G600 system can be installed in a single or dual configuration.
In a single G600 installation, the attitude, air data, autopilot, and external sensors are connected directly to
the GDU 620. Refer to Figure 1-1.
In a dual G600 installation, two independent attitude systems and two air data computers are required. The
primary and secondary GDU 620s share information over a cross-fill bus. The primary GDU 620 is
connected to the autopilot, although either GDU 620 can control the course and heading inputs into the
autopilot. External systems are interfaced to each GDU 620 as required. Refer to Figure 1-2. For dual
G600 installations, standby instruments are only required to be installed on the pilot’s side.
1.4.3 Pre-Installation Checklist
Before beginning a G600 installation, it is important to ensure the aircraft meets the pre-qualifications for
the installation of the G600 system under this STC. The following checklist is provided to help the installer
determine the necessary requirements that must be met before beginning installation of the G600 system in
a specific aircraft. Ensure each of the items outlined in Table 1-1 are completed as necessary before
beginning the modification.

Table 1-1. Pre-Installation Checklist

Complete? Item Reference

 Aircraft is on the Approved Model List (AML) STC SA02153LA-D
Planned equipment interfaces are approved under the STC or
 Appendix E [1]
have other FAA Approval
 Verify the effect of Limitations on proposed installation. Section 7
Installation considerations reviewed to determine if there is any
 Section 2.5
impact on installation.
Suitable location for GMU 44 Magnetometer has been identified
 Section 2.5.11.5
and surveyed.
 Suitable location for GDU 620 Display has been identified. Section 2.5.11.1

 Suitable location for GRS 77 AHRS has been identified. Section 2.5.11.4

 Suitable location for GDC 74( ) has been identified. Section 2.5.11.6

 Suitable location for GTP 59 OAT probe has been identified. Section 2.5.11.7

 Aircraft Electrical System is sufficient for G600 installation. Section 3.7

If GAD43/43e is interfaced to the autopilot, the autopilot
 performance has been baselined prior to beginning G600 Section 5.10.2.5
installation.

[1] Having interfaces not listed on the AML STC does not preclude the use of AML STC
SA020153LA-D as a basis for approval of the installation; however, those interfaces not
listed on AML STC SA020153LA-D will require other FAA airworthiness approval.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 1-12 Rev. L
1.5 Technical Specifications
1.5.1 Environmental Qualification Forms
The latest revision of the Environmental Qualification Forms for each G600 LRU is available directly from
Garmin under the part numbers listed in Table 1-2.

Table 1-2. G600 Equipment Environmental Qualification Forms

Document Garmin Part Number

GDU 620 Environmental Qualification Form 005-00313-20
GRS 77 Environmental Qualification Form 005-00165-31
GMU 44 Environmental Qualification Form 005-00164-31
GDC 74A Environmental Qualification Form 005-00191-77
GDC 74B Environmental Qualification Form 005-00253-77
GTP 59 Environmental Qualification Form 005-00191-97
GAD 43 Environmental Qualification Form 005-00496-07
GAD 43e Environmental Qualification Form 005-00578-01

To obtain a copy of these forms, see the Dealer Resource Center at fly.garmin.com.
1.5.2 Physical Characteristics
All width, height, and depth measurements are taken with unit rack (if applicable) and connectors.

Table 1-3. G600 LRU Physical Specifications

Unit Weight w/Rack

LRU Width Height Depth Unit Weight
and Connector Weight
10.0 inches 6.70 inches 5.50 inches 6.38 lbs 7.04 lbs
GDU 620
(25.4 cm) (17.0 cm) (14.0 cm) (2.90 kg) (3.20 kg)
3.62 inches 3.32 inches 9.84 inches 2.80 lbs 3.46 lbs
GRS 77
(9.19 cm) (8.43 cm) (24.99 cm) (1.27 kg) (1.57 kg)
2.10 inches 0.35 lbs 0.50 lbs
GMU 44 N/A [1] N/A [1]
(5.33 cm) (0.16 kg) (0.23 kg)
3.10 inches 3.23 inches 9.64 inches 1.58 lbs 2.30 lbs
GDC 74( )
(7.87 cm) (8.20 cm) (24.49 cm) (0.72 kg) (1.04 kg)
2.11 inches 5.31 inches 10.5 inches 1.90 lbs 2.00 lbs
GAD 43
(5.36 cm) (13.49 cm) (26.67 cm) (0.86 kg) (0.91 kg)
2.11 inches 5.31 inches 10.5 inches 2.26 lbs 2.84 lbs
GAD 43e
(5.36 cm) (13.49 cm) (26.67 cm) (1.03 kg) (1.29 kg)

[1] Diameter of GMU 44 is 3.35 inches (8.51 cm), including flange.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 1-13
1.5.3 Power Requirements
All LRUs are capable of operating at either 14 or 28 VDC. See the individual LRU specific Environmental
Qualification Form for details on surge ratings and minimum/maximum operating voltages. See Table 1-4
for current draw specifications.

Table 1-4. LRU Current Specifications

14 Volt Current Draw 28 Volt Current Draw

LRU
Typical Maximum Typical Maximum
GDU 620 3.9 A 5.4 A 1.9 A 2.7 A
GRS 77/GMU 44 600 mA 1.0 A [1] 300 mA 1.0 A [1]
GDC 74( ) 410 mA 480 mA 200 mA 235 mA
GAD 43 410 mA 720 mA 210 mA 350 mA
GAD 43e 790 mA 1.22 A 390 mA 590 mA

[1] Maximum current draw occurs momentarily at startup or when the supply voltage drops to
9 VDC.

1.6 Certification
For a complete list of TSOs to which each LRU complies, refer to the appropriate installation manual listed
in Table 1-5.

Table 1-5. G600 LRU Installation Manuals

LRU Document Garmin Part Number

GDU 620 GDU 620 TSO Installation Manual 190-00601-04
GRS 77 GRS 77/GMU44 Installation Manual 190-00303-10
GMU44 GRS 77/GMU44 Installation Manual 190-00303-10
GDC 74( ) GDC 74( ) Air Data Computer Installation Manual 190-00303-15
GAD 43 GAD 43/43e Installation Manual 190-00899-00
GAD 43e GAD 43/43e Installation Manual 190-00899-00

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 1-14 Rev. L
1.7 G600 System Documentation
Table 1-6. Garmin G600 Reference Documentation

Document Garmin Part Number

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06
GDU 620 Installation Manual 190-00601-04
GDL 69Series XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions 190-00355-04
GAD 43/43e Installation Manual 190-00899-00

Table 1-7. Other Reference Documentation

Document Part Number

Mid-Continent 4300-4XX Series Electric Attitude Indicator Installation Manual 9015762
Mid-Continent 4200 Series Electric Attitude Indicator Installation Manual 9016182
Mid-Continent MD420 Emergency Power System Installation Manual 9016391

Table 1-8. Optional Garmin System Reference Documentation

Document Garmin Part Number

400W Series Installation Manual 190-00356-02
500W Series Installation Manual 190-00357-02
GNS 480 (CNX80) Color GPS/NAV/COM Installation Manual 560-0982-01
GTX 330 Transponder Installation Manual 190-00207-02
GTX 33 Transponder Installation Manual 190-00303-61
GTX 33 (with ES) Transponder Installation Manual 190-00906-00
GSR 56 Installation Manual 190-00836-00
GDL 69/69A Installation Manual 190-00355-02
GTS 8XX/GPA 65 Installation Manual 190-00587-00
GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3
G600 MU-2B Checklist Changes (Mitsubishi MU-2B models only) 190-00601-20

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 1-15
Table 1-9. Non-Garmin System Reference Documentation

Document Document Number

FAA Advisory Circular, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices
FAA AC 43.13-1B
– Aircraft Inspection and Repair
FAA Advisory Circular, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices
FAA AC 43.13-2B
– Aircraft Alterations
Aerospace Systems Electrical Bonding and Grounding for Electromagnetic
SAE ARP1870
Compatibility and Safety
Standard Guide for Aircraft Electrical Load and Power Source Capacity Analysis ASTM F2490-05

1.8 Databases
The GDU 620 utilizes various databases. Databases are stored either in internal memory or on an SD
memory card. The following sections describe each database and how each is updated.

CAUTION
The databases on the Supplemental Data Card are locked to specific GDU 620
installations. The first time the Supplemental Data Card is inserted into a display it
becomes “locked” to that particular aircraft installation and will not work in other
installations.

1.8.1 Basemap Database

The basemap provides ground based references such as roads and bodies of water. The database is stored in
internal memory of the GDU 620 display or on the SD card. The basemap does not have a scheduled
update cycle and as such does not have an expiration date.
The basemap database is updated very infrequently. Basemap updates, when issued, are available from
fly.garmin.com.
1.8.2 Navigation Database
The Jeppesen Aviation Database provides the G600 system with a database of airports, NAVAIDs, and
waypoint information.
The GDU 620 utilizes a database stored on an SD memory data card for easy updating and replacement.
The Aviation database may be updated by simply inserting an updated Aviation database update card into
the top SD card slot in the front panel in the GDU 620. The actual database is downloaded into the unit, so
the card can be removed after the update. Each card will only update one system. Alternately, the Aviation
database may be updated by copying the database to the Garmin-supplied Supplemental Data card. It will
be downloaded into the GDU 620 on first use, and the file can be left on the Supplemental Data card until
the next update cycle.
The Aviation database on the GDU 620 database card is generated from current Jeppesen data and
converted to a format that is used by the GDU 620. The data conversion process is performed using
software that is developed and maintained under Garmin configuration management according to
RTCA/DO-200A Level 1 and 2, Standards for Processing Aeronautical Data.
GDU 620 users update their database card by purchasing database subscription updates from Garmin. The
database card is programmed using the supplied SD card reader. Contact Garmin at 866-739-5687 or
fly.garmin.com for more information and instructions.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 1-16 Rev. L
1.8.3 FliteCharts® Database
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of FAA-published terminal procedures charts. The charts are
displayed with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts. When viewing these charts on the MFD,
the aircraft position is not depicted on the chart. The FliteCharts database is stored on an SD memory card
that remains in the GDU 620 for normal operation.
The FliteCharts database is updated by removing the database card from the GDU 620, updating the
database on the card and reinserting the card. Each card can only be used with one system. GDU 620 users
update their database card by purchasing database subscription updates from Garmin. The database card is
programmed using the supplied SD card reader. Contact Garmin at 866-739-5687 or fly.garmin.com for
more information and instructions.
1.8.4 ChartView™ Database
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed in
full color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the
plan view of approach charts and on airport diagrams. The ChartView database is stored on an SD memory
card that remains in the GDU 620 for normal operation.
The ChartView database is updated by removing the database card from the GDU 620, updating the
database on the card and reinserting the card. Each card can only be used with one system. GDU 620 users
update their ChartView data by purchasing database subscription updates from Jeppesen Sanderson. The
database card is programmed using the supplied SD card reader and Jeppesen-provided software. Contact
Jeppesen at 800-621-5377 or www.jeppesen.com for more information and instructions. ChartView is an
optional feature that must be activated. Instructions for activating the ChartView function are found in
Section 5.5.5.1.
1.8.5 SafeTaxi® Database
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports in
the United States. The SafeTaxi database is stored on an SD memory card that remains in the GDU 620 for
normal operation. The data conversion process is performed using software that is developed and
maintained under Garmin configuration management according to RTCA/DO-200A, Level 2, Standards
for Processing Aeronautical Data.
The SafeTaxi database is updated by removing the database card from the GDU 620, updating the database
on the card and reinserting the card. Each card can only be used with one system. GDU 620 users update
their database card by purchasing database subscription updates from Garmin. The database card is
programmed using the supplied SD card reader. Contact Garmin at 866-739-5687 or fly.garmin.com for
more information and instructions.
1.8.6 Terrain and Airport Terrain Databases
The Terrain database is used to provide basic Terrain awareness functionality. The data conversion process
is performed using software that is developed and maintained under Garmin configuration management
according to RTCA/DO-200A, Level 2, Standards for Processing Aeronautical Data. There are two
variants of the Terrain database – one lower-resolution Terrain database for terrain/TAWS alerting, and one
higher-resolution Terrain database for SVT (this higher-resolution database can also be used for
terrain/TAWS alerting, so only one Terrain database is required for any given installation). The Airport
Terrain database provides higher resolution terrain information near most airports. The Airport Terrain
database is optional if the higher resolution Terrain database is installed. All databases are available for
updating as needed and are available from Garmin. The terrain databases are updated by removing the
database card from the GDU 620, updating the databases on the card and reinserting the card in the lower
card slot on the GDU 620 front panel. The Terrain databases can be downloaded via the internet and the
card programmed using the supplied SD card reader. Contact Garmin at 866-739-5687 or fly.garmin.com
for more information or instructions.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 1-17
1.8.7 Obstacles Database
The obstacle database provides identification of known obstacles greater than 200 feet AGL. The data
conversion process is performed using software that is developed and maintained under Garmin
configuration management according to RTCA/DO-200A, Level 2, Standards for Processing Aeronautical
Data. This database is also used with Terrain awareness functionality. The Obstacle database is updated by
removing the database card from the GDU 620, updating the database on the card and reinserting the card.
The Obstacle database can be downloaded via the internet and the card programmed using the supplied SD
card reader. Contact Garmin at 866-739-5687or fly.garmin.com for more information or instructions.
1.8.8 IGRF Model
The IGRF (International Geomagnetic Reference Field) model is contained in the GRS 77 and is only
updated once every five years. The IGRF model is provided with the Aviation Database. At system power-
up, the IGRF models in the GRS 77 and in the Aviation Database are compared, and if the IGRF model in
the GRS 77 is out of date, the user is prompted to update the IGRF model in the GRS 77. The prompt will
appear after the G600 splash screen is acknowledged on the MFD.
1.8.9 Airport Directory Database
The airport directory database provides airfield information and contact information for local aviation
services, food, lodging, transportation, and attractions. The database content is provided from selected 3rd
parties such as AOPA. There may be multiple options and coverages for the Airport Directory database,
but only one Airport Directory database may be installed at one time. The Airport Directory database is
updated by removing the database card from the GDU 620, updating the database on the card, and
reinserting the card. The Airport Directory database can be downloaded via the internet and the card
programmed using the supplied SD card reader. Contact Garmin at 866-739-5687 or fly.garmin.com for
more information or instructions.
1.9 Terminology
Throughout this document references will be made to ‘metal’ and ‘non-metallic’ aircraft. For the purposes
of this installation manual, metal aircraft will be those with an aluminum skin. Non-metallic aircraft will
refer to all other aircraft (e.g. aircraft with fiberglass or composite skin, or aircraft with tube and fabric
construction).
Throughout this document references will be made to ‘within the instrument panel area.’ For the purposes
of this installation manual, this will be the area forward of the instrument panel and aft of the firewall or
forward pressure bulkhead. For aircraft without a metallic firewall or metallic pressure bulkhead located
forward of the instrument panel, special consideration may be required for certification aspects of HIRF
and lightning, refer to Section 2.5.21.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 1-18 Rev. L
2 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW
2.1 Introduction
The following section contains an overview of the steps required for the installation of the Garmin G600
system. This section includes requirements for selection of proper locations in the aircraft, as well as
requirements for supporting structure, mechanical alignment and electrical wiring. Any restrictions on
nearby equipment and requirements are also specified herein.
The post-installation calibration procedures required prior to flight are described in Section 5.
2.2 Pre-Installation Information
Always follow acceptable avionics installation practices in FAA Advisory Circulars (AC) 43.13-1B,
43.13-2B, or later FAA approved revisions of these documents.
Follow the installation procedure in this manual as it is presented for a successful installation. Read the
entire manual before beginning the procedure. Prior to installation, consider the structural integrity of the
G600 system installation as defined in AC 43.13-2B, Chapter 1 and Section 3.3 herein. Perform the post
installation checkout before closing the work area in case problems occur.
Complete an electrical load analysis in accordance with AC 43.13-1B, Chapter 11 on the aircraft prior to
starting modification to ensure aircraft has the ability to carry the additional load of the G600 equipment.
Refer to Section 3.7.3 for the power consumption information.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-1
2.3 Available Equipment
The G600 system is supplied as an LRU kit and a G600 installation kit. Refer to Table 2-1 for a list of
available G600 LRUs and Section 1.3.1 for individual unit descriptions. Once it has been determined
which LRUs are required for a particular installation, refer to the Aviation Price Catalog on the Garmin
Dealer Resource Center to determine which available kits are suitable for the installation.

Table 2-1. Available G600 LRUs

Model Unit P/N Catalog P/N

GDU 620, BLACK [1] 011-01264-00 010-00482-50
GDU 620, GRAY [1] 011-01264-10 010-00482-50
GDU 620, RH PFD, BLACK [1] 011-01264-20 010-00482-20
GDU 620, RH PFD, GREY [1] 011-01264-30 010-00482-20
GRS 77 011-00868-10 010-00295-10
GMU 44 011-00870-00 010-00296-00
GDC 74A 011-00882-10 010-00336-10
GDC 74B [2] 011-01110-01 010-00390-01
GTP 59 011-00978-00 011-00978-00
Database Card 010-00769-43 010-00769-43
GAD 43 011-01970-00 [3] 010-00724-00 [3]
GAD 43, Upgraded 011-01970-01 [4] 011-00724-03 [4]
GAD 43e 011-02349-00 011-00852-00
[1] GDU 620 P/N 011-01264-5X/-6X is part of the G500 system and cannot be used as a part
of the G600 system.
[2] The GDC 74B air data computer is required for the G600 system to be eligible for RVSM.
Additional RVSM parts and certification are required. Contact Garmin for additional
information on RVSM eligibility.
[3] GAD 43 P/N 011-01970-00 cannot be used to provide analog attitude information to
Century autopilots.
[4] GAD 43 P/N 011-01970-01 must be used with Century Autopilots and is backward
compatible with P/N 011-01970-00.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-2 Rev. L
Table 2-2. G600 Options Available

Item Part Number

GDU 6xx ChartView Enablement Card – Heavy Aircraft [1] 010-00769-50
GDU 6xx ChartView Enablement Card – Light Aircraft [1] 010-00769-53
GDU 6xx Altitude Preselect Enablement Card [1] [2] 010-00769-52
GDU 6xx TAWS Enablement Card – Single GDU Installations 010-00769-51
GDU 6xx TAWS Enablement Card – Dual GDU Installations [3] 010-00769-56
GDU 6xx Video Enablement Card [1] 010-00769-61
GDU 6xx ARINC 708 WXR Enablement Card [1] 010-00769-63
GDU 6xx RadAlt (A429) Enablement Card [1] 010-00769-64
GDU 6xx RadAlt (A429) Enablement Card – Dual GDU Installations [3] 010-00769-65
GDU 6xx DFCS 4 (A429) Enablement Card – Dual GDU Installations [3] 010-00769-62
GDU 6xx Fast/Slow A429 Enablement Card - Single GDU Installations [4] 010-00769-67
GDU 6xx Fast/Slow A429 Enablement Card - Dual GDU Installations [3] [4] 010-00769-68
G600, RVSM Enable, Socata TBM700/850 (Single) 010-00769-8D
[1] Each enablement card can only be used once and, once used, the card will only work with
that particular aircraft installation. For dual G600 installations, a separate enablement card
is required to enable the feature on each GDU 620.
[2] The Altitude Preselect option is only available for certain autopilots. Refer to Section E.3.
In addition, the GAD 43e provides altitude preselect functionality (refer to Section E.20).
This enablement card is not required to enable altitude preselect functionality using the
GAD 43e.
[3] A single enablement card will enable the feature on both GDU 620s in a dual G600
installation. Once used, this card will only work with that particular aircraft installation.
[4] Prior to beginning any installation that requires a fast/slow display, contact Garmin
regarding the availability of the ARINC 429 Fast/Slow feature enablement card.

2.3A G600 Database Options

Table 2-3. G600 Database Cards

Item Garmin P/N

Data Card, Terrain/Obstacle/Airports, SafeTaxi, FliteCharts 010-00769-42 [1]
Data Card, Terrain/Obstacle/Airports, SafeTaxi, FliteCharts 010-00769-43 [2]

[1] Data card P/N 010-00769-42 must be used with GDU 620 software version 2.xx.
[2] Data card P/N 010-00769-43 must be used with GDU 620 software version 3.00 or later.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-3
2.4 Installation Materials
2.4.1 Accessories Available from Garmin
Two G600 installation kits are available, for use with G600 installations utilizing the GAD 43 and the
GAD 43e, respectively. Table 2-4 and Table 2-5 list the items provided in each G600 installation kit

Table 2-4. G600 Installation Kit P/N K10-00005-00 Accessories (with GAD 43)

Used With Item Part Number

011-01656-00 [3]
Connector Kit, GDU 620 [1] OR
GDU 620 011-01656-01 [4]
Mounting Screw Kit, GDU 620 [2] 011-02078-00
011-00869-01 [3]
Connector Kit, SB, GRS 77 [1] OR
011-00869-03 [4]
GRS 77
GRS 77 Universal Mount Kit 011-01780-00
Installation Rack, GRS 77 115-00459-00
Connector Kit, GMU 44 011-00871-00
GMU 44 GMU44 Universal Mount Kit 011-01779-01
Installation Rack, GMU 44 115-00481-00
011-01010-01 [3]
Connector Kit, SB, GDC 74( ) [1] OR
GDC 74( ) 011-01010-05 [4]
Mounting Rack, GDC 74( ) 011-01011-00
GAD 43 Connector Kit, GAD 43 011-01990-00 [5]

[1] Connector kit includes the unit configuration module.

[2] Mounting screw kit contains screws P/N 211-64307-14 (quantity 6).
[3] Connector kit comes with unpotted configuration module.
[4] Connector kit comes with potted configuration module.
[5] Connector kit suitable for use with GAD 43 P/N 011-01970-XX. Connector kit includes the
unit configuration module.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-4 Rev. L
Table 2-5. G600 Installation Kit P/N K10-00005-10 Accessories (with GAD 43e)

Used With Item Part Number

011-01656-00 [3]
Connector Kit, GDU 620 [1] OR
GDU 620 011-01656-01 [4]
Mounting Screw Kit, GDU 620 [2] 011-02078-00
011-00869-01 [3]
Connector Kit, SB, GRS 77 [1] OR
011-00869-03 [4]
GRS 77
GRS 77 Universal Mount Kit 011-01780-00
Installation Rack, GRS 77 115-00459-00
Connector Kit, GMU 44 011-00871-00
GMU 44 GMU44 Universal Mount Kit 011-01779-01
Installation Rack, GMU 44 115-00481-00
011-01010-01 [3]
Connector Kit, SB, GDC 74( ) [1] OR
GDC 74( ) 011-01010-05 [4]
Mounting Rack, GDC 74( ) 011-01011-00
GAD 43e Connector Kit, GAD 43e 011-02350-00 [5]
[1] Connector kit includes the unit configuration module.
[2] Mounting screw kit contains screws P/N 211-64307-14 (quantity 6).
[3] Connector kit comes with unpotted configuration module.
[4] Connector kit comes with potted configuration module.
[5] Connector kit suitable for use with GAD 43e P/N 011-02349-XX.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-5
The following items are available from Garmin.

Table 2-6. Additional Installation Items Available from Garmin

Item Garmin P/N

GDU 620 Cutout Template [1] 115-01010-00
G600 Downloadable Software SD Card [2] [4] 010-00768-00
GDU 6xx Installer Unlock Card [3] 010-00769-60
G600 Software Loader Card [4] 010-00771-( )
Trim Plate, Thin (0.032”) [5] 115-01009-00
Trim Plate, Thick (0.063”) [5] 115-01009-10

[1] Cutout Template is clamped to instrument panel and used to mark the cutout required by
the GDU 620. It is also used as a drill template to drill the holes for the six GDU 620
mounting screws. This template can be used to make multiple cutouts.
[2] The G600 Downloadable Software SD Card is a blank SD card that can be used to make
a G600 Software Loader card when the G600 software is downloaded from the Garmin
Dealer website. Refer to Section 2.4.3 for additional details.
[3] The Installer Unlock Card is required to access all pages in Configuration Mode when
configuring the system for a particular installation.
[4] The G600 Software Loader Card contains software for all G600 LRUs (an equivalent card
can be made using the G600 Downloadable Software SD Card and downloading the
software from the Garmin Dealer website). Contact Garmin to obtain the latest G600
Software Loader Card.
[5] The trim plates are only required for the GDU 620 if the existing instrument panel is being
modified as part of a G600 installation. Refer to Section 3.2.1.4 to determine if a thin or
thick trim plate is needed. If a new instrument panel is being manufactured, the trim plates
are not required.

2.4.2 Materials Required but Not Supplied

The G600 equipment is intended for use with standard aviation accessories. The following items are
required for each installation:
• Wire (MIL-W-22759/16 or equivalent)

NOTE
If MIL-W-22759/18 wire is utilized because the smaller insulation diameter works better
with the high-density connectors used in the G600 system, care must be taken to
adequately support and protect the wiring due to its thinner insulation.

• Shielded Wire (MIL-C-27500 cable utilizing M22759/16 wire (TE) or M22759/18 wire (TG) and
ETFE jacket (14), or equivalent)
• Aircraft Grade Category 5 Ethernet Cable (only required for installations utilizing HSDB
interfaces, such as the GDL 69/69A, GWX 68/70, or dual G600 installations)
• Push-Pull Manually Resettable Circuit Breakers
• Miscellaneous aircraft grade fasteners (Standard installation hardware, including AN525 screws,
MS20426AD rivets, MS21059 rivet nut plates, MS21071 reduced rivet spacing nut plates).

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-6 Rev. L
NAS1832, NAS1834, or NAS1836 potted inserts maybe required if honeycomb core panels are
used to support the installation of G600 system components.
• Pitot/Static fittings and lines and 1/8-27ANPT male fittings for Pitot and Static connection with
GDC 74( ).
• 2024-T3 aluminum alloy sheet per AMS-QQ-A-250/4 or Clad 2024-T3 aluminum alloy sheet per
AMS-QQ-A-250/5. Minimum sheet thickness requirements are as follows:
◦ 0.063 inch for new instrument panel, but not less than original panel thickness
◦ 0.063 inch for GRS 77 AHRS supporting structure. Alternatively, honeycomb core
sandwich panel with 0.020 inch thick Clad 2024-T3 aluminum face sheets per QQ-A-250/ 5
can be used.
◦ 0.032 inch for GMU44 magnetometer supporting structure (if universal mount is not used)
and GTP 59 OAT probe doubler
◦ 0.040 inch for GAD 43/43e and GDC 74( ) supporting structures.
• Tiedown straps or lacing cord
• Ring Terminals (for grounding)
• Shield Terminators
• Silicone Fusion Tape
2.4.2.1 Materials Required for HIRF and Lightning Protection
If additional lightning protection is required for a particular aircraft, the following items may also be
required for the installation. Refer to Appendix K for detailed information regarding which parts are
required for a particular aircraft model.
Applicable to all non-metallic aircraft
• Transient Voltage Suppressor 30KPA48A
OR
Transient Voltage Suppressor 15KPA48A
◦ Referred to as TVS1 in Appendix F and Table K-2.
• Fuse, 3AG Fast-Acting, 4A Littelfuse P/N 0312-004 (or equivalent)
◦ Referred to as F1 in Appendix F and Table K-2.
• Fuse Holder, Inline, Cooper Bussmann P/N HFB (or equivalent)
◦ Referred to as F1 and F2 in Appendix F and Table K-2.
• Heavy Duty Aluminum Foil Tape, 3M P/N 438 or other adhesive backed dead soft aluminum foil
minimum 0.012 inch thick
• Tinned Copper Tubular Braid, 7/16”, P/N QQB575R30T437 (or equivalent)
OR
Tinned Copper Flat Braid, 3/4”, P/N QQB575F36T781 (or equivalent)
◦ Can be used to fabricate bonding straps or as overbraid for wingtip GMU 44 installations.
• Resistor, 30, 1/2W, 5%, Vishay Dale P/N RS1/230R00JB12 (or equivalent)
◦ Referred to as R1 in Appendix F and Table K-2.
Required only for non-metallic aircraft using an electric Standby ADI
• Four same part numbered TVSs (identified as TVS1 above) are combined in accordance with
Section 3.4.4 to make an assembly referred to TVS2 in Appendix F and Table K-2.
• Fuse, 3AG Fast-Acting, 10A Littelfuse P/N 0312-010 (or equivalent)
◦ Referred to as F2 in Appendix F and Table K-2.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-7
• Connector, 4-Pin Plug (socket housing) and Cap (pin housing), 
Tyco Electronics P/Ns 1-480424-0 and 1-480426-0 respectively
◦ Referred to as 4 Pin Connector in Section 3.4.4 and Appendix F.
• Sockets, Qty. 4, Tyco Electronics P/N 60617-1 or 60619-1
• Pins, Qty. 4, Tyco Electronics, P/N 60618-1 or 60620-1
Applicable to Pilatus PC-12 Aircraft
The following parts are required to overbraid GDU 620 connector going to Stall Protection and Warning
Unit (refer to Section N.2 for details).
• Tinned copper flat braid, 3/4”, QQB575F36T781 (recommended)
OR
Tinned copper tubular braid, 7/16”, QQB575R30T437
• Shield terminators P/N S03-XX-R-9035-100 (Raychem)
• Silicone fusion tape (Garmin P/N 249-00114-00)
• Hose clamp (MS35842, SAE J1508 (Type F, I or M) or Fed Spec A-A-52506 (Type F, I or M))

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-8 Rev. L
2.4.2.2 Manufacturer Information
Manufacturer information is provided for convenience only. It was current at the time of initial publication
and may change at any time.
It is the installer’s responsibility to verify component compliance with applicable specifications.

Aluminum Foil Tape Fuse Holder

3M Cooper Bussmann
3M Corporate Headquarters 114 Old State Road
3M Center Ellisville, MO 63021-5942
St. Paul, MN 55144-1000 Phone: 636-527-1270
Phone: 1-888-364-3577 Fax: 636-527-1607
www.3m.com www.cooperbussmann.com
Fuse Resistor
Littelfuse World Headquarters Vishay Americas (Vishay Dale)
8755 West Higgins Road Suite 500 One Greenwich Place
Chicago, IL 60631 USA Shelton, CT 06484
Phone: (773) 628-1000 Phone: (402) 563-6866
Fax: (847) 391.0894 Fax: (402) 563-6296
www.littelfuse.com www.vishay.com
Tinned Copper Braid TVS
Alpha Wire Company Microsemi Commercial Business Unit
711 Lidgerwood Avenue Macau
Elizabeth, NJ 07207-0711 Phone: (853) 787991
Phone: 1-800-522-5742 Fax: (858) 787995
Fax: (908) 925-6923 www.microsemi.com
www.alphawire.com
OR
OR Littelfuse World Headquarters
Daburn Electronics & Cable 8755 West Higgins Road Suite 500
44 Richboynton Road Chicago, IL 60631 USA
Dover, NJ 07801 Phone: (773) 628-1000
Phone: (973) 328-3200 Fax: (847) 391.0894
Fax: (973) 328-3130 www.littelfuse.com
www.daburn.com
4-Pin Connector and Contacts Air Data Selection Switch
Tyco Electronics Corporation Aerospace Optics, Inc.
1050 Westlakes Drive 3201 Sandy Lane
Berwyn, PA 19312 Fort Worth, Texas 76112
Phone: (610) 893-9800 Telephone: 1-817-451-1141
www.tycoelectronics.com Fax: 1-817-654-3405
www.vivisun.com
OR
Eaton Aerospace
(only available through distributors)
www.eaton.com

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-9
Diodes (Pilatus PC-12 only) Relays (Pilatus PC-12 only)
Diodes Incorporated LEACH International
4949 Hedgcoxe Road, Suite 200, 6900 Orangethorpe Ave.
Plano, TX 75024  P.O. Box 5032
Phone: (972) 987-3900 Buena Park, CA 90622-5032
www.diodes.com Phone: 714-736-7599
Fax: 714-670-1145
www.leachintl.com

2.4.2.3 Materials Required for Optional Installation Items

If optional installation items / methods are used, the following items may also be required for the
installation.
• If an optional Air Data Selection Switch (PFD 1) is used, it must meet or exceed the following
specifications:
◦ The switch must be illuminated.
◦ The switch must have ADC 1 (green) and ADC 2 (amber) legends.
◦ The switch must meet the requirements of MIL-PRF-22885 (MIL-S-22885).
The following supplier parts have specifications which meet these requirements at the time of publication
of Revision L of this manual:
• P/N M22885/108-AA14 with ADC 1 (green)/ ADC 2 (amber) legend.
• P/N LED-6A-14-BB-E0UU5 (Aerospace Optics)
• P/N 584-10A2B5C1F4L5N2 (Eaton Aerospace)

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-10 Rev. L
2.4.2.4 Materials Required for Aircraft-Specific Installations
2.4.2.4.1 Pilatus PC-12
For the installation in the Pilatus PC-12 the following components are required:
• Diodes P/N 1N6691 or 1N6692 or 1N6693 (per MIL-PRF-19500/628A)
OR
Diodes meeting or exceeding the following specifications:
◦ Minimum working peak reverse voltage of 800 V
◦ Minimum RMS reverse voltage of 560 V
◦ Minimum non-repetitive peak forward surge current 8.3-ms single half sine-wave
superimposed on rated load (IFSM) of 60 A
◦ Minimum average rectified forward current of 5 A (for 28V installations only)
◦ Minimum temperature range of -50°C to 125°C
◦ Maximum thermal resistance (junction to ambient) of 20°C/W
• The diode must be installed in an area that will not exceed 75 °c during all anticipated operating
conditions.
• The following supplier parts have specifications which meet these requirements at publication of
Revision K of this manual:
◦ P/N 10A07-T (Diodes Incorporated)
• Relays meeting or exceeding the following specifications may be used in lieu of the indicated
relay:
◦ MIL-PRF-39016/6, as well as a transient suppression diode on relay coil
◦ MIL-PRF-39016/37
• The following supplier parts have specifications which meet these requirements at publication of
Revision K of this manual:
◦ P/N M39016/37-XXX
◦ P/N F250-109 (LEACH International)
It is the installer’s responsibility to ensure that the part supplier’s quality system maintains compliance
with these specifications.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-11
2.4.3 Software Loader Card
A G600 Software Loader card may be created using a G600 Downloadable Software SD Card 
P/N 010-00768-00 in conjunction with a G600 software application downloaded from the
Dealer Resource Center at fly.garmin.com.

NOTE
The downloadable application to create a Software Loader card only runs on Windows
PCs (Windows 2000, XP and Vista are supported). There is no Mac support at this time.

NOTE
An SD card reader is needed to create the G600 Loader Card using the application that is
downloaded from Garmin. The approved readers are SanDisk SDDR-99 and SDDR-93,
although other SD card readers will work.

Create a G600 Software Loader Card as follows:

1. Go to the Dealer Resource Center at fly.garmin.com.
2. Download the G600 Cockpit Display System software 006-B0942-( ).
3. Ensure that you have an SD card reader connected to the PC. Insert the G600 Downloadable
Software SD Card P/N 010-00768-00 into the card reader.

4. Run the executable file that was downloaded. The following window will appear:
5. Click on Setup and the following window will appear to guide you through the software loader
card creation process:

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-12 Rev. L
6. Click on Next to get to the following window:

CAUTION
In order to create a loader card, the drive that you select will be completely erased.

7. Ensure that the correct drive is selected. Click Next to create the card (click Next to acknowledge
any warnings that appear). The following window will appear when the card is being created:

8. After the card has been created the window below will appear. Click Finish to complete the
process.

9. Eject the card from the card reader (or stop the card reader in Windows). The G600 software
loader card is now ready to use.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-13
2.5 Installation Considerations
2.5.1 Minimum System Configuration
The minimum G600 installation requires the following items:
• GDU 620 Display
• GRS 77 AHRS
• GMU 44 Magnetometer
• GDC 74( ) Air Data Computer
• GTP 59 Temperature Probe
• External GPS Navigation Sensor: 400W/500W Series (software version 3.30 or later), GNS 480
(software version 2.2 or later), or GTN 6XX/7XX (software version 2.00 or later)
In addition to the G600 equipment, standby instruments must be installed as described in Section 2.5.2.
2.5.2 Standby Instruments
When installing the GDU 620 in the instrument panel, a standby attitude indicator, airspeed indicator, and
altimeter must be installed for all IFR installations. Standby instruments are not required for VFR-only
installations. Refer to Section 2.5.22 for additional details. Either two-inch or three-inch standby
instruments may be used, subject to the restrictions in the following sections. The standby instruments
must be located as described in Section 2.5.11.2. For aircraft covered by this STC, dual G600 installations
only require standby instruments by the pilot (primary) GDU 620.

CAUTION
If the original pneumatic airspeed indicator operating limits changed based upon aircraft
altitude (such as “barber pole” type airspeed indicators), the original pneumatic airspeed
indicator must be used as the standby instrument.

CAUTION
If replacing the original airspeed indicator the installer must ensure that this indicator is
not part of an existing airspeed warning system. If it is part of the airspeed warning
system, this system must continue to operate following the installation of the G600. Refer
to Section 2.5.23 for additional details.

2.5.2.1 Standby Attitude Indicator

NOTE
If the G600 installation/operation is limited to VFR only, standby instruments are not
required. Refer to Section 2.5.22 for additional details.

The standby attitude indicator must be one of the following:

• A pneumatic air-driven attitude indicator that is eligible for installation as the primary attitude
indicator.
• An electric attitude indicator listed in Section E.1. Not all aircraft models are eligible to use an
electric attitude indicator as a standby instrument. Refer to Appendix K for eligibility information
for particular aircraft models.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-14 Rev. L
2.5.2.2 Standby Airspeed Indicator
The markings on the standby airspeed indicator must match those on the current airspeed indicator in the
aircraft.
The standby airspeed indicator must be one of the following:
• A pneumatic airspeed indicator that is eligible for installation as the primary airspeed indicator.
• A pneumatic airspeed indicator listed in Section E.8. Not all aircraft models are eligible to use the
indicators listed in Section E.8. See the CAUTIONS in Section 2.5.2 and model-specific
information in Appendix K for eligibility information for particular aircraft models.
• An electric airspeed indicator listed in Section E.1. Not all aircraft models are eligible to use an
electric airspeed indicator as a standby instrument. Refer to Appendix K for eligibility information
for particular aircraft models.
2.5.2.3 Standby Altimeter
The units on the standby altimeter (i.e. “Hg or millibars) must match those on the current altimeter in the
aircraft.
The standby altimeter must be one of the following:
• A pneumatic altimeter that is eligible for installation as the primary altimeter.
• A pneumatic altimeter listed in Section E.8. Not all aircraft models are eligible to use the
altimeters listed in Section E.8. See the CAUTIONS in Section 2.5.2 and model-specific
information in Appendix K for eligibility information for particular aircraft models.
• An electric altimeter listed in Section E.1. Not all aircraft models are eligible to use an electric
airspeed indicator as a standby instrument. Refer to Appendix K for eligibility information for
particular aircraft models.
2.5.2.4 Electronic Integrated Standby Instrument System
Installers wishing to use an Electronic Integrated Standby Instrument System (ESIS) in lieu of the standby
instruments approved by this STC must obtain separate airworthiness approval and ensure compatibility
with the G600 system. To assist with this determination, this manual identifies those ESIS installations that
Garmin has already determined are compatible with the G600 when installed under specific conditions.
Refer to Section E.1 for a list of ESIS installations considered by Garmin to be compatible. The conditions
under which these ESIS installations must be installed in order to be compatible are identified throughout
this manual.
2.5.2.5 Standby Heading
The existing (i.e. non-stabilized magnetic) standby compass must be retained.
2.5.3 Placards and Labels
All placards and labels should be readable in all lighting conditions. Ambient flood lighting is acceptable.
2.5.3.1 New Labels
New circuit breakers and switches installed for the G600 system must be labeled as shown in the
applicable interconnect drawing in Appendix F. These labels are summarized in Table 2-7.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-15
Table 2-7. G600 Circuit Breaker and Switch Labels
Label
LRU/Item Description
Single G600 Installation Dual G600 Installation
CB GDU 620 Display PFD [1] PFD 1/PFD 2 [1]
CB GRS 77 AHRS AHRS [1] AHRS 1/AHRS 2 [1]
CB GDC 74( ) ADC [1] ADC 1/ADC 2 [1]
Electric Standby Attitude Ind.
CB STBY ATT [1] [2] STBY ATT [1] [2]
(If Installed)
GAD 43/43e Circuit Breaker
CB GAD [1] GAD [1]
(If installed)

AP HDG DATUM AP HDG DATUM

GPSS Select
Switch pos’n 1: HDG pos’n 1: HDG
(If Installed)
pos’n 2: GPSS pos’n 2: GPSS
PFD 1 AIR DATA
Air Data Source Select
Switch pos’n 1: ADC 1 (green) N/A
(If Installed)
pos’n 2: ADC 2 (amber)
[1] For LRUs that receive power from two circuit breakers, the circuit breaker name should
have an ‘A’ suffix for the circuit breaker connected to Source 1, and a ‘B’ suffix for the
circuit breaker connected to Source 2 (e.g. ‘PFD 1A’ and ‘PFD 1B’, or ‘GAD A’ and ‘GAD
B’).
[2] It is permissible for existing installations to use ‘STBY ADI’. All new installations should
use ‘STBY ATT’.

2.5.3.2 Existing Placards

If an existing placard must be relocated because of the installation of the GDU 620, the new placard must
meet the requirements below:
• The font size of the new placard is the same as the old placard it is replacing.
• The color of the new placard is identical to the color of the placard which it is replacing.
• The text on the new placard is identical to the text on the placard which it is replacing (it can be
arranged differently as required by space constraints, but the wording must be the same).
• The new placard must be readable in all lighting conditions.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-16 Rev. L
2.5.3.3 VFR Placards
If the installation of the G600 is limited to VFR operation only, the installation must be placarded as
follows:
• If the aircraft is already limited to VFR operation prior to installation of the G600, no additional
placard is required.
• If the aircraft not limited to VFR operation prior to installation of the G600 and the if the particular
aircraft model is limited to VFR operation with the G600 in accordance with Appendix K, the
installation must be placarded with “AIRCRAFT LIMITED TO VFR”.
• If the G600 is installed for VFR-only operation in accordance with Section 2.5.22, the installation
must be placarded with “AIRCRAFT LIMITED TO VFR”.
If a placard must be installed to limit the aircraft to VFR operations only, it must meet the following
requirements:
• The text on the placard must be “AIRCRAFT LIMITED TO VFR”.
• The font size must be a minimum of 0.25” high (minimum 18 point font).
• The color of the new placard must contrast with the instrument panel so that it is easily readable.
• The placard must be located on the pilot side instrument panel in plain view, near the GDU 620.
2.5.3.4 New Placards
In addition to labels, some installations will require new placards. Refer to Appendix E to determine
placard requirements.
2.5.3.4.1 KFC 275/325 Placard
If the installation of the G600 installation interfaces to a KFC 275 or KFC 325 and requires a
“DISENGAGE SOFT RIDE DURING ALTITUDE CAPTURE (ALTC)” placard (refer to Section E.4 to
determine whether or not this placard is required), the installation must be placarded as follows:
• The text on the placard must be “DISENGAGE SOFT RIDE DURING ALTITUDE CAPTURE
(ALTC)”.
• The font size must be a minimum of 0.17 inch high (minimum 12 point font).
• The color of the new placard must contrast with the instrument panel so that it is easily readable.
• The placard must be located on the pilot near the autopilot mode controller.
2.5.4 Power Distribution
Circuit protection devices for the G600 LRUs must be push-pull manually resettable circuit breakers 
(e.g. Klixon 7274 or 7277 Series circuit breakers).
For a single G600 installation, the GDU 620, GRS 77, and GDC 74( ) must be connected to an electrical
bus that has the following characteristics:
• The bus receives power when the battery or batteries are switched ON.
• The bus receives power from one or more generators/alternators when operating.
• The bus is not automatically shed with the loss of a generator/alternator.
For a dual G600 installation, the primary system (GDU 620 #1,GRS 77 #1, and GDC 74( ) #1) must be
connected as described for a single G600 installation. The secondary system (GDU 620 #2, GRS 77 #2,
and GDC 74( ) #2) must be connected to a power source independent of the power source used by the
primary system, if one is available.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-17
NOTE
It is acceptable for aircraft previously modified in accordance with earlier revisions of this
installation manual to have the secondary G600 system connected to the same power
source as the primary system even though an independent power source is available. All
new installations must be installed as described above.

Electric standby attitude indicators with a dedicated/integrated battery (i.e Mid-Continent 4300-4XX,
MD420, or L-3 ESI-2000) should be connected to a different bus that meets the three criteria above. If no
such bus exists, it may be connected to the same bus as the required G600 equipment.
If the electric standby attitude indicator does not have a dedicated/integrated battery (i.e. L-3
Communications ESI-1000), it must be connected to a power source independent of the G600 power
source(s). The installation and/or approval of this independent power source is outside the scope of this
STC. In order for this independent power source to be suitable, it must meet the following criteria:
• The power source must provide a minimum of 30 minutes of operation for the required standby
instruments in the event of a total failure of all G600 power sources.
• The approval for the independent power source includes a means to ensure its availability before
flight. For example, through an approved Airplane Flight Manual pre-flight test procedure and/or
Instructions for Continued Airworthiness.

NOTE
For the Pilatus PC-12 only, it is acceptable to connect G600 system #1 to Avionics Bus #1
and Avionics Bus #2.

In all single and dual installations, the optional GAD 43/43e adapter should be connected to the same bus
as the autopilot.
The #1 and #2 G600 systems should not share any circuit breakers or ground returns. The standby
instruments must not share any circuit breakers or ground returns as either G600 system.
2.5.5 Pitot-Static Plumbing
The primary (#1) GDC 74( ) must be installed on the Pitot/static connections that went to the previously
installed pilot's instruments. If this static source had an alternate static source selector switch, it must be
retained.
For aircraft equipped with a dual Pitot-static system, the standby instruments must be installed on the Pitot-
static system that is independent from the pilots instruments. If no second Pitot-static system is available,
then it is acceptable to install the standby instruments on the same Pitot-static source as the pilot's
instruments.
For aircraft equipped with a dual Pitot-static system the GDC 74 associated with the optional second G600
system must be installed on the Pitot-static system that is independent from the pilots instruments. If no
second Pitot-static system is available, then it is acceptable to install the secondary (#2) GDC 74() on the
same Pitot-static source as the pilot's instruments.

NOTE
It is acceptable for aircraft previously modified in accordance with earlier revisions of this
installation manual to have the standby instruments attached to the pilot’s Pitot-static
system. All new installations must be installed as described above.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-18 Rev. L
2.5.6 External Annunciators
The GDU 620 provides all of the necessary external annunciations for the GNS 400W/500W Series units,
the GNS 480, and the GTN 6XX/7XX, eliminating the need for an external annunciator panel. The
GDU 620 also provides all of the required TAWS annunciations for the 500W TAWS Series units or TAWS
enabled GTN 6XX/7XX units and eliminates the need for a TAWS annunciator panel, provided the 500W
TAWS Series unit or TAWS-enabled GTN 6XX/7XX unit is connected to the GDU 620 as GPS 1.
2.5.7 External Course Deviation Indicators
The GDU 620 PFD is capable of displaying the lateral and vertical deviation from the GPS source(s) and
navigation receiver(s) in the aircraft. Based on the G600 System Safety Assessment, the G600 system can
be used as the sole display for all CDI information for all aircraft on the STC Approved Model List,
allowing the existing CDIs to be removed.
It is not recommended to use external CDIs in conjunction with the G600 system. If it is desired to utilize
one or more external CDIs, the CDI(s) can only be used to display VOR/ILS information. These must be
installed as specified below.
GNS 430W/530W
The VOR/ILS Indicator Output or VOR/LOC composite output (and ILS Glideslope deviations/flags)
from P4006/P5006 must be used to drive an external CDI. Both VOR and ILS information will be
available (a resolver type indicator such as the Garmin GI 106A, or a composite indicator such as the
Bendix/King KI 209 are supported).
GNS 480
The Composite output from P7 must be used to drive an external CDI. Only VOR and Localizer
information can be displayed on the CDI. No vertical deviation information can be displayed (a VOR/LOC
composite indicator such as the Bendix/King KI 208 is supported).
SL30
The CDI (lateral) and Glideslope (vertical) deviations and flags may be used to drive an external CDI.
Both VOR and ILS information will be available (a standard VOR/ILS indicator with resolver output such
as the Mid-Continent MD200 is supported). Optionally, the Composite output and Glideslope
deviations/flags may be used to drive an external CDI. Both VOR and ILS information will be available (a
VOR/ILS composite indicator such as the Bendix/King KI 209 is supported).
GTN 6XX/7XX
The VOR/ILS Indicator Output or VOR/LOC composite output (and ILS/Glideslope deviations/flags)
from P1001/P1004 must be used to drive an external CDI. Both VOR and ILS information will be
available (a resolver type indicator such as the Garmin GI 106A, or a composite indicator such as the
Bendix/King KI 209 are supported).
Refer to Section 7 for associated Limitations.
2.5.8 External Sensors
External serial data sources intended for use with the G600 system should be checked for compatibility
before installation. The list of supported devices is located in Appendix E of this manual.
When the G600 system is installed with external sensors, these sensors must be installed in accordance
with manufacturer's data. Installation of any external sensors not approved by this manual is beyond the
scope of this manual and STC.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-19
2.5.8.1 GPS Navigator
Interfacing the GDU 620 to a GPS navigator is required for proper system operation. GPS information is
used by the GDU 620 for the moving map and forwarded to the GRS 77 AHRS. The GDU 620 supports
interfacing to two independent GPS navigators, although only one is required.
If a 500W Series unit with TAWS or TAWS enabled GTN 6XX/7XX is used, it must be connected as GPS
1 – only TAWS annunciations from GPS 1 are displayed on the PFD. If two TAWS-equipped units are
installed, the TAWS-equipped unit that is connected to the audio panel must be connected as GPS 1.
2.5.8.2 Navigation Receiver
Interfacing the GDU 620 to a navigation receiver allows VOR and ILS information to be displayed on the
PFD HSI. The GDU 620 supports interfacing to two independent navigation receivers.
2.5.8.3 Weather
2.5.8.3.1 SiriusXM® Data Link Weather
Interfacing the GDU 620 to a GDL 69/69A allows SiriusXM weather data to be displayed on a dedicated
weather page or overlaid on the moving map.
2.5.8.3.2 GWX 68/70 Weather Radar (GDU 620 software version 3.00 or later)
Interfacing the GDU 620 to the GWX 68/70 weather radar system will allow control and display of the
weather radar information using the GDU 620. In dual G600 installations, only GDU 620 #1 currently
supports the weather radar interface to the GWX 68/70.
2.5.8.3.3 Weather over Iridium® Satellite Network (GDU 620™ software version 5.00 or
later)
Interfacing the GDU 620 to a GSR 56 Iridium transceiver allows Garmin Flight Data Services (GFDS)
weather data to be displayed on a dedicated weather page or overlaid on the moving map. Both SiriusXM
and GFDS weather can be installed in a single installation.
2.5.8.3.4 ARINC 708 Weather Radar (GDU™ 620 software version 5.00 or later)
Interfacing the GDU 620 to an ARINC 708 weather radar system will allow control and display of the
weather radar information using the GDU 620. In dual G600 installations, both GDU 620 #1 and #2
support the display and control of the weather radar. This STC requires that the GDU 620 (one or two) is
the only display type connected to the weather radar. If there are displays in addition to the GDU 620
connected to the ARINC 708 weather radar, these interfaces are beyond the scope of this STC.
2.5.8.4 Traffic
Interfacing the GDU 620 to a TIS/TAS/TCAS I traffic system allows traffic data to be displayed on a
dedicated traffic page or overlaid on the moving map. The GDU 620 can be configured to provide display
of traffic data only, or display and control of the traffic system.

NOTE
If the original installation has the traffic system configured to use a heading source other
than ARINC 429 (e.g. synchro), the traffic system must be rewired and reconfigured to use
ARINC 429 heading from the G600 system. Alternately, the GAD 43/43e may be utilized to
provide synchro heading.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-20 Rev. L
NOTE
If the original installation has the traffic system configured to use an altitude source other
than ARINC 429 (e.g. Gray Code), the traffic system must be rewired and reconfigured to
use ARINC 429 altitude from the G600 system.

NOTE
Only one traffic sensor may be interfaced to the GDU 620. For dual G600 installations,
the GDU 620s cannot be connected each to a separate traffic sensor.

2.5.8.5 ADF
Interfacing the GDU 620 to an ADF receiver allows ADF bearing information to be displayed on a bearing
pointer on the PFD HSI and allows the existing ADF indicator to be removed. The GDU 620 only accepts
DC Sine/Cosine inputs from an ADF. The GAD 43e only accepts Synchro (ARINC 407) input from an
ADF. The GDU 620/GAD 43e will not control the ADF receiver.
2.5.8.6 Stormscope® (function not currently supported)
Interfacing the GDU 620 to a Stormscope system will allow Stormscope information to be displayed on the
GDU 620. The GDU 620 can be configured to provide display of Stormscope data only, or display and
control of the Stormscope system. Although the function is not currently supported, provisional wiring can
be installed at the time of G600 system installation.

NOTE
If the original installation has the Stormscope system configured to use a heading source
other than serial, the Stormscope system must be rewired and reconfigured to use RS-232
heading from the G600 system.

2.5.8.7 External TAWS

NOTE
The GDU 620 will not display terrain data from an external source; however, if a 500W
Series or GTN unit with TAWS is connected, the GDU 620 will display all of the required
TAWS annunciations from GPS 1 and eliminate the need for a separate TAWS annunciator
panel.

If the aircraft has a TAWS installed, and SVT is enabled on the G600, the GDU 620 must be configured to
suppress Terrain-SVT aural alerts by setting EXT TAWS to INSTALLED (refer to Section 5.5.6.0B for
additional information).
2.5.8.8 Video (GDU™ 620 software version 5.00 or later)
Interfacing the GDU 620 to an external video source allows a color or monochrome video image to be
displayed on the MFD. The GDU 620 has two video inputs, each of which accept color (NTSC and PAL)
or monochrome (RS-170) composite video signals. The GDU 620 does not provide control of the video
source, but it does provide adjustments for brightness, contrast and saturation.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-21
2.5.8.9 Iridium® Satellite Support (GDU™ 620 software version 5.00 or later)
Interfacing the GDU 620 to a GSR 56 Iridium transceiver provides the following functions using the
Iridium satellite network:
• Receive and display GFDS weather information.
• Send position information to the GSR 56 for position reporting.
• Control the GSR 56 for sending and receiving satellite phone calls.
The features can be enabled or disabled individually.
2.5.8.10 Radar Altimeter (GDU™ 620 software version 5.00 or later)
Interfacing the GDU 620 to a radar altimeter system allows radar altitude to be displayed on the PFD. The
GDU 620 can be configured to display of radar altitude data only, or display radar altitude data and allow
self test initiation of the radar altimeter system.
When the optional GAD 43e adapter is installed (GDU 620 software version 6.11 or later required),
interfacing to an analog radar altimeter is supported. If self test initiation is desired this must be wired to a
discrete output from the GDU 620.
2.5.9 Autopilot/Flight Director Interface
The G600 is designed to interface with a wide variety of autopilots. Before beginning a G600 installation,
autopilots intended for use with the G600 system must be checked for compatibility. The list of tested and
supported autopilots is located in Section E.3 of this manual, and the list of supported flight directors is
located in Section E.4. These sections also contain information specific to each autopilot that must be
considered prior to undertaking a G600 installation. When the G600 system is interfaced to an autopilot,
the autopilot must be installed in accordance with manufacturer's data. Installation of the autopilot system
is beyond the scope of this manual and STC.
The G600 (GDU 620) can provide AC or DC heading and course datum (error) outputs based on the
setting of the heading bug and course pointer on the HSI. When enabled, the GDU 620 can drive the
heading datum output based upon GPS steering (GPSS) information from the selected navigator, acting
like a roll-steering converter. Refer to Section 2.5.16. The GDU 620 also provides analog deviation outputs
and associated flags based upon the navigation source currently selected on the HSI and outputs
ARINC 429 GPSS information from the currently selected navigator. The GDU 620 also provides
ARINC 429 Attitude and Navigation data for compatible autopilots (GDU 620 SW V5.02 or later).
The optional GAD 43/43e adapter can provide analog attitude information to attitude-based autopilots,
allowing existing gyros to be removed and replaced by the G600. The GAD 43/43e adapter can also
provide yaw rate, heading, and barometric correction to various autopilots.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-22 Rev. L
2.5.9.1 Autopilot ADIs and Gyros
For attitude-based autopilots an existing ADI or remote gyro is used to provide attitude information to the
autopilot. In some cases, these ADIs or gyros may be replaced with the GAD 43/43e (refer to
Section 2.5.9.5 for additional information). If the GAD 43/43e is not installed, ADIs that interface with the
existing autopilot on the aircraft will have to be relocated if located in the installation location for the
GDU 620. Because this instrument is supplying attitude information to the autopilot, the ADI must be
retained. It can be used as a standby instrument and be relocated to an approved location for the standby
instruments (refer to Section 2.5.11.2).
Alternately, this ADI may be relocated to the copilot’s side. If the ADI is relocated to the copilot’s side and
it is desired to display flight director information on it, this ADI must be installed in the approved location
for the copilot ADI (refer to Section 2.5.11.7.1). If the ADI used by the autopilot is an electric-driven gyro,
in order to meet the requirements of Section 2.5.11.2, the electric ADI should be relocated to the copilot’s
side. A vacuum-driven or suitable electric ADI (refer to Section 2.5.11.2.3.1) must then be installed as a
standby instrument on the pilot’s side. Any gyros that are required for proper operation of the ADI (e.g. for
a KCI 310 ADI) must also be retained. If the GAD 43/43e is not installed, remote gyros, such as the KVG
350, must be retained in order for the autopilot to function properly.
2.5.9.2 Autopilot Turn Coordinators
Instrument panel mounted turn coordinators that interface with the existing autopilot on the aircraft will
have to be retained and might have to be relocated. Due to space constraints it may be necessary to blind
mount the turn coordinator. The installer must ensure that the relocated Turn Coordinator is installed in
accordance to its installation manual for panel incline and other applicable requirements.
2.5.9.3 Altitude Pre-Selector and Remote Annunciators
The G600 may provide the altitude pre-selector function to an autopilot (for interface requirements and
autopilot models approved for this function see Section E.3). If the G600 is configured to provide the
altitude pre-selector functions, the original altitude pre-selector must be removed. Autopilots that use
altitude pre-selectors that also function as a remote annunciator for the autopilot are not supported in the
G600 AML STC. Remote annunciators must not be removed, and if relocated must meet manufacturer
requirements for installation.
2.5.9.4 ADIs with Integral Flight Director Presentation
In some cases an ADI that must be retained to provide attitude information to the autopilot has an integral
flight director presentation (e.g. the KI 256 ADI). If this ADI is used as a standby instrument for the G600,
the flight director presentation must be disabled. If this ADI is relocated to the copilot's side, the flight
director presentation may be kept in the enabled state provided that the location requirements in
Section 2.5.11.8 are met.
2.5.9.5 GAD 43/43e Adapter
The GAD 43/43e adapter is an optional interface adapter for the G600 Integrated Flight Deck. It allows
existing ADIs/gyros that are required for autopilot operation to be replaced as part of the G600 installation.
The GAD 43/43e interfaces with the GDU 620 Display for configuration and alerting, and with the
GRS 77 for attitude, heading, and yaw rate information. The GAD 43/43e provides the following
information in analog format for use with suitable third-party autopilot systems:
• Pitch and Roll for the autopilot (synchro)
• Pitch and Roll for weather radar stabilization (50 and 200 mV/degree)
• Heading (synchro)
• Yaw Rate (100, 200, 333 and 600 mV/degree/sec)
OR
Barometric correction (KEA 130/130A/346 compatible)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-23
NOTE
Installation of the GAD 43/43e adapter allows the existing attitude source for the
autopilot to be replaced without altering the autopilot performance. Prior to starting the
G600/GAD 43/43e installation it is highly recommended that a short flight test be
conducted to baseline the autopilot performance and ensure that the system is operating
as designed. This short flight test is repeated after completion of the aircraft modification
to validate that the GAD 43/43e attitude source operates identical to the original
mechanical gyro. Refer to Section 5.10.2.5 for additional details.

In Configuration mode, the GAD 43/43e also allows the installer to set the analog attitude and heading
outputs to specific values without the need for removing any gyros and using a tilt table.
2.5.9.5.1 Analog Baro-Correction for Honeywell Autopilots
The GAD 43/43e provides an analog baro-correction output that emulates the baro-correction output from
the Honeywell KEA 130/130A and KEA 346 (P/N 006-0362-0008 through -0011 only) encoding
altimeters. Providing the GAD 43/43e baro-correction output to the autopilot ensures that altitude captures
will be made relative to the altitude used by the G600 system, rather than the altitude on the encoding
altimeter. Consequently, it is recommended that the GAD 43/43e be used to provide the baro-correction
input in lieu of the encoding altimeter.

NOTE
If removing the encoding altimeter, a suitable blind encoder must be installed to provide
uncorrected Gray code altitude to the autopilot (and any other LRUs using Gray code
altitude).

2.5.9.5.2 GAD 43e Only Functionality

In addition to the interfaces provided by the GAD 43, the GAD 43e also provides altitude preselect and
vertical speed control when interfaced to suitable autopilots. Refer to Section E.20 for a listing of approved
autopilots that support this function.
2.5.10 Part 121/Part 135 Considerations
For certain aircraft operated under Part 121 or Part 135, a third attitude source is required in addition to
primary attitude sources at each pilot station. Aircraft requiring the third attitude source are described in 14
CFR § 121.2, 14 CFR § 135.2, and 14 CFR § 121.305(j). The G600 standby attitude indicator required by
Section 2.5.2 may be used to meet this requirement, provided it also fulfills all requirements listed in 14
CFR § 121.305(k).
Single-engine aircraft operated under Part 135 must have two independent electrical sources or a standby
battery or generator/alternator capable of supplying 150% of the electrical loads of all required instruments
and equipment necessary for safe emergency operations of the aircraft for 60 minutes in accordance with
135.163(f). For multi-engine aircraft operated under Part 135 the electrical load of all required instruments
and equipment necessary for emergency operations must not be greater than one-half of the total generated
power in accordance with 135.163(g). The definition of the electrical loads that are “required instruments
and equipment necessary for safe emergency operations” should be expanded to include the pilot’s
GDU 620, GRS 77, GDC 74( ), and, if installed, the electric standby attitude indicator.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-24 Rev. L
2.5.11 Mounting Considerations
2.5.11.1 GDU™ 620 Location and Mounting
The GDU 620 is designed to mount on the aircraft instrument panel in place of the existing primary
instruments. The location must be such that the GDU 620 is not blocked by the glare shield on top, or by
the control yoke on the bottom.
The FAA has determined that the acceptable installation location for the GDU 620s ADI shall not
dramatically differ from the location of the original type certificated ADI. Consequently, the GDU 620s
ADI, when installed, must intersect the original Type certificated ADI.
The GDU 620 ADI area is defined as the top section of the left screen (GDU 620GDU 620 with lefthand
PFD), or the top section of the right screen (GDU 620 with right hand PFD) as shown in Figure 2-1.

,QFKHV ,QFKHV

,QFKHV ,QFKHV



Ä Ä

1
Ä Ä
1

' '
0

0
)25 )25

5

5

9 9

Lefthand PFD Version Righthand PFD Version

Figure 2-1. GDU™ 620 ADI Location

The original Type certificated ADI area is defined as the area inside the outer perimeter of the instrument
bezel, as shown in Figure 2-2.

Figure 2-2. Original ADI Area

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-25
When installed, ADI area of the GDU 620 must intersect the original Type certificated ADI installation
location, as shown in the example in Figure 2-3.

&/2&.

s

(
1

*36




)8(/47<

6
:

&855(17

7$&+20(7(5

LEFTHAND PFD VERSION

&/2&.

9$&

(


1
*36


)8(/47< 6


:

&855(17

7$&+20(7(5

RIGHTHAND PFD VERSION

Figure 2-3. GDU 620 ADI Location Requirement

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-26 Rev. L
Some installations of the GDU 620 will require the use of one of the optional GDU 620 trim plates. The
trim plates are manufactured plates which can be used for cosmetic appeasement or structural support.
Refer to Section 3.2.1 for additional information on the use of the trim plate. Due to the extent of the
modifications required for some installations, it may be easier to replace the instrument panel entirely.
Refer to Section 2.5.11.3 for a list of items to consider when deciding whether or not to replace the
instrument panel.

NOTE
The GDU 620 must be electrically bonded to the instrument panel. If a trim plate is
utilized in the installation, it must be installed such that it will permit the GDU 620 to be
electrically bonded to the instrument panel. When measured from the rear aluminum
chassis of the GDU 620 to the instrument panel, the resistance must be 20 mΩ or less.
Refer to Section 2.5.20 for additional information about equipment bonding.

NOTE
Certain Cessna or Hawker Beechcraft aircraft may require that the instrument panel be
replaced in order to provide sufficient space in the instrument panel for the GDU 620.
Replacement of the instrument panels in these aircraft is not covered under this AML STC.
Reference Section 2.5.11.3 for additional information.

2.5.11.2 Standby Instrument Location

The acceptable location of individual standby instruments is directly adjacent to the GDU 620 (to the right,
to the left, below, diagonal, or above). In cases in which the instrument panel is stepped, 3 1/8 inch standby
instruments may be located on the stepped part of the instrument panel as long as there are no instruments
located in between the GDU 620 and the standby instrument. Standby instruments must be located entirely
within the area defined in Section 2.5.11.2.1, Section 2.5.11.2.2 or Section 2.5.11.2.3.
If the individual standby instruments are arranged vertically, the preferred order is:
• Attitude Indicator (top)
• Airspeed Indicator
• Altimeter (bottom)
If it is not possible to place the attitude indicator on top due to space constraints, an alternate arrangement
for vertically arranged individual instruments is:
• Airspeed Indicator (top)
• Attitude Indicator
• Altimeter (bottom)
If the individual standby instruments are arranged horizontally, the preferred order is:
• Airspeed Indicator (left), Attitude Indicator, Altimeter (right)
If it is not possible to arrange the standby instruments vertically or horizontally, as described above, any
order for standby instruments is acceptable, provided they are located entirely within the specified area.
In most cases the previously certified ADI/attitude indicator, Airspeed Indicator and Altimeter can be used
as standby instruments. These instruments can be installed in pre-existing mounting locations for
instruments that are no longer required because their functions are replaced by the G600 system (e.g.
VORs, CDIs, ADF bearing pointers, RMIs, etc.). If the previously certified ADI/attitude indicator is
electric powered, it must be replaced with a suitable attitude indicator.Refer to Appendix K to determine

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-27
which type of attitude indicators can be installed in a particular aircraft. If eligible to install an electric
standby instrument, refer to Section E.1 for a list of suitable electric instruments. All pneumatic ADIs and
attitude indicators are acceptable for standby instruments and do not require replacement.
In some installations it may be desirable to locate one or more standby instruments in the bolster
immediately below the instrument panel. Refer to Section H.2for information on how to do this.
In some installations it may be desirable to use an ESIS. If a compatible ESIS is installed (refer to
Section E.1 for additional information), the installer must ensure that the installation location meets the
requirements of Section 2.5.11.2.4.
2.5.11.2.1 Acceptable Area for 3 1/8 inch Standby Instruments
If all three standby instruments are 3 1/8 inch, the instruments must be located entirely within the area
outlined in Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5.

Figure 2-4. Acceptable Installation Area for 3⅛-inch Standby Instruments

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-28 Rev. L
,167580(173$1(/
)25:$5'

*'8

67(33('3$1(/

6,'(
9,(:
67$1'%<
,167580(17
127(6
21/<67$1'%<,167580(1760$<%(02817('
2167(33('3257,212),167580(173$1(/

Figure 2-5. Side View Stepped Panel for 3⅛-inch Standby Instruments

2.5.11.2.2 Acceptable Area for 2 ¼-Inch Standby Instruments

If all three standby instruments are 2 1/4 inch, the instruments must be located entirely within the area
outlined in Figure 2-6.

$&&(37$%/($5($)25/2&$7,212)67$1'%<
,167580(176²67$1'%<,167580(1760867%(
&217$,1('(17,5(/<,17+,6$5($

Figure 2-6. Acceptable Installation Area for 2¼-Inch Standby Instruments Utilizing Both
2¼-inch and 3⅛-inch Standby Instruments

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-29
In some installations it may be desired to use 3 1/8 inch standby instruments, but there is insufficient space
to accommodate such an arrangement. Consequently, some 2 1/4 inch instruments may be used. If both 2
1/4 inch and 3 1/8 inch standby instruments are used, the instruments must be located entirely within the
area outlined in Figure 2-7.

$&&(37$%/($5($)25
/2&$7,212)67$1'%<
,167580(176²
,167580(1760867%(
&217$,1('(17,5(/<,1
7+,6$5($

Figure 2-7. Acceptable Installation Area for Mixed Standby Instruments

2.5.11.2.3 Mid-Continent Instruments Standby Instruments

2.5.11.2.3.1 Electric ADI

NOTE
Not all aircraft models are eligible to use an electric attitude indicator as a standby
instrument. Refer to Appendix K for eligibility information for particular aircraft models.

The model 4300-4( ) (3 1/8 inch) and 4200-( ) (2 1/4 inch) are currently the only electric standby attitude
indicators that may be installed as standby attitude instruments under the G600 AML STC; all non-electric
attitude indicators are acceptable and do not need to be replaced. The 4300-4( ) with the internal backup
battery and the 4200-( ) with the required remote mounted MD420-Emergency Power Supply have the
ability to continue to operate in excess of 30 minutes (in accordance with FAR 23.1353(h)) in the event
aircraft electrical power is lost and have been tested to meet the reliability and environmental conditions
required by the G600 AML STC.

NOTE
The Mid-Continent model 4200-( ) (2 ¼ inch) ADI requires the use of the MD420
Emergency Power System, which must be mounted separately. If the Mid-Continent 4200-
( ) 2 1/4 inch attitude indicator is used in a non-metallic aircraft, the associated remote
MD420 Emergency Power System must be mounted within the instrument panel area. This
constraint does not apply to metal aircraft.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-30 Rev. L
NOTE
If the Mid-Continent 4200-( ) 2 ¼ inch attitude indicator is used in a pressurized aircraft,
the associated remote MD420 Emergency Power System must be mounted in a pressurized
area.

2.5.11.2.3.2 2¼-Inch Instruments

For G600 installations that require 2 1/4 inch standby instruments, an altimeter and airspeed indicator may
be purchases as a package with the 4200-( ) ADI from Mid-Continent Instruments. Refer to Appendix E
for acceptable model numbers. Contact Mid-Continent Instruments for ordering instructions to obtain an
airspeed indicator with markings applicable to the aircraft.
2.5.11.2.3.3 Mid-Continent Contact Information
For ordering information contact:
Mid-Continent Instrument Co., Inc
9400 E 34th Street N, Wichita, KS 67226 USA
Phone: 316-630-0101
Fax: 316-630-0723
www.mcico.com
This information was current at the time of publication.
2.5.11.2.4 Acceptable Area for Electronic Standby Instrument System
For installations using an ESIS, the ESIS display must be located in accordance with the applicable ESIS
STC. Refer to Section E.1 for a list of electronic standby systems that Garmin has already determined are
compatible with the G600.
2.5.11.3 New Instrument Panel Considerations
Some installations may require deviations from the original layout that will result in a substantial amount
of panel modifications, e.g. moving the standby instruments by one-half inch in any direction would
require modification of the original cutouts and therefore modification of the original panel may not be
adequate due to cosmetic and structural issues. In such cases, a blank panel is preferred and may be
manufactured.

NOTE
The STCs referenced in the subsequent sections are not the only acceptable means of
replacing the instrument panel in the Cessna or Hawker Beechcraft models as specified
below. Other means of FAA approval may be used.

NOTE
Unless otherwise specified, new instrument panels may be manufactured for any aircraft
on the AML. These panels shall not be part of the primary structure of the aircraft.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-31
A new panel, whether newly manufactured or purchased from the aircraft manufacturer, must comply with
the following requirements:
• Material must be the same thickness and type as the original instrument panel (with a minimum
thickness of 0.063”).
• Use sheet metal techniques (bend radius, fillets…) appropriate to the material thickness and
hardness type – refer to AC 43.13-1B, Chapter 4, Section 4 (Metal Repair Procedures).
• Material shall have some type of corrosion protection (primer, alodine …).
• The original mounting locations, shape, form, and/or bends shall not be modified from the original
design.
• Bends in the material must not exceed to the minimum bend radius specification of the material
used.
• OEM processes may allow for tighter bends (e.g. a ‘soft’ material is formed then heat treated to
increase hardness).
• Panels shall not be combined (i.e. an original two-piece panel cannot be combined to create a
single-piece panel). Likewise, panels shall not be split (e.g. creating a two-piece panel from a
single-piece panel).

NOTE
Instrument panels are often more than a single piece of aluminum: they are an assembly
with other brackets and components permanently or semi-permanently attached to the
main panel. For example, angles may have been riveted to create attach points for other
pieces of equipment (such as the radio rack) or they may be used to resist bending of the
panel due to weight and center of gravity of the instruments; brackets or channels may
exist to create additional attach points to the aircraft. The new instrument panel must not
alter the design of the instrument panel assembly features from the original design. These
features must be duplicated in the new panel structure.

NOTE
The only intended differences between the new instrument panel assembly and the old are
the cutout for the GDU 620 display unit and the location of the standby instruments. Every
other feature of the panel, including aspects of the structure invisible to the pilot, must be
duplicated. Modification of the instrument panel that will not comply with these
requirements is not approved under this STC.

The GDU 620 must intersect the original certified ADI as specified in the GDU 620 location and mounting
(see Section 2.5.11.1). Since there is some freedom on the position of the GDU 620 in such a case, it is
preferred to have the GDU 620 PFD as close to top center as possible without compromising the area
required for the standby instruments or other indicators. Also, review the requirements for the standby
instruments prior to finalizing their location. Whenever manufacturing a new panel, verify that all
requirements in the following sections are met to ensure proper installation:
• GDU 620 Location, Section 2.5.11.1
• Standby Instrument Location, Section 2.5.11.2
When fabricating a new instrument panel, movement or consolidation of additional instruments or engine
gauges may be needed in order to achieve the desired panel layout. However, this is beyond the scope of
the G600 STC and will require additional aircraft manufacturer’s data or FAA approval.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-32 Rev. L
When fabricating a new instrument panel, lighting for existing items that are retained must be considered.
However, this is beyond the scope of the G600 STC and will require additional aircraft manufacturer’s data
or FAA approval.
Compound curves and tooled bends formed into the instrument panel may not be easily replicated in the
field. The installer should consider contacting the aircraft manufacturer for a panel blank or modifying the
existing panel with a flat plate overlay conforming to the guidelines of this installation manual. Any
overlay should be secured to the original panel as if it were a structural repair in accordance with 
AC 43.13-1B, Chapter 4, Section 4.
2.5.11.3.1 Cessna Models
The following aircraft may require the control yoke to be modified and instrument panel to be replaced in
order to provide sufficient space in the instrument panel for the GDU 620:
• Cessna 172M (refer to STC SA170CH)
• Cessna 180, 180A-180J (refer to STC SA0023SE)
• Cessna 185, 185A-185E, A185E (refer to STC SA0023SE)
• Cessna 182, 182A-182D (refer to STC SA1347GL)
Replacement of yoke and/or the instrument panels in these aircraft is not covered under this AML STC.
The STCs referenced above are not the only acceptable means of fitting the GDU 620. Other means of
FAA approval may be used.
Cessna F172/F172M
Installation of this STC on Cessna F172D/F172M aircraft requires a prerequisite modification of the yoke
installation similar to that defined in for the Cessna 172M in AML STC SA170CH. STC SA170CH does
not apply to the F172 series; however, the F172 series are similar to the 172 series listed with respect to
the areas requiring modification. Therefore the design data contained in STC SA170CH may assist a
modifier in defining and obtaining airworthiness approval of the required pre-requisite modifications. The
installer is responsible for obtaining additional airworthiness approval beyond that covered by this STC
and STC SA170CH. Refer to the Cessna IPC (P529-12-RAND-1600-1/75) for similarity of Cessna 172
series and F172 series instrument panel and yoke installations.
2.5.11.3.2 Hawker Beechcraft Models
The following aircraft may require the instrument panel to be replaced in order to provide sufficient space
in the instrument panel structural integrity for the GDU 620:
• Hawker Beechcraft 35, A35, B35, C35, D35, E35, F35, G35
• Hawker Beechcraft 35-33, 35-A33, 35-B33, 35-C33
Replacement of the instrument panels in these aircraft is not covered under this AML STC. D’Shannon
Aviation has an STC for a suitable modification. For more information, contact D’Shannon Aviation at:
D’Shannon Aviation
21405 Hamburg Ave
Lakeville, Minnesota 55044
Phone: 800.291.7616
OR 763.559.5998
Email: [email protected]

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-33
2.5.11.4 GRS 77 Location and Mounting
The GRS 77 includes extremely sensitive inertial measurement sensors. It must be mounted rigidly to the
aircraft primary structure. Do not use shock mounting. Shock mounts used for other types of inertial
systems are not acceptable for the GRS 77 AHRS. The mounting system must have no resonance with the
unit installed that would amplify the aircraft natural levels. Vibrations may result in degraded accuracy.
The installation vibration levels are checked using the Engine Run-Up Vibration Test in Section 5.6.5.
Some metal structures of the GRS 77 may become magnetized if closely exposed to permanent magnets.
While this will not affect the GRS 77 itself, it may slightly affect nearby magnetic instruments in the
aircraft (e.g. whiskey compass). Ordinary use of magnetic screwdrivers to tighten the GRS 77 fasteners
will not cause problems, but non-magnetic screwdrivers are preferred. Avoid placing the GRS 77 within
one inch of magnetically mounted antennas, speaker magnets, or other strongly magnetic items.

NOTE
For non-metallic aircraft the GRS 77 must be grounded to the instrument panel. This will
require that the GRS 77 be installed near the instrument panel. Refer to Section 3.8.2 for
additional information.

NOTE
For dual G600 systems, the separation between GRS 77 #1 and # 2 should be maximized
as much as practical.

Under baggage compartments or under the cockpit floor may be good mounting locations providing the
floor attachments meet the strength requirements. Avoid unprotected areas on or near the main cabin,
where the GRS 77 may be kicked or damaged by people or baggage placed in the aircraft. The GRS 77
must be mounted in a serviceable location in the aircraft (e.g. accessible through an access panel).
Installation in an unpressurized area of a pressurized aircraft is acceptable.
The GRS 77 must be mounted within 13 feet (4.0 meters) longitudinally and 6.5 feet (2.0 meters) laterally
of the aircraft center of gravity. The mounting location for the GRS 77 should be protected from rapid
thermal transients, in particular, large heat loads from nearby high-power equipment.
The GRS 77 must be leveled to within 3.0° of the aircraft level reference. The aircraft leveling procedure
described in Section 5.6.1 must be carried out prior to flight.
The GRS 77’s forward direction must be aligned in heading to within 1.0° of the aircraft forward direction.
(The arrow symbol on the rack points forward.)
For new G600 installations in tube and fabric aircraft, installation of the GRS 77 is not permitted in
lightning zones 1A, 1B, or 2B (refer to Appendix J) if the electrical bonding clamp illustrated in
Figure 3-25 is used. Refer to Section 3.2.3.2.5 for the preferred installation method for tube and fabric
aircraft.

CAUTION
It is strongly recommended to avoid placing the GRS 77 AHRS in the region 18 inches
forward and 18 inches aft of the propellers on twin engine aircraft, as shown in Figure 2-
8. If the GRS 77 AHRS is placed in this region, substantial rework of the surrounding
structure may be required to stiffen the location enough to resist vibration induced in the
skin and surrounding structure by propeller blast. This rework is beyond the scope of
guidance provided in this installation manual.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-34 Rev. L
$92,',167$//$7,212)7+(*56$+56
,1&+(6)25(,1&+(6$)72)7+(3523(//(5
/2&$7,216217:,1(1*,1($,5&5$)7

Figure 2-8. GRS 77 AHRS Location Considerations for Twin Engine Aircraft

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-35
2.5.11.5 GMU44 Location and Mounting
The GMU 44 is an extremely sensitive three-axis magnetic sensor. It is more sensitive to nearby magnetic
disturbances than a flux gate magnetometer. For this reason, when choosing a mounting location for the
GMU 44, it is recommended that the minimum distances specified in Table 2-8 be observed. In the event
that all of the minimum distances cannot be observed, Table 2-8 also specifies magnetic disturbances to
avoid in order of priority. The chosen location must be surveyed prior to installation of the GMU 44 to
verify its acceptability (refer to Section 3.2.4.3). Section 6.1 provides guidance on troubleshooting the
GMU 44 magnetometer location. Generally acceptable locations are shown in Figure 2-10 and specific
requirements for metallic and non-metallic aircraft are found in Section 2.5.11.5.2 and Section 2.5.11.5.3,
respectively.

CAUTION
If mounting the GMU 44 in the location used by an existing flux valve or flux gate, the
Magnetic Interference Survey (Section 3.2.4.3) MUST STILL BE SUCCESSFULLY
COMPLETED. Although the location may have been satisfactory for a flux valve or flux
gate, it may not be acceptable for the GMU 44.

NOTE
If planning to reuse the existing flux valve or flux gate wiring for the GMU44, it must be
verified that the existing wiring meets the requirements specified for the GMU 44 (i.e.
same number of shielded conductors, minimum wire AWG, equivalent wire type, etc.). In
many cases the existing wiring will have to be replaced.

Table 2-8. Magnetic Disturbances

Recommended
Disturbance Source Priority
Min Distance
10 feet 
Electric motors and relays, including servo motors 1
(3.0 meters)
Ferromagnetic structure greater than 1 kg total (iron, steel, or cobalt 8.2 feet 
2
materials, especially landing gear structure) (2.5 meters)
3 feet 
Ferromagnetic materials less than 1 kg total, such as control cables 3
(1.0 meter)
3 feet 
Any electrical device drawing more than 100 mA current 4
(1.0 meter)
Electrical conductors passing more than 100 mA current (may require to 3 feet 
5
be twisted shielded pair if within close proximity to GMU 44) (1.0 meter)
2 feet 
Electrical devices drawing less than 100 mA current 6
(0.6 meter)
Magnetic measuring device other than another GMU 44 (e.g. installed 2 feet 
7
flux gates, even if not powered) (0.6 meter)
Electrical conductors passing less than 100 mA current (May require to 1.3 feet 
8
be twisted shielded pair if within close proximity to GMU 44) (0.4 meter)

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-36 Rev. L
Ensure that any electrical conductor that comes within close proximity (approximately three feet) of the
GMU 44 is installed as a twisted shielded pair, not a single-wire conductor (if possible, the shield should
be grounded at both ends).
Use nonmagnetic materials to mount the GMU 44, and replace any magnetic fasteners within 20 inches
with nonmagnetic equivalents (e.g. replace zinc-plated steel screws used to mount wing covers or wingtips
with nonmagnetic stainless steel screws).
In general, wing mounting of the GMU 44 magnetometer is strongly preferred. If wing mounting is not
possible, it may be necessary to install the GMU 44 in the tail section of the aircraft. Fuselage mounting is
permitted, but NOT within two feet of the cabin area because of numerous potential disturbances that can
interfere with accurate operation. Refer to Figure 2-7. If the GMU 44 is mounted within the fuselage, a
structural validation of the GMU 44 mount is required, as described in Section 3.3.
The GMU 44 must be mounted in a serviceable location in the aircraft (e.g. accessible through an access
panel). Installation in an unpressurized area of a pressurized aircraft is acceptable.
If installing the G600 in combination with a separately approved Electronic Standby Instrument System
that includes heading the following criteria also apply:
• If the whiskey compass is retained in the aircraft, the location of the ESIS magnetometer should be
separated from the G600 magnetometer locations by as much distance as practicable.
• If the whiskey compass is not retained in the aircraft, the location of the ESIS magnetometer must
be separated from the G600 magnetometer locations by at least 12 inches. Wiring associated with
the ESIS magnetometer must also be routed independent from the G600 magnetometer(s).
• Wiring associated with the ESIS magnetometer should also be routed independent from the G600
magnetometer(s).

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-37
$&&(37$%/(/2&$7,21)25*08
0$*1(720(7(5:,1*02817,1*

$&&(37$%/(/2&$7,21)25*08
0$*1(720(7(5)86(/$*(02817,1*

)70,1
*080867127%(&/26(5
7+$1)((772&$%,1

$&&(37$%/(/2&$7,21)25*08
0$*1(720(7(5:,1*02817,1*

127(6
$6758&785$/9$/,'$7,212)7+(*0802817,1*,65(48,5(',)*08
,6,167$//(':,7+,17+()86(/$*(

Figure 2-9. Acceptable Locations for GMU 44 Magnetometer (Top View)

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-38 Rev. L
$&&(37$%/(/2&$7,21)25*080$*1(720(7(5
9(57,&$/67$%,/,=(502817,1*

)70,1
*080867127%(&/26(5
7+$1)((772&$%,1

$&&(37$%/(/2&$7,21)25*08
0$*1(720(7(5)86(/$*(02817,1*
127(6
$6758&785$/9$/,'$7,212)7+(*0802817,1*,65(48,5(',)*08
,6,167$//(':,7+,17+()86(/$*(

Figure 2-10. Acceptable Locations for GMU 44 Magnetometer (Side View)

The GMU 44 must be leveled to within 3.0° of the aircraft level reference in pitch and roll, as shown in
Figure 2-11.

*08

ƒ0$;,080

Figure 2-11. Level Mounting of GMU 44 Magnetometer

The GMU 44s forward direction should be within 0.5° in heading of the aircraft forward direction
(longitudinal axis). If it is not possible to guarantee this accuracy, installation alignment to within 2.5° is
acceptable in combination with the Post Installation Heading Compensation procedure described in
Section 5.6.4. It is strongly preferred that the GMU 44 alignment is aligned as close as possible to the
aircraft longitudinal axis. Refer to Figure 2-12.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-39
*08
$/,*10(17 $,5&5$)7
+($',1*

“ƒ0$;
“ƒ35()(55('

Figure 2-12. Heading Offset Limit GMU 44 Magnetometer

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-40 Rev. L
2.5.11.5.1 Considerations for Wing Grounded Light Fixtures
The following installation practices are recommended when installing the GMU 44 in the wing.
• The wing tip lights should not have a power ground connected to the chassis of the light assembly
that would then be connected back to the airframe ground via the light assembly mounting.
• A dedicated power ground should be used and returned as a twisted pair with the power source
back into the fuselage for a wing mounted GMU 44.
These installation practices will prevent magnetically interfering currents from flowing in the wing skin
that encloses the GMU 44. Electrically isolating the light assembly should not be used as an alternative to
item 1 above, unless the isolated light assembly has been analyzed for adequate protection against direct
effects of lightning.
2.5.11.5.2 GMU 44 Location in Metal Aircraft
The GMU 44 must be installed inside the aircraft. It is recommended that GMU 44 be located in Lightning
Zone 3. Refer to Appendix K for information on lightning zoning and guidance on determining the
lightning zones for a particular aircraft. If the GMU 44 cannot be mounted in Zone 3, then it may be
mounted in Zone 2A of the aircraft, but it must not be mounted in any non-conducting fairings/housings
that are located in Zone 2A. In addition, the GMU 44 cannot be mounted within 0.5m (20”) of the rear-
most point of the fuselage. The GMU 44 must be electrically bonded to the aircraft structure.
If the existing flux gate was mounted in the wingtip, it is also acceptable to mount the GMU 44 in the
wingtip provided the wingtip cover is made out of metal. If the aircraft has tip tanks, the tip tank must also
be made of metal and there must be at least one intermediate rib between the tip tank and the rib on which
the GMU44 is installed. If the wingtip cover is not made out of metal, the GMU 44 can still be mounted in
the wingtip in accordance with Appendix K.
Refer to Appendix K for information about acceptable locations and bonding requirements for all aircraft
models.
2.5.11.5.3 GMU 44 Location in Non-Metallic Aircraft
The GMU 44 must be installed inside the aircraft. It is recommended that GMU 44 be located in Lightning
Zone 3. Refer to Appendix J for information on lightning zoning and guidance on determining the
lightning zones for a particular aircraft. If the GMU 44 cannot be mounted in Zone 3, then it may be
mounted in Zone 2A of the fuselage of the aircraft, but it must not be mounted in Zone 2A of the wing or
empennage. The GMU 44 cannot be mounted within 0.5m (20”) of the rear-most point of the fuselage. The
GMU 44 must be electrically isolated from the aircraft ground plane and maintain a minimum 0.5”
clearance from surrounding conductive components and structure.
Refer to Appendix K for information about acceptable locations and isolation requirements for all aircraft
models.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-41
2.5.11.6 GDC 74( ) Location and Mounting
The GDC 74( ) can be installed in any section of the aircraft’s fuselage or the forward equipment bay for
multi-engine aircraft. The GDC 74( ) must be mounted in a serviceable location in the aircraft (e.g.
accessible through an access panel). Installation in an unpressurized area of a pressurized aircraft is
acceptable. It is recommended to install the GDC 74( ) as close to the Pitot-static lines as possible to avoid
running long Pitot-static lines throughout the aircraft fuselage.

NOTE
For non-metallic aircraft the GDC 74( ) must be grounded to the instrument panel. This
will require that the GDC 74( ) be installed near the instrument panel. Refer to
Section 3.8.2 for additional information.

NOTE
For dual G600 systems, the separation between GDC 74( ) #1 and # 2 should be
maximized as much as practical.

The GDC 74( ) can be oriented in any position from horizontal to 45° past vertical. Figure C-8 and
Figure C-9 show the acceptable range of GDC 74( ) mounting orientation.
The GDC 74( ) has two ports that are connected to the aircraft’s Pitot pressure source and static pressure
source. The two ports are labeled on the unit (refer to Figure 2-13). The pressure ports have 1/8-27 ANPT
female threads. The mating fitting must have 1/8-27 ANPT male threads.

3,727$,53257

67$7,&$,53257

Figure 2-13. GDC 74( ) Air Hose Fitting Locations

Use appropriate air hoses and fittings to connect the Pitot and static lines to the unit. Avoid sharp bends and
routing near aircraft control cables. The GDC 74( ) should not be at the low point of the Pitot or static
plumbing lines, to avoid moisture or debris collecting at or near the unit. Ensure that no deformations of
the airframe surface have been made that would affect the relationship between measured static air
pressure and true ambient static air pressure for any flight condition. Refer to 14 CFR Part 43 Appendix E
for approved practices while installing hoses and connections.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-42 Rev. L
2.5.11.7 GTP 59 Location and Mounting
In general, the GTP 59 may be mounted on any location on the aircraft skin as long as it is in the proper
lightning zone and kept away from heat sources, e.g. exhaust, engine cowlings, cabin exhaust valves, direct
sunlight, etc. In addition, the GTP 59 cannot be mounted within 0.5m (20”) of the rear-most point of the
fuselage. The GTP 59 must not be mounted in any wet or dry fuel tank area under any circumstances. It is
recommended that the GTP 59 be located in Lightning Zone 3, although Zone 2A is acceptable in some
instances. For aircraft model-specific information regarding acceptable lightning zones for GTP 59
placement, refer to Table K-1. Table K-2 contains information on lightning zoning and guidance on
determining the lightning zones for a particular aircraft.
Refer to Figure 2-14 and Figure 2-15 for acceptable locations for the GTP 59 temperature probe. These
locations provide general guidance only. For exact locations the lightning zones must be considered for
each particular aircraft. Additional guidance for metallic and non-metallic aircraft is found in
Section 2.5.11.7.1 and Section 2.5.11.7.2, respectively.
The GTP 59 OAT probe has no icing protection. If ice accumulates on the GTP 59 OAT probe, its accuracy
is unknown. Consequently, air temperature measurements may be incorrect if ice accumulates on the
probe. Furthermore, computations dependent upon air temperature measurements may be affected (e.g.
true airspeed and delta-ISA).
It is recommended that the GTP 59 be mounted on the bottom of the wing on or near an access panel (it
must be mounted on an access panel in non-metallic aircraft). The selected location must allow the GTP 59
to protrude into the airstream when the aircraft is in flight.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-43
$&&(37$%/(/2&$7,21
)25*732$7352%(
81'(56,'(2):,1*
2876,'(2)(;+$867675($0

'212702817*732$7352%(
,16,'(2)(;+$867675($0
81'(51($7+:,1*25)86(/$*(

'212702817*732$7352%(
21(1*,1(&2:/,1*

$&&(37$%/(/2&$7,21
)25*732$7352%(
81'(56,'(2):,1*
2876,'(2)(;+$867675($0

$&&(37$%/(/2&$7,21 $&&(37$%/(/2&$7,21
)25*732$7352%( )25*732$7352%(
81'(56,'(2)7$,/ 216,'(:$//2))86(/$*(
2876,'(2)(;+$867675($0 12721(1*,1(&2:/,1*
$%29((;+$867675($0

'212702817*732$7352%(
21(1*,1(&2:/,1*
(;+$867

'2127,167$//
*732$7352%(
2181'(56,'(2))86(/$*(

Figure 2-14. Acceptable Locations for GTP 59 Temperature Probe - Single Engine Aircraft

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-44 Rev. L
$&&(37$%/(/2&$7,21 (;+$867675($0
)25*732$7352%(
81'(56,'(2):,1*
2876,'((;+$867675($0
'212702817
*732$7352%(
,16,'(2)(;+$867675($0

$&&(37$%/(/2&$7,21
*732$7352%(
6,'(:$//2))86(/$*(
,16,'($,5,1/(7'8&7

$&&(37$%/(/2&$7,21
)25*732$7352%(
$&&(37$%/(/2&$7,21
21)86(/$*(%(1($7+
)25*732$7352%(
+25,=217$/67$%,/,=(5
81'(56,'(2):,1*
2876,'((;+$867675($0 '212702817
*732$7352%(
,16,'(2)(;+$867675($0

(;+$867675($0

Figure 2-15. Acceptable Locations for GTP 59 Temperature Probe - Twin Engine Aircraft

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-45
2.5.11.7.1 GTP 59 Location in Metal Aircraft

NOTE
The GTP 59 must be electrically bonded to the aircraft skin for installations in metal
aircraft.

If a suitable location for the GTP 59 cannot be found in Lightning Zone 3, then it can be installed in 
Zone 2A. However, In order to be installed in Zone 2A, the aircraft skin or access panel must be aluminum
and at least 0.032” thick, and the GTP 59 must be electrically bonded to the aluminum skin (if the
aluminum skin is less than 0.032”, a doubler will be required). The doubler or access panel must have four
or more fasteners each providing electrical bond. The GTP 59 may not be installed on the aircraft skin in
Lightning Zones 1B, 1A, 1C or 2B. Refer to Appendix J for lightning zoning information.
If a suitable location cannot be found in Lightning Zones 3 or 2A, it is permissible to install the GTP 59
probe elsewhere provided it is inside an air inlet duct and all of the following conditions are met:
• The air inlet duct cover is of metal and is electrically grounded to the aircraft.
• The GTP 59 is mounted such that it is recessed within the duct. The distance from the outermost
surface of the duct cover to any part of the GTP 59 must be more than the narrowest opening in the
duct cover by the GTP 59 (e.g. where the GTP 59 is mounted, the duct cover contains louvers that
are 2” x 8” – the GTP 59 must be no closer than 2” to the outermost surface of the duct cover).
• Air outlet ducts should not be used, as they can affect the temperature reading. Potential outlets
would be exhaust for avionics bays, engine cowling louvers, cabin vent outlets, etc.
2.5.11.7.2 GTP 59 Location in Non-Metallic Aircraft

NOTE
For most non-metallic aircraft, the GTP 59 must be electrically isolated from the aircraft
ground plane and maintain a minimum 0.5” clearance from surrounding conductive
components and structure. Refer to Table K-1 for aircraft model specific information
about isolation of the GTP 59.

The GTP 59 can only be located in Lightning Zone 3 area of the aircraft. This STC does not allow the
installation of the GTP 59 directly in the aircraft skin for non-metallic aircraft; consequently, the GTP 59
must be mounted in an access panel. In addition, the GTP 59 must be mounted to an electrically non-
conducting surface. If non-conductive surface does not exist then a non-conductive doubler must be used
to provide one (see Section 7 for more details). In addition, a minimum 0.5” clearance must be maintained
between the GTP 59 and any surrounding conductive components and structure.

NOTE
Carbon reinforced composite (with or without mesh) or fiberglass with mesh is considered
to be conductive. Wood, Kevlar and fiberglass without mesh is considered to be non-
conductive.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-46 Rev. L
2.5.11.8 Copilot ADI with Flight Director - Location
In some installations it may be desired to install an ADI with a flight director on the copilot’s side (e.g. an
ADI with a flight director that must be retained for proper autopilot operation, such as the KI 256, is being
relocated to the copilot’s side). If it is desired to relocate this ADI to the copilot’s side and retain the flight
director presentation, this ADI must intersect the copilot’s primary view centerline as shown in 
Figure 2-16.

&RSLORW V,QVWUXPHQW3DQHO *ODUHVKLHOG

7KH$',PXVW
LQWHUVHFWWKH
3ULPDU\9LHZ
&HQWHUOLQH

3ULPDU\9LHZ&HQWHUOLQH
127(6
'(7(50,1(7+(&23,/27¶635,0$5<9,(:&(17(5/,1($6)2//2:6
$1,0$*,1$5</,1((;7(1'('7+528*+7+(&(17(52)7+(&23,/27¶6
6($7$1'352-(&7('21727+(,167580(173$1(/6+28/'%(86('$6
7+(35,0$5<9,(:&(17(5/,1(
,)7+(&21752/<2.(2567,&.,62))6(7)5207+(&(17(52)7+(
&23,/27¶66($77+(&(17(52)7+(&21752/<2.(2567,&.,17+(
1(875$/326,7,210$<%(86('$67+(35,0$5<9,(:&(17(5/,1(

Figure 2-16. Location of Copilot ADI with Flight Director Presentation

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-47
2.5.11.9 GAD 43/43e Location and Mounting

NOTE
Mechanical installation requirements for the GAD 43 and GAD 43e units are identical
except where noted.

The GAD 43/43e can be installed in any section of the aircraft’s fuselage or the forward equipment bay for
multi-engine aircraft. The GAD 43/43e must be mounted in a serviceable location in the aircraft (e.g.
accessible through an access panel). Installation in an unpressurized area of a pressurized aircraft is
acceptable.

NOTE
For non-metallic aircraft the GAD 43/43e must be grounded to the instrument panel. This
will require that the GAD 43/43e be installed near the instrument panel. Refer to
Section 3.8.2 for additional information.

The GAD 43/43e can be oriented in any position and secured to structure using one of two pairs of
mounting flanges as shown in Figure 2-17.

*$'H81,7

*$'H81,7

7$//25,(17$7,21 6+25725,(17$7,21

Figure 2-17. GAD 43/43e Short and Tall Installation Orientations (GAD 43 shown)

2.5.12 Cable and Wiring Considerations

Wiring should be installed in accordance with AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11. When wire separation cannot be
achieved, the following issues should be addressed:
• The cable harness should not be located near flight control cables, high electrical capacity lines or
fuel lines.
• The cable harness should be located in a protected area of the aircraft.
• Do not route cable near high-energy sources (i.e. motors or high heat sources) .
The length of shield drain connections at the G600 LRU connectors must not exceed three inches.
2.5.12.1 Not Used

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-48 Rev. L
2.5.12.2 Pressurized Aircraft Considerations
In pressurized aircraft, wiring that penetrates the pressure vessel must be installed in accordance with the
Type Design of the aircraft. Any wires that penetrate the pressure bulkhead must use existing provisions
such as spare pins in the existing bulkhead connectors, or existing sealed wire thoroughfares in accordance
with the aircraft maintenance manual.
Substantiation for additional holes in the pressure vessel is beyond the scope of this manual and would
require additional data from the aircraft manufacturer or other FAA approved data.
2.5.13 Cooling Requirements
The GDU 620 has two cooling fans integrated into the bottom of the chassis to supply forced-air cooling to
the unit. The mounting configuration should not restrict intake airflow into the fans at the bottom of the
display, or exhaust airflow from the ducts at the top of the display.
2.5.14 Magnetic Compass Recalibration
After reconfiguring the avionics in the cockpit panel recalibrate the compass and make the necessary
changes for noting correction data.
2.5.15 RVSM Considerations
TBM 700/850 series aircraft that comply with the installation guidance in Appendix P and are included in
the Group Approval are eligible for airworthiness approval in RVSM airspace. Other aircraft operating at
or above RVSM published altitudes will not meet the RVSM requirements with the G600 installation as
outlined in this manual.
2.5.16 GPSS (Roll Steering) Considerations
The G600 system can support autopilots using ARINC 429 GPSS, or act as a roll-steering converter by
providing analog GPSS information via its heading datum/error output.When using the GDU 620 as a roll-
steering converter, either the GDU 620 HDG key (GDU 620 v6.11 or later) or a discrete input can be used
to switch between HDG and GPSS mode.
2.5.16.1 ARINC 429 GPSS
The G600 (GDU 620) has an ARINC 429 output that can be connected to autopilots that are capable of
utilizing ARINC 429 GPSS information. On the AUTOPILOT ARINC 429 output, the GDU 620 forwards
GPSS information from the navigator (1 or 2) that is currently selected on the GDU 620 HSI – there is no
need to provide external switching. For installations with autopilots that accept 429 GPSS (e.g. S-TEC
55X and Honeywell (Bendix-King) KFC 225) an external GPSS switch is NOT required.
2.5.16.2 G600 Roll Steering Converter Function
The GDU 620 can act as a roll-steering converter. It will receive the ARINC 429 GPSS information from
the selected navigator (1 or 2) and translate it to a heading error. The HDG key (GDU 620 v6.11 or later) or
the GPSS Enable In* discrete input may be used to control the GPS Steering (roll steering) function of the
GDU 620. If the GDU 620 HDG key is utilized, pressing and holding the HDG key will toggle the
GDU 620 heading datum (error) output between ARINC 429 GPSS information and the heading bug. If
the GPSS Enable In* input is utilized, grounding this input will cause the GDU 620 heading datum (error)
output to be driven based upon ARINC 429 GPSS information. If this discrete input is open, the GPSS
function will be disabled and the heading datum output will be based upon the setting of the heading bug.
For installations that utilize the GDU 620 as a roll-steering converter, the autopilot must be in HDG mode
to use the GDU 620 for GPSS. Refer to Figure F-19 for interconnect information if using an external
switch, and to Section 5.5.9.5 for configuration information.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-49
2.5.17 ADI Replacement Considerations
Some existing ADIs contain a fast/slow or angle of attack (AOA) indication. Currently, the GDU 620 only
supports Fast/Slow displays listed in Appendix E. Consequently, prior to undertaking a G600 installation
in aircraft containing such an ADI, it must be determined if the fast/slow or AOA indication is required by
the AFM/POH. If a fast/slow or AOA indication is required and it is not supported by the G600, it must be
provided to the pilot by alternate means. The provision of an alternate fast/slow or AOA indication is
beyond the scope of the G600 AML STC.
Some existing ADIs contain autopilot mode annunciations. The GDU 620 only supports autopilot mode
displays noted in Table 5-20. As part of a G600 installation in aircraft containing such an ADI, the installer
must ensure equivalent mode annunciations are provided as part of a G600 installation. The provision of
these autopilot mode annunciations is beyond the scope of the G600 AML STC.
2.5.18 Aerobatic Aircraft Considerations
The GRS 77/GMU 44 is capable of maneuvers through a range of 360° in bank and pitch. The rotation rate
capability is ±200° per second, although ARINC 429 angular rate output messages are limited to ±128° per
second.
2.5.19 Altitude Encoder Function (GDU™ 620 software version 3.00 or later)
The GDU 620 receives ARINC 429 altitude data from the GDC 74( ) and can output RS-232 serial altitude
in the Shadin format (9600 baud). This altitude output can be provided to the transponder, allowing the
existing altitude encoder to be removed when the G600 is installed.
2.5.20 Equipment Bonding Considerations
For all G600 installations the instrument panel must be made of aluminum. The GDU 620 must be
electrically bonded to the instrument panel. Bonding requirements for other LRUs vary based upon
airframe type. Refer to Section 3.8 for specific bonding instructions.Other units that are interfaced to the
GDU 620 include weather radar, ADS-B traffic units, other NAV units, DME units (warntone generator,
flap control and generator, or stall protection warning unit).
2.5.20.1 Metal Aircraft
The GDU 620 display, GRS 77 AHRS, GDC 74( ) ADC, GAD 43/43e, GTP 59 temperature probe and
GMU 44 magnetometer and any supporting brackets must be electrically bonded to aircraft ground
through the airframe metallic structure (refer to Section 3.8.1 for specific bonding instructions).
2.5.20.2 Nonmetallic Aircraft
The GDU 620 display, GRS 77 AHRS, GDC 74( ) ADC, GAD 43/43e Adapter and any supporting
brackets must be electrically bonded to the instrument panel. This can be accomplished using metallic
structure or aluminum foil tape (refer to Section 3.8.2 for specific bonding instructions).

NOTE
For installations with dual G600 systems, GRS 77 #2 and GDC 74( ) #2 are not required
to be bonded to the instrument panel.

The GTP 59 temperature probe and GMU 44 magnetometer must not be electrically bonded to the aircraft
structure. If the location chosen for the GTP 59 or GMU 44 is conductive, an insulating doubler must be
installed to electrically isolate the unit.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-50 Rev. L
NOTE
Carbon reinforced composite (with or without mesh) or fiberglass with mesh is considered
to be conductive. Wood, Kevlar and fiberglass without mesh is considered to be non-
conductive.

2.5.21 Non-Metallic Aircraft Considerations

Aircraft which are constructed out of non-metallic materials such as fiberglass, carbon composite material,
or fabric must take special precautions to protect the G600 equipment from high-intensity radiated fields
(HIRF) and indirect effects of lightning (IEL).
2.5.21.1 Electrical Bonding
The GDU 620 must be electrically bonded to the instrument panel. In addition, the GRS 77, GDC 74( ),
and GAD 43/43e must be electrically bonded to the instrument panel via existing metallic structure. If
suitable structure does not exist, bonding can be achieved using aluminum tape. The tape length-to-width
ratio of 7:1 or less must be maintained (i.e., for every seven inches in length the width must be a minimum
of one inch). The tape makes it necessary to locate the GRS 77, GDC 74( ), and GAD 43/43e in close
proximity to the instrument panel in the aircraft. Refer to Section 3.8.1 for specific bonding instructions.

NOTE
For installations with dual G600 systems, GRS 77 #2 and GDC 74( ) #2 are not required
to be bonded to the instrument panel.

2.5.21.2 Circuit Protection

The G600 LRUs must be protected with transient voltage suppressors (TVS). If the standby ADI is
electric, it must also be protected with two TVSs. The RS-232 connection between the GDU 620 and the
GRS 77 must have an inline resistor installed. Refer to the Attitude and Air Data Interconnect drawings in
Appendix F for additional information.

NOTE
For installations with dual G600 systems, TVS and resistor protection is not required for
the GDU 620 #2, GRS 77 #2 or GDC 74( ) #2.

2.5.21.3 Wire Routing

The ground return from the GRS 77, GDC 74( ), and GAD 43/43e should be routed with the wires going to
the instrument panel and must be terminated at the instrument panel ground. Where possible, the wiring
should be routed on top of the aluminum tape described in Section 2.5.21.1.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-51
2.5.22 VFR-Only Installation Considerations
It is possible to install the G600 for VFR operation only. If this type of installation is desired, some of the
requirements otherwise specified by this manual can be relaxed. Changes to a basic G600 installation are
as follows:
• Standby instruments are not required.
• The non-metallic aircraft considerations for circuit protection (Section 2.5.21.2) are not required.
The non-metallic aircraft considerations for bonding and wire routing (Section 2.5.21.1 and
Section 2.5.21.3) are required.
• If the aircraft operation is currently limited to VFR operation only, no additional placards are
required. However, if the aircraft is not currently limited to VFR operation only, a placard limiting
aircraft operation to VFR only must be installed. Refer to Section 2.5.3.3 for additional details.
In addition, data for some aircraft models listed on the AML is currently insufficient to substantiate IFR
operations with the G600. Consequently, these aircraft models are limited to VFR operation only and must
be placarded in accordance with Section 2.5.3.3. Refer to Table K-1 to determine if a particular aircraft
model is limited to VFR when modified with the installation of a G600 system.
A typical installation limited to VFR operation only is shown in Figure 2-18.

$,5&5$)7/,0,7('729)521/<

Figure 2-18. VFR Only GDU 620 Installation

2.5.23 Airspeed Warning Device Considerations

The G600 system does not generate any aural airspeed warning tones. However, the GDU 620 does
provide five configurable Active-Low airspeed discrete outputs that can be utilized with external devices
to trigger aural airspeed warnings. If the aircraft has an existing system that provides aural airspeed
warnings, the airspeed aural warning system must continue to function after the installation of the G600
system. For example, if the original airspeed indicator is part of the airspeed warning system it may be
retained to generate airspeed aural warnings. Alternately, the airspeed indicator may be removed and the
GDU 620 configurable airspeed discrete outputs utilized to trigger aural airspeed warnings. Refer to
Section 5.5.6B for discrete output configuration information.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-52 Rev. L
2.5.24 ARINC 708 Weather Radar Considerations

NOTE
The GDU 620 may be interfaced to an ARINC 708 weather radar in metal aircraft only.
Refer to Appendix K to determine whether a particular model is considered metal or non-
metallic.
In order to interface an ARINC 708 weather radar to the GDU 620, the weather radar transceiver must be
electrically bonded to the surrounding structure with a resistance of 10 m or less. Overbraid must be
installed over the weather radar transceiver cabling that is located beneath the radome before it enters the
metal fuselage or metal wing for a radome in Lightning Zone 1. Overbraid is required if the radome is
located entirely within Zones 2 or 3 and the cabling outside the metal enclosure is over 12 inches (for Zone
2) or 24 inches (for Zone 3) in length. Extra cable length (for service, etc.) must be overbraided or secured
inside the metal fuselage or metal wing structure so it will not be exposed to lightning transients during
normal operation.
In order to avoid recalibration of the weather radar when upgrading from an ALREADY CALIBRATED
weather radar installation, it is suggested that the installer activate the Maintenance Page of the original
indicator BEFORE IT IS REMOVED and write down the value for 'Roll Trim'. This value may be entered
in the GDU 620 to maintain the existing calibration.
2.5.25 HSDB Ethernet Architecture Requirements
When the GDU 620 is interfaced with the GTN 6XX/7XX Table 2-9. Garmin LRU Ethernet Port
navigator, GTS 8XX traffic system, GDL 69/69A datalink, Summary
or GWX 68/70 Weather Radar, each LRU must be
connected so that maximum data path redundancy is Number of
LRU
achieved. The Ethernet architecture options shown in the Ethernet Ports
following sections must be followed when utilizing HSDB GDU 620 2
Ethernet connections between LRUs. Interconnect diagrams
for each architecture are found in Figure F-36 and GTN 6XX 4
Figure F-37. GTN 7XX 4
Some Garmin LRUs have limited HSDB Ethernet ports. A GTS 8XX 1
summary of the Garmin LRUs with Ethernet capability and
the number of ports for each is shown in Table 2-9. GDL 69/69A 4
GWX 68/70 1
NOTE
When connecting to HSDB Ethernet ports on LRUs other than the GDU 620, refer to the
installation manual for that system to verify if there are additional requirements
associated with the use of its HSDB Ethernet ports.

NOTE
Whenever a GTN 6XX/7XX navigator is installed with the GDU 620, one HSDB Ethernet
port on the GTN 6XX/7XX must be connected directly to an HSDB Ethernet port on the
GDU 620.

NOTE
The Ethernet architecture options shown in the following sections are provided for
guidance only. They are not intended to include every possible installation and
configuration; they are provided to help the installer choose the optimal HSDB Ethernet
architecture design for each specific installation.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-53
2.5.25.1 Single G600 Installation without GTN 6XX/7XX
In a single G600 installation without the
GTN 6XX/7XX navigator, both HSDB ports on the
*'8
GDU 620 must be utilized before connecting
additional LRUs to available HSDB ports on LRUs

+6'%

+6'%
already connected to the GDU 620, as shown in *'/$
;0:;
*76;;
7$67&$6,
Figure 2-19. The HSDB connection to the GTS 8XX (QWHUWDLQ
RSWLRQDO
RSWLRQDO

may have the lowest priority because the HSDB

:,7+287*:;
interface to the GTS 8XX is only used when in
Configuration mode. The HSDB architecture will not
affect the availability of traffic in normal operating *'8
mode. If the GDL 69/69A is not installed, the GTS
8XX must be connected directly to the GDU 620.

+6'%

+6'%
*'/$ *:;
*76;; +6'%
;0:; :HDWKHU
7$67&$6, (QWHUWDLQ 5DGDU
RSWLRQDO RSWLRQDO RSWLRQDO

:,7+*:;

Figure 2-19. Single G600 Installation

without GTN 6XX/7XX

2.5.25.2 Dual G600 Installation without GTN 6XX/7XX

In a dual G600 installation without the
GTN 6XX/7XX navigator, both HSDB ports on the *'8 +6'% *'8
GDU 620 must be utilized before connecting 1R 1R
additional LRUs to available HSDB ports on LRUs
already connected to the GDU 620, as shown in

+6'%
+6'%

*'/$ *76;;
;0:;
Figure 2-20. The HSDB connection to the GTS 8XX (QWHUWDLQ +6'%
7$67&$6,
RSWLRQDO
RSWLRQDO
may have the lowest priority because the HSDB
interface to the GTS 8XX is only used when in :,7+287*:;
Configuration mode. The HSDB architecture will not
affect the availability of traffic in normal operating
*'8 *'8
mode. If the GDL 69/69A is not installed, the GTS +6'%

1R 1R
8XX must be connected directly to the GDU 620 (if
HSDB ports on both GDU 620s are available, the
+6'%
+6'%

*:; *'/$
GTS 8XX must be connected to GDU 620 #1). :HDWKHU ;0:;
*76;;
7$67&$6,
5DGDU (QWHUWDLQ +6'% RSWLRQDO
RSWLRQDO RSWLRQDO

:,7+*:;
Figure 2-20. Dual G600 Installation
without GTN 6XX/7XX

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-54 Rev. L
2.5.25.3 Single G600 Installation with Single GTN 6XX/7XX Installation
In a single G600 installation with one GTN 6XX/7XX
navigator, HSDB connections must be made as shown
*'8
in Figure 2-21. The HSDB output from the GTN
6XX/7XX must be connected directly to the

+6'%

+6'%
GDU 620. The HSDB connection to the GTS 8XX
may have the lowest priority because the HSDB *76;; +6'%
1RRU1R *'/$
*366%$6 ;0:;
interface to the GTS 8XX is only used when in 7$67&$6,
1DYLJDWRU +6'% (QWHUWDLQ
RSWLRQDO
Configuration mode. The HSDB architecture will not *71;;;; RSWLRQDO

affect the availability of traffic in normal operating :,7+287*:;

mode. If the GWX 68/70 and GDL 69/69A are not
installed, the GTS 8XX must still be connected
directly to the GTN 6XX/7XX navigator. One *'8
GDU 620 HSDB Ethernet port will not be utilized in *:;
:HDWKHU
this case. 5DGDU

+6'%
+6'%
RSWLRQDO

1RRU1R *'/$
*76;; +6'%
*366%$6 +6'%
;0:;
7$67&$6, 1DYLJDWRU (QWHUWDLQ
RSWLRQDO *71;;;; RSWLRQDO

:,7+*:;

Figure 2-21. Single G600 Installation with

Single GTN 6XX/7XX

2.5.25.4 Single G600 - Installation with Dual GTN 6XX/7XX Installation

In a single G600 installation with two GTN 6XX/7XX
navigators, each GTN 6XX/7XX must be connected
*'8
directly to the GDU, as shown in Figure 2-22. All
*76;;
other LRUs may be connected to the GTN 6XX/7XX +6'% 7$67&$6,
RSWLRQDO
+6'%

+6'%

navigators.
1R 1R *'/$
*366%$6 +6'% *366%$6 ;0:;
1DYLJDWRU 1DYLJDWRU +6'% (QWHUWDLQ
*71;;;; *71;;;; RSWLRQDO

+6'%
+6'%

*:;
:HDWKHU
5DGDU
RSWLRQDO

Figure 2-22. Single G600 Installation with

Dual GTN 6XX/7XX

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-55
2.5.25.5 Dual G600 - Single GTN Installation
In a dual G600 installation with one GTN 6XX/7XX, the GTN 6XX/7XX must be connected directly to at
least one GDU 620. Which GDU 620 that is connected directly to the GTN 6XX/7XX will depend upon
whether the GTN 6XX/7XX is being installed as GPS #1 or GPS #2. If the GTN 6XX/7XX will be
GPS #1, refer to Figure 2-23 for HSDB architectures (note that the second HSDB Ethernet port on
GDU 620 #2 is not utilized in this case). If the GTN 6XX/7XX will be GPS #2, refer to Figure 2-24 for
HSDB architectures.

*'8 +6'% *'8 *'8 +6'% *'8

1R 1R 1R 1R
+6'%

+6'%

+6'%
*:; 1R *'/$ 1R
:HDWKHU +6'% *366%$6 +6'%
*76;; +6'% +6'% *76;;
7$67&$6, ;0:; *366%$6
5DGDU 1DYLJDWRU (QWHUWDLQ 1DYLJDWRU 7$67&$6,
RSWLRQDO *71;;;; RSWLRQDO RSWLRQDO
RSWLRQDO *71;;;;
:,7+287*'/$
:,7+287*:;

*'8 +6'% *'8

*'8 +6'%
*'8
1R 1R
1R 1R *76;;
+6'%
7$67&$6,
+6'%

+6'%

RSWLRQDO
+6'%

+6'%
1RRU1R *'/$ *76;;
*366%$6 +6'% ;0:; +6'%
7$67&$6, *:; 1R *'/$
1DYLJDWRU (QWHUWDLQ RSWLRQDO :HDWKHU *366%$6 ;0:;
*71;;;; RSWLRQDO 5DGDU 1DYLJDWRU +6'%
(QWHUWDLQ
RSWLRQDO *71;;;; RSWLRQDO
:,7+*'/$
+6'%

:,7+*:;
*:;
:HDWKHU
Figure 2-24. Dual G600 Installation with
5DGDU
RSWLRQDO
Single GTN 6XX/7XX as GPS #2

Figure 2-23. Dual G600 Installation with

Single GTN 6XX/7XX as GPS #1

2.5.25.6 Dual G600 - Dual GTN Installation

In a dual G600 installation with dual GTN 6XX/7XX navigators, each GTN 6XX/7XX must be connected
directly to a GDU 620. All other LRUs must be connected to the GTN 6XX/7XX navigators. Refer to
Figure 2-25.

*'8 +6'% *'8

1R 1R *76;;
+6'%
7$67&$6,
RSWLRQDO
+6'%

+6'%

*:; 1R 1R *'/$

:HDWKHU +6'%
*366%$6 +6'%
*366%$6 ;0:;
5DGDU 1DYLJDWRU 1DYLJDWRU +6'%
(QWHUWDLQ
RSWLRQDO *71;;;; *71;;;; RSWLRQDO

+6'%

Figure 2-25. Dual G600 Installation with Dual GTN 6XX/7XX

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-56 Rev. L
2.5.26 Dual G600 Installation Considerations
Due to HIRF and lightning considerations, certain aircraft are not eligible for dual G600 Installations.
Refer to Table K-1 to determine which aircraft are eligible for dual G600 Installations.
2.5.27 GDU 620 Discrete Output Considerations
The GDU 620 has eight Active-Low discrete outputs. Each is an “open drain” output capable of sinking up
to 250 mA when active. Each discrete output function is configurable, as described in Section 4.2.8 of the
GDU 620 TSO Installation Manual (P/N 190-00601-04, Rev. P or later). Discrete outputs are used
throughout installation specified herein. The Airspeed Discrete outputs may be used as specified in
Section 7.2.6 to supply a signal to an existing overspeed warning system. Airspeed Discrete outputs must
be limited to support functions that have a failure condition classification of Major or less in accordance
with AC 23.1309-1E (for example; stall warning and stick pusher/shaker systems exceed Major and may
not be interfaced to a GDU 620 Airspeed Discrete output). The agency performing the installation is
responsible for determining the appropriate applications and approval of additional Airspeed Discrete
connections beyond those connections shown in this installation manual.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 2-57
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 2-58 Rev. L
3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NOTE
If the GAD 43/43e adapter is being used to replace the existing attitude source for the
autopilot, it is highly recommended that a short flight test be conducted prior to starting
the G600/GAD 43/43e installation to baseline the autopilot performance and ensure that
the system is operating as designed. This short flight test is repeated after completion of
the aircraft modification to validate that the GAD 43/43e attitude source operates
identical to the original mechanical gyro. Refer to Section 5.10.2.5 for additional details.

3.1 Special Tools Required

Laser Square
A laser square with a line accuracy of ± 3/32 inches end-to-end at 15 feet perpendicular distance (or better)
is optional, but recommended, for GMU 44 magnetometer installation. Stanley Laser Level Square
77-188 S2 meets the line accuracy requirement.
Digital Level
A digital level is recommended for use when installing the GRS 77 AHRS and GMU 44 magnetometer.
Protractor Tool
A protractor tool is required to measure the angle offset during the magnetometer installation.
Plumb Bob
A plumb-bob is required for leveling and installing the magnetometer unit.
Aircraft Jack Set
A set of aircraft jacks is recommended for stabilizing the aircraft after it is leveled.
Crimp Tool
A crimp tool meeting MIL specification M22520/2-01 and a positioner/locator are required to ensure
consistent, reliable crimp contact connections for the rear D-sub connectors. Refer to Table 3-5 for a list of
recommended crimp tools.
Milliohm Meter
A milliohm meter with an accuracy of ±0.1 m (or better) is required to measure the electrical bonding
between the G600 system components and aircraft ground.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-1
3.1.1 Tools Needed for Magnetic Interference Survey
Sight Compass
Although the use of compass rose is highly recommended, a sight compass may be used for the GMU 44
magnetometer calibration procedures in Section 5.6 if a compass rose is not readily available. Barfield
Sight Compass SC063 (or equivalent) may be used for this purpose.
Laptop or PC
A laptop or PC is required to run the magnetic interference survey software
(refer to Appendix G). This laptop or PC must meet the following minimum requirements:
Operating System Windows 2000 SP4, XP
Processor Speed 850 MHz
Hard Drive Free Memory 500 MB
RAM Memory 256 MB
Screen Resolution 1024 x 768
CD-ROM Drive
USB to RS-232 Converter Required only if the laptop or PC does not have a serial port.
DC Power Supply
A DC power supply capable of supplying 12VDC / 200 mA is required to perform the magnetic
interference survey (refer to Appendix G) prior to installing the GMU 44 Magnetometer.
RS-485 to RS-232 Converter (not required in most cases)
A RS-485 to RS-232 converter may be required to perform the magnetic interference survey (refer to
Appendix G) prior to installing the GMU 44 Magnetometer. A suitable converter is B&B Electronics
Model 422LP9R (or equivalent).
GMU 44 Location Survey Software P/N 006-A0240-00
GMU 44 Location Survey Software P/N 006-A0240-00 is required to perform the magnetic interference
survey (refer to Appendix G). This software can be downloaded under part number 006-A0241-00 from
the Garmin Dealer Resource Center.
Magnetic Interference Survey Test Cable
A test cable fabricated by the installer is required to perform the magnetic interference survey (refer to
Section G.2 for details on manufacturing this cable).
Stopwatch or Watch with a Second Hand
A stopwatch or watch with a second hand is required to measure the time for turning equipment on and off
during the survey test sequence.
3.2 Equipment Installation
Equipment dimensions and other physical characteristics can be found in Table 1-3 and Appendix C.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-2 Rev. L
3.2.1 GDU™ 620 Display Location and Mounting

NOTE
The GDU 620 must be electrically bonded to the instrument panel. If a trim plate is
utilized in the installation, it must be installed such that it will permit the GDU 620 to be
electrically bonded to the instrument panel. When measured from the rear aluminum
chassis of the GDU 620 to the instrument panel, the resistance must be 20 mΩ or less.
Refer to Section 3.8.1 for additional information about equipment bonding.

• When installing the GDU 620 display the following steps must be performed:
• Select a general location for the GDU 620 cutout as specified in Section 3.2.1.1.
• Address any considerations specific to the installation as specified in Section 3.2.1.2.
• Remove instruments necessary to facilitate installation and temporarily install the GDU 620 cutout
template. Refer to Section 3.2.1.3.
• Determine if the use of a trim plate is necessary for the installation. If necessary, determine which
type of trim plate is required. Refer to Section 3.2.1.4.
• Install the trim plate (if necessary). Refer to Section 3.2.1.5.
• Install the GDU 620. Refer to Section 3.2.1.6.
3.2.1.1 GDU™ 620 Display Location
Determine a suitable location for the GDU 620 (refer to Section 2.5.11.1 for placement information).
Example instrument panel layouts can be found in Section D.1.

NOTE
Certain Cessna aircraft may require the control yoke to be modified and the instrument
panel replaced in order to provide sufficient space in the instrument panel for the
GDU 620. Reference Section 2.5.11.3 for additional information.

NOTE
Certain Hawker Beechcraft aircraft may require that the instrument panel be replaced in
order to provide sufficient space in the instrument panel for the GDU 620. Reference
Section 2.5.11.3 for additional information.

In general, most six-pack instrument configurations usually consist of, but are not limited to, the primary
instruments - airspeed indicator, attitude indicator, altimeter, horizontal situation indicator
(HSI)/directional gyro (DG), vertical speed indicator, and turn coordinator. An ideal six-pack would have
the instruments configured so that they are aligned both vertically and horizontally with each other, evenly
spaced and adjacent to one another (Figure 3-1). Other six-pack instrument configurations consist of the
same primary instruments but with the instruments scattered and/or not aligned on the instrument panel
(Figure 3-2).

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-3
)((7



$,563(('


925,1',&$725
&ORFN .1276

9DF

GF
HOHF

(

9(57,&$/

63(('
)XHO4W\ 83
925,1',&$725

WXUQFRRUGLQDWRU '1
)((7

3(50,1

6
/ 5

PLQ

:

QRSLWFK
LQIRUPDWLRQ

(OHF&XUUHQW

7DFKRPHWHU $')

Figure 3-1. Example of an Ideal Six-Pack Instrument Configuration

)((7

925,1',&$725




$,563(('

.1276




9(57,&$/
( 63(('
83
1

925,1',&$725

GF
HOHF
'1
)((7

3(50,1

:

WXUQFRRUGLQDWRU

/ 5
PLQ
QRSLWFK (
LQIRUPDWLRQ
$')

6

&ORFN
6
2%

Figure 3-2. Example of a Non-Ideal Six-Pack Instrument Configuration

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-4 Rev. L
;;
75,03/$7(0$<%(
5(48,5('21620(
,167$//$7,216

$,563(('


.1276

&/2&.

Figure 3-3. GDU 620 Installed, Non-Ideal Six-Pack Instrument Configuration

For any instrument panel, installation of the GDU 620 is not limited to the use of cutouts for the primary
instruments. Any combination of the original cutouts for any instrument may be used as long as the
GDU 620 location satisfies the ADI intersect criteria (see Section 2.5.11.1). For example, in Figure 3-2
and Figure 3-3, the VOR indicator cutouts are used in conjunction with the adjacent primary instruments
cut outs for the GDU 620 installation.
Using the airspeed and turn coordinator cutouts for the GDU 620 installation in this example would have
caused a challenging installation, both structurally and cosmetically.
3.2.1.2 Installation Considerations
Prior to any alteration, consideration should be given to the placement of the standby instruments (see
Section 2.5.11.2 for information regarding the location of standby instruments).
Installation of the GDU 620 requires an instrument panel with a minimum thickness of 0.063” to satisfy
structural requirements. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance for connectors and wire harness on the
GDU 620, as shown in Figure 3-4.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-5
,1
0,1,080
&/($5$1&(

*'8

6,'(9,(:

Figure 3-4. GDU 620 Recommended Connector Clearance

3.2.1.3 Temporary Installation of Cutout Template

Remove all instruments required to facilitate the installation of the GDU 620. Temporarily fasten the
GDU 620 Cutout Template P/N 115-01010-00 on the instrument panel and transfer the GDU 620 LRU
outline using the outside edges of the cutout pattern. Also mark the location of the six GDU 620
mounting holes. Remove the template. See Appendix C for cutout template dimensions and reference
features.
3.2.1.4 Trim Plate Considerations
A combination of nut plates and screws are used to secure the GDU 620 to the instrument panel. On most
aircraft installations with an ideal six-pack configuration, all six nut plates can be riveted to the instrument
panel itself. On other aircraft, due to pre-existing cut outs for the original instruments, lack of material on
the instrument panel may inhibit installation of nut plates to the instrument panel. Each installation must be
evaluated as follows:
1. If all nut plates can be installed to the instrument panel, use the thin trim plate 
P/N 115-01009-00.
2. If one or two nut plates cannot be installed on the instrument panel due to insufficient material:
a) It may be possible to install “patches” to the instrument panel. Refer to Appendix H for
information on determining whether or not it would be acceptable to use patches. If all six
nut plate locations can be accommodated with nut plates on the instrument panel or patches
(2 maximum), the thin trim plate P/N 115-01009-00 may be used. It is also acceptable to use
the thick trim plate P/N 115-01009-10 if it is not desired to use patches.
b) If a) above cannot be met, the thick trim plate P/N 115-01009-10 must be used.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-6 Rev. L
3. If three or more nut plates cannot be installed on the instrument panel due to insufficient material,
the thick trim plate P/N 115-01009-10 must be used.

NOTE
If all of the nut plates can be installed onto the instrument panel and no existing cutouts
are visible when the GDU 620 is installed, it is not necessary to install any trim plate.

3.2.1.5 Trim Plate Installation (if required)

NOTE
If installing nut plates onto the trim plate it may be necessary to cut out additional
material from the instrument panel in order to provide clearance for the attachment of the
nut plate to the trim plate.

After it is decided which trim plate is to be used (thin or thick), determine the size of the trim plate and cut
it to the required size and pattern. Refer to Appendix C for the dimensions of the trim plates that are
furnished with the G600 installation kit.

NOTE
Do not permanently install the trim plate to the instrument panel until the GDU 620
installation hardware (nutplates) has been installed on the instrument panel and/or on the
thick trim plate.

Determine locations of fasteners or rivets for securing the trim plate to the instrument panel and the
GDU 620 nut plates in accordance with the requirements in Figure 3-5, Figure 3-6, and Figure 3-7.

NOTE
The thin (0.032”) trim plate can float on the instrument panel. Rivets or fasteners to
secure the thin trim plate P/N 115-01009-00 to the instrument panel are optional. The
installation of the GDU 620 will secure the trim plate in place.

If attaching the nut plates to the instrument panel, use the Cutout Template P/N 115-01010-00 as a guide to
drill out the holes for the nut plate position. Remove the Cutout Template and install the required nut plates
on the instrument panel and, if required, on the trim plate. Once all six of the GDU 620 nut plates have
been installed, permanently install the trim plate, if required.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-7
75,03/$7(7+,&.
31
,167580(173$1(/ 7+,175,03/$7(

7235(9(17$,5*$36/$<28775,03/$7(62
3$57,$/,167580(17('*(&872876213$1(/
$5(+,''(1%(1($7+75,03/$7(

,167$//$//1873/$7(621%$&.
6,'(2),167580(173$1(/

(;,67,1*,167580(17
3$1(/&872876

)25$7+,175,03/$7(,167$//$7,21
/2&$7($1',167$//$//1873/$7(6217+(,167580(173$1(/62
5,9(7+($'6$5()/86+$1'+,''(1%<75,03/$7(
1873/$7(%2'<'2(6127,17(5)(5(:,7+$'-$&(17,167580(17%2',(6
1873/$7(%2'<'2(6127/,(,1&8728723(1,1*
$'(48$7(,167580(173$1(/0$7(5,$/(;,676
$33/<$),1,6+&2$72)3$,17723/$7(35,2572),1$/,167$//
75,03/$7(2876,'(('*($65(48,5('72&/($5$'-$&(17,167580(176256:,7&+(6
),1,6+&251(56$757<3

Figure 3-5. Trim Plate Installation, Thin

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-8 Rev. L
75,03/$7(7+,&.
31
1873/$7(,167$//('21
7+,&.75,03/$7(
)$56,'(2)75,03/$7(

1873/$7(,167$//('21)$5 1873/$7(,167$//('21
6,'(2),167580(173$1(/ )$56,'(2)75,03/$7(

25,*,1$/3$1(/0$7(5,$/5(029('
5,9(76256&5(:6 1270,;(' $5(
)251873/$7(&/($5$1&(
5(48,5('3/&6($&+/2&$7,21:+(5(
1873/$7(,6,167$//('217275,03/$7(

Figure 3-6. Trim Plate Installation, Thick

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-9
1873/$7(,167$//('
2172)$56,'(2)
!0,172('*(
75,03/$7(
!0,172('*(
6&5(:6255,9(7672%(
,167$//(':,7+,152)
5,9(7256&5(: *'8*)$67(1(5/2&
/2&$7,216 *'8)$67(1(5
+2/(/2&$7,21

!0,172('*(

!0,172('*(

&255(&7&251(53/$&(0(17
06$'5,9(76
25
6&5(:6

!0,172('*( !0,172('*(
!0,172('*(
1873/$7(,167$//('2172
)$56,'(2)75,03/$7(
6((127(6 5,9(7256&5(:
/2&$7,216

6&5(:6255,9(7672%(
,167$//(':,7+,152)
*'8*)$67(1(5/2&

*'8)$67(1(5
+2/(/2&$7,21

&255(&76,'(3/$&(0(17
06$'5,9(76
25
6&5(:6
&255(&7*8,'/(/,1(7$%/( 127(6
+$5':$5( ',0(16,21$ 0,172('*( +$5':$5( 63(&,),&$7,21
5,9(76
06/ QRDOWHUQDWH
6&5(:6 06/ 0)
1873/$7(6 06/ 0.
06/ 0.
251$61$60(48,9$/(17

Figure 3-7. Structural Trim Plate Installation, Correct Installation

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-10 Rev. L
1873/$7(,167$//('
2172)$56,'(
2)75,03/$7(

5,9(7256&5(: 5
/2&$7,216

02',),('75,0
3/$7(('*(
*'8)$67(1(5
+2/(/2&$7,21

!0,1

1(,*+%25,1*
,167580(17
213$1(/ !0,1

!0,1

$&&(37$%/(02',),&$7,21672('*('(7$,/

&255(&7*8,'(/,1(7$%/(
+$5':$5( ',0(16,21$ 0,172('*(
5,9(76 “
6&5(:6

Figure 3-8. Acceptable Modifications to Edge Detail

3.2.1.6 GDU™ 620 Installation

Install the GDU 620 using six hex head screws P/N 211-64307-14 (supplied with GDU 620 Mounting Kit).

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-11
3.2.2 Standby Instruments Location and Mounting
Install the standby airspeed, altimeter and attitude indicator in the pre-existing mounting locations for
instruments no longer required, such as VORs, ADF bearing pointers, RMIs, CDIs, etc. If required, new
instrument cutouts may be made on the instrument panel and the stepped part of the instrument panel.
Existing cutouts may also be modified as required to fit the standby instruments (e.g. cutting a notch for
the altimeter baro-correction knob).
Example instrument panel layouts are shown in Figure 3-9, Figure 3-10, and Figure 3-11. Additional
examples can be found in Section D.1.

NOTE
Due to the distance from the desired location of a standby instrument on the stepped panel
to the GDU 620 and the standby instrument distance requirement from Section 2.5.11.2,
only 3 1/8 inch standby instruments are permitted to be installed on stepped panels.

In Figure 3-10 the instrument panel bolster was modified to accommodate two of the standby instruments.
Refer to Appendix H for details on modifying the bolster to accommodate standby instruments.
Some instrument panels may require additional modifications to address non-standard size instruments
(e.g. the KI 256 ADI). Refer to Appendix H for additional information.
Due to space constraints, some installations may require the use of 2 1/4 inch instruments for backup
instruments. Previously certified 2 1/4 inch instruments may be used as long as they are pneumatic. If
using an electric attitude indicator, the Mid-Continent 4200-( ) (2 1/4 inch display) electric attitude
indicator with the MD240-battery backup must be used. For airspeed and altitude indicators, Mid-
Continent provides a package of 2 1/4 inch instruments in combination with the specified attitude
indicator. For Mid-Continent ordering information see Section 2.5.11.2.3.3.

NOTE
If the Mid-Continent 4200-( ) 2 ¼-inch attitude indicator is used in a non-metallic aircraft,
the associated remote MD420 Emergency Power System must be mounted within the
instrument panel area. This constraint does not apply to metal aircraft.

NOTE
If the Mid-Continent 4200-( ) 2 ¼-inch attitude indicator is used in a pressurized aircraft,
the associated remote MD420 Emergency Power System must be mounted in a pressurized
area.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-12 Rev. L

925,1',&$725
&ORFN

9DF

GF
HOHF

(

1 9(57,&$/
63(('
)XHO4W\ 83

925,1',&$725
WXUQFRRUGLQDWRU '1 )((7
3(50,1
6
/ 5
PLQ :

QRSLWFK
LQIRUPDWLRQ

(OHF&XUUHQW

7DFKRPHWHU $')

ORIGINAL INSTRUMENT PANEL CONFIGURATION

&ORFN

9DF 2

(

1

*36

)XHO4W\

6

$,563(('
:



.1276

(OHF&XUUHQW

)((7

7DFKRPHWHU

MODIFIED INSTRUMENT PANEL CONFIGURATION

Figure 3-9. Example of Installed GDU 620 - Standby Instruments

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-13
67(&
3/$&$5'

&/2&.

6$1'(/61

GF
HOHF
( 1
$
Y
X

1
9 H
9(57,&$/
63(('
0 83
$
3

WXUQFRRUGLQDWRU '1 )((7
%
5
*
3(50,1

6 / 5

: PLQ
2%6
QRSLWFK
LQIRUPDWLRQ

VKIW V\QF DE

6:,7&+(6

,*1,7,21 9(17

ORIGINAL INSTRUMENT PANEL CONFIGURATION

67(&

3ODFDUG

6ZLWFKHV

,JQLWLRQ 9HQW

MODIFIED INSTRUMENT PANEL CONFIGURATION

Figure 3-10. Example of Installed GDU 620 - Standby Instruments on Stepped Part of Panel

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-14 Rev. L



(

1

6

:

6
2%
+'*
GF
HOHF

(
9(57,&$/
63(('

1
83

%ODQN

WXUQFRRUGLQDWRU '1 )((7
3(50,1

6
/ 5 :
PLQ 925

925
QRSLWFK LMDYRRR 25'
LQIRUPDWLRQ
10

&ORFN

25,*,1$/,167580(173$1(/&21),*85$7,21

&ORFN

02',),(',167580(173$1(/&21),*85$7,21

Figure 3-11. Example of GDU 620 Installed with 2¼-Inch Standby Instruments

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-15
3.2.3 GRS 77 AHRS Location and Mounting

NOTE
If mounting the GRS 77 on existing structure (e.g. existing shelf), the existing structure
must meet the minimum requirements specified in Section 3.2.3.1 for fabricated support
racks, brackets and shelves.

NOTE
For dual G600 installations, it is strongly recommended that both GRS 77 AHRS units be
mounted on the same shelf or bracket. This becomes extremely important in installations
utilizing the GAD 43/43e to supply attitude information to the autopilot – ensuring that
both AHRS units are exposed to the same vibration environment will help prevent nuisance
‘Check Attitude’ alerts and nuisance autopilot disconnects.

Considering the placement information contained in Section 2.5.11.4, determine a suitable location for the
GRS 77. The GRS 77 should be mounted to a surface known to have sufficient structural integrity to
withstand additional inertial forces imposed by the GRS 77 unit and any related components. For
reference, the GRS 77 with Mounting Rack weighs 3.5 lbs and the addition of the GRS 77 Universal
Mount increases the weight to 4.55 lbs. Use of additional brackets or supplemental support structure will
also increase weight. Table 3-1 provides an overview of possible GRS 77 mounting options for installation
with and without the GRS 77 Universal Mount. Each option references a subsequent section where further
details and considerations may be found. Furthermore, Section 3.2.3.1 identifies conditions that must be
met for every GRS 77 installation, regardless of use of the GRS 77 Universal Mount.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-16 Rev. L
Table 3-1. Overview of Possible GRS 77 Mounting Options with GRS 77 Universal Mount
Installation of GRS 77 Universal Mount (Typical)
The intent of the GRS 77 Universal Mount is to allow minor
adjustments in angle of the AHRS installation relative to the )25:$5'

mounting surface in the aircraft. In some cases, the universal mount

can be attached directly to existing structure in the aircraft, where
only the mounting holes need to be added to structure.
Refer to Section 3.2.3.2.3.

Installation of GRS 77 Universal Mount )25:$5'

(Composite Aircraft)
Some composite aircraft have a solid fuselage
structure that with a GRS 77 Universal Mount,
will meet the requirements for the GRS 77
installation. Modification of the fuselage involves
adding points of attachment.
Refer to Section 3.2.3.2.4.

Installation of GRS 77 Universal Mount

(Tube and Fabric Aircraft)
The GRS 77 Universal Mount can be assembled with an installation )25:$5'

plate to existing fuselage tube structure. The installation plate

provides a stable platform for the Universal Mount, which allows
the assembly to be corrected for the aircraft level reference.
Refer to Section 3.2.3.2.5.

Installation of GRS 77 Universal Mount Using Existing Points from Previously Installed
Equipment
If the aircraft has a Bendix/King KG
102/102A gyro, a Mid-Continent
4305-128 gyro, Mid-Continent
4305-150 gyro or a Cirrus 14357-001
gyro currently installed, and it is being
removed for this installation, the location
may provide an adequate mounting 86()250,'&217,1(1725
86()25&,5586
86()25%(1',;.,1*.*$

location for the GRS 77 AHRS. The

GRS 77 Universal Mount will allow for
installation to an existing hole pattern for the KG 102/102A (legs turned outward) or for the Mid-
Continent 4305-128/4305-150 and Cirrus 14357-001 (legs turned inward).
Refer to Section 3.2.3.2.6

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-17
Table 3-2. Overview of Possible GRS 77 Mounting Options
without GRS 77 Universal Mount
Mounting Bracket – Attachment to Stringers or Longerons
Closely spaced stringers or longerons extending fore/aft along the )25:$5'

bottom of the fuselage may provide adequate structure to support a

mounting bracket. Look for an area that will provide ample space
forward of the GRS 77 for the connector and wire harness.
Additionally, ensure that the location is not shared by equipment
capable of inducing vibration in the structure which can be transmitted
back to the GRS 77, such as a location near the engine or landing gear.
Refer to Section 3.2.3.3.1.

Modify Existing Floor Panel or Add Mounting Surface to Attach GRS 77 Mounting Plate
A false floor may exist over airframe structure to make room for avionics
or baggage. If the false floor surface is level and meets structural
requirements, it may provide an adequate surface for mounting the
GRS 77 directly.
Alternately, existing frame structure may provide a level plane to which a
plate may be attached for mounting the GRS 77. An example would be
multiple frames with flanges at the same water line (WL).
Refer to Section 3.2.3.3.2. )25:$5'

Plate, Angle Bracket Assembly – Attachment to Existing Frame and Bulkhead Structure
Angle brackets may be fabricated to attach to existing frame and
bulkhead structure, to which a plate may be attached. Although
multiple frames and bulkhead structure may be available for the
AHRS location, they may not be at the same water line (WL). One
or more brackets may be needed to create a level plane. The intent
is to ensure the plate remains parallel to the aircraft level reference
and firmly supported across its span.
Refer to Section 3.2.3.3.3.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-18 Rev. L
3.2.3.1 Requirements for All GRS 77 Installations
In order to satisfy the structural requirements for the operation of the GRS 77 the following conditions
must be met:
1. If support racks, brackets or shelves need to be fabricated, they should be fabricated and attached
to the aircraft structure in accordance with the methods outlined in AC43.13-2B Chapter 2 and the
following requirements:
a) Material shall be 2024-T3 sheet aluminum
b) Material shall have some type of corrosion protection (primer, alodine, etc.)
c) Material shall be a minimum of 0.063” for single-sheet aluminum. Aluminum honeycomb
core panels are also acceptable, and have no minimum thickness requirements. If using
cored panel, NAS-1836 Blind or NAS-1834 Through inserts are recommended type
fasteners for GRS 77 installation.
d) Use sheet metal techniques (bend radius, fillets, etc) appropriate to the material thickness
and type.
2. Any supporting structure must be rigidly connected to the aircraft primary structure through strong
structural members capable of supporting substantial loads. Avoid areas that are prone to severe
vibration (e.g., areas close to engine mounts and landing gear).
3. If a new mounting plate is fabricated for the GRS 77, the plate shall not span greater than 12” in
width or length without direct attachment to primary structure. If the mounting plate must span
more than 12”, stiffeners and/or flange reinforcements will be necessary to provide adequate
support.
4. Final installation shall be resistant to visual deflection during the validation of structures test per
Section 3.3.
5. Maintain a minimum of 3” between the forward edge of the mounting rack and any object to
ensure clearance for connector and wire harness.
6. For all installations, level and heading alignment of the GRS 77 will require the use of one of the
following:
a) GRS 77 Universal Mount P/N 011-01780-00,
b) Fabricated support structure, e.g. brackets, shelves, mounting platform, etc., or
c) A combination of both.
7. The GRS 77 must be electrically bonded to the aircraft metallic structure (metal aircraft) or
instrument panel (non-metallic aircraft). Refer to Section 3.8.1 for additional details.
For the installation of the GRS 77 level the aircraft in both the longitudinal and lateral axes. Refer to the
aircraft’s maintenance manual for leveling instructions. The aircraft should be placed on jacks while in a
level state to avoid inadvertently placing the aircraft in a non-level position when entering, exiting, or
working in the aircraft.
If the intent is to use the GRS 77 Universal Mount, refer to details found in Section 3.2.3.2. If the intent is
to use or modify existing structure without the GRS 77 Universal Mount, refer to details found in 
Section 3.2.3.2.7.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-19
3.2.3.2 Preparation for Installation with GRS 77 Universal Mount
3.2.3.2.1 GRS 77 Universal Mount Description
The GRS 77 Universal Mount P/N 011-01780-00 allows for aircraft level installation of the GRS 77
AHRS on mounting structures with inclines up to ±6° in 2° increments. Depending on the installation, the
Angle Brackets contained within the GRS 77 Universal Mount kit can be assembled and installed facing in
or out, as shown in Figure 3-12 and Figure 3-13. The use of the GRS 77 Universal Mount is optional.

$+5681,9(56$/723%5$&.(7
3$572)*5681,9(56$/02817.,7

$+56$1*/(02817,1*%5$&.(7 ;
3$572)*5681,9(56$/02817.,7

Figure 3-12. GRS 77 Universal Mount (Inward Facing Angle Brackets)

$+5681,9(56$/723%5$&.(7
3$572)*5681,9(56$/02817.,7

$+56$1*/(02817,1*%5$&.(7 ;
3$572)*5681,9(56$/02817.,7

Figure 3-13. GRS 77 Universal Mount (Outward Facing Angle Brackets)

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-20 Rev. L
3.2.3.2.2 Assembly of the Universal Mount
1. Cleco the pivot hole of the top bracket to the angle bracket on both sides as shown in Figure 3-14.

$+5681,9(56$/
723%5$&.(7

&/(&23,927+2/(
%27+6,'(62)
%5$&.(7
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ

&/(&26(&21'3$,52)+2/(6%27+
6,'(62)%5$&.(7726(7$1*/(
68&+7+$7723%5$&.(7,6/(9(/
$+56$1*/( :,7+$,5&5$)7/(9(/:,7+,1ƒ
02817,1*%5$&.(7

Figure 3-14. GRS 77 Universal Mount Assembly

NOTE
The incline of the mounting location may be determined by using a level meter such as the
PRO 360 or equivalent. It is recommended to use a level surface on the aircraft itself as
reference for a more accurate installation.

2. Determine and set the incline offset required for level installation. Cleco the second pair of holes
of the top bracket to the angle bracket as shown in Figure 3-15. Drill hole-pattern from top bracket
to angle bracket (0.1285” diameter holes – #30 drill bit), 5 places each side.

&/(&23,927+2/(%27+
6,'(62)%5$&.(7

0$7&+'5,//+2/(3$77(51)520
723%5$&.(772$1*/(%5$&.(7
‘3/$&(6($&+6,'(
$+5681,9(56$/
723%5$&.(7
3$572)*56
81,9(56$/02817.,7 &/(&26(&21'3$,52)+2/(6%27+6,'(6
2)%5$&.(7726(7$1*/(68&+7+$7723
%5$&.(7,6/(9(/:,7+$,5&5$)7/(9(/
$+56$1*/(
02817,1*%5$&.(7 ;
3$572)*56
81,9(56$/02817.,7

Figure 3-15. Hole-Pattern Configuration to Set Incline in Assembly for Aircraft Level

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-21
3. As shown in Figure 3-16, rivet top bracket to angled brackets with MS20470AD4-6 rivets
(alternate CR3213-4-4 blind rivets) and remove Clecos.

$+5681,9(56$/
723%5$&.(7
3$572)*56 06$'5,9(7
81,9(56$/02817.,7
$/7(51$7(&5
&+(55<0$;5,9(7
$+56$1*/(02817,1*%5$&.(7 ; ;($&+6,'(
3$572)*5681,9(56$/02817.,7

Figure 3-16. Top Bracket to Angle Bracket Assembly

NOTE
If the GRS 77 Universal Mount has been assembled with the angle brackets facing in,
installing the GRS 77 mounting rack on the universal mount will prevent access to tighten
the universal mount screws to the mounting plate. It is recommended to install the
universal mount to the mounting plate before mounting the GRS 77 mounting rack on the
universal mount for this situation.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-22 Rev. L
4. Install the GRS 77 Mounting Rack P/N 115-00459-00 to the GRS 77 Universal Mount using 5
AN525-1032R8 Screws, as shown in Figure 3-17. The recommended torque is 20-25 in-lbs.
Ensure correct orientation of mounting rack on universal bracket (the arrow on the GRS 77
Mounting Rack must point forward).

$15
6&5(: ;

)25:$5'

*5602817,1*5$&.

$+5681,9(56$/
723%5$&.(7
3$572)*56
81,9(56$/02817.,7

$+56$1*/(02817,1*%5$&.(7 ;
3$572)*5681,9(56$/02817.,7
127(6
5(&200(1'('72548(,1&+/%6

Figure 3-17. Assembling GRS 77 Mounting Rack to GRS 77 Universal Mount

3.2.3.2.3 Installation of GRS 77 Universal Mount (Typical)

NOTE
Aircraft structures such as the firewall, bulkhead and support frames are usually
perpendicular to the aircraft heading and may be used as reference for determining the
relative position of the installation to the aircraft heading.

1. Position the GRS 77 Universal Mount assembly on the mounting platform so that it is aligned to
the aircraft heading. Transfer the hole-pattern from the Angle Brackets to the mounting platform, 4
places each side. Ensure that the arrow on the mounting rack is facing the forward direction.
2. Remove the GRS 77 Universal Mount assembly from the mounting platform and drill the marked
hole-pattern for #10 hardware (0.189” diameter holes – #12 drill bit) into the mounting platform.
The preferred method of assembly utilizes nutplates installed to the mounting platform: rivet nut
plates (MS21059L3) with MS20426AD3-X rivets to the mounting platform. Ensure that installed
rivets are flush with the installation panel. Remove any burrs or excess rivet heads.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-23
3. Install the GRS 77 Universal Mount to the mounting plate using AN525-1032R8 screws (8 total, 4
on each side for the Universal Mount). See Figure 3-18. Alternate hardware includes other screws,
bolts, washers, nuts, and nutplates; these are noted in the table within Figure 3-18. The
recommended torque is 20-25 in-lbs. Perform a structural validation test per Section 3.3.

NOTE
It is acceptable to install the Universal AHRS Mounting Bracket assembly to the aircraft
structure with four pieces of hardware (bolts or screws at opposite ends of each angle) as
long as the installation allows the GRS 77 AHRS to pass the Engine Run-up Vibration Test
outlined in Section 5.6.5. Use of eight fasteners is strongly recommended.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-24 Rev. L

6&5(: ;
)25:$5'

*5602817,1*5$&.

$+5681,9(56$/
723%5$&.(7
3$572)*56
81,9(56$/02817.,7

,167$//$7,21
3$1(/

$+56$1*/(02817,1*%5$&.(7 ;
3$572)*5681,9(56$/02817.,7

1873/$7(
5,9(7 ;
5(4 '

127(6
5(&200(1'('+$5':$5(237,216)25$66(0%/<
+$5':$5( 63(&,),&$7,216
6&5(:6 06 /(1*7+$5 251$6 /(1*7+$5
%2/76 $1;$ /(1*7+$5
$1$1/1$6)3 0 ) 0 .
:$6+(56 1873/$7(6
251$6)3 0 .25)
25
$1$ 061
1876 5,9(76 06$';
2506/

5(&200(1'('72548(,1&+/%6
0,1,0807+,&.1(6681/(66$/80,180+21(<&20%&25(3$1(/ 12
0,1,0807+,&.1(665(48,5(0(17

Figure 3-18. Installation of Universal Mount to Mounting Plate

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-25
3.2.3.2.4 Installation of the GRS 77 Universal Mount (Composite Aircraft)

CAUTION
This procedure only applies to secondary aircraft structures. It is not acceptable to use
this procedure for primary structure or structural load carrying members. This procedure
applies to honeycomb composite material used in areas such as false floors or avionics
shelves. After the installation is complete, refer toSection 5 for system configuration,
calibration and checkout.

NOTE
The GRS 77 AHRS will not provide valid outputs until the post-installation calibration
procedures are completed.

1. Assemble the GRS 77 Universal mount per Section 3.2.3.2.2. Place the GRS 77 Universal Mount
assembly on the mounting surface ensuring that the forward direction is aligned with the aircraft
heading. Mark holes (4 on each side, 8 total) and edges of angle brackets for future reference. See
Figure 3-19.

/2&$7(6(&21'
+2/($3352;,0$7(/<
$66+2:1

7<3

$+56$1*/(
02817,1*%5$&.(7
)22735,17 ;

/2&$7(),567
+2/($3352;,0$7(/<
$66+2:1

Figure 3-19. Mounting Location (Composite Aircraft)

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-26 Rev. L
2. At each bolt location, drill a hole in the mounting surface large enough to accommodate an AN3
bolt head (approximately 0.50 inches in diameter). Remove core between the inside and outside
mounting surface layers as shown (Approximately 1.00 inches in diameter). See Figure 3-20. Do
not penetrate the opposite side of honeycomb core.

Ø0.50 T HROUGH
MOUNT ING SU RFACE
TOP LAYER ONLY

MOUN TIN G SURFACE

AN 3 BOLT

MOU NTI NG SURFA CE

T OP LAYER HONEYCOMB CORE

1.0" MIN .

Ø1.0 0
C ORE REMOVAL
BOTT OM LAYER HONEYC OMB CORE

Figure 3-20. Mounting Bolt Preparation (Composite Aircraft)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-27
3. Tape the underside of the angle brackets with packaging tape to keep the brackets clean of the
epoxy/flox mixture. Poke holes in the tape at all bolt hole locations. Fill each bolt cavity with
epoxy and flox mix. Insert each bolt head into cavity; epoxy and flox should just barely flow over
the hole in the inner layer.
4. Align bolts with the angle brackets by laying taped angle brackets on the mounting surface, taped
side down against epoxy/flox mixture, with bolts sticking through the brackets. Ensure bolts
remain perpendicular to the angles and mounting surface as shown in Figure 3-21. The angle
bracket taped faces should remain flush with the mounting surface.

7$3(81'(56,'(62)$+56$1*/(
%5$&.(76:,7+3$&.$*,1*7$3(

$1%2/7

02817,1*685)$&(
(32;<:,7+)/2;

(1685(%2/75(0$,163(53(1',&8/$572
)$&(2)%5$&.(7:+(1%5$&.(7,6)/86+
:,7+02817,1*685)$&(

Figure 3-21. Mounting Bolt Installation and Alignment (Composite Aircraft)

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-28 Rev. L
5. Ensure brackets remain aligned with the reference marks on the fuselage. Once epoxy/flox mix has
set, remove angles from mounting surface and remove tape from angle brackets.After bolts have
been installed in the mounting surface, lay two layers of cloth over the mounting location.
Dimensions and location of the first sheet are shown, overlap the mounting location by 0.5 inches.
See Figure 3-22.

Figure 3-22. First Cloth Installation for Mounting Bolts (Composite Aircraft)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-29
6. After laying up the first sheet of cloth, lay up a second sheet oriented 45° from first sheet as shown
in Figure 3-23.
7. Allow for the material to set and perform a structural validation per Section 3.3.
8. Install the GRS77 universal mount onto bolts and secure with AN365-1032A nuts and AN960-10
washers (8 places). The recommended torque is 20-25 in-lbs. Perform a structural validation test
per Section 3.3.

Figure 3-23. Second Cloth Installation for Mounting Bolts (Composite Aircraft)

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-30 Rev. L
3.2.3.2.5 Installation of GRS 77 Universal Mount (Tube and Fabric Aircraft)
For tube and fabric aircraft, it is possible to use the tube structure as the support structure for an assembly
that includes an installation plate as well as a GRS 77 Universal Mount to set the AHRS to aircraft level.
The concept involves the assembly of the installation plate with a GRS 77 Universal Mount. The
installation plate offers a surface for attaching the GRS 77 Universal Mount, and the Universal Mount
allows the assembly to accommodate an aircraft level, forward orientation for the GRS 77 AHRS unit.
Two options are presented: tabs welded to airframe or alternately, MS21919 clamps attached to airframe.
Welded Tabs
1. The preferred method of installation allows for tabs to be welded to the tube structure for attaching
the installation plate.
2. A minimum of four tabs are required and the material must be appropriate to the tube structure of
the airframe.
3. An installation plate uses the four mounting points to secure the plate to the airframe. Countersunk
screws are used to attach the Universal Mount to the installation plate, to minimize possibility of
interference between hardware and the airframe.
4. The installation plate must be minimum .125” thickness 2024-T3. A stiffener may be required
depending on plate length.
5. The installation plate must be electrically bonded to the tubular structure. Refer to Section 3.8 for
additional information.
6. Reference Figure 3-24 and Figure 3-25 for details and illustration.
7. Perform a structural validation test per Section 3.3.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-31
,167$//$7,213/$7(
$77$&+726758&785(,1$
0,1,0802)3/$&(6

$,5&5$)778%8/$5
6758&785(

)25:$5'

;

;

06;;;
6&5(:/(1*7+$5
;
$,5&5$)778%8/$5
6758&785(

*56 $,5&5$)778%8/$5
$+5681,9(56$/ 6758&785(
723%5$&.(7
3$572)*56 $+56$1*/(
81,9(56$/02817.,7 02817,1*%5$&.(7 ;
3$572)*56
81,9(56$/02817.,7

)25:$5'
$1$187; $1;$%2/7
$1:$6+(5; $1:$6+(56$5
061187 25(48,9
;0,1,080

127(6

:(/'7$%672(;,67,1*6758&785(726833257*56,167$//$7,213$1(/
86(0$7(5,$/$335235,$7(72$,5&5$)7&216758&7,21
86(&2817(5681.+$5':$5(72$92,',17(5)(5(1&(%(7:((1+$5':$5(
$1'6758&785(6
$33/<&25526,213527(&7,21 (;$03/(=,1&35,0(5$/2',1((7&21$//
685)$&(62))$%5,&$7('3$576
(/(&75,&$//< %21',167$//$7,213/$7(72$,5&5$)778%8/$56758&785(

Figure 3-24. Installation of GRS 77 Universal Mount in Tube and Fabric Aircraft Using
Welded Tabs

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-32 Rev. L
Mounting Clamps
1. An alternative method of installation allows for clamps to be assembled to the tube structure for
attaching the installation plate.
2. A minimum of four sets of clamps (two clamps per set in offset pattern) are required.
3. An installation plate uses the eight mounting points (four clamp sets) to secure the plate to the
airframe. Countersunk screws are used to attach the Universal Mount to the installation plate, to
minimize possibility of interference between hardware and the airframe.
4. The installation plate must be at least .125 inch thick, 2024-T3. A stiffener may be required
dependent on plate length. Reference Figure 3-25.
5. Reference Figure 3-25 for details and illustration.
6. Perform a structural validation test per Section 3.3.
7. Ensure that the GRS 77 is bonded to the metallic tube structure with a resistance of 10 mΩ or less
with the connector disconnected. A bonding strap meeting the following criteria must be used to
accomplish this:
◦ The cross sectional area of the strap must be greater than 0.016 sq inches (approx 20800
circular mils). A 7/16 inch or wider tubular braid (QQB575R30T437, 24120 circular mils)
or a 3/4 inch or wider flat braid (QQB575F36T781, 20,800 circular mils) must be used and
attached at both ends using an MS20659-130 terminal lug.
◦ the strap length should be as short as possible and must not exceed 6 inches, and the
installation shall be such that it avoids the strap looping back on itself.
◦ The bonding strap must be electrically bonded to the installation plate via a spot face at least
0.125” larger in diameter than the bonding strap terminal lug. Refer to “Bonding Jumper
Installations” in AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11 for guidance on attaching the bonding strap to
tubular structure.
8. The electrical bonding strap method illustrated in Figure 3-25 must not be used if the GRS 77 will
be installed in lightning zone 1A, 1B, or 2B (refer to Appendix J). If the electrical bonding clamp
is used, the installation must be completed in accordance with AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11 and the
following criteria:
◦ Use cadmium plated steel clamp, nut, and washers. Only AN735-6 and larger diameter
clamps are permitted. Use the MS20659-130 terminal lug between two AN960C10 washers
to contact the clamp.
◦ Select location to minimize the presence of moisture and allow for easy inspection.
◦ Remove 0.38 square inch of finish on the tubular frame to ensure required contact surface.
◦ After assembly and bonding check, prime the airframe tube and clamp in accordance with
one of the following:
• the approved aircraft maintenance manual
• MIL-PRF-85285 Type I, Color to suit (36081 Flat Gray Preferable) Coating:
Polyurethane, Aircraft And Support Equipment
• MIL-PRF-23377 Type I, Class N, Primer Coatings: Epoxy, High-Solids

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-33
,167$//$7,213/$7(
$77$&+726758&785(,1$
0,1,0802)3/$&(6

6((67,))(1(5
/$<287)25
/21*(5
',67$1&(6
)25:$5'

0,1,080/(1*7+2) 7239,(:
$66(0%/(3$,56 0,1,080 816833257('0$7(5,$/
$7('*('2)$66(0%/<,1
2))6(73$77(51$66+2:1

$+56$1*/(02817,1*%5$&.(7 ;
3$572)*5681,9(56$/02817.,7
06;;
6&5(:
/(1*7+$5;
)25:$5'

)25:$5'
$1;;

%277209,(: 6,'(9,(:

127(6
86(-$01876,1$66(0%/<726(7/2&$7,212)&/$03635,2572$66(0%/,1*,167$//$7,213$1(/726758&785(

,)',67$1&(%(7:((1&/$03$77$&+0(176,6*5($7(57+$1$67,))(1(5,65(48,5('217+,6('*($1816833257('',67$1&(
*5($7(57+$1,6127$&&(37$%/(

5(&200(1'('72548(,6,1&+/%6

5(&200(1'('+$5':$5(,6$6127('

$33/<&25526,213527(&7,21 (;$03/(=,1&35,0(5$/2',1((7& 21$//685)$&(62))$%5,&$7('3$576

$77$&+$1'%21'02817,1*75$<%21',1*675$372$,5&5$)778%(6758&785(,1$&&25'$1&(:,7+$&%&+$37(5

Figure 3-25. Installation of GRS 77 Univ. Mount in Tube/Fabric Aircraft Using MS21919
Clamps
Sheet 1 of 2

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-34 Rev. L
,167$//$7,21
3$1(/
061187/2&.,1*
$1 :$6+(5 25(48,9
25(48,9 $5

$1 3/$,1+(;187

25(48,9

$1 ;$%2/7
)25:$5'
06:'* '(7$,/$
&/$03 25,(17$7,21$'-867('

06:'*&/$036:,7+
+$5':$5(72$77$&+,167$//$7,21
3$1(/726758&785(
,629,(:
;

',0$

',0%
',0$

+$5':$5( ',0$ ',0%

0,10$;
5,9(76 ',0%

06$' ;5,9(7
$56((7$%/()25
5(&200(1'('63$&,1*

7239,(:
67,))(1(5/$<287

$1 $187;
67,))(1(5$7('*(
$1 :$6+(5;
;;$1*/(
725 7$/80,180

(1'9,(:
67,))(1(5/$<287

Figure 3-25. Installation of GRS 77 Univ. Mount in Tube/Fabric Aircraft Using MS21919
Clamps
Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-35
3.2.3.2.6 Installation of GRS 77 Universal Mount Using Existing Points
from Previously Installed Equipment
For aircraft that have the Bendix/King KG 102/102A unit, Mid-Continent 4305-128 or 4305-150, or Cirrus
14357-001 installed, the mounting pattern is accommodated in the design of the GRS 77 Universal Mount.
See Figure 3-26 for detail on how the angles assemble to the main bracket to accommodate the previously-
installed equipment locations. These locations may be used for the GRS 77 AHRS installation if they meet
the requirements defined in Section 3.2.3.1.

7851$1*/(6,1:$5')25 7851$1*/(6287:$5')25
0,'&217,1(17 25 %(1',;.,1*.*$
25&,5586 02817,1*/2&$7,21
02817,1*/2&$7,21

Figure 3-26. Using the GRS 77 Universal Mount in Locations of Previously-Installed

Equipment

3.2.3.2.7 Installation of GRS 77 Universal Mount Using Existing Structure

Some aircraft may have existing structure such as an avionics rack or shelf that could be used for
installation of the GRS 77. The existing structure may be structurally acceptable (meeting the requirements
of the construction and validation of structures defined in Section 3.3), however it may not be acceptable
for vibration. Carefully evaluate whether the existing structure can be used by considering the information
contained within this section.
Existing structure may be used or modified for the GRS 77 AHRS installation if it meets the requirements
defined in Section 3.2.3.1. Additional stiffening and/or support members may need to be fabricated and
installed to reduce the effect of vibration on existing structure and minimize or eliminate deflection in the
structure. See Figure 3-33 for an example.
In addition, consider the following:
1. Avoid mounting the GRS 77 in close proximity to avionics of significant mass. They should not
share the same shelf or be located near each other sharing the same support structure.
2. Avoid structure with lightening holes.
3. The shelf or other structure to which the GRS 77 will be installed must be firmly attached to
structure. Additional fasteners may be necessary.
4. Locate the GRS 77 close to the newly fabricated and installed support or stiffening members for
maximum rigidity in structure.
5. A stiffener can be added under the shelf structure, running fore-aft and used at the location of the
middle fastener hole in the five-fastener mounting hole pattern for the GRS 77 Mounting Rack.
Use this technique when the GRS 77 cannot be located near additional support or stiffening
members.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-36 Rev. L
6. Shelves or structure without flanges can be stiffened by using angle aluminum or bent sheet metal
riveted to the shelf.

)256+(/9(6
:,7+287)/$1*(6
$/80,180$1*/(25
%(176+((70(7$/
&$1%(5,9(7('72
6+(/)$7)25($)7
('*(6

%5$&.(7&$1%()$%5,&$7('
723529,'(6833257)256+(/)
$77$&+72(;,67,1*6758&785(

Figure 3-27. Example GRS 77 Installation Using Existing Shelf Structure

3.2.3.3 Preparation for Installation without GRS 77 Universal Mount

NOTE
Aircraft structures such as the firewall, bulkhead and support frames are usually
perpendicular to the aircraft heading and may be used as reference for determining the
relative position of the installation to the aircraft heading.

1. Position the GRS 77 Mounting Rack to the mounting or installation panel so that it is aligned to
the aircraft heading and transfer the hole-pattern to the mounting plate from the angle bracket 5
places. Ensure that the arrow on the mounting rack is facing the forward direction.
2. Drill the marked hole-pattern (0.210 diameter holes) and rivet nut plates (MS21059L3 or
equivalent) with MS20426AD3-X rivets (Countersunk rivets). Ensure that installed rivets are
countersunk and are flush with the installation panel. Remove any burrs or excess rivet heads. See
Figure 3-28 for illustration and alternate hardware options.
3. Perform a structural validation per Section 3.3.
4. Install the Mounting Rack, whichever applies, to the mounting plate using AN525-1032R8 (5
total). The recommended torque is 20-25 in-lbs. Perform a structural validation test per
Section 3.3.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-37
6&5(:
;

*565(027(,167$//5$&.

02817,1*
3/$7(

1873/$7(
5,9(7 ;
5(4 '

127(6
5(&200(1'('+$5':$5(237,216)25$66(0%/<

+$5':$5( 63(&,),&$7,216
6&5(:6 $1 ; /(1*7+$5
$1 $1/1$6)3 0 ) 0 .
:$6+(56 1873/$7(6
251$6)3 0 .25)
25
$1 $ 061 5,9(76 06$' ;
1876
2506/

5(&200(1'('72548( ,1&+ /%6

0,1,0807+,&.1(66

Figure 3-28. Installation of the Mounting Rack to the Mounting Plate

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-38 Rev. L
3.2.3.3.1 Mounting Bracket – Attachment to Stringers or Longerons
The option of creating a mounting bracket that attaches to stringers or longerons is shown in Figure 3-29.
The following items should be considered when creating the mounting bracket:
• Mounting bracket requirements should follow conditions noted in Section 3.2.3.1, unless
otherwise indicated.
• Distance between stringers or longerons should be less than 16.0 inches. For a distance between
12.0 and 16.0 inches, use a stiffener down the centerline of the mounting hole pattern (see
Figure 3-29). At a minimum, the stiffener should be made of 0.75 x 0.50 x 0.063” angle, with the
0.75” leg used for attachment to the mounting bracket, and should run the length of the bracket. A
nutplate for the GRS 77 Mounting Plate (center hole in the 5-hole pattern) may be attached
directly to the stiffener. Use MS20426AD3 or MS20426AD4 rivets to secure the stiffener to the
mounting bracket. The vertical leg of the stiffener must be at least 0.25” from the skin of the
aircraft.
• Ensure at least 3 inches forward of AHRS remains clear for connector and wire harness.
• Fabricate a U-shaped mounting bracket keeping edge flanges as short as possible. The flange
should be no more than 0.5 inches higher than the stringers (see Figure 3-29).
• Minimal access to underside of bracket requires use of blind fasteners for the bracket to structure
and for the GRS 77 to the bracket.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-39
,620(75,&9,(:

)25:$5'
*56$+56

$,5)5$0(
675,1*(5

02817,1*

%5$&.(7

)$67(1,1*
+$5':$5(

9,(:/22.,1*$)7

02817,1*685)$&(
3$5$//(/72
$,5&5$)7/(9(/

127(6

86( 76+((7$/80,1,807+,&.1(6625*5($7(586($%(1'
5$',86$335235,$7(727+(0$7(5,$/7<3($1'7+,&.1(66 (;$03/(86(%(1'
5$',86)257+,&.1(667$/80,180

$33/<&25526,213527(&7,21 (;$03/(=,1&35,0(5$/2',1((7& 21$//

685)$&(62)3$57

$5,*,'&211(&7,2172$,5&5$)76758&785(,65(48,5('5(&200(1'('
+$5':$5(237,216$5(
+$5':$5( 63(&,),&$7,216
5,9(76 35()(55('&5; &+(55<0$; 25$/7(51$7(06$' ;
6&5(:6 06 /(1*7+$5 251$6 /(1*7+$5
$1 $1 / 0 ) 0 .
:$6+(56 1873/$7(6
1$6)13 0 . 25)
251$6)13 25 06$';
$1 $ 061 5,9(76
1876
2506/

Figure 3-29. Installation of GRS 77 on Aircraft Stringers (Adapter Riveted to Aircraft Skin)
Sheet 1 of 2

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-40 Rev. L
:,'7+'(7$,/

8372

8372
12(;75$)/$1*(6

8372
)25:$5'$1'$)7
)/$1*(6

8372
)25:$5'$1'$)7
)/$1*(6$1'
)25( $)767,))(1(5

0,1'()/(&7,21*$3

0$;+(,*+7'(7$,/ 02817,1*
%5$&.(7

0$;

$,5&5$)7)/225 $,5)5$0(675,1*(5

$,5)5$0(
)$67(1(563$&,1* 02817,1*
675,1*(5
%5$&.(7
',0$

',0$ ',0% $,5&5$)7

)/225

&255(&7*8,'(/,1(7$%/(
+$5':$5( ',0$ ',0%
0,10$;
5,9(76 ',0%
6&5(:6 ',0%

Figure 3-29. Installation of GRS 77 on Aircraft Stringers (Adapter Riveted to Aircraft Skin)
Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-41
3.2.3.3.2 Modify Existing Floor Panel or Add Mounting Surface to Attach GRS 77
Mounting Plate
Some aircraft may have an existing floor panel, such as in an avionics bay or in the baggage compartment,
that is suitable for AHRS installation. Alternately, a simple panel may be installed where existing structure
creates a level plane, creating a mounting surface for the GRS 77 AHRS. The following items should be
considered when modifying a floor panel or adding a mounting surface:
• The panel to which the GRS 77 is mounted must be rigid enough to not transmit vibrations into the
GRS 77. The minimum thickness for sheet metal structure is 0.063 inches. It is acceptable to
install the AHRS to honeycomb structure used in some avionics bays.
• If the GRS 77 is installed in an area used for baggage, extra care must be taken to ensure the
GRS 77 is protected from damage. This may require fabrication of a protective cover for the
GRS 77. At least 0.25” space must exist between the surfaces of the AHRS and associated
brackets, and the fabricated cover must not deflect enough to touch the unit when impacted by
baggage.
• The GRS 77 Universal Mount is not required when the mounting surface (existing or added) is
level with the aircraft level reference.

)25:$5' *56$+56

,1
&/($5$1&(

02817,1*685)$&(3$5$//(/
72$,5&5$)7/(9(/

)$67(1,1* (;,67,1*)/2253$1(/251(:
+$5':$5( 68332573$1(/ 6((5(48,5(0(176
6(&7,21)255(&200(1'('
7+,&.1(66$1''(6,*1)($785(6

68332573$1(/6+28/'%(
)$67(1('72($&+$,5)5$0(
0(0%(5$&52667+(63$1 (;,67,1* 6.,1
$,5)5$0(

Figure 3-30. Installation of GRS 77 on Existing Floor Panel or Installed Support Panel

3.2.3.3.3 Plate – Attachment to Existing Frame Structure

Some aircraft will have frame members with flanges that face forward or aft, where the flanges for each
frame member are at different water lines. This presents several possibilities for the AHRS installation. If
the flanges are long enough to install hardware, one of the two existing airframe members can be modified
with hardware whereas an angle or bracket must be fabricated for the second frame member to create two
mounting surfaces on the same waterline. If the flanges are not long enough to install hardware, two angles
or brackets must be fabricated and installed to the vertical surfaces of the existing airframe members.
Follow guidance in Section 3.2.3.1 for modifying existing parts and fabricating new parts. Figure 3-32
shows an example where a level support plate is installed between two airframe members.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-42 Rev. L
%8/.+($'
)25:$5'
,1 *56$+56 )$67(1,1*+$5':$5(
&/($5$1&(
1(:68332573$1(/)25$+5602817,1*
3/$7( 6((5(48,5(0(1766(&7,21)25
5(&200(1'('7+,&.1(66$1''(6,*1
)($785(6

02817,1*685)$&(3$5$//(/72
68332573$1(/6+28/'%( $,5&5$)7/(9(/
)$67(1('$&52667+(63$1

$1*/(672&5($7(
/(9(/3/$1()25
68332573$1(/

(;,67,1* 6.,1
$,5)5$0(
0(0%(5

Figure 3-31. Installation of GRS 77 with Installed Support Plate

3.2.3.4 GRS 77 Rack-to-Unit Flatness Check

NOTE
Place the unit on its rack, and tighten the screw fasteners on one end of the unit to the rack
(recommended torque is 22-25 inch pounds), but leave the screw fasteners on the other
end of the unit unfastened.

At the unfastened end of the unit, there should now be a gap between the unit baseplate and the rails of the
mounting rack. Measure the gap to determine if it is within tolerances. See Figure 3-32. Using feeler
gauges, check to ensure that the gap between the unit and each rack rail is at least 0.010 inch, but less than
0.070 inch. See Figure 3-32.
If the gaps between the unit and each rack rail are within tolerance (0.010 inch, but less than 0.070 inch)
tighten the remaining two screw fasteners to hold the GRS 77 unit firmly to its rack (recommended torque
is 22-25 inch pounds).
If the gap is less than 0.010 inch, or greater than 0.070 inch, then the proper amount of preload will not be
exerted on the unit baseplate when the unit is fastened down, and the installation is not acceptable.
Possible causes for a failure of this check include the following:
• The rack is fastened down to a surface that is not sufficiently flat
• The rack is warped or damaged
• The GRS 77 has a center baseplate external shim that is damaged or has been removed
• The GRS 77 baseplate has been warped or damaged
In the event of a failed test (gap on unfastened end of unit not within the range of 0.010 inch to 
0.070 inch), these possibilities must be examined, and any deficiencies corrected to pass this check before
the installation is acceptable.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-43
*56$+56

)$67(1('(1'

0($685(*$3
$781)$67(1('(1'
$&&(37$%/(

Figure 3-32. Measuring GRS 77 to Mounting Rack Gap

3.2.3.5 GRS 77 AHRS Installation

The GRS 77 AHRS may be installed after the mounting rack has been assembled to the Universal Mount
or equivalent support structure and the flatness check is complete. While installing the GRS 77 unit on its
rack, a flatness check is required to ensure that the unit’s base is properly preloaded after installation.
Perform a flatness check per Section 3.2.3.4.

NOTE
Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to tighten the GRS 77 to the rack, rather than hand
tightening the knurled screws. The recommended torque is 22-25 inch pounds.

After completion and satisfactorily passing the flatness check, tighten the four mounting screws securing
the GRS 77 unit to the rack. See Figure 3-33.
After the installation is complete, refer to Section 5.5 for system configuration, calibration and checkout.

NOTE
The GRS 77 AHRS will not provide valid outputs until the post installation calibration
procedures are completed.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-44 Rev. L
*56$+56

86($3+,//,366&5(:'5,9(5
727,*+7(1)285.185/('
6&5(:62181,7725$&.
72548(6&5(:672,1/%6

$+5681,9(56$/723%5$&.(7
3$572)*5681,9(56$/02817.,7

,167$//$7,213/$7(
$+56$1*/(02817,1*%5$&.(7 ;
3$572)*5681,9(56$/02817.,7

Figure 3-33. GRS 77 Final Installation Example

3.2.4 GMU44 Magnetometer Location and Mounting

NOTE
For metal aircraft the GMU 44 must be electrically bonded to the aircraft metallic
structure that forms the ground plane, with a resistance of 10 mΩ or less with the
connector disconnected.

NOTE
For non-metallic aircraft, the GMU 44 must not be electrically bonded to the aircraft
ground plane. Refer to Table K-1 to determine GMU 44 isolation requirements for all
aircraft models.

Determine a suitable location for the GMU 44 (refer to Section 2.5.11.5 for placement information).
Example GMU 44 installations can be found in Section D.2. The GMU 44 should not be mounted on an
access panel.
The GMU 44 Install Rack, P/N 115-00481-00, must be installed within 3° of the aircraft level reference for
pitch and roll. It is preferred that the forward direction of the GMU 44 mounting rack is aligned to within
0.5° in heading of the aircraft forward direction (longitudinal axis). If it is not possible to guarantee this
accuracy, installation alignment to within 2.5° in heading is acceptable, in combination with a post-
installation heading alignment of the aircraft to a precise heading to determine and set a heading offset.
The heading offset procedure is described in Section 5.6.4. For all installations, level and heading

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-45
alignment will require the use of one of the following:
• GMU 44 Universal Mount P/N 011-01779-01
• Fabricated mounting equipment, e.g. brackets, shelves, mounting platform, etc.
• Or a combination of both.
For the installation of the GMU 44 level the aircraft in both the longitudinal and lateral axes. Refer to the
aircraft’s maintenance manual for leveling instructions. It is preferred that the aircraft is placed on jacks
while leveled to avoid inadvertently placing the aircraft in a non level position when entering, exiting or
working the aircraft.

CAUTION
After a location has been selected and a GMU 44 mounting method chosen, a magnetic
interference survey must be performed at that location prior to fabricating or assembling
any parts for the GMU 44 mounting. It is possible that the location will fail the survey and
the installation will require a new location, with different installation requirements.

3.2.4.1 GMU44 Universal Mount (Optional)

The GMU 44 Installation may require the
use of the GMU 44 Universal Mount P/N
011-01779-01. The GMU 44 Universal
Mount allows for level installation and
aircraft heading alignment.
The GMU 44 Universal Mount Allows
for aircraft level installation of the
GMU 44 Magnetometer on mounting
structures with inclines up to ±6° in 2°
increments and 360° of forward direction
offset.
Depending on installation, the GMU 44
may be installed in the following
configurations: Figure 3-34. GMU 44 Universal Mount, Side Plate
Mounted
1. Installed inside of the GMU 44
Universal Mount.
a) Side Plate Mounted, Figure 3-34
b) Bottom Plate Mounted, Figure 3-35
2. Installed suspended from the GMU 44 Universal Mount.
a) Side Plate Mounted, Figure 3-36
b) Bottom Plate Mounted, Figure 3-37

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-46 Rev. L
Figure 3-35. GMU 44 Universal Mount, Bottom Plate Mounted

Figure 3-36. GMU 44 Universal Mount, Side Plate Mounted – Suspended

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-47
Figure 3-37. GMU 44 Universal Mount, Bottom Plate Mounted – Suspended

For side plate installations (Figure 3-38 and Figure 3-39), Lateral and longitudinal (2 axis) level
installation can be accomplished through the level placement of the mounting holes and the incline setting
(±2°, ±4° ±6°) of the GMU 44 Universal Mount.

*08
81,9(56$/
,167$//$7,21 %5$&.(7
3$1(/

)25:$5'

02817,1*2)*08
3$5$//(/72$,5&5$)7/(9(/
6(7%5$&.(702817,1*
$,5&5$)7/(9(/
+2/(6,13$1(/)25
5()(5(1&(
$,5&5$)7/(9(/

Figure 3-38. GMU 44 Universal Mount Level Installation Axis 1

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-48 Rev. L
$1*/(2)
,1&/,1(

*08
81,9(56$/
%5$&.(7

$,5&5$)7
/(9(/
5()(5(1&(

6(7,1&/,1(21
81,9(56$/%5$&.(7
)25/(9(/
,167$//$7,21

Figure 3-39. GMU 44 Universal Mount Level Installation Axis 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-49
For bottom mounted installations requiring incline offset on both the lateral and longitudinal axis, level
installation can be accomplished through level placement of support equipment, such as mounting
brackets, shelves, panels on one axis and setting the incline on the GMU 44 Universal Mount 
(±2°, ±4°, ±6°) for the other axis. An example is shown in Figure 3-40. Heading alignment is accomplished
by installing the GMU 44 Install Rack to the top bracket of the GMU 44 Universal Mount so that the
forward direction is aligned with the aircraft heading.

9(57,&$/
67$%,/,=(5

*08

/(9(/72
/$7(5$/$;,6

/(9(/72
/21*,78',1$/$;,6
$,5&5$)7
5()(5(1&(/,1(

/(9(/72
/$7(5$/$;,6

/(9(/72
/21*,78',1$/$;,6

81,9(56$/$'$37(56(7$7ƒ
)25/(9(/,167$//$7,2172
/21*,78',1$/$;,6

Figure 3-40. GMU 44 Universal Mount Level Installation Using Support Equipment,
Examples

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-50 Rev. L
3.2.4.2 Installation of GMU44 Magnetometer with GMU44 Universal Mount
3.2.4.2.1 Assembling the GMU 44 Universal Mount
1. Use the offset angle calculated from Section 3.2.4.4 to align the GMU 44 Install Rack to the
universal bracket (Figure 3-41) and mark the drill hole-pattern to the universal bracket. Drill to
diameter of .159 inch, 3 places. Do not enlarge the holes in the GMU 44 Install Rack.

+2/(0$5.6)253$5$//(//,1(72 +2/(0$5.6)253$5$//(//,1(72
0$7&+72302817,1*2)%5$&.(7 0$7&+6,'(02817,1*2)%5$&.(7

$/,*1*08,167$//5$&.3$5$//(/72
$,5&5$)7&(17(5/,1(0$7&+'5,//%5$&.(7
72,167$//5$&.$1'5,9(7,13/$&(

$/,*1*08,167$//5$&. $,5&5$)7)25:$5',1',&$725
3$5$//(/72$,5&5$)7&(17(5/,1(
0$7&+'5,//%5$&.(772,167$//
5$&.$1'5,9(7,13/$&(

Figure 3-41. Top Plate Alignment to Aircraft Heading

2. Rivet the GMU 44 Install Rack to the top bracket using MS20426AD5-6 rivets (3 Places).
See Figure 3-42 and Figure 3-43.

81,9(56$/723
0$*1(720(7(5%5$&.(7
*08,167$//5$&.

'21275,9(77+(6(
$5()256(&85,1*
7+(*08727+,6
$66(0%/('81,7
$/,*10(173,16

5,9(7+2/(6$5(
&2817(5681.

Figure 3-42. Installation Rack Rivet Through Holes

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-51
06$'5,9(7
;

127()25:$5'
5(/$7,2172
%5$&.(7

*08,167$//5$&.

0$*1(720(7(581,9(56$/
723%5$&.(7

Figure 3-43. Installation Rack to Top Bracket Installation

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-52 Rev. L
3. Assemble the top bracket to the bottom bracket and rivet using MS20426AD3-4 rivets (3 places).
See Figure 3-44. Ensure that installed rivets are countersunk and flush. Remove any burrs or
excess rivet heads.

NOTE
The incline of the mounting location may be determined by using a level meter such as the
PRO 360 or equivalent. It is recommended to use a level surface on the aircraft itself as
reference for a more accurate installation.

*8,'(+2/(63529,'('
720281772$,5&5$)7

5,9(7723$1'%27720
%5$&.(76:,7+
06$'5,9(76

06$'5,9(7
;

0$*1(720(7(5
81,9(56$/%5$&.(7

Figure 3-44. GMU 44 Universal Mount Top and Bottom Bracket Assembly

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-53
4. Determine and set the incline offset required for level installation. Move the top bracket forward or
aft relative to the bottom bracket to achieve desired angle setting for side plate installations or
move the top bracket up or down relative to the bottom bracket to achieve the desired angle setting
for bottom plate installations. Ensure alignment of holes for desired setting (0°, 2°, 4° or 6°). See
Figure 3-45 through Figure 3-49 for details on achieving desired angle settings.

+2/(3$77(51)25
/$7(5$/027,21
$1*8/$5$'-8670(17

0$*1(720(7(5
81,9(56$/723%5$&.(7

+2/(3$77(51)25
527$7,21$/027,21
$1*8/$5$'-8670(17

+2/(3$77(51)25
/$7(5$/027,21
$1*8/$5$'-8670(17

0$*1(720(7(5
81,9(56$/%5$&.(7

+2/(3$77(51)25
527$7,21$/027,21
$1*8/$5$'-8670(17

Figure 3-45. GMU 44 Universal Mount Top and Bottom Hole Patterns

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-54 Rev. L
$1*/($'-8670(17
9$/8(25ƒ
$1*/($'-867('
25ƒ

5,9(76
ƒ ƒ ,167$//('
ƒ ƒ
ƒ ƒ 02817,1*
ƒ ƒ 3/$7(

029(0(172)3/$7(672
$/,*1+2/(6/$7(5$//<
)25'(*5((62),1&/,1(

Figure 3-46. GMU 44 Universal Mount Hole Alignment, Lateral Method 1

$1*/($'-8670(17 $1*/($'-867('
9$/8(25ƒ 25ƒ

5,9(76
ƒ ƒ
,167$//('
ƒ ƒ
ƒ ƒ
ƒ ƒ 02817,1*
3/$7(

Figure 3-47. GMU 44 Universal Mount Hole Alignment, Lateral Method 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-55
5,9(76
$1*/($'-8670(17 ,167$//('
9$/8(625ƒ

029(0(172)3/$7(672
$/,*1+2/(6,1527$7,21 ƒ ƒ
)25'(*5((62),1&/,1( ƒ ƒ
ƒ
ƒ

02817,1*
3/$7(
$1*/(
5(48,5('

Figure 3-48. GMU 44 Univ Mount Hole Alignment, Rotational Method 1

02817,1*
3/$7(

$1*/(
5(48,5('

3/$7(029(0(17672 5,9(76
ƒ ƒ
$/,*1+2/(6,1527$7,21 ƒ ƒ ,167$//('
ƒ ƒ
)25'(*5((62),1&/,1(

$1*/($'-8670(17
9$/8(25ƒ

Figure 3-49. GMU 44 Universal Mount Hole Alignment, Rotational Method 2

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-56 Rev. L
5. Cleco the desired angle and rivet the top bracket to the bottom bracket on both sides (2 each side)
using MS20470AD3-4 rivets as shown in Figure 3-50 and Figure 3-51. Examples are shown in
Figure 3-52 and Figure 3-53.

06$' 5,9(7
;

127(5,9(76$5(02817(',16+2:16(72)
+2/(6)25
ƒ',+('5$/$'-8670(17

&/(&2 ;

Figure 3-50. GMU 44 Universal Mount Incline Offset Procedure

06$'5,9(7
;

127(5,9(76$5(02817(',16+2:16(72)
+2/(6)25 ƒ',+('5$/$'-8670(17

Figure 3-51. GMU 44 Universal Mount Incline Offset Procedure

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-57
02817,1*3/$1(

723029(0(17 723029(0(17

/()76,'( 5,*+76,'(

%27720029(0(17 %27720029(0(17

(;$03/(2)ƒ,1&/,1('8(72/$7(5$/029(0(17
5,9(7(':,7+06$'

Figure 3-52. Example of a 4° Lateral Incline GMU 44 Universal Mount

5(&200(1'('02817,1*
3/$1(

*08

ƒ

ƒ

*08

5,9(7/2&$7,21
)25ƒ,1&/,1( 5(&200(1'('02817,1*
3/$1(

Figure 3-53. Example of a 6° Rotated Incline GMU 44 Universal Mount

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-58 Rev. L
6. Install the GMU 44 into the GMU 44 Universal Mount using three screws P/N 211-60037-08.
Apply medium strength thread locker (such as Loctite 242) to screw threads and torque fasteners 6
to 8 in.lbs. Witness stripe (torque seal) fastener heads. See Figure 3-54.

6&5(:
;%5$66
;

*08
0$*1(720(7(5

Figure 3-54. Installation of the GMU 44 into GMU 44 Universal Mount

3.2.4.2.2 GMU 44 Universal Mount Installation

NOTE
For metal aircraft the GMU 44 must be electrically bonded to the aircraft metallic
structure that forms the ground plane, with a resistance of 10 mΩ or less with the
connector disconnected. The Universal mount and any brackets it mounts to must be
electrically bonded to the aircraft ground plane.

Determine a suitable location for the GMU 44 (refer to Section 2.5.11.5 for placement information).
Example GMU 44 installations can be found in Appendix D.
Installation of the GMU 44 requires the aircraft to be leveled both in the longitudinal and lateral axes.
Refer to the aircraft maintenance manual for leveling instructions. It is preferred that the aircraft is placed
on jacks while leveled to avoid inadvertently placing the aircraft in a non level position when entering,
exiting or working in the aircraft. Complete the Magnetic Interference Survey per Section 3.2.4.3.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-59
NOTE
Prior to installing any equipment necessary for the installation of the GMU 44, a
Magnetic Interference Survey must be completed to determine if the desired location is
acceptable for the installation of the GMU 44 Magnetometer.

NOTE
In most cases support components for the installation of the GMU 44 Universal Mount is
not required. For some aircraft that require installing the magnetometer in the vertical
stabilizer, support brackets may be required to compensate for the extreme inclines and/or
awkward positioning. In such cases it is recommended to provide a level installation using
the manufactured brackets or other support equipment, especially if the GMU 44
Universal Mount is secured through the bottom bracket.

If required, install the support components (e.g. manufactured brackets or other equipment used to support
the GMU 44 Universal Mount) required for the installation of the GMU 44 Universal Mount in accordance
with the aircraft maintenance manual and AC43.13-2B Chapter 2. Verify clearances and requirements per
Figure 3-55.
For installations that have the clearance and access to install and remove the GMU 44 without disturbing
the GMU 44 Universal Mount, the GMU 44 Universal Mount may be installed on the mounting platform
prior to installing the GMU 44 on it. In this case, rivets may be used to secure the GMU 44 Universal
Mount to the mounting platform since removal of the GMU for maintenance or replacement will not
require the removal of the GMU 44 Universal Mount. When using rivets, use CR3242-4 (Length A/R)
Cherry Max rivets or MS20470AD5 Solid Universal Head rivets. It is acceptable to oversize the holes in
the Universal Mount brackets to a #21 drill size (0.159”) for installation of MS20470AD5 rivets.
Installation hardware for the GMU 44 Universal Mount should be non-magnetic. Acceptable nutplates
include #6-32 variations of the following: MS21048, MS21050, MS21052, MS21054, MS21056,
MS21058, MS21060, MS21070, MS21072, and MS21074. Do not use floating nutplates. Acceptable nuts
include #6-32 variations of the following: AN363C, AN364C, or AN365C. Acceptable screws include
MS5197, #6-32, length as appropriate. Acceptable washers include AN960C-6, AN960C-6L, AN960PD-
6, AN960-PD-6L, or their NAS equivalents.
In order to satisfy the structural requirements for the operation of the GMU 44 the following conditions
must be met:
1. If support racks, brackets or shelves need to be fabricated, they should be fabricated and attached
to the aircraft structure in accordance with the methods outlined in AC43.13-2B Chapter 2 and the
following requirements:
a) Material shall be 2024-T3 aluminum alloy sheet per AMS-QQ-A-250/4 or Clad 2024-T3
aluminum alloy sheet per AMS-QQ-A-250/5.
b) Material shall have some type of corrosion protection (primer, alodine, etc.)
c) Material shall be a minimum of 0.032” thickness
d) Use sheet metal techniques (bend radius, fillets, etc) appropriate to the material thickness
and type.
2. Any supporting structure must be rigidly connected to the aircraft structure through strong
structural members capable of supporting substantial loads.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-60 Rev. L
3. Mounting platform shall not span greater than 12 inches in width or length without direct
attachment to primary structure. If mounting platform does span greater than 12 inches, add
necessary stringers, doublers, bulkhead flange reinforcements, etc., to provide adequate support.
4. Maintain a minimum of 1.57 inch between the top of the GMU 44 unit and any object to ensure
clearance for connector and wire harness. If the GMU 44 Install Rack is permanently attached to
the aircraft and the GMU 44 must be lifted out of its mount for installation / removal, maintain a
minimum of three inches between the top of the GMU 44 unit and any object above the GMU 44.
Refer to Figure 3-55.

*08

Figure 3-55. GMU 44 Installation Clearance

5. Determine the angle offset for level installation and heading angle offset for aircraft heading
alignment.
6. The incline of the mounting location may be measured using a level meter such as the PRO 360 or
equivalent. It is recommended to use a level surface on the aircraft itself as reference for a more
accurate installation.

NOTE
For vertical stabilizer installation, aircraft structures such as the bulkheads and support
frames are usually perpendicular to the aircraft heading and may be used as reference for
determining the relative position of the installation to the aircraft heading.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-61
NOTE
Wing installation may require the transfer of both the aircraft heading reference line and
the mounting panel’s line to the shop floor for comparison and angle measurement. Refer
to Section 3.2.4.4 for typical methods to determine the heading angle offset.

7. Assemble the GMU 44 Universal Mount per Section 3.2.4.2.1. For GMU 44 Mounting examples
see Section D.2.
8. For side plate installations, position the GMU 44 Universal Mount on the aircraft mounting
structure. Transfer the hole-pattern from the side-plate of the GMU 44 Universal Mount to the
mounting structure (0.144” diameter drill holes, two places). See Figure 3-56, left side.
9. For bottom plate installations, drill four holes (0.128” diameter) on the bottom plate (two on each
side) of the GMU 44 Universal Mount. Position the GMU 44 Universal Mount on the mounting
platform. Transfer the hole-pattern from the bottom plate of the GMU 44 Universal Mount to the
mounting plate (0.144” inch diameter, four places). See Figure 3-56, right side.

‘+2/()25)$67(1(5
0$7&+'5,//7202817,1*685)$&(
3/$&(6 ‘+2/()25)$67(1(5
0$7&+'5,//7202817,1*685)$&(
3/$&(6

6,'(3/$7(,167$//$7,21 %277203/$7(,167$//$7,21

Figure 3-56. Possible Hole-Patterns on the GMU 44 Universal Mount

10. Prepare the mounting surface (both faying surfaces) for bonding in accordance with Section 3.8.3.
If more than 3 rivets are used then no faying surface preparation is required and the electrical bond
will be inherent through the rivets.
11. Rivet nut plates (MS21059L3) with MS20426AD4-6 rivets (Countersunk rivets) onto mounting
platform. Ensure that installed rivets are countersunk and are flush with the installation panel.
Remove any burrs or excess rivet heads. In some cases, such as with composite aircraft, self
locking nuts may be used instead of rivet nuts.
12. Install the GMU 44 into the GMU 44 Universal Mount using hardware included in the GMU 44
Installation Kit. Apply medium strength thread locker (such as Loctite 242) to screw threads and
torque fasteners 6 to 8 in-lbs. Witness stripe (torque seal) fastener heads.
13. The metal components in the GMU 44’s connector may slightly affect the magnetic field sensed by
the GMU 44. Place the connector at least 2 inches from the body of the GMU 44 to minimize this
effect. After attaching the GMU 44 connector to its mate in the aircraft wiring, secure the
connector in place using good installation practices. This will ensure that any remaining magnetic
effect can be compensated for using the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure in Section 5.6.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-62 Rev. L
14. After the installation is complete, refer to Section 5 for system configuration, calibration and
checkout.

NOTE
The GMU 44 will not provide valid outputs until the post installation calibration
procedures are completed.

3.2.4.2.3 GMU 44 Universal Mount Installation – Tube and Fabric Aircraft

NOTE
For tube and fabric aircraft the GMU 44 must be electrically bonded to the aircraft
metallic structure that forms the ground plane, with a resistance of 10 mΩ or less with the
connector disconnected. The Universal mount and any brackets it mounts to must be
electrically bonded to the aircraft ground plane.

NOTE
It is recommended that the GMU 44 not be installed near the steel tube structure because
of the potential for magnetic interference. Consequently the GMU 44 should be installed
in the wing, and the procedures specified in Section 3.2.4.2.2 should be followed.

3.2.4.2.4 GMU 44 Universal Mount Installation – Composite Aircraft

NOTE
For composite aircraft, the GMU 44 must not be electrically bonded to the aircraft ground
plane. Refer to Table K-1 to determine GMU 44 isolation requirements for all aircraft
models. If the structure is conductive at the mounting location, provisions must be made to
electrically isolate the GMU 44 from the conductive structure.

NOTE
Carbon reinforced composite (with or without mesh) or fiberglass with mesh is considered
to be conductive. Wood, Kevlar and fiberglass without mesh is considered to be non-
conductive.

3.2.4.2.4.1 Mounting on Conductive Structure

The GMU 44 Universal Mount cannot be easily attached to conductive structure without providing a
conductive path between the mount and structure. Consequently, the GMU 44 Universal Mount should not
be used and the procedure in Section 3.2.4.2.3 should be used.
3.2.4.2.4.2 Mounting on Non-Conductive Structure
The GMU 44 Universal Mount can be attached to non-conductive structure using methods detailed in
Section 3.2.4.2.2.

NOTE
Nut plates should not be used to attach the GMU 44 Universal Mount to non-conductive
structure. Alternate stainless locking nuts identified in Section 3.2.4.2.2 should be used to
fasten the Universal Mount to structure.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-63
NOTE
The GMU 44 Universal Mount must remain electrically isolated from structure. The
GMU 44 and the GMU 44 Universal Mount must not be located within 0.5” of any
conductive structure or components.

3.2.4.2A Installation of GMU44 Magnetometer without GMU44 Universal Mount

3.2.4.2A.1 GMU44 Installation – Metal Aircraft
The GMU 44 Universal Mount described in Section 3.2.4.1 allows for level installation and aircraft
heading alignment; however, the GMU 44 may be installed without the Universal Mount as long as level
installation and heading alignment requirements are met.
Determine a suitable location for the GMU 44 (refer to Section 2.5.11.5 for placement information).
Installation of the GMU 44 requires the aircraft to be leveled both in the longitudinal and lateral axis. Refer
to the aircraft maintenance manual for leveling instructions. It is preferred that the aircraft is placed on
jacks while leveled to avoid inadvertently placing the aircraft in a non level position when entering, exiting
or working in the aircraft.

NOTE
Prior to installing any equipment necessary for the installation of the GMU 44, a
Magnetic Interference Survey must be completed to determine if the desired location is
acceptable for the installation of the GMU 44 Magnetometer.

Complete the Magnetic Interference Survey per Section 3.2.4.3.

In order to satisfy the structural requirements for the operation of the GMU 44 the following conditions
must be met:
1. If support racks, brackets or shelves need to be fabricated, they should be fabricated and attached
to the aircraft structure in accordance with the methods outlined in AC43.13-2B Chapter 2 and the
following requirements:
◦ Material shall be 2024-T3 aluminum alloy sheet per AMS-QQ-A-250/4 or Clad 2024-T3
aluminum alloy sheet per AMS-QQ-A-250/5.
◦ Material shall have some type of corrosion protection (primer, alodine, etc.)
◦ Material shall be a minimum of 0.032” thickness for bracket lengths less than 12”, or a
minimum of 0.063” thickness for bracket lengths greater than 12”
◦ Use sheet metal techniques (bend radius, fillets, etc) appropriate to the material thickness
and type.
2. Any supporting structure must be rigidly connected to the aircraft primary structure through strong
structural members capable of supporting substantial loads.
3. Mounting platform shall not span greater than 12 inches wide or long without stiffeners or
stiffening flanges. Maximum length of mounting platform is 18 inches.
4. Maintain a minimum of 1.57 inch between the top of the GMU 44 unit and any object to allow
installation / removal of the GMU 44 and to ensure clearance for connector and wire harness.
Refer to Figure 3-57.
The incline of the mounting location may be measured using a level meter such as the PRO 360 or
equivalent. It is recommended to use a level surface on the aircraft itself as reference for a more accurate
installation.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-64 Rev. L
NOTE
For vertical stabilizer installation, aircraft structures such as the bulkheads and support
frames are usually perpendicular to the aircraft heading and may be used as reference for
determining the relative position of the installation to the aircraft heading.

NOTE
For wing installations it may require the transferring of both the aircraft heading
reference line and the mounting panel’s line to the shop floor for comparison and angle
measurement. Refer to Section 3.2.4.4 for typical methods to determine the heading angle
offset.

5. Refer to Figure C-4 for GMU 44 Install Rack hole pattern, which must be transferred to fabricated
mounting structure prior to installation of GMU 44 Install Rack. Ensure that the GMU 44 Install
Rack is aligned with the aircraft centerline. Rivet the installation plate to the top bracket using
MS20426AD5-6 rivets (3 Places).

NOTE
Installation hardware for the GMU 44 Universal Mount should be non-magnetic.
Acceptable nutplates include #6-32 variations of the following: MS21048, MS21050,
MS21052, MS21054, MS21056, MS21058, MS21060, MS21070, MS21072, and MS21074.
Do not use floating nutplates. Acceptable nuts include #6-32 variations of the following:
AN363C, AN364C, or AN365C. Acceptable screws include MS51957, #6-32, length as
appropriate. Acceptable washers include AN960C-6, AN960C-6L, AN960PD-6, AN960-
PD-6L, or their NAS equivalents.

6. Rivet nut plates (acceptable variations noted above) with MS20426AD3-4 rivets (Countersunk
rivets) onto mounting platform. Ensure that installed rivets are countersunk and are flush with the
installation panel. Remove any burrs or excess rivet heads. In some cases, such as with composite
aircraft, self locking nuts may be used instead of rivet nuts.
7. Install the GMU 44 into the GMU 44 Universal Mount using hardware included in the GMU 44
Installation Kit. Apply medium strength thread locker (such as Loctite 242) to screw threads and
torque fasteners 6 to 8 in-lbs. Witness stripe (torque seal) fastener heads.
8. The metal components in the GMU 44’s connector may slightly affect the magnetic field sensed by
the GMU 44. Place the connector at least 2 inches from the body of the GMU 44 to minimize this
effect. After attaching the GMU 44’s connector to its mate in the aircraft wiring, secure the
connector in place using good installation practices. This will ensure that any remaining magnetic
effect can be compensated for using the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure in Section 5.6.
9. After the installation is complete, refer to Section 5 for system configuration, calibration and
checkout.

NOTE
The GMU will not provide valid outputs until the post installation calibration procedures
are completed.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-65
Example installations not using the GMU 44 Universal Mount can be found in Figure 3-57 and 
Figure 3-58.

*08
0$*1(720(7(5

127(0,1,080',67$1&( 0,1,080
5(48,5(',)%5$&.(7$66(0%/<
,65(029$%/(27+(5:,6(
0,1,080',67$1&(,65(48,5('
,)81,70867%(5(029(')520
7232)%5$&.(7

83

0$;,080:267,))(1(5
2567,))(1,1*)/$1*(6 287%2$5'
Figure 3-57. GMU 44 Magnetometer Mounting without Universal Mount
Sheet 1 of 2

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-66 Rev. L
)$67(1,1* *08

+$5':$5( 0$*1(720(7(5

$,5)5$0(
6758&785(

)25:$5'

02817,1*3/$7(

02817,1*685)$&(
3$5$//(/72
$,5&5$)7/(9(/

127(6

86(76+((7$/80,1,807+,&.1(6625*5($7(586($%(1'
5$',86$335235,$7(727+(0$7(5,$/7<3($1'7+,&.1(66 (;$03/(86(%(1'
5$',8625*5($7(5)257+,&.1(66 7$/80,180

$33/<&25526,213527(&7,21 (;$03/(=,1&&+520$7(35,0(5$/2',1(
(7& 21$//685)$&(62)3$57

$5,*,'
&211(&7,2172$,5&5$)76758&785(,65(48,5('+$5':$5(0867%(
1210$*1(7,&5(&200(1'('+$5':$5(237,216$5(

+$5':$5( 63(&,),&$7,216
5,9(76 35()(55('&5 ; &+(55<0$; 25$/7(51$7(06$' ;
6&5(:6 06 /(1*7+$5
$1& $1& / 0606
$13'$13' / 0606
:$6+(56 1873/$7(6
1$6&15 0606
25
251$6&15 0606
$1& $$1& $ 0606
1876
$1&$ 5,9(76 06$' ;

Figure 3-57. GMU 44 Magnetometer Mounting without Universal Mount

Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-67
06$'5,9(7
*08 3/&6
,167$//
5$&.

:,1*5,%

)$%5,&$7('
%5$&.(7

)25:$5'

Figure 3-58. GMU44 Magnetometer Mounting On Wing Rib Without Universal Mount
Sheet 1 of 2

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-68 Rev. L
02817,1*
:,1*5,% %5$&.(7

*08
0$*1(720(7(5
)25:$5'

02817,1*685)$&(
3$5$//(/72
$,5&5$)7/(9(/

)$67(1,1*

+$5':$5(

127(6

86(76+((7$/80,1,807+,&.1(6625*5($7(586($%(1'
5$',86$335235,$7(727+(0$7(5,$/7<3($1'7+,&.1(66 (;$03/(86(%(1'
5$',8625*5($7(5)257+,&.1(667$/80,180

$33/<&25526,213527(&7,21 (;$03/(=,1&&+520$7(35,0(5$/2',1(
(7& 21$//685)$&(62)3$57

$5,*,'&211(&7,2172$,5&5$)76758&785(,65(48,5('+$5':$5(0867%(
1210$*1(7,&5(&200(1'('+$5':$5(237,216$5(

+$5':$5( 63(&,),&$7,216
5,9(76 35()(55('&5; &+(55<0$; 25$/7(51$7(06$' ;
6&5(:6 06 /(1*7+$5
:$6+(56 $1&$1&/ 1873/$7(6 0606
$13'$13'/ 0606
25
1$6&15 0606
251$6&15 0606
1876 $1&$$1&$ 0606
$1&$ 5,9(76 06$';

Figure 3-58. GMU44 Magnetometer Mounting On Wing Rib Without Universal Mount
Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-69
3.2.4.2A.2 GMU 44 Installation – Tube and Fabric Aircraft

CAUTION
The GMU 44 must not be installed near the steel tube structure because of the potential
for magnetic interference. The GMU 44 should be installed in the wing in accordance with
Section 3.2.4.2A.1.

NOTE
For tube and fabric aircraft the GMU 44 must be electrically bonded to the aircraft
metallic structure that forms the ground plane, with a resistance of 10 mΩ or less with the
connector disconnected. The Universal mount and any brackets it mounts to must be
electrically bonded to the aircraft ground plane.

3.2.4.2A.3 GMU 44 Installation – Composite Aircraft

In all installations in composite aircraft, the GMU 44 must not be electrically bonded to the aircraft ground
plane. This section provides guidance on achieving such an installation. Refer to Table K-1 to determine
GMU 44 isolation requirements for all aircraft models.
3.2.4.2A.3.1 Mounting on Conductive Structure
Determine a suitable location for the GMU 44 (refer to Section 2.5.11.5 for placement information). The
selected location must maintain a minimum 0.5” clearance between the GMU 44 and surrounding
conductive components and structure. Installation of the GMU 44 requires the aircraft to be leveled both in
the longitudinal and lateral axis. Refer to the aircraft maintenance manual for leveling instructions. It is
preferred that the aircraft is placed on jacks while leveled to avoid inadvertently placing the aircraft in a
non level position when entering, exiting or working in the aircraft. Complete the Magnetic Interference
Survey per Section 3.2.4.3.

NOTE
Prior to installing any equipment necessary for the installation of the GMU 44, a
Magnetic Interference Survey must be completed to determine if the desired location is
acceptable for the installation of the GMU 44 Magnetometer.

NOTE
Refer to Figure C-4 for GMU 44 Install Rack hole pattern.

1. Fabricate a suitable mount as shown in Figure 3-59 and in accordance with the following:
◦ Material shall be 2024-T3 aluminum alloy sheet per AMS-QQ-A-250/4 or Clad 2024-T3
aluminum alloy sheet per AMS-QQ-A-250/5.
◦ Material shall have some type of corrosion protection (primer, alodine, etc.)
◦ Material shall be a minimum of 0.032” thickness for bracket lengths less than 12”
◦ Material shall be a minimum of 0.063” thickness for bracket lengths greater than 12”
◦ Use sheet metal techniques (bend radius, fillets, etc) appropriate to the material thickness
and type.
◦ Mounting platform shall not span greater than 12 inches wide or long without stiffeners or
stiffening flanges. Maximum length of mounting platform is 18 inches. Any supporting
structure must be rigidly connected to the aircraft primary structure through strong structural
members capable of supporting substantial loads.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-70 Rev. L
Figure 3-59. GMU 44 Magnetometer Mounting Bracket for Composite Installations

2. Drill holes in the attach flanges of the GMU 44 mounting bracket. Hole diameters should be 0.098
to 0.1285 inch and be spaced approximately 0.5 inch apart.

NOTE
For vertical stabilizer installation, aircraft structures such as the bulkheads and support
frames are usually perpendicular to the aircraft heading and may be used as reference for
determining the relative position of the installation to the aircraft heading.

NOTE
For wing installations it may require the transferring of both the aircraft heading
reference line and the mounting panel’s line to the shop floor for comparison and angle
measurement. Refer to Section 3.2.4.4 for typical methods to determine the heading angle
offset.

3. Temporarily place the bracket in its final mounting location. Mark a line parallel to the heading
reference line on the bracket.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-71
4. Remove the bracket and rivet the GMU 44 Install Rack to the top bracket using MS20426AD5-6
rivets (3 places), ensuring that the forward direction of the Install Rack is aligned with the forward
direction of the heading reference line.
5. Maintain a minimum of 3” between the top of the GMU 44 unit and any object to allow
installation or removal of the GMU 44 and ensure clearance for connector and wire harness.
6. The incline of the mounting location may be measured using a level meter such as the PRO 360 or
equivalent. It is recommended to use a level surface on the aircraft itself as reference for a more
accurate installation.
7. At the selected location, apply a minimum of two layers of glass cloth (each cloth having 0.009”
thickness, minimum) to conductive surface before installing GMU 44 mounting bracket 
(refer to Figure 3-60). The bottom layer of glass cloth should be cut and located in the aircraft such
that there is 0.5” distance (minimum) on all sides between the edge of the cloth and the edge of the
mounting bracket. The top layer of glass cloth should be cut and located such that there is 1.0”
distance (minimum) on all sides between the edge of the cloth and the edge of the mounting
bracket.

Figure 3-60. Conductive Surface Preparation for Attachment of GMU 44 Mounting Bracket

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-72 Rev. L
8. Mix epoxy (Jeffco 1307 epoxy resin with Jeffco 3176 epoxy hardener) in a 4:1 ratio. Apply to
conductive surface and add bottom layer of glass cloth, working epoxy thoroughly into weave and
around the edge of the cloth. Lay top layer of glass cloth over bottom layer, ensuring a 0.5”
distance is kept between layers around the perimeter of the glass cloth. Work epoxy thoroughly
into weave and around the edge of the cloth. Allow layers to cure.
9. Prepare the metal surface of the GMU 44 Magnetometer bracket that will attach to the non-
conductive glass cloth by scuffing the faying surface with 80-grit sand paper, as shown in
Figure 3-61. The scuffing should not penetrate through the epoxy such that the fiberglass is
exposed. If exposed then another fiberglass ply should be laid on top over the entire area.

Figure 3-61. Attach Flange Preparation of GMU 44 Magnetometer Bracket

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-73
10. Mix epoxy (Jeffco 1307 epoxy resin with Jeffco 3176 epoxy hardener) in a 4:1 ratio. Add epoxy
mix to flox (flocked cotton fiber) in approximately a 2:1 ratio. Apply epoxy/flox mix to attach
flanges of GMU 44 Magnetometer bracket as well as to corresponding mounting surface in
aircraft, as shown in Figure 3-62. Ensure that the epoxy/flox mix flows through the holes in the
attach flanges and smooth the mix across the upper surface of the attach flanges. Ensure bracket
remains aligned with the aircraft’s forward direction and that the GMU 44 mounting surface
remains level. Make corrections to achieve a level surface before epoxy cures. Apply fillet around
the perimeter of the attach flanges and allow epoxy/flox mix to cure.

Figure 3-62. GMU 44 Mounting Bracket Attachment to Prepared Aircraft Surface

11. Mix epoxy (Jeffco 1307 epoxy resin with Jeffco 3176 epoxy hardener) in a 4:1 ratio.
12. Apply the final layers of cloth on GMU 44 Bracket flanges, as shown in Figure 3-63. The bottom
layer of glass cloth should be cut and located in the aircraft such that there is 0.5” distance
(minimum) on all sides between the edge of the cloth and the edge of the mounting bracket. The
top layer of glass cloth should be cut and located such that there is 1.0” distance (minimum) on all
sides between the edge of the cloth and the edge of the mounting bracket.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-74 Rev. L
13. Apply epoxy to bracket flanges and lay bottom layer of cloth on top of flange, ensuring a 0.5”
distance is kept between the edge of the glass cloth and the mounting bracket, with one edge
resting along the bend line in the metal flange. Work epoxy thoroughly into weave and around the
edge of the cloth. Lay top layer of glass cloth over bottom layer, ensuring a 0.5” distance is kept
between layers around the perimeter of the glass cloth. Work the epoxy thoroughly into weave and
around the edge of the cloth. Allow layers to cure.

Figure 3-63. Final Layers of Cloth on GMU 44 Mounting Bracket

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-75
14. The completed installation is shown in Figure 3-64.

Figure 3-64. Final View of GMU 44 Installation on Conductive Surface in Composite

Aircraft

3.2.4.2A.3.2 Mounting on Non-Conductive Structure

Same requirement as Section 3.2.4.2A.1, except no fiber glass plies are required to be laid under the Al hat
section. The Al hat section may be directly bonded to the aircraft skin.
3.2.4.3 Magnetic Interference Survey

CAUTION
Do not permanently rivet the GMU 44 Universal Mount together. Use rivets held in place
with tape to hold GMU 44 Universal Mount together temporarily. Clecos, clamps or other
devices that are metal or magnetic should not be used. It is possible that the location will
fail the survey and the installation will require a new location, with a different incline.

Temporarily assemble the GMU 44 Universal Mount per Section 3.2.4.2.1 for level installation using tape
to hold rivets in place. Set the GMU and installation rack onto the GMU 44 Universal Mount (or other
mounting bracket if the Universal Mount is not being used). It is preferable to have the GMU 44 forward
direction aligned to the aircraft heading, but not required. Place the GMU 44 and GMU 44 Universal
Mount on the desired installation location and secure in place using tape. Do not use clamps or other
devices that are ferrous or magnetic.
Run the magnetic interference survey using the magnetic interference software in accordance with
Appendix G. If the survey passes, the location is considered reliable for the installation of the GMU 44.
If the test fails, the location should be considered unreliable until the source of the magnetic interference is
identified, remedied and the location is retested and passes the test. Refer to Section 6.1 for additional
information on troubleshooting and correcting the GMU 44 magnetometer installation. If the magnetic
interference cannot be remedied, another location should be chosen and tested.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-76 Rev. L
3.2.4.4 Method for Determining Heading Angle Offset for Wing Installation
One method of determining the heading angle offset for wing mounted installations is as follows:
1. Transfer the mounting plate alignment to the underside of the wing.

NOTE
For some metal aircraft, it may be possible to use the rivets that secure the plate to the
aircraft skin to translate the plate line. See Figure 3-65 For aircraft that do not have rivets
for reference, such as composite aircraft, dividers may be used.

5,9(7/,1()25
,167$//$7,21
2)3$1(/
$&&(663$1(/

Figure 3-65. Rivet Line Method to Determine Mounting Panel Alignment

NOTE
Up/down movement of the dividers may offset the location of the mark on the underside of
the wing relative to other marks. It is important to note the holding position of the dividers
and ensure the same holding technique is used for all markings.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-77
2. Using a pair of dividers (similar to those shown in Figure 3-66), transfer the installation plate line
to the skin of the aircraft. Place packing tape on the underside of the wing for marking.

25

Figure 3-66. Dividers Used to Transfer Panel Alignment

3. Place one side of the divider inside the aircraft wing with the point making contact with the
mounting plate surface, as shown in Figure 3-67.

,167$//$7,213$1(/

$&&(66+2/(
',9,'(5
$,5&5$)76.,1

Figure 3-67. Using Dividers to Transfer Panel Alignment to Underside of Aircraft Wing

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-78 Rev. L
4. Place the other side of the divider outside the aircraft wing and mark the point on the tape holding
the divider as flush to the wing as possible, as shown in Figure 3-68.

0$5. 83/,1(
)253$1(//2&$7,21
81'(56,'(2) 217$3(
:,1*
:,1*$&&(66
3$1(/+2/(

',9,'(5

Figure 3-68. Transferring Mounting Plate Alignment To Underside Of Wing

NOTE
To verify that a measurement error did not occur due to the holding position of the
dividers, ensure that a straight line intersects all marks.

5. Mark at least three points along the mounting plate and draw a straight line through the points.
Verify that the line intersects all points marked.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-79
6. Using a plumb bob transfer the mounting panel line from the underside of the wing to the shop
floor. Mark at least 3 points and draw a straight line. Verify that the line intersects all points.
See Figure 3-69.

)25:$5'('*(
2):,1*

[
[
[

/,1(6&5,%('2172
81'(56,'(2):,1*
)52002817,1*3$1(/

3/80%%2%

[
[
[

75$16)(55('/,1(
21727$3(21
+$1*$5)/225

Figure 3-69. Transferring Mounting Panel Line from Underside of Wing to Floor Using
Plumb Bob

Next find the aircraft centerline.

1. Drop a plumb bob along each side of the fuselage to the left and right at the cowl line or skin line
near the front of the fuselage. Make a mark for the two plumbs on the floor, as shown in 
Figure 3-70.

3/80%%2%/,1(6

Figure 3-70. Centerline Plumb Bob Method for the Forward Fuselage

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-80 Rev. L
2. Strike a line between the two marks using a chalk line. Measure the distance between the two
marks and mark the half way point. This will be the centerline mark for the forward fuselage.
See Figure 3-71.

3/80%%2%0$5.
&/ 21)/225

&(17(50$5.
21)/225

Figure 3-71. Center Mark for the Forward Fuselage (Plumb Bob Method)

3. Perform the same procedure to find the center point for the aft end of the fuselage, as shown in 
Figure 3-72.

3/80%%2%

)/225
&(17(5/,1(

Figure 3-72. Centerline Plumb Bob Method for the Aft Fuselage

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-81
4. Strike a line between the centerline mark of the forward fuselage and the centerline mark at the aft
end using a chalk line, as shown in Figure 3-73. This will be the aircraft heading reference line.

3/80%%2%
&
/ $)70$5.6

&(17(50$5.
21)/225

'5$:1$,5&5$)7
+($',1*
5()(5(1&(/,1(

3/80%%2%
&
/ )25:$5'
)86(/$*(0$5.6

&(17(50$5.
21)/225

Figure 3-73. Center Line (Plumb Bob Method)

5. Determine the heading angle offset by comparing the aircraft reference center line to the mounting
plate alignment.
6. Transfer the aircraft center line to the mounting plate line for heading angle offset measurement.
7. Align the laser square to the aircraft reference line so that the other laser line is perpendicular to it
and intersects the mounting plate line drawn on the floor, as shown in Figure 3-74.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-82 Rev. L
8. Mark the point of intersection of the plate line and the laser line. Strike a line on the laser line
(between the center reference line and the mounting plate line) using a chalk line.

;
'5$:1+($',1*
5()(5(1&(/,1(
,17(56(&7,2132,17
$,5&5$)7
ƒ
/$6(5648$5(

'5$:102817,1*
3$1(//,1( :,1*

)25:$5'

Figure 3-74. Transferring Center Line Step 1 (Laser Square Method)

9. Position the laser square at the intersection point and align one of the lasers to the chalk line from
the previous step.
10. Strike a line on the laser line parallel to the center reference line using a chalk line. This chalk line
will be the transferred aircraft heading reference line and is used to determine the heading angle
offset. See Figure 3-75.

/,1(3$5$//(/72
$,5&5$)7+($',1*

'5$:102817,1*
3$1(//,1( :,1*

'5$:1+($',1*
ƒ ƒ 5()(5(1&(/,1(
$,5&5$)7

/$6(5648$5( ,17(56(&7,2132,17

)25:$5'

Figure 3-75. Transferring Center Line Step 2 (Laser Square Method)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-83
11. Use a protractor to determine the angle difference between the aircraft heading reference line and
the plate line. See Figure 3-76. This is the heading angle offset that will be used for the
magnetometer top plate installation.

<ƒ

Figure 3-76. Measuring the Heading Angle Offset

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-84 Rev. L
An alternate method to the Laser Square is the use of the “3-4-5” Triangle.
1. Mark a point (A) on the aircraft heading reference line that is just aft of the installation location.
2. Measure three feet forward on the aircraft heading reference line and mark it (B).
See Figure 3-77.

%
'5$:102817,1*
3$1(//,1(

)7

$
'5$:1+($',1*
5()(5(1&(/,1(
$,5&5$)7

)25:$5'

Figure 3-77. 3-4-5 Triangle Method Step 1

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-85
3. From point A measure 4 feet, as perpendicular as possible and draw an arc. See Figure 3-78.

%
'5$:102817,1*
3$1(//,1(

)7

$
'5$:1+($',1*
)7 5()(5(1&(/,1(
$,5&5$)7

)25:$5'

Figure 3-78. 3-4-5 Triangle Method Step 2

4. From Point B measure 5 feet and draw an arc which intersects the other, this will be point C.
5. Draw a straight line from point C to Point A. This line is perpendicular to the aircraft heading
reference line.
6. Extend the A-C line to intersect with the Panel Line. See Figure 3-79.

'5$:102817,1* %
3$1(//,1(
)7

)7
ƒ

& $
'5$:1+($',1*
)7 5()(5(1&(/,1(
$,5&5$)7
3(53(1',&8/$5
/,1(

,17(56(&7,2132,17 )25:$5'

Figure 3-79. 3-4-5 Triangle Method Step 3

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-86 Rev. L
7. Perform the Same procedure to find a perpendicular line to the A-C line. Ensure the base of the
3-4-5 triangle lies on the intersection point of the A-C line and the Panel line. See Figure 3-80.

'5$:102817,1*
3$1(//,1(
% %

)7

)7
ƒ

$ & $
&
'5$:1+($',1*
)7 5()(5(1&(/,1(
$,5&5$)7
,17(56(&7,2132,17

)25:$5'

Figure 3-80. 3-4-5 Triangle Method Step 4

8. Measure the heading angle offset.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-87
3.2.5 GDC 74( ) ADC Mounting
Determine a suitable location for the GDC 74( ) (refer to Section 2.5.11.6 for placement information).
Sample GDC 74( ) installations can be found in Section D.3. Comply with the orientation limits specified
in Figure C-8.
The GDC 74( ) should be mounted to a surface known to have sufficient structural integrity to withstand
additional inertial forces imposed by a 2.04 pound unit (weight of GDC 74( ) and Mounting Rack). If it is
necessary to build a shelf or bracket to mount the GDC 74( ) or if it is not certain that the chosen location is
of sufficient structural integrity, refer to Section 3.3.
In order to satisfy the structural requirements for the operation of the GDC 74( ) the following conditions
must be met:
1. If support racks, brackets or shelves need to be fabricated, they should be fabricated and attached
to the aircraft structure in accordance with the methods outlined in AC43.13-2B Chapter 2,
AC43.13-1B Chapter 4, and the following requirements:
a) Material shall be 2024-T3 aluminum alloy sheet per AMS-QQ-A-250/4 or Clad 2024-T3
aluminum alloy sheet per AMS-QQ-A-250/5.
b) Material shall have some type of corrosion protection (primer, alodine, etc.)
c) Material shall be a minimum of 0.040”
d) Use sheet metal techniques (bend radius, fillets, etc) appropriate to the material thickness
and type.
2. Any supporting structure must be rigidly connected to the aircraft primary structure through strong
structural members capable of supporting substantial loads.
3. Mounting platform shall not span greater than 12” in width or length without direct attachment to
primary structure. If mounting platform does span greater than 12”, add necessary stringers,
doublers, bulkhead flange reinforcements, etc., to provide adequate support.
4. Maintain a minimum of 3” between the forward edge of the mounting rack and any object to
ensure clearance for connector, wire harness and Pitot-static lines, as shown in Figure 3-81.
In addition to the structural requirements, the GDC 74( ) must be electrically bonded to the aircraft metallic
structure (metal aircraft) or instrument panel (non-metallic aircraft). Refer to Section 3.8 for additional
details.

*'&
83

$)7

0$;,080:267,))(1(5
/21*,78',1$//<
Figure 3-81. GDC 74( ) Recommended Clearance

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-88 Rev. L
There are two ways to install the GDC 74( ). Refer to the outline and Figure 3-82.

&211(&725
3$572)*'&&211(&725.,7

*'& 81,7

*'&02817,1*
5$&.68%$66(0%/<

0,1,080)$67(1(565(48,5('
+$5':$5(1276833/,('

MOUNTING OPTION I - REMOTE MOUNTED RACK WITH CONNECTOR AND FITTINGS

OPPOSITE SCREW-DOWN MOUNTING HARDWARE

*'& 81,7

&211(&725
3$572)*'&&211(&725.,7

*'&02817,1*
5$&.68%$66(0%/<

0,1,080)$67(1(565(48,5('
+$5':$5(1276833/,('

MOUNTING OPTION II - REMOTE MOUNTED RACK WITH CONNECTOR AND FITTINGS

ON SAME END AS SCREW DOWN MOUNTING HARDWARE
Figure 3-82. GDC 74( ) Mounting Options

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-89
1. Position the GDC 74( ) mounting rack to the mounting panel and transfer the hole-pattern to the
mounting plate from the angle bracket 6 places (4 required, 2 optional). Ensure installation
requirements per Section 2.5.11.6 are met.
2. Remove mounting plate, drill the marked hole-pattern (0.144 inch diameter holes) and rivet nut
plates (MS21047 or noted equivalent) with rivets (countersunk rivets). Acceptable hardware is
identified in Figure 3-83. Ensure that installed rivets are flush with the installation panel. Remove
any burrs or excess rivet heads. See Figure 3-83.
3. Perform a structural validation per Section 3.3.
4. Install the mounting rack to the mounting plate using MS35206 or NAS601 screws (4 required, 2
optional).

6&5(:
5(4 '237,21$/

*'&+2/''2:1&/$03
*'&5(027(028173/$7( 3$572)*'&02817,1*
3$572)*'&02817,1* 5$&.68%$66(0%/<
5$&.68%$66(0%/<

02817,1*685)$&(

1873/$7(
5,9(7 ;
5(4 '237,21$/

127(6
5(&200(1'('+$5':$5(237,216)25$66(0%/<

+$5':$5( 63(&,),&$7,216
6&5(:6 06 /(1*7+$5 251$6 /(1*7+$5
:$6+(56 $1 $1 /1$6)13 0 ) 0 .
1873/$7(6
251$6)13 0 . 25)
25
1876 $1$ 061 5,9(76 06$';
2506/

,17+(+25,=217$/,167$//$7,217+(7:2&(17(5+2/()$67(1(56$5(127
5(48,5(')2502817,1*

Figure 3-83. Installation of GDC 74( ) Mounting Rack to Mounting Plate

NOTE
Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to tighten the GDC 74( ) to the rack, rather than hand
tightening the knurled screws.

5. Place the GDC 74( ) into its mounting rack and tighten the mounting screws. Recommended
torque is 12 to 15 inch lb.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-90 Rev. L
3.2.5.1 Pitot-Static Connections to GDC 74( )
The installer is required to fabricate Pitot-static hose connections and attach the aircraft Pitot pressure
source and aircraft static pressure source to the GDC 74( ).

CAUTION
Check Pitot-static connections for errors before operating the GDC 74( ). Incorrect
plumbing could cause internal component damage. Observe the following cautions when
connecting pneumatic lines.

NOTE
It is acceptable for aircraft previously modified in accordance with earlier revisions of this
installation manual to have the standby instruments attached to the pilot’s Pitot-static
system. All new installations must be installed as described below.

1. Make sure the aircraft static pressure port is plumbed directly to the unit static pressure input port
and the aircraft Pitot pressure port is plumbed directly to the unit Pitot pressure input port. Refer to
Figure 3-84 through Figure 3-88, depending upon the installation (refer to Figure C-6 or 
Figure C-7 for the location of the Pitot and static ports on the GDC 74( )).
2. Seal the threads of pneumatic fittings at the connector ports. Use caution to ensure there are no
pneumatic leaks.
3. Use care to avoid getting fluids or particles into the Pitot and static lines connected to the 
GDC 74( )).
4. Refer to Section 5 for system configuration, calibration and checkout.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-91
723,/27¶63,72767$7,&6<67(0

67$7,&
3,727

3,727

*'&
67$7,&

)((7

Figure 3-84. Pitot-Static Connections for Single G600 Installation

(Aircraft with Single Pitot-Static System)

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-92 Rev. L
72&23,/27¶63,72767$7,&6<67(0

723,/27¶63,72767$7,&6<67(0

67$7,&
3,727

67$7,&

3,727
3,727

*'&
67$7,&

)((7

Figure 3-85. Pitot-Static Connections for Single G600 Installation

(Aircraft with Dual Pitot-Static Systems)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-93
3,727
723,/27¶63,72767$7,&6<67(0
*'&
67$7,&

3,727
3,727

67$7,&
67$7,&
3,727


*'&



67$7,&

Figure 3-86. Pitot-Static Connections for G600 Installation

(Aircraft with Single Pitot-Static System)

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-94 Rev. L
723,/27¶63,72767$7,&6<67(0

67$7,&

3,727
3,727
72&23,/27¶63,72767$7,&6<67(0
*'&
67$7,&

67$7,&
3,727

3,727

*'&
67$7,&

)((7

Figure 3-87. Pitot-Static Connections for Dual G600 Installation

(Aircraft with Dual Pitot-Static Systems)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-95
3.2.5.2 Composite Aircraft GDC 74( ) ADC Installations
It is recommended to use an offset bracket to install the GDC 74( ) on composite aircraft. Brackets may be
manufactured in accordance with the requirements outlined in Section 3.2.5 for manufactured custom
equipment and recommendations in this section.
Flange should be a minimum of 1 inch wide. Flange should have 0.159 inch diameter through holes 0.5
inches apart to provide flow through for the composite flox/epoxy and better adherence to the aircraft’s
inside skin surface, as shown in Figure 3-87.
.
35()(55('

Figure 3-88. Drilling Hole-Pattern on Mounting Rack for Composite Aircraft

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-96 Rev. L
Scuff the flange, top and bottom, with 80 grit sand paper to provide better adherence to the epoxy/flox.
Mix epoxy (Jeffco 1307 epoxy resin with Jeffco 3176 epoxy hardener) in a 4:1 ratio. Add epoxy mix to
flox (flocked cotton fiber) in approximately a 2:1 ratio. Place epoxy/flox mix onto the mounting location
and press the support bracket flanges into it so that the epoxy/flox mix flows through and over the flange
holes. See Figure 3-89.

)/2;(32;<0,;

Figure 3-89. Pressing Mounting Rack Into Flox/Epoxy Mix (Composite Aircraft)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-97
5. Mix epoxy (Jeffco 1307 epoxy resin with Jeffco 3176 epoxy hardener) in a 4:1 ratio. Lay a sheet of
fiberglass cloth on top of each flange, overlapping the flange by 0.5 inches. Lay up a second sheet
oriented 45° from the first sheet. Spread the epoxy mix over the installation area so that it is fairly
smooth and even. See Figure 3-90.

),%(5*/$66
&/27+

Figure 3-90. Cloth lay-up for Mounting Rack (Composite Aircraft)

6. Allow the material to set and perform a structural validation per Section 3.3.
7. Install the mounting rack to the mounting plate using MS35206 or NAS601 (#6-32) screws
(six total). The recommended torque is 12-15 in-lbs.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-98 Rev. L
8. Place the GDC 74( ) into its mounting rack and tighten the mounting screws firmly.
See Figure 3-91.

*'&$'&
,167$//$7,21

Figure 3-91. GDC 74( ) Final Installation Example (Composite Aircraft)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-99
3.2.6 GTP 59 Temperature Probe Mounting
The GTP 59 OAT Probe Kit (P/N 011-00978-00) contains the items listed in Table 3-3.

Table 3-3. OAT Probe Kit P/N 011-00978-00

Figure 3-92
Description Garmin P/N Qty Notes
Reference
1 Washer, Lock, Self-Sealing, 5/16 212-00026-00 1
2 Nut, 5/16”, Hex, Skirt 210-00055-00 1
3 Outside Air Temperature Sensor 494-00022-XX 1
- Screw, 4-40 x .250, PHP, SS/P, w/NYL 211-60234-08 2 [1]
- Contact, Pin, Mil Crimp, Size 22D 336-00021-00 5 [1]
4 Ring Terminal 336-00021-00 0 [2]

[1] This item is not used for installation of the probe. It is used for termination of the wiring at
the GDC 74( ) connector P741. Refer to Section 3.4 for additional details.
[2] Ring terminal is part of OAT sensor assembly.
Assembly of the GTP 59 OAT Probe Kit is shown in Figure 3-90. Install the GTP 59 probe in accordance
with Section 3.2.6.1 for metal aircraft, Section 3.2.6.2 for tube and fabric aircraft, and Section 3.2.6.3 for
non-metallic aircraft.

‘ ,17+58

&$%/(0 7(9
0$7(5,$/7+,&.1(66
,1&+(60,1,080,)*73,602817('21$/80,180$,5&5$)76.,1
,1&+(60,1,080,)*73,602817('21$&&(663$1(/

Figure 3-92. GTP OAT Probe Kit Assembly

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-100 Rev. L
NOTE
Refer to Table K-1 for aircraft model-specific information regarding bonding to or
isolation from the aircraft structure/ground plane.

3.2.6.1 GTP 59 Temperature Probe Installation in Metal Aircraft

NOTE
For metal aircraft the GTP 59 can be mounted in the aluminum skin or in an access
panel/inspection cover.

NOTE
A doubler is not required for GTP 59 installations on an access panel/inspection cover in
Lightning Zone 3. A doubler is required for all other GTP 59 installations. The type of
doubler depends upon the location selected for the GTP 59.

1. Determine a suitable location for the GTP 59 (refer to Section 2.5.11.7 for placement information).
2. For the selected location, use Table 3-4 to determine whether doubler type “A” or “B” is required.
Each type of doubler has two options for fabrication.Ensure that there is sufficient clearance to
install the doubler at the selected location. Drill a 5/16-inch hole through the aircraft skin or access
panel/inspection cover at the desired location.
3. Based upon the material thickness at the selected location and the information contained in
Figure 3-95, fabricate the appropriate doubler according to Figure 3-93 or Figure 3-94. Each
figure provides two options – only one must be used (if applicable).
4. Install the doubler in accordance with Figure 3-95 (if applicable).
5. Install the GTP 59 in accordance with Figure 3-95.
6. Ensure that the resistance between the GTP 59 and the aluminum skin is 2.5 mΩ or less.

Table 3-4. GTP 59 Doubler Types

Aircraft Skin or Access

Location Doubler Figure
Panel Thickness
Lightning Zone 3 Any Type A [1] Figure 3-93
Lightning Zone 2A Less than 0.032” Type B Figure 3-94
Lightning Zone 2A 0.032” or greater Type A Figure 3-93
[1] If the GTP 59 is installed on an access panel/inspection cover in Lightning Zone 3, a
doubler is not required.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-101
'28%/(5$
237,21 $6127(',1),*85(
$33/,(672
=21(/2&$7,216
$1'
=21($/2&$7,216
:+(5(6.,17+,&.1(66,6
25*5($7(5 ‘
‘

‘

‘ ;

127(6
0$7(5,$/6+28/'%( 76+((7$/80,1807+,&.1(66$6127(',1'28%/(5,167$//$7,21),*85(
$33/<&25526,213527(&7,21$/2',1()2//2:('%<=,1&&+520$7( )('67'77 3 25(48,9$/(1735,0(5
21$//685)$&(6

'28%/(5$
237,21 $6127(',1),*85(
$33/,(672
=21(/2&$7,216
$1'
=21($/2&$7,216 5
:+(5(6.,17+,&.1(66,6
25*5($7(5

‘

‘

‘ ;

127(6
0$7(5,$/6+28/'%( 76+((7$/80,1807+,&.1(66$6127(',1'28%/(5,167$//$7,21),*85(
$33/<&25526,213527(&7,2 1$/2',1()2//2:('%<=,1&&+520$7( )('67'77 3 25(48,9$/(1735,0(5
21$//685)$&(6

Figure 3-93. GTP 59 Doubler ‘A’

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-102 Rev. L
'28%/(5%
237,21 $6127(',1),*85(
$33/,(6
72
=21($/2&$7,216
:+(5(6.,17+,&.1(66
,6/(667+$1

‘

‘

‘

‘ ;
127(6
0$7(5,$/6+28/'%( 7 6+((7$/80,180$6127(',1'28%/(5,167$//$7,21),*85(
$33/<&25526,213527(&7,21$/2',1()2//2:('%<=,1&&+520$7( )('67'77 3 25(48,9$/(1735,0(5
21$//685)$&(6

'28%/(5%
$6127(',1),*85(
237,21

$33/,(672
=21($/2&$7,216 57<3
:+(5(6.,17+,&.1(66
,6/(667+$1

‘

‘

‘ ;
127(6
0$7(5,$/6+28/'%(76+((7$/80,180$6127(',1'28%/(5,167$//$7,21),*85(
$33/<&25526,213527(&7,21$/2',1()2//2:('%<=,1&&+520$7( )('67'77 3 25(48,9$/(1735,0(5
21$//685)$&(6

Figure 3-94. GTP 59 Doubler ‘B’

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-103
81,9(56$/+($' 06$' ƒ)/86+6+($5+($' 1$6$'
6.,1 '28%/(5 6.,1 '28%/(5 0$7(5,$/
7+,&.1(66 7+,&.1(66 47< 5,9(7&+2,&( 7+,&.1(66 7+,&.1(66 47< 35(3$5$7,21
>,1@ >,1@ >,1@ >,1@ 6.,1 '28%/(5
06$' ',$
06$' ',$ ',03/( ',03/(
06$' ',$ ',03/( & 6.
06$' ',$ & 6.
06$' ',$ & 6.
06$' ',$ & 6.

ƒ)/86++($' 06$'
0$7(5,$/35(3$5$7,21
6.,17+,&.1(66 '28%/(57+,&.1(66 06$' ',$ 06$' ',$
47<
>,1@ >,1@ 6.,1 '28%/(5 6.,1 '28%/(5
',03/( ',03/(
',03/( ',03/(
',03/( ',03/(
',03/( & 6.
& 6.
& 6.

Figure 3-95. GTP 59 Temperature Probe and Doubler Installation

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-104 Rev. L
3.2.6.2 GTP 59 Temperature Probe Installation in Tube and Fabric Aircraft

NOTE
For tube and fabric aircraft the GTP 59 must be mounted in an access panel/inspection
cover and fairing.

NOTE
A doubler is not required for GTP 59 installations on an access panel/inspection cover in
Lightning Zone 3. A doubler is required for all other GTP 59 installations. The type of
doubler depends upon the location selected for the GTP 59.

1. Determine a suitable location for the GTP 59 (refer to Section 2.5.11.7 for placement information).
2. For the selected location, use Table 3-4 to determine whether doubler type ‘A’ or ‘B’ is required.
Each type of doubler has two options for fabrication.
3. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance to install the doubler at the selected location. Drill a 5/16
inch hole through the access panel/inspection cover at the desired location.
4. Based upon the material thickness at the selected location and the information contained in
Figure 3-95, fabricate the appropriate doubler according to Figure 3-93 orFigure 3-94 Each figure
provides two options – only one must be used. (if applicable)
5. Install the doubler in accordance with Figure 3-95 (if applicable)
6. Install the GTP 59 in accordance with Figure 3-95.
7. Ensure that the GTP 59 is bonded to the metallic tube structure with a resistance of 2.5 mΩ or less
with the connector disconnected. A bonding strap meeting the following criteria must be used to
accomplish this:
◦ The cross sectional area of the strap must be greater than 0.016sq inches (approx 20800
circular mils). A 7/16-inch or wider tubular braid (QQB575R30T437, 24120 circular mils)
or a 3/4-inch or wider flat braid (QQB575F36T781, 20,800 circular mils) must be used.
◦ the strap length should be as short as possible and must not exceed six inches, and the
installation shall be such that it avoids the strap looping back on itself.
◦ A terminal lug (for 5/16 stud size) must be used to connect the braid directly to the GTP 59
as shown in Figure 3-95.
Refer to “Bonding Jumper Installations” in AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11 for guidance on bonding to tubular
structure.
3.2.6.3 GTP 59 Temperature Probe Installation in Non-Metallic Aircraft

NOTE
Making a hole in the aircraft skin for non-metallic aircraft is not substantiated as part of
this AML STC. Consequently, for non-metallic aircraft the GTP 59 only be mounted in an
access panel/inspection cover. If it is desired to mount the GTP 59 in the aircraft skin
rather than an access panel/inspection cover, alternate approval for the GTP 59
installation is required.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-105
NOTE
Any modifications made should comply with the Aircraft Maintenance Manual (Structural
Repair) for that particular aircraft.

NOTE
Carbon reinforced composite (with or without mesh) or fiberglass with mesh is considered
to be conductive. Wood, Kevlar and fiberglass without mesh is considered to be non-
conductive.

Non-Conductive Access Panels/Inspection Covers

1. Determine a suitable location for the GTP 59 (refer to Section 2.5.11.7 for placement information).
The GTP 59 and its terminal lug shall have a minimum of 0.5” clearance from anything conductive
in the area in which it is mounted.
2. Drill a 5/16” hole through the access panel/inspection cover at the desired location.
3. Install the GTP 59 in accordance with Figure 3-96.

Figure 3-96. GTP 59 Installation in a Non-Conductive Access Panel

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-106 Rev. L
Conductive Access Panels/Inspection Covers
1. Determine a suitable location for the GTP 59 (refer to Section 2.5.11.7 for placement information).
The GTP 59 and its terminal lug must have minimum 0.5 inch clearance from anything conductive
in the area in which it is mounted.
2. Drill a 1.5-inch hole through the access panel/inspection cover at the desired location.
3. Fabricate and install a non-conductive doubler. Use Grade L (Linen Base) Phenolic Sheet (MIL-I-
24768/15-FBI), thickness 0.0625 inch and minimum diameter 2.50 inches.
4. Drill a 5/16-inch hole through the newly installed doubler, centered in the 1.5 inch opening in the
access panel/inspection cover.
5. Install the GTP 59 in accordance with Figure 3-97.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-107
Figure 3-97. GTP 59 Installation in Conductive Inspection Cover

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-108 Rev. L
3.2.7 GAD 43/43e Adapter Mounting

NOTE
Mechanical installation requirements for the GAD 43 and GAD 43e are identical except
where noted.

Determine a suitable location for the GAD 43/43e (refer to Section 2.5.11.9 for placement information).
Sample GAD 43/43e installations can be found in Section D.4.
The GAD 43/43e should be mounted to a surface known to have sufficient structural integrity to withstand
additional inertial forces imposed by a 1.90-pound unit (weight of GAD 43) or a 2.26-pound unit
(GAD 43e). If it is necessary to build a shelf or bracket to mount the GAD 43/43e or if it is not certain that
the chosen location is of sufficient structural integrity, refer to Section 3.3.
In order to satisfy the structural requirements for the operation of the GAD 43/43e the following conditions
must be met:
1. If support racks, brackets or shelves need to be fabricated, they should be fabricated and attached
to the aircraft structure in accordance with the methods outlined in AC43.13-2B Chapter 2,
AC43.13-1B Chapter 4, and the following requirements:
a) Material shall be 2024-T3 aluminum alloy sheet per AMS-QQ-A-250/4 or Clad 2024-T3
aluminum alloy sheet per AMS-QQ-A-250/5.
b) Material shall have some type of corrosion protection (primer, alodine, etc.)
c) Material shall be minimum 0.040 inch thick.
d) Use sheet metal techniques (bend radius, fillets, etc) appropriate to the material thickness
and type.
2. Any supporting structure must be rigidly connected to the aircraft primary structure through strong
structural members capable of supporting substantial loads.
3. Mounting platform shall not span greater than 12” in width or length without direct attachment to
primary structure. If mounting platform does span greater than 12”, add necessary stringers,
doublers, bulkhead flange reinforcements, etc., to provide adequate support. Existing honeycomb
core sandwich panels with aluminum face sheets are adequate and do not require additional
reinforcement.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-109
4. Maintain a minimum of 3” between the forward edge of the mounting rack and any object to
ensure clearance for connector and wire harness, as shown in Figure 3-98.

*$'H

83

$)7

Figure 3-98. GAD 43/43e Recommended Clearance

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-110 Rev. L
In addition to the structural requirements, the GAD 43/43e must be electrically bonded to the aircraft
metallic structure (metal aircraft) or instrument panel (non-metallic aircraft). Refer to Section 3.8 for
additional details.
There are two ways to install the GAD 43/43e. Refer to the outline and Figure 3-99.

*$'H81,7
)$67(1(565(48,5('
+$5':$5(1276833/,('

OPTION I (TALL ORIENTATION) –

INSTALLATION USES SHORT FLANGES, WHICH CONTAIN TWO HOLES PER FLANGE

*$'H81,7

)$67(1(565(48,5('
&(17(5 )$67(1(56237,21$/
+$5':$5(1276833/,('

OPTION II (SHORT ORIENTATION) -

INSTALLATION USES LONG FLANGES, WHICH CONTAIN THREE HOLES PER FLANGE
Figure 3-99. GAD 43/43e Installation Options (GAD 43 shown)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-111
1. Position the GAD 43/43e to the mounting panel and transfer the hole pattern to the mounting plate
from the flanges, four places for the tall orientation or six places for the short orientation. Ensure
installation requirements per section 2.5.11.9 are met.
2. Remove GAD 43/43e, drill the marked hole-pattern (0.166 inch diameter holes) and rivet nut
plates (MS21047 or noted equivalent) with rivets (countersunk rivets). Acceptable hardware is
identified in Figure 3-100. Ensure that installed rivets are flush with the installation panel. Remove
any burrs or excess rivet heads.
3. Perform a structural validation per Section 3.3.
4. Install GAD 43/43e to the mounting plate. Tighten all screws with 12 to 15 in-lbs torque.

83
6&5(:
&251(5 5(48,5(' &(17(5 237,21$/

*$'H81,7

02817,1*
685)$&(

1873/$7(
25
187$1':$6+(5
&251(5 5(48,5(' &(17(5 237,21$/

02817,1*
127(6 685)$&(
5(&200(1'('+$5':$5(237,216)25$66(0%/<

+$5':$5( 63(&,),&$7,216
6&5(:6 06 /(1*7+$5 251$6 /(1*7+$5
5,9(76 06$';2506$';
:$6+(56 1873/$7(6
$1$1/1$6)13 0 ) 0 .
251$6)13 0 .25)
25
1876 $1$ 061 5,9(76 06$';
2506/

Figure 3-100. Installation of the GAD 43/43e to a Mounting Surface

(GAD 43 Short Orientation Shown)

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-112 Rev. L
3.3 Construction and Validation of Structures
This section includes information necessary for testing load-carrying capabilities of equipment mounting
structures (such as shelves, mounting plates and mounting brackets) used to mount the GRS 77, 
GDC 74( ) and GMU 44 (if required).
If support racks, brackets or shelves need to be fabricated, they should be fabricated and attached to the
aircraft structure in accordance with the methods outlined in AC43.13-2B Chapter 2. After the structure is
installed, it should be tested as outlined in AC43.13-2B chapter 1 to verify that it is capable of supporting
the required loads.
The GRS 77, GDC 74( ) and GMU 44 (if mounted within the fuselage) installations must be capable of
withstanding the Static Test Load Factors listed in the corresponding tables below for at least three seconds
in each direction specified direction without damage or permanent deformation. In addition, there should
not be noticeable deflection of the GRS 77 mounting structure. Note that these required loads differ
somewhat from those normally required for equipment installations. The following tables show the static
test loads for the GRS 77, GDC 74( ) and GMU 44.
3.3.1 G600 Static Test Loads
3.3.1.1 GRS 77 Static Test Loads
The combined weight of the GRS 77, connector and mounting rack is 3.50 lbs. The static loads which must
be applied (Load Factor x 3.50 lbs.) will be the following:

Direction Load Static Test Load

of Force Factor (Load Factor x (GRS 77 + Mounting Rack Weight))
Downward 6.6 g (6.6 x 3.5) = 23.10 lbs
Upward 6.0 g (6.0 x 3.5) = 21.00 lbs
Sideward 4.5 g (4.5 x 3.5) = 15.75 lbs
Forward 18.0 g (18.0 x 3.5) = 63.00 lbs

The combined weight of the GRS 77, connector, mounting rack and GRS 77 Universal Mount is 4.55 lbs.
The static loads which must be applied (Load Factor x 4.55 lbs.) will be the following:

Direction Load Static Test Load

of Force Factor (Load Factor x (GRS 77 + Mounting rack and Universal Bracket Weight))
Downward 6.6 g (6.6 x 4.55) = 30.03 lbs
Upward 6.0 g (6.0 x 4.55) = 27.30 lbs
Sideward 4.5 g (4.5 x 4.55) = 20.48 lbs
Forward 18.0 g (18.0 x 4.55) = 81.90 lbs

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-113
3.3.1.2 GDC 74( ) Static Test Loads
The combined weight of the GDC 74( ), connector and mounting rack is 2.30 lbs. The static loads which
must be applied (Load Factor x 2.30 lbs.) will be the following:

Direction Load Static Test Load

of Force Factor (Load Factor x (GDC 74( ) + Mounting Rack Weight))
Downward 6.6 g (6.6 x 2.3) = 15.18 lbs
Upward 6.0 g (6.0 x 2.3) = 13.80 lbs
Sideward 4.5 g (4.5 x 2.3) = 10.35 lbs
Forward 18.0 g (18.0 x 2.3) = 41.40 lbs

NOTE
Structural validation for the GMU 44 mounting structure is only required if the GMU 44 is
mounted within the fuselage, and not if mounted in the wing or vertical stabilizer.

3.3.1.3 GMU44 Static Test Loads (if GMU44 mounted within fuselage)
The combined weight of the GMU 44, connector and mounting rack is 0.50 lbs. The static loads which
must be applied (Load Factor x 0.50 lbs.) will be the following:

Static Test Load

Direction of Force Load Factor
(Load Factor x (GMU 44 + Mounting Rack Weight))
Downward 6.6 g (6.6 x 0.50) = 3.30 lbs
Upward 6.0 g (6.0 x 0.50) = 3.00 lbs
Sideward 4.5 g (4.5 x 0.50) = 2.25 lbs
Forward 18.0 g (18.0 x 0.50) = 9.00 lbs

The combined weight of the GMU 44, connector, mounting rack and GMU 44 Universal Mount is 0.72
lbs. The static loads which must be applied (Load Factor x 0.72 lbs.) will be the following:

Direction Static Test Load

Load Factor
of Force (Load Factor x (GMU 44 + Mounting Rack + Universal Mount Weight))
Downward 6.6 g (6.6 x 0.72) = 4.75 lbs
Upward 6.0 g (6.0 x 0.72) = 4.32 lbs
Sideward 4.5 g (4.5 x 0.72) = 3.24 lbs
Forward 18.0 g (18.0 x 0.72) = 12.96 lbs

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-114 Rev. L
3.3.1.4 GAD 43/43e Static Test Loads

NOTE
For new installations, GAD 43e static loads should be used for both the GAD 43 and
GAD 43e.

The combined weight of the GAD 43e and connector is 2.84 lbs. The static loads which must be applied
(Load Factor x 2.84 lbs.) will be the following:

Static Test Load

Direction of Force Load Factor
(Load Factor x (GAD 43e Weight))
Downward 6.6 g (6.6 x 2.84) = 18.74 lbs
Upward 6.0 g (6.0 x 2.84) = 17.04 lbs
Sideward 4.5 g (4.5 x 2.84) = 12.78 lbs
Forward 18.0 g (18.0 x 2.84) = 51.12 lbs

3.3.2 (moved to 3.3.1.2)

3.3.3 (moved to 3.3.1.3)
3.3.4 Test Procedures
One method of determining the static load capability is as follows:

NOTE
Previously installed nut plates for mounting the GRS 77, GDC 74( ), GMU 44, or 
GAD 43/43e may be used for testing. For installation on an existing aircraft panel (which
will require no removal) testing may be accomplished prior to installing nut plates using
the method below.

1. Mark and drill the holes where the mounting rack or Universal Mount will be installed, whichever
is applicable to the installation.
2. For a GRS 77 installation, install four #10-32 machine screws (see Figure 3-18 for Universal
Mount and Figure 3-28 for the Mounting Rack) in the corner holes used to attach the Universal
Mount or Mounting Rack to structure. For a GDC 74( ) installation, install four 6-32 machine
screws (refer to Figure 3-83) in the four corner holes, when attaching the GDC 74( ) mounting
rack to existing structure. If special brackets are used between the mounting rack and existing
structure, the bracket attachment to structure must be tested. For a GAD 43/43e installation, install
four #8-32 machine screws (refer to Figure 3-100) in the four corner holes. For the GMU 44
installation, install two, three, or four pieces of hardware. If using the Universal Mount in a side
mount installation configuration, use two #6-32 machine screws, (stainless), as demonstrated in
Figure 3-56 (left side) and supported by a subsequent hardware discussion. If using the Universal
Mount in a bottom mount installation configuration, use four #6-32 machine screws (stainless), as
demonstrated in Figure 3-56 (right side) and supported by a subsequent hardware discussion. If
installing the GMU 44 Installation Rack directly to existing structure, use the three pan head
screws that arrive with the GMU 44 installation kit.
3. For testing downward loading, place shot bags or other suitable weights totaling the static test load
weight of the equipment plus the rack within the footprint outlined by the four screw holes.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-115
4. Verify that there is no damage, permanent deformation or noticeable deflection of the structure
during and after three seconds.
5. Fasten a 36 inch loop of suitable material such as fishing line, braided wire, or other similar
material having a breaking strength of at least 150 pounds, diagonally between two of the screws.
Fasten another loop diagonally between the other two screws, adjusting the length of the loop so it
exactly matches the first.
6. Hook a calibrated force gauge through both loops and apply a sustained pull for at least three
seconds in each of the other three directions (upward, sideward and forward). Figure 3-101
illustrates the upward static load test and Figure 3-102 illustrates the forward static load test. The
sideward static load test is similar to the forward load test, in a direction perpendicular to the
forward load. The force applied must correspond to the static test load calculated for unit and rack
configuration being installed (the static test load values are found in the tables above).
7. Examine the support structure carefully. If there has been damage, permanent deformation or
noticeable deflection, the structure is not suitable and must be replaced with one which is strong
enough to withstand the test loads. Examine all aircraft stringers, bulkheads and skin surfaces,
which may have direct or indirect contact with the fabricated parts. If it is determined that no
damage or permanent deformation has occurred, the structure is of sufficient strength and may be
used to permanently mount the GRS 77, GDC 74( ), GMU 44, or GAD 43/43e.

Figure 3-101. Upward Static Load Test

Figure 3-102. Forward Static Load Test

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-116 Rev. L
3.4 Cabling and Wiring
The installation kits for the G600 system LRUs include connectors and crimp contacts. Use wire specified
in Section 2.4.2 for all G600 connections. Make the crimp connections with a crimp tool as specified in
Table 3-5.
Refer to the interconnection diagrams in Appendix F for the appropriate interconnections. Use 22 or 24
AWG wire for all connections except for power. Use 20 AWG for power/ground. Install the configuration
modules as described in Section 3.4.2.2. Once the cable assemblies have been made, attach the
backshell/connector to the rear of the mounting unit. Route the wiring bundle as appropriate. Avoid sharp
bends.
The #1 and #2 G600 systems should not share any circuit breakers, or ground returns. The standby
instruments must not share any circuit breakers or ground returns with either G600 system. Wiring from
the #1 G600 system and electronic standby instruments should be routed independently and ideally
independent from the #2 G600 system.
3.4.1 Wiring Harness
Allow adequate space for installation of cables and connectors. The installer supplies and fabricates all of
the cables. All electrical connections to the G600 equipment are made through the following
D-subminiature (D-sub) or circular connectors provided by Garmin:
• GDU 620 - one 37-pin D-sub connector (female), one 50-pin D-sub connector (female) and one
62-pin D-sub connector (male)
• GRS 77 - one 44-pin D-sub connector (male)
• GMU 44 - one 9-pin circular connector (female)
• GDC 74( ) - one 78-pin D-sub connector (male)
• GAD 43 - one 50-pin D-sub connector (female)
• GAD 43e - one 50-pin D-sub connector (female), one 78-pin D-sub connector (male), and one
26-pin D-sub connector (male)
Construct the wiring harness according to the information contained in this and the following sections.
Cable lengths will vary depending upon installation. Strip all wires going to the connectors 0.17”. Insert
the wire into the pin and crimp with one of the recommended (or equivalent) crimping tools. Insert the pin
into the connector housing location as specified by the interconnect drawing in Appendix F. Verify that the
pin is properly engaged into the connector by gently tugging on the wire. Route and secure the cable runs
from the G600 LRUs away from sources of electrical noise.
Appendix B provides the pin-out information for all G600 LRUs. Required connectors and associated
hardware are supplied with the connector kits. See Appendix F for interconnect wiring diagrams.

CAUTION
Check wiring connections for errors before connecting the cables to the LRUs. Incorrect
wiring could cause component damage.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-117
Table 3-5. Socket Contact Part Numbers

62-contact connector
37-contact connector  (P6203)
(P6201) 44-contact connector
Configuration Module
50-contact connector (P771)
(P6202, P431) 50-contact connector
Wire Gauge 78-contact connector
(P6202)
9-contact connector (P741, P432)
(P441) 26-contact connector
(P433)
20-24 AWG [1] 28 AWG [3] 22-28 AWG
Garmin P/N 336-00022-00 336-00022-01 336-00021-00
Military P/N M39029/63-368 N/A M39029/58-360
AMP N/A N/A 204370-2
Positronic N/A N/A MC8522D
ITT Cannon N/A N/A 030-2042-000
[1] Contacts listed are not to be used for configuration module wiring. Use the contacts
supplied with the configuration module when installing configuration module wires in
P6202.
[2] Non-Garmin part numbers shown are not maintained by Garmin and are subject to
change without notice.
[3] For configuration module pins, ensure that the crimp tool is set to crimp 28 AWG wire.

Table 3-6. Recommended Crimp Tools

20-24 AWG 22-28 AWG

Hand (P6201, P6202, P431) [3] (P741, P771, P6203, P432, P433)
Manufacturer
Crimping Tool Insertion/ Insertion/
Positioner Positioner
Extraction Tool Extraction Tool
M81969/14-02 M81969/14-01
Military P/N M22520/2-01 M22520/2-08 M22520/2-09
M81969/1-02 M81969/1-04
Positronic 9507 9502-11 N/A 9502-3 M81969/1-04
ITT Cannon 995-0001-584 N/A N/A 995-0001-739 N/A
AMP 601966-1 N/A N/A 601966-6 91067-1
Daniels AFM8 K13-1 N/A K42 N/A
Astro 615717 615724 N/A 615725 N/A
[1] Contacts listed are not to be used for configuration module wiring. Use the contacts
supplied with the configuration module when installing configuration module wires in
P6202.
[2] Non-Garmin part numbers shown are not maintained by Garmin and are subject to
change without notice.
[3] For configuration module pins, ensure that the crimp tool is set to crimp 28 AWG wire .

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-118 Rev. L
3.4.1.1 Shield and Connection Consideration
Shield termination at non-Garmin equipment end must be as short as possible and not to exceed three
inches, taking into consideration any non-Garmin equipment’s installation requirements. When there are
no requirements given by the non-Garmin equipment installation manual, then the shields may be
connected to the metal connector backshell when the backshell is grounded to airframe chassis ground.
Alternately, the shield termination may be directly connected to airframe chassis ground, maintaining the
three inch limit.
Intermediate connections must be minimized to maintain certified electromagnetic compatibility. Although
the Interconnect drawings do not show all intermediate connections (i.e. bulkhead connectors, terminal
blocks, splices, etc.), all shields must have continuity at any intermediate connection unless otherwise
specified. When shields are terminated to the aircraft ground or metal backshell to provide this continuity,
the shield drain wire must be no longer than three inches unless non-Garmin equipment requires shorter
length. The termination methods specified in Section 3.4.2 may be used at these locations unless this
conflicts with the requirement of non-Garmin equipment.
If intermediate connectors are used on an audio line, run the shields through a pin on all intermediate
connectors. Audio line shields should be continuous from end to end and be grounded only at one end to
prevent ground loops.
If a wire from a G600 component goes to a connector at the remote end that includes overbraided wires
then the new wiring added at the remote end connector must also be overbraided. Any wires spliced into
this wire must also be overbraided. If this wiring passes through intermediate connections then each
segment shall be overbraided and the overbraid must be grounded at both ends. Match existing overbraid
part number if possible. Otherwise use parts in Section N.2.1, or larger QQB575C part. The overbraid must
be terminated as close to the connector as possible taking into account any requirements imposed by the
non-Garmin equipment. These additional wires should be routed with the existing cable where possible.
3.4.2 Backshell Assembly and D-Subminiature Connectors
The G600 LRU connector kits (P/N 011-01656-00 [GDU 620], P/N 011-00869-01 [GRS 77], 
P/N 011-01010-01 [GDC 74( )], P/N 011-01990-00 [GAD 43], and P/N 011-02350-00 [GAD 43e]) include
Garmin backshell assemblies and Garmin ground adapter assemblies. Backshell connectors give the
installer the ability to terminate shield grounds at the backshell housing using the shield block ground kit.
3.4.2.1 Slidelock Backshell And Shield Block Assembly
Table 3-7 lists Garmin part numbers for the D-sub connectors and the backshell assemblies for the
GDU 620, GRS 77, GDC 74( ), and GAD 43.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-119
Table 3-7. Slidelock Backshell Assembly
Figure 3-102
through Garmin P/N
Description Notes
Figure 3-105 or MIL Spec
Reference [1]
Multiple Conductor Shielded Cable Refer to Figure 2.4.2
1 [6]
(See Interconnect Diagrams, Appendix F) for MIL spec
2 Wire, Insulated (20-22 AWG), 3” max length As Required [6] [7]
3 Shield Terminator As Required [6] [7]
Socket Contacts, #20 (P431, P6201, P6202) 336-00022-00
4
Pin Contacts, #22D (P741, P771, P6203) 336-00021-00
5 Silicone Fusion Tape 249-00114-00 [6]
MS25036-149,
Ring terminal, #8, insulated, 1822 AWG,
6 MS25036-153, [6] [8]
14-16 AWG, 12–10 AWG
MS25036-156
Shield block (P771) 117-00147-00
7 [3]
Shield Block (P431, P741, P6202) 117-00147-01
Backshell (P771) 125-00083-00
8 Backshell (P6201, P6203) 125-00084-00 [2]
Backshell (P431, P741, P6202) 125-00085-00
9 Screw, 4-40 x.250, FLHP100°, SS/P, Nylon 211-63234-08 [3]
10 Slide Lock Lever N/A [4]
Connector, D-Sub, HD, 78 Pin (P741) 330-00366-78
Connector, D-Sub, HD, 44 Pin (P771) 330-00366-44
11 Connector, D-Sub, 37 Socket (P6201) 330-00502-37 [5]
Connector, D-Sub, 50 Socket (P431, P6202) 330-00502-50
Connector, D-Sub, HD, 62 Pin (P6203) 330-00366-62
12 Screw,4-40x.375,PHP,SS/P, w/Nylon 211-60234-10 [2] [5]
Strain Relief Clamp (P771) 115-00499-02
13 [2]
Strain Relief Clamp (P431, P741, P6201, P6202, P6203) 115-00499-03
14 Slide Lock Spring N/A [4]
Cover (P771) 115-00500-02
15 Cover (P6201, P6203) 115-00500-03 [2]
Cover (P431, P741, P6202) 115-00500-04
16 Screw,4-40x.187, FLHP100,SS/P, w/Nylon 211-63234-06 [2]
MS51957-42,
17 Screw, PHP, 8-32 x.312”, Stainless or Cad Plated Steel [6] [8]
MS35206-242
Split Washer, #8, (.045" compressed thickness) Stainless MS35338-137,
18 [6] [8]
or Cadmium plated steel MS35338-42
Flat Washer, #8, .032" thick, .174"ID, .375" OD, Stainless NAS1149CN832R,
19 [6] [8]
or Cad Plated Steel NAS1149FN832P
[1] All items are applicable to P431, P741, P771, P6201, P6202 and P6203 unless otherwise
specified.
[2] Supplied as part of Backshell Kits P/N 011-00950-02 (P771), P/N 011-00950-03 (P6201,
P6203), and P/N 011-00950-04(P431, P741, P6202).
[3] Supplied as part of Ground Adapter Kits P/N 011-01169-00 (P771) and P/N 011-01169-01 
(P431, P741, P6201, P6202, P6203).

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-120 Rev. L
[4] Supplied as part of Slide Lock Kit P/N 330-90006-02 (P771), P/N 330-90006-03 (P6201,
P6203), and P/N 330-90006-04 (P431, P741, P6202).
[5] Supplied as part of LRU Connector Kit P/N 011-01010-01 (GDC 74A), P/N 011-00869-01 
(GRS 77), P/N 011-01656-00 (GDU 620), and P/N 011-01990-00 ().
[6] Not supplied – must be purchased separately.
[7] Solder sleeve with pre-installed braid strap may be used in place of items 2 and 3.
[8] Not a Garmin part number.

3.4.2.1.1 Shielded Cable Preparation

Prepare all of the shielded cables as shown in Figure 3-103. Refer to Figure 3-104 for details of the shield
termination to the connector backshell.
When terminating shield drains, a maximum of two shields can be “daisy chained” together. The daisy
chaining method may only be used if the six tapped holes in the shield block are insufficient to ground all
shields. Refer to Figure 3-103.
1. At the end of the shielded cable (1), strip back a 2.5” maximum length of the jacket to expose the
braid. Remove this exposed braid. Carefully score the jacket ¼” to 5/16” from the end and remove
the jacket to leave the braid exposed.

NOTE
Solder sleeves with pre-installed shield drains may be used instead of separate shield
terminators and individual wires.

2. Connect a 20 or 22 AWG wire (2) to the exposed shield of the prepared cable assembly (See
Figure 3-103). AC 43.13 maybe a helpful reference for termination techniques.

NOTE
Solder Sleeves with pre-installed lead: A preferred solder sleeve is the Raychem S03
Series with the thermochromic temperature indicator. These solder sleeves come with a
pre-installed lead and effectively take the place of items (2) and (3). For detailed
instructions on product use, refer to Raychem installation procedure.

3. Slide a shield terminator (3) onto the prepared cable assembly (1) and connect the shield wire (2)
to the shield using a heat gun approved for use with solder sleeves. The chosen size of solder
sleeve must accommodate both the number of conductors present in the cable and the shield wire
(2) to be attached.
4. Crimp contacts (4) onto the cable wires.
5. Wrap the cable bundle with silicone fusion tape (5 or a similar version) at the point where the
backshell strain relief and cast housing will contact the cable bundle.
6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 as needed for the remaining shielded cables.
7. Install a ring terminal (6) onto the cable shield termination wires (2), grouping wires as appropriate
for the connector.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-121
0$;

2)(;326('6+,(/'

6+,(/''5$,16$66+257$635$&7,&$/
12/21*(57+$1´

PREFERRED METHOD

0$;

2)(;326('6+,(/'

6+,(/''5$,16$66+257$635$&7,&$/
12/21*(57+$1´

ALTERNATE METHOD

6+,(/''5$,1&20321(176$66+257
$635$&7,&$/ 0$;&20%,1('

0$;

0$;2)(;326('6+,(/'

ALTERNATE METHOD 2 (DAISY CHAIN)

Figure 3-103. Shield Termination Methods

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-122 Rev. L
3.4.2.1.2 Shield Block Assembly
Backshell connectors give the installer the ability to terminate shield grounds at the backshell housing
using the Shield Block Ground kit. Table 3-7 lists Garmin part numbers for the GDC 74( ), GRS 77,
GDU 620, and GAD 43 D-sub connectors and the backshell assemblies.
Assemble the backshell D-sub connector and shield block. Refer to Figure 3-104.
1. Attach the shield block (7) to the backshell (8) by inserting the 4-40x.250 pan head screws (9)
through the holes on the shield block and threading into the tapped holes on the backshell (8).

CAUTION
When attaching the slidelock lever (10) and D-sub connector (11) to the backshell (8), use
only the specified 4-40x.375 pan head screws (12). Do not attempt to use the self-tapping
screws supplied in the slide lock kit, as these will damage the backshell housing.

2. Place the slide lock lever (10) over the D-sub connector (11).
3. Attach slide lock lever (10) and D-sub connector (11) to the backshell (8) by inserting two
4-40x.375 pan head screws (12) through the holes on the connector and threading into the tapped
holes on the backshell (8).

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-123

;

127(6
3/$&(60227+6,'(2)675$,15(/,()&/$03$&5266&$%/(
%81'/('21273/$&(*5229('6,'($&5266&$%/(%81'/(

Figure 3-104. Slidelock Backshell and Shield Block Assembly

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-124 Rev. L
3.4.2.1.3 Shield Termination on Slidelock Backshell Assembly
Refer to Figure 3-104 and Figure 3-105 while completing the following assembly procedure.
1. Terminate the cable bundle contacts (4) in the D-sub connector (11) in accordance with the aircraft
wiring drawings.
2. For P6202, P741, and P771, install the configuration module wires into the connector. Refer to
Section 3.4.2.2 for instructions on installing the configuration module.
3. Place the convex side of the backshell strain relief clamp (13) across the cable bundle and secure
using three 4-40x.375 pan head screws (12).

CAUTION
Place smooth side of strain relief (13) across cable bundle. DO NOT place grooved side
across cable bundle. Placing the grooved side of the strain relief across the cable bundle
may damage wires.

4. Insert the slide lock spring (14) into the backshell (8) (refer to Figure 3-104).
5. Attach the backshell cover (15) to the backshell using two 4-40x.187 countersunk screws (16).
6. Terminate the ring terminals (6) to the shield block (7) by placing items on the 8-32x.312 pan head
shield terminal screw (17) in the following order before finally inserting the screw into the tapped
holes on the shield block:
a) split washer (18),
b) flat washer (19),
c) first ring terminal (6)
d) second ring terminal (6) (if needed)

NOTE
Each tapped hole on the shield block (7) may accommodate only two ring terminals (6). It
is preferred that a maximum of two wires (2) be terminated per ring terminal. Two wires
per ring terminal will necessitate the use of a ring terminal, #8, insulated, 14-16 AWG
(MS25036-153). If only a single wire (2) is left or if only a single wire is needed for this
connector a ring terminal, #8, insulated, 18-22 AWG (MS25036-149) can accommodate
this single wire (2). If more wires exist for the connector than two per ring terminal (6), it
is permissible to terminate three wires (2) per ring terminal (6).

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-125

$5

$5

$5

$5

$5
127(6
3/$&(60227+6,'(2)675$,15(/,()&/$03$&5266&$%/(%81'/(
'21273/$&(*5229('6,'($&5266&$%/(%81'/(

35()(55('6+,(/'7(50,1$7,210(7+2'6+2:1
5()(5726(&7,21)25$/7(51$7(6+,(/'7(50,1$7,210(7+2'6

Figure 3-105. Shield Termination on Slidelock Backshell Assembly

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-126 Rev. L
3.4.2.2 Configuration Module Installation (P741, P771, and P602 Only)
G600 LRU connector assemblies serve as housing for configuration modules. This section lists
configuration module assemblies and installation procedures for new and existing G600 installations.

Table 3-8. Configuration Module Wire Color Reference Chart

Color Function P741 Contact P771 Contact P6202 Contact

Black Ground 1 1 50
Red Vcc 21 17 49
Yellow Data 40 16 32
White Clock 60 31 33

NOTE
The socket contacts supplied with the GDU 620 configuration module are specifically
made to accommodate 28 AWG wire. The crimp tool should have the indenter set to ‘4’
when crimping these contacts to the configuration module harness.

3.4.2.2.1 Configuration Module Assembly with Potted PCB (new installations)

Table 3-9. Configuration Module Kit 011-00979-03 (P741 and P771)

Figure 3-106
Description Garmin P/N
Reference
1 Configuration Module, PCB Board Assembly w/EEPROM 011-02178-00
3 4-Conductor Harness 325-00122-00
4 Pin Contact, Crimp, #22D 336-00021-00

Table 3-10. Configuration Module Kit 011-00979-05 (P6202)

Figure 3-106
Description Garmin P/N
Reference
1 Configuration Module, PCB Board Assembly w/EEPROM 011-02178-00
3 4-Conductor Harness 325-00122-00
4 Socket Contact, Crimp, #20 336-00022-01

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-127
Refer to Figure 3-106 for details and item numbers referenced in the following procedure.
1. Crimp the contacts (4) onto each wire of the
four-conductor wire harness (3). Strip 0.17”
of insulation from each wire prior to
crimping. [
2. Insert the newly crimped contacts and wires

(3, 4) into the appropriate connector
housing (5) location as specified by the
interconnect drawings in Appendix F.
3. Plug the four-conductor wire harness (3)
into the connector on the PCB (1).
4. Insert the PCB (1) into the backshell (6)
recess.
5. Attach cover (7) to backshell (6) using
screws (8).
3.4.2.2.2 Configuration Module Assembly
with Spacer (existing
installations)

NOTE
Configuration module assemblies P/N 011-
00979-00 and 011-00979-02 may not be Figure 3-106. Backshell Assembly (potted
available for new G600 installations. For configuration module)
new G600 installations, refer to
Section 3.4.2.2.1.

Table 3-11. Configuration Module Kit 011-00979-00 (P741 and P771)

Figure 3-107
Description Garmin P/N
Reference
1 Configuration Module, PCB Board Assembly w/EEPROM 012-00605-00
2 Spacer, Configuration Module 213-00043-00
3 4-Conductor Harness 325-00122-00
4 Pin Contact, Crimp, #22D 336-00021-00

Table 3-12. Configuration Module Kit 011-00979-02 (P6202)

Figure 3-107
Description Garmin P/N
Reference
1 Configuration Module, PCB Board Assembly w/EEPROM 012-00605-00
2 Spacer, Configuration Module 213-00043-00
3 4-Conductor Harness 325-00122-00
4 Socket Contact, Crimp, #20 336-00022-01

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-128 Rev. L
Refer to Figure 3-107 for details and item numbers referenced in the following procedure.
1. Crimp socket contacts (4) onto each wire of the
four-conductor wire harness (3). Strip 0.17” of
insulation from each wire prior to crimping.
2. Insert newly crimped socket contacts and wires

(3, 4) into the appropriate connector housing
location as shown in Figure 3-107, Figure F-1,
Figure F-2, and Figure F-3.
3. Apply the spacer (2) by wrapping it around the
PCB board (1) making sure to insert the plastic
connector mounted on the board into the hole
provided in the spacer.
4. Plug the four-conductor wire harness (3) into the
connector on the PCB board (1).
5. With pad (2) in position, insert PCB board (1)
into the backshell recess.
6. Orient the connector housing so that the inserted
four conductor wire harness (3) is on the same
side of the backshell as the inserted PCB board
(1).

Figure 3-107. Baskshell Assembly

(configuration module with spacer)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-129
3.4.2.3 Jackscrew Backshell and Shield Block Assembly (GAD 43e only)
Table 3-13 lists Garmin part numbers for D-sub connectors and backshell assemblies for the GAD 43e.

Table 3-13. Jackscrew Backshell Assembly (GAD 43e only)

Figure 3-108
through Garmin P/N
Description [1] Notes
Figure 3-109 or MIL Spec
Reference
Refer to
Multiple Conductor Shielded Cable
1 Section 2.4.2 [2]
(2–conductor demonstrated here)
for MIL spec
2 Wire, Insulated (20-22 AWG), 3” max length [2] [3]
3 Shield Termination [2] [3]
Pin Contacts, size 22D (P432, P433) 336-00021-00
4
Socket Contacts, size 20 (P431) 336-00022-00
5 Silicone Fusion Tape 249-00114-00 [2]
6 Ring Terminal, #8, Insulated, 18-22 AWG MS25036-149 [2]
Connector, D-Sub, HD, 26-Pin (P433) 330-00185-26
7
Connector, D-Sub, HD, 50/78-pin (P431, P432) 330-00185-78
Backshell, Jackscrew, Config Module, 26-Pin (P433) 125-00172-00
8
Backshell, Jackscrew, Config Module, 50/78-Pin (P431, P432) 125-00175-00
Strain Relief Clamp, 26-Pin (P433) 115-01078-01
9
Strain Relief Clamp, 50/78-Pin (P431, P432) 115-01078-04
[4]
10 Screw, 4-40x.375, PHP, SS/P, w/Nylon 211-60234-10
Cover, Backshell, Jackscrew, 26-Pin (P433) 115-01079-01
11
Cover, Backshell, Jackscrew, 50/78-Pin (P431, P432) 115-01079-04
12 Screw, 4-40x 0.187, FLHP100, SS/P, w/Nylon 211-63234-06
Screw, PHP, 8-32x.312”, Stainless MS51957-42
13 [2] [5]
Screw, PHP, 8-32x.312”, Cad-Plated Steel MS35206-242
Split Washer, #8 (.045" compressed thickness),
MS35338-137
Stainless
14 [2] [5]
Split Washer, #8 (.045" compressed thickness),
MS35338-42
Cad-plated steel
Flat Washer, Stainless, #8, .032" thick, .174" ID, 375" OD NAS1149CN832R
15 Flat washer, Cad-plated Steel, #8, .032" thick, [2] [5]
NAS1149FN832P
174" ID, .375" OD
[1] All items are applicable to P431, P432 and P433 unless otherwise specified.
[2] Not supplied as part of GAD 43e LRU Connector Kit – must be purchased separately.
[3] Solder sleeve with pre-installed braid strap may be used instead of items 2 and 3.
[4] Supplied as part of Backshell Kits P/N 011-01855-04 (P431, P432), and 
P/N 011-01855-01 (P433), which are included in the GAD 43e LRU Connector Kit
P/N 011-2350-00.
[5] Not a Garmin part number.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-130 Rev. L
Prepare the shielded cables to be connected to the GAD 43e in accordance with Section 3.4.2.1.1. Then
terminate the cables to the GAD 43e jackscrew backshell assembly using the following procedure:
1. Terminate the crimped pin/socket contacts (4) in the D-sub connector (7) in accordance with the
aircraft wiring drawings.
2. Install the configuration module wires into the connector. Refer to Section 3.4.2.2 for
configuration module installation instructions.
3. Place the smooth side of the backshell strain relief clamp (9) across the cable bundle and secure
using three 4-40x.375 pan head screws (10).

CAUTION
Place smooth side of strain relief (9) across cable bundle. DO NOT place grooved side
across cable bundle. Placing the grooved side of the strain relief across the cable bundle
may damage wires.

4. Terminate the ring terminals (6) to the tapped holes on the backshell (8) by placing items on the 8-
32x.312 pan head shield terminal screw (13) in the following order before finally inserting the
screw into the tapped holes on the shield block:
a) split washer (14),
b) flat washer (15),
c) first ring terminal (6)
d) second ring terminal (6) (if needed)

NOTE
Each tapped hole on the backshell (8) may accommodate only two ring terminals (6). It is
preferred that a maximum of two wires (3) be terminated per ring terminal. Two wires per
ring terminal will necessitate the use of a ring terminal, #8, insulated, 14-16 AWG
(MS25036-153). If only a single wire is left or if only a single wire is needed for this
connector a ring terminal, #8, insulated, 18-22 AWG (MS25036-149) can accommodate
this single wire. If more wires exist for the connector than two per ring terminal, it is
permissible to terminate three wires per ring terminal.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-131
[

3/$&(60227+6,'(2)675$,1
5(/,()$&5266&$%/(%81'/(
'21273/$&(*5229('6,'(
$&5266&$%/(%81'/(

[

Figure 3-108. Jackscrew Backshell and Shield Block Assembly

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-132 Rev. L

127(6
3/$&(60227+6,'(2)675$,15(/,()$&5266&$%/(%81'/(
'21273/$&(*5229('6,'($&5266&$%/(%81'/(

35()(55('6+,(/'7(50,1$7,210(7+2'6+2:15()(572
),*85()25$/7(51$7(6+,(/'7(50,1$7,210(7+2'6

Figure 3-109. Shield Block Termination on Jackscrew Backshell Assembly

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-133
3.4.3 TVS, Fuse and Resistor Installation (non-metallic aircraft only)
Certain non-metallic aircraft will require TVSs at the power input of various LRUs (refer to
Table K-2 to determine which aircraft require them). Refer to Section 2.4.2.1 for component part numbers.
3.4.3.1 TVS/Fuse Installation

NOTE
Only TVS1/F1 are installed as described below. TVS2 uses standard terminal lugs and
should be installed in accordance with AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11 and the notes on the
applicable interconnect diagram in Appendix F.

For all TVS/fuse assemblies that are required for lightning protection, install them in accordance with
Figure 3-110 and the notes on the applicable interconnect diagram in Appendix F.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-134 Rev. L
) $&7
2 7
*( 21
(' 7& $;
. ( 0
62&

$/
17
0(
21
9,5
(1 /,&(
6 3

/(1*7+72
(19,5210(17$/
63/,&(0$;

)86(+2/'(5
$1')86(

+($76+5,1.

675,3(217960867%( 62/'(579672
72:$5'32:(5%86 $:*:,5(

Figure 3-110. TVS/Fuse Installation (TVS1/F1)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-135
3.4.3.2 Resistor Installation
For all resistors that are required for lightning protection, install them in accordance with Figure 3-111.

5(6,6725 2+0:


62/'(56/((9(

0$;
6+,(/''5$,1
0$;

75,05(6,6725/($'72“$1'62/'(572$:*
:,5(&29(5:,7++($76+5,1.78%,1*$66+2:17<3,&$/
Figure 3-111. Resistor Installation

3.4.4 TVS 2 Assembly (non-metallic aircraft only)

Certain non-metallic aircraft will require a TVS assembly at the power bus that supplies power to the
standby ADI (refer to Table K-2 to determine which aircraft require them). Refer to Section 2.4.2.1 for
component part numbers. Refer to Figure F-20 and Figure F-21 for interconnect drawings that show the
TVS installed.

NOTE
Earlier versions of the TVS 2 assembly did not require the connector between the fuse
holder and TVSs. This connector was added to allow periodic inspection of the individual
TVSs, rather than periodic replacement of the entire assembly. If the connector is not
installed, modify the assembly to add the connector at the aircraft’s next inspection
interval.

3.4.4.1 TVS Fabrication

1. Cut the TVS leads to 0.75+0.00/-0.10 inches on both sides.
2. Crimp and solder each of the four TVS banded side (cathode) leads to their connector specific
sockets (refer to Figure 3-112) and insert into the 4-pin connector with sockets.
3. Install heat shrink around the four TVSs – this will help to hold them in place during the following
steps.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-136 Rev. L
3.4.4.2 TVS Assembly
Refer to Figure F-20 and Figure F-21 while completing the following steps:
1. Solder the four leads at the anode (ground)
62&.(7&217$&7
end of the assembly onto a length of 18 AWG
wire. Attach a terminal lug onto the wire end. &5,03$1'62/'(5
2. Attach an appropriately sized section of heat
shrink to cover the soldered TVS leads and
four TVS pieces. A second appropriately
sized (larger) section of heat shrink should
then be attached to shrink over the 4-pin
connector with sockets and back over the four

TVSs. These two pieces of heat shrink should
0$;
overlap along the entire length of the TVSs.
3. Crimp and solder four 18 AWG wires to their Figure 3-112. Detail of TVS Pin Assembly
connector specific pins, and insert them into
the 4-pin connector with pins.
4. Attach lengths of 18 AWG to both ends of the fuse and fuse holder assembly.
5. Splice the four wires from the connector with pins to one of the wires attached to the fuse
assembly.
6. Attach a terminal lug onto the 18 AWG coming from the other end of the fuse assembly.
7. Connect the two 4-pin connectors together.
8. Ensure that the 10A fuse is installed in the fuse holder.

'(7$,/2)796
+($76+5,1. $12'(
&$7+2'(
)86(
0D[ +2/'(5
62/'(5

72 7232:(5
*5281' %86

(QYLURQPHQWDO6SOLFH
796 4W\
0D[
3LQ&RQQHFWRU

0D[
127(
$OOIRXU796VPXVWEHLQVWDOOHGZLWKWKHFDWKRGHIDFLQJWKHFRQQHFWRU

Figure 3-113. TVS 2 Assembly

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-137
3.4.4.3 TVS Assembly Polarity Check
Using a multimeter that is set to the diode mode, check conductivity across the entire TVS assembly. In
one direction, the meter should read open and in the other direction it should read 2.0 to 2.5 volts. When
installed in the aircraft, the TVS assembly should be oriented so that it does not normally conduct from
power to ground. The meter should indicate open when the red lead is attached to the power bus terminal
lug, and the black lead is attached to the ground terminal lug. The meter should indicate 2.0 to 2.5 volts
when the red lead is attached to the ground terminal lug, and the black lead is attached to the power bus
terminal lug.
3.4.4.4 TVS Assembly Installation
Refer to Figure F-20 and Figure F-21 while completing the following steps:
1. Attach the fuse (power) end of the TVS assembly to the power bus at the specific point detailed in
the drawing.
2. Attach the ground end of the TVS assembly to aircraft ground.
3.5 Unit Replacement
Whenever removing or replacing units, remove power from the LRU by removing aircraft power or
opening the LRU circuit breaker. After installing an LRU, verify that resistance to aircraft ground meets
the requirements specified in Section 3.8.
3.5.1 GDU™ 620 Unit Replacement
3.5.1.1 Removal
1. Remove the six mounting screws from the bezel of the GDU 620.
2. Pull the GDU 620 far enough out from the instrument panel to access the three rear connectors.
3. Disconnect the rear connectors.
4. Remove the GDU 620.
3.5.1.2 Installation
1. Visually inspect the connectors to ensure that there are no bent or damaged pins. Repair any
damage.
2. Connect the rear connectors, ensuring that each slidelock is secured on both sides.
3. Set the GDU 620 into place.
4. Install the six mounting screws into the bezel of the GDU 620.

NOTE
The installation configuration settings are stored in the configuration module and will be
retained when the GDU 620 is replaced with a new unit. User settings, such as map
orientation preferences, are stored internally and will be lost when the GDU 620 is
replaced with a new unit.

Original GDU™ 620 is Reinstalled

If the original GDU 620 is reinstalled, then no software loading is required. This does not include units that
were returned for repair as their software and configuration files are deleted during the repair process. No
configuration is required. Verify that the configuration is correct using the previously completed checkout
log in Section 5.11.3.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-138 Rev. L
New, Repaired or Exchange GDU™ 620 is Installed
If the GDU 620 is replaced with a new, repaired, or exchange unit then software must be loaded. No
configuration is required.

NOTE
Upon first power-up after installing a new GDU 620, it is normal to see a series of
“LOADING…” messages appear on the screen. These messages indicate that the 
GDU 620 is updating its configuration settings from the configuration module.

Continue to the GDU 620 Software Loading procedure in Section 5.4.1 followed by the Manifest
Configuration in Section 5.5.4, and the Configuration Module Update in Section 5.5.15.2.
GDU™ 620 Configuration Module is Replaced
If the GDU 620 Configuration Module is replaced, the GDU 620 will update the configuration module
from its internally-stored settings when the UPDT CFG soft key is pressed as described in Section 5.5.13.
Verify that the configuration is correct using the previously completed checkout log in Section 5.11.3. If
the GDU 620 is replaced at the same time as the Configuration Module, then the System Setup will need to
be performed per Section 5.5. To replace the configuration module, reference Section 3.4.2.2.
3.5.1.3 Return to Service
After removing and reinstalling the GDU 620 per the instructions above, a simple return-to-service check
should be performed.
1. Power up the GDU 620 in Configuration mode. Verify that the configuration settings match those
recorded in the checkout log in Section 5.11.3.
2. Power up the GDU 620 in Normal mode. Verify that there are no red-Xs and that no alerts are
present. If red Xs or alerts are present, troubleshoot using Section 6.2 and Section 6.3.
3.5.2 GRS 77 Unit Replacement
3.5.2.1 Removal
1. Disconnect the GRS 77 connector.
2. Loosen the four Phillips thumbscrews with a screwdriver.
3. Gently lift the GRS 77 from the mounting plate (if the supports for the mounting plate are
removed, the GRS 77 must be recalibrated. See Section 5.6)
3.5.2.2 Installation
1. Place the GRS 77 on the mounting plate, ensuring the orientation is correct.
2. Fasten the unit to the plate using the Phillips thumbscrews. Recommended torque is 22-25 inch
pounds.
3. Visually inspect the connectors to ensure there are no bent or damaged pins. Repair any damage.
4. Connect the connector to the GRS 77, ensuring that each slidelock is secured on both sides.
Original GRS 77 is Reinstalled
If the original GRS 77 is reinstalled, then no software loading is required. This does not include units that
were returned for repair as their software and configuration files are deleted during the repair testing
process. Reference Table 3-11 to determine whether recalibration is required.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-139
New, Repaired, or Exchange GRS 77 is Installed
If the GRS 77 is replaced with a new, repaired, or exchange unit then software must be loaded per
Section 5.4.2. Reference Table 3-11 to determine whether re-calibration is required.
GRS 77 Configuration Module is Replaced
If the GRS 77 Configuration Module is replaced, the GRS 77 must be re-calibrated. Reference Table 3-14.
to replace the configuration module, reference Section 3.4.2.2.
3.5.2.3 Return to Service
After removing and reinstalling the GRS 77, the following return-to-service checks should be performed.
1. Power up the G600 system with the GDU 620 in Normal mode.
2. Verify that the GDU 620 displays valid heading and attitude within approximately one minute.
Note that heading can remain invalid if the magnetometer is near a large metal structure such as a
hangar wall or if the magnetometer is close to a large ground power cart.
3. Verify that no unexpected alerts are present. If alerts are present, troubleshoot using Section 6.2
and Section 6.3.

Table 3-14. GRS 77 Calibration Criteria

Calibrations Required
GRS 77/
Condition GRS 77 GMU 44 Engine Run-up
Pitch/Roll Offset Magnetic Vibration Test
Section 5.6.1 Calibration Section 5.6.5
Section 5.6.2
GRS 77 AHRS was removed and/or
replaced. The mounting tray was NOT
None Required.
removed and the mounting tray bolts were
NOT loosened.
GRS 77 AHRS was removed and/or
replaced. The mounting tray WAS removed X X X
and/or mounting tray bolts WERE loosened.
GRS 77 AHRS Configuration Module was
X X X
replaced.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-140 Rev. L
3.5.3 GMU 44 Unit Replacement
3.5.3.1 Removal
1. Gain access to the GMU 44 magnetometer.
2. Unscrew the three screws that hold the GMU 44 to its mounting rack.
3. Carefully lift the GMU 44 from the rack.
4. Disconnect the wiring harness.
3.5.3.2 Installation
1. Visually inspect the connectors to ensure there are no bent or damaged pins. Repair any damage.
2. Connect the wiring harness to the GMU 44.
3. Lower the GMU 44 into the rack and secure the plate with the three Phillips screws.
Original GMU 44 is Reinstalled
If the original GMU 44 was reinstalled, then software loading is not required. This does not include units
that were returned for repair as their software and configuration files are deleted during the repair testing
process. Recalibration is required only if the mount for the magnetometer was changed. If the
magnetometer mount was changed, continue to Section 5.6.2 for the GRS 77/GMU 44 Magnetic
Calibration. After the GRS 77/GMU 44 Magnetic Calibration is performed, the criteria in Section 5.6.3
and Section 5.6.4 should be used to determine whether the Heading Offset Compensation is necessary.
New, Repaired or Exchange GMU 44 is Installed
If the GMU 44 was replaced with a new, repaired, or exchange unit, then software must be loaded and the
GRS 77/GMU 44 Magnetic Calibration must be performed. Continue to Section 5.4.2 for software loading
and Section 5.6.2 for the GRS 77/GMU 44 Magnetic Calibration. After the GRS 77/GMU 44 Magnetic
Calibration is performed, the criteria in Section 5.6.3 and Section 5.6.4 should be used to determine
whether the Heading Offset Compensation is necessary.
3.5.3.3 Return to Service
After removing and reinstalling the GMU 44, the following return-to-service checks should be performed.
1. Power up the G600 system with the GDU 620 in Normal mode.
2. Verify that the GDU 620 displays valid heading within approximately one minute. Note that
heading can remain invalid if the magnetometer is near a large metal structure such as a hangar
wall or if the magnetometer is close to a large ground power cart.
3. Verify that no unexpected alerts are present. If alerts are present, troubleshoot using Section 6.2
and Section 6.3.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-141
3.5.4 GDC 74( ) Unit Replacement
3.5.4.1 Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the Pitot-static plumbing from the rear of the unit. Disconnect the single connector.
2. Loosen each thumbscrew on the hold-down clamp and remove the clamp.
3. Carefully remove the unit from its mount.
3.5.4.2 Installation Procedure
1. Place the unit in the mounting tray.
2. Position the locking clamp and fasten using the thumbscrews.
3. Connect the Pitot-static plumbing.
4. Inspect the connector and pins for damage. Repair any damage.
5. Connect the connector to the unit, ensuring that each slidelock is secured on both sides.
Original GDC 74( ) is Reinstalled
If the original GDC 74( ) is re-installed, then no software loading is required. This does not include units
that were returned for repair as their software and configuration files are deleted during the repair testing
process.
New, Repaired or Exchange GDC 74( ) is Installed
If the GDC 74( ) is replaced with a new, repaired, or exchange unit, then software must be loaded to the
unit. Continue to the GDC 74( ) Software Loading procedure in Section 5.4.2.
GDC 74( ) Configuration Module is Replaced
If the GDC 74( ) Configuration Module is replaced, the GDC 74( ) must be configured. Continue to
Section 5.5.7. To replace the configuration module, reference Section 3.4.2.2.
3.5.4.3 Return to Service
After removing and reinstalling the GDC 74( ), the following return-to-service checks should be
performed.
1. Power up the G600 system with the GDU 620 in Normal mode.
2. Verify that the GDU 620 displays valid air data within approximately one minute.
3. Verify that no unexpected alerts are present. If alerts are present, troubleshoot using Section 6.2
and Section 6.3.
4. Perform a leak check of the Pitot-static system and observe the airspeed, altitude, and vertical
speed for proper operation.
3.5.5 Mid-Continent Electric Standby ADI System Replacement (if installed)
The Mid-Continent electric ADI and associated LRUs must be replaced with the same P/N (including
panel tilt and lighting voltage) as the unit(s) being replaced. Except for the MD420 emergency power
supply, these units require no configuration when removed or replaced. On the MD420 battery module, the
Lighting Voltage Select switch must be set to match the lighting voltage of the unit that was removed.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-142 Rev. L
3.5.5.1 Return to Service
After removing and reinstalling the Mid-Continent electric ADI or associated LRUs, the following return-
to-service checks should be performed.
1. Power up the standby ADI system from aircraft power.
2. Verify that the power indicator flag is out of view.
3. After approximately three minutes verify that the attitude presentation is correct (the ADI may
need to be caged).
4. Remove aircraft power from the standby ADI system and press the STBY PWR button on the
standby ADI system. Verify that the power indicator flag remains out of view and the ADI
continues to run on battery power.
5. Verify that lighting is still provided to the ADI.
6. Restore aircraft power to the standby ADI.
3.5.6 GAD 43/43e Unit Replacement
3.5.6.1 Removal
1. Disconnect the GAD 43/43e connector.
2. Remove the four/six mounting screws.
3. Carefully remove the unit.
3.5.6.2 Installation
1. Place the GAD 43/43e in its mounting location and align its mounting holes with the nutplates
beneath it.
2. Insert the four/six mounting screws and tighten the screws to hold the GAD 43/43e in place.
3. Inspect the connector and pins for damage. Repair any damage.
4. Connect the connector to the unit, ensuring that each slidelock is secured on both sides.
Original GAD 43/43e is Reinstalled
If the original GAD 43/43e is re-installed, then no software loading or configuration is required. This does
not include units that were returned for repair as their software and configuration files are deleted during
the repair testing process.
New, Repaired or Exchange GAD 43/43e is Installed
If the GAD 43/43e is replaced with a new, repaired, or exchanged unit, then software must be loaded to the
unit and the configuration data must be reloaded into the GAD 43. Continue to Section 5.4.2 for GAD 43
Software Loading procedure.Go to the GAD 43/43e configuration page and verify that the configuration
settings are correct.
GAD 43e only: If an analog navigation receiver is connected to the GAD 43e, perform the GAD 43e
calibration procedure in Section 5.5.11.3.

NOTE
Viewing the GAD 43/43e configuration page on the GDU 620 causes the configuration
values to be written to the GAD 43/43e.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-143
3.5.6.3 Return to Service
After removing and reinstalling the GAD 43/43e, the following return-to-service checks should be
performed.
1. Power up the G600 system with the GDU 620 in Configuration mode.
2. Conduct the checks in Section 5.8.5.8 and Section 5.8.5.9 as appropriate for the installation.
3. Restart the G600 system with the GDU 620 in Normal mode.
4. After valid attitude information is displayed on the GDU, verify that there are no GAD alerts in the
alerts window. If alerts are present, troubleshoot using Section 6.2 and Section 6.3.
5. Conduct the checks in Section 5.10.2.4.2 (if appropriate for the installation).
6. Engage the autopilot and verify that the servos are active.
7. If the GAD 43/43e supplies attitude information to the autopilot, press the AP TEST soft key on
the PFD. Verify that the autopilot disconnects and the servos disengage.
3.6 Weight and Balance
Weight and balance computation is required after the installation of the G600 system. Follow the
guidelines as established in AC 43.13-1B, Chapter 10, Section 2. Make appropriate entries in the
equipment list indicating items added, removed, or relocated along with the date accomplished. Include
your name and certificate number in the aircraft records. Refer to the Table 3-15 below for unit dimensions
and center of gravity. A sample calculation is shown in Figure 3-114.

Table 3-15. Unit Weight and Balance Data

Item Weight Dimensions and CG

GDU 620 6.38 lbs (2.90 kg) See Figure C-2
GRS 77 2.80 lbs (1.27 kg) See Figure C-5
GRS 77 and Mounting Rack 3.50 lbs (1.59 kg) See Figure C-5
See Figure C-5
GRS 77, Mounting Rack and Universal Mount 4.55 lbs (2.07 kg)
and Figure C-12
See Figure C-6
GDC 74( ) 1.69 lbs (0.77 kg)
and Figure C-7
See Figure C-6
GDC 74( ) and Mounting Rack 2.04 lbs (0.93 kg)
and Figure C-7
GMU 44 0.35 lbs (0.16 kg) See Figure C-3
GMU 44 and Mounting Rack 0.50 lbs (0.23 kg) See Figure C-3
See Figure C-3
GMU 44, Mounting Rack and Universal Mount 0.72 lbs (0.33 kg)
and Figure C-13
GAD 43 1.90 lbs (0.86 kg) See Figure C-16
GAD 43e 2.26 lbs (1.03 kg) See Figure C-17

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-144 Rev. L
Useful Empty Moment
Previous Aircraft Weight and Balance C.G. (in)
Load (lb) Weight (lb) (lb-in)
Calculated: 03/10/06 1093.3 2306.70 138.83 320233.96
Moment
Description of items removed from aircraft Weight (lb) Arm (in)
(lb-in)
VSI 0.85 116.90 99.37
CDI 1.30 116.60 151.58
Clock and OAT 0.30 117.40 35.22
Sandel HSI 3.60 114.10 410.76
HSI Gyro Remote 4.90 181.00 886.90
Magnetometer (Old) 0.40 151.00 60.40
Attitude Indicator 2.20 114.50 251.90
Altimeter 1.10 116.10 127.71
Total removed 14.65 2023.84
Moment
Description of items added to aircraft Weight (lb) Arm (in)
(lb-in)
GDU 620 6.38 114.10 727.96
GRS 77, mounting rack, and universal mount 4.55 181.00 823.55
GDC 74( ) and mounting rack 2.04 113.30 231.13
GMU 44, mounting rack, and universal mount 0.72 146.00 105.12
Standby attitude indicator 3.70 121.00 447.70
Standby altimeter 1.10 121.00 133.10
Total added 18.49 2468.56
Change 3.84 444.73
Useful Moment
New Aircraft Weight and Balance Weight (lb) C.G. (in)
Load (lb) (lb-in)
Calculated: 6/21/2008 1089.46 2310.54 138.79 320678.69

Figure 3-114. Sample Weight and Balance Calculation

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-145
3.7 Electrical Load Analysis
An electrical load analysis (ELA) must be completed on each aircraft prior to installation to verify that the
aircraft electrical system is capable of supporting the G600 system. The purpose of the ELA is to show
compliance with FARs 23.1351 and 23.1353(h). As part of the G600 installation it must be shown that (i)
the maximum electrical system demand does not normally exceed 80% of the alternator data plate rating,
and (ii) in the event of a complete loss of the primary electrical system, the battery must be capable of
providing at least 30 minutes of electrical power to those loads that are essential to continued safe flight
and landing. The results of the ELA must be recorded on FAA Form 337. There are several approaches that
could be taken, as described in the following sections. For each approach, use the values listed inTable 3-
16 for computation.

NOTE
Certain operating requirements (e.g. 14 CFR Part 135) may impose additional
requirements of electrical power in the event of a complete loss of the primary electrical
system. It is the installer’s responsibility to ensure that the aircraft, if used for these
operations, meets these additional requirements.

NOTE
Circuits should be protected in accordance with the approved data in this document (see
Appendix F for recommended LRU circuit breaker ratings) and the guidelines in AC
43.13-1B, Chapter 11, Section 4.

Table 3-16. LRU Current Requirements

14 Volt Current Draw 28 Volt Current Draw

LRU
Typical Maximum Typical Maximum
GDU 620 3.9 A 5.4 A 1.9 A 2.7 A
GRS 77/GMU 44 600 mA 1.0 A [1] 300 mA 1.0 A [1]
GDC 74( )/GTP 59 410 mA 480 mA 200 mA 235 mA
GAD 43 410 mA 720 mA 210 mA 350 mA
GAD 43e 790 mA 1.22 A 390 mA 590 mA
MCI 4200 [2] 510 mA 1.4 A [3] 250 mA 600 mA [3]
MCI 4300-4XX [2] 630 mA 1.8 A [3] 310 mA 900 mA [3]
[1] Maximum current draw occurs momentarily at startup or when the supply voltage drops to
9 VDC.
[2] Current draw values do not include current required to charge battery. The current
required to charge the battery will depend upon the state of charge of the battery and will
decay over time.
[3] Maximum current draw occurs at startup.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-146 Rev. L
3.7.1 Aircraft with Existing Electrical Load Analysis
If there is an existing ELA for the aircraft, this must be updated to reflect the modification. It must show
that the alternators/generators have adequate capacity to supply power to the modified systems in all
anticipated conditions. Refer to the aircraft manufacturer’s documentation for guidance on revising /
maintaining the ELA.
3.7.2 Aircraft without Existing Electrical Load Analysis
Prior to undertaking a complete electrical load analysis, the net change to the electrical load resulting from
the G600 system installation should be determined (refer to Figure 3-115 for a sample calculation). The
results of this analysis will determine how to proceed further.

Electrical
Items removed from aircraft:
Load (A)
KI 227 ADF Indicator [Note 1] 0.00
KI 525A Pictorial NAV Indicator (HSI) 0.36
KA 51B Slaving Accessory [Note 2] 0.00
KI 256 Horizon Indicator (ADI) 0.76
Mid Continent MD 200-206 VOR/LOC/GS Indicator 0.30
KG 102A Directional Gyro 3.00
Shadin ADC 200 1.30
SUBTOTAL: 5.72

Items added to aircraft:

Garmin GDU 620 (PFD/MFD Display) 3.90
Garmin GRS 77 (AHRS) 0.60
Garmin GMU 44 (Magnetometer) [Note 3] 0.00
Garmin GDC 74( ) (Air Data Computer) 0.41
Garmin GAD 43 (Adapter) 0.41
SUBTOTAL: 5.32

NET CHANGE IN BUS LOAD (NEW BUS LOAD - OLD BUS LOAD): -0.40

Notes:
[1] Received power from ADF receiver, which was left in the aircraft.
[2] Received power from KG 102A, which was also removed. The load for the
KA 51B is included as part of the KG102A load.
[3] Receives power from the GRS 77, so its power is included under GRS 77
[4] Use typical current draw when doing this calculation.

Figure 3-115. Sample Net Electrical Load Change Calculation

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-147
3.7.2.1 Electrical Load is Reduced Following Modification
In many instances when older systems are replaced with newer equipment, the electrical load presented to
the power system is reduced. If the overall load on the electrical system is reduced as a result of the G600
modification (as shown in the previous example), no further analysis is required – this assumes that the
electrical system was within all limits prior to the G600 installation. The amended electrical load
calculation must be included with the FAA Form 337 to document the electrical load reduction.
3.7.2.2 Electrical Load is Increased Following Modification
If it is determined that the electrical load has increased, a complete electrical load analysis should be
performed to show that the capacity of the alternator/generator is sufficient for the additional electrical
load. For guidance on preparing an ELA, refer to ASTM F 2490-05 Standard Guide for Aircraft Electrical
Load and Power Source Capacity Analysis. Alternatively, the loads under various operating conditions
may be measured, as described in Section 3.7.3.
3.7.3 Performing an Electrical Load Analysis by Measurement
Many aircraft do not have an existing load analysis. If the installation of the G600 increases the overall
load, an electrical load analysis must be performed. Due to the age of much of the equipment, adequate
information regarding the current draw of this equipment may not exist. One acceptable method of
performing an electrical load analysis is to determine the electrical loads by measurement. The
measurements must account for loads applied to the electrical system in probable combinations and
durations for aircraft operation. The maximum electrical demand should not exceed 80% of the alternator
data plate rating. The following section describes how to do an ELA for a single alternator / single battery
electrical system. This should be modified accordingly for aircraft with multiple batteries or alternators,
and it must be shown that the maximum electrical demand for each alternator does not exceed 80% of the
alternator data plate rating.
In this section the following definitions are used:
Normal operation: The primary electrical power generating system is operating normally.
Emergency operation: the primary electrical power generating system is inoperative.
Either an in-circuit or clamp-on ammeter can be used for current measurement. The instrument used must
be capable of reading current to the nearest 0.5 A, or better.
1. Record the continuous (data plate / nameplate) rating for the alternator and battery.
2. Using the electrical load tabulation form provided in Figure 3-117, compile a list of electrical
loads on the aircraft (generally, this is just a list of circuit breakers and circuit breaker switches).
Refer to the example in Figure 3-118.
3. Identify whether each load is continuous (e.g. GPS) or intermittent (e.g. stall warning horn,
landing gear).
4. Using the worst-case flight condition, identify whether each load is used in a particular phase of
flight for normal operation. If some loads are mutually exclusive and will not be turned on
simultaneously (e.g. Pitot heat and air conditioning), use only those loads for the worst-case
condition.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-148 Rev. L
5. Identify whether each load is used in a particular phase of flight for emergency operation. These
are the loads essential for continued safe flight and landing. At minimum, these systems include:
◦ PFD/MFD #1 (GDU 620) [1]
◦ AHRS #1 (GRS 77) (includes GMU 44 Magnetometer) [1]
◦ ADC #1 (GDC 74( )) [1]
◦ COM Radio #1 [1]
◦ GPS #1 [1]
◦ Audio Panel [2]
◦ Stall Warning System (if applicable)
◦ Pitot Heat
◦ Landing Light (switched on during landing only)
◦ Instrument Panel Lighting
◦ Landing Gear Indication Lights
◦ Navigation Lights
◦ Strobe Lights
NOTES
[1] For dual G600 installations, the #2 system is not essential for continued safe flight and landing.
[2] If the landing gear warning or stall warning audio require the audio panel, then the Audio Panel
must be included; otherwise, the audio panel is not essential for continued safe flight and landing
and may be omitted.

CAUTION
To avoid damage to equipment, ensure that the ammeter is capable of handling the
anticipated load.

6. Insert/attach the ammeter in the line from the external power source to the master relay circuit as
shown in Figure 3-116 (this will eliminate errors due to the charging current drawn by the battery).

(;7(51$/ $/7175
32:(5

(/(&75,&$/%86

$PPHWHUSODFHPHQW±HLWKHU
%$77(5< ORFDWLRQDFFHSWDEOH GRHVQRW
LQFOXGHEDWWHU\FKDUJLQJFXUUHQW
0$67(5
5(/$<

Figure 3-116. Ammeter Placement for Current Measurements

7. Ensure that all circuit breakers are closed.

8. Apply external power to the aircraft. The voltage of the power source should be set to the
nominal alternator voltage (usually 13.8 VDC or 27.5 VDC).
9. Turn on the battery master switch.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-149
NOTE
Intermittent electrical loads are not measured. It is assumed that if additional current is
required beyond what the alternator can supply, this short-duration demand will be
provided by the battery.

10. Set the lighting as described below. These settings will be used for every current measurement that
follows.
◦ All instrument panel and flood lights should be set to maximum brightness.
◦ The GDU 620 backlight should be set to 50% brightness.
◦ Any other displays with a backlight should be set to 50% brightness.
◦ The GPS navigator backlight should be set to 50% brightness.
11. Using the tabulation completed above, switch on all continuous electrical loads that are used for
the taxiing phase and record the current that is measured by the ammeter (measurement (a) in
Figure 3-117). The following items should be taken into consideration for this measurement:
◦ The autopilot circuit breaker should be closed, but the autopilot should not be engaged.

CAUTION
The Pitot heat should only be switched on long enough to take the current measurement
and then switched off. The Pitot probe may get hot and care should be exercised to avoid
burns or damaging the unit.
12. Using the tabulation completed above, switch on all continuous electrical loads that are used for
the normal takeoff/landing phase and record the current that is measured by the ammeter.
Measurements must be taken with the landing lights ON and OFF (measurements (b1) and (b2) in
Figure 3-117). The following items should be taken into consideration for this measurement:
◦ The autopilot circuit breaker should be closed, and the autopilot should be engaged.
13. Using the tabulation completed above, switch on all continuous electrical loads that are used for
the normal cruise phase and record the current that is measured by the ammeter (measurement (c)
in Figure 3-117). The following items should be taken into consideration for this measurement:
◦ The autopilot circuit breaker should be closed, and the autopilot should be engaged.
14. Using the tabulation completed above, switch on all continuous electrical loads that are used for
the emergency cruise phase and record the current that is measured by the ammeter. Record the
current drawn with the Landing Light switched OFF and again with the landing light switched ON.
15. Using the tabulation completed above, switch on all continuous electrical loads that are used for
the emergency landing phase and record the current that is measured by the ammeter
16. Using the values measured and recorded, complete the ELA using the blank form in Figure 3-92C
(refer to example in Figure 3-118). Verify that the maximum demand does not exceed 80% of the
alternator data plate rating.

NOTE
It is permissible to exceed 80% of the alternator data plate rating during the
takeoff/landing phase of flight when the Pitot heat and landing light are switched on
simultaneously. However, for this condition (i) you must not exceed 95% of the alternator
data plate rating, and (ii) you must not exceed 80% of the alternator data plate rating with
the Pitot heat on and the landing light off.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-150 Rev. L
17. Using the values measured and recorded, complete the Emergency Power Analysis using the blank
form in Figure 3-119 (refer to example in Figure 3-118). Verify that the battery is capable of
supplying at least 30 minutes of electrical power in accordance with 14 CFR 23.1353(h). If the
existing battery does not meet the battery capacity requirements, a battery that has sufficient
capacity must be installed. The installation of another battery is not approved by this manual is
beyond the scope of this manual and STC. Separate airworthiness approval must be obtained.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-151
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-152 Rev. L
G500/G600 ELECTRICAL LOAD TABULATION FORM

Date: Tail Number: Phase(s) of flight during which circuit/system is used

Normal Operation Emergency Operation
Circuit
Breaker Operating Taxiing TO/Land Cruise Cruise Land
Circuit/System Number Time 10 min 10 min 60 min (Calculated) 10 min

Figure 3-117. Blank Electrical Load Tabulation Form

Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-153
G500/G600 ELECTRICAL LOAD TABULATION FORM (CONTINUED)

Date: Tail Number: Phase(s) of flight during which circuit/system is used

Normal Operation Emergency Operation
Circuit
Breaker Operating Taxiing TO/Land Cruise Cruise Land
Circuit/System Number Time 10 min 10 min 60 min (Calculated) 10 min

Ldg Lt ON
(b1)
Total current used (amps):
(a) (c) (d) (e)
Ldg Lt OFF
(b2)

÷ Alternator rating (amps):

%
Ldg Lt ON
(< 95%)
x 100% = Percent of alternator capacity used: % % N/A N/A
(< 80%) (< 80%)
%
Ldg Lt OFF
(< 80%)

Pass/Fail:

Notes:

Figure 3-117. Blank Electrical Load Tabulation Form

Sheet 2 of 2

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-154 Rev. L
G500/G600 ELECTRICAL LOAD TABULATION FORM

Date: 1/6/2010 Tail Number: N5272K Phase(s) of flight during which circuit/system is used
Normal Operation Emergency Operation
Circuit
Breaker Operating Taxiing TO/Land Cruise Cruise Land
Circuit/System Number Time 10 min 10 min 60 min (Calculated) 10 min

Alternator Field A1 Continuous

Annunciator Panel C1 Continuous
Vacuum Warning C2 Intermittent
Stall Warning C3 Intermittent
Gear Warning C4 Intermittent
Gear Actuator C5 Intermittent
Cluster Gauge D1 Continuous
Ignition D2 intermittent
PFD D3 Continuous
Turn Coordinator D4 Continuous
Gear Relay D5 Intermittent
ADC E1 Continuous
Panel Lights E2 Continuous
Glareshield Lights E3 Continuous
AHRS E4 Continuous
Flap Actuator E5 Intermittent
COM 1 F1 Continuous
GPS/NAV 1 F2 Continuous
COM 2 F3 Continuous
GPS/NAV 2 F4 Continuous
Autopilot [1] F5 Continuous
Audio Panel G1 Continuous
Radio Blower G2 Continuous
ADF G3 Continuous
Transponder G4 Continuous
GDL 69 H1 Continuous
TCAD H2 Continuous
JPI Engine Monitor H3 Continuous
Bose Headsets H5 Continuous
Altitude Encoder J1 Continuous
Strobe Light SW1 Continuous
Nav Lights SW2 Continuous
Pitot Heat SW5 Continuous
Elevator Trim SW6 Intermittent
Boost Pump SW7 Intermittent

Figure 3-118. Example of Completed Electrical Load Tabulation Form

Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-155
G500/G600 ELECTRICAL LOAD TABULATION FORM (CONTINUED)

Date: 1/6/2010 Tail Number: N5272K Phase(s) of flight during which circuit/system is used
Normal Operation Emergency Operation
Circuit
Breaker Operating Taxiing TO/Land Cruise Cruise Land
Circuit/System Number Time 10 min 10 min 60 min (Calculated) 10 min

60.0
Ldg Lt ON
(b1)
Total current used (amps): 45.7 43.5 34 48.1
(a) 44.7 (c) (d) (e)
Ldg Lt OFF
(b2)

÷ Alternator rating (amps): 70

86 %
Ldg Lt ON
(< 95%)
x 100% = Percent of alternator capacity used: 68 % 62 % N/A N/A
(< 80%) 64 (< 80%)
%
Ldg Lt OFF
(< 80%)

Pass/Fail: PASS PASS PASS

Notes:
[1] During taxi phase, Autopilot circuit breaker is closed but autopilot is not engaged.

Figure 3-118. Example of Completed Electrical Load Tabulation Form

Sheet 2 of 2

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-156 Rev. L
Date: ______________Tail No.:______________

Power Sources
Item Number Voltage Manufacturer Model Number
Installed (DC Volts)
Alternator
Battery

Battery Capacity: x 0.75 (aerating factor) = ________ Ah x 60 min =________ A-min [i]

Current drawn during Normal Cruise (amps): ________ (c) enter current calculated in step 13. above
Cruise consumption during recognition: (c)A x 5 min = ________ A-min [ii]

Emergency Landing Current (amps): _________ (e) enter current measured in step 15. above
Emergency Landing Consumption: (e) A x 10 min = ________ A-min [iii]
Capacity remaining for cruise: ([i] – [ii] – [iii]) ________ - ________ - ________ = ________ A-min [iv]
Emergency Cruise Current (amps): _________ (d) enter current measured in step 14. above
Emergency Cruise Duration ([iv] / (d)): ____________ [iv] / ___________ (d) = __________ min [v]
The total duration of flight on emergency power is determined by adding the time for recognition of the
failure (5 minutes) to the time for emergency cruise (calculated above) to the time for landing (10 mins).
Total Duration for Flight on Emergency Power (5 + [v] + 10) = ________ min [vi]
Verify that the total flight duration on emergency power [vi] is ³ 30 minutes.

Assumptions:
Most severe operating condition is considered to be _________________________________________

Motor load demands are shown for steady state operation and do not include inrush current draw.

Load shedding is accomplished (how)___________________________________________within five

minutes of warning annunciation.

Measured loads using __________________________________________________________________

Figure 3-119. Blank Emergency Power Operation Calculation Form

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-157
Date: 1/6/2010Tail No.: N5272K

Power Sources
Item Number Voltage Manufacturer Model Number
Installed (DC Volts)
Alternator 1 13.75 Prestolite AL 12-P70
Battery 1 12 Gill G-35
Battery Capacity: 35 x 0.75 (derating factor) = 26.25 Ah x 60 min = 1575 A-min [i]

Current drawn during Cruise (amps): 43.5 (c) enter current calculated in step 13. above

Cruise consumption during recognition: (c)43.5A x 5 min = ___217.5__ A-min [ii]

Emergency Landing Current (amps): ____48.1_____ (e) enter current measured in step 15. above

Emergency Landing Consumption: (e)48.1 A x 10 min = ___481 __ A-min [iii]

Capacity remaining for cruise: ([i] – [ii] – [iii]) 1575 - 217.5 - 481 = 876.5 A-min [iv]

Emergency Cruise Current (amps): ____34.0_____ (d) enter current measured in step 14 above

Cruise Duration ([iv] / (d)): 876.5 [iv] / ____34.0_____ (d) = ____25.8__ min [v]

Total Duration for Flight on Emergency Power (5 + [h]25.8 + 10) = _____40.8___ min [vi]

The total flight duration on emergency power [vi] is ³ 30 minutes. [PASS]

Assumptions:

1. Most severe operating condition is considered to be night IFR with the Pitot heat operating.
2. Motor load demands are shown for steady state operation and do not include inrush current draw.
3. Load shedding is accomplished manually by the pilot within five minutes of warning
annunciation.
4. Measured loads using a calibrated Extech clamp-on DC ammeter on the battery terminal to the
master relay cable.
Figure 3-120. Example of Completed Emergency Power Operation Calculation

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-158 Rev. L
3.8 Equipment Bonding
The instrument panel must be of metal construction so that the GDU 620 has a metal ground reference
back to the other G600 interfacing equipment mounted on the instrument panel or remotely mounted units
that have their mounting locations connected back to the instrument panel. For metal aircraft the latter is
achieved inherently through the metallic aircraft structure. For composite aircraft a ground plane (or
reference) may need to be created to achieve a comparable ground. This is described in Section 3.8.2.
In all aircraft the GDU 620 must be electrically bonded to the instrument panel with a resistance of 20 mΩ
or less.
All LRU bonding measurements must be made with the connector(s) disconnected from the LRU.
3.8.1 Metal Aircraft
The GRS 77, GDC 74( ), GMU 44, GAD 43/43e and any supporting brackets must be electrically bonded
to the aircraft metallic structure that forms the ground plane, with a resistance between mating surfaces of
2.5 mΩ or less. The overall resistance between the following LRUs and the aircraft ground plane must be
10 mΩ or less: GRS 77, GDC 74( ), GMU 44, and GAD 43. The overall resistance between the GDU 620
and the aircraft ground plane must be 20 mΩ or less. The resistance between the GTP 59 and the aircraft
skin must be 2.5 mΩ or less. Refer to Section 3.8.3 for details on the aluminum surface preparation prior to
bonding.
For some aircraft the instrument panel is attached with vibration mounts. For these aircraft, it must be
verified that the vibration-isolated instrument panel is grounded to the airframe metallic structure with a
bonding jumper the same or equivalent to the specification below. If no such jumper is installed, a bonding
strap meeting the following criteria must be installed to accomplish this:
• The cross sectional area of the strap must be greater than 0.016sq inches (approx 20800 circular
mils). A 7/16 inch or wider tubular braid (QQB575R30T437, 24,120 circular mils) or a 3/4 inch or
wider flat braid (QQB575F36T781, 20,800 circular mils) must be used and attached at both ends
using MS 20659-130 terminal lugs.
• Install an AN 960C10 washer between the terminal lug and the mating surface and secure with a
#10 steel bolt. Ensure that the lug and washer are centered and in full contact with the mating
surface with no overhang when secured.
• The strap length should be as short as possible and must not exceed 6 inches.
3.8.2 Non-Metallic Aircraft

NOTE
The GTP 59 and GMU 44 must not be electrically bonded to the aircraft ground plane. If
the structure is conductive at the mounting locations, provisions must be made to
electrically isolate the GTP 59 and GMU 44 from the conductive structure.

NOTE
Carbon reinforced composite (with or without mesh) or fiberglass with mesh is considered
to be conductive. Wood, Kevlar and fiberglass without mesh is considered to be non-
conductive.

If the equipment is mounted in the metallic instrument panel then the bonding should be accomplished like
that for metal aircraft (Section 3.8.1). For composite areas of the aircraft the GRS 77, GDC 74( ), and
GAD 43/43e must be electrically bonded to the metallic instrument panel either directly through the
mounting rack or with heavy-duty dead soft aluminum tape such as 3M Heavy Duty Aluminum Foil

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-159
Tape 438. The following guidance should be used for locating and bonding the LRU:
1. Identify a location for the LRU which is close to the instrument panel or the grounding structure
for the instrument panel.
2. Identify a route between the LRU location and the instrument panel ground that will accommodate
a strip of aluminum tape with a width of at least four inches and a length-to-width ratio of 7:1.
3. If the tape will come in contact with carbon composite material, the tape must be electrically
isolated from the carbon composite material to prevent corrosion due to dissimilar materials.
Secure a thin layer of fiberglass cloth to the carbon fiber with fiberglass resin as shown in
Figure 3-121.

675,32)/,*+7),%(5*/$66&/27+
68&+$6 2=64<$5'
$77$&+(':,7+),%(5*/$665(6,1

$/80,1807$3(

ó´0,1,080',67$1&(
($&+6,'(

&$5%21
),%(5

Figure 3-121. Fiberglass Insulation for Carbon Fiber Material

4. Identify a grounding location. The ground must be a bare metal surface on the instrument panel or
grounding structure for the instrument panel. If it is impractical to reach a grounding location with
aluminum tape then:
a) The tape shall meet a 5:1 length to width ratio.
b) The bond strap shall be one inch wide and no longer than five inches.
5. Prepare the aluminum surface at the ground location per Section 3.8.3 or identify a ground stud to
which the braid can be attached. Any new ground stud shall also be prepared for electrical
bonding.
6. Route the tape between the LRU mount and the grounding location for the instrument panel. If
needed to maintain the 7:1 length-to-width ratio, the tape can be overlapped in more than one strip.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-160 Rev. L
7. If two pieces of tape need to be joined end-to-end, they can be joined as illustrated in 
Figure 3-122.

$'+(6,9(6,'(

$33/<$/80,1807$3(
3$7&+29(5-2,17

)2/'$/80,180
$'+(6,9(6,'( 7$3(-2,17
$'+(6,9(6,'(

$33/<$/80,1807$3(
726(&21'$5<6758&785(

6(&21'$5<6758&785(

Figure 3-122. Aluminum Tape Joint

8. Fold the end of the tape over twice for added thickness at the prepared grounding location. Refer to
Figure 3-123. Apply 3” wide tape over the seam as shown.
9. The tape shall not have any tears in the joint or along the length of the tape as tears will degrade
the bonding performance.
10. Electrical bond preparation for all aluminum-to-aluminum interfaces per SAE ARP1870 section
5.1 and 5.5.
11. If a bonding strap will be used to reach the grounding location, secure the end of the tape to the
secondary composite surface as shown in Figure 3-123. Detailed instructions for installing
mounting bolts in composite material can be found in Section 3.2.3.2.4. Note that the procedure
for installing mounting bolts applies only to secondary aircraft structures, not to primary structure
or structural load-carrying members. The tape shall meet 5:1 length to width ratio if a bonding
strap is used. The bonding strap shall be one inch wide and no longer than five inches. Refer to
Figure 3-123.
12. Terminate both ends of the bonding strap with MS20659-130 terminal lugs.
13. Install AN960C10 washer between the terminal lug and the mating metal surface and secure with a
#10 steel bolt. Ensure that the lug and washer are centered and in full contact with the mating
surface with no overhang when secured.
14. Secure the end of the tape in place using a 0.063” piece of aluminum using three bolts and nuts.
Refer to Figure 3-123.
15. Secure the aluminum tape to the LRU or mounting rack as shown in Figure 3-124 (GRS 77),
Figure 3-125 (GDC 74( )), and Figure 3-126 and Figure 3-127 (GAD 43/43e).
16. Verify that the resistance between tape and the local grounding location does not exceed 2.5 mΩ.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-161
$/80,1803/$7(
%2/76:,7+
/2&.1876
$1':$6+(56 *5281'678'
&2002172
,167580(173$1(/

$/80,180 )/$7%5$,'('&$%/(
7$3( $ $ 5(48,5(',)6(&21'$5<
6758&785(,6127%21'('
727+(,167580(173$1(/

6(&21'$5<
6758&785(

%2/7
9,(:$$
127726&$/(
7(50,1$//8*
,)5(48,5('
$/80,1803/$7(
$/80,1807$3(

:$6+(56

6(&21'$5< /2&.187
6758&785(

Figure 3-123. Aluminum Tape Ground Termination

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-162 Rev. L
*56

02817,1*
5$&.

/2&.187:$6+(5
$/80,1803/$7(

$/80,180
7$3(

72,167580(17
3$1(/
/(1*7+72:,'7+5$7,2
0($685(0(17%(*,16$7/$67
32,172)(/(&75,&$/&217$&7
:,7+02817,1*5$&.
*56

02817,1*
5$&.
$,5&5$)76(&21'$5<
6758&785( /2&.187:$6+(5
(*(48,30(176+(/) $/80,1803/$7(

$/80,1807$3(

Figure 3-124. GRS 77 Aluminum Tape Installation

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-163
*'&

02817,1*5$&.

/2&.187:$6+(5
$/80,1803/$7(

$/80,180
7$3(

72
/(1*7+72:,'7+5$7,2 ,167580(17
0($685(0(17%(*,16$7/$67 3$1(/
32,172)(/(&75,&$/&217$&7
:,7+02817,1*5$&.

*'&

02817,1*5$&.

$,5&5$)76(&21'$5< /2&.187:$6+(5
6758&785( $/80,1803/$7(
(*(48,30(176+(/)
$/80,1807$3(

Figure 3-125. GDC 74( ) Aluminum Tape Installation

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-164 Rev. L
*$'

72,167580(17
3$1(/
$/80,180
7$3(

/(1*7+72:,'7+
5$7,20($685(0(17
%(*,16$7/$6732,172)
(/(&75,&$/&217$&7
:,7+02817,1*5$&.

*$'

$,5&5$)76(&21'$5<
6758&785( $/80,1807$3(
(*(48,30(176+(/)

Figure 3-126. GAD 43/43e Aluminum Tape Installation (Horizontal Mount, GAD 43 shown)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-165
*$'H

/(1*7+72:,'7+5$7,2
0($685(0(17%(*,16$7/$67
32,172)(/(&75,&$/&217$&7
:,7+02817,1*5$&.

$/80,1803/$7(

$/80,1807$3(
$/80,1803/$7(
0,1
$,5&5$)76(&21'$5<6758&785(
(*(48,30(176+(/)

0,1
[‘
*$'H
[ ‘ $5
'8$/3/$7(237,21

$,5&5$)76(&21'$5<6758&785( $/80,1803/$7(
(*(48,30(176+(/)
$/80,1807$3(

127(6
$,5&5$)76(&21'$5<6758&785(68&+$6$1(48,30(176+(/)0867+$9(&/($5$1&(217+(
23326,7(6,'()25+$5':$5(1(('('72,167$//7+(*$'H727+($,5&5$)76758&785(

5(&200(1'('7+,&.1(662)$/80,1803/$7(,6$/80,1803/$7(/(1*7+$1':,'7+0867%(
$7/($67/$5*(57+$1*$'H)22735,17 0,1,080[)256,1*/(%21',1*3/$7(
25[)25237,21$/'8$/%21',1*3/$7(6 5(029($//%8556$1'6+$53('*(65$',86
$//6+$53&251(56 0,1,0805(&200(1'('

*$'H81,70867%(,167$//('21$+25,=217$/685)$&(%8725,(17$7,21,6815(675,&7('

'8$/%21',1*3/$7(62),1',&$7('',0(16,2166+2:10$<%(86(',13/$&(2)$6,1*/(
%21',1*3/$7(%<20,77,1*7+(,1',&$7('0$7(5,$/

Figure 3-127. GAD 43/43e Aluminum Tape Installation (Vertical Mount, GAD 43e shown)

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-166 Rev. L
3.8.3 Aluminum Surface Preparation
In order to prepare the aluminum surface for proper bonding, the following general steps should be
followed. For a detailed procedure, reference SAE ARP1870, Sections 5.1 and 5.5.
1. Clean grounding location with solvent.
2. Remove non-conductive films or coatings from the grounding location.
3. Apply a chemical conversion coat such as Alodine 1200 to the bare metal.
4. Once the chemical conversion coat is dry, clean the area.
5. Install bonding aluminum tape or equipment at grounding location.
6. After the bond is complete, if any films or coatings were removed from the surface, reapply a
suitable film or coating to the surrounding area.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 3-167
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 3-168 Rev. L
4 SYSTEM INTERCONNECT
For pin out information for each G600 LRU, refer to Appendix B. For G600 interconnect information refer
to Appendix F.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 4-1
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 4-2 Rev. L
5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION/CHECKOUT

NOTE
Screenshots shown herein are based upon GDU 620 software version 5.00. Actual screen
content may vary depending upon the version of GDU 620 software being used.

5.1 System Configuration Overview

Once the G600 system has been installed, the system must be configured for the particular installation. In
order to access all of the configuration pages an Installer Unlock Card (P/N 010-00769-60) must be
inserted into the GDU 620 at the time the system is powered up. A summary of the steps for system
configuration and calibration follows:
• Gather the airframe-specific information as specified in Section 5.2.
• Perform the installation checks specified in Section 5.3.
• Load software into the G600 LRUs as specified in Section 5.4.
• Configure the G600 system for the particular installation, as specified in Section 5.5. This includes
setting the airframe-specific parameters and enabling interfaces to external systems.
• Enable optional features (this can be done at a later time).
• Perform an alignment and calibration of the GRS 77 AHRS as specified in Section 5.6. An engine
run-up test is also conducted to verify the mounting of the GRS 77.
• Perform a check of the Pitot-static system to verify the installation of the GDC 74( ) air data
computer and standby instruments. The correct settings of the airspeed tape are also verified
during this check. Refer to Section 5.8.2.
• Perform the ground checks to verify the interfaces to external settings, as specified in Section 5.8.
• Verify all placards have been relocated, as specified in Section 5.9.
• Perform the flight checks specified in Section 5.10.
• Update the aircraft documentation as specified in Section 5.11.
5.2 Required Airframe-Specific Information
This section only provides guidance for gathering the required information particular to each installation.
This information will be used for entering data on the Airframe Configuration page. Record the
information below in the configuration and checkout log sheet in Section 5.11.3.
5.2.1 PFD
The distance/speed (DIS.SPD) and altitude/vertical speed (ALT.VS) units can be configured to match a
particular installation. These units MUST be set to those currently used in the airplane.
The vertical speed tape range can be configured for several ranges. It is recommended that the ±2000 fpm
range be used; however, this is left to the installer’s discretion (e.g. a larger range may be desired if the VSI
being removed has a larger range).
The attitude indicator on the PFD has two pointers on the roll scale. When banking, one pointer indicates
the aircraft bank angle and the other pointer remains stationary. The pointer that indicates bank angle can
either point up (Sky Pointer) or down (Ground Pointer). This pointer must be configured to match the
Standby ADI being installed in the aircraft.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-1
5.2.2 MFD
The default distance/speed (DIS.SPD) and altitude/vertical speed (ALT.VS) units can be configured to
match a particular installation. It is recommended that the same units as the PFD be used; however, this is
left to the installer’s discretion. The pilot will be able to change these units on the first AUX page on the
MFD.
5.2.3 GDL 69 Audio Mute Speed
If a GDL 69A is connected to the GDU 620, the GDL 69A audio output will become muted whenever the
airspeed is below the MUTE SPEED value. If this is set to OFF, the GDL 69A will never be muted based
upon airspeed.
5.2.4 Airspeeds

NOTE
GDU 620 software versions prior to v5.00 display airspeed tape settings on the
AIRFRAME CONFIGURATION page. However, GDU 620 software version 5.00 and
later displays airspeed tape information on the AIRSPEED CONFIGURATION page. The
default BASIC setting allows the airspeed tape settings to be configured exactly the same
as in GDU 620 software versions prior to v5.00.

Information and settings available on the AIRSPEED CONFIGURATION page, shown in Figure 5-1, vary
depending on whether the IAS TAPE field on the AIRFRAME CONFIGURATION page is set to BASIC
or ADVANCED. This setting is highlighted in Figure 5-1. BASIC setting values are generally found in the
airplane flight manual (AFM) or pilot’s operating handbook (POH) for each aircraft. Refer to Table 5-1 for
detailed information on obtaining BASIC setting airspeed values. Refer to Section M for detailed
information on obtaining ADVANCED setting airspeed values.

WARNING
The IAS TAPE setting on the AIRFRAME CONFIGURATION page must be set to
ADVANCED in aircraft that have an altitude-variable maximum airspeed limitation. This
information must be taken from the type data (AFM/POH) for the specific airplane being
modified.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-2 Rev. L
A B

A B

Figure 5-1. Airspeed Configuration Page with IAS Tape Set to Basic (A) and Advanced (B)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-3
NOTE
If the AFM or POH lists both indicated airspeed (IAS) and calibrated airspeed (CAS), use
IAS values.

Table 5-1. Airframe Specific Configuration Data – IAS TAPE BASIC Setting
AFM/POH
Item Description Reference Note
Section
Stall speed in landing
Vs0 2-Limitations Bottom of white arc on ASI
configuration
Stall speed in a spe-
Vs1 2-Limitations Bottom of green arc on ASI
cific flight configuration
Top of white arc on ASI
Maximum flap
Vfe 2-Limitations if more than one flap speed is given,
extended speed
use the lowest speed
Top of green arc/bottom of yellow arc on ASI
Normal operating if the aircraft has no yellow arc but has a green
Vno 2-Limitations
speed arc that extends to the red radial, set Vno to the
same value as Vne.
Vne Never exceed speed 2-Limitations Red radial on ASI
3-Emergency Optional
GLIDE Glide speed
Procedures set to 0 Kt (off) if not listed in the AFM/POH
Optional
4-Normal
Vr Reference airspeed typically set to rotation speed
Procedures
set to 0 Kt (off) if not listed in the AFM/POH
Optional
Best angle of climb 4-Normal set to 0 Kt (off) if not listed in the AFM/POH
Vx
speed Procedures (if there are two speeds listed (gear up/gear down),
use the speed listed for gear down)
Optional
Best rate of climb 4-Normal Set to 0 Kt (off) if not listed in the AFM/POH 
Vy
speed Procedures (if there are two speeds listed (gear up/gear down),
use the speed listed for gear up)
Maximum landing gear
Vle 2-Limitations set to 0 Kt (off) for fixed gear aircraft
extended speed
Minimum controllable
airspeed for twin Lower red radial on ASI of light twins
Vmca engine aircraft with 2-Limitations
only one engine opera- set to 0 Kt (off) for single engine aircraft
tional
3-Emergency
Single engine best rate Procedures Blue radial on ASI of light twins
Vyse of climb speed for a OR
twin engine aircraft 4-Normal set to 0 Kt (off) for single engine aircraft
Procedures
Vne Applicable to rotary
N/A Set to OFF.
(Pwr Off) wing aircraft only.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-4 Rev. L
5.2.5 Airport Criteria (GDU™ 620 software version 3.00 or later)
For installations with TAWS and/or SVT enabled, the GDU 620 provides aural and visual terrain alerts.
The alerting algorithm relaxes the terrain alerting criteria at nearby airports. At the time of installation the
GDU 620 must be configured to specify the minimum criteria that an airport must meet to be considered as
a nearby airport for the purpose of TAWS/terrain alerting. For installations with TAWS and/or SVT
enabled, obtain the information listed in Table 5-2.

Table 5-2. Airframe Specific Configuration Data

POH/AFM
Item Description Note
Section
Required runway surface Set to type of runway surface that
Rnwy Surface N/A
type the aircraft will typically use.
Set to the shortest ground roll
distance required for takeoff/landing
Minimum runway length
operations (typically the distance
Min Length for consideration by 5-Performance
given for sea level using the coldest
TAWS/Terrain alerting
temperature given in the
POH/AFM).

5.2.6 Altitude Alerter

The ALTITUDE ALERTER setting controls how the GDU 620 will provide alerts when approaching the
selected altitude. The settings behave as follows:
• OFF: This setting disables all visual and aural altitude alerting functions of the GDU 620. The
ALTITUDE ALERTER should be set to OFF if there is another altitude alerter present in the
aircraft.
• NORMAL: This setting enables the visual and aural altitude alerting functions of the GDU 620.
The aural chime will sound when approaching within 200 ft of the selected altitude.
• HIGH PERF: This setting enables the visual and aural altitude alerting functions of the GDU 620.
The aural chime will sound when approaching within 1000 ft of the selected altitude. This setting
can be used for aircraft with higher climb performance.

NOTE
The choice to use NORMAL or HIGH PERF altitude alerter setting is at the discretion of
the installer. Except for the alerting threshold for the aural chime, the altitude alerter
function is identical for either setting.0.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-5
5.3 Mounting, Wiring and Power Checks
1. Verify that all mounting racks and trays are secured and torqued in accordance with their
specifications. Verify bonding.
2. Verify that all cables are properly secured and shields are connected to their connector shield
blocks. Check the movement of the flight and engine controls to verify that there is no
interference. Ensure wiring is installed in accordance with AC 43.13-1B, Chapter 11.
3. Prior to installing any LRUs, the wiring harness should be checked for proper connections to the
aircraft systems and other avionics systems. Point to point continuity should be checked to expose
any faults such as shorting to ground. Any faults or discrepancies found should be corrected before
proceeding. If any TVSs are installed as part of the modification, proper TVS installation should
be verified prior to application of power. Refer to Section 8.3.1 for information on checking each
TVS.
4. After accomplishing a continuity check, perform power and ground checks to verify proper power
distribution to the LRUs. Any faults or discrepancies should be corrected at this time. Remove
power to the aircraft upon completion of harness checkout.
5. Upon completion of continuity and power checks, the LRUs can be installed. Each LRU must be
installed into its respective rack and secured. The units and accessories must be connected to the
wiring harness. Any additional connections, such as Pitot-static plumbing, must also be
accomplished at this time.
5.4 Software Loading

NOTE
Screenshots in this section are provided for reference only. For actual LRU software
versions, refer to the STC Equipment List.

NOTE
Before attempting to load software to external units, ensure that the external system is
configured as Present on the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION page (refer to Section 5.5.1).

The G600 LRUs come pre-loaded with software. However, to ensure that the latest software is loaded that
software from it is recommended to load software from a current G600 Software Loader Card 
(P/N 010-00771-( )) be loaded into each LRU to ensure that the latest software is loaded. For a dual G600
installation the software loading procedures below must be carried out on each GDU 620.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-6 Rev. L
5.4.1 GDU™ 620 Software Loading
1. Apply power to the aircraft and the G600 system.
2. Pull the PFD circuit breaker.
3. Insert the correct G600 Loader Card into the top card slot and Installer Unlock Card 
(P/N 010-00769-60) into the bottom slot.
4. While holding the ENT key, restore power by closing the PFD circuit breaker.
5. When the words appear in the upper center of the PFD/MFD, release
the ENT key.
6. Press the ENT key to acknowledge the following prompt:

7. The following item is displayed:

8. New software is loaded to the GDU 620. When complete, the following screen is displayed:

NOTE
The screen shown is for reference only. The actual number of updated LRU files may vary.

9. Press any soft key to acknowledge the prompt, and the GDU 620 starts in Configuration mode.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-7
5.4.2 LRU Software Loading Procedure

NOTE
Before attempting to load software to external units, ensure that the external system is
configured as Present on the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION page (refer to Section 5.5.1).

NOTE
Screenshots in this section are provided for reference only. LRU software loaded on the
GDU 620 at delivery may have higher version numbers than the current certified versions.
Refer to the STC Equipment List P/N 005-00313-AY for current certified LRU software
versions.

1. Go to the SOFTWARE UPLOAD page in the SYS

page group, as shown in Figure 5-2.
2. Select the appropriate software file in the FILE
LIST window, highlighted in green in
Figure 5-2. The current LRU software version is
displayed in the LRU window, highlighted in blue
in Figure 5-2.
3. Press the LOAD soft key.
4. Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT key to acknowledge
the FILE UPLOAD prompt
5. After the files finish loading, press the ENT key to
acknowledge the UPLOAD COMPLETED
following prompt.
6. Check the SUMMARY window to ensure the load
is ‘COMPLETE’.
7. Repeat steps 1-6 for each required and optional
LRU.
5.4.3 (Moved to 5.4.2)
5.4.4 (Moved to 5.4.2)
5.4.5 (Moved to 5.4.2)
Figure 5-2. Software Upload Page
5.4.6 Software Load Confirmation Procedure
1. Activate the cursor on the System Status page on the PFD, as shown in Figure 5-3.
2. Highlight the items listed in Table 5-3 in the LRU window, and verify that the software part
number and version matches the information in found in the STC Equipment List 
005-00313-AY.
3. Deactivate the cursor.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-8 Rev. L
Figure 5-3. Software Confirmation Page

Table 5-3. LRU Software Part Numbers and Versions

LRU SW OK LRU SW OK LRU SW OK

GDC ______ GAD 43e (optional) ______ GWX 68 (optional) ______
GDC FPGA ______ GDU [1] ______ GRS ______
GDL 69 (optional) ______ GMU ______ GRS FPGA ______
GAD 43 (optional) ______ GMU FPGA ______ GWX FPGA (optional) ______
[1] For a dual G600 installation, GDU 1 and GDU 2 are both shown. The software P/N for
each GDU 620 must be verified.

NOTE
For a dual G600 installation, remove the G600 loader card from the top slot of the first
GDU 620 and repeat Section 5.4.1 and Section 5.4.2 using the second GDU 620. The
software for the GDL 69/69A, GAD 43/43e, and GWX 68 does not need to be reloaded.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-9
5.5 System Setup
The GDU 620 Configuration mode allows the G600 system to be configured for a particular installation.
Refer to Section 5 of the GDU 620 Installation Manual (P/N 190-00601-04) for details on using the
Configuration mode. Record all of the settings in the checkout log sheet provided in Section 5.11.3. For a
dual G600 installation, each GDU 620 must be set up as described herein.
Any required configuration settings for approved interfacing systems can be found in Appendix E. Any
required configuration settings for the G600 are found in this section.
If not already in Configuration mode with the Installer Unlock Card, ensure that the Installer Unlock Card
P/N 010-00769-60 is installed in the GDU 620 and cycle power to the GDU 620 while holding the ENT
key.

NOTE
After configuring all necessary items, ensure the configuration module is updated. Refer
to Section 5.5.13.

5.5.1 System Configuration

NOTE
All optional features should be enabled prior to proceeding with the system configuration.
Refer to Section 5.5.5 for details about enabling optional features.

Go to the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION page in the

SYS page group, as shown in Figure 5-4. Set the CDU
System ID to USE DISCRETE (default setting).
For each external data source that is connected to the
GDU 620, set the corresponding interfacing system
PRESENT and select the type as specified in the
tables below. For external systems that use an
ARINC 429 or ARINC 453/708 interface, refer to
Section 5.5.1.1 for instructions on how to configure
an input/output port.

Figure 5-4. System Configuration Page

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-10 Rev. L
Table 5-4. Cross-Side GDU Configuration

Manufacturer GDU Model TYPE Setting Notes

Garmin GDU 620 GDU 620

Table 5-5. AHRS Configuration

Manufacturer AHRS Model TYPE Setting Notes

Garmin GRS 77 GRS 77 [1]
[1] ARINC 429 input port 1 setting must be “GRS77 High Speed”.

Table 5-6. ADC Configuration

Manufacturer ADC Model TYPE Setting Notes

Garmin GDC 74 GDC 74 [1]
[1] ARINC 429 input port 2 setting must be GDC74 Low Speed”.

Table 5-7. GPS 1/2 Configuration

Manufacturer GPS Model TYPE Setting Notes

GPS 400W GPS 400W [1]
GNC 420W GNC 420W [1]
GNS 430W GNS 430W [1]
GNS 480 GNS 480 [1]
GNC 500W GNC 500W [1]
Garmin GNS 530W GNS 530W [1]
GTN 625 GPS 400W [1]
GTN 635 GNC 420W [1]
GTN 650 GNS 430W [1]
GTN 725 GNC 500W [1]
GTN 750 GNS 530W [1]
[1] ARINC 429 input port setting must be “GPS1” or “GPS1 Sextant” for GPS 1, or “GPS2” or
“GPS2 Sextant” for GPS 2. The input format and speed must be set to match the
navigator output port speed.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-11
Table 5-8. NAV 1/2 Configuration

Manufacturer NAV Radio Model TYPE Setting Notes

GNC 255( ) GNS 430W [2]
GNS 430W GNS 430W [2]
GNS 480 GNS 480 [2]
Garmin GNS 530W GNS 530W [2]
GTN 650 GNS 430W [2]
GTN 750 GNS 530W [2]
SL30 SL30 [1]
Various Various analog radios GAD 43e [3] [4]
N/A N/A CROSSFILL [5]
[1] SL30 can only be selected for NAV1 or NAV 2, not for both.
[2] ARINC 429 input port must be set to “NAV 1 Low Speed” for NAV receiver 1 or “NAV 2
Low Speed” for NAV receiver 2.
[3] Refer to Section E.19 for information regarding which analog NAV radios are supported
via the GAD 43e. Refer to Section 5.5.11.2 for specific information on configuring the
GAD 43e.
[4] No ARINC 429 input must be configured specifically for NAV1 or NAV2 - all of the
information sent over the ARINC 429 interface from the GAD 43e.
[5] This setting is only available if two GDU 620s are installed. The GDU 620 that is configured
for CROSSFILL will receive navigation information for that NAV radio from the cross-side
GDU 620.

Table 5-9. ADF Configuration

Manufacturer ADF Model TYPE Setting Notes

Collins ADF-60A/B ADF-60B
KR 87 KR 87 [1]
Honeywell
KDF 806 KDF 806 / KFS 586 [1]
Various [4] Various synchro ADFs GAD 43e [2]
N/A N/A GAD 43e CROSSFILL [3]
[1] Set “+Superflag” to PRESENT if the Superflag output from the ADF receiver is connected
to the GDU 620.
[2] Refer to Section E.21 for information regarding which synchro ADF receivers are
supported via the GAD 43e. No additional GAD 43e configuration is required.
[3] This setting is only available if two GDU 620s are installed. The GDU 620 that is
configured for GAD 43e CROSSFILL will receive synchro ADF information from the cross-
side GDU 620.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-12 Rev. L
Table 5-10. Traffic Configuration

Manufacturer Traffic System Model TYPE Setting Notes

Skywatch 
Avidyne (Ryan) TAS 600/610/620 (9900BX) [1] [3] [4]
Avidyne/Ryan TAS
GTX 330/330D/330ES GTX 330 [2] [4]
GTS 800 GTS 800 [4]
Garmin
GTS 820 GTS 820 [4]
GTS 850 GTS 850 [4]
KTA 870 / KMH 880 KTA 870 [2] [4]
Honeywell
KTA 970 / KMH 980 KTA 970 [2] [4]
SKY 497 SkyWatch [2] [4]
L3 Comm
SKY 899 SkyWatch HP [2] [4]
N/A N/A CROSSFILL [5]
[1] If the SkyWatch setting is used, the parameter “+External Control” must be set to
PRESENT.
[2] If the GDU 620 DOES control the traffic system, “+External Control” must be set to NOT
PRESENT If the GDU 620 DOES NOT control the traffic system, “+External Control” must
be set to PRESENT.
[3] The Avidyne/Ryan TAS setting is available in GDU software version 4.00 or later.
[4] ARINC 429 input port must be set to “TRAFFIC High Speed”.
[5] This setting is only available if two GDU 620s are installed. The GDU 620 that is
configured for GAD 43e CROSSFILL will receive synchro traffic information from the
cross-side GDU 620. No ARINC 429 input must be configured for TRAFFIC if this TYPE
setting is used.

Table 5-11. Data Link Configuration

Manufacturer Data Link Model TYPE Setting Notes

GDL 69 GDL 69
Garmin
GDL 69A GDL 69A [1]
[1] If a GDL 69A is installed, it is permissible to set the TYPE to GDL 69. In this case, the XM
weather from the GDL 69A will be displayed on the GDU 620, but no control over the
audio functions will be available from the GDU 620.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-13
Table 5-12. Weather Radar Configuration

Manufacturer WXR R/T Model TYPE Setting Notes

GWX 68 GWX 68
Garmin
GWX 70 GWX 68
ART 2000 ART-2000 [1] [2]
ART 2100 ART-2000 [1] [2]
Honeywell
RS 181A RS-181A [1] [2]
RS 811A RS-811A [1] [2]
[1] Refer to Section E.10 for detailed information on configuring the weather radar system
and what weather radar functions are supported by the GDU 620.
[2] ARINC 429 output port must be set to “WX RADAR Low Speed” and ARINC 708 input
must be set to “WX RADAR”.

Table 5-13. Adapter Configuration

Manufacturer Adapter Model TYPE Setting Notes

GAD 43 GAD 43
Garmin GAD 43e or [1]
GAD 43e
GAD 43e CROSSFILL [2]
[1] This setting is available on GDU 620 #1 only.
[2] This setting is available on GDU 620 #2 only. All necessary communication to the
GAD 43e is handled through GDU 620 #1 using crossfill.

Table 5-14. Iridium Configuration

Manufacturer Receiver Model TYPE Setting Notes

Garmin GSR 56 GSR 56

Table 5-15. Radar Altimeter Configuration

Manufacturer Radar Altimeter Model TYPE Setting Notes

Collins RAC-870 ARINC 429 [1]
Free Flight RA-4500 ARINC 429 NO TEST [1]
Honeywell KRA 405B ARINC 429 [1]
Various analog radar
Various GAD 43e [2]
altimeters
N/A N/A GAD 43e CROSSFILL [3]
[1] ARINC 429 input port must be set to “RADAR ALTIMETER Low Speed”
[2] Refer to Section E.20 for information regarding which analog radar altimeters are
supported via the GAD 43e. Refer to Section 5.5.11.2 for specific information on
configuring the GAD 43e.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-14 Rev. L
[3] This setting is only available if two GDU 620s are installed. The GDU 620 that is
configured for GAD 43e CROSSFILL will receive radio altitude information from the cross-
side GDU 620.

NOTE
Prior to beginning any installation that requires a fast/slow display, contact Garmin
regarding the availability of the ARINC 429 Fast/Slow enablement card.

Table 5-16. Fast/Slow Configuration

Stall Warning
Manufacturer TYPE Setting Notes
Computer Model
EMCA SPWG92 ARINC 429 [1] [2]

[1] No ARINC 429 input is configured by default.

[2] ARINC 429 input port must be set to “Fast/Slow 1 Low Speed”. This is only applicable to
the 
PC-12.
5.5.1.1 ARINC Port Configuration
After all of the interfacing systems are configured on
the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION page (refer to
Section 5.5.1), the ARINC 429 inputs and outputs
must be set to match the installation. Most inputs
and outputs are set up by default when the
interfacing systems are configured on the SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION page. However, certain
interfacing systems do not have a default port
assigned. Consequently, the correct port format must
be set manually for that system using the ARINC
PORT CONFIG page (see Figure 5-5). Also, if it is
desired to change port assignments or bus speeds it
can be done using this page.
To set the ARINC port formats and speeds:
1. Go to the ARINC PORT CONFIG page in
the SYS page group.
2. Activate the cursor.
3. Set the bus speed and input format for each
input/out.
A list of format settings that are available on each Figure 5-5. ARINC PORT CONFIG Page
port can be found in Table 5-17, Table 5-18, and 
Table 5-19.

NOTE
Each input/output format may only be configured on one port at a time.

NOTE
A green box in the DATA column indicates data is being received on that input.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-15
Table 5-17. ARINC 429 Input Format Availability

Input Setting Port Availability Speed Pins

GRS77#1 ARINC 429 In # 1 Low/High P6202-4/21
GDC74#1 ARINC 429 In # 2 Low/High P6203-5/22
GPS1
ARINC 429 In # 3 Low/High P6202-6/23
GPS1 Sextant
NAV1
GPS2
GPS2 Sextant
NAV2
TRAFFIC
P6202-7/24, 8/25, 9/26
RADAR ALTIMETER ARINC 429 In # 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 Low/High
P6203-4/26, 5/27
GAD 43e [1]
KFC 225
KFC 275/325
Fast/Slow 1
Flight Director
[1] GAD 43e input format is only required if GAD 43e is being used to interface the GDU 620
to an analog radar altimeter, a synchro ADF receiver or an analog NAV receiver. It is not
required to set an ARINC 429 input to this format if the GAD 43e is only used for altitude
preselect, DME or marker beacon functions.

Table 5-18. ARINC 429 Output Format Availability

Input Setting Port Availability Speed Pins

GPS NAVIGATOR ARINC 429 Out #1 Low/High P6202-3/20
AUTOPILOT ARINC 429 Out #2 Low/High P6203-1/23
DFCS 1 ARINC 429 Out #2 High P6203-1/23
DFCS 2 ARINC 429 Out #2 Low/High P6203-1/23
DFCS 4 ARINC 429 Out #2 High P6203-1/23
DFCS 5 ARINC 429 Out #2 Low/High P6203-1/23
GENERAL PURPOSE 1 ARINC 429 Out #3 or #4 Low/High P6203-2/24 or 3/25
WX RADAR ARINC 429 Out #3 or #4 Low/High P6203-2/24 or 3/25
[1] Only the listed bus speeds are available for the corresponding output settings.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-16 Rev. L
Table 5-19. ARINC 708 Input Format Availability

Output setting Port Availability Speed Pins

WX RADAR ARINC 708 In #1 or #2 N/A P6203-14/36 or 16/38

5.5.2 Airframe Configuration

Go to the AIRFRAME CONFIGURATION page in the SYS page group. Set the parameters to the values
determined in Section 5.2.
5.5.2.1 Airspeed Configuration
Go to the AIRSPEED CONFIGURATION page in the SYS page group. Set the parameters to the values
determined in Section 5.2 if using the BASIC IAS TAPE configuration, or set the values in accordance
with Appendix M if using the ADVANCED IAS TAPE configuration.
5.5.3 Lighting Configuration
The following guidance is recommended to help the installer determine a suitable setup. A test flight is
recommended upon completion of the setup.

NOTE
A description of available adjustments can be found in Section 5 of the GDU 620
Installation Manual (P/N 190-00601-04).

NOTE
To accurately configure the lighting, the ability to adjust ambient light conditions is
required. The installer should be prepared to simulate complete darkness in the cockpit.
Simply covering the photocells may not allow the installer’s eye to properly judge whether
the display brightness is too bright or too dim for night use.

Go to the LIGHTING CONFIGURATION page in the SYS page group and proceed according to the
Photocell Configuration or Dimmer Bus Configuration as appropriate for the installation.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-17
Photocell Configuration
1. Set the RESPONSE TIME to a low level (such
as 2) to allow the display to adjust more
quickly to light conditions.
2. It is recommended to start configuration with a
SLOPE of 50%.
3. Minimize photocell input levels by simulating
night conditions in the cockpit. Any other
instrument panel or cockpit lighting should be
turned on for this adjustment. Seek uniform
consistency between display lighting,
bezel/key lighting, and any other illuminated
objects.
a) If a display/keypad is too bright, lower
the minimum level and/or adjust the
lighting slope to achieve the desired
brightness.
b) If the display is not bright enough, raise the minimum level to the desired brightness.
4. Simulate direct maximum sunlight in the cockpit (best if done outside).
5. Verify that the display produces maximum brightness on the backlight output level.
6. Simulate average sunlight conditions in the cockpit (between 5000-7500 input level).
a) If the display is too bright or too dim, vary the SLOPE and/or OFFSET to achieve desired
brightness at mid-range lighting input levels.
b) Ensure that the lighting SLOPE, OFFSET and MINIMUM LEVEL still maintain the low-
light configuration achieved in Step 3. Repeat Step 3 if necessary to re-adjust night lighting
settings.
7. Adjust the RESPONSE TIME to smooth changes to brightness as required.
8. Adjust the KEY BACKLIGHT CUTOFF PERCENTAGE so that the key backlighting is switched
off in bright light.
Dimmer Bus Configuration
1. Select the appropriate source voltage for the
dimmer bus. Set the PHOTO TRANSITION %
to 0 for initial dimmer knob calibration.
2. Set the RESPONSE TIME to a low level (such
as 2) to allow the display to adjust more
quickly to dimmer bus input changes.
3. Simulate night conditions in the cockpit. Turn
the dimmer bus knob to its minimum setting
and observe the SOURCE INPUT LEVEL for
corresponding change to the input level. Seek
uniform consistency between display lighting,
bezel key lighting, and any other cockpit
illuminated information.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-18 Rev. L
a) If a display/keypad is too bright, lower the minimum level and/or adjust the lighting slope to
achieve the desired brightness.
b) If the display is too dim, increase the minimum level to achieve desired levels.
c) Slowly adjust the dimmer bus knob to its maximum setting. Adjust the SLOPE and OFFSET
to obtain uniform consistency between display lighting, bezel key lighting, and any other
cockpit illuminated information over the full range of the dimmer bus.
d) Set the PHOTO TRANSITION % such that the photocell is used when the dimmer bus is
switched off (OVERRIDE will appear in the PHOTO TRANSITION % setting in the KEY
column).
e) With the dimmer bus OFF, adjust the PHOTO OFFSET to a value so that the display and
bezel keys remain readable.
4. With the dimmer bus OFF, simulate direct sunlight conditions in the cockpit (best if done outside).
If the brightness is below maximum level, adjust the PHOTO SLOPE setting to achieve maximum
brightness (~10,000).
5. Adjust the RESPONSE TIME to smooth changes to brightness as required.

NOTE
The display and key lighting can independently be set to track the photocell or dimmer
bus.

5.5.4 Manifest Configuration

Go to the MANIFEST CONFIGURATION page in the SYS page group. The manifest will be empty on
first use.
1. Wait for the GRS 77, GMU 44, GDC 74( ), GAD 43/GAD43e (if installed) to power up.
2. Press the MANIFEST soft key to automatically populate the manifest.
3. Ensure that the manifest contains the correct software part numbers and version numbers. Refer to
the STC Equipment List 005-00313-AY for a list of approved version numbers.

CAUTION
If using the MANIFEST soft key to automatically enter the manifest information, ensure
that each LRU has the correct software loaded prior to pressing the MANIFEST soft key.
Also ensure that the LRUs identified above are powered up prior to pressing the
MANIFEST soft key. Failure to do so will result in an incomplete list of software part
numbers and version numbers being stored in the manifest. If an incomplete list of
software part numbers or version numbers is stored in the manifest, the MANIFEST soft
key can be pressed again to reflect the current information.

NOTE
The GDU 620 will only allow certain LRU software versions to be entered into the
manifest. If the software for an LRU cannot be entered into the manifest, verify that the
correct software P/N and version number are being entered.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-19
5.5.4.1 Manifest Description
The GDU 620 maintains a list of software part numbers and version numbers (the “manifest”) for the G600
system. Each time the G600 system is powered up, the LRUs report their software information to the
GDU 620. If the information reported by the LRU does not match the information stored in the manifest,
the GDU 620 will not use the data provided by that LRU and will provide a MANIFEST alert.
5.5.5 Optional G600 Feature Activation
Ensure that any optional features are enabled. All optional features are activated using the FEATURE
CONFIGURATION page of the GDU 620.

CAUTION
The Airframe type must be set to Fixed Wing to be eligible for approval under this STC.

CAUTION
Prior to enabling any optional features it is recommended that at least one configuration
module update be successfully completed (refer to Section 5.5.16) to verify correct
functionality of the configuration module interface. Any optional features that are enabled
without a fully functional configuration module will be disabled when the configuration
module interface is corrected. The enablement card that was used originally will not work
to re-enable the feature in this case.

NOTE
In most cases, in order to enable/disable features, an Installer Unlock Card
(P/N 010-00769-60) is required. However, it is possible to view the status of all features
without using an Installer Unlock Card.

NOTE
The feature unlock card should be provided to the customer after G600 installation.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-20 Rev. L
5.5.5.1 ChartView™

NOTE
The ChartView Enablement Card can only be used on one GDU 620 display (for a dual
G600 installation, a separate ChartView Enablement Card must be used on each
GDU 620). A new ChartView Enablement Card must be used for each GDU 620 that has
the ChartView feature activated.

The GDU 620 can display Jeppesen charts using the optional ChartView feature, which must be activated.
This section describes how to activate the ChartView feature in the GDU 620.
1. Turn the GDU 620 off.
2. Ensure an Installer Unlock Card is inserted in the bottom slot.
3. Insert a ChartView Enablement Card P/N 010-00769-50 (heavy aircraft) or P/N 010-00769-53
(light aircraft) in the top slot.
4. Enter Configuration mode on the GDU 620 by applying power to GDU 620 while holding the
ENT key.
5. Go to the FEATURE CONFIGURATION page in the SYS page group. Activate the cursor and
change the set value for CHARTS to ChartView. Press ENT to confirm your selection.
6. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt and activate ChartView.
7. When the ChartView feature is activated, “ChartView” will appear in the ACTIVE column.

NOTE
Navigation or chart data must not be programmed on the ChartView Enablement Card.

5.5.5.2 Altitude Preselect

When the optional Altitude Preselect feature is enabled, the GDU 620 can provide selected altitude
information to certain autopilots, allowing the autopilot to capture the selected altitude. This section
describes how to activate the Altitude Preselect feature in the GDU 620.
1. Turn the GDU 620 off. Insert an Altitude Preselect Enablement Card P/N 010-00769-52 in the top
slot.
2. Ensure an Installer Unlock Card is inserted in the bottom slot.
3. Enter Configuration mode on the GDU 620 by applying power to GDU 620 while holding the
ENT key.
4. Go to the FEATURE CONFIGURATION page in the SYS page group. Activate the cursor and
change the set value for Altitude Preselect to Enabled. Press ENT to confirm your selection.
5. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt and activate the Altitude Preselect feature.
6. When the Altitude Preselect feature is activated, “Enabled” will appear in the ACTIVE column.
7. Refer to Section 5.5.9.1 for instructions on how to configure the Altitude Preselect feature.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-21
5.5.5.3 Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT™)
The PFD of the GDU 620 can display synthetic terrain data using the optional SVT feature. This section
describes how to enable and disable the Synthetic Vision feature in the GDU 620.

NOTE
Synthetic Vision is enabled by default.

1. Enter Configuration mode on the GDU 620 by applying power to GDU 620 while holding the
ENT key.
2. Go to the FEATURE CONFIGURATION page in the SYS page group. Activate the cursor and
change the set value for Synthetic Vision to Enabled or Disabled, as desired. Press ENT to
confirm your selection.
3. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt and activate the Synthetic Vision feature.
4. When the Synthetic Vision feature is activated, “Enabled” will appear in the ACTIVE column.
5.5.5.4 Weather Radar
When the optional Weather Radar feature is enabled, the MFD can be utilized to display weather radar data
from an external weather radar transceiver. This section describes how to activate the Weather Radar
feature in the GDU 620.
1. Turn the GDU 620 off. In the top slot, insert a WXR Enablement Card P/N 010-00769-57 if a
GWX 68 or GWX 70 weather radar is being used, or an ARINC 708 WXR Enablement Card P/N
010-00769-63 if an ARINC 708 weather radar is being used.
2. Ensure an Installer Unlock Card is inserted in the bottom slot.
3. Enter configuration mode on the GDU 620 by applying power to GDU 620 while holding the ENT
key.
4. Go to the FEATURE CONFIGURATION page in the SYS page group. Activate the cursor and
change the set value for Weather Radar to GWX or ARINC 708 depending upon the type of
weather radar being enabled. Press ENT to confirm your selection.
5. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt and activate the Weather Radar feature.
6. When the Weather Radar feature is activated, “GWX” or “ARINC 708” will appear in the
ACTIVE column.
7. Go to the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION page, set the Weather Radar to “Present” and select the
appropriate radar type.

NOTE
GWX weather radar information utilization is enabled by default. Whether using a
GWX 68/70 or not using weather radar at all, this setting should always be set to GWX,
and the Interfacing Systems window on the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION page should be
used to activate or deactivate the weather radar interface as desired.

When the optional ARINC 708 Weather Radar feature is enabled, the MFD can be utilized to display
weather radar data from an external ARINC 708 weather radar transceiver. This section describes how to
activate the ARINC 708 Weather Radar feature in the GDU 620.
1. Turn the GDU 620 off. Insert an ARINC 708 WXR Enablement Card P/N 010-00769-63 in the top
slot.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-22 Rev. L
2. Ensure an Installer Unlock Card is inserted in the bottom slot.
3. Enter Configuration mode on the GDU 620 by applying power to GDU 620 while holding the
ENT key.
4. Go to the FEATURE CONFIGURATION page in the SYS page group. Activate the cursor and
change the set value for Weather Radar to ARINC 708. Press ENT to confirm your selection.
5. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt and activate the ARINC 708 Weather Radar feature.
6. When the ARINC 708Weather Radar feature is activated, “ARINC 708” will appear in the
ACTIVE column.
7. Go to the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION page, set the Weather Radar to “Present” and select the
appropriate radar type.
5.5.5.5 GAD 43/43e Adapter

NOTE
GAD 43/43e interface is enabled by default. This setting should always remain enabled,
and the Interfacing Systems window on the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION page should be
used to activate or deactivate the interface as desired.

5.5.5.6 TAWS
When the optional TAWS feature is enabled, the GDU 620 will provide Class B TAWS functionality. This
section describes how to activate the TAWS feature in the GDU 620.

NOTE
If enabling TAWS on the G600, the audio output from the GDU 620 must be connected to
an unswitched and unmuted input on the audio panel. Refer to Figure F-15.

NOTE
A single TAWS enablement card for dual GDU 620 installations (P/N 010-00769-56) will
enable TAWS-B functionality on both GDU 620s in a dual G600 installation.

1. Turn the GDU 620 off.

2. Ensure an Installer Unlock Card is inserted in the bottom slot.
3. In the top slot, insert a TAWS Enablement Card P/N 010-00769-51 (single GDU 620 installations)
or 010-00769-56 (dual GDU 620 installations).
4. Enter Configuration mode on the GDU 620 by applying power to GDU 620 while holding the
ENT key.
5. Go to the FEATURE CONFIGURATION page in the SYS page group. Activate the cursor and
change the set value TAWS to Enabled. Press ENT to confirm your selection.
6. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt and activate the TAWS feature.
7. When the TAWS feature is activated, “Enabled” will appear in the ACTIVE column.
8. For Dual G600 installations, repeat steps 1-6 for GDU 620 #2.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-23
5.5.5.7 External Video
When the optional External Video feature is enabled, the MFD can be used to display NTSC or PAL video
data from an external video source. This section describes how to activate the External Video feature in the
GDU 620.
1. Turn the GDU 620 off. Insert an Video Enablement Card P/N 010-00769-61 in the top slot.
2. Ensure an Installer Unlock Card is inserted in the bottom slot.
3. Enter Configuration mode on the GDU 620 by applying power to GDU 620 while holding the
ENT key.
4. Go to the FEATURE CONFIGURATION page in the SYS page group. Activate the cursor and
change the set value for External Video to ‘Enabled’. Press ENT to confirm your selection.
5. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt and activate the External Video feature.
6. When the External Video feature is activated, ‘Enabled’ will appear in the ACTIVE column.
5.5.5.8 Radar Altimeter (ARINC 429)
When the optional ARINC 429 Radar Altimeter feature is enabled, the PFD will display radar altitude data
from an external ARINC 429 radar altimeter. This section describes how to activate the ARINC 429 Radar
Altimeter feature in the GDU 620.
1. Turn the GDU 620 off. I the top slot, insert an ARINC 429 Radar Altimeter Enablement Card P/N
010-00769-64 (P/N 010-00769-65 for dual G600 installations).
2. Ensure an Installer Unlock Card is inserted in the bottom slot.
3. Enter Configuration mode on the GDU 620 by applying power to GDU 620 while holding the
ENT key.
4. Go to the FEATURE CONFIGURATION page in the SYS page group. Activate the cursor and
change the set value for Rad Alt (A429) to Enabled. Press ENT to confirm your selection.
5. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt and activate the ARINC 429 Radar Altimeter feature.
6. When the ARINC 429 Weather Radar feature is activated, “Enabled” will appear in the ACTIVE
column.
7. Go to the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION page, set the Radar Altimeter to “Present” and select the
appropriate radar altimeter type.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-24 Rev. L
5.5.5.9 DFCS 4 (ARINC 429 Output)
When the optional DFCS 4 ARINC 429 feature is enabled, the DFCS 4 output on ARINC 429 OUT 2 may
be used. This section describes how to activate the DFCS 4 ARINC 429 feature in the GDU 620.
1. Turn the GDU 620 off. Insert a DFCS 4 A429 (Dual) Enablement Card P/N 010-00769-62 in the
top slot.
2. Ensure an Installer Unlock Card is inserted in the bottom slot.
3. Enter Configuration mode on the GDU 620 by applying power to GDU 620 while holding the
ENT key.
4. Go to the FEATURE CONFIGURATION page in the SYS page group. Activate the cursor and
change the set value for DFCS 4 (A429) to Enabled. Press ENT to confirm your selection.
5. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt and activate the DFCS 4 (A429) feature.
6. Go to the AUTOPILOT CONFIGURATION page in the FCS page group. Activate the cursor,
highlight Autopilot and press ENT, to set Autopilot as “Present.”
7. Go to the ARINC PORT CONFIG page in the SYS page group. Activate the cursor and change the
“OUTPUT” for ARINC 429 OUT 2 to DFCS 4. Press ENT to confirm your selection.
5.5.5.10 Fast/Slow (ARINC 429)

NOTE
Prior to beginning any installation that requires a fast/slow display, contact Garmin
regarding the availability of the ARINC 429 Fast/Slow feature enablement card.

When the optional ARINC 429 Fast/Slow feature is enabled, the PFD will display a fast/slow indication
using data from an external ARINC 429 stall warning computer or other suitable device. This section
describes how to activate the ARINC 429 Fast/Slow feature in the GDU 620.
1. Turn the GDU 620 off. In the top slot, insert an ARINC 429 Fast/Slow Enablement Card P/N 010-
00769-67 (single G600 installations) or 
010-00769-68 (dual G600 installations).
2. Ensure an Installer Unlock Card is inserted in the bottom slot.
3. Enter Configuration mode on the GDU 620 by applying power to the GDU 620 while holding the
ENT key.
4. Go to the FEATURE CONFIGURATION page in the SYS page group. Activate the cursor and
change the set value for Fast/Slow (A429) to Enabled. Press ENT to confirm your selection.
5. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt and activate the ARINC 429 Fast/Slow feature.
6. When the ARINC 429 Fast/Slow feature is activated, “Enabled” will appear in the ACTIVE
column.
7. Go to the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION page, set the Fast/Slow to “Present” and select the
appropriate Fast/Slow input type.
8. For Dual G600 installations, repeat steps 1-6 for GDU 620 #2.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-25
5.5.5.11 Static Source Error Correction
When the Static Source Error Correction (SSEC) is enabled to support RVSM eligibility, the GDC 74B
will use the SSEC factors to reduce altimetry errors. This section describes how to enable the SSEC.

NOTE
Additional requirements apply for RVSM eligibility.

1. Turn the GDU 620 off.

2. Insert the SSEC Enablement Card in the top slot. Refer to the descriptions in Table 2-2 to select the
SSEC Enablement Card part number that correspond to the aircraft installation.
3. Ensure an Installer Unlock Card is inserted in the bottom slot.
4. Enter Configuration mode on the GDU 620 by applying power to the GDU 620 while holding the
ENT key.
5. Go to the FEATURE CONFIGURATION page in the SYS page group. Activate the cursor and
change the set value for RVSM to the aircraft type (e.g. TBM700/850).
6. Press ENT to confirm your selection.
7. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt and activate the RVSM feature.
8. When the RVSM feature is activated, the aircraft type (e.g. TBM700/850) will appear in the
ACTIVE column.
9. Go to the GDC CONFIGURATION page. Activate the cursor and change the Aircraft to the
aircraft type (e.g. TBM700/850).
10. Press ENT to confirm your selection.
11. The G600 software manifest will require updating after the feature enablement and configuration.
Update the manifest in accordance with section 5.5.4 of the IM.
Once feature enablement and configuration is complete, the installation configuration may be inspected by
starting the GDU 620 in configuration mode. Neither an installer unlock card nor feature enablement card
is required to inspect the configuration or to operate the system in normal mode.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-26 Rev. L
5.5.6 Audio Alert Configuration
The alert volume level has an initial default of 0 dB (maximum volume value). The volume of the
GDU 620 audio output must be set so as to ensure that aural messages are audible under all anticipated
noise environmental conditions.
1. Go to the AUDIO ALERT CONFIGURATION
page in the SYS page group.
2. Activate the cursor and select the Audio
Message type and then select the PLAY field.
Press ENT to play the message.
3. Using the VOLUME ADJUST field, adjust the
volume so the alert message is audible under all
anticipated noise environmental conditions.
◦ Evaluate the audio messages for acceptable volume and intelligibility during both low and
high cockpit noise levels.
◦ Adjust the audio volume by moving the cursor to the VOLUME ADJUST field and rotating
the small right knob. Turn the knob clockwise to increase the volume and counterclockwise
to decrease the volume.
5.5.6A Terrain/Garmin SVT™ Setup
5.5.6.0A Terrain Proximity Setup (with both Garmin SVT™ and TAWS disabled)
For installations with both SVT and TAWS disabled, configure Terrain Alerting as follows:
1. Go to the TERRAIN PROXIMITY SETUP
page in the SYS page group.
2. Activate the cursor and set EXT TAWS to
one of the following:
a) NOT INSTALLED if no external
TAWS system is present in the aircraft
b) INSTALLED (GARMIN) if a Garmin
external TAWS system is present in the
aircraft.
c) INSTALLED (OTHER) if a non-Garmin external TAWS system is present in the aircraft
3. Deactivate the cursor.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-27
5.5.6.0B Terrain Proximity Setup (with Garmin SVT™ enabled and TAWS disabled)
For installations with SVT enabled and TAWS disabled, configure Terrain Alerting and Airport Criteria as
follows:
1. Go to the TERRAIN-SVT SETUP page in
the SYS page group.
2. Activate the cursor and set EXT TAWS to
one of the following:
a) NOT INSTALLED if no external
TAWS system is present in the aircraft
b) INSTALLED (GARMIN) if a Garmin
external TAWS system is present in the
aircraft.
c) INSTALLED (OTHER) if a non-
Garmin external TAWS system is
present in the aircraft
3. Set the RNWY SURFACE and MIN
LENTGH to the values determined in 
Section 5.2.5.
4. Deactivate the cursor.
5.5.6.0C TAWS-SVT™ Setup (with TAWS Enabled)
For installations with TAWS enabled, insert a TAWS Enablement card and configure the Airport Criteria as
follows:
1. Go to the TAWS-B SETUP page in the SYS page group.
2. Set the RNWY SURFACE and MIN LENGTH to the values determined in Section 5.2.5.
3. Deactivate the cursor.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-28 Rev. L
5.5.6A Video Configuration
1. Go to the VIDEO CONFIGURATION page
in the SYS page group, shown in
Figure 5-6.
2. Press the VIDEO 1 or VIDEO 2 soft key to
select the video source to be configured.
3. Press the SETUP soft key and change the
CONFIGURED field to YES.

NOTE
It is recommended that the FORMAT field be
set to AUTO. Other available selections are
NTSC and PAL.

4. Adjust the orientation of the image using the

ROTATION field (image rotations of 0°, 90°,
180° and 270° are available).
5. Adjust the BRIGHTNESS, CONTRAST and
SATURATION of the image to provide an
acceptable image.

NOTE
The brightness, contrast and saturation of the
image can also be adjusted in Normal mode Figure 5-6. Video Configuration Page
using the External Video page in the AUX
page group.

5.5.6B Discrete Output Configuration

The GDU 620 discrete outputs must be configured to match a particular installation. The functions of the
GDU 620 discrete outputs can be configured using the DISCRETE CONFIGURATION page in the SYS
page group. The GDU 620 assigns default functions to the discrete output pins as shown in Figure .

NOTE
It is recommended that the default settings for the discretes be used whenever possible.

NOTE
The GDU 620 discrete outputs can be returned to the default settings by pressing the
DEFAULTS key.

NOTE
Each discrete output function may only be configured on one discrete output at a time.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-29
NOTE
All discrete output configurations are available on any of the active low discrete outputs.
However, a particular discrete output configuration may only be set on one output. If it is
desired to change the output pin used, its current setting must first be turned off before the
output can be configured on another pin.
In order for the system to function correctly, any
discrete outputs that are utilized in a particular
installation must be configured to match that
installation.
1. Activate the cursor.
2. Select the Function field for the desired pin and
set it to match the installation.
The following settings are available for each
discrete output (asterisks denote Active-Low
signals):
a) TAWS Audio Active Out*
b) Altitude Capture*
c) A/P Backcourse
d) TIS/TAS Standby*
e) TAS Test*
f) GPS Annunciate*
g) GPS Select*
h) ILS/GPS Approach*
i) GSR 56 Remote Power*
j) Radar Altimeter Self Test Out*
k) WX Radar On*
l) GPS 1/2 Source* Figure 5-7. Discrete Configuration Page
m) HDG/CRS DATUM VALID*

NOTE
Airspeed discretes require additional configuration. Refer to Section 5.5.1.12 of the
GDU 620 TSO Installation Manual (P/N 190-00601-04).

n) AIRSPEED DISCRETE OUT 1*

o) AIRSPEED DISCRETE OUT 2*
p) AIRSPEED DISCRETE OUT 3*
q) AIRSPEED DISCRETE OUT 4*
r) AIRSPEED DISCRETE OUT 5*
3. Repeat for all discrete outputs utilized in the installation.
5.5.7 GDC 74( ) Configuration
The OAT probe type must be set for the GDC 74( ).
1. Go to the GDC CONFIGURATION page in the GDC page group.
2. Activate the cursor and select the GTP 59 OAT probe type.
3. Deactivate the cursor.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-30 Rev. L
5.5.8 GDL 69/69A Configuration

NOTE
If the GDL 69/69A is also connected to a GMX 200 or 400W/500W Series unit, ensure that
the GDL 69/69A is configured using the GDU 620.

If installed, the GDL 69/69A must be configured to match the installation.

1. Go to the GDL 69 CONFIGURATION page in the GDL page group.
2. Activate the cursor and adjust the Antenna Gain and Cable Loss to match the installation. Refer to
the GDL 69/69A Installation Manual (190-00355-02) to determine the correct values.
3. Enable any GDL 69/69A Ethernet ports as required by the installation.
4. Deactivate the cursor.

NOTE
GDL 69/69A XM must be activated before use. If XM has not already been activated, see
the GDL 69/69A Installation Manual (190-00355-02) and the GDL 69/69A XM Activation
Instructions (190-00355-04).

5.5.9 Autopilot Configuration

NOTE
In most cases, Autopilot TYPE setting is set to match the original HSI that was removed as
part of the G600 installation. If original HSI does not match setting below, additional
changes may be required.

NOTE
Selecting the Autopilot TYPE will set default values for the autopilot. These values may
require adjustment based upon the flight check. Refer to Section 5.10.2 for additional
details.
If an autopilot is connected to the G600, the GDU 620 must be configured to provide the correct heading
and course datum information to the autopilot.
1. Go to the AUTOPILOT CONFIGURATION page in the FCS page group.
2. Press ENT to set the autopilot to PRESENT.
3. Move the cursor to the TYPE field and set the value according to Table 5-20.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-31
Table 5-20. GDU 620 Autopilot Type Settings
Autopilot Model Autopilot TYPE Setting Notes
Bendix M-4C/M-4D
Bendix M-4C / M-4D
Manual Entry [7]
Century 2000 Century 2000
Century 21 / 31 / 41 Century 21/31/41
Century 1C388C/MC [11]
Century 1C388/M [12]
Century II Century 1C388-2 [13]
Century 1C388-3 [14]
Manual Entry [6] [7]
Century 1C388C/MC [11]
Century 1C388/M [12]
Century III Century 1C388-2 [13]
Century 1C388-3 [14]
Manual Entry [6] [7]
Century IV (AC) Century NSD 360 AC
Century IV (DC) Century IV
All Century A/Ps with Radio Couplers Century NSD 360 AC [6] [7]
Cessna 300/400/800 IFCS Cessna 400B AC
Cessna 400B Cessna 400B AC or DC [1]
Cessna 300B/400B/800B IFCS Cessna 400B DC
Cessna 1000 IFCS Century NSD 360 DC
Collins AP-106/107 Collins PN 101 [10]
Collins APS-65 APS-65 [19]
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KAP 100 King KI 525 [5]
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KAP 140 King KI 525 [5]
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KAP 150 King KI 525 [5]
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KAP 200 King KI 525 [5]
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC 150 King KI 525 [5]
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC 200 King KI 525 [5]
King KFC 225 [15]
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC 225
Manual Entry [7]
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC 250
King KFC 250 [2]
w/ 065-5015-XX Adapter Card (4” instruments)
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC 250
King KI 525 [5]
w/ 065-5016-XX Adapter Card (3” instruments)
King KI 525 [5]
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC 275
King KFC 325/275 [15] [16]
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC 300 Collins PN 101
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC 325 King KFC 325/275 [2] [15]
Sperry SPZ-200A/500 Sperry SPZ-500 [4]

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-32 Rev. L
Table 5-20. GDU 620 Autopilot Type Settings
Autopilot Model Autopilot TYPE Setting Notes
S-TEC 20/30/40/50/55/55X/60/65/60-2 King KI 525 [3] [5]
STEC 1500/2100 AC [17]
S-TEC 1500/2100 (AC)
Manual Entry [7] [8] [9]
STEC 1500/2100 DC [18]
S-TEC 1500/2100 (DC)
Manual Entry [7] [8] [9]
[1] Select “Cessna 400B AC” or “Cessna 400B DC” based upon whether the autopilot is
strapped for AC or DC course/heading error inputs.
[2] If the King autopilot is installed with a KA 52 or KA 57 autopilot adapter, the TYPE must be
set to “King KI 525” and not the indicated setting.
[3] If the autopilot has been previously configured to operate with the “NSD-360”, the TYPE
must be set to “Century NSD 360 DC” and not “KI-525”. If the autopilot is configured to
operate with any other heading system it must be reconfigured to either NSD-360 or KI-
525 (KCS-55) in order to be compatible with the G600.
[4] The default values for the SPZ-200A/500 for HDG + and CRS + are reversed in GDU 620
3.xx software. After the SPZ-500 setting is selected, change the ACTIVE setting for HDG
+ to “RIGHT” and CRS + to “LEFT”.
[5] With GDU 620 software version 3.20 and earlier, on the AUTOPILOT CONFIGURATION
page, the Vmin and Vmax default values for the King KI 525 setting were -15.0 and 15.0,
respectively. These values are -12.5 and 12.5 for GDU 620 software versions 5.00 and
later. If the Vmin and Vmax values are set to -15.0 and 15.0, manually set the ACTIVE
values to -12.5 and 12.5, respectively.
[6] GDU 620 must be connected to a Radio Coupler. Configuration values will vary based
upon which Century Radio Coupler is used.
[7] See Section 5.5.9.2 for settings.
[8] S-TEC 1500/2100 Computers with P/Ns 01304-01 or 01304-03 are AC computers, and
require Manual Entry Settings (See Section 5.5.9.2). P/Ns 01304-02, 01304-04, and
01304-07 are DC computers and require manual entry settings (see Section 5.5.9.2).
[9] This autopilot requires additional autopilot specific configuration. Refer to
Section 5.5.9.3.1 for more information.
[10] It is acceptable to set “HDG +” and “CRS +” to non-default setting of “LEFT” if heading and
course error hi/lo signal wires are swapped.
[11] Use this setting if a 1C388C or 1C388MC radio coupler is installed.
[12] Use this setting if a 1C388 or 1C388M radio coupler is installed.
[13] Use this setting if a 1C388-2 radio coupler is installed.
[14] Use this setting if a 1C388-3 radio coupler is installed.
[15] This setting supports the display of autopilot mode annunciations over ARINC 429.
[16] Select “King KFC 325/275” for the Autopilot TYPE. Then, set the CONFIGURATION
settings to the values specified in Section 5.5.9.2 (do not set TYPE to “Manual Entry”;
otherwise, autopilot mode annunciations will not be available on the PFD).
[17] S-TEC 1500/2100 Computers with P/Ns 01304-01 or 01304-03 are AC computers.
[18] S-TEC 1500/2100 Computers with P/Ns 01304-02, 01304-04, and 01304-07 are DC
computers.
[19] The GAD 43e cannot be used to provide the altitude preselector function with any APS-65
computer that currently uses the PRE-80 altitude preselector.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-33
5.5.9.1 Altitude Preselect Configuration

NOTE
The Altitude Preselect setting will not be displayed unless the Altitude Preselect option has
been enabled (See Section 5.5.5.2) or the GAD 43e adapter has been configured as
PRESENT (See Section 5.5.1).

With certain autopilots it is possible to select an altitude on the GDU 620 and then have the autopilot
capture that selected altitude. If the system is installed to utilize this feature, the altitude preselect function
must be enabled and properly configured. This section describes how to configure the altitude preselect
feature on the GDU 620.
1. Ensure that the Altitude Preselect Option is
enabled or the GAD 43e adapter has been
configured as PRESENT.
2. Go to the AUTO PILOT page in the FCS
page group.
3. Activate the cursor and highlight Altitude
Preselect. Press ENT to set the altitude
preselect to PRESENT.
4. Move the cursor to the TYPE field and set the value according to Table 5-21.

Table 5-21. GDU 620 Altitude Preselect Type Settings

Manufacturer Autopilot Model Altitude Preselect TYPE Setting Notes

S-TEC System 55X S-TEC 55X [1]
GAD 43e [3]
Various Various [2]
GAD 43e CROSSFILL [4]
[1] Used when emulating an S-TEC SA-200 Altitude Selector / Alerter (P/N 01282) over RS-
485, which requires a purchased enablement. The S-TEC 44X is also supported with an
enabled GAD 43e.
[2] Refer to Section E.20 for information regarding which autopilot/altitude preselectors are
supported using the GAD 43e. Refer to Section 5.5.11.2 for specific information on
configuring the GAD 43e.
[3] This setting is available on GDU 620 #1 only.
[4] This setting is available on GDU 620 #2 only. All necessary communication to the
GAD 43e is handled through GDU 620 #1 using crossfill.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-34 Rev. L
5.5.9.2 Autopilot Settings Using Manual Entry
If the current version of GDU 620 software does not have a configuration setting for a particular autopilot,
the autopilot may be set up manually. Specific configurations for the settings below will be included in
future revisions of the software.

NOTE
The values shown in the figure are for reference only. Refer to Table 5-22 for the correct
settings.

1. Go to the AUTOPILOT
CONFIGURATION page in the FCS
page group, shown in Figure 5-8.
2. Activate the cursor and press ENT to set
the Autopilot to PRESENT.
3. Move the cursor to the TYPE field, select
Manual Entry and press ENT.
4. Using the cursor, set the ACTIVE values
in accordance with Table 5-22.
5. Deactivate the cursor.

Figure 5-8. Autopilot Configuration Page

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-35
Table 5-22. GDU 620 Manual Autopilot ACTIVE Settings
Flight Director/Autopilot Model Parameter ACTIVE Setting [1] Notes
AC/DC AC
HDG + LEFT
CRS + LEFT
Bendix [2] HDG V/DEG 0.291
M-4C, M-4D CRS V/DEG 0.291
Vmin -18.000
Vmax 18.000
Vref 0.000
AC/DC AC
HDG + LEFT
CRS + LEFT
Century A/P HDG V/DEG 0.040 [3]
w/ 1C388C or 1C388MC Radio Coupler CRS V/DEG 0.040 [3]
Vmin -2.000 [3]
Vmax 2.000 [3]
Vref 0.000
AC/DC AC
HDG + LEFT
CRS + LEFT
Century A/P HDG V/DEG 0.025 [3]
w/ 1C388 or 1C388M Radio Coupler CRS V/DEG 0.025 [3]
Vmin -1.250 [3]
Vmax 1.250 [3]
Vref 0.000
AC/DC AC
HDG + LEFT
CRS + LEFT
Century A/P HDG V/DEG 0.190 [3]
w/ 1C388-2 Radio Coupler CRS V/DEG 0.190 [3]
Vmin -10.000 [3]
Vmax 10.000 [3]
Vref 0.000
AC/DC AC
HDG + LEFT
CRS + LEFT
Century A/P HDG V/DEG 0.210 [3]
w/ 1C388-3 Radio Coupler CRS V/DEG 0.210 [3]
Vmin -11.000 [3]
Vmax 11.000 [3]
Vref 0.000

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-36 Rev. L
Table 5-22. GDU 620 Manual Autopilot ACTIVE Settings
Flight Director/Autopilot Model Parameter ACTIVE Setting [1] Notes
AC/DC DC
HDG + RIGHT
CRS + RIGHT
Honeywell (Bendix King) HDG V/DEG 0.550
KFC 275 [5] CRS V/DEG 0.210
Vmin -12.500
Vmax 12.500
Vref 0.000
AC/DC DC [4]
HDG + Right
CRS + Right
S-TEC
HDG V/DEG 0.053
1500/2100 (AC)
CRS V/DEG 0.000
(P/Ns 01304-01, 01304-03)
Vmin 0.250
Vmax 9.750
Vref 5.000
AC/DC DC [4]
HDG + Right
CRS + Right
S-TEC
HDG V/DEG 0.550
1500/2100 (DC)
(P/Ns 01304-02, -04, -07) CRS V/DEG 0.000
Vmin -16.500
Vmax 16.500
Vref 0.000
[1] ACTIVE setting values were evaluated via flight test in a specific installation. If you are
experiencing performance problems with the settings listed above, please contact Garmin
technical support before making adjustments.
[2] Adjustments to the autopilot may be required. Refer to Figure F-30 for additional
information.
[3] These settings are for the Triad SP-66 isolation transformers (refer to Figure F-12). If
using Triad TY-141P transformers (not recommended for new installations), these values
should be increased by 10%.
[4] Both variants of the S-TEC 1500/2100 autopilot computer require the DC voltage
configuration for HDG datum.
[5] Do not set TYPE to “Manual Entry”; otherwise, autopilot mode annunciations will not be
available on the PFD.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-37
5.5.9.3 Model Specific Autopilot Configuration
5.5.9.3.1 S-TEC 1500/2100 Autopilot
The S-TEC 1500/2100 autopilot requires a dual G600 installation.

NOTE
In order to configure the DFCS 4 output format on ARINC 429 Out 2, the DFCS 4 (A429)
Feature must be enabled. Refer to Section 5.5.5.9 for more information on enabling the
DFCS 4 (A429) feature.

For each GDU 620 do the following:

1. Go to the ARINC PORT CONFIG page in the SYS page group.
2. Activate the cursor and set the output format of ARINC 429 Out 2 to DFCS 4.
3. Deactivate the cursor.
5.5.9.3.2 Honeywell (Bendix-King) KFC 225/275/325 Mode Annunciations
With certain autopilots it is possible to display the autopilot mode on the GDU 620 PFD. This section
describes how to configure the display of autopilot mode annunciations on the GDU 620.

NOTE
In order for autopilot mode annunciations to be displayed, a GDU 620 ARINC 429 input
must be properly configured. Refer to Section 5.5.1.1 for details on how to configure the
ARINC 429 inputs.

NOTE
The “+Mode Annunciations” setting only appears for autopilot TYPES that support it.

1. Go to the AUTOPILOT CONFIGURATION page in the FCS page group (see Figure 5-9).
2. Activate the cursor and highlight “+ Mode Annunciations”. Press ENT to set the mode
annunciations to PRESENT.
3. Move the cursor to the TYPE field and set the value according to Table 5-23.

Figure 5-9. Autopilot Mode Annunciation Setting

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-38 Rev. L
Table 5-23. GDU 620 Autopilot Mode Annunciations Type Settings

+ Mode Annunciations
Manufacturer Autopilot Model Notes
TYPE Setting
ARINC 429 input from autopilot
KFC 225
must be set to KFC 225
Honeywell ARINC 429 input from autopilot
KFC 275 ARINC 429
(Bendix/King) must be set to KFC 325/275
ARINC 429 input from autopilot
KFC 325
must be set to KFC 325/275

5.5.9.4 ARINC 429 Output Configuration (ARINC Out 2)

Various autopilots receive ARINC 429 information
from the GDU 620. This section describes how to
configure the ARINC 429 OUT 2 on the GDU 620.
1. Go to the ARINC PORT CONFIG page in
the SYS page group.
2. Activate the cursor and highlight
ARINC 429 OUT 2 fields, and set the values
according to Table 5-24.

Table 5-24. GDU 620 ARINC 429 Output Settings

ARINC 429 Output Setting

Manufacturer Autopilot Model Notes
SPEED OUTPUT
KFC 225
Honeywell
KFC 275 Low DFCS 5 [1]
(Bendix/King)
KFC 325 [1]
System 55X Low AUTOPILOT
S-TEC
1500/2100 High DFCS 4 [2]

[1] Only supported by KCP 220 -15 and above.

[2] In order to configure the DFCS 4 output format on ARINC 429 Out 2, the DFCS 4 (A429)
Feature must be enabled. Refer to Section 5.5.5.9 for more information on enabling the
DFCS 4 (A429) feature.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-39
5.5.9.5 Roll Steering Converter Function Configuration
The GDU 620 can act as a roll-steering converter. It will receive the ARINC 429 GPSS information from
the selected navigator (1 or 2) and translate it into a heading error. This section describes how to configure
the GPS Roll Steering function on the GDU 620.
1. Go to the AUTOPILOT CONFIGURATION
page in the FCS page group.
2. In the ANALOG ROLL STEERING window,
set the GPSS/HDG Control to one of the
following settings:
◦ NONE – if the GDU 620 roll steering conversion function is not being used in the
installation.
◦ DISCRETE IN – if the GPSS Enable In* discrete input (external switch) is used to switch
between GPSS and HDG on the heading datum output.
◦ HDG KEY– if the GDU 620 HDG key is used to switch between GPSS and HDG on the
heading datum output.

NOTE
During system configuration, leave the GPSS to HDG Datum Gain set to the default value.
Refer to Section 5.10.2.3 for information on adjusting the GPSS to HDG Datum Gain.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-40 Rev. L
5.5.10 Flight Director Configuration
If an external flight director input is connected to the G600, the GDU 620 must be configured to enable the
display of the flight director. This section describes how to configure the GDU 620 to enable the flight
director.

NOTE
The two SVT FD configuration settings are only displayed if SVT is enabled (GDU 620
software version 3.00 or later).

1. Go to the FLIGHT DIRECTOR page in the FCS page

group.
2. Activate the cursor and press ENT to set the flight
director to PRESENT.
3. Move the cursor to the TYPE field and set the value
according to Table 5-25.
4. (Century IV/41/2000 Autopilot model only) Move the
cursor to the DISCRETE ENABLE field and set to
DISABLE, then move the cursor to the PITCH
THRESHOLD field and set to the value described in
Table 5-26.

NOTE
The pitch threshold setting becomes available when DISCRETE ENABLE is disabled.

5. (Optional) For those autopilots listed inTable 5-25 with SVT FD Allowed (Yes), move the cursor to
the SVT FD DISPLAY field and set to ENABLE. Set the SVT FD PITCH SCALING to 0.46.
6. Deactivate the cursor.

NOTE
By default, the flight director display is turned off when SVT is turned on. For those
autopilots listed in Table 5-25 with SVT FD Allowed (Yes), it is acceptable to set SVT FD
DISPLAY to ENABLE so that the flight director can be displayed when synthetic terrain is
displayed on the PFD. For those autopilots listed in Table 5-25 with SVT FD
Allowed (No), SVT FD DISPLAY must be set to DISABLE.

NOTE
Successive releases of GDU 620 software have added settings for Flight Director TYPE.
Whenever possible use the TYPE that is listed. If the required TYPE is not available use
the Manual Entry settings.

NOTE
It is recommended that the SVT FD PITCH SCALING setting be changed to 0.46 from the
default value of 0.55. However, it is still acceptable to use the default value of 0.55.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-41
Table 5-25. GDU 620 Flight Director Type Settings

Flight Director  Flight Director TYPE SVT FD

Manufacturer Notes
(Autopilot) Model Setting Allowed

M-4D Bendix M-4D Yes [5]

Bendix
w/ 4007463-0501 FD Adapter Card Manual Entry Yes [1]
Century IV/41/2000 Manual Entry Yes [1]
Cessna 400B/800B No
300B/400B/800B IFCS
Manual Entry Yes [1]
Cessna
Cessna 1000 IFCS No
1000 IFCS
Manual Entry No [1]
APS-65 Collins APS-65 Yes [5]
Collins Collins AP-106/107 Yes [2] [5]
AP-106/107
Manual Entry Yes [1] [2]
KFC 150/200/275 King KI 256 Yes [5]
King KFC 225 Yes [5]
KFC 225 King KI 256 Yes [3] [5]
Manual Entry Yes [1] [5]
KFC 250 King KCI 310 Yes [5]
w/ 065-5015-XX Adapter Card
(4” instruments) Manual Entry Yes [1] [5]

Honeywell KFC 250

(Bendix/King) w/ 065-5016-XX Adapter Card King KI 256 Yes [5]
(3” instruments)

KFC 275/325 King KCI 310 Yes [5]

(w/KCP 220 -0012 and earlier) Manual Entry Yes [1]
KFC 275/325
ARINC 429 Yes [4] [5] [6]
(w/KCP 220 -0015 and later)
King KCI 310 Yes [5]
KFC 300
Manual Entry Yes [1]
Sperry SPZ-200A/500 Yes [5]
Sperry SPZ-200A/500
Manual Entry Yes [1]
55, 55X S-TEC 55X Yes [5]
S-TEC ST-670 Yes [5]
60-2/65
S-TEC Manual Entry Yes [1]
S-TEC 1500/2100 Yes [5]
1500/2100
Manual Entry Yes [1]

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-42 Rev. L
[1] See Section 5.5.10.1 for settings.
[2] It is acceptable to set “PITCH +” to non-default setting of “UP” if FD Pitch UP/DN signal
wires are swapped.
[3] Not allowed for new installations.
[4] Set to ARINC 429 Crossfill on GDU 620 #2.
[5] It is recommended that the SVT FD PITCH SCALING be changed to 0.46 rather than the
default 0.55. However, it is still acceptable to use the default value of 0.55.
[6] It is acceptable to use the KCI 310/Manual Entry setting for existing G600 installations.

NOTE
Selecting the Flight Director TYPE will set default values for the flight director. These
values may require adjustment based upon the flight director check. Refer to
Section 5.8.5.3 and Section 5.10.2.1 for additional details.

5.5.10.1 Flight Director Settings Using Manual Entry

If the current version of GDU 620 software does not have a configuration setting for a particular flight
director, the flight director may be set up manually. Specific configurations for the settings below may be
included in future revisions of the software.
1. Go to the FLIGHT DIRECTOR page in the FCS page group.
2. Activate the cursor and press ENT to set the flight director to PRESENT.
3. Move the cursor to the TYPE field, select Manual Entry and press ENT.
4. Using the cursor, set the ACTIVE values according to Table 5-26.
5. Deactivate the cursor.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-43
Table 5-26. GDU 620 Manual Flight Director ACTIVE Settings
Flight Director/
Parameter ACTIVE Setting [1] Notes
Autopilot Model
PITCH FILTER ABSOLUTE
PITCH FILTER TIME 0.0
PITCH + UP
PITCH V/DEG 0.150
PITCH ANGLE MAX 15.0
PITCH ANGLE MIN -10.0
PITCH Vref 0.000
Bendix M-4D ROLL FILTER ABSOLUTE
ROLL FILTER TIME 0.0
ROLL + RIGHT
ROLL V/DEG 0.150
ROLL ANGLE MAX 20.0
ROLL Vref 0.000
SVT FD DISPLAY ENABLE [2] [3]
SVT FD PITCH SCALING 0.46 [2] [4]
PITCH FILTER ABSOLUTE
PITCH FILTER TIME 0.0
PITCH + UP
PITCH V/DEG 0.300
PITCH ANGLE MAX 15.0
PITCH ANGLE MIN -10.0
PITCH Vref 6.000
ROLL FILTER ABSOLUTE
Century IV/41/2000 ROLL FILTER TIME 0.0
ROLL + RIGHT
ROLL V/DEG 0.416
ROLL ANGLE MAX 30.0
ROLL Vref 0.000
DISCRETE ENABLE DISABLE
PITCH THRESHOLD 10 [5]
SVT FD DISPLAY ENABLE [2]
SVT FD PITCH SCALING 0.46 [2] [4]

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-44 Rev. L
Table 5-26. GDU 620 Manual Flight Director ACTIVE Settings
Flight Director/
Parameter ACTIVE Setting [1] Notes
Autopilot Model
PITCH FILTER ABSOLUTE
PITCH FILTER TIME 0.2
PITCH + UP
PITCH V/DEG 0.025
PITCH ANGLE MAX 15.0
PITCH ANGLE MIN -10.0
Cessna PITCH Vref 0.000
300B IFCS
ROLL FILTER ABSOLUTE
400B IFCS
800B IFCS ROLL FILTER TIME 0.1
ROLL + RIGHT
ROLL V/DEG 0.025
ROLL ANGLE MAX 30.0
ROLL Vref 0.000
SVT FD DISPLAY ENABLE [2] [3]
SVT FD PITCH SCALING 0.46 [2] [4]
PITCH FILTER ABSOLUTE
PITCH FILTER TIME 0.1
PITCH + UP
PITCH V/DEG 0.080
PITCH ANGLE MAX 15.0
PITCH ANGLE MIN -10.0
PITCH Vref 0.000
Cessna
ROLL FILTER ABSOLUTE
1000 IFCS
ROLL FILTER TIME 0.0
ROLL + LEFT
ROLL V/DEG 0.060
ROLL ANGLE MAX 20.0
ROLL Vref 0.000
SVT FD DISPLAY DISABLE [2]
SVT FD PITCH SCALING 0.46 [2] [4]

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-45
Table 5-26. GDU 620 Manual Flight Director ACTIVE Settings
Flight Director/
Parameter ACTIVE Setting [1] Notes
Autopilot Model
PITCH FILTER ABSOLUTE
PITCH FILTER TIME 0.0
PITCH + DOWN
PITCH V/DEG 0.150
PITCH ANGLE MAX 15.0
PITCH ANGLE MIN -15.0
Collins  PITCH Vref 0.000
AP-106 ROLL FILTER ABSOLUTE
AP-107 ROLL FILTER TIME 0.0
ROLL + RIGHT
ROLL V/DEG 0.150
ROLL ANGLE MAX 30.0
ROLL Vref 0.000
SVT FD DISPLAY ENABLE [2] [3]
SVT FD PITCH SCALING 0.46 [2] [4]
PITCH FILTER ABSOLUTE
PITCH FILTER TIME 0.2
PITCH + DOWN
PITCH V/DEG 0.454
PITCH ANGLE MAX 15.0
PITCH ANGLE MIN -10.0
Honeywell PITCH Vref 0.000
(Bendix/King) ROLL FILTER ABSOLUTE
KFC 225 ROLL FILTER TIME 0.8
ROLL + LEFT
ROLL V/DEG 0.103
ROLL ANGLE MAX 20.0
ROLL Vref 0.000
SVT FD DISPLAY ENABLE [2] [3]
SVT FD PITCH SCALING 0.46 [2] [4]

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-46 Rev. L
Table 5-26. GDU 620 Manual Flight Director ACTIVE Settings
Flight Director/
Parameter ACTIVE Setting [1] Notes
Autopilot Model
PITCH FILTER ABSOLUTE
PITCH FILTER TIME 0.0
PITCH + UP
PITCH V/DEG 1.000
PITCH ANGLE MAX 15.0
Honeywell PITCH ANGLE MIN -15.0
(Bendix/King) PITCH Vref 0.000
KFC 250
ROLL FILTER ABSOLUTE
KFC 300
KFC 325 ROLL FILTER TIME 0.0
with KCI 310 ROLL + RIGHT
ROLL V/DEG 0.750
ROLL ANGLE MAX 21.0
ROLL Vref 0.000
SVT FD DISPLAY ENABLE [2] [3]
SVT FD PITCH SCALING 0.46 [2] [4]
PITCH FILTER ABSOLUTE
PITCH FILTER TIME 0.2
PITCH + DOWN
PITCH V/DEG 1.200
PITCH ANGLE MAX 15.0
PITCH ANGLE MIN -10.0
S-TEC PITCH Vref 0.000
60-2 ROLL FILTER ABSOLUTE
65 with ST-670 ROLL FILTER TIME 0.0
ROLL + LEFT
ROLL V/DEG 0.175
ROLL ANGLE MAX 20.0
ROLL Vref 0.000
SVT FD DISPLAY ENABLE [2] [3]
SVT FD PITCH SCALING 0.46 [2] [4]

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-47
Table 5-26. GDU 620 Manual Flight Director ACTIVE Settings
Flight Director/
Parameter ACTIVE Setting [1] Notes
Autopilot Model
PITCH FILTER ABSOLUTE
PITCH FILTER TIME 0.2
PITCH + UP
PITCH V/DEG 0.04
PITCH ANGLE MAX 45
PITCH ANGLE MIN -10
Sperry PITCH Vref 0
SPZ-200A ROLL FILTER ABSOLUTE
SPZ-500 ROLL FILTER TIME 0.2
ROLL + LEFT
ROLL V/DEG 0.02
ROLL ANGLE MAX 30
ROLL Vref 0
SVT FD DISPLAY ENABLE [2] [3]
SVT FD PITCH SCALING 0.46 [2] [4]
PITCH FILTER ABSOLUTE
PITCH FILTER TIME 0.0
PITCH + DN
PITCH V/DEG 0.100
PITCH ANGLE MAX 15.0
PITCH ANGLE MIN -10.0
S-TEC PITCH Vref 0.000
1500 ROLL FILTER ABSOLUTE
2100 ROLL FILTER TIME 0.0
ROLL + LEFT
ROLL V/DEG 0.025
ROLL ANGLE MAX 25
ROLL Vref 0.000
SVT FD DISPLAY ENABLE [2] [3]
SVT FD PITCH SCALING 0.46 [2] [4]
[1] ACTIVE setting values were evaluated via flight test in a specific installation. If you are
experiencing performance problems with the settings listed above, please contact Garmin
technical support before making adjustments.
[2] This setting appears only with SVT enabled.
[3] SVT FD DISPLAY is set to DISABLE by default. It is acceptable to set SVT FD DISPLAY
to ENABLE so that the flight director can be displayed when synthetic terrain is displayed
on the PFD.
[4] The default value for SVT PITCH SCALING of 0.55 is also acceptable, although 0.46 is
preferred.
[5] This setting appears only with DISCRETE ENABLE disabled.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-48 Rev. L
5.5.11 GAD 43/43e Configuration
5.5.11.1 GAD 43 Configuration

NOTE
Before the GAD 43 can be configured, the GAD 43 Adapter option must enabled (refer to
Section 5.5.5.5) and configured as Present (refer to Section 5.5.1).

If a GAD 43/GAD 43e is installed and connected to

the autopilot, the GAD 43/GAD 43e must be
configured to provide the correct information to the
autopilot.
1. Go to the GAD 43 page in the GAD page
group.
2. Activate the cursor and set the GYRO
EMULATION TYPE and YAW RATE
SCALE FACTOR according to
Table 5-27.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-49
Table 5-27. GAD 43 Configuration Settings
Autopilot Autopilot Yaw Rate
Gyro Emulation Type Notes
Manufacturer Model Scale Factor
None -- [5]
None
Heading Only -- [6]
21
31
Century Century 52D267/M (2000) None
41
2000
300B/400B/800B IFCS Cessna/ARC G519 None
400B Cessna/ARC G519 None
Cessna
Cessna/ARC G519 None [7]
1000A Series
Sperry VG-14A None [8]
Collins APS-65 Collins 332D-11T 200 mV/deg/Sec
KAP 100 King KI 256 None
KAP 150 King KI 256 None [1]
KAP 200 King KI 256 None
KFC 150 King KI 256 200 mV/deg/Sec [1] [4]
KFC 200 King KI 256 200 mV/deg/Sec [4]
Honeywell
KFC 225 King KI 256 None [1]
(Bendix/King)
King KI 256 [1] [2] [4]
KFC 250 200 mV/deg/Sec
King KVG 350 [1] [3] [4]
KFC 275 King KI 256 [1] [4]
KFC 300 King KVG 350 200 mV/deg/Sec [1] [4]
KFC 325 King KVG 350 [1] [4]

[1] A setting of “None” for the Yaw Rate Scale Factor is required in order to use the
GAD 43/43e to provide barometric correction to the autopilot.
[2] For KCP 299 computers with the 065-5016-XX Adapter card (i.e. for installations that
previously utilized the KI 255/256/ KG 258 ADI).
[3] For KCP 299 computers with the 065-5015-XX Adapter card (i.e. for installations that
previously utilized the KVG 350 remote gyro).
[4] If the KRG 331 rate gyro is not being replaced by the GAD 43/43e, the Yaw Rate Scale
Factor can be set to “None”.
[5] If the GAD 43/43e is not being used to provide attitude to an autopilot and the Synchro
Heading Output is not being used (e.g. some of the additional GAD 43e interfaces are
used), set the Gyro Emulation Type as to “None”.
[6] If the GAD 43/43e is not providing attitude to the autopilot but the Synchro Heading Output
(P431-8/7/41) is being used, set the Gyro Emulation Type as to “Heading Only”.
[7] For Cessna 1000A Series Computer Amplifier Part No. 46210-0001, -0002, and -0102
(i.e. for installations that previously utilized a panel mount gyro such as a G-895B, G-
1050A, G-550A, or G-519B ).
[8] For Cessna 1000A Series Computer Amplifier Part No. 46210-0004, -0005 and -0105 (i.e.
for installations that previously utilized a remote mount gyro such as a VG-14(A) ).

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-50 Rev. L
5.5.11.2 GAD 43e Configuration
If a GAD 43e is installed it must be configured to
provide the correct information
1. Go to the GAD 43e page in the GAD page
group.
2. Activate the cursor and set the Altitude
Preselect TYPE according to Table 5-28.
3. Set the Radar Altimeter TYPE according to
Table 5-29.
4. Set the DME TYPE according to
Table 5-30.

NOTE
The KAS 297B GAIN STRAPS window will only appear if the Altitude Preselect TYPE is
set to King KAS 297B.

Table 5-28. GAD 43e Altitude Preselect TYPE Settings

Autopilot Autopilot
Altitude Preselect TYPE Notes
Manufacturer Model
Collins APS-65 United Inst 5506L-S [4]
KAP 150
King KAS 297B [1]
KFC 150
KFC 200
KAS 297
Honeywell KFC 250
(Bendix/King) King KAS 297C #1 [5]
KFC 275
King KAS 297C #2 [2]
King KAS 297C #1 [3] [5]
KFC 325
King KAS 297C #2 [2]
55X
60-2
S-TEC S-TEC ST-360
60 PSS
65

[1] KAS 297B GAIN STRAPS #1 through #4 (green boxes) must correspond to the grounded
gain straps (P297B1-16/17/34/22) of the KAS 297B being replaced. If a KAS 297B was
not previously installed, refer to manufacturer’s data for KAS 297B strapping for the
specific aircraft model in which the GAD 43e is being installed.
[2] For KCP 220 computers with P/N 065-00064-0008 (TBM 700).
[3] For KCP 220 computers with P/N 065-00064-0015 (PC-12), and the KAS 297C being
replaced with GAIN STRAP #1 (P297C1-16) not grounded and GAIN STRAP #2 through
#4 (P297C1-17/34/22) grounded.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-51
[4] Autopilot must currently use the UI 5506L-S altitude preselector.
[5] For KCP 220 computers with P/N 065-00064-0008 (TBM 700), and the KAS 297C being
replaced with GAIN STRAP #1 through #4 (P297C1-16/17/34/22) not grounded.

Table 5-29. GAD 43e Radar Altimeter TYPE Settings

Radar Altimeter Radar Altimeter Radar Altimeter

Notes
Manufacturer Model TYPE
Collins ALT-50A/55B KRA 405 / ALT-55

Honeywell KRA 405 KRA 405 / ALT-55 [1]

(Bendix/King) KRA 10/10A King KRA 10
AA-100 Sperry AA-100
Sperry AA-100A Sperry AA-100A
AA-200 Sperry AA-200
[1] KRA 405 Auxiliary Output #1 must be used.
[2] AA-200 Precision Output must be used.

Table 5-30. GAD 43e DME Type Settings

DME DME Tuning Tuning

DME TYPE
Manufacturer Model Format Source
DME-42 DME-40/42 CSDB
Collins DME-442 DME-442/4000 N/A [1] [2]
DME-4000 DME-442/4000 N/A
KDM 706(A) KN 63 [3] [1] [2]

Honeywell KN 62 KN 62/64 N/A

(Bendix/King) KN 63 KN 63 [3] [1] [2]
KN 64 KN 62/64 N/A
[1] Set Tuning Source #1 to Present if VHF NAV Radio #1 is able to channel the DME.
[2] Set Tuning Source #2 to Present if VHF NAV Radio #2 is able to channel the DME.
[3] Set the tuning format (Serial, 2x5, BCD or SLIP) to match the tuning method used by the
NAV radios to channel the DME.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-52 Rev. L
5.5.11.3 GAD 43e Calibration

NOTE
GAD 43e CALIBRATION page only appears if either NAV1 / NAV2 TYPE is set to
GAD 43e on the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION page.

NOTE
For dual G600 installations, the GAD 43e CALIBRATION page is only available on
GDU 620 #1.

If a GAD 43e is installed and connected to one or

more analog NAV radios, the GAD 43e must be
calibrated to each individual NAV radio.
1. Go to the GAD 43e CALIBRATION page
in the GAD page group.
2. Using a NAV radio tester, generate a
localizer signal with 0.155 DDM left or
right, and tune the NAV radio(s) to the test
frequency.
3. Move the cursor to the cyan Localizer
CALIBRATE button and press ENT for the
particular NAV radio(s).
4. Wait for the calibration to complete
(approximately six seconds). Verify that the DDM readout is 0.155 ± 0.010 DDM.
5. If the DDM readout is not within the specified value, adjust the GAIN value manually so that the
readout is 0.155 ± 0.010 DDM. Increase the GAIN value if the displayed DDM value is less than
0.145. Decrease the GAIN value if the displayed DDM value is greater than 0.165.
6. Using a NAV radio tester, generate a zero degree FROM radial VOR signal, and tune the NAV
radio(s) to the test frequency.
7. Move the cursor to the cyan VOR CALIBRATE button and press ENT for the particular NAV
radio(s).

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-53
5.5.12 Weather Radar Configuration

NOTE
Before the weather radar can be configured, the Weather Radar option must be enabled
(refer to Section 5.5.5.4) and configured as Present (refer to Section 5.5.1).

5.5.12.1 GWX 68 Configuration

If a GWX 68 is installed it automatically gets pitch and
roll stabilization data from the GDU 620. If installing a
GWX 68 that has not previously been installed in that
particular aircraft, press the SET>ACTV soft key to
write the default configuration data from the G600 into
the GWX 68. If the GWX 68 has previously been
installed in that particular aircraft, press the ACTV >
SET soft key to write the configuration data already
stored in the GWX 68 to the G600 system.

NOTE
GWX 68 weather radar is displayed on the
GTN 6XX/7XX navigators, GWX 68 WXR must
be disabled on the GDU 620 Weather Radar
page. Refer to Section 5.5.5.4.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-54 Rev. L
5.5.12.2 ARINC 708 Weather Radar Configuration
As part of the wiring installation the GDU 620 will be
connected to the weather radar as display #1 or #2, and
the GDU 620 must be configured accordingly. Follow
the steps below to perform ARINC 708 radar
configuration.
1. Go to the ARINC PORT CONFIG page in the
SYS page group, shown in Figure 5-10.
2. Activate the cursor and set ARINC 429
OUTPUT #3 or #4 to Low-speed WX
RADAR, as appropriate for the installation.
3. Deactivate the cursor and go to the
DISCRETE CONFIGURATION page in the
SYS page group, shown in Figure 5-11.
4. Ensure that the discrete output that is
connected to the weather radar is set to
“WX Radar On*.”
5. Deactivate the cursor go to the A708
WEATHER RADAR page in the WXR page
group, shown in Figure 5-12.
6. Activate the cursor and set the Figure 5-10. ARINC Port Configuration
DISPLAYHEAD to 1 or 2, to match the Page
connections to the weather radar.
7. Deactivate the cursor.
8. After setting the GDU 620 to the appropriate
weather radar display head number, the
ARINC 708 weather radar system may require
additional calibration. Refer to Section 5.7.1.

Figure 5-11. Discrete Configuration Page

Figure 5-12. ARINC 708 Weather Radar

Configuration Page

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-55
5.5.12.3 GWX 70 Configuration
The GWX 70 must initially be configured via the PC Install Tool as described in the GWX 70 installation
manual, P/N 190-00829-01. Configure the GWX 70 as follows:
• A429 Radar Command -- Disabled
• Extended Scan -- Disabled
• Return Bins -- 600
After the GWX 70 has been configured via the PC Install Tool, on the GDU 620 GWX WEATHER
RADAR page press the ACTV > SET soft key to write the configuration data stored in the GWX 70 to the
G600 system.

NOTE
Updating GWX 70 software via the GDU 620 is not currently supported. Refer to
Section E.10 for GWX 70 software requirements and the GWX 70 installation manual, P/N
190-00829-01 for instructions on updating GWX 70 software.

5.5.13 GTS 8XX Configuration

If a GTS 8XX is connected to the G600, the GTS 8XX
must be configured to match the aircraft installation and
provide the correct data to the GDU 620.

NOTE
Refer to 190-00587-00 GTS 8XX/GPA 65
Installation Manual for a description of each of
the GTS configuration settings.

1. Go to the GTS STATUS AND

CONFIGURATION page in the TRFC page
group.
2. Activate the cursor and select TOP Antenna and
choose the type of antenna that is installed.
3. Select TOP ANT CBL LOSS and enter in the
value of the cable loss between the GA58 and
the GTS 8XX. If a GPA 65 is installed, then the
value entered for TOP ANT CBL LOSS is the
total cable loss (i.e. the sum of the cable losses
between the GA58 and GPA 65, and GPS 65
and GTS 8XX).
4. Select BOTTOM ANTENNA and choose the
type of antenna that is installed or NONE if no
bottom antenna is installed.
5. Select the MODE S ADDRESS and enter in the appropriate value (applicable to GTS 820 and
GTS 850 Only. Enter the Mode S transponder ICAO address (must match the Mode S ID used by
the transponder).
6. Select ADS-B TX and select either Installed or None. (An ADS-B capable transmitter must be
installed in the aircraft to enable this, such as a GTX 330 ES)

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-56 Rev. L
7. Select SQUAT SWITCH “ON GND” and select GROUND or OPEN for the squat switch input.
This field must be set to match the state of the GTS 8XX Air/Ground* input when the aircraft is on
ground (i.e. weight on wheels).
8. Select LDG GR TYPE and choose RETRACTABLE or FIXED.
9. Select LDG GR “DOWN” and choose OPEN or GROUND for the landing gear down sense input.
This field must be set to match the state of the GTS 8XX Gear Down and Locked* input when the
landing gear is extended.
10. Select VOICE and choose either MALE or FEMALE.
11. Select VOLUME and adjust as needed. To test the volume select the AUDIO TEST button and
press ENT. Evaluate the GTS 8XX volume compared to the audio levels of other systems installed
in the aircraft. The GTS 8XX audio alerts should be audible under all anticipated noise
environmental conditions.
12. Press the SAVE softkey after the changes to
this page are complete. This will write the
configuration settings to the GTX 8XX.
13. Go to the GTS PORT CONFIGURATION
page in the TRFC page group.
14. Activate the cursor and configure the ports in
the BARO ALTITUDE SOURCE window to
match the GTS 8XX source(s) of Baro altitude
data. For the ARINC 429 sources, configure
the Speed to HIGH or LOW to match the
source speed.
15. Configure the ports in the RADIO ALTITUDE
SOURCE window to match the GTS 8XX
source(s) of Radio altitude data. For the
ARINC 429 source, configure the Speed to
HIGH or LOW to match the source speed.
16. Configure the ports in the GPS PVT SOURCE
window to match the GTS 8XX source(s) of
GPS data. For the ARINC 429 sources,
configure the Speed to HIGH or LOW to
match the source speed.
17. Configure the ports in the MAG HEADING
SOURCE window to match the GTS 8XX source(s) of heading data. For the ARINC 429 sources,
configure the Speed to HIGH or LOW to match the source speed.
18. Configure the ports in the TRAFFIC OUTPUT window to match the GTS 8XX outputs that are
connected to a traffic display. For the ARINC 429 output, configure the Speed to HIGH or LOW to
match what the traffic display is expecting.
19. Configure the ports in the XPDR 1 COMMUNICATION window if the GTS 8XX is connected to
a transponder (only required for a GTS 820/850 installation). For the ARINC 429 ports, configure
the Speed to HIGH or LOW as required by the installation.
20. Configure the ports in the XPDR 2 COMMUNICATION window if the GTS 8XX is connected to
a transponder (only required for a GTS 820/850 installation). For the ARINC 429 ports, configure
the Speed to HIGH or LOW as required by the installation.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-57
5.5.14 GSR 56 Configuration
If the GSR 56 Iridium transceiver is installed and connected to the GDU 620, the GSR 56 features that will
be used must be enabled.
1. Go to the IRIDIUM CONFIGURATION
page in the GSR page group.
2. Activate the cursor and select a feature. Press
ENT to enable/disable as desired. The
ENABLE box will be green if the feature is
enabled, and black if the feature is disabled.
3. Ensure that the RUDICS number setting is
0088160000576. If the RUDICS number
setting is incorrect, select the RUDICS
number field and press ENT. Use the
concentric knobs to correct the number and press ENT again.
4. Deactivate the cursor.
5. If position reporting is enabled, go to the
POSITION REPORTING page in the GSR
page group.
6. Activate the cursor and select REPORT
TYPE and choose Standard or AFF.
7. Select PERIOD and select Automatic or Off
8. If Automatic is selected then set an interval
between two minutes and 60 minutes.

NOTE
A lower position reporting interval (PERIOD) may increase the charges for the Iridium
service.

NOTE
The position reporting settings may also be adjusted in Normal mode using the POSITION
REPORTING page in the AUX page group on the MFD.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-58 Rev. L
5.5.15 Miscellaneous System Interfaces
5.5.15.1 Meggitt (Cobham) Engine Instrumentation Display System (EIDS)
1. Go to the ARINC PORT CONFIG page in the
SYS page group (see Figure 5-13).
2. Activate the cursor and move the ARINC 429
OUTPUT window.
3. Configure the output that is used (see
Figure F-39) for the EIDS as follows:
a) Speed: High
b) Output: DFCS 1, DFCS 4, or
GENERAL PURPOSE 1.

NOTE
If an autopilot is connected to ARINC OUT 2,
then the EIDS must be connected to and
configured for ARINC OUT 3 or 4.

NOTE
Not all ARINC 429 output settings are
available on all output ports. Refer to
Section 5.5.1.8 of the GDU 620 Installation
Manual (P/N 190-00601-04) for more
information.
Figure 5-13. ARINC PORT CONFIG Page

5.5.15.2 EMCA Stick Pusher and Warntone Generator

If an external stall protection and warning unit is used to provide fast/slow data to the GDU 620, the
GDU 620 must be configured to enable the fast/slow display on the PFD. This section describes how to
configure the GDU 620 to enable the fast/slow indication.

NOTE
Prior to beginning any installation that requires a fast/slow display, contact Garmin
regarding the availability of the ARINC 429 Fast/Slow feature enablement card.

1. Enable the Fast/Slow (ARINC 429) feature (see Section 5.5.5.10).

2. Activate the cursor and move the ARINC 429 INPUT window.
3. Configure the ARINC 429 input that is used (see Figure F-39) for the Fast/Slow as follows:
a) Speed: Low
b) Input: Fast/Slow 1

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-59
5.5.16 Updating the Configuration Module

NOTE
The soft keys shown below are only
displayed if an Installer Unlock Card is
inserted in the GDU 620.

When all of the items have been configured as

described in this section, go to the Software Upload
page and press the UPDT CFG soft key. Press ENT
to confirm and update the configuration module.
When the configuration module has been
successfully updated, “Config Module Update
Complete” will be displayed with no error messages.
If error messages are displayed, verify that the
configuration module is correctly installed.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-60 Rev. L
5.6 GRS 77 AHRS Calibration and Check
The GRS 77 AHRS will not provide valid outputs until the following calibration procedures are
completed. The Magnetometer Calibration Procedure must be carried out at a site that is determined to be
free of magnetic disturbances. If it is unsure whether the site is ‘clean’ the technician should verify that the
site is ‘clean’ by following the guidance provided in Section 5.6.7. The technician may skip 
Section 5.6.7 if the site condition is acceptable.

NOTE
Prior to completion of the GRS 77 Pitch/Roll Offset Compensation (Section 5.6.1) and
GRS 77/GMU 44 Magnetometer Calibration (Section 5.6.2) procedures, the annunciation
CALIBRATE AHRS/MAG will be displayed on the PFD and the attitude and heading will
appear valid. However, as soon as the aircraft moves the displayed attitude and heading
will become invalid. This condition is normal and will automatically clear as soon as the
two listed calibration procedures are successfully completed.

5.6.1 GRS 77 Pitch/Roll Offset Compensation

NOTE
In order to run the Pitch/Roll Offset Compensation Procedure, an Installer Unlock Card
(P/N 010-00769-60) is required.

This procedure must be carried out with the engine off. Select the GRS page group on the MFD and go to
the GRS/GMU calibration page.
1. Level the aircraft to within 0.25° of zero
pitch and zero roll using the procedures in
the Airplane Maintenance Manual.
2. Initiate the AHRS Ground Pitch/Roll
Aircraft Level compensation mode by
performing the following steps:
a) Select PITCH/ROLL OFFSET, then
press the ENT key.
b) Follow the checklist items displayed
on the MFD and press the ENT key as
each one is completed or confirmed.
When the CALIBRATE field is
blinking, press the ENT key to begin
the procedure.
c) After several seconds, a new checklist appears in the lower half of the MFD. Press the ENT
key as each item is confirmed. When the CONFIRM AIRCRAFT IS LEVEL field is
blinking, press the ENT key to continue.
3. The result of the pitch/roll offset compensation is displayed on the MFD. If successful, the AHRS
records the required pitch and roll offsets, informs the operator of a successful conclusion and
returns to normal operation.
4. Press the ENT key to conclude this procedure.
5. For dual G600 installations, repeat steps 2 through 4 with GDU 620 #2.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-61
5.6.2 GRS 77/GMU 44 Magnetometer Calibration

CAUTION
This Magnetometer Calibration Procedure should be carried out on a compass rose in
order to guarantee measurements free of environmental magnetic disturbances. However,
if a compass rose is not readily available a sight compass may be used. Attempting to
carry out this procedure on a typical ramp area may not yield a successful calibration.
The accuracy of the AHRS cannot be guaranteed if this calibration is not performed on a
magnetically clean and level surface. If the magnetic cleanliness of the proposed surface
is not known, it is recommended that the technician follow the guidance in Section 5.6.7.

NOTE
The calibration procedure in Section 5.6.1 must be completed prior to performing this
procedure.

NOTE
In order to run the Magnetometer Calibration procedure, an Installer Unlock Card 
(P/N 010-00769-60) is required.

NOTE
Performing the Magnetometer Calibration removes any stored heading offset values.

1. Start the aircraft engine in accordance with the aircraft Airplane Flight Manual or Pilot’s Operating
Handbook.
2. After aircraft engine startup, taxi the aircraft to a properly calibrated compass rose.
3. At the compass rose, align the aircraft to a heading of magnetic north (5°).

NOTE
For dual G600 installations, the following procedure must be performed on each
GDU 620. The calibration on each GDU 620 can be done simultaneously. When
performing the steps below, follow the turn prompts on GDU 620 #1.

4. Ensure an Installer Unlock Card is inserted in

the bottom slot of the GDU 620.
5. Restart the GDU 620 in Configuration mode.
6. Go to the GRS Page Group on the MFD and
select the GRS/GMU Calibration page.
7. Activate the cursor and highlight the
SELECT PROCEDURE window and select
MAGNETOMETER.
8. Press the ENT button.
9. Use the cursor to highlight the BEFORE
CALIBRATION window.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-62 Rev. L
10. Follow the checklist items displayed on the MFD and press the ENT key as each one is completed
or confirmed. When the CALIBRATE field is blinking, press the ENT key to begin the procedure.
11. The MFD display advises the operator when to turn the aircraft, when to stop, and when to turn
again.
12. Upon instruction to turn, taxi the aircraft in a right turn. After approximately 25° to 30° of turn
from the last heading, the MFD display advises the operator to stop the aircraft.

NOTE
Due to the difficulties in executing smooth, accurate turns the MFD may incorrectly
interpret a station and instruct to “HOLD POSITION” prior to full completion of a 30°
turn. If this scenario is encountered, it is best for the operator to ignore the “HOLD
POSITION” command and instead use outside references to complete the approximate
30° turn. Instead of using the MFD instruction to turn as a real-time indication of when to
turn, simply judge the 30° (±5°) turn increments of the aircraft by using the compass rose
radials. Dwelling at these 30° increments for the time recommended by the MFD should
result in successful calibration.
13. The MFD guides the operator to dwell at multiple headings around a complete circle.

NOTE
Due to high winds or excessive airframe vibration, the operator may encounter a
condition where the MFD restarts the 18-second countdown without full completion of the
previous countdown. If this is encountered more than once for a given station, the operator
should begin turning to the next station (approximately 30°). A minimum of two successful
stations per quadrant is required, where a successful station is a full 18-second countdown
followed by instruction to move. Ensure that at least two stations per quadrant are
completed. Thus, it may sometimes be required to dwell at a station after a countdown
restart. A maximum of 20 stations is allowed for the entire calibration procedure. If too
many countdown restarts are encountered, the calibration will fail with the message,
“TOO MANY STATIONS.”
14. Repeat the turn-and-stop process until the MFD advises that a successful calibration is complete.
The GRS 77 AHRS then enters its normal operational mode. Press the ENT key on the GDU 620
to conclude this procedure.
5.6.3 Compass Swing
After the Magnetic Calibration Procedure is completed, a compass swing must be performed to verify the
GRS 77/GMU 44 heading accuracy. If each heading displayed on the PFD (or PFD #1 and PFD #2) is
within ±3° of the actual heading no further adjustments are necessary. Otherwise, additional adjustments
are required, as described below the procedure in Section 5.6.4 must be performed.
1. With all of the aircraft and avionics systems powered and operating normally, position the aircraft
on a known compass rose at a heading 360° (North), or select a level and magnetically clean
location and use a sight compass to position the aircraft to a heading of 360° (North).
2. Record the heading displayed on the PFD (or PFD #1 and PFD #2 for a dual G600 installation) in
Table 5-31. Also record the heading displayed on the standby compass (these values can be used to
complete the standby compass calibration card).
3. Repeat step 2 for each of the headings listed in Table 5-31.
4. Calculate the heading errors by subtracting the displayed (B) value from the actual (A) value for
each of the headings in Table 5-31.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-63
Table 5-31. Heading Verification
PFD (OR PFD #1 (FOR DUAL INSTALLATIONS))
Displayed PFD Stby Compass
Heading (A) Heading Error (A-B)
or PFD #1 Heading (B) Heading
360° (North)
30°
60°
90° (East)
120°
150°
180° (South)
210°
240°
270° (West)
300°
330°

PFD #2 (FOR DUAL INSTALLATIONS ONLY)

Heading (A) Displayed PFD #2 Heading (B) Heading Error (A-B)
360° (North)
30°
60°
90° (East)
120°
150°
180° (South)
210°
240°
270° (West)
300°
330°

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-64 Rev. L
5.6.3.1 Single GDU™ 620 Installations
1. If all calculated heading errors for the PFD are between -3° and +3° inclusive, the installation is
acceptable and no further work is required to correct the GMU 44 installation. Proceed to
Section 5.6.5.
2. If all calculated heading errors are between -5° and +5° inclusive, the heading offset procedure can
be used to correct the GMU 44 installation. Proceed to Section 5.6.4.

NOTE
If at least one Heading Error (A-B) is greater than 5° / less than –5°, DO NOT perform the
heading offset procedure in Section 5.6.4 until the GMU 44 installation has been
physically corrected.

3. If at least one Heading Error (A-B) is greater than 5° / less than -5°, calculate the average error by
adding all errors and dividing by 12. This is the angle by which the GMU 44 must be physically
rotated to correct the installation.
4. Modify the installation to rotate the GMU 44 by the amount calculated in the previous step. When
looking down at the GMU 44, rotate clockwise for positive values, and counterclockwise for
negative values.
5. After physically correcting the GMU 44 installation, repeat the procedures in Section 5.6.2 and
this section.
5.6.3.2 Dual GDU™ 620 Installations
The installation of both GMU 44s must be verified individually using GDU 620 #1 for GMU 44 #1, and
GDU 620 #2 for GMU 44 #2.
1. If all calculated heading errors for PFD #1 are between -3° and +3° inclusive, the installation of the
#1 system is acceptable and no further work is required to correct the GMU 44 #1 installation. Go
to step 6 for #2 system checks, and proceed to Section 5.6.5 for further tests to be performed on
GDU 620 #1.
2. If all calculated heading errors are between -5° and +5° inclusive, the heading offset procedure can
be used to correct the GMU 44 #1 installation. Go to step 6 for #2 system checks, and proceed to
Section 5.6.4 for further tests to be performed on GDU 620 #1.

NOTE
If at least one Heading Error (A-B) is greater than 5° / less than –5°, DO NOT perform the
heading offset procedure in Section 5.6.4 until the GMU 44 #1 installation has been
physically corrected.

3. If at least one Heading Error (A-B) is greater than 5° / less than -5°, calculate the average error by
adding all PFD #1 heading errors and dividing by 12. This is the angle by which GMU 44 #1 must
be physically rotated to correct the installation.
4. Modify the installation to rotate the GMU 44 #1 by the amount calculated in the previous step.
When looking down at the GMU 44, rotate clockwise for positive values, and counterclockwise
for negative values.
5. After physically correcting the GMU 44 #1 installation, repeat the procedures in Section 5.6.2 and
Section 5.6.3 on PFD #1 only.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-65
6. If all calculated heading errors for PFD #2 are between -3° and +3° inclusive, the installation of
the #2 system is acceptable and no further work is required to correct the GMU 44 #2 installation.
Proceed to Section 5.6.5 for further tests to be performed on GDU2.
7. If all calculated heading errors are between -5° and +5° inclusive, the heading offset procedure can
be used to correct the GMU 44 #2 installation. Proceed to Section 5.6.4 for further tests to be
performed on GDU2.

NOTE
If at least one Heading Error (A-B) is greater than 5 degrees / less than –5 degrees, DO
NOT perform the heading offset procedure in Section 5.6.4 until the GMU 44 #2
installation has been physically corrected.

8. If at least one Heading Error (A-B) is greater than 5 degrees / less than -5 degrees, calculate the
average error by adding all PFD #2 heading errors and dividing by 12. This is the angle by which
GMU 44 #2 must be physically rotated to correct the installation.
9. Modify the installation to rotate the GMU 44 #2 by the amount calculated in the previous step.
When looking down at the GMU 44, rotate clockwise for positive values, and counterclockwise
for negative values.
10. After physically correcting the GMU 44 #2 installation, repeat the procedures in Section 5.6.2 and
Section 5.6.3 on PFD #2 only.
5.6.4 Heading Offset Compensation

NOTE
The heading offset compensation procedure is not required if it was determined in
Section 5.6.3 that all calculated heading errors are between -3° and +3° inclusive. If at
least one heading error was greater than 3° or less than -3°, but all heading errors were
between -5° and +5° inclusive, use the heading offset compensation procedure to correct
the errors. Otherwise, physically correct the appropriate GMU 44 installation BEFORE
performing the heading offset compensation procedure.

NOTE
If heading offset compensation procedure must be performed on both GDU1 and GDU2 it
is permitted to run the procedure below simultaneously on each GDU 620.

NOTE
In order to run the Heading Offset Compensation procedure an Installer Unlock Card
(P/N 010-00769-60) is required.

NOTE
Magnetometer Calibration procedure must be performed BEFORE the Heading Offset
Compensation procedure. Performing the Magnetometer Calibration removes any stored
heading offset values.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-66 Rev. L
1. Ensure an Installer Unlock Card is inserted in
the bottom slot of the GDU 620.
2. Restart the appropriate GDU 620 in
Configuration mode.
3. Go to the GRS Page Group on the MFD and
select the GRS/GMU Calibration page.
4. Select the HEADING OFFSET procedure and
press the ENT key.
5. Follow the checklist items displayed on the
MFD, and press the ENT key as each one is
completed or confirmed (press ENT on each
GDU 620 if the procedure is being run
simultaneously on both GDU 620s). When the CALIBRATE field is blinking, press the ENT key
to begin the procedure.
6. The MFD display instructs the operator to turn to headings of 360°, 90°, 180° and 270°. Press the
ENT key to confirm each heading.
7. When the operator has successfully completed the heading offset procedure, CALIBRATION
SUCCESSFUL will flash. Press the ENT key on the GDU 620 to conclude this procedure.
5.6.5 Engine Run-Up Vibration Test

NOTE
An Installer Unlock Card is not required to run the Engine Run-Up Test.

NOTE
The calibration procedures in Section 5.6.1 through Section 5.6.4 do not have to be
completed prior to performing this procedure.

NOTE
For dual G600 installations, the following procedure must be performed on EACH
GDU 620 and GRS 77. The run-up procedure can be done simultaneously on each
GDU 620. Ensure CALIBRATE is displayed on both GDU 620s before proceeding. Follow
the prompts on GDU 620 #1.

Initiate the AHRS engine run-up vibration test procedure by performing the following steps:

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-67
1. Select the ENGINE RUN-UP TEST
procedure and press the ENT key.
2. Follow the checklist items displayed on the
MFD, and press the ENT key as each one is
completed or confirmed. When the
CALIBRATE field is blinking, press the ENT
key to begin the procedure.
3. The MFD display instructs the operator to
gradually increase power from idle to full
throttle and back to idle over a period of 1-2
minutes.
4. When the operator has completed the engine
run-up and the engine is back to an idle setting, press the ENT key to indicate that the process is
complete. When this is done, the TEST COMPLETE field stops blinking.
5. The MFD informs the operator if the installation has passed or failed the vibration test. If the test
fails, the specific measurements causing the failure are identified and numeric values are displayed
on the MFD.
6. Press the ENT key on the MFD to conclude this procedure.

NOTE
If failures are indicated, the engine run-up test may be repeated at most two more times. If
the test does not pass after three attempts, then the installation should not be considered
reliable until the source of the vibration problem is identified and remedied. In the event of
repeated failure of the engine run-up test, record the values that are reported to be out of
range for future reference.

The following are potential causes for failure of the engine run-up test:
• Vibration motion of GRS 77 and/or GMU 44 caused by neighboring equipment and/or supports.
• Mounting screws and other hardware for GRS 77 and/or GMU 44 not firmly attached.
• GRS 77 connector not firmly attached to unit.
• Cabling leading to GRS 77 or GMU 44 not firmly secured to supporting structure.
• An engine / propeller that is significantly out of balance.
The aircraft can now be taxied back and the engine can be shut down for final testing. Following a
successful AHRS calibration, when the PFD powers up in Normal mode, the AHRS attitude and heading
information displayed should become valid within one minute of power-up.
5.6.6 Magnetometer Interference Test

NOTE
For dual G600 installations, the following procedure must be performed on EACH
GDU 620/GMU44. The interference test procedure can be done simultaneously on each
GDU 620.

NOTE
An Installer Unlock Card is not required to run the Magnetometer Interference Test.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-68 Rev. L
With the GDU 620 in Configuration mode, initiate the GRS 77 AHRS magnetometer interference test
procedure by performing the following steps:
1. Select the GRS page group on the MFD. Go to the GRS/GMU Calibration page, shown in
Figure 5-14 select the MAG INTERFERENCE TEST procedure and press the ENT key.
2. Follow the checklist items displayed on the MFD, and press the ENT key as each one is completed
or confirmed.

NOTE
The third item on the checklist instructs the
operator to prepare a detailed test sequence
list with precise start and stop times for
exercising all electronic devices. Only the
electronic devices that are likely to affect the
operation of the GMU 44 magnetometer need
be included in the test sequence. The list of
relevant electronic devices varies from
aircraft to aircraft. This sequence is the same
sequence developed for the magnetometer
interference survey in Section G.

3. When the CALIBRATE field is blinking,

press the ENT key to begin the procedure (as
soon as the ENT key is pressed this time, a
CALIBRATION PROCEDURE window will
appear). Have a stopwatch ready to begin
recording the elapsed time.
4. The operator should carry out the actions
called for in the prepared test sequence.

NOTE
It is important that all actions are carried out
in the order and at the precise elapsed time as Figure 5-14. GRS/GMU Calibration Page
specified in the prepared test sequence.

NOTE
If performing the procedure on both GDU 620s simultaneously, wait until the “Begin test
sequence” text appears on both GDU 620s before proceeding.

5. After the “Begin test sequence” white text appears, wait approximately five seconds and perform
each of the actions listed in the test sequence table (refer to Table G-2 for an example of a test
sequence).
6. When the test sequence is completed, wait approximately five seconds and then press the ENT key
to complete the test. When this is done, the TEST COMPLETE field stops blinking.
7. Press the ENT key on the MFD to conclude this procedure.
8. The MFD informs the operator if the installation has passed or failed the magnetometer
interference test.
9. If the test passes, no further action is required.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-69
10. If the test fails, the installation should be considered unreliable until the source of magnetic
interference is identified and remedied. The magnetometer interference test must be repeated until
passed. When the magnetometer interference test fails, record the three magnetometer maximum
deviation values and their corresponding timestamps. A maximum deviation value greater than 5.0
milliGauss in either the X or Y axes, or greater than 8.0 milliGauss in the Z axis indicates a
problem that must be resolved. Compare the corresponding timestamps with the prepared test
sequence to identify which action produced the problem. Contact Garmin for assistance in
resolving the problem.
Two common reasons for a failed magnetometer interference test are:
• New equipment is installed in close proximity to the GMU 44 magnetometer.
• An existing or new electronic device has become grounded through the aircraft structure instead of
via the proper ground wire in a twisted shielded pair, especially if the ground return path through
the aircraft structure passes near the GMU 44.
5.6.7 Site Evaluation of Magnetic Disturbances (Optional)

NOTE
Typically, a compass rose is an acceptable location to perform the magnetometer
calibration procedure. However, because not all compass roses are well maintained, even
an existing compass rose should be regularly evaluated using the method described here
to determine if it is free of magnetic disturbances. If evaluation of an existing compass
rose indicates that magnetic disturbances are present, then an alternative location must be
found to perform the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure.

NOTE
In order to perform the Site Evaluation for Magnetic Disturbances, an Installer Unlock
Card (P/N 010-00769-60) is required.

A G600-equipped airplane can be used to evaluate a candidate site for magnetic disturbances and
determine whether it is a suitable location to perform the magnetometer calibration procedure. The
magnetometer calibration procedure itself contains the logic to simultaneously survey the location for
magnetic cleanliness while it is computing the magnetometer calibration parameters.
The G600-equipped airplane used to evaluate the site must have already completed the Pitch/Roll offset
compensation procedure (Section 5.6.1). However, prior completion of the Magnetometer Calibration
Procedure (Section 5.6.2) is not required.
In order to evaluate a candidate site, the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure must be performed twice:
once turning clockwise around the site, and once turning counter-clockwise. Both times, the procedure
should be conducted as described in Section 5.6.2 of this document, with the exception of the direction of
turns around the site.

NOTE
Although Section 5.6.2 indicates that the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure should be
performed by making a series of clockwise turns around the site, the procedure can also be
performed by making counter-clockwise turns for the purpose of evaluating the site for
magnetic disturbances.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-70 Rev. L
If, upon completion of the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure in each clockwise and counter-clockwise
direction, the PFD displays the “CALIBRATION SUCCESSFUL / SITE IS CLEAN” message, then the
candidate site is sufficiently free of magnetic disturbances and is acceptable for performing the
Magnetometer Calibration Procedure. It is important to obtain successful results in both the clockwise and
counter-clockwise directions to ensure that the magnetometer sweeps over a large enough area at the
candidate site.
If, upon completion of the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure in either of the two directions, the PFD
displays either the “MAG FIELD AT SITE NOT UNIFORM”, or “MAG FIELD AT SITE DIFFERS
FROM IGRF MODEL” message, then the site contains magnetic disturbances that are too large and an
alternate site should be used for the GRS 77/GMU 44 Magnetic Calibration procedure.
5.7 External System Adjustments

NOTE
The instructions for Site Evaluation of Magnetic Disturbances have been moved to
Section 5.6.7.

5.7.1 ARINC 708 Weather Radars

The ARINC 708 weather radar (WXR) configuration
page is shown in Figure 5-15.

NOTE
The GAD 43 OUTPUT window is only
displayed when the WXR is in calibration
mode and will not be displayed if the GAD 43
Adapter is not present in the system. This
window allows you to set the analog pitch and
roll outputs from the GAD 43 to specific
values. Any pitch/roll adjustments in this
window will only affect the GAD 43 analog
outputs and will not affect the attitude output
from the GRS 77.

NOTE
With GDU 620 version 6.11, if the GAD 43e is
used to provide analog stabilization, the GAD
43 OUTPUT window will never be displayed. Figure 5-15. A708 WEATHER RADAR
To complete analog stabilization calibration, Configuration Page
temporarily set the Adapter TYPE to GAD 43
on the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION page and
then perform the calibration. When complete,
reset the Adapter TYPE to GAD 43e on the
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION page.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-71
5.7.1.1 Honeywell (Bendix/King) 2XXX Series Radars
This section describes Post-Installation System Configuration and Calibration of the Bendix/King RDR-
2000 and RDR-2100 Radar Systems using the GDU620. The CM 2000 Configuration Module for the
WXR must be configured using the Honeywell (Bendix/King) KPA 900 Configuration Module
Programmer Kit (P/N 050-03311-0000) in conjunction with a personal computer. Refer to the
configuration module programmer operator’s guide for detailed setup instructions. Follow the instructions
for the programmer, and any required weather radar settings contained in Section E.10 herein.
5.7.1.1.1 Weather Radar Calibration Mode
Place the WXR in calibration mode as follows:
1. Go to the A708 WEATHER RADAR page in the WXR page group.
2. Activate the cursor and set the RADAR MODE to TEST.
3. Move the cursor to the CALIBRATION field and set to ON. Wait for the WXR to enter calibration
mode – all status boxes will flash briefly to indicate that the radar is in calibration mode.

NOTE
If the radar status boxes do not flash (i.e. the radar does not go into calibration mode),
keep the radar in TEST mode and set the CALIBRATION field to OFF and back to ON.

5.7.1.1.2 Antenna Clearance Check

Perform the antenna clearance check as follows:
1. Ensure that the WXR is in calibration mode. Refer to Section 5.7.1.1.1.
2. Adjust the GAIN field to a value of -26.5 to -28.0, and set the TILT SETTINGS field to 14.75U.
This will initiate the antenna clearance scan. The antenna will move to each of the extreme
positions to determine that there is no interference with antenna movement and all scan motors are
working properly.
5.7.1.1.3 Stabilization Calibration

NOTE
The GAD 43/43e may be used to provide analog stabilization to the WXR. If this is the
case, the PITCH and ROLL fields in the GAD 43 OUTPUT window on the A708
WEATHER RADAR page can be used to adjust the attitude being supplied to the WXR.
There will be no need to remove the GRS 77 from the aircraft and place it on a tilt table to
achieve the pitch/roll values specified in the calibration procedure.

Perform the WXR stabilization calibration as follows:

1. Ensure that the radar is in calibration mode. Refer to Section 5.7.1.1.1.
2. Note the ROLL TRIM value for re-entry following the stabilization calibration procedure. Adjust
the ROLL TRIM field to 0.000°.
3. Beginning with the 400 Hz REF GAIN procedure, follow the instructions in section 2.4.4.1 of the
RDR 2000 Installation Manual (Honeywell P/N 006-00643-0007) or the RDR 2100 Installation
Manual (Honeywell P/N 006-00648-0002).
4. If the roll trim value was recorded from the previous WXR indicator or noted in step 2, set the
ROLL TRIM field on the GDU 620 to this value.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-72 Rev. L
5.7.1.2 Honeywell (Bendix/King) RDS 8X Series Radars
This section describes Post-Installation System Configuration and Calibration of the Bendix/King 
RDS-81 (RS 811A) and RDS-82 (RS 181A) Systems using the GDU 620.
5.7.1.2.1 Weather Radar Calibration Mode
Place the WXR in calibration mode as follows:
1. Go to the A708 WEATHER RADAR page in the WXR page group.
2. Activate the cursor and set the RADAR MODE to TEST.
3. Move the cursor to the CALIBRATION field and set to ON. Wait for the WXR to enter calibration
mode – the RX TX box will turn red when the radar enters calibration mode.
5.7.1.2.2 Stabilization Calibration

NOTE
The GAD 43/43e may be used to provide stabilization to the WXR. If this is the case, the
PITCH and ROLL fields in the GAD 43 OUTPUT window on the A708 WEATHER
RADAR page can be used to adjust the attitude being supplied to the WXR. There will be
no need to remove the GRS 77 from the aircraft and place it on a tilt table to achieve the
pitch/roll values specified in the calibration procedure.
Perform the WXR stabilization calibration as follows:
1. Ensure that the radar is in calibration mode. Refer to Section 5.7.1.2.1.
2. Note the ROLL TRIM value for re-entry following the stabilization calibration procedure. Adjust
the ROLL TRIM field to 0.000°.
3. Beginning with the step C in section 2.3.6.3 of the RDS 81 Installation Manual (Honeywell
P/N 006-00954-0001) or the RDS 82 Installation Manual (Honeywell P/N 006-00955-0006),
perform the stabilization alignment in the aircraft.
4. If the roll trim value was recorded from the previous WXR indicator or noted in step 2, set the
ROLL TRIM field on the GDU 620 to this value.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-73
5.7.2 Honeywell (Bendix-King) Autopilot Adjustments
5.7.2.1 KAP 100 / KAP 150 / KFC 150 Autopilots
5.7.2.1.1 Gyro Alignment Procedure

NOTE
The following alignment is only required if the GAD 43/43e is be used to provide analog
attitude to the autopilot.

1. Start the GDU 620 in Configuration Mode.

2. Go to the GAD 43 page in the GAD page
group.
3. Activate the cursor and ensure that the
RELAY POSITION is set to ATTITUDE
VALID.
4. Perform the “Gyro Alignment Procedures” as
specified in the King Installation Manual with
the following difference:
◦ The use of a tilt table is not required,
and it is not necessary to remove the
GRS 77 from the aircraft. To set pitch
and roll as directed in the procedure,
activate the cursor on the GDU 620 and
set the PITCH ANGLE and ROLL
ANGLE to the desired values.
5.7.2.2 KFC 250 Autopilot
5.7.2.2.1 Gyro Alignment Procedure

NOTE
The following alignment is only required if the GAD 43/43e is be used to provide analog
attitude to the autopilot.
1. Start the GDU 620 in Configuration Mode.
2. Go to the GAD 43 page in the GAD page
group.
3. Activate the cursor and ensure that the
RELAY POSITION is set to ATTITUDE
VALID.
4. Perform the “Alignment Procedure” as
specified in the King Installation Manual with
the following difference:
◦ The use of a tilt table is not required,
and it is not necessary to remove the
GRS 77 from the aircraft. To set pitch
and roll as directed in the procedure,
activate the cursor on the GDU 620 and
set the PITCH ANGLE and ROLL
ANGLE to the desired values.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-74 Rev. L
5.7.2.3 KFC 225 Autopilot
5.7.2.3.1 Gyro Alignment Procedure

NOTE
The following alignment is only required if the GAD 43/43e is be used to provide analog
attitude to the autopilot.

1. Start the GDU 620 in Configuration Mode.

2. Go to the GAD 43 page in the GAD page
group (refer to Figure 5-16).
3. Activate the cursor and ensure that the
RELAY POSITION is set to ATTITUDE
VALID.

NOTE
Whenever level pitch attitude (indicated) is
referenced in the Honeywell KFC 225 Flight
Control System Installation Manual, set the
GAD 43 PITCH ANGLE to 0° regardless of
the instrument panel tilt.

4. Perform the Attitude Gyro Calibration

procedure as specified in the King Figure 5-16. GAD 43 Output Test Page
Installation Manual 006-10557-0006, except
that the use of a tilt table is not required, and it is not necessary to remove the GRS 77 from the
aircraft. To set pitch and roll as directed in the procedure, activate the cursor on the GDU 620 and
set the PITCH ANGLE and ROLL ANGLE in the GAD 43 Output Test window to the desired
values.
5.7.2.3.2 Flight Director Gain Adjustment Procedure

CAUTION
The Honeywell KFC 225 Flight Control System Installation and Maintenance Manual
specific to the aircraft being modified must be used whenever making flight director
adjustments.

NOTE
The following adjustment is required for all KFC 225 installations displaying the flight
director on the GDU 620.

NOTE
The following procedure assumes that the GAD 43/43e is used to supply attitude
information to the autopilot. If the existing attitude gyro is retained to provide attitude
information to the autopilot, the existing procedure of installing the attitude gyro on a tilt
stand must be followed (refer to the Honeywell KFC 225 Flight Control System
Installation Manual).

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-75
NOTE
Whenever level pitch attitude (indicated) is referenced in the Honeywell KFC 225 Flight
Control System Installation Manual, set the GAD 43 PITCH ANGLE to 0° regardless of
the instrument panel tilt.

CAUTION
The Honeywell KFC 225 Flight Control System Installation and Maintenance Manual
specific to the aircraft being modified must be used whenever making flight director
adjustments.

1. Start the GDU 620 in Configuration Mode.

2. Go to the GAD 43 page in the GAD page group (refer to Figure 5-16).
3. Activate the cursor and ensure that the RELAY
POSITION is set to ATTITUDE VALID.
4. Perform the Flight Director Gain Adjustment
Procedure as specified in the aircraft specific
Honeywell KFC 225 Flight Control System
Installation and Maintenance Manual with the
following differences:
◦ The use of a tilt table is not required, and it is
not necessary to remove the GRS 77 from the
aircraft. To set pitch and roll as directed in
the procedure, activate the cursor on the
GAD 43 page in the GAD page group (refer
to Figure 5-16) and set the PITCH ANGLE
and ROLL ANGLE to the desired values.
◦ To view the flight director commands, go to
the FLIGHT DIRECTOR CAL page in the
FCS page group (refer to 
Figure 5-17) and view the FD PITCH and FD Figure 5-17. FLIGHT DIRECTOR CAL
ROLL angles in the monitor window. Page

5.7.2.3.3 Altimeter Calibration Procedure

NOTE
The following alignment is only required if the GAD 43/43e is be used to provide analog
baro-correction to the autopilot.

1. Start the GDU 620 in Normal Mode.

2. Perform the Altimeter Calibration procedure as specified in the King Installation Manual with the
following difference:
◦ When instructed to set the barometric setting to 29.92 inches, set the barometric setting on
the GDU 620 to 29.92 inches.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-76 Rev. L
5.7.2.4 KFC 325/275 Autopilot
5.7.2.4.1 Flightline Gyro Alignment Procedure (KFC 275 Only)
1. Start the GDU 620 in Configuration Mode.
2. Go to the GAD 43 page in the GAD page
group.
3. Activate the cursor and ensure that the
RELAY POSITION is set to ATTITUDE
VALID.
4. Perform the “Flightline Gyro Alignment
Procedure” as specified in the King
Installation Manual with the following
difference:
◦ The use of a tilt table is not required,
and it is not necessary to remove the
GRS 77 from the aircraft. To set pitch
and roll as directed in the procedure,
activate the cursor on the GDU 620
and set the PITCH ANGLE and
ROLL ANGLE to the desired values.

5.7.2.4.2 Roll Adjustment Procedure (KFC 325 Only)

1. Ensure that the GDU 620 is in
Configuration Mode.
2. Go to the GAD 43 page in the GAD page
group.
3. Activate the cursor and ensure that the
RELAY POSITION is set to ATTITUDE
VALID.
4. Set the PITCH ANGLE and ROLL ANGLE
to 0.
5. Engage the Flight Director and Autopilot.
The control wheel should not move. If the
control wheel turns, adjust the roll null (RN)
pot on the side of the KMC 321 to stop the
movement.
5.7.2.4.3 In-Flight Adjustments
Perform the In-Flight adjustments for roll, lateral acceleration (yaw) and command bar positioning as
specified in the Bendix/King Installation Manual.
5.7.3 Cessna 300B/400B/800B Autopilots
5.7.3.1 Gyro Alignment Procedure
1. Start the GDU 620 in Configuration Mode.
2. Go to the GAD 43 page in the GAD page group.
3. Activate the cursor and ensure that the RELAY POSITION is set to ATTITUDE VALID.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-77
4. Preform the “Roll Error Output Null Adjustment”, “Roll Gyro Gain Adjustment”, “Pitch Error
Output Null Adjustment”, and the “Pitch Gyro Gain Adjustment” per the Cessna Autopilot System
Service Manual with the following difference:
◦ The use of a tilt table is not required and it is not necessary to remove the GRS 77 from the
aircraft. To set pitch and roll as directed in the procedure activate the cursor on the GDU 620
and set the PITCH ANGLE and ROLL ANGLE to the desired values.
5.7.4 Cessna 1000 Autopilots
5.7.4.1 Gyro Alignment Procedure
1. Start the GDU 620 in Configuration Mode.
2. Go to the GAD 43 page in the GAD page group.
3. Activate the cursor and ensure that the RELAY POSITION is set to ATTITUDE VALID.
4. Perform “Attitude Gyro System Interface Adjustments” per the Cessna Autopilot System Service
Manual with the following difference:
◦ The use of a tilt table is not required and it is not necessary to remove the GRS 77 from the
aircraft. To set pitch and roll as directed in the procedure activate the cursor on the GDU 620
and set the PITCH ANGLE and ROLL ANGLE to the desired values.
5.8 Ground Checks
The steps that are not applicable to a particular installation may be skipped.

NOTE
Throughout the checkout section references are made to particular GDU 620 functions. If
the function is not available, ensure that the GDU 620 has been configured correctly as
described in Section 5.5.

5.8.1 Database Check

1. Ensure that a G600 database card is inserted in the bottom slot of the GDU 620.
2. Turn on power to the G600 system.
3. Verify all self-tests pass on the main startup screen.

NOTE
Databases that have expired will be displayed in yellow text on the MFD startup screen.
Databases will also be displayed in yellow until a valid GPS Position has been acquired.

4. Verify the expiration on the Jeppesen NavData Database.

5. If activated, verify the expiration of the Electronic Charts Database.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-78 Rev. L
5.8.2 Pitot-Static, ADC and Airspeed Tape Settings Checks
• Verify correct operation of the GDU 620 altitude and airspeed tapes, standby altimeter and standby
airspeed indicator using a Pitot-static ramp tester.

CAUTION
When utilizing a Pitot-static ramp tester, only simulate normal aircraft operating
conditions as defined in the aircraft Type Data (POH/AFM) to avoid component damage.

NOTE
When conducting air data tests it is possible to induce attitude and/or heading errors on
the GDU 620 – this is normal system behavior. Refer to Section 6.2 for additional details.

NOTE
For a dual G600 installation, this check must be completed for each GDU 620 – both may
be verified at the same time.

NOTE
The GDC 74( ) may require a warm-up period of 15 minutes to reach full accuracy (30
minutes if the environmental temperature is less than 0°C).

5.8.2.1 Basic Airspeed Tape Setting

GDU airspeed tape display and settings must be verified in accordance with this section.

NOTE
The airspeeds referenced in the following steps are those determined in Section 5.2.4.

If the IAS TAPE is set to BASIC, verify correct operation of the GDC 74( ) ADC as follows:
1. Turn on power to the G600 system.
2. Verify all self-tests pass on the main startup screen.
3. Check the outside air temperature (OAT) measurement shown on the PFD to ensure it reads
ambient temperature.
4. Using a Pitot-static ramp tester increase the airspeed until the PFD airspeed tape pointer is at the
bottom of the white band (Vs0). Verify that the bottom of the white arc/band on the ASI and PFD
airspeed tape are at the same airspeed value.
5. Only applicable to twin engine aircraft: Increase the airspeed to the lower red radial (Vmca).
Verify that the red radial on the ASI and PFD airspeed tape are at the same airspeed value.
6. Change the airspeed until the PFD airspeed tape pointer is at the bottom of the green band (VS1).
Verify that the bottom of the green arc/band on the ASI and PFD airspeed tape are at the same
airspeed value.
7. Only applicable to twin engine aircraft: Increase the airspeed to the blue radial (Vyse) Verify that
the blue radial on the ASI and PFD airspeed tape are at the same airspeed value.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-79
8. Change the airspeed until the PFD airspeed tape pointer is at the top of the white band (Vfe).
Verify that the top of the white arc/band on the ASI and PFD airspeed tape are at the same airspeed
value.
9. Change the airspeed until the PFD airspeed tape pointer is at the top of the green band / bottom of
the yellow band (Vno). Verify that the top of the green arc/band on the ASI and PFD airspeed tape
are at the same airspeed value.
10. Increase the airspeed to the upper red radial/top of yellow arc (Vne). Verify that the red radial on
the ASI and PFD airspeed tape are at the same airspeed value.

NOTE
If the GDC 74( ) and standby airspeed indicator are on separate Pitot-static systems, their
agreement with the test set airspeed will have to be checked separately.

11. Decrease the airspeed to zero, stopping at all of the airspeeds listed in the Table 5-32 (airspeeds
above Vne should not be checked). Verify that the PFD and standby airspeed indicator display the
values within the tolerances indicated in Table 5-32.

Table 5-32. Airspeed Test Points

Test Set PFD Allowed Recommended Standby ASI

Airspeed (knots) Tolerance (knots) Tolerance (knots) [1]
50 ±5.0 ±5
80 ±3.5 ±4
100 ±2.0 ±3
120 ±2.0 ±3
150 ±2.0 ±3
180 ±2.0 ±5
210 ±2.0 ±5
250 ±2.0 ±5
290 ±3.0 ±6
[1] If available, the aircraft or instrument manufacturer’s data should be referenced for
standby tolerances.

5.8.2.2 Advanced Airspeed Tape Setting

If the IAS TAPE is set to ADVANCED, verify correct operation of the GDC 74( ) ADC as follows:

NOTE
The airspeeds referenced in the following steps are determined in accordance with
Appendix M.

1. Turn on power to the G600 system.

2. Verify all self-tests pass on the main startup screen.
3. Check the outside air temperature (OAT) measurement shown on the PFD to ensure it reads
ambient temperature.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-80 Rev. L
4. Using a Pitot-static ramp tester increase the airspeed until the PFD airspeed tape pointer is at the
bottom of the white band (Vs0). Verify that the bottom of the white arc/band on the ASI and PFD
airspeed tape are at the same airspeed value.
5. Increase the indicated airspeed throughout the range of the ASI – stop at the limits of all Arc
Ranges, and at all Markings values, as configured per Table M-1 and Table M-2. Verify that the
ranges and markings on the ASI and PFD are located at the same airspeeds values. The last value
verified should be the beginning of the barber pole (Vne/Vmo/Mmo).
6. The following applies to Variable Vne/Vmo/Mmo aircraft only:
a) Decrease the indicated airspeed to 25 KT below the barber pole on the PFD.Increase the
indicated altitude to the maximum operating altitude or service ceiling. Verify that the barber
pole on the PFD and standby ASI are at the same airspeed (+/- 5 KT). Decrease the airspeed
as needed to ensure the indicated airspeed does not exceed the barber pole during the
simulated climb.

NOTE
If the GDC 74 ( ) and standby airspeed indicator are on separate Pitot-static systems,
record the test set airspeed/altitude and PFD airspeed corresponding to the barber pole
and compare the PFD value to the standby ASI barber pole under the same conditions.

b) Decrease the indicated altitude (not exceeding vertical speed limitations) back to ambient
static pressure.
7. From the current airspeed, decrease the airspeed to zero, stopping at all of the relevant airspeeds
listed in Table 5-32 (airspeeds above Vne should not be checked). Verify that the PFD and standby
airspeed indicator display the values within the tolerances indicated.
5.8.2.3 Altimeter Check
The GDU 620 and standby altitude displays must be verified in accordance with Title 14 of the Code of
Federal Regulations (CFR) 91.411 and Part 43 Appendix E, with the following exception to 14 CFR Part
43 Appendix E, paragraph (b)(1):
• The tests of sub-paragraphs (iv) (Friction) and (Vi) (Barometric Scale Error) are not applicable
because the digital outputs of the GDC 74( ).
5.8.3 GPS Receiver Interface Test
The GDU 620 receives position and flight plan and navigation data from an external GPS navigation
source. This check verifies that the units are communicating.
1. Select GPS (or GPS1) as the navigation source for the PFD CDI.
2. Turn on the external GPS Navigator (GPS1 for installations with dual navigators). If there are dual
GPS navigators installed, ensure the second GPS navigator is switched off.
3. For a 400W/500W Series unit or GTN 6XX/7XX navigator, while on the power-up self-test page
verify that the GDU 620 CDI displays the correct lateral and vertical deviation information.
For a GNS 480 unit, while it is going through its power-up sequence, verify that the GDU 620 CDI
displays the correct lateral and vertical deviation information.
4. Wait until the navigator acquires a position before proceeding.
5. Review the active alerts on the GDU 620 (if any) and verify that the GPS1 PPS FAIL (GPS2 PPS
FAIL if using GPS 2) alert is not present.
6. Create/activate a flight plan on the GPS navigation source.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-81
7. Verify that the MFD is not displaying the message NO GPS POSITION. Verify that the active
waypoint displayed in the PFD WPT field is the same as the active waypoint on the navigator.
8. Wait one minute, and verify that the alert “AHRS1 GPS –AHRS1 not receiving any GPS
information” is not displayed on the MFD by pressing the ALERTS soft key and verifying all
active alerts.
9. Verify that the flight plan is displayed on the GDU 620 using the flight plan (FPL) function.
10. On the GPS navigator, enter OBS mode.
11. Press the CRS button on the PFD and adjust the course using the PFD knob. Verify that the course
to the active waypoint changes as the PFD course pointer is rotated.
12. Exit OBS mode on the navigator.
13. If dual GPS receivers are installed, power off GPS 1 and power on GPS 2. Select GPS2 on the CDI
and repeat steps 6 through 12.
5.8.4 Navigation Receiver Interface Test
5.8.4.1 ARINC 429 NAV Receiver (to GDU™ 620)
The GDU 620 can receive bearing and deviation information from a navigation receiver. This check
verifies that the units are communicating.
1. Ensure that the external navigation receiver (VLOC1 for installations with dual NAV receivers) is
turned on. If there are dual NAV receivers installed, ensure the second NAV receiver is switched
off.
2. Select the navigation receiver (or navigation receiver 1) as the navigation source for the PFD CDI.
3. Tune the navigation receiver to a localizer frequency (for this check it is not necessary that a valid
localizer signal is being received).
4. Verify that the CDI on the PFD displays LOC (or LOC 1/LOC 2 for installations with dual
navigators).
5. If dual navigation receivers are installed, power off NAV 1 and power on NAV 2. Select navigation
receiver 2 on the CDI. Repeat steps 3 through 4.
5.8.4.2 Analog NAV Receiver (to GAD 43e)

NOTE
Prior to conducting this check, ensure that the GAD 43e has been calibrated to the NAV
receiver in accordance with Section 5.5.11.3.

The GAD 43e can receive bearing and deviation information from a navigation receiver with composite
and low-level deviation/flag outputs. The GAD 43e converts this information to ARINC 429 and sends it
to the GDU 620 for display. This check verifies that this interface is functioning correctly.
1. Ensure that the external navigation receiver (VLOC1 for installations with dual NAV receivers) is
turned on. If there are dual NAV receivers installed, ensure the second NAV receiver is switched
off.
2. Ensure that there is a valid attitude and heading display on the GDU 620.
3. Select the navigation receiver (or navigation receiver 1) as the navigation source for the PFD CDI.
4. Tune the navigation receiver to a VOR frequency (for this check it is not necessary that a valid
VOR signal is being received).

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-82 Rev. L
5. Verify that the CDI on the PFD displays VOR (or VOR 1/VOR 2 for installations with dual
navigators).
6. Using a VOR/ILS test set, generate a zero degree FROM radial VOR signal, and tune the nav
radio(s) to the test frequency.
7. Adjust the bearing pointer until the deviation is centered and FROM is indicated.
8. Verify that the course pointer setting is 0 ± 4.
9. Repeat steps 6 and 7 using VOR FROM signals at 90, 180 and 270.
10. Verify that the course pointer is within 4 of the simulated VOR bearing.
11. Tune the navigation receiver to a localizer frequency (for this check it is not necessary that a valid
localizer signal is being received).
12. Verify that the CDI on the PFD displays LOC (or LOC 1/LOC 2 for installations with dual
navigators).
13. Set the course pointer to your current heading (i.e. straight up on the PFD CDI).
14. Using a VOR/ILS test set, generate a localizer and glideslope signal as specified in Table 5-33.
15. Verify that the course pointer deviation bar and glideslope indications are as specified in 
Table 5-33.
16. If dual navigation receivers are installed, power off NAV 1 and power on NAV 2. Select navigation
receiver 2 on the CDI. Repeat steps 4 through 15.

Table 5-33. Localizer/Glideslope Checks

Test Set Setting (DDM) GDU 620 Indication

Localizer Glideslope Localizer Glideslope
Centered Centered
0.000 0.000
(within fuselage on aircraft symbol) (covering horizontal white line)
Half-scale right Half-scale down
0.078 Right 0.088 Down
(dev bar inside of 1st dot) (1st dot covered by diamond)
Full-scale right Full-scale down
0.155 Right 0.175 Down
(dev bar inside of 2nd dot) (2nd dot covered by diamond)
Half-scale left Half-scale up
0.078 Left 0.088 Up st
(dev bar inside of 1 dot) (1st dot covered by diamond)
Full-scale left Full-scale up
0.155 Left 0.175 Up nd
(dev bar inside of 2 dot) (2nd dot covered by diamond)

5.8.5 Autopilot Interface Test

The GDU 620 can interface with various autopilots. Before proceeding with the autopilot interface tests,
verify that the GDU 620 has been configured for the installed autopilot and flight director, if applicable, as
defined in Section E.3. Only those interfaces which are directly affected by the G600 STC are covered by
this manual; if any other autopilot modifications were performed, check them in accordance with the
autopilot installation manual.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-83
WARNING
It is important that the GDU 620 be properly configured in order to prevent signals from the
GDU 620 from damaging the autopilot computer. Refer to Section E.3.

5.8.5.1 Autopilot Engagement Test

This section verifies that the autopilot can be engaged.
1. Power up the G600 and other aircraft systems. Allow the GDU 620 to obtain a valid heading,
attitude, altitude, and GPS location (from the navigator).
2. Engage the autopilot. If the autopilot cannot be engaged, troubleshoot it in accordance with the
autopilot installation manual.
3. For installations utilizing the GAD 43 to provide attitude information, press the AP TEST soft key
on the PFD. Verify that the autopilot disconnects and the servos disengage. For all other
installations, disengage the autopilot using regular means.
5.8.5.2 Flight Director Test
This section verifies that the flight director interface between the autopilot computer and the GDU 620 is
functional. This test needs to be performed only if analog or ARINC 429 the flight director outputs from
the autopilot computer have been connected to the GDU 620, and if the GDU 620 supports that flight
director. For dual G600 installations with an analog flight director, the flight director should be wired to
each GDU, and each GDU 620 should be configured separately for that flight director. For dual G600
installations with an ARINC 429 flight director, the flight director should be wired to GDU 620 #1 and
cross-filled to GDU 620 #2. Refer to Section E.3 for instructions on configuring the GDU 620 to display
the flight director.
1. Activate the flight director with the autopilot in pitch/roll or heading/altitude mode. It is not
necessary for the servos to be engaged for this test.
2. Verify that the flight director is displayed on the GDU 620. If the flight director is not displayed,
troubleshoot using the guidelines in Table 6-3.
3. With the GDU 620 in Normal mode and the flight director displayed, command the flight director
to pitch up. Verify that the command bars move up.
4. Command the flight director to pitch down. Verify that the command bars move down.
5. Command the flight director to roll right. Verify that the command bars move to the right.
6. Command the flight director to roll left. Verify that the command bars move to the left.
7. Press the Go Around button, if present. Verify that the command bars center laterally and move to
command a climb.
8. If the expected movement of the command bars does not occur, troubleshoot using the guidelines
in Table 6-3.
5.8.5.3 Flight Director Offset Calibration (if required)

NOTE
If an ADI with a flight director presentation is installed on the copilot’s side, the flight
director for this ADI must be aligned to its aircraft symbol before running this G600 flight
director offset calibration procedure. Refer to the ADI/autopilot manufacturer’s
documentation for instructions on ADI flight director alignment.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-84 Rev. L
NOTE
For ARINC 429 flight directors, the GDU 620 does not allow calibration of the flight
director offset. The offset should be adjusted on the autopilot system. Refer to Section 5.7
for any autopilot adjustments that may be required.

The previous section verified the wiring between the flight director/autopilot computer. This section
describes how to correct any offset that may be present in the flight director command bars.
1. Center the heading bug on the GDU 620 by pressing
the knob on the PFD.
2. Activate the autopilot in heading and altitude hold
mode.
3. Observe the position of the flight director bar in
relation to the aircraft icon the GDU 620 attitude
indicator.
4. If the flight director command bars are offset from
the aircraft icon in the pitch axis, take note of the
number of degrees of offset for adjustment.

NOTE
Some autopilots have a flight director pitch adjustment that is used to correct for parallax
errors in mechanical steering horizons. If possible, correct any flight director offset using
the autopilot adjustment before making changes to the GDU 620 configuration.

5. Ensure an Installer Unlock Card is inserted in

the GDU 620.
6. Start the GDU 620 in Configuration mode and
navigate to the FLIGHT DIRECTOR page in
the FCS page group.
7. Change PITCH V Ref as needed. Note that
the V/DEG ratio for the flight director is
displayed on the same page. In the sample
screenshot, the PITCH V/DEG is 0.217.
Changing the PITCH V ref by 0.217 would
move the flight director by one degree.
8. The resulting FD Pitch can be read at the
bottom of the screen. Adjust the PITCH V ref
until the FD Pitch is 0.00 ± 0.25°.
9. Restart the GDU 620 in Normal mode and
verify that the flight director is matched to the
aircraft icon.
10. For dual-GDU 620 systems, change PITCH V
ref on GDU 620 #2 to the same value as
PITCH V ref on GDU 620 #1.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-85
5.8.5.4 Altitude Preselector Test

NOTE
For dual G600 installations that use the GAD 43e, the altitude preselector and vertical
speed controller functions are connected through the GAD 43e to only the pilot’s
GDU 620. However, the copilot’s GDU 620 is also able to control and annunciate the
preselector and VS modes using cross fill. Any step that requires an action be completed
on the GDU 620 must be performed on the copilot’s GDU 620 to verify the entirety of the
interface. Any annunciation that is verified on the GDU 620 must be verified on both
GDU 620s.

5.8.5.4.1 S-TEC 55X Autopilot Without GAD 43e

NOTE
This test is applicable only for S-TEC autopilots which have the RS-485 altitude
preselector input connected to the GDU 620. The GDU 620 also must be configured for
the altitude preselector option. Reference Section 5.5.5.2 for instructions on configuring
the GDU 620 for the altitude preselector.

This test verifies that the altitude preselector between the GDU 620 and the autopilot is functional. For
dual G600 installations, the altitude preselector input to the autopilot is connected only to the pilot’s
GDU 620.
1. Power up the GDU 620 in normal mode and wait until valid air data is displayed.
2. On the GDU 620, set the selected altitude to match the displayed field elevation plus
approximately 1000 feet.
3. Engage the flight director or autopilot in HDG mode. Press ALT and VS simultaneously to select
altitude select mode.
4. Verify that ALT and VS are displayed on the autopilot. If ALT is not displayed, the autopilot is not
receiving the RS-485 altitude preselector data from the GDU 620. Troubleshoot using the
guidelines in Section 6.4.
5. Disengage the autopilot.
5.8.5.4.2 Autopilot Using GAD 43e S-TEC ST-360 Emulation (S-TEC 55X/60-2/60 PSS/65)
This test verifies that the altitude preselector and vertical speed controller functions provided by the GAD
43e to the autopilot are functional.
1. Power up the GDU 620(s) in normal mode and wait until valid attitude and air data is displayed.
2. On the GDU 620, set the selected altitude bug approximately 500 feet above the current altitude.
3. Engage the flight director or autopilot and arm ALT mode by pressing VS and ALT simultaneously
on the autopilot controller (VS and ALT should be displayed on autopilot controller).
4. On the GDU 620, adjust the vertical speed bug to +1000 fpm.
5. Verify the flight director commands pitch up and/or the control wheel moves aft.
6. On the GDU 620, adjust the vertical speed bug to -1000 fpm.
7. Verify the flight director commands pitch down and/or the control wheel moves forward.
8. On the GDU 620, increase the BARO setting so the displayed altitude increases towards the
selected altitude bug.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-86 Rev. L
9. As the selected altitude bug is approached, verify on the GDU 620(s) that the selected VS bug
automatically decreases towards zero.
10. After crossing through the selected altitude bug, verify on the autopilot that VS has extinguished
and ALT remains displayed.
11. Disengage the autopilot.
5.8.5.4.3 Autopilot Using GAD 43e KAS 297B/C Emulation (King KAP 100/150 or KFC
150/275/325)
This test verifies that the altitude preselector and vertical speed controller functions provided by the
GAD 43e to the autopilot are functional.
1. Power up the GDU 620(s) in normal mode and wait until valid attitude and air data is displayed.
2. On the GDU 620, set the selected altitude approximately 500 feet above the current altitude.
3. Engage the flight director or autopilot.
4. Press and hold the ALT key on the GDU 620 to arm the selected altitude.
5. Press and hold the VS key on the GDU 620 to engage vertical speed mode.
6. Verify that ALT is displayed in white, and VS is displayed in green on each GDU 620.
7. On the GDU 620, adjust the vertical speed bug to +1000 fpm.
8. Verify the flight director commands pitch up and/or the control wheel moves aft.
9. On the GDU 620, adjust the vertical speed bug to -1000 fpm.
10. Verify the flight director commands pitch down and/or the control wheel moves forward.
11. On the GDU 620, increase the BARO setting so the displayed field elevation increases towards
and through the selected altitude.
12. After crossing the selected altitude, verify on the GDU 620 that the green VS and white ALT
annunciations have extinguished. A green ALTC annunciation may appear briefly when crossing
through the selected altitude.
13. Verify on the autopilot that ALT is displayed.
14. Disengage the autopilot.
5.8.5.4.4 Reserved
5.8.5.4.5 Autopilot Using GAD 43e United Instruments 5506L-S Emulation
(Collins APS-65)
This test verifies that the altitude preselector function provided by the GAD 43e to the autopilot is
functional.
1. Power up the GDU 620(s) in normal mode and wait until valid attitude and air data is displayed.
2. On the GDU 620, set the selected altitude bug approximately 500 feet above the current altitude.
3. Engage the flight director and arm ALT SEL mode. Verify that ALT SEL is displayed on the
autopilot mode annunciator and is not flashing.
4. On the GDU 620, adjust the selected altitude bug while observing the autopilot ALT SEL
annunciator.
5. Verify that the ALT SEL annunciator flashes while the selected altitude bug is being adjusted.
Return the selected altitude bug to approximately 500 feet above the current altitude.
6. On the GDU 620, increase the BARO setting so the displayed altitude increases towards the
selected altitude bug.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-87
7. After crossing through the selected altitude, verify on autopilot mode annunciator that ALT SEL
has extinguished and ALT is displayed. The transition from ALT SEL to ALT may occur before
the selected altitude bug is reached.
8. Disengage the autopilot.
5.8.5.4.6 Autopilot Using GAD 43e KAS 297 Emulation (Bendix/King KFC 200/250)
This test verifies that the altitude preselector functions provided by the GAD 43e to the autopilot are
functional.
1. Power up the GDU 620(s) in normal mode and wait until valid attitude and air data is displayed.
2. Engage the flight director by pressing FD on the autopilot controller (FD should be displayed on
autopilot annunciator).
3. On the autopilot mode controller operate the vertical trim switch in both directions, and verify the
flight director command bar moves accordingly.
4. Engage altitude hold mode by pressing ALT on the autopilot controller (ALT should be displayed
on autopilot annunciator).
5. On the GDU 620, set the selected altitude bug approximately 500 feet above the current altitude.
6. Press and hold the ALT key on the GDU 620 to arm the selected altitude. On the GDU 620(s),
verify that ALT is displayed in white.
7. Press the preflight test button on the autopilot mode control panel. On the GDU 620(s), verify that
the white ALT annunciation is extinguished, then re-arm the selected altitude (repeat step 6).
8. Press the autopilot go around (GA) switch. On the GDU 620(s), verify that the white ALT
annunciation is extinguished, then re-arm the selected altitude (repeat step 6).
9. On the GDU 620, increase the BARO setting so the displayed altitude increases towards the
selected altitude bug. After crossing through the selected altitude, verify on the GDU 620(s) that
the white ALT annunciation is extinguished and the autopilot has engaged altitude hold mode
(ALT should be displayed on autopilot annunciator).

NOTE
A green ALTC annunciation may appear briefly on the GDU 620(s) when crossing
through the selected altitude.
10. Disengage the flight director.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-88 Rev. L
5.8.5.5 Heading and Course Error Test

NOTE
With GDU 620 version 3.xx software, if the GAD 43/43e is used to provide attitude
information to the autopilot, the autopilot will not engage while on the AUTOPILOT TEST
page. Consequently, the heading and course error tests should be run with the GDU 620
in Normal mode. A suitable VOR/ILS test set will be required in order to provide valid
lateral flags during the test.

This section verifies that the heading and course

error interface between the GDU 620 and autopilot
computer is functional. For dual G600 installations,
only the pilot’s GDU 620 is wired to the autopilot,
and the following instructions apply only to the
pilot’s GDU 620.
1. Start the GDU 620 in Configuration mode
by holding the ENT key until
INITIALIZING SYSTEM appears on the
screen. Navigate to the Autopilot Test page.
2. Engage the autopilot in heading mode.
3. On the GDU 620, set the HDG/CRS TEST
to ACTIVE. In Configuration mode,
changes are made by turning the outer and
inner FMS knob on the lower right side of
the display.
4. Set the DESIRED HEADING to 10° and
press the ENT key.
5. Verify that the control yoke or stick moves
to the right.
6. Set the DESIRED HEADING to 350° and
press the ENT key.
7. Verify that the control yoke or stick moves
to the left.

NOTE
If the control yoke or stick moves in the
opposite direction to what is expected,
reverse the LEFT/RIGHT polarity of the
HDG+ setting on the AUTOPILOT
CONFIGURATION page. Refer to
Table 5-36 for a description of the autopilot
configuration settings.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-89
8. Set the DESIRED HEADING to 360° and
press the ENT key.
9. Set the lateral flag and superflag to VALID.
10. Set the DESIRED COURSE to 20° and
press the ENT key.
11. Put the autopilot into NAV mode.
12. Verify that the control yoke or stick moves
to the right.
13. Set the DESIRED COURSE to 340° and
press the ENT key.
14. Verify that the control yoke or stick moves
to the left.
15. Set the DESIRED COURSE to 360° and
press the ENT key.
16. Disengage the autopilot.

NOTE
If the control yoke or stick moves in the
opposite direction to what is expected, reverse the LEFT/RIGHT polarity of the CRS+
setting on the AUTOPILOT CONFIGURATION page. Refer to Table 5-36 for a
description of the autopilot configuration settings.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-90 Rev. L
5.8.5.6 VOR/Localizer and Glideslope Deviation Tests

NOTE
With GDU 620 version 3.xx software, if the GAD 43/43e is used to provide attitude
information to the autopilot, the autopilot will not engage while on the AUTOPILOT TEST
page. Consequently, the deviation tests should be run with the GDU 620 in Normal mode.
A suitable VOR/ILS test set will be required in order to generate suitable deviations during
the test.

This test verifies that the lateral deviation, vertical deviation, lateral flag/superflag, and vertical
flag/superflag interfaces between the GDU 620 and autopilot are correct. Throughout this section, set
either the flag or superflag status depending on which output from the GDU 620 is connected to the
autopilot. For dual G600 installations, only the pilot’s GDU 620 is wired to the autopilot, and the following
instructions apply only to the pilot’s GDU 620. Reference the interconnect drawing in Appendix F.
1. Engage the autopilot in heading/altitude mode.
2. On the GDU 620 Autopilot Test page in
Configuration mode, set the lateral deviation
to 30% R.
3. Set the lateral flag/superflag to VALID.
4. Put the autopilot into APR mode.
5. Verify that the autopilot moves the control
yoke or stick to the right.
6. Set the lateral deviation to 30% L.
7. Verify that the autopilot moves the control
yoke or stick to the left.
8. Set the lateral deviation to 0%.
9. Set the lateral flag/superflag to INVALID.
10. Verify that the autopilot exits APR mode.
11. Set the lateral flag/superflag back to VALID
and put the autopilot back into APR mode if
necessary.
12. Set the ILS/GPS APRCH to ACTIVE.
13. Set the vertical deviation to 30% UP.
14. Set the vertical flag/superflag to VALID.
15. Verify that the autopilot indicates that it is capturing or tracking the glideslope.
16. Verify that the autopilot moves the control yoke or stick aft.
17. Set the vertical deviation to -30% DN.
18. Verify that the autopilot moves the control yoke or stick forward.
19. Set the ILS/GPS APRCH to INACTIVE.
20. Verify that the autopilot indicates that it is no longer capturing or tracking the glideslope.
21. Set the vertical flag/superflag to INVALID, the vertical deviation to 0%, and the lateral
flag/superflag to INVALID.
22. Disengage the autopilot.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-91
5.8.5.7 GPS Roll Steering Check

NOTE
GPS roll steering is handled in one of three ways. First, if the autopilot has an ARINC 429
roll steering input, the GDU 620 can provide ARINC 429 roll steering directly to the
autopilot. Second, if an external roll steering converter has been installed, the GDU 620
can provide ARINC 429 roll steering to the converter, which then outputs an analog
heading error signal to the autopilot. Third, the GDU 620 can provide the roll steering via
the heading error output, taking the place of a separate roll steering converter. The
autopilot is left in heading mode, and the GDU 620 varies the heading error output to
steer the autopilot.

5.8.5.7.1 ARINC 429 GPS Roll Steering Check

NOTE
With GDU 620 version 3.xx software, if the GAD 43/43e is used to provide attitude
information to the autopilot, the autopilot will not engage while on the AUTOPILOT TEST
page.

This test verifies that the GPS roll steering interface between the GDU 620 and the autopilot is functional.
For dual G600 installations, only the pilot’s GDU 620 is wired to the autopilot, and the following
instructions apply only to the pilot’s GDU 620.
1. On the GDU 620 Autopilot Test page in
Configuration mode, set the GPS
ANNUNCIATE and GPS SELECT discrete
outputs to ACTIVE.
2. Engage the autopilot in GPSS roll steering
mode. If an external roll steering converter is
used, engage the autopilot in heading mode
and set the roll steering converter to roll
steering.
3. Set the BANK ANGLE to 10°R.
4. Set GROUND SPEED to 50 KT.
5. Set GPSS VALID to VALID.
6. Verify that the autopilot rolls the control yoke
or stick to the right.
7. Set the bank angle to 0°.
8. Verify that the autopilot rolls the control yoke
or stick level.
9. Set the bank angle to 10°L.
10. Verify that the autopilot rolls the control yoke
or stick to the left.
11. Disconnect the autopilot.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-92 Rev. L
5.8.5.7.2 GDU™ 620 Analog GPS Roll Steering Check
This check verifies that the input from the A/P HDG DATUM switch (if installed) is functional. This check
also verifies that the GPSS/HDG Control selection is configured correctly. This check can also be used to
verify the operation of the analog GPS roll steering interface between the GDU 620 and the autopilot,
although if the heading error interface is functional there is no need to verify this interface. For dual G600
installations, only the pilot’s GDU 620 is wired to the autopilot, and the following instructions apply only
to the pilot’s GDU 620.

NOTE
The Heading Error Test in Section 5.8.5.5 should be successfully completed prior to
checking the operation of the GDU 620 Analog GPS Roll Steering.

1. Start the GDU 620 in Normal mode and use the PFD CDI soft key to select GPS as the navigation
source on the HSI.
2. Depending upon the installation, either set the A/P HDG DATUM switch to the GPSS position or
press and hold the HDG key for GPSS.
3. Verify that the GPSS annunciation is displayed in on the PFD near the OAT display (GDU 620 #1
only) and the cyan heading bug is hollowed out on both GDU 620s.
4. Set the A/P HDG DATUM switch to the HDG position and verify that the GPSS annunciation on
the PFD is removed.
5.8.5.7.2.1 400W/500W Series and GTN 6XX/7XX Units

NOTE
The following steps are not required if the Heading Error Test has successfully been
completed. These steps are included for information only.

1. For the GPS corresponding to the navigation source selected on the HSI, do the following, restart it
in Normal mode and proceed to the Instrument Panel Self Test page (do not sequence past this
page).
2. Ensure that GPSS is displayed in white text on the PFD.
3. Engage the autopilot in HDG mode (if possible, engage only the flight director, and not the
autopilot servos).
4. If available, verify that the flight director slowly moves back and forth between a right bank and
wings level. If the flight director is not available, verify that the autopilot rolls the control yoke or
stick to the right.

NOTE
Due to the nature of the 400W/500W and GTN 6XX/7XX self-test operation it may be
difficult to observe this behavior. Consequently, it is recommended that the Heading Error
Test be utilized instead.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-93
5.8.5.7.2.2 GNS 480 Navigator
1. For the GPS corresponding to the navigation source selected on the HSI, do the following, start it
in Ground Maintenance mode and go to the AUTOPILOT TEST page.
2. Ensure that GPSS is displayed in white text on the PFD.
3. Set the ROLL/STEER to 10°R.
4. Verify that the autopilot rolls the control yoke or stick to the right.
5. Set the ROLL/STEER to 0°.
6. Verify that the autopilot rolls the control yoke or stick level.
7. Set the ROLL/STEER to 10°L.
8. Verify that the autopilot rolls the control yoke or stick to the left.
9. Disconnect the autopilot.
5.8.5.8 GAD 43/43e Adapter Attitude Check
This section verifies that the attitude interface between the GAD 43/43e and autopilot computer is
functional.

NOTE
For dual G600 installations, only the pilot’s GDU 620 is wired to the GAD 43 and the
autopilot, and the following instructions apply only to the pilot’s GDU 620.

1. Start the GDU 620 in Configuration mode by

holding the ENT key until INITIALIZING
SYSTEM appears on the screen. Navigate to
the GAD page group.
2. On the GDU 620, activate the cursor and set
RELAY POSITION to “Attitude Valid”.
3. Set the HEADING VALID OUTPUT to Valid.
4. Engage the autopilot in PIT/ROLL mode (for
autopilots without a ROLL mode, PIT/HDG is
acceptable).
5. Set the ROLL ANGLE to 5° R.
6. Verify that the control yoke moves
counterclockwise or stick moves to the left.
7. Set the ROLL ANGLE to 5° L.
8. Verify that the control yoke moves clockwise
or stick moves to the right.
9. Set the PITCH ANGLE to 5° U.
10. Verify that the control yoke or stick moves forward.
11. Set the ROLL ANGLE to 5° D.
12. Verify that the control yoke or stick moves aft.
13. Set the RELAY POSITION to “Attitude Invalid”.
14. Verify that the autopilot disconnects.
15. Attempt to reengage the autopilot.
16. Verify that the autopilot will not engage while the RELAY POSITION is in the “Attitude Invalid”
position.
17. Set the RELAY POSITION to “Attitude Valid”.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-94 Rev. L
5.8.5.9 GAD 43/43e Adapter Barometric Correction Check

NOTE
Most autopilots do not require barometric correction inputs for altitude preselect/capture
purposes. This test must only be performed if the autopilot is installed so that it receives
barometric correction information from the GAD 43/43e.

This section verifies that the barometric correction interface between the autopilot computer and the
GDU 620 is functional.
1. Start the GDU 620 in Normal mode and wait for the air data and attitude indications to become
valid.
2. Adjust the GDU 620 barometric correction so that the altitude displayed on the PFD is a multiple
of 100ft (e.g. 500 ft, 1300 ft…).
3. Select an altitude on the autopilot controller that is 1000 ft above the altitude displayed on the
GDU 620, and then engage (arm) the autopilot in altitude capture mode.
4. Slowly decrease the GDU 620 barometric correction so that the altitude displayed on the PFD
increases, to simulate a capture of the selected altitude.

NOTE
The barometric pressure information from the actively-changing field is updated at a
once-per-second rate. There may be some lag between the time that the pressure is set and
the time it is updated to the autopilot computer.

5. Verify that the autopilot computer captures the selected altitude when you reach the selected
altitude as displayed on the GDU 620 PFD.

NOTE
For troubleshooting issues with the operation of the autopilot with the G600, refer to
Section 6.4.

5.8.5.10 ARINC 429 Attitude/Air Data (S-TEC 1500/2100 Only)

NOTE
Interfacing to an S-TEC 1500/2100 autopilot requires a dual G600 installation.

1. Power ON the S-TEC 1500/2100 autopilot.

2. Start both GDU 620s in Normal mode and wait for the air data and attitude indications to become
valid.
3. Verify that “ATT FAIL” is not annunciated on the autopilot.
5.8.5.11 Autopilot Mode Annunciations (KFC 225/275/325 only)
If the ARINC autopilot mode annunciations are being used, engage the autopilot and verify that AP is
displayed in green at the top of the PFD in order to verify that the autopilot annunciations are configured
and wired correctly.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-95
5.8.6 Traffic System Interface Test
The GDU 620 can provide mode control and display data from various traffic systems. This check verifies
that the GDU 620 is configured correctly and is receiving and transmitting data to the traffic system.
5.8.6.1 TAS Traffic Interface Test
If an L3 Communications SKY497/SKY899 SkyWatch® sensor, a Honeywell (Bendix/King) KTA 810
TAS/KMH 820 IHAS/KTA 910 TAS/KMH 920 IHAS or an Avidyne TAS 620 (Ryan 9900BX TCAD) has
been connected to the GDU 620, the traffic interface should be verified as described in this section.
1. Select the Traffic Map page on the GDU 620.
2. Verify that the amber TAS FAIL is not
displayed in the upper left corner, and NO
DATA (amber) is not displayed over the
ownship symbol.
3. On the upper left corner of the Traffic Map
page, verify that the status of the traffic system
is either TAS Standby or TAS operating (i.e.
TIS should not be displayed).

NOTE
If the GDU 620 is configured for an external
control (i.e. a display other than the GDU 620
is controlling the traffic system), then the
following steps do not have to be carried out.

4. Alternately press the STANDBY soft key and

OPERATE soft key to change the mode of the
traffic system. It may take several seconds for
the traffic system to change modes. Verify that
the mode of the traffic system can be changed.

NOTE
The Self Test menu option will not be available if the traffic system is operating.

5. Put the traffic system in Standby mode. Press the MENU key and pres the ENT key to initiate a
traffic system self test. Verify that the traffic system runs a self-test and the self-test traffic pattern
is displayed.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-96 Rev. L
5.8.6.2 TIS (Garmin GTX 33( )/330( )) Interface Test
If a Garmin GTX 33( )/330( ) sensor has been connected to the GDU 620, the traffic interface should be
verified as described in this section.
1. Select the Traffic Map page on the
GDU 620.
2. Turn on the GTX 33( )/330( ) by pressing
the ALT button on the GTX 33( )/330( ).
3. Verify that the amber TIS FAIL is not
displayed in the upper left corner, and NO
DATA (amber) is not displayed over the
ownship symbol.
4. On the upper left corner of the Traffic Map
page, verify that the status of the traffic
system is either TIS Standby or TIS
Operating/Unavailable (i.e. TAS should not
be displayed).

NOTE
If the GDU 620 is configured for an external
control (i.e. a display other than the
GDU 620 is controlling the traffic system),
then the following steps need not be carried
out.

5. Pull the ADC breaker and verify the Air

data fields are red X'd.
6. Turn off all navigators to remove a valid GPS position to the GDU
7. If a squat switch (or airspeed switch) to the GTX 33( )/330( ) squat switch input is present, ensure
that this is in AIR mode.
8. Alternately press the STANDBY soft key and OPERATE soft key to change the mode of the traffic
system. It may take several seconds for the traffic system to change modes. Verify that the mode of
the traffic system can be changed.
9. Close the ADC circuit breaker.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-97
5.8.7 Garmin GDL 69/69A Checkout Procedure
Locate the aircraft where there is a clear view of the southeastern or southwestern sky. XM Satellite Radio
satellites are located above the equator over the eastern and western coasts of the continental United States.

NOTE
The following section only verifies correct installation and activation of appropriate 
GDU 620 functions. It does not activate the GDL 69/69A XM data link radio. Complete
instructions for activating the GDL 69/69A XM data link radio can be found in document
190-00355-04.
1. Go to the XM INFORMATION page in the AUX page group.
2. Verify that the Data Radio ID field has a valid value and is not blank.

NOTE
The following steps need only be completed for GDL 69A installations.

NOTE
If the XM Satellite Radio audio subscription has not been activated, audio is available
only on Channel 1. If the audio subscription has been activated, audio should be available
on multiple channels.
3. Select the XM RADIO page in the AUX page group.
4. Unmute the XM volume and verify that audio can be heard over the headsets. Adjustment of the
volume may be required.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-98 Rev. L
5.8.8 ADF Interface Checkout Procedure
The GDU 620 can receive relative bearing information from an external ADF source, either directly or
through the GAD 43e.This check verifies that the units are communicating.
1. Ensure that the G600, GAD 43e (if applicable), and ADF are powered up.
2. Press the PFD soft key on the PFD. Repeatedly press the BRG 1 soft key until ADF is displayed as
the source for the #1 bearing pointer.
3. Verify that the ADF window is not invalid (no red ‘X’).
4. Using an ADF test set, generate a bearing to a station.
5. Tune the ADF receiver to the same frequency as the test set.
6. Verify that the ADF bearing pointer indicates the correct relative bearing.
7. Verify correct display for three other bearings, at 90° increments.
8. If the ADF flag is used in the installation, tune the ADF receiver to an unused frequency and verify
that the bearing pointer is removed from the PFD.
5.8.9 GDU™ 620 Cross-Fill Checkout Procedure (Dual G600 Installations Only)
In dual G600 installations, one GDU 620 can share information with the other GDU 620. This check
verifies that the units are communicating.
1. Ensure that both G600 systems are powered up.
2. On the GDU 620 #1 MFD go to the AUX page and ensure that BARO SYNCHRONIZATION is
ON.
3. Press the BRO key on GDU 620 #1 and use the knob to change the barometric setting.
4. Verify that the barometric setting on both GDU 620s change to the same value.
5. Press the BRO key on GDU 620 #2 and use the knob to change the barometric setting.
6. Verify that the barometric setting on both GDU 620s change to the same value.
5.8.10 EMI/RFI Check
After installing the G600 and verifying that all interfaces to external equipment are working correctly, a
brief EMI/RFI check must be conducted. This check will verify that the G600 system does not produce
unacceptable interference in other avionics systems, and other avionics systems do not produce
unacceptable interference in the G600.
1. Start the aircraft engines and switch to aircraft power. Turn on all avionics except the G600 LRUs.
2. With the G600 switched off, verify that all existing avionics systems are functioning properly.
3. Turn the G600 LRUs on and remove power from all other avionics systems.Removing power from
systems interfaced to the G600 will cause the associated system flags on the GDU 620 to be
displayed. This is normal behavior and does not constitute a test failure.
4. Apply power to the other avionics systems one at a time and verify that the system is functioning
properly without any unacceptable interference caused by the G600 system. Ensure that there is no
unacceptable interference in the G600 when the avionics system is powered up. Wait for the
system to begin functioning normally before applying power to the next system.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-99
5.8.11 GAD 43/43e Adapter Interface Check

NOTE
The GAD 43/43e can provide various signals to the autopilot, and all of these interfaces
are verified as part of the autopilot checkout (refer to Section 5.8.5).

NOTE
For dual G600 installations, only the pilot’s GDU 620 is wired to the GAD 43/43e, and the
following instructions apply only to the pilot’s GDU 620.

Start the GDU 620 in Normal mode. Wait for the G600 system to completely initialize, press the ALERTS
soft key and verify that there are no GAD 43/43e alerts.
5.8.11.1 GAD 43/43e Synchro Heading Check
This section verifies that the heading interface between the GAD 43/43e and interfaced equipment is
functional.
1. Start the GDU 620 in Configuration mode by holding the ENT key until INITIALIZING
SYSTEM appears on the screen. Navigate to the GAD page group.
2. On the GDU 620, activate the cursor and set RELAY POSITION to “Attitude Valid”.
3. Set the HEADING VALID OUTPUT to Valid.

NOTE
Not all equipment that utilizes synchro heading uses a Heading Valid signal. The steps
checking the HEADING VALID OUTPUT do not need to be carried out if the receiving
equipment does not utilize a Heading Valid signal.

4. Set the HEADING VALID OUTPUT to

“Invalid”.
5. Verify that the equipment interfaced to the
GAD 43 Synchro Heading output flags the
heading as invalid.
6. Set the HEADING VALID OUTPUT to
“Valid”.
7. Set the HEADING OUTPUT to 90°.
8. Verify that the equipment indicates a
heading of 090 (E).
9. Set the HEADING OUTPUT to 180°.
10. Verify that the equipment indicates a
heading of 180 (S).
11. Set the HEADING OUTPUT to 270°.
12. Verify that the equipment indicates a
heading of 270 (W).
13. Set the HEADING OUTPUT to 0°.
14. Verify that the equipment indicates a heading of 360 (N).

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-100 Rev. L
5.8.12 Weather Radar Interface Check
5.8.12.1 GWX 68/70 Weather Radar Interface Check

NOTE
For dual G600 installations, only the pilot’s GDU 620 can control or display the
GWX 68/70 weather radar.

This section verifies that the heading interface between

the GDU 620 display and GWX 68/70 weather radar is
functional.
1. Start the GDU 620 in Normal mode.
2. On the MFD go to the WEATHER RADAR page
in the WX page group.
3. Press the MODE soft key and then select the
STANDBY mode and wait for the Warm-Up to
complete.
4. Press the MNU key and then press ENT to go
into the Radar Test Mode.
5. Verify that the GWX 68/70 begins sweeping and
the test pattern is shown. Verify that stabilization
is ON (STAB ON is displayed in the upper right
corner of the MFD).
6. Using the MODE soft key, set the mode to OFF.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-101
5.8.12.2 ARINC 708 Weather Radar Interface Check
This section verifies that the interface between the GDU 620 display and ARINC 708 weather radar is
functional.
1. Start the GDU 620 in Normal mode. For a
dual G600 installation, start both GDU 620s
in Normal mode.
2. On the MFD of each GDU 620, go to the
WEATHER RADAR page in the WX page
group.
3. On one GDU 620, press the MODE soft key
and then select the STANDBY mode and
wait for the Warm-Up to complete.
4. Press the MNU key and then press ENT to
go into the Radar Test Mode.
5. Verify that the radar begins sweeping and
the test pattern is shown.
6. Press the ALERTS/ADVISORY soft key
and verify that there are no WXR alerts
present.

CAUTION
Aircraft should be outdoors and personnel
should not be in front of the weather radar
when it is radiating (i.e. when WEATHER
mode or GROUND mode is selected on the
GDU 620).
7. If stabilization is supplied to the radar, turn the radar to WEATHER mode and turn stabilization
ON using the CONTROL softkey group. Verify that STAB ON is displayed in the upper right
corner of the MFD. If STAB INOP is displayed, verify that stabilization is being supplied to the
weather radar R/T.
8. Using the MODE soft key, set the mode to OFF.
9. Repeat steps 3 through 8 for the second GDU 620.

NOTE
If only one GDU 620 is installed, the following steps do not have to be carried out.

10. On each GDU 620, press the MODE soft key and then select the STANDBY mode and wait for the
Warm-Up to complete.
11. On each GDU 620, press the MNU key and then press ENT to go into the Radar Test Mode.
12. On GDU 620 #1, press the RNG UP key to increase the range of the radar display. Verify that the
range on GDU 620 #1 changes and the range on GDU 620 #2 does not change.
13. On GDU 620 #2, press the RNG UP key to increase the range of the radar display – select a
different range than GDU 620 #1. Verify that the range on GDU 620 #2 changes and the range on
GDU 620 #1 does not change.
14. On each GDU 620, Use the MODE soft key to set the mode to OFF.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-102 Rev. L
5.8.13 Synthetic Vision Check (if SVT™ enabled)
1. Ensure that the 010-00769-43 Supplemental Data Card is inserted into the bottom slot.
2. Start the GDU 620 in Normal mode.
3. Wait for the G600 system to initialize (attitude, heading, airspeed, altitude, and GPS position
become valid).
4. On the PFD, press the PFD soft key, followed by the SYN VIS soft key.
5. Press the SYN TERR soft key to turn on synthetic vision.

NOTE
It may take up to a minute for the synthetic terrain data to be displayed on the PFD. Until
SVT is active, the horizon display will be the standard blue over brown.

6. Verify that there are no SVT alerts.

7. Verify that synthetic terrain data is displayed on the PFD.
5.8.14 TAWS Check (if TAWS option enabled)
1. Ensure that the 010-00769-43 Supplemental Data Card is inserted into the bottom slot.
2. Start the GDU 620 in Normal mode and ensure that the audio panel is turned on.
3. Wait for the G600 system to initialize (attitude, heading, airspeed, altitude and GPS position
become valid).
4. On the MFD, go to the TAWS-B map in the map page group.

NOTE
If the TAWS-B map is not available (i.e. the terrain map is labeled TERRAIN PROXIMITY
or TERRAIN-SVT) then the TAWS option has not been enabled.

5. Press the MNU key, select Test TAWS option, and press the ENT key to initiate the TAWS test.
6. Wait until the TAWS self-test completes (5-10 seconds) and verify that the message “TAWS
System Test OK” is heard over the cockpit speaker.

NOTE
The aural message “TAWS System Failure” will be annunciated if the TAWS system is
NOT functioning properly. If no audio message is heard, then a fault exists within the
audio system and the TAWS capability must be considered non-functional.

5.8.15 Transient Voltage Suppressor Checks (non-metallic aircraft only)

If transient voltage suppressors (TVSs) are installed, correct installation of each TVS must be verified as
described in Section 8.3.1.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-103
5.8.16 Final G600 System Check
1. This section verifies that all G600 systems are providing data to the GDU 620.Start the GDU 620
in Normal mode.
2. On the PFD verify that the following information is displayed:
◦ Attitude and heading
◦ Airspeed, altitude, vertical speed and OAT
3. On the MFD, verify that there are no active ALERTS or ADVISORIES. If active alerts or
advisories do exist, refer to Section 6.3 for troubleshooting information.
4. On the MFD go to the SYSTEM STATUS page in the AUX page group.
5. On the MFD verify that the following information is displayed for each LRU listed:
◦ A green check for the status.
◦ A valid serial number (not dashes)
6. Press the DBASE soft key to move the cursor to the DATABASE window and verify that each
database is current.

NOTE
When in the DATABASE window, if you scroll all the way to the bottom you can find the
SYSTEM ID for the installation.

5.8.17 External Video Check

If an external video source is installed and connected to the GDU 620, check the video operation as
follows:
1. Ensure that the GDU 620 is in Normal
mode.
2. Go to the EXTERNAL VIDEO page in the
AUX page group.

NOTE
If the orientation of the video image is not
correct, the image can be rotated in
Configuration mode. Refer to
Section 5.5.6B.

3. If more than one video source is installed,

ensure that VIDEO 1 is selected.
4. Press the SETUP softkey and verify that the
brightness, contrast and saturation can be
adjusted to provide an acceptable video
display.
5. Repeat for the second video source if
installed.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-104 Rev. L
5.8.18 Radar Altimeter Check
5.8.18.1 ARINC 429 Radar Altimeter (to GDU™ 620)

NOTE
The radar altimeter self test is initiated using the RA TEST soft key on the SYSTEM
SETUP page in the AUX page group. The FreeFlight RA4500 radar altimeter has no
pilot-initiated self test. For this radar altimeter, power to the radar altimeter must be
cycled and the self-test will run during the radar altimeter power up sequence.

If a radar altimeter is installed and connected to the

GDU 620, check the operation as follows:
1. Ensure that the GDU 620 is in Normal
mode.
2. Initiate the radar altimeter self test using the
RA TEST soft key on the SYSTEM SETUP
page in the AUX page group. Verify that RA
TEST is displayed above the radar altitude
display on the PFD, and the displayed radar
altitude goes to the value commanded during
Figure 5-18. Radar Altitude Display
self test. Refer to Figure 5-18.
5.8.18.2 Analog Radar Altimeter (to GAD 43e)
If a radar altimeter is installed and connected to the GAD 43e and radar altitude is displayed on the
GDU 620, check the operation as follows:
1. Ensure that the GDU 620 is in Normal mode.
2. Verify that radar altitude (RA) is displayed and indicating approximately 0 ft (except for the
Honeywell KRA 10/10A and Sperry AA-100/100A, which will not indicate radar altitude on the
ground – these will have the RA display removed entirely).
3. Pull the radar altimeter circuit breaker and verify that RA FAIL is displayed in yellow.
4. Close the radar altimeter circuit breaker and wait until a valid radar altitude is displayed.
5. Initiate the radar altimeter self test using the RA TEST soft key on the SYSTEM SETUP page in
the AUX page group. Verify that RA TEST is displayed above the radar altitude display on the
PFD, and the displayed radar altitude goes to the value commanded during self test.

NOTE
A flight test is required to verify correct operation above the self-test height.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-105
5.8.19 GSR 56 Iridium® Check

NOTE
When testing the GSR 56, the aircraft must be located outside and have an unobstructed
view of the sky.

NOTE
For additional information on using the GSR 56 features refer to the Garmin G600 Pilot’s
Guide 190-00601-02.

NOTE
To use the position reporting feature of the GSR 56, a short burst data (SBD) Iridium
account is required. To use the phone feature of the GSR 56, an Iridium voice account is
required. To use the weather feature of the GSR 56, an Iridium RUDICS account is
required.

If the GSR 56 Iridium transceiver is installed and connected to the GDU 620, check the operation as
follows:
1. Ensure that the GDU 620 is in Normal
mode.
2. If position reporting is enabled, go to the
POSITION REPORTING page in the AUX
page group. Verify that the REPORTING
STATUS is not “Unavailable”.
3. If the Iridium phone is enabled, go to the
IRIDIUM PHONE page in the AUX page
group. Verify that the PHONE STATUS is
not “Unavailable”.
4. Verify that a phone call can be placed.

NOTE
The following steps are mandatory only if GFDS weather is enabled. In order to receive
weather updates, the GSR 56 being tested must be registered and the registration access
code must be entered into the GSR 56 using the GDU 620.

5. Go to the first map page in the WX page

group.
6. Verify that the map is labeled GFDS
WEATHER MAP 1. If XM WEATHER
MAP 1 is displayed, press the MNU button
on the GDU 620 and select the “Display
GFDS Weather” option to change the page
to display GFDS weather.
7. If the GSR 56 is registered, press the MNU
button and select the “GFDS Data Request”
option. Verify that weather is displayed on
the map. Refer to the Garmin G600 Pilot’s
Guide 190-00601-02 for information on requesting GFDS data.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-106 Rev. L
5.8.20 Miscellaneous System Checks
5.8.20.1 Meggitt (S-TEC/Cobham) Engine Instrumentation Display System (EIDS)

NOTE
A dual G600 installation is required when interfacing to a Meggitt EIDS.

1. Toggle the 1-2 soft key on GDU 620 #1.

2. Verify that the EIDS display of GPS 1 or GPS 2 matches the source selection on GDU 620 #1.
3. Verify the DAU records Engine Condition Trend Monitoring (ECTM) data correctly. Reference
the aircraft maintenance manual, or EIDS Installation Manual for more information.
5.8.20.2 Fast/Slow Indication Check (PC-12)
1. Move the left AOA transmitter vane to the fully up position.
2. Ensure that the fast/slow pointer on the GDU 620 (both GDU 620s if applicable) moves to the
fully down (Slow) position.
3. Move the left AOA transmitter vane to the fully down position.
4. Ensure that the fast/slow pointer on the GDU 620 (both GDU 620s if applicable) moves to the
fully up (Fast) position.
5.8.21 DME Distance Display Test
The GDU 620 can receive DME distance information from a DME transceiver. The GDU 620 can
optionally select the nav source used to tune the DME, or place the DME in HOLD mode. This check
verifies that the units are communicating.

NOTE
Valid attitude or air data are not required for this test.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-107
5.8.21.1 Installations with One NAV Receiver Tuning the DME
1. Start the GDU 620 in Normal mode. For a dual G600 installation, start both GDU 620s in Normal
mode.
2. Ensure that the GAD 43e, DME and NAV receiver are receiving power.
3. Using a DME test set, select a NAV frequency and simulate a DME distance of 30.0 nm.
4. Tune the NAV radio to the same frequency as the DME test set.
5. Verify that DME distance of 30.0 nm is displayed on each PFD (refer to Figure 5-19).
6. Tune the NAV radio to a different frequency.
7. Verify that DME distance display is dashed out on each PFD.
8. Tune the NAV radio to the same frequency as the DME test set.
9. Verify that DME distance of 30.0 nm is displayed on each PFD.

NOTE
The following steps are only required if the installation is configured to use DME HOLD
from the GDU 620.

10. Select DME HOLD and verify that the DME distance of 30.0 nm remains displayed on the PFD.
11. Tune the NAV radio to a different frequency.
12. Verify that DME distance of 30.0 nm remains displayed on each PFD.
13. Deselect DME HOLD and verify that DME distance display is dashed out on each PFD.
14. Tune the NAV radio to the same frequency as the DME test set.
15. Verify that DME distance of 30.0 nm is displayed on each PFD.

Figure 5-19. DME Distance Display - Single DME Tuning Source

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-108 Rev. L
5.8.21.2 Installations with Two NAV Receivers Tuning the DME
1. Start the GDU 620 in Normal mode. For a dual G600 installation, start both GDU 620s in Normal
mode.
2. Ensure that the GAD 43e, DME and both NAV receivers are receiving power.
3. Using a DME test set, select a NAV frequency and simulate a DME distance of 30.0 nm.
4. Tune the NAV 1 radio to the same frequency as the DME test set, and NAV 2 to a different
frequency.
5. Ensure that DME NAV1 is selected as the DME tuning source by pressing the PFD -> DME ->
DME NAV1 soft keys (refer to Figure 5-20).
6. Verify that DME distance of 30.0 nm is displayed on each PFD.
7. On the PFD (either PFD for dual GDU 620s) select DME NAV2 as the tuning source by pressing
the PFD -> DME -> DME NAV2 soft keys.
8. Verify that the DME distance display is dashed out on each PFD.
9. Tune the NAV 2 radio to the same frequency as the DME test set, and NAV 1 to a different
frequency.
10. Verify that DME distance of 30.0 nm is displayed on each PFD.

NOTE
The following steps are only required if the installation is configured to use DME HOLD
form the GDU 620.

11. Select DME HOLD by pressing the PFD -> DME -> DME HOLD soft keys. Verify that the DME
distance of 30.0 nm remains displayed on the PFD.
12. Tune the NAV 2 radio to a different frequency.
13. Verify that DME distance of 30.0 nm remains displayed on each PFD.
14. Deselect DME HOLD and verify that DME distance display is dashed out on each PFD.
15. Tune the NAV 1 radio to the same frequency as the DME test set.
16. Verify that the DME distance display is dashed out on each PFD.
17. On the PFD (either PFD for dual GDU 620s) select DME NAV1 as the tuning source.
18. Verify that DME distance of 30.0 nm is again displayed on each PFD.

Figure 5-20. DME Distance Display - Dual DME Tuning Sources

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-109
5.8.21.3 Installations Utilizing Parallel DME Tuning (2x5, BCD or SLIP Code)
In addition to one of the checks above, if the nav receiver provides parallel DME tuning information to the
GAD 43e the following additional check must be completed to verify the proper operation of the tuning
discretes:
1. Start the GDU 620 in Normal mode. For a dual G600 installation, start both GDU 620s in Normal
mode.
2. Ensure that the GAD 43e, DME and NAV receiver are receiving power.

NOTE
If Parallel tuning is used with the Collins DME-40/42, the tuning format must be
determined based upon the installation – the GAD 43e does not read the parallel tuning
discretes in this case.

3. Using a DME test set, select the first NAV frequency listed in Table 5-34 corresponding to the
tuning format used by the installation.
4. Simulate a DME distance of 30.0 nm.
5. Tune the NAV radio to the same frequency as the DME test set.
6. Verify that DME distance of 30.0 nm is displayed on each PFD (refer to Figure 5-19).
7. Tune the DME test set to each of the remaining frequencies in Table 5-34 and repeat steps 5 and 6
for each frequency.
If a second NAV receiver supplies parallel tuning information to the GAD 43e, repeat steps 3 to 7 for that
NAV receiver.

Table 5-34. Flight Director Configuration Settings

NAV Radio Test Frequencies (MHz)

2 x 5 Tuning Shifted BCD Tuning SLIP Code Tuning
108.05 108.00 112.05
108.15 108.05 112.15
108.25 108.15 112.20
108.85 108.25 112.25
108.95 108.45 112.35
109.80 108.85 112.45
109.85 109.05 113.25
111.85 110.05 114.25
112.85 112.05 117.25
113.85 116.05 --

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-110 Rev. L
5.8.22 Marker Beacon Display Test (via GAD 43e)
The GDU 620 can display inner, middle and outer marker information from a marker beacon receiver. This
check verifies that the units are communicating.

NOTE
Valid attitude or air data not required for this test.

1. Start the GDU 620 in Normal mode. For a dual

G600 installation, start both GDU 620s in
Normal mode.
2. Ensure that the GAD 43e and marker beacon
receiver are receiving power.
3. Using a marker beacon test set, simulate an inner
marker.
4. Verify that a white “I” is flashing on each PFD
(refer to Figure 5.9).
5. Using a marker beacon test set, simulate a
middle marker.
6. Verify that an orange “M” is flashing on each
PFD.
7. Using a marker beacon test set, simulate an outer
marker. Figure 5-21. Marker Beacon Display
8. Verify that a cyan “O” is flashing on each PFD.
5.9 Placards and Switch Labeling
If any placards were relocated as a result of the GDU 620 installation, verify the following:
• The font size of the new placard is the same as the old placard it is replacing.
• The color of the new placard is identical to the color of the placard which it is replacing.
• The text on the new placard is identical to the text on the placard which it is replacing (it can be
arranged differently as required by space constraints, but the wording must be the same).
If the new switch labels were added as a result of the G600 installation, verify the following:
• The font size is legible from the pilot’s seat.
• The labels are readable in all ambient light conditions. In particular, the labels are readable with
ambient flood lighting in darkness.

NOTE
Not all G600 installations that are limited to VFR operation only will require a placard.
Refer to Section 2.5.3.3 for details.

If this is G600 installation that is limited to VFR operation only, verify the following (if applicable):
• The text on the placard reads, “AIRCRAFT LIMITED TO VFR”.
• The font is at least 0.25” high.
• The placard can easily be read from the pilot’s seat.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-111
5.10 Flight Checks
5.10.1 General System Flight Check
During flight the following items should be verified:
• Display of attitude, airspeed and heading on the GDU 620 while maneuvering
• Display of attitude, airspeed and heading on the standby instruments
• Navigation using each GPS and VLOC source on the GDU 620 CDI. For navigation receivers,
both VOR and ILS should be verified.
• Audibility of the altitude alerter chime
• Display of traffic from any interfaced traffic system (if applicable)
• Display of bearing from any interfaced ADF (if applicable)
• Display of weather from the GDL 69/69A (if applicable)
• Control of GDL 69A audio functions (if applicable)
• Display of radar altitude. The radar altitude display should be verified at several heights AGL
throughout the operating range of the radar altimeter (if applicable).
• Display and control of the weather radar (if applicable)
• Display of DME distance. If applicable, each nav radio should be used as a tuning source for the
DME
• Display of marker beacon information if suitable markers exist in the flight test area (if applicable)
• Display of the fast/slow indication (if applicable)
5.10.2 Autopilot Flight Checks and Final Adjustments
After verifying the autopilot interfaces as described
in Section 5.8.5, the autopilot must be flight tested
and, if necessary, adjusted for the particular
airframe. This section provides general guidelines
for verifying the autopilot and flight director
performance and also for making necessary
adjustments. Any adjustments made must be
reflected in the Checkout Log (Section 5.11.3).
5.10.2.1 Flight Director Performance
It is best to evaluate the flight director with the
autopilot coupled in order to assess the performance
of the flight director versus the autopilot. Evaluate
the flight director performance in level flight, turns,
climbs, and descents. Observe any excessive
fluctuations in pitch or roll, as well as how closely
the autopilot follows the movements of the flight
director.
The flight performance can be adjusted by changing
the settings on the Flight Director Configuration
page in Configuration mode. For dual G600 systems,
all flight director configuration changes must be
made on both GDU 620s.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-112 Rev. L
Table 5-35. Flight Director Configuration Settings

Parameter Description
Relative: Angles filtered in this setting are relative to the aircraft. Sets the filter to
PITCH FILTER
be applied to inputs regardless of A/C orientation.
(leave set at default
Absolute: Setting accounts for changes in aircraft body before applying the filter.
value)
Sets the filter to be applied to inputs including A/C orientation.
PITCH FILTER Sets the time in seconds for the flight director display to change from the current
TIME value to the commanded value.
PITCH + Sets the polarity of the pitch response of the flight director.
PITCH V/DEG Sets the number of volts required for one degree of flight director movement.
Sets the maximum pitch up angle that the flight director can reach. The
PITCH ANGLE MAX displayed FD will not exceed this value even if a larger pitch up angle is received
from the autopilot computer.
Sets the maximum pitch down angle that the flight director can reach. The
PITCH ANGLE MIN displayed FD will not exceed this value even if a larger pitch down angle is
received from the autopilot computer.
PITCH V ref Sets the zero pitch reference point.
Relative: Angles filtered in this setting are relative to the aircraft. Sets the filter to
ROLL FILTER
be applied to inputs regardless of A/C orientation.
(leave set at default
Absolute: Setting accounts for changes in aircraft body before applying the filter.
value)
Sets the filter to be applied to inputs including A/C orientation.
Sets the time in seconds for the flight director display to change from the current
ROLL FILTER TIME
value to the commanded value.
ROLL + Sets the polarity of the roll response of the flight director.
ROLL V/DEG Sets the number of volts required for one degree of flight director movement.
Sets the maximum roll angle that the flight director can reach. The displayed FD
ROLL ANGLE MAX will not exceed this value even if a larger roll angle is received from the autopilot
computer.
ROLL V ref Sets the zero roll reference point.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-113
5.10.2.2 Autopilot Performance

NOTE
The GAD 43/43e can provide synchro heading and yaw rate outputs. If the autopilot
system is interfaced to the GAD 43/43e, verify that turns are coordinated and that yaw
damp operation functions properly.

The autopilot performance can be adjusted by changing the settings on the Autopilot Configuration page in
Configuration mode. For dual G600 systems, all autopilot configuration changes should be made on the
pilot’s GDU 620 only.
1. To evaluate the autopilot heading
performance, center the heading bug and
engage the autopilot in HDG mode. Change
the heading bug by at least 45°. The
autopilot should follow the heading bug and
roll out smoothly, without undershooting or
overshooting the selected heading. If the
autopilot undershoots the selected heading,
increase the HDG V/DEG appropriately. If
the autopilot overshoots the selected
heading, decrease the HDG V/DEG
appropriately. If the autopilot system
receives heading and/or yaw rate
information from an external sensor, verify
that the turns are coordinated.
2. To evaluate the autopilot course
performance, engage the autopilot in NAV
mode. Tune to a NAV frequency that is out
of range and select that NAV for display on
the CDI, so that the GDU 620 invalidates
the lateral deviation signal. Change the
course by at least 45°.
3. The autopilot should turn to the new course
and roll out smoothly, without undershooting or overshooting the selected course. If the autopilot
undershoots the selected course, increase the CRS V/DEG appropriately. If the autopilot
overshoots the selected course, decrease the CRS V/DEG appropriately.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-114 Rev. L
Table 5-36. Autopilot Configuration Settings

Parameter Description
Selects whether the autopilot receives AC or DC heading and course error signals.
AC/DC
This parameter should not be changed.
HDG + Changes the polarity of the heading error signal.
CRS + Changes the polarity of the course error signal.
HDG V/DEG Changes the gain of the heading error signal.
CRS V/DEG Changes the gain of the course error signal.
Sets the minimum voltage that the GDU 620 will send to the autopilot.
V Min
This parameter should not be changed.
Sets the maximum voltage that the GDU 620 will send to the autopilot.
V Max
This parameter should not be changed.
V Ref Sets the zero reference for the heading and course error signals.

5.10.2.3 Roll Steering Performance

NOTE
GPS roll steering is handled in one of three ways. First, if the autopilot has an ARINC 429
roll steering input, the GDU 620 can provide ARINC 429 roll steering directly to the
autopilot. Second, if an external roll steering converter has been installed, the GDU 620
can provide ARINC 429 roll steering to the converter, which then outputs an analog
heading error signal to the autopilot. Third, the GDU 620 can provide the roll steering via
its heading error output, taking the place of a separate roll steering converter. The
autopilot is left in heading mode, and the GDU 620 varies the heading error output to
steer the autopilot.

1. Set up a GPS flight plan that includes at least two legs with an
angle between them. Set the CDI to display the active GPS.
Engage the autopilot in GPS roll steering mode. If the autopilot
uses the heading error input for roll steering, engage the autopilot
in HDG mode and activate the GPSS switch. When the switch is
active the following annunciation will appear on the PFD:
2. Verify that the autopilot flies the airplane smoothly through the
turn between the two legs.

NOTE
If the analog roll steering function is utilized, the scaling of the output can be adjusted
using the ANALOG ROLL STEERING SCALING setting on the AUTOPILOT
CONFIGURATION page. If the autopilot does not turn tightly enough while roll steering,
increase the GPSS to HDG Datum Gain setting. If the autopilot turns too tightly while roll
steering, decrease the GPSS to HDG Datum Gain setting.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-115
5.10.2.4 Altitude Preselector Performance
5.10.2.4.1 Altitude Preselector Performance (S-TEC 55X)

NOTE
This test is applicable only for S-TEC autopilots which have the RS-485 altitude
preselector input connected to the GDU 620 and have the altitude preselector option
enabled in the GDU 620.

1. Set the altitude preselector on the GDU 620 to an altitude above the present altitude.
2. Engage the autopilot in altitude select mode by pressing the VS and ALT buttons simultaneously.
3. Set a positive vertical speed on the autopilot.
4. Verify that the autopilot climbs and captures the selected altitude.
5. Set the altitude preselector on the GDU 620 to an altitude below the present altitude.
6. Set a negative vertical speed on the autopilot.
7. Verify that the autopilot descends and captures the selected altitude.
5.10.2.4.2 Altitude Preselector Performance (Preselector is Part of Autopilot)

NOTE
This test is applicable only for autopilots which have an internal altitude preselector
function and are interfaced to the GAD 43/43e for barometric correction information.

1. Set the selected altitude on the autopilot controller to an altitude above the present altitude.
2. Engage the altitude capture mode of the autopilot.
3. Set a positive vertical speed on the autopilot.
4. Verify that the autopilot climbs and captures the selected altitude.
5. Set the selected altitude on the autopilot controller to an altitude below the present altitude.
6. Set a negative vertical speed on the autopilot.
7. Verify that the autopilot descends and captures the selected altitude.
5.10.2.5 Autopilot Performance Check
Using the autopilot performance log shown in Figure 5-22, document the autopilot performance before and
after the G600or GAD 43/43e installation.

NOTE
If autopilot performance does not adhere to criteria listed in the center column of the
autopilot performance log, the autopilot should be serviced in order to meet these criteria,
or customer acknowledgement of the performance condition should be obtained prior to
proceeding with the installation.

NOTE
This section applies only to installations in which the G600 interfaces to the autopilot.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-116 Rev. L
G500/G600 AUTOPILOT PERFORMANCE CHECKOUT LOG
Completion of this form is required only for installations interfacing to an autopilot.

Aircraft Make and Model: Aircraft Registration Number:

Autopilot Make and Model:

Autopilot Performance Prior to G500/G600 or GAD 43/43e Installation

Refer to Section 5.10.2.5 for instructions on
Date: By:
completing this section.
Function/Mode Criteria Notes
Selected pitch attitude held within ±2°.
Pitch Attitude Hold
Pitch attitude should not oscillate continuously.

Selected roll attitude held within ±3°.

Roll Attitude Hold
Roll attitude should not oscillate continuously.

Selected heading held within ±3°.

Heading Bug Coupling
Heading should not oscillate continuously.

[1]
Altitude held within ±100 feet.
Altitude Hold
Altitude should not oscillate continuously.

Selected Altitude Capture Overshoot during altitude capture should not

(Altitude Preselect) exceed 100 feet.

Selected vertical speed held within ±200 FPM.

Vertical Speed Hold
Vertical speed should not oscillate continuously.

Selected airspeed held within ±5 KIAS.

Airspeed Hold Indicated airspeed should not oscillate
continuously.
Lateral deviation from course should remain with
VOR Tracking 25% of full scale deflection once established on
course.
Lateral and vertical deviations from course/
ILS/LPV Approach glidepath should remain with 25% of full scale
deflection once established.
Capture performance before and after
VOR/LOC/GS Capture installation should be similar (assuming same
intercept angles and conditions).

Pitch and roll attitude held as specified by

Go-around
autopilot installation.

Flight director commands satisfy selected modes

Flight Director
and do not display excessive jitter or oscillation.

Yaw dampening performance before and after

Yaw Damp installation should be similar (assuming same
conditions).

General Notes
[1] For RVSM installations, perform altitude hold check in accordance with Section P.3.4.

Figure 5-22. Autopilot Performance Checkout Log

Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-117
G500/G600 AUTOPILOT PERFORMANCE CHECKOUT LOG (CONTINUED)
Completion of this form is required only for installations interfacing to an autopilot.

Autopilot Performance Following G500/G600 or GAD43/43e Installation

Refer to Section 5.10.2.5 for instructions on
By: Date:
completing this section.
Function/Mode Criteria Notes
Selected pitch attitude held within ±2°.
Pitch Attitude Hold
Pitch attitude should not oscillate continuously.

Selected roll attitude held within ±3°.

Roll Attitude Hold
Roll attitude should not oscillate continuously.

Selected heading held within ±3°.

Heading Bug Coupling
Heading should not oscillate continuously.

[1]
Altitude held within ±100 feet.
Altitude Hold
Altitude should not oscillate continuously.

Selected Altitude Capture Overshoot during altitude capture should not

(Altitude Preselect) exceed 100 feet.

Selected vertical speed held within ±200 FPM.

Vertical Speed Hold
Vertical speed should not oscillate continuously.

Selected airspeed held within ±5 KIAS.

Airspeed Hold Indicated airspeed should not oscillate
continuously.
Lateral deviation from course should remain with
VOR Tracking 25% of full scale deflection once established on
course.
Lateral and vertical deviations from course/
ILS/LPV Approach glidepath should remain with 25% of full scale
deflection once established.
Capture performance before and after
VOR/LOC/GS Capture installation should be similar (assuming same
intercept angles and conditions).

Pitch and roll attitude held as specified by

Go-around
autopilot installation.

Flight director commands satisfy selected modes

Flight Director
and do not display excessive jitter or oscillation.

Yaw dampening performance before and after

Yaw Damp installation should be similar (assuming same
conditions).

General Notes
[1] For RVSM installations, perform altitude hold check in accordance with Section P.3.4.

Figure 5-22. Autopilot Performance Checkout Log

Sheet 2 of 2

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-118 Rev. L
5.10.2.6 Yaw Damper Operation

NOTE
This check is only required if the GDU 620 or GAD 43/43e is used to replace an existing
yaw rate sensor to provide yaw rate information to the autopilot.
During flight, verify that the yaw damp function operates correctly.
5.11 Documentation Checks
5.11.1 AFMS
Ensure that the Airplane Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS) is completed and inserted in the Airplane
Flight Manual (AFM) or Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH).
1. Fill in the required airplane information on the AFMS cover sheet.
2. In AFMS Section 4.6 (Autopilot Operations), fill in all applicable checkboxes corresponding to the
interfaces to the autopilot. More than one box may be checked, depending upon the installation.
These are further described below.
 This installation does not interface with the autopilot (basic wing leveling autopilot or no autopi-
lot is installed in the aircraft).
◦ Check this box if there are no interfaces between the G600 system and the autopilot, or if no
autopilot is installed in the aircraft. No other boxes should be checked if this box is checked.
 Course / NAV Selection coupling to the autopilot.
◦ Check this box if the course datum signal is connected to the autopilot.
 Heading Bug coupling capability to the autopilot.
◦ Check this box if the heading datum signal is connected to the autopilot.
 Roll Steering emulated via the heading mode.
◦ Check this box if an external GPSS switch is installed with the G600 or if roll steering is
configured to be controlled via the GDU 620 HDG key.
 Roll Steering capable autopilot.
◦ Check this box if the ARINC 429 output from the GDU 620 is connected to the autopilot.
 Altitude Pre-Selector integrated with the autopilot.
◦ Check this box if the Altitude Preselect option is enabled (unlocked).
 Vertical speed bug integrated with the autopilot.
◦ Check this box if any of the following GAD 43e altitude preselector emulations are used:
King KAS 297B, King KAS 297C (any), or S-TEC 360.
 Flight Director display driven from external autopilot or FD computer.
◦ Check this box if an external flight director is connected to and configured on the GDU 620.
 Flight Director is not available with Synthetic Vision enabled.
Check this box if the SVT flight director display in NOT enabled.
 A GAD 43/43e Adapter is installed in this aircraft.
Check this box if a GAD 43/43e Adapter is installed in the aircraft.
 GAD 43/43e provides attitude to the autopilot.
Check this box if the GAD 43/43e is connected to the attitude inputs on the autopilot and configured
via the GDU 620.
 GAD 43/43e provides yaw rate to the yaw damper.
Check this box if the GAD 43/43e is connected to the yaw rate inputs on the autopilot and configured
via the GDU 620.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-119
 GAD 43/43e provides baro correction to the altitude preselector
Check this box if the GAD 43/43e is connected to the baro correction input on the autopilot and con-
figured via the GDU 620.
3. Insert the completed AFMS into the AFM or POH.
5.11.2 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (ICA)
Ensure that the appropriate aircraft information on the Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (ICA) is
filled in completely and inserted into the aircraft permanent records.
1. Fill in the Aircraft Make, Model, Registration Number, and Serial Number information on the
cover of the G600 ICA (Garmin document 190-00601-00).
2. In the ICA Appendix A, fill in the locations of all LRUs that were installed as part of the G600
installation. Also sketch the location of the wire runs for the G600 LRUs.
3. Insert the completed ICA in the aircraft permanent records.
5.11.3 Configuration and Checkout Log
The completed checkout log sheet should be maintained with the aircraft permanent records. For a dual
G600 installation, a configuration and checkout log for each system must be completed.
5.11.3.1 Aircraft Documentation Checklist (Mitsubishi MU-2B models only)
For MU-2B aircraft operations that are subject to the requirements of SFAR 108, refer to Garmin
document 190-00601-20, G600 MU-2B Checklist Changes.
This document describes changes to the MU-2B checklists that have been accepted by the FAA MU-2B
Flight Standardization Board. Operators of MU-2B aircraft may utilize this document as a means to
incorporate checklist changes resulting from the installation of the G600 system. Garmin document 190-
00601-20 Revision 1, G600 MU-2B Checklist Changes, was accepted by the AEG Flight Standardization
Board on July 13, 2011.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-120 Rev. L
G500/G600 CONFIGURATION AND CHECKOUT LOG
Date: By:

Installation Information

Single GDU 620 Dual GDU 620 (#1) Dual GDU 620 (#2)

Aircraft Model: Aircraft S/N:

Unit Part Number Serial Number Mod Level

GDU 620 011-01264-
GRS 77 011-00868-
GMU 44 011-00870-
[ N/A ] GDC 74A 011-00882-
[ N/A ] GDC 74B 011-01110-
GTP 59 011-00978-
[ N/A ] GAD 43 011-01970-
[ N/A ] GAD 43e 011-02349-

Unit Part Number Serial Number Panel Tilt Lighting

[ N/A ] 4300-4( ) 4300-4 ° V
4300-( ) 4200- ° V

Unit Part Number Serial Number Lighting

[ N/A ] 4300-4( ) 4300-4 V

Equipment Location
For each unit listed below, record the fuselage station and provide a brief description of the location.

Unit Station (CG) Description of Location

GDU 620 in.
GRS 77 in.
GMU 44 in.
GDC 74( ) in.
GTP 59 in.

[ N/A ] GAD 43/43e in.

[ N/A ] MD240 in.

Autopilot Performance Baseline

The autopilot performance baseline is required only if the GAD 43/43e is installed to provide attitude to the autopilot.

[ N/A ] Autopilot performance baseline completed

Figure 5-23. G600 System Configuration and Checkout Log

Sheet 1 of 7

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-121
G500/G600 CONFIGURATION AND CHECKOUT LOG (CONTINUED)

Configuration

System Configuration
Cross-Side GDU: Present Not Present Type:

AHRS: Present Not Present Type:

ADC: Present Not Present Type:

GPS 1: Present Not Present Type:

GPS 2: Present Not Present Type:

NAV 1: Present Not Present Type:

NAV 2: Present Not Present Type:

ADF: Present Not Present Type: + Superflag

Traffic: Present Not Present Type:

Data Link: Present Not Present Type: + External Control

Weather Radar: Present Not Present Type:

Adaptor: Present Not Present Type:

Iridium: Present Not Present Type:

Radar Altimeter: Present Not Present Type:

Fast/Slow: Present Not Present Type:

Airframe Configuration
PFD MFD
DIS. SPD: Nautical Imperial Metric DIS. SPD: Nautical Imperial Metric
ALT. VS: FEET ALT. VS: FEET

VS TAPE RANGE: 2000 3000 4000 Aircraft Icon:

IAS TAPE: Basic Advanced GDL 69A Audio

ADI ROLL POINTER: Sky Ground Mute Speed: [ Off ]
VS MINIMUM: OFF Alerts
VS MAXIMUM: OFF Alt. Alerter: Off Normal High Perf

Notes

Figure 5-23. G600 System Configuration and Checkout Log

Sheet 2 of 7

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-122 Rev. L
G500/G600 CONFIGURATION AND CHECKOUT LOG (CONTINUED)

Configuration (Continued)

Airspeed Configuration Lighting Configuration

BRIGHTNESS
BASIC [ N/A ]
Display Key
VS0: Vx:
Input Source
VS1: Vy:
Minimum Level
Vfe: Vle:
Response Time:
Vno: Vmca:
Slope:
Vne: Vyse:
Offset:
Glide: Vne:

Vr: Vne (pwr off): OFF Key Backlight Cutoff: [ N/A ]

Photo Slope: [ N/A ]
ADVANCED [ N/A ]
Photo Transition: [ N/A ]
Arc Ranges
Photo Offset: [ N/A ]
Red (Low Speed): Off On Max:

White: Off On Min: Max: Manifest Configuration

Half-White: Off On Min: Max: GDU 620 006-B v.

White/Green Off On Min: Max: GDC 74( ) 006-B0261- v.

Green: Off On Min: Max: GDC 74( ) FPGA 006-C0055- v.

Yellow: Off On Min: Max: GMU 44 006-B0224- v.

Vne / Vmo / Mmo: Off On Min: GMU 44 FPGA 006-C0048- v.

Markings GRS 77 006-B0223- v.

White Triangle: Off On GRS 77 FPGA 006-C0049- v.

Red Bar: Off On [ N/A ] GAD 43 006-B0876- v.

Blue Bar: Off On [ N/A ] GAD 43e 006-B1176- v.

Red/White Bar: Off On

Feature Configuration
Vle: Off On
Airframe: Fixed Wing
Overspeeds
Charts: None FliteCharts ChartView
Mmo: Mmo Level:
Altitude Preselect: Enabled Disabled
Vne / Vmo
Synthetic Vision: Enabled Disabled
1. Alt: IAS: 6. Alt: IAS:
Weather Radar: Disabled
2. Alt: IAS: 7. Alt: IAS:
GAD 43/43e: Enabled Disabled
3. Alt: IAS: 8. Alt: IAS:
External Video: Enabled Disabled
4. Alt: IAS: 9. Alt: IAS:
Rad Alt (A429): Enabled Disabled
5. Alt: IAS: 10. Alt: IAS:
DFCS 4: Enabled Disabled
Fast/Slow: Enabled Disabled

TAWS: [ N/A ] Enabled Disabled

RVSM Aircraft: [ N/A ]
Figure 5-23. G600 System Configuration and Checkout Log
Sheet 3 of 7

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-123
G500/G600 CONFIGURATION AND CHECKOUT LOG (CONTINUED)

Configuration (Continued)

Audio Alert Configuration Video Configuration [ N/A ]

Volume Adjustment: dB VIDEO 1
Voice: Male Female Configured: Yes No
Format: Auto NTSC PAL
ARINC 429 Port Configuration
Rotation: °
In 1: High Input: GRS 77 #1
VIDEO 2
In 2: Low Input: GDC 74( ) #1
Configured: Yes No
In 3: Low High Input: GPS1
Format: Auto NTSC PAL
In 4: Low High Input:
Rotation: °
In 5: Low High Input:
In 6: Low High Input: Discretes Configuration
In 7: Low High Input: P6201-23:

In 8: Low High Input: P6201-24:

Out 1: Low High Output: GPS Navigator P6201-25:

Out 2: Low High Output: P6201-26:

Out 3: Low High Output: P6201-27:

Out 4: Low High Output: P6203-44:

P6203-45:
ARINC 708 Port Configuration
P6203-46:
In 1: Low High Input:
P6203-47:
In 2: Low High Input:

Airspeed Discrete Outputs Configuration

RS-232 Port Configuration
Active Condition Value No Data State
CHNL 8 Output: Off Shadin-alt
1: Active Inactive

RS-485 Port Configuration 2: Active Inactive

CHNL 1: 3: Active Inactive
CHNL 2: 4: Active Inactive
CHNL 3: 5: Active Inactive
CHNL 4:
GDC Configuration
Terrain / TAWS / SVT Configuration OAT: GTP 59 RVSM Aircraft: [ N/A ]
Terrain Proximity
GDL 69/69A Configuration [ N/A ]
Terrain Alerting Configuration: Terrain-SVT
Antenna Gain (lower): dB
TAWS-B
Cable Loss (nominal): dB
Ext. TAWS: [ N/A ] Installed Not Installed
GDL 69/69/A activated: Yes No

Airport Criteria Ethernet Port 2: Enabled Disabled

Runway Surface: [ N/A ] Ethernet Port 3: Enabled Disabled
Minimum Length: [ N/A ] Ethernet Port 4: Enabled Disabled

Figure 5-23. G600 System Configuration and Checkout Log

Sheet 4 of 7

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-124 Rev. L
G500/G600 CONFIGURATION AND CHECKOUT LOG (CONTINUED)

Configuration (Continued)

Autopilot Configuration [ N/A ] GAD 43/43e Configuration [ N/A ]

Present Not Present CONFIGURATION
Autopilot:
Type: Gyro Emulation Type:

[ N/A ] Present Not Present Yaw Rate Scale Factor:

+ Mode Annunciations
Type:
GAD 43e Configuration [ N/A ]
Present Not Present
Altitude Preselect: Present Not Present
Type: Altitude Preselect:
Type:
CONFIGURATION (ACTIVE SETTINGS)
Present Not Present
AC/DC: AC DC Radar Altimeter:
Type:
HDG+: RIGHT LEFT
Present Not Present
Out 3: Low High DME:
Type:
Out 4: Low High
Tuning Source: [ N/A ] #1 #2
ANALOG ROLL STEERING (ACTIVE SETTINGS)
(GDU 620 version 3.00 or later) Tuning Format: [ N/A ] CSDB
GPSS to Heading Datum Gain: #1 #2
KAS 297B Gain Straps: [ N/A ]
GPSS/HDG Control: #3 #4

ALTITUDE CAPTURE
GAD 43e Calibration [ N/A ]
Altitude Threshold: On Off
NAV1 [ N/A ] NAV2 [ N/A ]
Time Threshold: On Off
Localizer Calibrated: 1 Gain: 2 Gain:
Re-arm Threshold: On Off
VOR Calibrated: 1 2

Flight Director Configuration [ N/A ]

GWX Weather Radar Configuration [ N/A ]
Present Not Present Type:
Pitch Trim: ° Roll Trim: °
CONFIGURATION (ACTIVE SETTINGS)
Discrete Enable: Enabled Disabled ARINC 708 Weather Rdr Configuration [ N/A ]
SVT FD Display: Enabled Disabled Display Head: #1 #2
SVT FD Pitch Scaling: Radar Mode: Standby Test WXR On

Flight Director Calibration [ N/A ] GTS Configuration

CONFIGURATION (ACTIVE SETTINGS) Refer to GTS 8XX Installation Manual (P/N 190-00993-0X).
Absolute Absolute
Pitch Filter: Roll Filter: Iridium Configuration [ N/A ]
Relative Relative
Phone: Enabled Disabled
Pitch Filter Time: Roll Filter Time:
GFDS Weather: Enabled Disabled
Pitch+: Up Down Roll+: Left Right
RUDICS Number:
Pitch V/Deg: Roll V/Deg:
POSITION REPORTING [ N/A ] Enabled Disabled
Pitch Angle Max: Roll Angle Max:
Report Type: Standard AFF
Pitch Angle Min:
Off Automatic
Pitch V ref: Roll V ref: Period:
[ N/A ] Every minute(s)

Figure 5-23. G600 System Configuration and Checkout Log

Sheet 5 of 7

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-125
G500/G600 CONFIGURATION AND CHECKOUT LOG (CONTINUED)

Checkout

GRS/GMU Calibration Ground Checks (Continued)

Pitch/Roll Offset completed SYSTEM INTERFACE CHECKS (CONTINUED)

Magnetometer Calibration completed Autopilot Checks [ N/A ]

[ N/A ] Heading Offset completed Autopilot Engagement Check
Engine Run-up Test Passed [ N/A ] Flight Director Check
Magnetic Interference Test Passed [ N/A ] FD Offset Calibration

[ N/A ] Altitude Preselect Check

Ground Checks
Heading and Course Error Check
DATABASE CHECKS
VLOC and GS Deviation Check
Jeppesen NavData Current
GPS Roll Steering Check
Electronic Charts Current
[ N/A ] GAD 43/43e attitude
Terrain Current
[ N/A ] GAD 43/43e Baro Correction
PITOT-STATIC, ADC, AND TAPE CHECKS
[ N/A ] ARINC 429 Attitude/Air Data
Pitot-Static System leak checked
[ N/A ] Traffic system interface checked
CFR accuracy check completed
[ N/A ] GDL 69/69A interface checked
Airspeed tape settings checked
[ N/A ] ADF interface checked
Airspeed accuracy checked
[ N/A ] GDU 620 cross-fill checked
GENERAL CHECKS
[ N/A ] External video checked
EMI/RFI Check: Pass Fail
[ N/A ] GSR 56 Iridium functions checked
[ N/A ] All placards relocated
[ N/A ] Radar Altimeter checked
[ N/A ] All labels are readable
[ N/A ] Meggitt EIDS checked
[ N/A ] VFR Only placard installed
GAD 43/43e Interface checks [ N/A ]
[ N/A ] TVS operation checked
[ N/A ] Autopilot Disengagement checked
OPTIONAL FEATURES
[ N/A ] Synchro Heading checked
[ N/A ] SVT checked
[ N/A ] DME Distance Display checked
[ N/A ] TAWS checked
SYSTEM INTERFACE CHECKS
GPS receiver interface checked

[ N/A ] NAV receiver interface checked

Notes

Figure 5-23. G600 System Configuration and Checkout Log

Sheet 6 of 7

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-126 Rev. L
G500/G600 CONFIGURATION AND CHECKOUT LOG (CONTINUED)

Checkout (Continued)

Flight Checks Flight Checks (Continued)

GENERAL SYSTEM CHECKS AUTOPILOT CHECKS [ N/A ]
Primary Attitude, Heading, and Airspeed [ N/A ] Flight Director Performance

Standby Attitude, Heading, and Airspeed Autopilot Performance

GPS1 Navigation [ N/A ] FD Offset Performance

[ N/A ] GPS2 Navigation [ N/A ] GAD 43/43e Autopilot Performance

[ N/A ] NAV1 Navigation [ N/A ] Gad 43/43e Attitude

[ N/A ] NAV2 Navigation [ N/A ] Gad 43/43e Yaw Damper Operation

[ N/A ] Altitude Alerter Audibility [ N/A ] Altitude Preselect Check

[ N/A ] Traffic Display VLOC and GS Deviation Check

[ N/A ] ADF Bearing Display [ N/A ] GPS Roll Steering Check

[ N/A ] GDL 69/69A Weather Display [ N/A ] GAD 43/43e Baro Correction

[ N/A ] GDL 69A Audio Control [ N/A ] GAD 43/43e Heading

[ N/A ] GSR 56 Iridium Functions [ N/A ] ARINC 429 Attitude/Air Data

[ N/A ] Radar Altimeter Display

Documentation Checks
[ N/A ] Weather Radar Control and Display
AFMS completed and in POH/AFM
[ N/A ] DME Distance Display
ICA completed and included in aircraft records
[ N/A ] Marker Beacon Display
[ N/A ] Other Aircraft documentation completed
[ N/A ] Fast/Slow Information Display
Final System Check

Notes

Figure 5-23. G600 System Configuration and Checkout Log

Sheet 7 of 7

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 5-127
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 5-128 Rev. L
6 TROUBLESHOOTING
This section provides information to assist troubleshooting if problems occur with a G600 installation.
6.1 GMU 44 Magnetometer Troubleshooting
When performing a magnetic interference survey numerous issues may arise. This section lists some
common causes for failures of the magnetometer interference test, and a description of some of the things
that can be done to remedy them.
6.1.1 Common Causes for Failures of the Magnetometer Interference Test
6.1.1.1 Electrical Current Return Paths
If electrical loads are grounded through the airframe, the returning electrical current will flow through the
airframe toward the alternator, generator, or battery. If the magnetometer lies along this current return path,
the current can cause significant magnetic interference. Electrical current return paths are the most
common cause of magnetic interference issues. Common examples of this problem are the navigation
lights at the wingtips for wing-mounted magnetometers or the strobe light on the tail for vertical stabilizer-
mounted magnetometers.
Before making changes to the aircraft, isolate the particular electrical load which is causing the
interference by running the GMU 44 Location Survey Tool while turning the load on and off or by running
the magnetometer interference test with the load on and again with it off.
To correct the problem, ground the electrical load through a wire rather than through the airframe. The
ground wire should run into the fuselage for wing-mounted magnetometers so that the return current no
longer flows through the airframe past the magnetometer. Ideally this ground wire should be routed beside
the power wire for that electrical load. This will maximize cancellation of the associated magnetic field
that is generated by the current.
6.1.1.2 Nearby Electrical Loads
Large electrical loads that are close to the magnetometer can generate significant magnetic interference. It
is important to install the GMU 44 using the guidelines provided in Section 2.5.11.5 and Table 2-8.
6.1.1.3 Ferromagnetic Materials
Ferromagnetic materials can become magnetized and cause magnetic interference. It is important to use
nonmagnetic materials to mount the GMU 44, and replace any magnetic fasteners within 20” (0.5 m) with
nonmagnetic equivalents (e.g. replace zinc-plated steel screws used to mount wing covers or wingtips with
nonmagnetic stainless steel screws.)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 6-1
6.1.2 Examples of Magnetic Interference Problems
In order to isolate the cause the magnetic interference, first review the results from the GMU 44 Location
Survey Tool as described in Appendix G. Compare the survey results to the detailed test sequence to
identify which item caused the failure. Two examples of common survey failures are shown in Figure 6-1
and Figure 6-2.
The cause of both of the interference events recorded in Figure 6-1 was determined to be electrical current
return paths through the airframe, as described in Section 6.1.1.1. Two options were available at this point:
(1) run new ground wires for the Pitot heat, strobe light, and NAV light, or (2) choose a different location
for the GMU 44. Since it was determined that running new ground return wires through the wing would be
difficult, the GMU 44 was relocated to more suitable location in the aft fuselage.

,17(5)(5(1&()520:,1*7,31$9,*$7,21$1'6752%(/,*+76
,17(5)(5(1&()5203,727+($7

Figure 6-1. Magnetic Interference Example #1

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 6-2 Rev. L
The cause of the interference event recorded in Figure 6-2 was determined to be an electrical current return
path through the airframe, as described in Section 6.1.1.1. The power return for strobe light power supply
was through the chassis of the power supply (the design for this power supply did not have a separate
connection for a power ground). To correct the problem, the power supply was replaced with a new power
supply that had a separate power ground that was isolated from the chassis. A new ground wire was run
from the strobe light power supply and attached to the airframe forward of the GMU 44.

,17(5)(5(1&()5209(57,&$/67$%,/,=(56752%(/,*+7

Figure 6-2. Magnetic Interference Example #2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 6-3
6.2 G600 Troubleshooting

Table 6-1. GDU 620 Troubleshooting Guide

Problem Cause Solution

Ensure power is properly wired to the GDU 620 and
Improper wiring; circuit breaker open.
the circuit breaker is closed.
Unit does not power up – blank screen.
Ensure that unit is not in manual intensity control
Unit intensity turned down.
mode with the intensity turned down.
Insert the Installer Unlock Card 
An Installer Unlock Card is not inserted into the
All expected configuration pages are not displayed. P/N 010-00769-60 into the bottom slot of the
GDU 620.
GDU 620 and cycle power.
Ensure that the GDC 74( ) RS-232 connection to
The RS-232 connection to the GDC 74( ) is not
The GDC OAT probe type shows up as UNKNOWN the GDU 620 is properly wired, and ensure that the
working.
GDC 74( ) circuit breaker is closed.
The software loader card is installed in the bottom Insert the loader card in the top slot and cycle
When loading software, the LRU software is not slot of the GDU 620. power to the GDU.
being displayed on the SOFTWARE UPLOAD
page. Repeat the process for making the software loader
The software loader card contains no information.
card.
Configuration errors are displayed on power-up, Update the configuration module – refer to
The configuration module has not been updated.
before the GDU 620 enters Normal mode. Section 5.5.15.2.
Vertical GPS deviation is not displayed on the For 400W/500W Series units, the ARINC 429 Enable Labels on the 400W/500W Series unit
GDU 620. vertical deviation labels are not being transmitted. ARINC 429 configuration page.
Configure the ARINC 429 inputs/outputs for LNAV1
Unable to control the GPS course when in OBS The GPS navigator is not correctly configures as
(SYS1) or LNAV2 (SYS2) based upon whether the
mode. LNAV1/2 or SYS1/2.
navigator is GPS1 or GPS2.

Data is not being received from an ARINC 429 ARINC 429 bus hi and low are swapped. Verify/correct wiring.
device.
Reconfigure input port to the correct setting for that
(valid data is being received on the 429 input port LRU (refer to Section 5.5.1 for configuration
as shown on the GDU 620 PORT MONITORING Wrong device is connected to port on GDU 620.
details). Use correct ports (refer to Section F for
page) interconnect details).

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 6-4
Table 6-1. GDU 620 Troubleshooting Guide

Problem Cause Solution

Data is not being received from an ARINC 429 On the transmitting LRU, the ARINC 429 Set the ARINC 429 transmitter speed to correct
device. transmitter speed is not set correctly. speed.
(no data is being received on the 429 input port as
shown on the GDU 620 PORT MONITORING Wiring is not correct. Check for continuity/shorts and correct as required.
page)
Attitude and heading errors/resets are possible if
the air data tests are conducted indoors without a
good GPS signal. With marginal or no GPS signals
present, sudden changes in airspeed caused by This is expected behavior and no troubleshooting is
using a pressure tester may result in attitude and required if this occurs. To reduce the chances of
Attitude and heading on GDU 620 red ‘X’ / GRS 77
heading errors and possibly cause the GRS 77 to inducing attitude and heading errors/resets while
resets during air data ground testing.
reset. This occurs because the artificial changes in conducting the air data tests, ensure that the G600
airspeed cause disagreement with the other sensor is receiving good GPS signals.
measurements internal to the GRS 77. This sensor
disagreement will not occur in the normal conditions
of flight.
Invalidation of heading is possible if the air data
This is expected behavior and no troubleshooting is
Heading red ‘X’ during air data ground testing tests are conducted indoors, due to typical
required if this occurs.
magnetic anomalies, even with a good GPS signal.
On the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION page, set the
affected system as NOT PRESENT and then set
ARINC 429 port not configured on ARINC PORT
back to PRESENT. Verify that the ARINC 429 port
System is configured as PRESENT on the CONFIG page.
is properly configured on ARINC PORT CONFIG
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION page but is still not page.
communicating.
(GDU 620 v3.02 and earlier) On the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION page, set the
RS-232 port not configured on RS PORT CONFIG affected system as NOT PRESENT and then set
page. back to PRESENT. Verify that the RS-232 port is
properly configured on RS PORT CONFIG page.
Ensure that the GDU 620 discrete output is
ARINC 708 WXR does not power on when selected Standby/On discrete input to WXR is not being configured correctly. Refer to Section 5.5.12.2.
to a mode other than OFF on the GDU 620. driven low.
Verify wiring between GDU 620 and WXR.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 6-5
Table 6-1. GDU 620 Troubleshooting Guide

Problem Cause Solution

Ensure that the GDU 620 is configured as
GDU 620 is not configured as the correct display
DISPLAY HEAD to 1 or 2 to match the connections
head.
to the weather radar. Refer to Section 5.5.12.2.
Ensure that the GDU 620 ARINC 429 output is set
ARINC 708 WXR mode cannot be controlled by the to low-speed WX RADAR. Refer to
GDU 620. Section 5.5.12.2.
ARINC 429 control bus is not being provided to the
WXR. Ensure that the GDU 620 discrete output is
configured correctly. Refer to Section 5.5.12.2.
Verify wiring between GDU 620 and WXR.

ARINC 429 data from GRS 77 is not being received Verify that GRS 77 is receiving power.
GAD 43 software will not load.
by the GAD 43/43e. Verify wiring.
If using GAD 43e, GDU 620 is not receiving Verify that all GDU 620 and GAD 43e configuration
appropriate data from GAD 43e. settings are correct.
Autopilot Mode Annunciations not displayed on
PFD. If using ARINC 429, no mode data is being Verify wiring.
received. See NO AP DATA alert in Section 6.3.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 6-6
6.3 G600 Alerts

NOTE
All alerts listed in this section are displayed on the MFD unless otherwise specified.

The G600 will display a number of alerts on the GDU 620. These are listed in the following table.

Table 6-2. GDU 620 Alert Troubleshooting Guide

Alert Text Cause Solution

If PFD 1 AIR DATA switch has ADC 1 selected,
verify that the GDC and SYS configurations have
ADC 1 ALT EC– ADC Static Source Error The GDC 74B is indicating that the SSEC is not matching RVSM aircraft enabled.
Correction is unavailable functioning or the PFD 1 AIR DATA switch has ADC
(TBM 700/850 aircraft only) 2 selected. If PFD 1 AIR DATA switch has ADC 2 selected,
disregard this alert. Selecting ADC 1 will remove
this alert if ADC 1 is operating normally.

AHRS(1/2) GPS – AHRS(1/2) using backup GPS Wait for GPS 1 to acquire a position
AHRS(1/2) is using the backup GPS information
source. Contact repair facility. Verify that the 1 PPS wiring to GPS 1 is correct.

AHRS(1/2) GPS - AHRS is not receiving any GPS Wait for GPS 1/2 to acquire a position.
AHRS(1/2) is not receiving any GPS information.
information Verify that the 1 PPS wiring to each GPS is correct.
Ensure that at least one GPS has acquired a valid
position.
If GDU 620 does not have a valid position, verify
AHRS(1/2) GPS – AHRS (1/2) operating in wiring between GDU 620 and GPS receiver, and
AHRS(1/2) is not receiving any GPS information.
exclusively in no-GPS mode. configuration of GDU 620 and GPS receiver.
If GDU 620 has a valid GPS position, verify wiring
between GDU 620 and GRS. Also verify time mark
wiring.

AHRS(1/2) GPS – AHRS (1/2) not receiving backup AHRS(1/2) is not receiving GPS information from Wait for GPS 2 to acquire a position
GPS information. GPS2. Verify that the 1PPS wiring to GPS2 is correct.
AHRS(1/2) magnetic field model should be Update GRS 77 IGRF model (current model is with
AHRS(1/2) SRVC
updated. Appears on ground only. aviation database).

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 6-7
Table 6-2. GDU 620 Alert Troubleshooting Guide

Alert Text Cause Solution

GDC not powered up. Close ADC C/B.
GDC not receiving input from GTP 59 OAT probe.
AHRS(1/2) TAS AHRS(1/2) is not receiving true airspeed from ADC. Verify wiring is correct.
ARINC 429 connection from GDC 74( ) to GRS 77
is not working. Verify wiring is correct.
Verify that cross-side GDU and ADC are valid.
(Applicable only to dual G600 installations)
ALT NO COMP Verify that GDC 74( ) System ID PGM pins are set
No cross-side air data is available for comparison.
correctly (P74106/71)
Using the ARINC PORT CONFIG page, verify that
On the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION page, a an ARINC 429 input is assigned for all systems that
ARINC 429 CONFIG configured LRU does not have all of its required require one (refer to the SYSTEM
ARINC 429 format(s) configured. CONFIGURATION page to determine which
systems are Present).
An ARINC 708 weather radar is configured as
Verify that an ARINC 708 input is assigned for WX
ARINC 708 CONFIG Present on the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION page,
Radar on the ARINC PORT CONFIG page.
but no ARINC 708 input is configured.
CAL LOST Registry reports that it has lost calibration data. Contact Garmin Technical Support.

CNFG MISMATCH - (Applicable only to dual G600 installations)

Restart both GDU 620s in Configuration mode to
GDU 620 configuration settings disagree GDU 620 in Normal mode has received updated automatically synchronize settings.
(v6.11 and later) crossfill tags for configuration registry entries.

CNFG MISMATCH –  (Applicable only to dual G600 installations)

Restart both GDU 620s in Configuration mode to
GDU 1-2 airframe configurations disagree GDU 620 in Normal mode has received updated automatically synchronize settings.
(v5.02 and earlier). crossfill tags for configuration registry entries.
Verify wiring to configuration module
CNFG MODULE The configuration module is inoperative.
Replace configuration module
DATA LOST Pilot stored data was lost. Recheck data and settings.
Use the DISCRETE CONFIGURATION page in the
DSCRT CONFIG – Discrete output configuration A discrete output required by an interfaced system
SYS page group to configure the discrete outputs to
error. Contact repair facility has not been configured.
match the installation.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 6-8
Table 6-2. GDU 620 Alert Troubleshooting Guide

Alert Text Cause Solution

Fan (1/2) has reported 0 RPM when it was powered Verify that fan is not obstructed and can turn freely.
FAN (1/2) FAIL
with a PWM duty cycle higher than or equal to 10% Refer to Figure C-2 for fan location.
AC reference voltage is not being provided to Verify that AC reference voltage is turned on and
GAD 43 - AC Reference Lost
GAD 43/43e. wiring is correct.
The GRS 77 AHRS has flagged its outputs as
If this error persists, GRS 77 must be returned for
GAD 43 - AHRS A429 Attitude Invalid Fault invalid. This is due to a fault caused by the internal
service. Contact Garmin Technical Support.
AHRS monitors.
The GAD 43/43e adapter has received a pitch
If this error persists, GRS 77 must be returned for
GAD 43 - AHRS Pitch Out of Range Fault signal from the GRS 77 AHRS that is out of range
service. Contact Garmin Technical Support.
(greater than 90 degrees up/down).
The GRS 77 AHRS has flagged its outputs as
If this error persists, GRS 77 must be returned for
GAD 43 - AHRS Attitude Invalid Fault invalid. This is due to a fault caused by the internal
service. Contact Garmin Technical Support.
AHRS monitors.

GAD 43/43e has detected a timeout on the Verify that GRS 77 is powered up.
GAD 43 - AHRS A429 Heading Timeout Fault incoming ARINC 429 heading data from the Verify that ARINC 429 data bus wiring from GRS 77
GRS 77. to GAD 43/43e is correct.
The GRS 77 AHRS has flagged its heading output
If this error persists, GRS 77 must be returned for
GAD 43 - AHRS A429 Heading Invalid Fault as invalid. This is due to a fault caused by the
service. Contact Garmin Technical Support.
internal AHRS monitor.
Reload software into GAD 43/43e.
GAD 43 - Application SCI Integrity Fault Internal software does not pass CRC check. If this error persists, GAD 43/43e must be returned
for service. Contact Garmin Technical Support.
Update GAD 43/43e configuration (refer to 
Internal GAD 43/43e configuration data does not Section 5.5.11). If this error persists, GAD 43/43e
GAD 43 - Configuration Integrity Fault
pass CRC check. must be returned for service. Contact Garmin
Technical Support.
GAD 43/43e has detected that its internal GAD 43/43e must be returned for service. Contact
GAD 43 - Calibration Integrity Fault
calibration is corrupt. Garmin Technical Support.

The GDU 620 is not receiving information from the GAD 43/43e not powered up. Close GAD C/B
GAD 43 FAIL - GAD 43 communication lost.
GAD 43/43e. Verify wiring between GDU 620 and GAD 43/43e.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 6-9
Table 6-2. GDU 620 Alert Troubleshooting Guide

Alert Text Cause Solution

With the GDU 620 in Configuration mode, verify
The GAD 43/43e configuration information stored in
that the GAD 43/43e configuration settings are
GAD 43 - Gyro Emulation Type Mismatch Fault the GAD 43/43e and the GDU 620 configuration
correct on the GAD 43/43e page in the GAD page
module do not match.
group.
GDU 620 monitor has detected a fault with the If this error persists, GRS 77 must be returned for
GAD 43 - GDU AHRS Monitor Fault
connected AHRS. service. Contact Garmin Technical Support.
Verify that wiring is correct for analog pitch outputs
GAD 43/43e has detected an error with one or more from GAD 43/43e.
of its analog pitch outputs. If this error persists, contact Garmin Technical
GAD 43 - Pitch Deviation Fault Support.
AC reference voltage is not being provided to Verify that AC reference voltage is turned on and
GAD 43/43e. wiring is correct.
GAD 43/43e has detected an error with the unit’s If this error persists, GAD 43/43e must be returned
GAD 43 - Power Supply Fault
internal power supplies. for service. Contact Garmin Technical Support.
Verify that wiring is correct for analog roll outputs
GAD 43/43e has detected an error with one or more from GAD 43/43e.
of its analog roll outputs. If this error persists, contact Garmin Technical
GAD 43 - Roll Deviation Fault Support.
AC reference voltage is not being provided to Verify that AC reference voltage is turned on and
GAD 43/43e. wiring is correct.
Verify that wiring is correct for analog yaw rate
GAD 43/43e has detected an error with its analog output from GAD 43/43e.
GAD 43 - Yaw Rate Deviation Fault
yaw rate output. If this error persists, contact Garmin Technical
Support.
With the GDU 620 in Configuration mode, verify
The GAD 43/43e configuration information stored in
that the GAD 43/43e configuration settings are
GAD 43 - Yaw Rate Scale Factor Mismatch Fault the GAD 43/43e and the GDU 620 configuration
correct on the GAD 43/43e page in the GAD page
module do not match.
group.
Verify that GRS 77 is powered up.
GAD 43/43e has detected a timeout on its incoming
GAD 43 - AHRS A429 Attitude Timeout Fault Verify that ARINC 429 data bus wiring from GRS 77
ARINC 429 attitude data from the GRS 77.
to GAD 43/43e is correct.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 6-10
Table 6-2. GDU 620 Alert Troubleshooting Guide

Alert Text Cause Solution

GAD 43/43e must be returned for service. Contact
GAD 43 - Unit Fault GAD 43/43e has detected an internal fault.
Garmin Technical Support.
With the GDU 620 in Configuration mode, go to the
The GAD 43e configuration information stored in
GAD 43e page in the GAD page group. Simply
GAD 43e CONFIG the GAD 43e and the GDU 620 configuration
viewing this page will cause the configuration to be
module do not match.
rewritten to the GAD 43e.
With the GDU 620 in Configuration mode, go to the
GDL 69 page in the GDL page group. Verify that
The GDL 69 configuration information stored in the
the SET and ACTIVE configuration settings are the
GDL 69 and the GDU 620 configuration module do
same. If not, use the SET>ACTV soft key to copy
GDL69 CONFIG not match.
the configuration settings from the GDU 620 into
the GDL 69.
The GDL 69 configuration was updated using Update the GDL 69 configuration using the
another LRU (e.g. the GMX 200 or 400W/500W). GDU 620.
This error appears whenever the GDU 620 is Cycle power to the GDU. This error automatically
replaced with a GDU 620 that was configured for a clears on the second power up with a different
GDU CONFIG different installation. configuration module.
Check GDU 620 configuration in accordance with
Error in the configuration of the GDU 620.
Section 5.
Ensure fans on indicated GDU 620 are functioning
Specific GDU 620 has poor cooling, and power
GDU (1/2) COOLING Ensure fans on indicated GDU 620 are not
usage is being reduced.
obstructed
Error in specific database, where GDU (1/2) DB
GDU (1/2) DB ERR Reload affected database to SD card.
denotes specific database.
Increase the voltage above 12VDC.
This alert is normal in 14V aircraft that are running
GDU (1/2) VOLTAGE GDU supply voltage is below 12 VDC. on the battery only and should clear once the
aircraft engine is started and the
alternator/generator is carrying the load.
Location is too far north/south for GRS 77 magnetic
GEO LIMITS
compass.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 6-11
Table 6-2. GDU 620 Alert Troubleshooting Guide

Alert Text Cause Solution

Ensure GPS (1/2) is turned on
GPS(1/2) FAIL No GPS1 or GPS2 data is available.
Verify RS-232 wiring from the GPS to the GDU 620.
This alert will be set if the PPS signal has not been Ensure GPS (1/2) is turned on
received in more than 5 sec. If the unit is configured
GPS(1/2) PPS Failure
for dual GPS then the side will be specified in the Verify 1PPS wiring from the GPS to the GDU 620.
error.
GPS1 has failed and GPS2 is configured and
GPS2 FPL USED
operating.
With the GDU 620 in Configuration mode, go to the
The GWX 68 configuration information stored in the
GWX WEATHER RADAR page in the WXR page
GWX CONFIG GWX 68 and the GDU 620 configuration module do
group. Press the SET>ACTV soft key to copy the
not match.
GDU 620 configuration into the GWX 68.
GRS 77 not receiving information from 
HDG FAULT AHRS magnetometer fault has occurred.
GMU 44. Verify wiring to GMU 44.
Caused by a local magnetic anomaly. No action
HDG LOST Heading from the GRS77/ GMU 44 is not valid.
required.
Verify that cross-side GDU and ADC are valid.
(Applicable only to dual G600 installations)
IAS NO COMP Verify that GDC 74( ) System ID PGM pins are set
No cross-side air data is available for comparison.
correctly (P741-6/71)
Specific LRU should be serviced, where <LRU>
<LRU> SERVICE Return indicated LRU to Garmin for service.
denotes specific LRU.
GDU 620 has received product data for an LRU that
Ensure the manifest is properly configured. Refer to
should have a manifest entry, but is not in the
Section 5.5.4 for additional information.
manifest.
MANIFEST Update the LRU software to match the manifest
The LRU software P/N and version number in the (refer to Section 5.4)
manifest does not match the values being reported
by that LRU. Update the manifest to match the LRU software
(refer to Section 5.5.4)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 6-12
Table 6-2. GDU 620 Alert Troubleshooting Guide

Alert Text Cause Solution

On ARINC PORT CONFIG page, verify that
KFC 275/325 autopilots- GDU 620 is configured to appropriate ARINC 429 input has been configured
receive ARINC 429 mode data from the autopilot and data is being received on it (green box
but none is received. displayed).
Check wiring between GDU 620 and KCP 275/325.
NO AP DATA (displayed on PFD) KFC 150/KAP 150 autopilots- GDU 620 is On RS PORT CONFIG page, verify that appropriate
configured to receive RS-232 data from the GAD RS-232 input has been configured and data is
43e but none is received. being received (green box displayed).
KFC 150/KAP 150 autopilots- GAD 43e is
configured to receive serial data from the autopilot Check wiring between GAD 43e and KCP 191/192.
but none is received.
Verify NAV RCVR 1 is configured and operating
NAV1 FAIL No navigation receiver 1 data.
correctly. Verify wiring.
Verify NAV RCVR 2 is configured and operating
NAV2 FAIL No navigation receiver 2 data.
correctly. Verify wiring.

(Applicable only to dual G600 installations) Verify that cross-side GDU and AHRS are valid.
PIT NO COMP or
No cross-side attitude data is available for Verify that GRS 77 System ID PGM pins are set
ROL NO COMP
comparison. correctly (P771-2/3).
Registered the GSR 56 with Garmin Flight Data
REGISTER GFDS Data services are inoperative, register with GFDS.
Services to receive weather data.
A system requiring RS-485 is configured as Present
on the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION or AUTOPILOT Verify that a suitable RS-485 port is assigned for
RS-485 CONFIG
CONFIGURATION page but no RS-485 port is that system on the RS PORT CONFIG page.
configured.
SIMULATOR The simulator mode is active. Ensure P6202-36 is not grounded.
Location is beyond region covered by terrain Ensure that terrain database covers region of
SVT DISABLED - Out of available terrain region.
database. operation.
Update the Supplemental Data card with the 9 arc-
SVT DISABLED - Terrain DB resolution too low. A 30 arc-second terrain database is being used.
second terrain database.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 6-13
Table 6-2. GDU 620 Alert Troubleshooting Guide

Alert Text Cause Solution

GDU 620 software version strings do not match. Ensure that both GDU 620s have the same
SW MISMATCH
Crossfill disabled. software version.
The GDU 620 is not receiving traffic information
from the traffic sensor. Verify wiring between
GDU 620 and traffic sensor.
TRAFFIC FAIL The traffic information system has failed. The GDU 620 is receiving information from the
traffic sensor, but the information is indicating that
the traffic sensor has failed. Troubleshoot traffic
system.
TRK LOST GPS1 TRK lost. HSI defaulted to GPS2 TRK. Ensure GPS has a valid position.
TRK TRAFFIC Heading Lost. Traffic is now based on track. See HDG errors.
This is a normal system alert. No installation action
WX ALERT Possible severe weather ahead
is required.
Ensure that the weather radar is powered up.
Verify wiring between GDU 620 and weather radar.
WX RADAR FAIL Weather radar has failed.
If the GWX 68/70 weather radar is routed through
the GDL 69, ensure that the GDL 69 Ethernet ports
are enabled.
The ARINC 708 weather radar is reporting that it is Ensure that the weather radar is receiving all
WXR INPUT FAULT – Weather radar is not
not receiving one or more ARINC 429 inputs for required ARINC 429 control and/or stabilization
receiving one or more inputs.
which it is configured. inputs.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 6-14
6.4 Autopilot Troubleshooting

Table 6-3. Autopilot Troubleshooting Guide

Problem Cause Solution

External input to autopilot not valid.
Troubleshoot in accordance with the autopilot
Internal problem in the autopilot computer, autopilot installation manual.
control panel, or servos.
Ensure the GAD 43/43e and connected LRUs
(GDU 620, GRS 77) are powered-on.
GAD 43/43e flagging attitude as invalid.
Ensure that the PFD displays a valid attitude (and is
Autopilot will not engage. (for installations using the GAD 43/43e to supply not in AHRS-Align mode).
attitude information to autopilot)
Verify ARINC 429 data bus wiring from GRS 77 to
GAD 43/43e.
Autopilot disconnect wiring through GAD 43/43e is
Verify wiring to GAD 43/43e.
not correct.
Reference the appropriate interconnect drawing in
(for installations using the GAD 43/43e to supply
Section F.
attitude information to autopilot)
GDU 620 not properly configured for flight director Check GDU 620 flight director configuration
inputs. settings per Section 5.5.10.
Check flight director signal wiring between autopilot
Autopilot servos turn opposite direction of flight
Flight director signal wiring reversed. and GDU 620. Reference the interconnect drawing
director.
in Appendix F.
Check autopilot servo rigging if it was changed
Autopilot servo rigged incorrectly.
during G600 installation.
Configure GDU 620 for flight director per
GDU 620 not configured for flight director.
Section 5.5.10.
Verify valid signal wiring between autopilot and
GDU 620. Reference the interconnect drawing in
Flight director not displayed on GDU 620.
Flight director valid signal not received by Section F.
GDU 620. The valid signal status can be observed on the
GDU 620 on the Flight Director page in
Configuration mode.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 6-15
Table 6-3. Autopilot Troubleshooting Guide

Problem Cause Solution

GDU 620 not properly configured for flight director Check GDU 620 flight director configuration
inputs. settings per Section 5.5.10.
Flight director bars are displayed on the GDU 620
but do not move. Check flight director signal wiring between autopilot
Flight director signals not being received by
and GDU 620. Reference the interconnect drawing
GDU 620.
in Appendix F.
Check the GDU 620 autopilot and flight director
GDU 620 not properly configured for flight director
configuration settings per Section 5.5.9 and
inputs.
Section 5.5.10.
Flight director signal wiring reversed.
Flight director bars move in wrong direction laterally GDU 620 heading error and/or course error inputs
on the GDU 620. not configured correctly. Check flight director signal, heading error, course
error, and lateral deviation signal wiring between
Heading/course error signal wiring between the the autopilot and GDU 620. Reference the
GDU 620 and autopilot reversed. interconnect drawing in Section F.
Lateral deviation signal wiring between the
GDU 620 and autopilot reversed.
GDU 620 not properly configured for flight director Check the GDU 620 flight director configuration
inputs. settings per Section 5.5.10.
Flight director bars move in wrong direction
Flight director wiring reversed. Check flight director signal and glideslope deviation
vertically on the GDU 620.
Glideslope deviation signal wiring between the signal wiring between the autopilot and GDU 620.
GDU 620 and autopilot reversed. Reference the interconnect drawing in Section F.

GDU 620 not properly configured for the heading Check the GDU 620 autopilot configuration settings
error output. per Section 5.5.9.
Autopilot rolls the control yoke or stick in the wrong
direction in heading mode. Check the heading error signal wiring between the
Heading error wiring between GDU 620 and
GDU 620 and autopilot. Reference the interconnect
autopilot reversed.
drawing in Section F.
Check the signal wiring between the GAD 43/43e
Autopilot computer is not receiving roll attitude
Autopilot rolls the control yoke or stick to extreme (> and autopilot computer. Reference the interconnect
information.
30 degree) angles in any lateral mode. drawing in Section F.
(for installations using the GAD 43/43e to supply Check the signal wiring between the GAD 43/43e
attitude information to autopilot) Autopilot computer is receiving roll attitude
and autopilot computer. Reference the interconnect
information in opposite polarity.
drawing in Section F.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 6-16
Table 6-3. Autopilot Troubleshooting Guide

Problem Cause Solution

Check the signal wiring between the GAD 43/43e
Autopilot computer is not receiving pitch attitude
Autopilot pitches the control yoke or stick to and autopilot computer. Reference the interconnect
information.
extreme (> 15 degree) angles in any vertical mode. drawing in Section F.
(for installations using the GAD 43/43e to supply Check the signal wiring between the GAD 43/43e
attitude information to autopilot) Autopilot computer is receiving pitch attitude
and autopilot computer. Reference the interconnect
information in opposite polarity.
drawing in Section F.
GDU 620 not properly configured for the course Check the GDU 620 autopilot configuration settings
error output. per Section 5.5.9.
Autopilot rolls the control yoke or stick in the wrong Course error wiring between the GDU 620 and
direction in NAV or approach mode. autopilot reversed. Check the course error signal and lateral deviation
signal wiring between the GDU 620 and autopilot.
Lateral deviation signal wiring between the Reference the interconnect drawing in Section F.
GDU 620 and autopilot reversed.
Check the heading error signal wiring between the
Autopilot does not roll the control yoke or stick to Autopilot not receiving heading error signal from the
GDU 620 and autopilot. Reference the interconnect
follow the heading bug when in heading mode. GDU 620.
drawing in Section F.
Autopilot not receiving course error signal from the
GDU 620.
Check the course error signal, lateral deviation
Autopilot does not roll the control yoke or stick to
Autopilot not receiving the lateral deviation signal signal, and lateral flag wiring between the GDU 620
correct lateral deviation from the course when in
from the GDU 620. and autopilot. Reference the interconnect drawing
NAV or approach mode.
in Section F.
Autopilot not receiving the lateral flag from the
GDU 620.
Autopilot not receiving glideslope deviation signal
Autopilot does not move the control yoke or stick to from the GDU 620. Check the glideslope deviation and vertical flag
correct glideslope deviation when in approach signal wiring between the GDU 620 and autopilot.
mode with a valid glideslope signal. Autopilot not receiving the vertical flag from the Reference the interconnect drawing in Section F.
GDU 620.
Check the lateral and vertical flag signal wiring
Autopilot remains in ARM mode and does not Autopilot not receiving lateral or vertical flag from
between the GDU 620 and autopilot. Reference the
capture VOR, localizer, or glideslope. the GDU 620.
interconnect drawing in Section F.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 6-17
Table 6-3. Autopilot Troubleshooting Guide

Problem Cause Solution

Autopilot does not support altitude preselector Verify that the autopilot supports the altitude
interface with the GDU 620. preselector interface with the GDU 620.
GDU 620 not configured for altitude preselector Check the GDU 620 autopilot configuration settings
Autopilot does not respond to altitude preselector in
output to autopilot. per Section 5.5.9.
the GDU 620.
Check the RS-485 altitude preselector wiring
Autopilot not receiving the RS-485 altitude
between the GDU 620 and autopilot. Reference the
preselector setting from the GDU 620.
interconnect drawing in Section F.
If the GAD 43/43e is configured to provide this
information, go to the GAD 43/43e configuration
page and verify that the YAW RATE SCALE
Autopilot is not receiving barometric correction FACTOR is set to NONE.
information.
Verify the wiring between the GAD 43 and the
autopilot. Reference the appropriate interconnect
drawing in Section F.
Autopilot does not capture at the selected altitude.
(for installations using the GAD 43/43e to supply Calibrate the autopilot computer to the barometric
barometric correction information to autopilot) Barometric correction information is not correct. correction output of the GAD 43/43e in accordance
with the autopilot installation manual.
If the GAD 43/43e is configured to provide
barometric correction information, a separate
altitude source must provide altitude information to
Autopilot is not receiving altitude information.
the autopilot computer. Check wiring to autopilot
altitude source in accordance with the autopilot
installation manual.
Verify that the GDU 620 is in GPSS mode. This is
controlled by the HDG key or an external switch
GDU 620 not in GPSS mode.
and is annunciated (see Section 5.10.2.3 for a
Autopilot does not follow GPS roll steering screenshot).
(ARINC 429 roll steering autopilots).
Check the ARINC 429 roll steering wiring between
Autopilot not receiving ARINC 429 roll steering from
the GDU 620 and autopilot. Reference the
the GDU 620.
interconnect drawing in Section F.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 6-18
Table 6-3. Autopilot Troubleshooting Guide

Problem Cause Solution

GDU 620 not in GPSS mode. Verify that the GDU 620 is in GPSS mode. This is
controlled by the HDG key or an external switch
Roll steering converter not receiving ARINC 429 roll and is annunciated (see Section 5.10.2.3 for a
Autopilot does not follow GPS roll steering (analog steering from the GDU 620. screenshot).
roll steering autopilots).
Check the wiring between the GDU 620, roll
Autopilot not receiving analog heading error signal
steering converter (if installed), and autopilot.
from GDU 620 or roll steering converter.
Reference the interconnect drawing in Section F.
On the GAD 43/43e configuration page, verify that
the yaw rate signal scaling (mV/deg/sec) matches
the required input as specified in the autopilot
Autopilot not receiving Yaw Rate signal from the installation manual.
GAD 43/43e.
Check the yaw rate wiring between the GAD 43/43e
and autopilot. Reference the interconnect drawing
in Section F.
Autopilot does not make coordinated turns
Check the heading wiring between the GAD 43/43e
(for installations using the GAD 43/43e to supply Autopilot not receiving heading output signal from
and autopilot. Reference the interconnect drawing
yaw rate and/or heading information to autopilot) the GAD 43/43e.
in Section F.
Ensure the GAD 43/43e and connected LRUs
(GDU 620, GRS 77) are powered-on. Ensure that
Heading valid discrete output from the GAD 43/43e the PFD displays a valid heading.
is indicating an invalid heading. Check the heading wiring between the GAD 43/43e
and autopilot. Reference the interconnect drawing
in Section F.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 6-19
Table 6-3. Autopilot Troubleshooting Guide

Problem Cause Solution

Verify that Altitude Preselect is set to GAD 43e on
AUTOPILOT CONFIGURATION page
Verify that GAD 43e is configured for Altitude
Preselect Type “United Inst 5506L-S”.
Autopilot computer is not receiving valid altitude
ALT SEL just flashes when attempting to engage error data. Verify that 28VDC is being provided to GAD 43e
ALT SEL mode P432-58 (this provides 28VDC for the Preselect
(Collins APS-65) Mon + (P432-59)).
Verify wiring between GAD 43e P432 and the
autopilot computer.
Verify that knob in motion wire is not shorted to
Knob in Motion discrete is constantly grounded.
ground.

6.5 Mid-Continent Standby ADI System (if installed)

Table 6-4. Mid-Continent Standby ADI Troubleshooting Guide

Problem Cause Solution

The Standby ADI system does not run from aircraft Ensure that STBY ADI circuit breaker is closed.
Unit is not getting aircraft power.
power. Verify that power wiring to ADI is correct.
Verify that STBY PWR switch has been pressed.
Verify that standby battery is charged.
The Standby ADI system does not operate from
The battery power is not supplied to the ADI.
battery power. If the MD420 emergency power supply is being
used, verify that wiring from emergency power
supply to the ADI is correct.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 6-20
6.6 Contacting Garmin for Assistance
If the G600 fails to operate despite troubleshooting efforts, contact Customer Service for assistance.
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062-3426 USA
Phone: 913-397-8200
FAX: 913-397-8282
fly.Garmin.com
Be prepared to offer the following information about the installation:
• Installation configuration (accessories, interfaced systems, completed configuration sheet)
• Model numbers, part numbers with mod levels, and serial numbers
• Software versions for GDU 620, GRS 77, GMU44, GDC 74( ), GAD 43/43e, and GNS or GTN
navigator(s).
• Description of problem
• Efforts made to isolate the problem

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 6-21
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 6-22 Rev. L
7 LIMITATIONS
7.1 Operation
All functions of the G600 System meet the appropriate design assurance qualifications for primary flight
displays in all aircraft listed on the AML. The TSO authorizations by function are listed in Section 1.6. The
installation instructions in this manual must be followed in order to ensure an airworthy installation for
aircraft operating under Title 14 CFR Parts 91, 121, and 135 with the limitations of those installations
listed here.
Data for some aircraft models listed on the AML is currently insufficient to substantiate IFR operations
with the G600. Consequently, these aircraft models are limited to VFR operation only and must be
placarded in accordance with Section 2.5.3.3. Refer to Table K-1 in Appendix K to determine if a
particular aircraft model is limited to VFR when modified with the installation of a G600 system.
7.2 STC Installations
The physical mounting of the GDU 620 and required standby instruments are covered within this manual.
However, if it is necessary to relocate any required instrumentation in an instrument panel to make room
for the GDU 620 or required standby instruments, the relocation of these instruments is beyond the scope
of the STC. The installer should reference the aircraft manufacturer’s data or other approved alteration
methods.
Instruments relocated in accordance with this manual should use the original lighting system provided by
the type design. When modifying or re-fabricating an instrument panel which has an overlay for lighting
the installer must modify the lighting overlay in accordance with the manufacturer’s data or replace that
lighting with an approved lighting technique covered by the TC, applicable STC, or other approved
method.
For preservation of essential equipment in aircraft with multiple power busses, the GDU 620, GRS 77, and
GDC 74( ) must be powered from the essential bus. For aircraft with a single bus feed, this equipment must
be powered from the main bus. Operation of the pilot’s (primary) system on an avionics bus or secondary
bus is prohibited, except as explicitly stated in this manual.
Backup CDIs which support GPS or GPS/NAV will not operate properly under all conditions; as such, if a
backup CDI is installed, it must be limited to VOR/LOC and/or ILS indications only.
Installations which utilize a standby attitude indicator with a flight director presentation integral to the unit
must disable the flight director presentation. The parallax view of the flight director requires FAA
evaluation to determine suitability for each panel location of the attitude indicator. Driving multiple flight
director displays from some autopilot / flight director computers may overload the signal and affect the
amplitude and overall delay of the presentation. Approval for the display of the flight director on the
standby attitude instrument may be done via TC, STC, or FAA Field Approval, but is beyond the scope of
the G600 AML STC.
Aircraft requiring a third attitude instrument for operations under Part 121 or 135 must still comply with
the G600 standby instrument requirements and placement; as such, one additional attitude indicator is
required for the copilot’s position. This third attitude indication may be a traditional gyro, or second G600
system installed in accordance with this manual.
Aircraft operating at or above RVSM published altitudes will not meet the RVSM requirements with the
G600 installation unless the aircraft group and installation comply with RVSM specific requirements
outlined in this manual.
The GAD 43/43e adapter is not capable of providing analog attitude information without external integrity
monitoring. In order to ensure the proper error detection rate and ensure the safety of the system, the

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 7-1
GDU 620 is the only device that can be used as an integrity monitor when the GAD 43/43e is used to
replace the attitude source for an autopilot. Consequently, installation of the GAD 43/43e is not authorized
without the GDU 620 installed in accordance with this manual.
7.2.1 Penetration of Aircraft Pressure Vessels
In pressurized aircraft some components of the G600 system may be mounted outside the pressurized area,
requiring that wires penetrate through the pressure vessel. This installation must utilize the provisions of
bulkhead penetrations, such as sealed connectors or wiring, as provided by the manufacturer and in
accordance with the aircraft maintenance manual. Substantiation for additional holes in the pressure vessel
is beyond the scope of the G600 AML STC and would require additional data from the aircraft
manufacturer or other FAA approved data.
7.2.2 Equipment Interfaced to the G600 System
Connections from the G600 to aircraft systems other than those shown in this installation manual are
outside the scope of the G600 AML STC and may require further evaluation and / or certification approval.
All equipment interfaced to the G600 must be previously or concurrently approved.
7.2.2.1 GNS 500W Series and GTN 6XX/7XX TAWS Annunciation
Only TAWS annunciations received from the #1 System (i.e. GPS or GPS 1) are displayed on the PFD. If
the aircraft’s TAWS system is embedded in a GNS 500W Series or GTN 6XX/7XX navigator configured
as system #2, the remote annunciations will not display on the PFD of the G600.
7.2.2.2 Altitude Alerter and Preselectors
Some autopilot systems support altitude capture during flight level changes. Of those systems, only a
subset of autopilots support external vertical speed and/or pre-selected altitudes. The G600 Altitude
Alerter can function as an Altitude Pre-Selector only for those systems identified in this installation manual
and only when the option is enabled in the G600 as a system upgrade. The functional extent of the Altitude
Alerter must be communicated to the pilot via the Airplane Flight Manual Supplement.
7.2.2.3 Traffic Sensor Interfaced to the G600
The G600 System is certified to support only one traffic sensor for a given installation. The system
supports multiple types (TAS, TCAS I, TIS) of traffic systems, but only one system may be configured for
use. For installations with dual G600 systems installed, this STC does not approve interfacing a different
traffic sensor to each GDU 620.
7.2.2.4 ARINC 708 Weather Radar Interfaced to the G600
The data provided in this STC does not support interfacing ARINC 708 weather radars to the GDU 620 in
non-metallic aircraft.
7.2.2.5 Video Display
Functions and operations using the video display must be limited to AC 23.1309-1 Minor criticality or less.
The video display may be used as a supplement to provide additional visual perspective to aid operations
that do not rely solely on the video image.
7.2.3 Major Alterations
The installation of the G600 system is a major alteration to the aircraft. Following a major alteration, the
aircraft must be returned to service in a means acceptable to the cognizant aviation authority. An example
would be an FAA Form 337 “Major Repair and Alteration Airframe, Powerplant, Propeller, or Appliance”
properly executed to describe the major alteration including the equipment and systems to which the G600
system is interfaced, and submitted to the appropriate FAA office.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 7-2 Rev. L
7.2.4 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness
Before returning the airplane to service, the G600 Configuration and Checkout Log must be completed and
attached with the Instructions for Continued Airworthiness so that any aircraft with the modifications
detailed in this manual may be properly maintained.
7.2.5 Installations with External TAWS
Aircraft installations that have a TAWS which generates aural and visual annunciations are not
interoperable with the GDU 620 internal implementation of TAWS or SVT-Terrain. Only one TAWS may
be installed in the aircraft. If an external TAWS is installed along with SVT on the GDU 620, the GDU 620
must be configured to disable SVT-Terrain aural and visual annunciations.
7.2.6 Installations with Existing Overspeed Warning System
Certain aircraft are required to have a speed warning device in accordance with § 23.1303 (e). The G600
system does not generate aural airspeed warnings, although the GDU 620 does provide configurable
airspeed discrete outputs that can be utilized with external devices to trigger aural airspeed warnings. For
aircraft that have a speed warning system, the speed warning system must continue to function after the
installation of the G600 system.
7.2.7 Airspeed Indication
The GDU 620 must be configured such that its airspeed tape conveys all operating limitations that were
previously conveyed to the pilot by the type design approved airspeed indicator. Refer to Section 5.5.2.1
for details on configuration of the GDU 620 airspeed tape.
7.2.8 Installations Using the GSR 56 Iridium Transceiver
When interfaced with a GSR 56 Iridium transceiver only one SD card may be present in the GDU 620 and
it must be in the lower slot.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 7-3
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 7-4 Rev. L
8 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
The G600 is designed to not require any regular maintenance. Maintenance of all G600 LRUs is “on
condition” only.
8.1 Cleaning
The front bezel, keypad, and display of the GDU 620 can be cleaned with a soft cotton cloth dampened
with clean water. DO NOT use any chemical-cleaning agents. Care should be taken to avoid scratching the
surface of the display.
8.2 GDC 74( )
Per 14 CFR Part 43 Appendix E, paragraph (b)(2), the GDC 74( ) must be checked using a test procedure
equivalent to 14 CFR Part 43 Appendix E, paragraph (b)(1) with two exceptions:
• The tests of sub-paragraphs (iv) (Friction) and (vi) (Barometric Scale Error) are not applicable
because the digital outputs of the GDC 74( ) are not susceptible to these types of errors.
• Other than for regulatory testing pertaining to Part 43 Appendices E and F, (Pitot/Static leak test as
described in Part 91.411) maintenance of the GDC 74( ) is “on condition” only.
8.3 Lightning Protection (non-metallic aircraft only)

NOTE
Refer to Table K-2 to determine which Transient Voltage Suppressors (TVSs) are required
for a particular aircraft model.

8.3.1 Transient Voltage Suppressor (TVS)

The following sections provide instructions for TVS testing. After a known or suspected lightning strike,
each TVS and TVS assembly must be replaced. If a TVS must be replaced, refer to Section 3.4.3 for
information on installing an in-line TVS, and refer to Section 3.4.4 for information on the TVS assembly
used for Standby ADI bus protection.

NOTE
For a dual G600 installation, only the #1 G600 system components will have the TVS
protection. The following checks will only apply to the #1 GDU 620, GRS 77, and
GDC 74( ).

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 8-1
8.3.1.1 GDU™ 620 (GDU™ 620 #1 in Dual G600 Installation)
Reference the appropriate GDU 620 power interconnect drawing in Appendix F. To check the TVS on the
GDU 620 power inputs, the following steps should be followed:

NOTE
The GDU 620 should be the only LRU connected to the PFD circuit breaker. If other
equipment is connected to the PFD circuit breaker it must also be disconnected prior to
conducting the following check. No other TVS devices should be on this circuit. If the TVS
being checked is not isolated, erroneous readings may result.

1. Remove the GDU 620 as described in Section 3.5.1.1.

2. Open the PFD circuit breaker and use a multi-meter to perform a diode check between P6202-1
and ground:
a) The meter should indicate open with the red lead on P6202-1 and the black lead on ground.
b) The meter should indicate a diode drop of between 2.0V and 2.5V with the red lead on
ground and the black lead on P6202-1.
i. If the diode drop is outside of the above range then replace the TVS.
ii. If the meter indicates a short during steps 2a or 2b then replace the TVS.
iii. If the meter indicates an open in both directions, check the continuity of the fuse.
iv. If the fuse is open, replace the fuse and repeat the check. After replacing the fuse, if
the meter does not ring in only one direction (like a diode) between P6202-1 and
ground, replace the TVS.
v. If the fuse is good, check the wiring for faults. If the wiring is good, replace the TVS.
3. Verify continuity between P6202-1 and P6202-34.
4. Replace the GDU 620 as described in Section 3.5.1.2 and Section 3.5.1.3
5. Reset the PFD circuit breaker.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 8-2 Rev. L
8.3.1.2 GRS 77 (GRS 77 #1 in Dual G600 Installation)

NOTE
The GRS 77 should be the only LRU connected to the AHRS circuit breaker. If other
equipment is connected to the AHRS circuit breaker it must also be disconnected prior to
conducting the following check. No other TVS devices should be on this circuit. If the TVS
being checked is not isolated, erroneous readings may result.

Reference the appropriate GRS power interconnect drawing in Appendix F. To check the TVS on the
GRS 77 power inputs, the following steps should be followed:
1. Remove the connector from the GRS 77.
2. Open the AHRS circuit breaker and use a multi-meter to perform a diode check between P771-18
and ground.
a) The meter should indicate open with the red lead on P771-18 and the black lead on ground.
b) The meter should indicate a diode drop of between 2.0V and 2.5V with the red lead on
ground and the black lead on P771-18.
i. If the diode drop is outside of the above range then replace the TVS.
ii. If the meter indicates a short during steps 2a or 2b then replace the TVS.
iii. If the meter indicates an open in both directions, check the continuity of the fuse.
iv. If the fuse is open, replace the fuse and repeat the check. After replacing the fuse, if
the meter does not ring in only one direction (like a diode) between P771-18 and
ground, replace the TVS.
v. If the fuse is good, check the wiring for faults. If the wiring is good, replace the TVS.
3. Verify continuity between P771-18 and P771-20.
4. Replace the GRS 77 connector and reset the AHRS circuit breaker.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 8-3
8.3.1.3 GDC 74( ) (GDC 74( ) #1 in Dual G600 Installation)

NOTE
The GDC 74( ) should be the only LRU connected to the ADC circuit breaker. If other
equipment is connected to the ADC circuit breaker it must also be disconnected prior to
conducting the following check. No other TVS devices should be on this circuit. If the TVS
being checked is not isolated, erroneous readings may result.

Reference the appropriate GDC power interconnect drawing in Appendix F. To check the TVS on the
GDC 74( ) power inputs, the following steps should be followed:
1. Remove the connector from the GDC 74( ).
2. Open the ADC circuit breaker and use a multi-meter to perform a diode check between P741-55
and ground.
a) The meter should indicate open with the red lead on P741-55 and the black lead on ground.
b) The meter should indicate a diode drop of between 2.0V and 2.5V with the red lead on
ground and the black lead on P741-55.
i. If the diode drop is outside of the above range then replace the TVS.
ii. If the meter indicates a short during steps 2a or 2b then replace the TVS.
iii. If the meter indicates an open in both directions, check the continuity of the fuse.
iv. If the fuse is open, replace the fuse and repeat the check. After replacing the fuse, if
the meter does not ring in only one direction (like a diode) between P741-55 and
ground, replace the TVS.
v. If the fuse is good, check the wiring for faults. If the wiring is good, replace the TVS.
3. Verify continuity between P741-55 and P741-58.
4. Replace the GDC 74( ) connector and reset the ADC circuit breaker.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 8-4 Rev. L
8.3.1.4 GAD 43/43e

NOTE
The GAD 43/43e should be the only LRU connected to the GAD circuit breaker. If other
equipment is connected to the GAD circuit breaker it must also be disconnected prior to
conducting the following check. No other TVS devices should be on this circuit. If the TVS
being checked is not isolated, erroneous readings may result.

Reference the GAD 43/43e power interconnect drawing in Appendix F. To check the TVS on the GAD 43
power inputs, the following steps should be followed:
1. Remove connector P431 from the GAD 43/43e.
2. Open the GAD circuit breaker and use a multi-meter to perform a diode check between P431-49
and ground.
a) The meter should indicate open with the red lead on P431-49 and the black lead on ground.
b) The meter should indicate a diode drop of between 2.0V and 2.5V with the red lead on
ground and the black lead on P431-49.
i. If the diode drop is outside of the above range then replace the TVS.
ii. If the meter indicates a short during steps 2a or 2b then replace the TVS.
iii. If the meter indicates an open in both directions, check the continuity of the fuse.
iv. If the fuse is open, replace the fuse and repeat the check. After replacing the fuse, if
the meter does not ring in only one direction (like a diode) between P741-55 and
ground, replace the TVS.
v. If the fuse is good, check the wiring for faults. If the wiring is good, replace the TVS.
3. If the Aircraft Power 2 input is used, repeat step 2 for the TVS connected to P431-50.
4. Replace the GAD 43/43e connector and reset the GAD circuit breaker(s).

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 8-5
8.3.1.5 Standby ADI with Integrated Battery (if installed)

NOTE
The Standby ADI should be the only LRU connected to the STBY ADI circuit breaker. If
other equipment is connected to the STBY ADI circuit breaker it must also be disconnected
prior to conducting the following check. No other TVS devices should be on this circuit. If
the TVS being checked is not isolated, erroneous readings may result.

Reference the appropriate Standby ADI interconnect drawing in Appendix F. To check the TVS on the
standby ADI power input, the following steps should be followed:
1. Remove the connector from the standby ADI.
2. Open the STBY ADI circuit breaker and use a multi-meter to perform a diode check between
Pin C on the standby ADI connector and ground.
a) The meter should indicate open with the red lead on Pin C and the black lead on ground.
b) The meter should indicate a diode drop of between 2.0V and 2.5V with the red lead on
ground and the black lead on Pin C.
i. If the diode drop is outside of the above range then replace the TVS.
ii. If the meter indicates a short during steps 2a or 2b then replace the TVS.
iii. If the meter indicates an open in both directions, check the continuity of the fuse.
iv. If the fuse is open, replace the fuse and repeat the check. After replacing the fuse, if
the meter does not ring in only one direction (like a diode) between Pin C and ground,
replace the TVS.
v. If the fuse is good, check the wiring for faults. If the wiring is good, replace the TVS.
3. Replace the standby ADI connector and reset the STBY ADI circuit breaker.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 8-6 Rev. L
8.3.1.6 Standby ADI with MD420 Emergency Power Supply (if installed)

NOTE
The MD420 Emergency Power Supply should be the only LRU connected to the STBY ADI
circuit breaker. If other equipment is connected to the STBY ADI circuit breaker it must
also be disconnected prior to conducting the following check. No other TVS devices
should be on this circuit. If the TVS being checked is not isolated, erroneous readings may
result.

Reference the appropriate Standby ADI interconnect drawing in Appendix F. To check the TVS on the
MD420 power input, follow the procedure below:
1. Remove the connector from the MD420.
2. Open the STBY ADI circuit breaker and use a multi-meter to perform a diode check between Pin 1
on the MD420 connector and ground.
a) The meter should indicate open with the red lead on Pin 1 and the black lead on ground.
b) The meter should indicate a diode drop of between 2.0V and 2.5V with the red lead on
ground and the black lead on Pin 1.
i. If the diode drop is outside of the above range then replace the TVS.
ii. If the meter indicates a short during steps 2a or 2b then replace the TVS.
iii. If the meter indicates an open in both directions, check the continuity of the fuse.
iv. If the fuse is open, replace the fuse and repeat the check. After replacing the fuse, if
the meter does not ring in only one direction (like a diode) between Pin 1 and ground,
replace the TVS.
v. If the fuse is good, check the wiring for faults. If the wiring is good, replace the TVS.
3. Replace the MD420 connector and reset the STBY ADI circuit breaker.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 8-7
8.3.1.7 Standby ADI Power Bus Protection (if installed)

NOTE
Early versions of the TVS 2 assembly did not require the connector between the fuse
holder and TVSs. This connector was added to allow periodic inspection of the individual
TVSs, rather than periodic replacement of the entire assembly. If the connector is not
installed, modify the assembly to add the connector prior to conducting the following
checks.

NOTE
Verify operation of all four TVSs prior to replacing any failed TVS.
The TVS assembly (refer to Section 3.4.4) and fuse on the power bus side of the STBY ADI circuit breaker
must be replaced after a known or suspected lightning strike. Reference the appropriate Standby ADI
interconnect drawing in Appendix F. To check the TVS assembly on the Standby ADI power bus, follow
the procedure below:
1. Ensure that the power to the bus is off
7267$1'%<$',
and disconnect the connector in the $

TVS assembly.
2. Use a multi-meter to perform a diode &217,18,7<&+(&.
check between the first connector
contact (socket contact on the first

TVS) and ground. Refer to
Figure 8-1. 796$66(0%/<
&211(&725
a) The meter should indicate open
with the red lead on the
connector socket contact and the
675,3(21 7 7 7 7
black lead on ground. 796,1',&$7(6 9 9 9 9
796',2'(&+(&.
&$7+2'(6,'( 6 6 6 6
b) If the meter indicates a short
then replace the TVS diode
corresponding to the contact
being checked. Figure 8-1. TVS Assembly Checks
i. The meter should indicate
a diode drop of between 2.0 V and 2.5 V with the red lead on ground and the black
lead on the connector socket contact.
ii. If the diode drop is outside of the above range then replace the TVS diode
corresponding to the contact being checked.
iii. If the meter indicates a short then replace the TVS diode corresponding to the contact
being checked.
iv. If the meter indicates an open, check the wiring for faults. If the wiring is good,
replace the TVS diode corresponding to the contact being checked.
3. Repeat checks in the previous step for each of the three remaining contacts/TVS diodes.
4. On the other connector, verify continuity between each of the four contacts and the power bus.
a) If there is no continuity between the power bus and all four contacts, check the continuity of
the fuse.
b) If there is continuity between the power bus and some contacts but not others, check the
wiring to the ‘open’ contacts and repair as necessary.
5. Reconnect the connector in the TVS assembly.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 8-8 Rev. L
8.3.2 Aluminum Foil Tape (if installed)
When inspecting the aluminum foil tape used to ground the GRS 77, GDC 74( ), and GAD 43/43e, verify
that it is not torn, damaged or showing signs of corrosion. If any of these occurs then the tape must be
replaced.
8.3.3 Bonding Straps (if installed)
If a bonding strap is used to ground the GTP 59, it must be replaced after a known or suspected lightning
strike. Refer to Section 3.2.6.2 for additional details.
8.4 Lightning Protection (metal aircraft only)
8.4.1 Lightning Strike Inspection (GMU 44 installed in a nonmetallic wingtip)
In the event of an aircraft lightning strike or suspected aircraft lightning strike, metal aircraft with non-
metallic wingtips are subject to additional inspection items if the GMU 44 magnetometer is installed in the
wingtip. This section describes the procedures for visual and operational inspections of the GMU 44 and
its cable overbraid in the event of a real or suspected aircraft lightning strike. Refer to Appendix L for
overbraid reinstallation or replacement instructions.
8.4.1.1 Required Materials
Visual inspection of the GMU 44 cable and connectors requires the replacement of three tie wraps. See
Appendix L for tie wrap specifications.
8.4.1.2 GMU44 Access
Gain access to the GMU 44 by the following steps:
1. Removing the wingtip cover.
2. Remove the three tie wraps from the cable collar end of the overbraid.
3. Slide the overbraid back and disconnect P441 from J441.
When the visual inspection outlined in the next section is complete, reconnect P441 to J441 and resecure
the overbraid to the GMU 44 cable with new tie wraps in accordance with Appendix L.
8.4.1.3 Visual Inspection
Check the GMU44 and overbraid for the following:
1. Check the GMU 44 magnetometer body and mount for scorching, soot, melting, pitting, denting,
or discoloration.
2. Check P441 and J441 for melting or pin damage.
3. Check the cable overbraid for pinching, melting or evidence of arcing.
4. Check the lug for evidence of arcing and verify that the lug is still secured to the overbraid.
5. Check electrical bonding between the GMU 44 overbraid and adjacent aircraft structure.
Resistance should be less than 5 mΩ.
6. If any of these checks shows evidence of a lightning strike, replace the overbraid assembly in
accordance with Appendix L.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page 8-9
8.4.1.4 GMU44 Operational Check
Perform a GMU 44 operational check as follows:
1. Reconnect P441 to J441 and resecure the overbraid to the terminal lug.
2. Check GMU44 operation by verifying aircraft heading on the GDU 620 PFD.
3. If the operational check fails, replace the GMU 44.
8.4.2 Lightning Strike Inspection (ARINC 708 Weather Radar Overbraid)
In the event of an aircraft lightning strike or suspected aircraft lightning strike, metal aircraft with an
ARINC 708 weather radar interfaced to the GDU 620 are subject to additional inspection. This section
describes the procedures for visual inspections of the cable overbraid in the event of a known or suspected
aircraft lightning strike. Refer to Appendix N for overbraid installation instructions.
8.4.2.1 Visual Inspection
Check the weather radar overbraid for the following:
1. Gain access to the weather radar transceiver by removing the radome.
2. Check the weather radar R/T overbraid for pinching, melting or evidence of arcing.
3. Check the lug for evidence of arcing and verify that the lug is still secured to the overbraid.
4. Check electrical bonding between the weather radar cable overbraid and adjacent aircraft
structure. Resistance should be less than 10 mΩ.
If any of these checks shows evidence of a lightning strike, replace the overbraid assembly in accordance
with Appendix N.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page 8-10 Rev. L
APPENDIX A NOT USED

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page A-1
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page A-2 Rev. L
APPENDIX B CONNECTOR INFORMATION
This appendix contains pinout diagrams and signal descriptions for G600 LRU connectors. For detailed
signal descriptions, refer to the appropriate LRU TSO installation manual. D-sub connector contact types
(pin or socket) are represented in diagrams according to the legend shown in Figure B-1.

NOTE
Contacts are numbered under the “Pin #” column of a pinout table regardless of whether
the contacts are pins or sockets.

3LQ

&RQWDFWV

6RFNHW

&RQWDFWV

Figure B-1. Connector Legend (37-contact D-sub connector shown)

B.1 GDU™ 620 PFD/MFD

GDU 620 rear connectors are shown in Figure B-2. For detailed descriptions of GDU 620 signals, refer to
the GDU 620 TSO Installation Manual (P/N 190-00601-04).

Figure B-2. GDU 620 Rear Connectors

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page B-1
B.1.1 J6201/P6201 Connector

-

*'8

3

'6XE

Pin # Pin Name I/O Pin # Pin Name I/O

1 COMPOSITE VIDEO IN 1 In 19 RESERVED --
2 RESERVED -- 20 COMPOSITE VIDEO IN 2 In
3 AUDIO INHIBIT IN* In 21 RESERVED --
4 CDU SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* In 22 GROUND --
5 SPARE DISC IN* 4 In 23 DISCRETE OUT 1* Out

GSR STATUS IN* 24 DISCRETE OUT 2* Out

6 In
(software version 4.00 or later) 25 DISCRETE OUT 3* Out
7 SPARE DISC IN* 6 In 26 DISCRETE OUT 4* Out
8 GPSS ENABLE IN* In 27 DISCRETE OUT 5* Out
9 FD ENABLE IN In 28 AUDIO OUT HI Out
10 ADF VALID IN In 29 AUDIO OUT LO Out
11 ETHERNET IN 1A In 30 ETHERNET IN 2A In
12 ETHERNET IN 1B In 31 ETHERNET IN 2B In
13 ETHERNET OUT 1A Out 32 ETHERNET OUT 2A Out
14 ETHERNET OUT 1B Out 33 ETHERNET OUT 2B Out
15 FLIGHT DIRECTOR PITCH UP In 34 FLIGHT DIRECTOR ROLL LEFT In
16 FLIGHT DIRECTOR PITCH DOWN In 35 FLIGHT DIRECTOR ROLL RIGHT In
17 ADF X/COS IN In 36 ADF DC REF IN In
18 ADF Y/SIN IN In 37 RESERVED --
An asterisk (*) following the pin description denotes that the signal is Active-Low, requiring
a ground to activate or supplying a ground when active. If there is no asterisk following the
pin description, then the signal is Active-High.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page B-2 Rev. L
B.1.2 J6202/P6202 Connector

-
*'8

3
'6XE

Pin # Pin Name I/O Pin # Pin Name I/O

1 AIRCRAFT POWER In 26 ARINC 429 IN 6B In
2 AIRCRAFT GROUND -- 27 RS-232 OUT 1 Out
3 ARINC 429 OUT 1A Out 28 RS-232 OUT 2 Out
4 ARINC 429 IN 1A In 29 RS-232 OUT 3 Out
5 ARINC 429 IN 2A In 30 RS-232 OUT 4 Out
6 ARINC 429 IN 3A In 31 RS-232 OUT 5 Out
7 ARINC 429 IN 4A In 32 CONFIG MODULE DATA I/O
8 ARINC 429 IN 5A In 33 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK Out
9 ARINC 429 IN 6A In 34 AIRCRAFT POWER In
10 RS-232 IN 1 In 35 AIRCRAFT GROUND --
11 RS-232 IN 2 In 36 DEMO MODE SELECT* In
12 RS-232 IN 3 In 37 RESERVED --
13 RS-232 IN 4 In 38 GROUND --
14 RS-232 IN 5 In 39 RESERVED --
15 LIGHTING BUS HI In 40 TIME MARK IN 1A In
16 LIGHTING BUS LO In 41 TIME MARK IN 1B In
17 RESERVED -- 42 TIME MARK IN 2A In
18 AIRCRAFT POWER In 43 TIME MARK IN 2B In
19 AIRCRAFT GROUND -- 44 RS-232 GND 1 --
20 ARINC 429 OUT 1B Out 45 RS-232 GND 2 --
21 ARINC 429 IN 1B In 46 RS-232 GND 3 --
22 ARINC 429 IN 2B In 47 RS-232 GND 4 --
23 ARINC 429 IN 3B In 48 RS-232 GND 5 --
24 ARINC 429 IN 4B In 49 CONFIG MODULE POWER Out
25 ARINC 429 IN 5B In 50 CONFIG MODULE GND --
An asterisk (*) following the pin description denotes that the signal is Active-Low, requiring
a ground to activate or supplying a ground when active. If there is no asterisk following the
pin description, then the signal is Active-High.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page B-3
B.1.3 J6203/P6203 Connector

-
*'8

3
'6XE

Pin # Pin Name I/O Pin # Pin Name I/O

1 ARINC 429 OUT 2A Out 32 RS-485 2B I/O
2 ARINC 429 OUT 3A Out 33 RS-485 3B I/O
3 ARINC 429 OUT 4A Out 34 RS-485 4B I/O
4 ARINC 429 IN 7A In 35 RESERVED --
5 ARINC 429 IN 8A In 36 ARINC 708/453 IN 1B In
6 RS-232 IN 6 In 37 ARINC 708/453 IN 1 TERM B In
7 RS-232 IN 7 In 38 ARINC 708/453 IN 2B In
8 RS-232 IN 8 In 39 ARINC 708/453 IN 2 TERM B In
9 RS-485 1A I/O 40 A/P HEADING ERROR LO --
10 RS-485 2A I/O 41 A/P COURSE ERROR LO --
11 RS-485 3A I/O 42 A/P AC REF LO In
12 RS-485 4A I/O 43 RESERVED --
13 RESERVED -- 44 DISCRETE OUT 6* Out
14 ARINC 708/453 IN 1A In 45 DISCRETE OUT 7* Out
15 ARINC 708/453 IN 1 TERM A In 46 DISCRETE OUT 8* Out
16 ARINC 708/453 IN 2A In 47 DISCRETE OUT 9* Out
17 ARINC 708/453 IN 2 TERM A In 48 GROUND --
18 A/P HEADING ERROR HI Out 49 RS-232 GND 6 --
19 A/P COURSE ERROR HI Out 50 RS-232 GND 7 --
20 A/P AC REF HI In 51 RS-232 GND 8 --
21 RESERVED -- 52 LATERAL +LEFT OUT Out
22 RESERVED -- 53 LATERAL +RIGHT OUT Out
23 ARINC 429 OUT 2B Out 54 LATERAL +FLAG OUT Out
24 ARINC 429 OUT 3B Out 55 LATERAL –FLAG OUT Out
25 ARINC 429 OUT 4B Out 56 VERTICAL +UP OUT Out
26 ARINC 429 IN 7B In 57 VERTICAL +DOWN OUT Out
27 ARINC 429 IN 8B In 58 VERTICAL +FLAG OUT Out
28 RS-232 OUT 6 Out 59 VERTICAL –FLAG OUT Out
29 RS-232 OUT 7 Out 60 LATERAL SUPERFLAG OUT Out
30 RS-232 OUT 8 Out 61 VERTICAL SUPERFLAG OUT Out
31 RS-485 1B I/O 62 RESERVED --
An asterisk (*) following the pin description denotes that the signal is Active-Low, requiring
a ground to activate or supplying a ground when active. If there is no asterisk following the
pin description, then the signal is Active-High.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page B-4 Rev. L
B.2 GRS 77 AHRS
B.2.1 J771/P771 Connector

-
*56

3
'6XE

Pin # Pin Name I/O Pin # Pin Name I/O

1 CONFIG MODULE GROUND -- 23 SPARE RS-232 OUT 1 Out
2 AHRS SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 1 In 24 POWER GROUND --
3 AHRS SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 2 In 25 MAGNETOMETER RS-485 IN A In
4 RESERVED -- 26 GPS 1 RS-232 OUT Out
5 SPARE -- 27 ARINC 429 OUT 3 B (CDU 1, high-speed) Out
6 GPS 2 RS-232 IN In 28 ARINC 429 OUT 2 B (GIA 2, high-speed) Out
7 RESERVED -- 29 ARINC 429 OUT 1 B (GIA 1, high-speed) Out
8 SPARE RS-232 IN 1 In 30 ARINC 429 IN 1 B (AIR DATA, low-speed) In
9 MAGNETOMETER POWER OUT Out 31 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK Out
10 MAGNETOMETER RS-232 OUT Out 32 SPARE --
11 GPS 1 RS-232 IN In 33 ARINC 429 OUT 3 A (CDU 2, high-speed) Out
12 ARINC 429 OUT 3 A (CDU 1, high-speed) Out 34 SPARE --
13 ARINC 429 OUT 2 A (GIA 2, high-speed) Out 35 SIGNAL GROUND (GPS 2) --
14 ARINC 429 OUT 1 A (GIA 1, high-speed) Out 36 SPARE --
15 ARINC 429 IN 1 A (AIR DATA, low speed) In 37 SIGNAL GROUND --
16 CONFIG MODULE DATA I/O 38 SIGNAL GROUND (MAGNETOMETER) --
17 CONFIG MODULE POWER OUT Out 39 MAGNETOMETER RS-485 IN B In
18 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 In 40 MAGNETOMETER GROUND --
19 ARINC 429 OUT 3 B (CDU 2, high-speed) Out 41 SIGNAL GROUND (GPS 1) --
20 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 In 42 SIGNAL GROUND (CDU 1) --
21 GPS 2 RS-232 OUT Out 43 SIGNAL GROUND (AFCS) --
22 POWER GROUND -- 44 SIGNAL GROUND (AIR DATA) --
An asterisk (*) following the pin description denotes that the signal is Active-Low, requiring
a ground to activate or supplying a ground when active. If there is no asterisk following the
pin description, then the signal is Active-High.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page B-5
B.2.1.1 Power Function
Power-input pins accept 14/28 VDC. AIRCRAFT POWER 2 is for connecting to an alternate power
source, such as on aircraft with two electrical buses.

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

AIRCRAFT POWER 1, GRS 77 P771 18 In
AIRCRAFT POWER 2, GRS 77 P771 20 In
MAGNETOMETER POWER OUT P771 9 Out
MAGNETOMETER GROUND P771 40 --
POWER GROUND, GRS 77 P771 22 --
POWER GROUND, GRS 77 P771 24 --

B.2.1.2 Serial Data

B.2.1.2.1 RS-232
The RS-232 outputs conform to EIA/TIA-232C with an output voltage swing of at least ±5 V when driving
a standard RS-232 load.

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

GPS 1 RS-232 IN P771 11 In
GPS 2 RS-232 IN P771 6 In
SPARE RS-232 IN 1 P771 8 In
GPS 1 RS-232 OUT P771 26 Out
GPS 2 RS-232 OUT P771 21 Out
SPARE RS-232 OUT 1 P771 23 Out
MAGNETOMETER RS-232 OUT P771 10 Out

B.2.1.2.2 RS-485

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

MAGNETOMETER RS-485 IN B P771 39 In
MAGNETOMETER RS-485 IN A P771 25 In
MAGNETOMETER GROUND P771 40 --

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page B-6 Rev. L
B.2.1.2.3 ARINC 429

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

ARINC 429 OUT 3A (high-speed) P771 12 Out
ARINC 429 OUT 3A (high-speed) P771 33 Out
ARINC 429 OUT 3B (high-speed) P771 27 Out
ARINC 429 OUT 3B (high-speed) P771 19 Out
SIGNAL GROUND P771 42 --
ARINC 429 OUT 1A (high-speed) P771 14 Out
ARINC 429 OUT 2A (high-speed) P771 13 Out
ARINC 429 OUT 1B (high-speed) P771 29 Out
ARINC 429 OUT 2B (high-speed) P771 28 Out
SIGNAL GROUND P771 43 --
ARINC 429 IN 1A (low-speed) P771 15 In
ARINC 429 IN 1B (low-speed) P771 30 In
SIGNAL GROUND P771 44 --
SIGNAL GROUND P771 41 --
SIGNAL GROUND P771 35 --
SIGNAL GROUND P771 37 --

B.2.1.3 Configuration Module Connections

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

CONFIG MODULE GROUND P771 1 --
CONFIG MODULE DATA P771 16 I/O
CONFIG MODULE POWER OUT P771 17 Out
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK P771 31 Out

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page B-7
B.2.1.4 AHRS System ID Strapping

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

AHRS SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 1 P771 2 In
AHRS SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 2 P771 3 In

By hard strapping the program pins to ground, the GRS 77 is assigned a System ID. IDs identify a GRS 77
as an All Call, #1, #2, or #3 unit. For a single system, the pins are left open (All Call).
The GRS 77 has an associated Source/Destination Identifier (SDI or System ID) that is coded into its
ARINC 429 output messages/labels. The System ID may be used to uniquely distinguish the source of the
GRS 77 ARINC 429 labels in a system with more than one GRS 77. The GRS 77 System ID is set as
follows:

Table B-1. P771 Strapping to Preserve Desired System ID

System ARINC System ID 1 ARINC System ID 2

ID Number Pin 2 Pin 3
All Call Open Open
#1 Ground Open
#2 Open Ground
#3 Ground Ground

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page B-8 Rev. L
B.3 GMU 44 Magnetometer
B.3.1 J441/P441 Connector

VIEW OF P441 CONNECTOR

LOOKING AT FACE OF CONNECTOR PIGTAIL

Pin # Pin Name I/O

1 SIGNAL GROUND --
2 RS-485 OUT B Out
3 SIGNAL GROUND --
4 RS-485 OUT A Out
5 SPARE --
6 POWER GROUND --
7 SPARE --
8 RS-232 IN In
9 +12 VDC POWER In

B.3.1.1 Power Function

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

+12 VDC POWER, GMU 44 P441 9 In
POWER GROUND, GMU 44 P441 6 --

B.3.1.2 Serial Data

B.3.1.2.1 RS-232

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

RS-232 IN P441 8 In

B.3.1.2.2 RS-485

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

RS-485 OUT A P441 4 Out
RS-485 OUT B P441 2 Out

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page B-9
B.4 GDC 74( )
B.4.1 J741/P741 Connector

-

*'&

3

'6XE

Pin # Pin Name I/O Pin # Pin Name I/O

1 CONFIG MODULE GROUND -- 42 ARINC 429 OUT 1 B Out
2 OAT PROBE POWER OUT Out 43 SIGNAL GROUND --
3 OAT PROBE IN HI In 44 ARINC 429 OUT 2 A Out
4 OAT PROBE IN LO In 45 ARINC 429 OUT 2 B Out
5 SIGNAL GROUND -- 46 SIGNAL GROUND --
6 ADC SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 1 In 47 ARINC 429 OUT 3 A Out
7 SIGNAL GROUND -- 48 ARINC 429 OUT 3 B Out
DISCRETE IN* 6 49 SIGNAL GROUND --
8 In
(PITOT SENSOR 2 HEATER ACTIVE*) 50 DISCRETE IN 7 In
9 SIGNAL GROUND -- 51 SIGNAL GROUND --
10 RS-232 IN 1 In 52 DISCRETE IN 8 In
11 RS-232 OUT 1 Out 53 SIGNAL GROUND --
12 SIGNAL GROUND -- 54 SPARE --
13 RS-232 IN 2 In 55 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 In
14 RS-232 OUT 2 Out 56 SPARE --
15 SIGNAL GROUND -- 57 SPARE --
16 RESERVED -- 58 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 In
17 POWER GROUND -- 59 SPARE --
18 POWER GROUND -- 60 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK Out
19 POWER GROUND -- DISCRETE IN* 1
61 In
20 POWER GROUND -- (OAT SENSOR 1 HEATER ACTIVE*)
21 CONFIG MODULE POWER OUT Out 62 SIGNAL GROUND --
22 SPARE -- DISCRETE IN* 2
63 In
23 ARINC 429 IN 1 A In (OAT SENSOR 2 HEATER ACTIVE*)
24 ARINC 429 IN 1 B In 64 SIGNAL GROUND --
25 SIGNAL GROUND -- DISCRETE IN* 3
65 In
26 ARINC 429 OUT 1 A Out (STATIC SENSOR 1 HEATER ACTIVE*)
27 ARINC 429 OUT 1 B Out 66 SIGNAL GROUND --
28 SIGNAL GROUND -- DISCRETE IN* 4
67 In
29 ARINC 429 OUT 2 A Out (STATIC SENSOR 2 HEATER ACTIVE*)
30 ARINC 429 OUT 2 B Out 68 SIGNAL GROUND --
31 SIGNAL GROUND -- DISCRETE IN* 5
69 In
32 ARINC 429 OUT 3 A Out (PITOT SENSOR 1 HEATER ACTIVE*)
33 ARINC 429 OUT 3 B Out 70 SIGNAL GROUND --
34 SIGNAL GROUND -- 71 ADC SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 2 In
35 ARINC 429 IN 2 A In 72 SIGNAL GROUND --
36 ARINC 429 IN 2 B In 73 ARINC 429 IN 3 A In
37 SIGNAL GROUND -- 74 ARINC 429 IN 3 B In
38 SPARE -- 75 SIGNAL GROUND --
39 SPARE -- 76 ARINC 429 IN 4 A In
40 CONFIGDULE DATA I/O 77 ARINC 429 IN 4 B In
41 ARINC 429 OUT 1 A Out 78 SIGNAL GROUND --
An asterisk (*) following the pin description denotes that the signal is Active-Low, requiring
a ground to activate or supplying a ground when active. If there is no asterisk following the
pin description, then the signal is Active-High.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page B-10 Rev. L
B.4.1.1 Power
The power-input pins accept 14/28 VDC. AIRCRAFT POWER 2 is for connecting to an alternate power
source, such as on aircraft with two electrical buses. AIRCRAFT POWER 1 (Pin 55) and AIRCRAFT
POWER 2 (Pin 58) are internally “diode ORed” to provide power redundancy.

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

AIRCRAFT POWER 1 P741 55 In
AIRCRAFT POWER 2 P741 58 In
OAT PROBE POWER OUT P741 2 Out
POWER GROUND P741 17 --
POWER GROUND P741 18 --
POWER GROUND P741 19 --
POWER GROUND P741 20 --
CONFIG MODULE POWER OUT P741 21 Out

B.4.1.2 Serial Data

B.4.1.2.1 RS-232 Input/Output
The RS-232 outputs conform to EIA/TIA-232C with an output voltage swing of at least ±5 V when driving
a standard RS-232 load.

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

RS-232 IN1 P741 10 In
RS-232 OUT 1 P741 11 Out
RS-232 IN 2 P741 13 In
RS-232 OUT 2 P741 14 Out
SIGNAL GROUND P741 12 --
SIGNAL GROUND P741 15 --

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page B-11
B.4.1.2.2 ARINC 429 Input/Output
The ARINC 429 transmitters currently operate at low speed. The receivers are capable of accepting either
high-speed or low-speed data. Unless high-speed transmission is necessary, low-speed transmission is
preferred.

Pin Name Connector Pin(s) I/O

ARINC 429 OUT 1 A P741 26, 41 Out
ARINC 429 OUT 1 B P741 27, 42 Out
SIGNAL GROUND P741 28 --
SIGNAL GROUND P741 43 --
ARINC 429 OUT 2 A P741 29, 44 Out
ARINC 429 OUT 2 B P741 30, 45 Out
SIGNAL GROUND P741 31 --
SIGNAL GROUND P741 46 --
ARINC 429 OUT 3 A P741 32, 47 Out
ARINC 429 OUT 3 B P741 33, 48 Out
SIGNAL GROUND P741 34 --
SIGNAL GROUND P741 49 --
ARINC 429 IN 1 A P741 23 In
ARINC 429 IN 1 B P741 24 In
SIGNAL GROUND P741 25 --
ARINC 429 IN 2 A P741 35 In
ARINC 429 IN 2 B P741 36 In
SIGNAL GROUND P741 37
ARINC 429 IN 3 A P741 73 In
ARINC 429 IN 3 B P741 74 In
SIGNAL GROUND P741 75 --
ARINC 429 IN 4 A P741 76 In
ARINC 429 IN 4 B P741 77 In
SIGNAL GROUND P741 78 --

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page B-12 Rev. L
B.4.1.3 Temperature Inputs
Temperature input is used for Outside Air Temperature (OAT) computations. The temperature input is a
three-wire temperature probe interface. OAT Power Out and OAT High are connected internally at the
OAT probe. A GTP 59 or other supported temperature probe is required for the GDC 74( ) ADC
installation. The GTP 59 is a Resistive Temperature Device (RTD).

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

OAT PROBE POWER OUT P741 2 Out
OAT PROBE IN HI P741 3 In
OAT PROBE IN LO P741 4 In

B.4.1.4 Discrete Signal Inputs

DISCRETE IN* pins:
INACTIVE: 10 ≤ Vin ≤ 33 VDC or Rin ≥ 100 kΩ
ACTIVE: Vin ≤ 1.9 VDC with ≥ 75 µA sink current, or Rin ≤ 375 Ω
Sink current is internally limited to 200 µA max for a grounded input
DISCRETE IN pins:
INACTIVE: Vin ≤ 3.5 VDC
ACTIVE: 10 ≤ Vin ≤ 33 VDC with ≥ 0.75 µA source current
Source current is internally limited to 1.5 mA max for a 10-33 VDC input

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

DISCRETE IN* 1 P741 61 In
DISCRETE IN* 2 P741 63 In
DISCRETE IN* 3 P741 65 In
DISCRETE IN* 4 P741 67 In
DISCRETE IN* 5 P741 69 In
DISCRETE IN* 6 P741 8 In
DISCRETE IN* 7 P741 50 In
DISCRETE IN* 8 P741 52 In

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page B-13
B.4.1.5 Configuration Module Connections
The configuration module, mounted in the unit connector backshell, contains an EEPROM.

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

CONFIG MODULE GROUND P741 1 --
CONFIG MODULE DATA P741 40 I/O
CONFIG MODULE POWER OUT P741 21 Out
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK P741 60 Out

B.4.1.6 ADC ARINC 429 System ID Connections

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

ADC SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 1 P741 6 In
ADC SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 2 P741 71 In

By hard strapping the program pins to ground, the GDC 74( ) is assigned a System ID. IDs identify a
GDC 74( ) as an All Call, #1, #2, or #3 unit. For a single system, the pins are left open (All Call).
The GDC 74( ) has an associated Source/Destination Identifier (SDI or System ID) that is coded into its
ARINC 429 output messages/labels. The System ID may be used to uniquely distinguish the source of the
GDC 74( ) ARINC 429 labels in a system with more than one GDC 74( ). The GDC 74( ) System ID is set
as follows:

Table B-2. P741 Strapping to Achieve Desired System ID

ARINC System ID 1 ARINC System ID 2

System ID Number
Pin 6 Pin 71
All Call Open Open
#1 Ground Open
#2 Open Ground
#3 Ground Ground

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page B-14 Rev. L
B.5 GAD 43/43e Adapter
B.5.1 J431/P431 Connector (GAD 43/43e)

-
*$'H

3
'6XE

Pin # Pin Name I/O Pin # Pin Name I/O

1 RESERVED -- 26 WXR ROLL OUT LO (50 mV/deg) --
2 HEADING VALID OUT* Out 27 SPARE DISC IN* 2 In
3 ATTITUDE VALID RELAY NO -- 28 WXR ROLL OUT HI (50 mV/deg) Out
4 ATTITUDE VALID RELAY NC -- 29 ROLL DC OUT Out
5 AP INTERLOCK RELAY COMMON -- 30 ROLL SYNCHRO OUT X Out
6 +26 VDC OUT Out 31 PITCH SYNCHRO OUT X Out
7 HDG SYNCHRO OUT Y Out 32 ARINC 429 IN B In
8 HDG SYNCHRO OUT X Out 33 RS-232 OUT Out
9 10VAC REF IN HI In 34 26VAC LO --
10 10VAC REF IN LO In 35 5VAC OUT LO --
11 SPARE DISC OUT* 2 Out 36 5VAC OUT HI Out
12 WXR PITCH OUT HI (50 mV/deg) Out 37 115VAC REF IN LO In
13 PITCH DC OUT Out 38 115VAC REF IN HI In
14 ROLL SYNCHRO OUT Y Out 39 26VAC REF IN HI In
15 PITCH SYNCHRO OUT Y Out YAW RATE / BARO
40 --
16 ARINC 429 IN A In CORRECTION GND
17 RS-232 IN In 41 HDG SYNCHRO OUT Z Out
18 26VAC OUT HI Out PITCH AC OUT LO
42 --
YAW RATE / BARO (60 mV/deg or 200 mV/deg)
19 Out
CORRECTION OUT 43 WXR PITCH OUT LO (50 mV/deg) --
20 ATTITUDE VALID RELAY COMMON -- 44 ROLL SYNCHRO OUT Z Out
21 AP INTERLOCK RELAY VALID NC -- 45 PITCH SYNCHRO OUT Z Out
22 AP INTERLOCK RELAY VALID NO -- 46 RS-232 GND --
ROLL AC OUT HI 47 AIRCRAFT GROUND --
23 Out
(54 mV/deg or 200 mV/deg) 48 AIRCRAFT GROUND --
PITCH AC OUT HI 49 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 In
24 Out
(60 mV/deg or 200 mV/deg) 50 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 In
ROLL AC OUT LO
25 --
(54 mV/deg or 200 mV/deg)
An asterisk (*) following the pin description denotes that the signal is Active-Low, requiring
a ground to activate or supplying a ground when active. If there is no asterisk following the
pin description, then the signal is Active-High.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page B-15
B.5.1.1 Power
The GAD 43/43e will accept input power from 9 to 33 VDC. At least one of the power inputs should be
connected. Power inputs are diode-isolated to support power from multiple busses.

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

AIRCRAFT POWER 1 P431 49 In
AIRCRAFT POWER 2 P431 50 In
AIRCRAFT GROUND P431 47 --
AIRCRAFT GROUND P431 48 --

B.5.1.2 Power Supply Outputs

The GAD 43/43e will always provide a +26 VDC supply. The intent of this supply is for use with the
GAD 43 relays (to provide attitude validity information). When a 115 VAC reference input is provided, the
GAD 43/43e will provide a 26 VAC and 5 VAC output supply which will be in-phase with the provided
reference.
When provided with a 115 VAC input, the GAD 43/43e is capable of sourcing 300 mA (7.8 VA) at 26
VAC, and 250 mA (1.25 VA) at 5 VAC.

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

+26 VDC OUT P431 6 Out
26VAC OUT HI P431 18 Out
26VAC LO P431 34 --
5VAC OUT HI P431 36 Out
5VAC OUT LO P431 35 --
115VAC REF IN HI P431 38 In
115VAC REF IN LO P431 37 In

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page B-16 Rev. L
B.5.1.3 Serial Data
B.5.1.3.1 RS-232
The RS-232 outputs have an output voltage swing of at least ±5V when driving a standard RS-232 load.

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

RS-232 IN P431 17 In
RS-232 OUT P431 33 Out
RS-232 GND P431 46 --

B.5.1.3.2 ARINC 429

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

ARINC 429 IN A P431 16 In
ARINC 429 IN B P431 32 In

B.5.1.4 Gyro Emulation Interfaces

The GAD 43/43e is capable of emulating numerous standard attitude gyro interfaces described below.
B.5.1.4.1 Analog Pitch/Roll Output
The GAD 43/43e provides AC pitch and roll outputs intended for emulating gyros such as the King KI 256
and the Cessna/ARC G519. An input for 10 VAC reference voltage is also provided.
The GAD 43/43e provides DC pitch and roll outputs intended for emulating gyros such as those used in
Century autopilots. DC pitch and roll outputs are referenced to GAD 43/43e ground.

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

PITCH AC OUT HI (60 mV/deg or 200 mV/deg) [1] P431 24 Out
ROLL AC OUT HI (54 mV/deg or 200 mV/deg) [1] P431 23 Out
PITCH DC OUT P431 13 Out
ROLL DC OUT P431 29 Out
PITCH AC OUT LO (60 mV/deg or 200 mV/deg) [1] P431 42 --
ROLL AC OUT LO (54 mV/deg or 200 mV/deg) [1] P431 25 --
10VAC REF IN HI P431 9 In
10VAC REF IN LO P431 10 In

[1] Multi-function pins used for analog pitch / roll outputs (60 mV/deg and 54 mV/deg) and
isolated synchro AC outputs (200 mV/deg). Configuration determines the function of these
pins.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page B-17
B.5.1.4.2 Synchro (ARINC 407) Outputs
The GAD 43/43e provides synchro pitch, roll and heading outputs. An input for 26 VAC reference voltage
is also provided. The GAD 43/43e can convert an 115 VAC inverter signal to a 26 VAC reference if
desired.

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

HDG SYNCHRO OUT X P431 8 Out
HDG SYNCHRO OUT Y P431 7 Out
HDG SYNCHRO OUT Z P431 41 Out
PITCH SYNCHRO OUT X P431 31 Out
PITCH SYNCHRO OUT Y P431 15 Out
PITCH SYNCHRO OUT Z P431 45 Out
ROLL SYNCHRO OUT X P431 30 Out
ROLL SYNCHRO OUT Y P431 14 Out
ROLL SYNCHRO OUT Z P431 44 Out
115VAC REF IN HI P431 38 In
115VAC REF IN LO P431 37 In
26VAC OUT HI P431 18 Out
26VAC REF IN HI P431 39 In
26VAC LO P431 34 --

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page B-18 Rev. L
B.5.1.4.3 Isolated Synchro Outputs
The GAD 43/43e provides isolated synchro pitch and roll outputs. When the GAD 43/43e is configured to
emulate a remote-mount ARINC 407 gyro (such as the King KVG 350, Collins 332D-11, or the Sperry
VG-14A), these isolated synchro outputs are active. An input for 26 VAC reference voltage is also
provided. The GAD 43/43e can convert an 115V AC inverter signal to a 26 VAC reference if desired.

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

PITCH AC OUT HI (60 mV/deg or 200 mV/deg) [1] P431 24 Out
ROLL AC OUT HI (54 mV/deg or 200 mV/deg) [1] P431 23 Out
PITCH AC OUT LO (60 mV/deg or 200 mV/deg) [1] P431 42 --
ROLL AC OUT LO (54 mV/deg or 200 mV/deg) [1] P431 25 --
115VAC REF IN HI P431 38 In
115VAC REF IN LO P431 37 In
26VAC OUT HI P431 18 Out
26VAC REF IN HI P431 39 In
26VAC LO P431 34 --

[1] Multi-function pins used for analog pitch / roll outputs (60 mV/deg and 54 mV/deg) and
isolated synchro AC outputs (200 mV/deg). Configuration determines the function of these
pins.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page B-19
B.5.1.4.4 Weather Radar (Stabilization) Outputs
The GAD 43/43e provides weather radar pitch and roll stabilization outputs. When the GAD 43/43e is
configured to emulate a remote-mount ARINC 407 gyro (such as the King KVG 350, Collins 332D-11, or
the Sperry VG-14A), the weather radar pitch and roll stabilization outputs are active. An input for 26 VAC
reference voltage is also provided. The GAD 43/43e can convert an 115 VAC inverter signal to a 26 VAC
reference if desired. See Appendix F for wiring interconnect information to support this conversion.

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

WXR PITCH OUT HI (50 mV/deg) P431 12 Out
WXR ROLL OUT HI (50 mV/deg) P431 28 Out
WXR PITCH OUT LO (50 mV/deg) P431 43 --
WXR ROLL OUT LO (50 mV/deg) P431 26 --
115VAC REF IN HI P431 38 In
115VAC REF IN LO P431 37 In
26VAC OUT HI P431 18 Out
26VAC REF IN HI P431 39 In
26VAC LO P431 34 --

B.5.1.4.5 Yaw Rate Outputs

The GAD 43/43e provides one analog yaw rate output with configurable values of 100, 200, 333, and 666
mVDC/deg/sec. The output saturates at +4 VDC; polarity is positive voltage for clockwise yaw as viewed
from above the aircraft. A configuration of “None” implies that these output pins will be used for
barometric correction as described in the following section.

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

YAW RATE / BARO CORRECTION OUT [1] P431 19 Out
YAW RATE / BARO CORRECTION GND [1] P431 40 --

[1] Multi-function pins used for yaw rate output and baro correction output. Configuration
determines the function of these pins.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page B-20 Rev. L
B.5.1.5 Baro Correction Outputs
The GAD 43/43e provides one analog barometric output for emulation of the King KEA-130 barometric
pickoff. The output varies from 0 to 5 VDC based on the barometric setting displayed on the GDU 620.
This interface is intended to be used in installations with the King KFC-225 autopilot. See Appendix C for
wiring interconnect information. A yaw rate configuration of “None” is required for barometric correction
outputs to be active.

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

YAW RATE/BARO CORRECTION OUT [1] P431 19 Out
YAW RATE/BARO CORRECTION GND [1] P431 40 --

[1] Multi-function pins used for yaw rate output and baro correction output. Configuration
determines the function of these pins.

B.5.1.6 Discretes
B.5.1.6.1 Discrete Input
Active-low discrete inputs are considered active if either the voltage to ground is < 3.5 VDC or the
resistance to ground is < 375 Ω. These inputs are considered inactive if the voltage to ground is 6.5-33
VDC or the resistance to ground is >100 kΩ.

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

SPARE DISC IN* 2 (function not currently implemented) P431 27 In

An asterisk (*) following the pin description denotes that the signal is Active-Low, requiring
a ground to activate or supplying a ground when active. If there is no asterisk following the
pin description, then the signal is Active-High.

B.5.1.6.2 Discrete Outputs

All discrete outputs from the GAD 43/43e are Active-Low. Each is an “open drain” output capable of
sinking 250 mA when active.

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

HEADING VALID OUT* P431 2 Out
SPARE DISC OUT* 2
P431 11 Out
(function not currently implemented)

An asterisk (*) following the pin description denotes that the signal is Active-Low, requiring
a ground to activate or supplying a ground when active. If there is no asterisk following the
pin description, then the signal is Active-High.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page B-21
B.5.1.7 Relays
The GAD 43/43e provides two relays that switch based on the validity of the attitude solution. The
normally-open (NO) contact on each relay is mechanically connected to the common (COMMON) contact
when the attitude solution is valid. The normally-closed (NC) contact on each relay is mechanically
connected to the common (COMMON) contact when the attitude solution is invalid.

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O

ATTITUDE VALID RELAY NO P431 3 --
ATTITUDE VALID RELAY NC P431 4 --
ATTITUDE VALID RELAY COMMON P431 20 --
AP INTERLOCK RELAY VALID NO P431 22 --
AP INTERLOCK RELAY VALID NC P431 21 --
AP INTERLOCK RELAY COMMON P431 5 --

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page B-22 Rev. L
B.5.2 J432/P432 Connector (GAD 43e Only)

-

*$'H

3

'6XE

Pin # Pin Name I/O Pin # Pin Name I/O

1 ALTITUDE PRESELECT DATA I/O 40 DME RQST HI/DME SYNC IN HI I/O
2 GROUND -- 41 DME RQST LO/DME SYNC IN LO I/O
3 RS-232 IN 2 In 42 DME RNAV RQST OUT Out
4 RS-232 OUT 2 Out 43 ARINC 429 OUT 1 A Out
5 RS-232 GND 2 -- 44 ARINC 429 OUT 1 B Out
6 OUTER MARKER EXT LAMP IN In 45 GROUND --
7 MIDDLE MARKER EXT LAMP IN In 46 ILS ENERGIZE #1 IN* In
8 INNER MARKER EXT LAMP IN In 47 ILS ENERGIZE #2 IN* In
9 RADAR ALT VALID IN In 48 GLIDESLOPE #1 VALID IN In
10 GROUND -- 49 GLIDESLOPE #2 VALID IN In
11 RESERVED -- 50 DME EXT TUNE K50 IN In
12 RESERVED -- 51 DME SUPERFLAG IN In
13 RESERVED -- 52 DME HOUT OUT* Out
14 RESERVED -- 53 ALT HOLD* Out
15 GROUND -- 54 GROUND --
16 RESERVED -- 55 RESERVED --
17 VS CMD Out 56 RESERVED --
18 GROUND -- 57 RESERVED --
19 ALTITUDE ERROR OUT + Out 58 PRESELECT MON+ POWER In
20 ALTITUDE ERROR OUT - Out 59 PRESELECT MON+ OUT Out
21 ALTITUDE PRESELECT CLOCK I/O 60 DME CLOCK HI I/O
22 GROUND -- 61 DME CLOCK LO I/O
23 DME ARINC 429 IN A In 62 DME DATA HI I/O
24 DME ARINC 429 IN B In 63 DME DATA LO I/O
25 GROUND -- 64 AIRCRAFT GROUND --
26 RESERVED -- 65 DME EXT TUNE M8/MA/M0 IN In
27 RESERVED -- 66 DME EXT TUNE M4/ME/M1 IN In
28 RESERVED -- 67 DME EXT TUNE M2/MC/M2 IN In
29 RESERVED -- 68 DME EXT TUNE M1/MD/M3 IN In
30 PRESELECT ADDR 0/AP DISC SW In 69 DME EXT TUNE K800/KA/K0 IN In
31 PRESELECT ADDR 1 In 70 DME EXT TUNE K400/KE/K1 IN In
32 GROUND -- 71 DME EXT TUNE K200/KC/K2 IN In
33 RESERVED Out 72 DME EXT TUNE K100/KD/K3 IN In
34 VS SELECT CTRL*/KNOB IN MOTION* Out 73 GROUND --
35 DME COM NAV 1*/CH 1-2 SELECT* I/O 74 RESERVED --
36 DME COM NAV 2* In 75 RESERVED --
37 RESERVED In 76 GROUND --
38 GROUND -- 77 RESERVED --
39 RESERVED -- 78 RESERVED --
An asterisk (*) following the pin description denotes that the signal is Active-Low, requiring
a ground to activate or supplying a ground when active. If there is no asterisk following the
pin description, then the signal is Active-High.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page B-23
B.5.3 J433/P433 Connector (GAD 43e Only)

-
*$'H

3
'6XE

Pin # Pin Name I/O

1 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE #1 HI In
2 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE #1 LO In
3 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE #2 HI In
4 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE #2 LO In
5 GROUND --
6 GLIDESLOPE #1 +UP IN In
7 GLIDESLOPE #1 +DN IN In
8 GLIDESLOPE #2 +UP IN In
9 GLIDESLOPE #2 +DN IN In
10 RESERVED --
11 GROUND --
12 ADF BEARING X In
13 ADF BEARING Y In
14 ADF BEARING Z (GND) --
15 RADAR ALT IN HI In
16 RADAR ALT IN LO In
17 GROUND --
18 GROUND --
19 FD PITCH UP OUT/GS #2 VALID OUT Out
20 FLIGHT DIR PITCH DOWN OUT (GND) --
21 FD ROLL RIGHT OUT/GS #1 VALID OUT Out
22 FLIGHT DIR ROLL LEFT OUT (GND) --
23 FD PITCH UP IN/GS #2 +FLAG In
24 FD PITCH DOWN IN/GS #2 -FLAG In
25 FD ROLL RIGHT IN/GS #1 +FLAG In
26 GD ROLL RIGHT IN/GS #1 -FLAG In

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page B-24 Rev. L
APPENDIX C OUTLINE AND INSTALLATION DRAWINGS

Figure C-1. GDU 620 Connector Locations

Figure C-2. GDU 620 Dimensions and Center of Gravity
Figure C-3. GMU 44 Dimensions and Center of Gravity
Figure C-4. GMU 44 Mounting Rack P/N 115-00481-00
Figure C-5. GRS 77 and Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity
Figure C-6. GDC 74( ) and Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity (Option I)
Figure C-7. GDC 74( ) and Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity (Option 2)
Figure C-8. GDC 74( ) Mounting Orientation Limits
Figure C-9. GDC 74( ) Vertical Surface Mounting Orientation
Figure C-10. GDU 620 Cutout Dimensions
Figure C-11. Trim Plate P/N 115-01009-( )
Figure C-12. GRS 77 Universal Mount Dimensions
Figure C-13. GMU 44 Universal Mount Dimensions
Figure C-14. Cutout Template P/N 115-01010-00 Dimensions
Figure C-15. GTP 59 OAT Probe Dimensions
Figure C-16. GAD 43 Dimensions and Center of Gravity
Figure C-17. GAD 43e Dimensions and Center of Gravity

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page C-1
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page C-2 Rev. L
Figure C-1. GDU 620 Connector Locations

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page C-3
FAN 1 FAN 2

Figure C-2. GDU 620 Dimensions and Center of Gravity

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page C-4 Rev. L
&*

$,5&5$)7
02817,1*
685)$&(

Figure C-3. GMU 44 Dimensions and Center of Gravity

(Including Mounting Rack)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page C-5
$,5&5$)702817,1*+2/(6)25
;‘>‘@
7+58 ,17+,10$7(5,$/86,1*/2&.,1*1876
;‘>‘@
25
237,21$/&/($5$1&(
'5,//$1'7$3
+2/(6)25+2/''2:16&5(:6
81&,10$7(5,$/7+,&.(57+$1>@

>@
ƒ
)25:$5'
;>@

ƒ

>@

>@
‘
>@

>@

>@

>@ >@
>@

72/(5$1&(6
,1&+(6 PP
;;“ ;“
;;;“ ;;“

*0802817,1*5$&. *08
3,*7$,/0,1,080&/($5$1&(5$',86
‘>‘@

‘>‘@

>@

127(
',0(16,216,1,1&+(6>PP@
)2//2:)25:$5'$1'723,1',&$7,2162181,7$1'5$&.

Figure C-4. GMU 44 Mounting Rack P/N 115-00481-00

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page C-6 Rev. L

Figure C-5. GRS 77 and Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page C-7
*'& 287/,1('5$:,1*
)255(027(02817,1*237,21,
&211(&725$1'),77,1*6$5(23326,7(
7+(6&5(:'2:102817,1*+$5':$5(
>@

>@

$/:$<625,(17%$&.6+(//
:,7+6/,'(/2&.635,1*
72:$5'67+(723$66+2:1

>@ >@

-
*31

>@

3,727$,5),77,1*
>@ 81,7+$6 $137)(0$/(7+5($'
>@
>@

;>@ 67$7,&$,5),77,1*
>@ >@
81,7+$6 $137)(0$/(7+5($'
>@

;‘>@
>@

>@

>@

>@

>@ >@

>@ >@

>@ >@
>@
>@

*'&5(027(028173/$7(
7239,(:6+2:,1*02817,1*+2/(6

Figure C-6. GDC 74( ) and Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity (Option I)

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page C-8 Rev. L
*'& 287/,1('5$:,1*
)255(027(02817,1*237,21,,
&211(&725$1'),77,1*6$5(216$0((1'
$67+(6&5(:'2:102817,1*+$5':$5(

>@

>@

$/:$<625,(17%$&.6+(//
:,7+6/,'(/2&.635,1*
>@ >@ >@ 72:$5'67+(723$66+2:1

>@

>@

>@

-
*31

3,727$,5),77,1*
>@ 81,7+$6 $137)(0$/(7+5($'

>@

;>@ 67$7,&$,5),77,1*
81,7+$6 $137)(0$/(7+5($'

Figure C-7. GDC 74( ) and Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity (Option 2)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page C-9
02817,1*25,(17$7,21

9(57,&$/
02817
83

ƒ

ƒ

3$679(57,&$/
02817

127(6

25,(17$7,210867%(/,0,7('725$1*(6+2:1
+25,=217$/ 72$92,')/8,'$&&808/$7,21,16,'(81,7
02817
81,70$<%(25,(17('$66+2:1,1$1<326,7,21
)520+25,=217$/72'(*5((63$679(57,&$/

Figure C-8. GDC 74( ) Mounting Orientation Limits

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page C-10
*'&% ;; $1'*'&$ ;;
9(57,&$/685)$&(02817,1*25,(17$7,21

83

ƒ
ƒ
0$;
0$;

127(6

25,(17$7,210867%(/,0,7('725$1*(6+2:172$92,')/8,'$&&808/$7,21,16,'(81,7
81,70$<%(25,(17('219(57,&$/685)$&($66+2:102817,1*25,(17$7,210867%(:,7+,1'(*5((62)9(57,&$/

Figure C-9. GDC 74( ) Vertical Surface Mounting Orientation

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page C-11

;‘7+58$//

)52176,'(9,(:

;

;

57<3
‘ ƒ
‘
57<3

ƒ




'(7$,/$ '(7$,/'
126&$/( 126&$/(

57<3

‘

57<3 ƒ
'(7$,/% ;
126&$/(

'(7$,/(
126&$/(

‘

ƒ ‘
5

'(7$,/& ;
126&$/(
'(7$,/)
126&$/(

Figure C-10. GDU 620 Cutout Dimensions

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page C-12 Rev. L
83

5,*+7

3$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21 7+,&.1(66 LQ

75,03/$7(7+,1
75,03/$7(7+,&.

127(6
7:275,03/$7(6$5($9$,/$%/(%27+$5(7$/80,180:,7+7+,&.1(66(62)$1'
75,03/$7(,6&+520$7(',70867%(&87727+(&255(&76,=($1'3$,17('720$7&+($&+,167$//$7,21

Figure C-11. Trim Plate P/N 115-01009-( )

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page C-13

$1*/($+56%5.702817,1*

Figure C-12. GRS 77 Universal Mount Dimensions

Sheet 1 of 2

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page C-14 Rev. L

%5$&.(7723$+5681,9

Figure C-12. GRS 77 Universal Mount Dimensions
Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page C-15

%5$&.(70$*1(720(7(572381,9

Figure C-13. GMU 44 Universal Mount Dimensions
Sheet 1 of 2

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page C-16 Rev. L

%5$&.(70$*1(720(7(581,9

Figure C-13. GMU 44 Universal Mount Dimensions
Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page C-17
83

287(53(5,0(7(52)
7(03/$7(,66$0(6,=(
$6*'8%(=(/
5,*+7

&872873(5,0(7(5

&872875(35(6(176
3)'',63/$<$5($

127(6
&872877(03/$7(,60$'()52067$,1/(6667((/$1'&$1%(86(')2508/7,3/(
,167$//$7,216
&872877(03/$7(6+28/'%(7(0325$5,/<$)),;('72,167580(173$1(/,1'(6,5('
/2&$7,2135,25720$5.,1*&872877+(2876,'(('*(62)7+(&872873$77(516+28/'
%(86(':+(10$5.,1*7+(&8728721727+(,167580(173$1(/
,167580(173$1(/+2/(6)25*'802817,1*1873/$7(66+28/'%('5,//('86,1*$
'5,//%,735,25725(029$/2)7+(7(03/$7()5207+(,167580(173$1(/7+(
+2/(6$5(5(6,=('/$7(5727+(,5),1$/',$0(7(5

Figure C-14. Cutout Template P/N 115-01010-00 Dimensions

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page C-18 Rev. L
)7“

07(9&$%/(

81()$

‘

Figure C-15. GTP 59 OAT Probe Dimensions

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page C-19
Figure C-16. GAD 43 Dimensions and Center of Gravity

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page C-20 Rev. L
Figure C-17. GAD 43e Dimensions and Center of Gravity

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page C-21
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page C-22 Rev. L
APPENDIX D SAMPLE INSTALLATIONS

NOTE
The following figures are examples only. Refer to Section 3.2 for specific installation
guidance.

D.1 Sample Instrument Panel Layouts

$XGLR3DQHO




925,1',&$725
&ORFN

1DY&RP
9DF

GF
HOHF

(

9(57,&$/
1

63(('
)XHO4W\ 83
1DY&RP

925,1',&$725

WXUQFRRUGLQDWRU '1
)((7

3(50,1
/ 5

PLQ :

QRSLWFK
LQIRUPDWLRQ

(OHF&XUUHQW

$')

7DFKRPHWHU $')

7UDQVSRQGHU

BEFORE MODIFICATION

$XGLR3DQHO

&ORFN

9DF

*16:


)XHO4W\

(OHF&XUUHQW

*16:

7DFKRPHWHU

7UDQVSRQGHU

,)'(6,5('&/2&.0$<%(5(029('720$.(63$&()25$127+(5,167580(17
AFTER MODIFICATION

Figure D-1. Installation of GDU 620 with Ideal Six-Pack

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page D-1
1DY&RP
925,1',&$725









1DY&RP
9(57,&$/
( 63(('
83
1
GF 925,1',&$725
HOHF
'1 )((7
3(50,1



6
:

WXUQFRRUGLQDWRU $XGLR3DQHO
/ 5
PLQ
QRSLWFK
LQIRUPDWLRQ $')
(

7UDQVSRQGHU



&ORFN 6
6
2%

BEFORE MODIFICATION

*16:

*16:

$XGLR3DQHO

&ORFN
7UDQVSRQGHU

&/2&.0$<%(5(029('720$.(63$&()25$127+(5,167580(17,)'(6,5('

AFTER MODIFICATION

Figure D-2. Installation of GDU 620 with Non-Ideal Six-Pack

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page D-2 Rev. L
6 7(&

3ODFDUG

&ORFN

6$1'(/61

GF
( HOHF
1
$
Y
X
1 9 H
9(57,&$/
63(('
83
0
$
3

'1
WXUQFRRUGLQDWRU %
5
)((7
3(50,1
6 / 5
*

: PLQ
2%6 QRSLWFK
LQIRUPDWLRQ

VKIW V\QF DE

6ZLWFKHV

,JQLWLRQ 9HQW

BEFORE MODIFICATION

6 7(&

3ODFDUG

6ZLWFKHV

,JQLWLRQ 9HQW

AFTER MODIFICATION

Figure D-3. Installation of GDU 620 with Standby Instruments on Stepped Part
of Instrument Panel

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page D-3
(OHFWULFDO*DXJHV

$XGLR3DQHO

7UDQVSRQGHU

(
1


7DFKRPHWHU


6
:

%6
2 *16

(

1

%ODQN )XHO)ORZ3UHVVXUH



6
/ 5
:


PLQ 925 925
LMDYRRR 25'
10

*16

&ORFN ($'6

BEFORE MODIFICATION

(OHFWULFDO*DXJHV

$XGLR3DQHO

7UDQVSRQGHU

7DFKRPHWHU







*16:

)XHO)ORZ3UHVVXUH

*16:

&ORFN
($'6

AFTER MODIFICATION

Figure D-4. Installation of GDU 620 Using 2 1/4 Inch Backup Instruments

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page D-4 Rev. L

+'*
KJ
LzLJ

1 (



=(57,&$/
63(('
<3

‹ˆ„J††ˆKP„H†ˆ '1
6 )((7
> 3(50,1
/ 5

P„ =25 =25
„†‡PJO PQH™††† 25'
P„M†ˆHP†„ 10

1


(
>



6

BEFORE MODIFICATION

AFTER MODIFICATION

Figure D-5. Installation of GDU 620 with Standby Instruments Below

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page D-5
%ODQN %ODQN

$XGLR3DQHO
(
1






1DY&RP
6
:
2%6

GF
HOHF
1DY&RP
(

1 9(57,&$/
63(('
83

%ODQN
WXUQFRRUGLQDWRU

'1 )((7
3(50,1
6
/ 5
PLQ :
QRSLWFK
7UDQVSRQGHU
LQIRUPDWLRQ

BEFORE MODIFICATION

%ODQN
$XGLR3DQHO

*16:

*16:

7UDQVSRQGHU

AFTER MODIFICATION

Figure D-6. Installation of GDU 620 Using Both 2¼-Inch and 3⅛-Inch Backup Instruments

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page D-6 Rev. L



2,/35(6685(

7(03
&/2&. 92/76

$036

GF
HOHF
(
(

1 1 9(57,&$/
63(('
83

0$3
7$&+
WXUQFRRUGLQDWRU '1
)((7

6
3(50,1
/ 5 6 :


PLQ :
QRSLWFK
LQIRUPDWLRQ
2%6

*36

1DY&RP

7UDQVSRQGHU

BEFORE MODIFICATION

2,/35(6685(
7(03
92/76
$036

7$&+ 0$3

*36

1DY&RP

7UDQVSRQGHU

AFTER MODIFICATION
Figure D-7. Installation of GDU 620 in Tandem Aircraft – Front Instrument Panel

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page D-7




PDQLIROG

SUHVVXUH




$,563(('




.1276 / 5
USP

PLQ

3/$&$5'$5($ 3/$&$5'$5($

BEFORE MODIFICATION

H„PM†zK
‡ˆLŒŒ‹ˆL

ˆ‡

AFTER MODIFICATION

Figure D-8. Installation of GDU 620 in Bonanza Model 35

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page D-8 Rev. L
D.2 GMU 44 Installation Examples
For non-conductive composite aircraft installations, stainless screws with stainless self locking nuts are an
acceptable installation method.

02817,1*
3/$7(

1873/$7(
5,9(76 ;
67$,1/(66
6&5(:
:$6+(5 ;

*0881,9(56$/
%5$&.(7$66(0%/<

Figure D-9. Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount, Side Mounted

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page D-9
/2&.,1*187
:$6+(5 ; 02817,1*
3/$7(

*0881,9(56$/
%5$&.(7$66(0%/<

6&5(:
:$6+(5 ;

Figure D-10. Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount, Side Mounted

02817,1*
3/$7(
/2&.,1*187
$1':$6+(5 ;

6&5(:
:$6+(5 ;

Figure D-11. Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount,

Suspended - Side Mounted

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page D-10 Rev. L
/2&.,1*187
:$6+(5 ;
*0881,9(56$/
%5$&.(7$66(0%/<

02817,1*3/$7(

6&5(:
:$6+(5 ;

Figure D-12. Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount- Bottom Mounted

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page D-11
6&5(:
:$6+(5 ;

02817,1*3/$7(

/2&.,1*187
:$6+(5 ;

*0881,9(56$/
%5$&.(7$66(0%/<

Figure D-13. Bottom Suspended Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount

Figure D-14. Not Used

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page D-12 Rev. L
D.3 GDC 74( ) Installation Examples

*'&$

(;,67,1*)/2253$1(/251(:68332573$1(/
6((5(48,5(0(1766(&7,21)255(&200(1'(' ,1
7+,&.1(66$1''(6,*1)($785(6 &/($5$1&(

68332573$1(/6+28/'%(
)$67(1('72($&+$,5)5$0(
0(0%(5$&52667+(63$1

(;,67,1*
$,5)5$0(
0(0%(5

6.,1

Figure D-15. Installation of GDC 74( ) to Mounting Plate

*'& 81,7

$,5)5$0(
675,1*(5

02817,1*
%5$&.(7

)$67(1,1*
+$5':$5(

Figure D-16. Installation of GDC 74( ) – Horizontal Orientation

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page D-13
6&5(: 5(4 '

%8/.+($'
02817,1*685)$&(

5(027(028173/$7(*'&$
3$572)

*'&$81,7
&211(&7,2125,(17(''2:1

1873/$7(
5,9(7 ; 83
5(4 ' +2/''2:1&/$03*'&$
$/7(51$7(/<0$<86( 3$572)
187$1':$6+(5

127(6
5(&200(1'('+$5':$5(237,216)25$66(0%/<

+$5':$5( 63(&,),&$7,216
6&5(:6 06 /(1*7+$5 251$6 /(1*7+$5
:$6+(56 $1$1/1$6)13 1873/$7(6 0 ) 0 .
251$6)13 0 .25)
25
1876 $1$ 061 5,9(76 06$';
2506/
7+(5(027(028173/$7(0$<$/7(51$7(/<%(,167$//(':,7+7+(+2/' '2:1&/$03$77+(
7232)7+(,167$//$7,2162,7,6$77+(23326,7(6,'()5207+(*'&$&211(&7,2167+(
&211(&7,2132576+2:(9(5$5($/:$<625,(17(''2:1

Figure D-17. Installation of GDC 74( ) – Vertical Orientation

6.,1

35($66(0%/('02817,1*
83 3/$7( $1*/(215(9(56(

(;,67,1* *'&$81,7
6758&785(

06$';5,9(725
&5;25
6&5(::$6+(5/2&.,1*187
'21270,; $5


+2/''2:1&/$03*'&$ 5(027(028173/$7(*'&$
3$572) 3$572)

Figure D-18. Installation of GDC 74( ) – Vertical Orientation using Stringers

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page D-14 Rev. L
6.,1
02817,1*25,(17$7,21
0((76&5,7(5,$)25
$1*/(ƒ)5209(57,&$/
02817,1*3/$7($66<
83 )$%5,&$7('

7$/80

6.,1 *'&$81,7

(;,67,1*
&211(&7,216
6758&785(

06$';5,9(725
6&5(::$6+(5
/2&.,1*187
'21270,; $5

',0$ ',0% 63$&,1*

75,0$1*/($5
(1685(12&217$&7 ',0$

+2/''2:1&/$03*'&$
3$572)

0,1 +$5':$5( ',0$ ',0%

$1*/(/(* 0,10$;
'(7$,/ 5,9(76 ',0%
6&5(:6 ',0%
127(6

5()(572 *'&$,167$//$7,210$18$/)25$33529('35$&7,&(6:+,/(

,167$//,1*/,1(6$1'&211(&7,216

7+(5(027(02817,1*3/$7(0$<$/7(51$7(/<%(,167$//(':,7+7+(+2/' '2:1
&/$03$77+(7232)7+(,167$//$7,2162,7,6$77+(23326,7( 6,'()5207+(*'&$
&211(&7,2167+(&211(&7,2132576+2:(9(5$5($/:$<625,(17(''2:1

Figure D-19. Installation of GDC 74( ) – Vertical Orientation

83 02817,1*
5,9(76
6833257 3/$7(
$5)256833257$1*/(
$1*/(

6&5(:
5(4 ')2525,(17$7,21

187
:$6+(5 5(027(028173/$7(*'&$
5(4 ' 3$572)

127(6
5(&200(1'('+$5':$5(237,216)25$66(0%/<

+$5':$5( 63(&,),&$7,216
6&5(:6 06 /(1*7+$5 251$6 /(1*7+$5
5,9(76 06$';2506$';
:$6+(56 $1$1 /1$6)13 0 )
0 .

1873/$7(6
251$6)13 0 . 25)
25
1876 $1 $ 061 06$';
5,9(76
2506/
7+(0$7(5,$/2)7+(6833257$1*/(6+28/'0,1,0$//<%(;; 7RU 7
$/80,18075,07+($1*/(/(*7+$7,61250$/727+(02817,1*3/$7($65(48,5('72$92,'&217$&7
:,7+6.,125(;,67,1*6758&785(621/<21($1*/(,65(48,5('

Figure D-20. Installation of GDC 74( ) – Vertical Orientation

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page D-15
D.4 GAD 43/43e Installation Examples

83 6&5(:
5(4 '237,21$/
)2525,(17$7,21

5,9(76
$5)256833257$1*/(

*$'*<52$'$37(5
02817,1*
3/$7(

187
:$6+(5
5(4 '

6833257
$1*/(

02817,1*
127(6 3/$7(
5(&200(1'('+$5':$5(237,216)25$66(0%/<

+$5':$5( 63(&,),&$7,216
6&5(:6 06 /(1*7+$5
251$6 /(1*7+$5

5,9(76 06$';2506$';
:$6+(56 $1 $1 /1$6)13 1873/$7(6 0 ) 0 .
251$6)13 0 .25)
25
1876 $1 $ 061 5,9(76 06$';
2506/
7+(0$7(5,$/2)7+(6833257$1*/(6+28/'0,1,0$//<%(;; 7RU7
$/80,18075,07+($1*/(/(*7+$7,61250$/727+(02817,1*3/$7($65(48,5('72$92,'&217$&7
:,7+6.,125(;,67,1*6758&785(621/<21($1*/(,65(48,5('

Figure D-21. Fabrication of Mounting Plate Assy for GAD 43/43e Short Orientation
Installation (GAD 43 shown)

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page D-16 Rev. L
83 6.,1

02817,1*3/$7($66<
)$%5,&$7('

7$/80

*$'H81,7
(;,67,1*
6.,1 6758&785(

06$';5,9(725
6&5(::$6+(5
/2&.,1*187
'21270,; $5

$1*/(0$<%(75,00('
$65(48,5('72
',0$
(1685(12&217$&7
:,7+6.,1256758&785(

',0% 63$&,1*

',0$

0,1
'(7$,/ $1*/(/(*
+$5':$5( ',0$ ',0%
0,10$;
5,9(76 ',0%
6&5(:6 ',0%

06$';5,9(725
&5;25 35($66(0%/('

6&5(::$6+(5/2&.,1*187251873/$7( 02817,1*3/$7(
'21270,;5,9(76$1'1873/$7(6 $1*/(215(9(56(
$5

35($66(0%/('
02817,1*3/$7(
$1*/(215(9(56(

*$'H81,7

(;,67,1*
6758&785(
83

127(6
5(&200(1'('+$5':$5(237,216)25$66(0%/<

+$5':$5( 63(&,),&$7,216
6&5(:6 06 /(1*7+$5 251$6 /(1*7+$5
:$6+(56 $1$1/1$6)13 1873/$7(6 0 ) 0 .
251$6)13 0 .25)
25
1876 $1$ 061 5,9(76 06$';
2506/

Figure D-22. Short Orientation Installation of GAD 43/43e Using Fabricated Plate
Assembly on Existing Structure (GAD 43 shown)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page D-17
(;,67,1*
6758&785(

*$'H81,7
6&5(:
5(4 ')2525,(17$7,21

83
9,(:/22.,1*'2:1$7*$'81,7,167$//$7,21

(;,67,1*
6758&785(

(;,67,1*
6758&785(
9,(:/22.,1*)5206,'(
6&5(:
5(4 ')2525,(17$7,21

(;,67,1* 1873/$7(6
6758&785( ,167$//('
$5

127(6
5(&200(1'('+$5':$5(237,216)25$66(0%/<

+$5':$5( 63(&,),&$7,216
6&5(:6 06 /(1*7+$5 251$6 /(1*7+$5
5,9(76 06$';2506$' ;
:$6+(56 $1$1/1$6)13 1873/$7(6 0 ) 0 .
251$6)13 0 .25)
25
1876 $1$ 061 5,9(76 06$';
2506/
9,(:/22.,1*83$71873/$7(,1 67$//$7,21 7+(0$7(5,$/2)7+(6833257$1*/(6+28/'0,1,0$//<%(;; 7RU7
$/80,18075,07+($ 1*/(/(*7+$7,61250$/727+(02817,1*3/$7($65(48,5('72$92,'&217$&7
:,7+6.,125(;,67,1*6758&785(621/<21($1*/(,65(48,5('

Figure D-23. Installation of GAD 43/43e – Tall Orientation using Existing Shelves in Aircraft
(GAD 43 shown)

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page D-18 Rev. L
APPENDIX E EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY AND CONFIGURATION
The following equipment listed in this appendix is compatible with the G600 system when configured as described herein. For G600 configuration information,
refer to Section 5.5.
E.1 Electric Standby Indicators

NOTE
Not all aircraft models are eligible to use an electric attitude indicator or ESIS as a standby instrument. Refer to Appendix K for eligibility
information for particular aircraft models.

Any air-driven attitude indicator may be used to provide back-up attitude information; however, if an electric attitude indicator is used to provide backup attitude
information, it must be one of the following:

Manufacturer Model Data Format Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information

If aircraft has variable Vne/Vmo, the Vne/Vmo schedule must be
ESI-1000 [3]
programmed into the ESI-1000.
L-3 Communications
If aircraft has variable Vne/Vmo, the Vne/Vmo schedule must be
ESI-2000 [3]
programmed into the ESI-2000.
2¼-inch electric
4200 Must be used with MD420 Emergency Power System [1] [2]
attitude indicator
Mid-Continent Instruments
3⅛-inch electric
4300-4XX With supplied Standby Battery Pack
attitude indicator

[1] The MD420 Emergency Power System must be mounted in the instrument panel area in non-metallic aircraft.
[2] The MD420 Emergency Power System must be mounted in a pressurized area if installed in pressurized aircraft.
[3] Must be installed in accordance with the requirements in this installation manual and AML STC SA02728CH, except circuit breaker must be labeled
STBY ATT instead of ATTITUDE as specified in the STC. Refer to Section 2.5.3.1 herein for additional labeling information. If used, the 
ESI-1000/2000 magnetometer must not be co-located with the G600 GMU 44(s).

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page E-1
E.2 GPS Source
The following GPS position sources are compatible with the GDU 620.
Mfr Model Data Format Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information
Main ARINC 429 Config: IN 1: Low, Garmin GDU
OUT: High, GAMA 429
SDI: LNAV 1 (for GPS 1)
LNAV 2 (for GPS 2)
Main software version 3.10 or later VNAV: Enable Labels
ARINC 429 is required. Main RS-232 Config: CHNL 1: Off / MapMX
400W/500W Series
RS-232 If a 500W TAWS unit is installed, it Single G600 Installations
MUST be connected as GPS1. Main CDI/OBS Config: Allow CDI Key
(i.e. CDI can be GPS or VLOC)
Dual G600 Installations
Main CDI/OBS Config: Ignore CDI Key
(i.e. CDI is GPS Only)
Serial Setup: CH 1 (RX/TX): MapMX / MapMX
ARINC 429 Setup: CH 2 IN: Garmin GDU, Low
Sys 1 (for GPS 1)
Sys 2 (for GPS 2)
CH 1 OUT: GAMA 429 NO FP, High
Garmin ARINC 429 Software version 2.3 or later is
GNS 480 Single G600 Installations
RS-232 required.
Misc Setup: CDI SELECT:USE
(i.e. CDI can be GPS or NAV)
Dual G600 Installations
Misc Setup: CDI SELECT: IGNORE
(i.e. CDI is GPS Only)
ARINC 429 Setup: IN 2: Low, GDU Format 1
OUT 2: High, GAMA Format 1
SDI: LNAV1 (for GPS 1)
LNAV2 (for GPS 2)
RS-232 Setup: CHNL 2: Off / MapMX
ARINC 429
GTN 6XX/7XX Single G600 Installations
RS-232 Main Indicator (Analog) Config: CDI Key - Enabled
(i.e. CDI can be GPS or VLOC)
Dual G600 Installations
Main Indicator (Analog) Config: CDI Key - Disabled
(i.e. CDI is GPS Only)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page E-2
E.3 Autopilot
The following autopilots are compatible with the GDU 620. Refer to Section E.14 for a listing of which autopilots may use the GAD 43/43e as an attitude source.
Refer to Section E.20 for a listing of autopilots compatible with the altitude preselect function of the GAD 43e.

NOTE
This section includes compatibility with the basic autopilot computer but does not include compatibility with the flight director interface to the
autopilot computer. Refer to Section E.4 for compatibility with the autopilot computer flight director outputs.

Interfacing Equipment Configuration

Mfr Model Data Format Notes
Information
Any variant of the 5536E/F Computer-
Bendix M4C, M4D Analog [3] Attitude based autopilot
Amplifier [10]
II / III Analog [3] Attitude based autopilot G600 can interface with radio coupler only.
IV Analog [3] Attitude based autopilot
Century
21 / 31 /41 Analog [3] Attitude based autopilot [13]
2000 Analog [3] Attitude based autopilot
400B Analog [3] Attitude based autopilot
For 400 IFCS, the mode control panel must
300 IFCS/400 IFCS/800 IFCS Analog [3] Attitude based autopilot be adjusted NOT to attenuate the heading or
course error signal. [15]
Cessna
G519( ) attitude gyro may replace G550A or
300B/400B/800B IFCS Analog [3] Attitude based autopilot G1050A ADI to provide attitude information
to the autopilot system. [15]
1000 IFCS Analog [3] Attitude based autopilot [11] [15]
APS-65
(APC-65/65A/65B/65C/65E/
Analog [3] Attitude based autopilot [8]
Collins 65F/ 65G/65H/65J,
FGC-65( ), FYD-65)
AP-106/107 Analog [3] Attitude based autopilot

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page E-3
Interfacing Equipment Configuration
Mfr Model Data Format Notes
Information
KAP 100/150/200
Analog [3] Attitude based autopilot [1] [2] [4]
KFC 150/200/250
KAP 140 Analog [3] Rate based autopilot [1] [14]
Analog [3],
KFC 225 Attitude based autopilot [1] [4] [14]
ARINC 429 GPSS
Analog [3], 
KFC 275 Attitude based autopilot [1] [4] [18]
ARINC 429 GPSS
Honeywell
Attitude based autopilot
(Bendix King)
GDU 620 software version 3.00 or
KFC 300 Analog [3] later. Only KFC 300 autopilots [4] [7] [12]
without VNAV functionality are
supported.
KFC 325 (KCP 220 computers with 
Analog [3] Attitude based autopilot [1] [4] [16] [17] [18]
-12 suffix or lower)
KFC 325 (KCP 220 computers with  Analog [3],
Attitude based autopilot [1] [4] [16] [18]
-15 suffix or higher) ARINC 429 GPSS
Sperry SPZ-200A/500 Analog [3] Attitude based autopilot [9]

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page E-4
Interfacing Equipment Configuration
Mfr Model Data Format Notes
Information
Must be configured to operate with either the
20/30/40/50/55/
Analog [3], Discrete Rate based autopilot NSD-360
60-1/60-2/65
or KI-525 (KCS-55) heading system.
60 PSS Analog [3] Pitch axis only autopilot.
Rate based autopilot
Altitude preselect/capture is Must be configured to operate with either the
available as an option using the NSD-360 or KI-525 (KCS-55) heading
RS-485 interface. This requires an system.
optional enablement (refer to If the optional GDU 620 RS-485 altitude
Analog [3], Discrete, preselect function is activated:
Section 5.5.5.2) and utilizes the
S-TEC 55X ARINC 429 GPSS,
RS-485 interface (refer to 55X computer must have mod AC/AC
RS485
Figure F-11). (software/hardware).
Altitude/VS preselect/capture is 55X computer must be strapped for a 01282
available as an option using the (SA-200) altitude selector/alerter (P2-23
GAD 43e (refer to Section E.20 must be OPEN).
for additional details).

Attitude based autopilot.

Analog [3], Discrete, 01304-01, 01304-02, 01304-03, 01304-04,
Only dual G600 installations are
1500/2100 ARINC 429 GPSS, and 01304-07 computers must have Mod. L
allowed to interface to the
Attitude and Air Data Software or later.
1500/2100.

[1] If GDU 620 software version 5.02 or earlier is used, the compass valid discrete input to the autopilot computer must be grounded when the G600 is
installed. For GDU 620 software version 6.11 or later, the HDG/CRS DATUM VALID discrete output may be used (refer to 
Figure F-10). The autopilot uses this input to determine the validity of the heading and course datum (error) signals. With mechanical instruments,
when heading becomes invalid the heading and course datum signals will remain set to the value when valid heading was last received. However,
unlike mechanical instruments, the G600 will (i) automatically set these signals to zero error whenever the heading becomes invalid, resulting in a
wings-level condition (GDU 620 version 2.xx), or (ii) set these signals to the errors based upon the reversionary track-up HSI (GDU 620 version
3.00 and later). This allows GPSS (simulated heading datum) from the G600 to still be used by the autopilot if the heading were to fail.
[2] For KAP 150/KFC 150, EFIS-enabled KC-19X computer (P/N 065-0042-16) is not supported.
[3] Analog signal characteristics for the interfaces from the GDU 620 to the autopilot can be found in Section 4.2.5 of the GDU 620 Installation Manual
(P/N 190-00601-04). The heading and course signal characteristics are determined by the “Autopilot Type” that is configured. Refer to
Section 5.5.9.
[4] An attitude source must be provided to the autopilot in order for it to function properly. The KVG 350 gyro or the KI 255/256 ADI may be retained, or
the KG 258 ADI may replace the KI 256 ADI to provide attitude information to the autopilot system. Optionally, the GAD 43/43e adapter may be
used instead of the KI 255/256/KG 258 ADI or the KVG 350 gyro to provide attitude information to the autopilot system.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page E-5
[5] Not used.
[6] In order for ARINC 429 GPSS to function, the autopilot computer must be configured to receive roll steering information via the ARINC 429 bus from
a GPS sensor (ARINC 429 (GPS) Steering must be enabled).
[7] For the KFC 300 autopilot, a synchro heading input is required. The existing KCS 305 compass system (KSG 105 slaved directional gyro) may be
retained, or the GAD 43/43e adapter may be used instead of the KSG 105 to provide heading information to the autopilot system.
[8] Attitude, yaw rate and compass monitor inputs must be provided to the autopilot in order for it to function properly. The original 332D-11T vertical
reference and MCS-65/YRS-65 heading/yaw rate system may be retained. Optionally, the GAD 43/43e adapter may be used instead of the existing
vertical reference and yaw rate sensors (the GAD 43/43e is only compatible with versions of the APC-65 computer that are compatible with the
AHC-1000A/S and/or the AHC-3000A/S – refer to Section E.14 for GAD 43/43e compatibility).
[9] The original attitude and heading system must remain in the aircraft to provide attitude and heading inputs to the autopilot. The original Altitude Alert
Controller must be retained.
[10] The autopilot computer must be configured for a Collins PN-101 (FD-112C/V) HSI. If autopilot had another HSI prior to the installation of the G600,
changes to the GDU 620 emulation setting may be required. (The installation that was evaluated was an M-4D that had a Collins FD-112 HSI/ADI in
the original configuration.)
[11] The CA-1050A autopilot computer must be configured for a Century NSD-360 HSI, or equivalent (DC Heading and Course Error signals). The
GDU 620 can emulate AC Heading and Course Error (Datum) signals; however, this has currently not been evaluated as part of this STC. Installers
are encouraged to utilize the NSD-360 DC setting to avoid the burden of additional installation approval efforts.
[12] The KCI 310 indicator contains a TEST button that is used to initiate the KFC 300 self test. If the KCI 310 indicator is removed, an external
momentary switch must be installed to replace the function of the KCI 310 TEST switch.
[13] For the Century 31/41, ensure any jumpers at CD185 pins 8, 9 and 17 are removed, to configure computer for an NSD 360A.
[14] For the KAP 140 and KFC 225, the GPS SELECT discrete configuration setting on the GNS 400W/500W must be set to “Prompt” in accordance
with the GNS 400W/500W installation manual.
[15] For Cessna autopilots with NAV1/NAV2 source switching on the autopilot mode controller, the NAV1/NAV2 source indication (lighted switch caption)
on the mode controller must be obliterated (hidden from view). All NAV source switching is accomplished from the GDU 620. See Figure F-14 for
details.
[16] Installation in an aircraft with a previously installed EFIS is supported. However, removal of an existing EFIS requires installation of GDU software
version 6.11 or later in order to provide autopilot mode annunciations.
[17] Autopilot does not support ARINC 429 roll steering.
[18] A placard “DISENGAGE SOFT RIDE DURING ALTITUDE CAPTURE (ALTC)” must be installed near the autopilot mode controller. Refer to
Section 2.5.3.4 for details.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page E-6
E.4 External Flight Directors
The following flight directors are compatible with the GDU 620/G600.
Data
Mfr Model Notes [1] Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information
Format
5536F computer must have 4007463-0501 Flight Director
Bendix M-4D Analog
Board (for Collins 329B7-R, FD-108 and FD112C/V indicators).
Autopilot computer must be previously compatible with the single cue
IV Analog
52C77( ) series indicator.
Century
41 Analog
2000 Analog
300B/400B/800B IFCS Analog
Cessna
1000 IFCS Analog [3]
APS-65 Analog N/A
OUT OF VIEW+ signal from
Collins autopilot must be inverted to be
AP-106/107 Analog
active-high for correct opera-
tion with the G600.
For KFC 150, EFIS-enabled KC-19X computer
KFC 150/200/225 Analog
(P/N 065-0042-16) is not supported.

Honeywell KFC 250 Analog

(Bendix King) Analog or
KFC 275/325
ARINC 429
KFC 300 Analog

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page E-7
Data
Mfr Model Notes [1] Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information
Format
ST-645 Remote Annunciator panel must be installed (or retained) if the
flight director is displayed on G600. This will provide the required mode
annunciations.
Only flight director pitch/roll outputs directly from 55X computer can be
55, 55X Analog
used for display on G600 (FD pitch/roll outputs from the Remote
Annunciator panel cannot be used).
S-TEC If FD Logic output from 55/55X P2-4 is connected to P1-20 input on
ST-645, it must be disconnected.
ST-670 Single Cue FD Interface Unit for King KI 256
60-2/65
Analog (P/N 01180) must be installed or retained to display flight director infor-
(with ST-670)
mation on the G600.
1500 / 2100 Analog
Sperry SPZ-200A/500 Analog [2]
[1] The characteristics of the analog signals are determined by the “Flight Director Type” that is configured. Refer to Section 5.5.9.2.
[2] FZ-500 flight director computer must be strapped for low gain pitch/roll steering and pitch/roll bias out of view inputs must be connected.
[3] The flight director bars cannot be displayed when synthetic terrain (SVT) is being displayed on the PFD. Refer to Section 5.5.10 for additional information.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page E-8
E.5 Navigation Receivers (ARINC 429)
The following navigation receivers are compatible with the GDU 620. Refer to Section E.19 for a list of analog navigation receivers that are compatible with the
GAD 43e.

Mfr Model Data Format Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information

ARINC 429 config:
One or two navigation receivers can Tx: LO SPEED
GNC 255( ) ARINC 429
be connected SDI:VOR/ILS 1 (for NAV 1)
VOR/ILS 2 (for NAV 2)
VOR/LOC/GS ARINC 429 Config:
One or two navigation receivers can TX: Low
GNS 430W/530W ARINC 429
be connected SDI:VOR/ILS 1 (for NAV 1)
VOR/ILS 2 (for NAV 2)
ARINC 429 Setup:
One or two navigation receivers can CH 2 OUT VOR/ILS Low
GNS 480 (CNX80) ARINC 429
be connected Sys 1 (for NAV 1)
Garmin Sys 2 (for NAV 2)
VOR/LOC/GS Setup:
ARINC 429 Config:
One or two navigation receivers can
GTN 650/750 ARINC 429 Tx Speed: Low
be connected
SDI:VOR/ILS 1 (for NAV 1)
VOR/ILS 2 (for NAV 2)
With no external CDI connected to SL30:
Indicator Head Type: Serial
With external “standard CDI” connected to SL30:
SL30 RS-232 Only one SL30 can be connected.
Indicator Head Type: Resolver
With external “composite CDI” connected to SL30:
Indicator Head Type: Serial

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page E-9
E.6 Traffic Source
The following Traffic sources are compatible with the GDU 620:

Mfr Model Data Format Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information

429 OUTPUT CHANNEL 2: GARMIN W/TIS
TIS
(this is a high-speed output)
GTX 33( )/330( ) ARINC 429 The GDU 620 can control the
If the GTX 33( )/330( ) will receive ARINC 429 data from
TIS state, however, it does not
the GDU 620, set the GTX 33( )/330( ) input as follows:
provide control of the GTX 33.
Garmin EFIS W/ALT, LOW speed [1]
TAS/TAS/TCAS I
ARINC 429 Traffic Output must be set to high-speed.
GTS 800/820/850 ARINC 429 Configuration of the GTS 8XX is
The GTS 8XX can receive heading and altitude from the
supported using the HSDB
GDU 620 or directly from the GRS 77 and GDC 74( ).
interface
KTA 810/KMH 820 ARINC 429 TAS Intruder File Protocol: ARINC 735
Honeywell
KTA 910/KMH 920 ARINC 429 TCAS I Controller Type: Discrete [2]

For SKY 497, ARINC 735 Alternate Display type must be

L3 Communications set to “ARINC735 Type 1” (P1-80 must be grounded).
SKY497 [3] /SKY899 ARINC 429 TAS
(Goodrich) SKY 497 units must have software version 1.8 or later
installed.
TAS
External unit capable of displaying traffic and controlling
TAS 600/610/620 GDU 620 does not provide any
Avidyne (Ryan) ARINC 429 the TCAD is required in addition to GDU 620 (e.g.
(9900BX) control of TCAD and will only 400W/500W or Avidyne display/controller).
display TCAD traffic.

[1] The GDU 620 provides altitude as part of the data transmitted to the GTX 33( )/330( ); however, it is recommended that a direct connection from the
GDC 74( ) also be provided so that the GTX 33( )/330( ) will still receive altitude in the event of a GDU 620 failure.
[2] Controller type is only required if GDU 620 is used to control the traffic system.
[3] TRC 497 Software Version 1.8 or higher is required.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page E-10
E.7 Data Link
The following data link is compatible with the GDU 620.

Mfr Model Data Format Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information

SiriusXM subscription is required.
Ethernet port that is connected to GDU 620 #2 must be
GDL 69/69A Ethernet GDU 620 will also control GDL 69A
enabled.
audio functions.
Garmin Iridium satellite transceiver – weather,
RS-232, position reporting and telephone are
GSR 56
discrete available (account required to activate
desired services)

E.8 2 ¼-inch Standby Airspeed Indicators and Altimeters

The following 2 ¼” airspeed indicators and altimeters are suitable for use as standby instruments for a G600 installation.

Mfr Model Data Format Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information

25020-0179 200 knots maximum airspeed
25025-0177 250 knots maximum airspeed
Range markings must be added to match the current airspeed
25035-0181 350 knots maximum airspeed
indicator in the aircraft.
Aerosonic 25040-0180 400 knots maximum airspeed
N/A
Instruments 25020-1160 [2]
15035-0110x 35,000 ft
Inches or millibars must match the current altimeter in the
16550-11xx 50,000 ft
aircraft.
16450-1147 [2]
-xxx corresponds to the airspeed Range markings must be added to match the current airspeed
MD25-xxx
range [1] indicator in the aircraft.
Mid-Continent
N/A
Instruments MD15-2xx 20,000 ft [1] Inches or millibars must match the current altimeter in the
MD15-3xx 35,000 ft [1] aircraft.

[1] Contact Mid-Continent Instruments for complete P/N definition.

[2] Used on PA-46

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page E-11
E.9 ADF Receiver (interfaced to GDU 620)
The following ADF receivers are compatible with the GDU 620. Refer to Section E.22 for a list of synchro ADF receivers that are compatible with the GAD 43e.

Mfr Model Data Format Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information

Collins ADF-60A/B Analog DC Sin/Cos
KR 87
Honeywell Analog DC Sin/Cos
KDF 806

NOTE
The GDU 620 does not accept XYZ ADF inputs.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page E-12
E.10 Weather Radar Source
The following weather radar transceivers are compatible with the GDU 620.

Mfr Model Data Format Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information

No configuration of the GWX 68 is required to communicate
GWX 68 [3] [4] with the GDU 620. Refer to Section 5.5.12.1 for GWX 68
configuration instructions.
GDU 620 software version 3.00 GWX 70 software v2.05 or later required.
or later is required.
HSDB GWX 70 Configuration:
Garmin For dual G600 installations,
(Ethernet) A429 Radar Command: Disabled
weather radar display and control
GWX 70 [3] [5] [6] is only available on GDU 620 #1. Extended Scan: Disabled
Return Bins: 600
Refer to Section 5.5.12.3 for GWX 70 configuration
instructions.
RDS 81 (RS 811A) [1]
RDS 82VP model with vertical
RDS 82 (RS 181A) [1] scan is not currently
supported.
ARINC 429,
Honeywell RDR 2000 (ART 2000) Configured for Desired Antenna Sweep 100°, Map Gain
ARINC 708,
(Bendix/King) [1] [2] Change Accepted, Target Alert Disabled
discrete
Configured for Desired Antenna Sweep 100°, Wx Gain
RDR 2100 (ART 2100) Change Ignored, Map Gain Change Accepted, ARL
[1] [2] Disabled, Auto Step Scan Disabled, Autotilt Disabled, Target
Alert Disabled

[1] The cabling to the weather radar transceiver that is in the radome area must be protected with overbraid until it enters the metal fuselage or metal
wing. Refer to Section 2.5.24 for details on the overbraid requirements and Appendix N for guidance on installing the overbraid. Also, the weather
radar transceiver must be electrically bonded to the surrounding structure (resistance must be 10 mΩ or less).
[2] The GRS 77 may be used to provide ARINC 429 stabilization data to the weather radar.
[3] No other ARINC 453/708 displays (e.g. GMX 200) may be connected to the GWX 68 or GWX 70 (the GWX 68 and GWX 70 do not support
simultaneous connection of HSDB and ARINC 453/708 display interfaces).
[4] The display of GWX 68 weather radar must be disabled on the GTN navigator, if installed (simultaneous display of GWX 68 data on the GDU 620
and GTN navigator is not supported).
[5] Stabilization data must be provided to the GWX 70 over a separate analog or ARINC 429 interface.
[6] The GWX 70 weather radar may be configured to display on GDU 620 #1 and one GTN navigator.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page E-13
E.11 Lightning Source
Not currently supported.
E.12 External TAWS Source
Not currently supported.

NOTE
The GDU 620 will not display terrain data from an external source; however, if a 500W Series unit with TAWS is connected as defined herein, the
GDU 620 will display all of the required TAWS annunciations and eliminate the need for a separate TAWS annunciator panel.

E.13 GDU 620 Serial Altitude (RS-232)

The G600 can provide RS-232 serial altitude (Shadin altitude format, 9600 baud) to the following systems.

Mfr Model Data Format Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information

GDU 620 software version 3.00
GTX 32 or later is required. The RS-232 input that is used to provide altitude to the
RS-232
GTX 327 GDU 620 RS-232 Chnl 8 Output transponder must be set to “SHADIN ALT“
must be set to “Shadin-alt”.
Garmin
GDU 620 software version 3.00
or later is required. The RS-232 input that is used to provide altitude to the
GTX 33( )/330( ) RS-232 [1] transponder must be set to “SHDN ALT 25ft” (or “SHADIN
GDU 620 RS-232 Chnl 8 Output ALT 25ft” if using the GNS 480 to configure the transponder)
must be set to “Shadin-alt”.

[1] The GDU 620 can provide serial altitude to the GTX 33( )/330( ); however, it is recommended that a direct connection from the GDC 74( ) be used
to provide altitude so that the GTX 33( )/330( ) will still receive altitude in the event of a GDU 620 failure.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page E-14
E.14 GAD 43/43e – Autopilot Compatibility - Attitude Source

NOTE
Installation of the GAD 43/43e adapter allows the existing attitude source for the autopilot to be removed, but will not improve autopilot
performance. Prior to starting a G600 installation in which the GAD 43/43e is used to provide attitude to the autopilot, it is recommended that a
short flight test be conducted to baseline the autopilot performance. This short flight test is repeated after completion of the aircraft modification to
verify that the autopilot performance has not been affected. Refer to Section 5.10.2.5 for additional details.

The following autopilots are compatible with the GAD 43/43e when using the GAD 43/43e as an attitude source.

Interfacing Equipment
Mfr Model Data Format Notes
Configuration Information
Century 21/31/41/2000 Analog [1] GAD 43/43e provides attitude information to autopilot. [9]
300B/400B/800B IFCS
(Type IF-550A)
Cessna 400B (Type AF-550A) Analog [1] GAD 43/43e provides attitude information to autopilot.
1000A Series
(Types AF/IF-1050A)
APS-65
Collins Analog [1] GAD 43/43e provides attitude and yaw rate information to autopilot [2]
(APC-65/65A/65E/65H/65J)
KAP 100 Analog [1] GAD 43/43e provides attitude information to autopilot. [3]

GAD 43/43e provides attitude information to autopilot. [3]

KAP 150/KFC 150 Analog [1]
GAD 43/43e can also provide baro-correction directly to the KAS
[4] [5]
297B Altitude/Vertical Speed Selector.
Honeywell KAP 200/KFC 200 Analog [1] GAD 43/43e provides attitude information to autopilot. [8] [3]
(Bendix King)
GAD 43/43e provides attitude information to the autopilot (or KA
KFC 250 Analog [1]
141 if installed). [8]
GAD 43/43e provides attitude information to autopilot. [3] [7]
KFC 275 Analog [1] GAD 43/43e can also provide baro-correction directly to the KAS
[4] [5]
297C Altitude/Vertical Speed Selector.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page E-15
Interfacing Equipment
Mfr Model Data Format Notes
Configuration Information
GAD 43/43e provides attitude information to autopilot. [3]
KFC 225 Analog [1] GAD 43/43e can also provide baro-correction directly to the KC
[5] [6]
Honeywell 225 computer [4]
(Bendix King) GAD 43/43e provides attitude information to autopilot (or KA 141 if
KFC 300 Analog [1]
installed). [8]
KFC 325 Analog [1] GAD 43/43e provides attitude information to autopilot
[1] Analog signal characteristics for the interfaces from the GAD 43/43e to the autopilot can be found in Section 4 of the GAD 43/43e Installation
Manual (P/N 190-00899-00). Output signal characteristics are determined by the configuration of the GAD 43/43e. Refer to Section 5.5.11.
[2] APC 65 computer must be modified to be compatible with the AHC-1000A/S and/or the AHC-3000A/S attitude heading computer. If not modified,
the autopilot will not engage and will indicate a “VG cos monitor” diagnostics fault.
[3] After installation of the GAD 43/43e, perform the Gyro Alignment Procedure or Attitude Gyro Calibration in accordance with the autopilot
manufacturer’s instructions. There is no need to remove the GRS 77 AHRS where the manufacturer’s procedure calls for the attitude gyro/indicator
to be removed and mounted on a tilt table. Instead, with the GDU 620 in Configuration mode, use the GAD 43/43e page to set the GAD 43/43e pitch
and roll values as required by the autopilot check.
[4] If the GAD 43/43e is used to provide baro-correction to the KAS 297B/C, perform the KAS 297B/C checkout procedures (unit alignment and
operational check).
[5] If desired, the KEA 130/130A encoding altimeter may be removed and replaced with the GAD 43/43e and a separate blind encoder. The
GAD 43/43e will provide the baro-correction and the blind encoder will provide the Gray code altitude.
[6] If the GAD 43/43e is used to provide baro-correction to the KFC 225, perform an Altimeter Calibration and Altitude Selector Checkout Procedure in
accordance with the autopilot manufacturer’s instructions.
[7] Installation of the GAD 43/43e in place of an existing KI-254 attitude source is not supported.
[8] The GAD 43/43e can also be used to replace the KRG 331 rate gyro if desired.
[9] GAD 43 P/N 011-01970-00 cannot be used to provide attitude information. GAD 43 P/N 011-01970-01 must be used to provide attitude to Century
autopilots.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page E-16
E.15 Radar Altimeters
The following radar altimeter transceivers are compatible with the GDU 620.

Mfr Model Data Format Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information

This is an analog to digital
Collins RAC-870 ARINC 429 converter specifically for use
with the ALT-55B radalt
Must set ARINC 429 Speed Select program to pin to set
FreeFlight RA-4500 ARINC 429 output bus speed to match GDU 620 ARINC 429 input
speed.
Honeywell
KRA 405B ARINC 429
(Bendix King)

E.16 External Video Sources

CAUTION
Agencies installing auxiliary video systems are solely responsible for all direct and indirect effects of lightning compliance as a result of lightning
strike to the auxiliary video system. Garmin strongly recommends that all installed auxiliary video systems support pin injection test levels stricter
than those already met by the GDU 620(s) (refer to EQF 005-00313-20). Garmin neither possesses data for nor can guarantee results of any
alternative high level testing conducted by the installing agency. The installing agency has the option to either add external lightning protection to
the auxiliary video system outside of the GDU 620(s) in lieu of a redesign, or to add sufficient protection within the auxiliary video system to prevent
current backflow to the GDU 620(s) at levels in excess of the GDU 620 pin injection limits.

The following video sources are compatible with the GDU 620.

Mfr Model Data Format Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information

Max-Viz EVS-1500 RS-170 Video [1]

[1] To be eligible to connect a video system to the GDU 620 in metal aircraft, the limitations in Section 7.2.2.5 and following conditions must be met:
• The video system wiring and components must be installed inside a metal housing in lightning Zone 2A or 3 on metal aircraft only. If the cable
from the camera to its power supply is not routed inside a metal housing, the aircraft must be limited to VFR operation.
• Electrical bonding of the metal housing to aircraft skin must be 2.5 mΩ or less.
• In a dual G600 installation, only a single GDU 620may be connected to a video system.
Connection to the video system in non-metallic aircraft or installations not meeting the limitations above require additional airworthiness approval
and is not included in this STC. Transient voltages from the video system must not exceed the test levels to which GDU 620 video input is qualified,
refer to EQF 005-00313-20 for DO-160D sections 20 and 22.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page E-17
E.17 Audio Panels
The connection of a GDU 620 to an audio panel is recommended but not required for tones and aural alerts generated by the GDU 620. However, the connection of
a GDU 620 to an audio panel is required if TAWS-B and/or SVT is enabled.
The audio panels listed below are compatible with the GDU 620. However, interface to audio panels not listed below can still be approved under G600 AML STC
SA02153LA-D if all of the following conditions are met:
• The installation of the audio panel was previously FAA-approved;
• The GDU 620 audio must be verified as described in Section 5.5.6.
For installations using G600 SVT, the audio panel must have an unswitched audio input that is used for the GDU 620 audio.

Mfr Model Data Format Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information

KMA 24
Honeywell
KMA 26 analog
(Bendix/King)
KMA 28
GMA 340
GMA 347
GMA 35
Garmin analog GMA 35 requires a control panel, such as a GTN 7XX.
GMA 350
SL15
SL15M
PMA 6000
PS Engineering PMA 7000 Series analog
PMA 8000 Series

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page E-18
E.18 Miscellaneous Systems
The following systems are compatible with the GDU 620/G600.

Interfacing Equipment Configuration

Manufacturer Model Data Format Notes
Information
Use ARINC 429 input format
EMCA SPWG92 ARINC 429 [4]
“FAST/SLOW 1”, Low Speed
MAGIC Engine [1] [2] [3] The GDU 620 will not
Meggitt (Cobham/S-TEC) Instrumentation Display ARINC 429, discrete display any information from the
System (EIDS) EIDS.
[1] Refer to Section 5.5.6C and Section 5.5.15 for GDU 620 setup items.
[2] A dual G600 installation is required.
[3] The GDU 620 provides air data for the engine trend monitoring system, and a discrete to control whether system 1 data or system 2 data is
displayed.
[4] Prior to beginning installation, contact Garmin regarding availability of the ARINC 429 Fast/Slow enablement card.

E.19 GAD 43e - Analog Navigation Receiver Compatibility

Interface to analog navigation receivers not listed below can still be approved under G600 AML STC SA02153LA-D if all of the following conditions are met:
The navigation receiver is approved to TSO C36( ) (Localizer) and C40( ) (VOR), and optionally C34( ) (Glideslope) if glideslope is used;
• If glideslope is being used, the navigation receiver has a glideslope low-level flag output.
• The installation of the navigation receiver was previously FAA-approved.
• The interface check for the analog navigation receiver described in Section 5.8.4.2 has successfully been completed.

Mfr Model Data Format Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information

composite
Collins VIR-32/33 Can be NAV 1, NAV 2 or both
analog
composite
KX 155/155A/165/165A Can be NAV 1, NAV 2 or both
Honeywell analog
(Bendix King) composite
KN 53 Can be NAV 1, NAV 2 or both
analog

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page E-19
E.20 GAD 43e – Autopilot Compatibility – Altitude Preselect / Vertical Speed Select

Data
Mfr Model Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information
Format
Autopilot must currently use the UI 5506L-S altitude
APS-65 preselector.
Analog United Instruments 5506L-S
Collins (APC-65/65A/65B/65C/65E/65F/ APS-65 autopilots that currently have the PRE-80 altitude
Discrete emulation
65G/65H/65J, FGC-65( ),FYD-65) preselector cannot use the GAD 43e altitude preselect
function.
KAP 100/150
Digital KAS 297B emulation
KFC 150

Honeywell The flight director interface from the KFC 200/250 described
(Bendix in Section E.4 is required.
KFC 200/250 Discrete KAS 297 emulation
King) Installations with the KNS 660 Flight Management System
are not supported.

KFC 275/325 Digital KAS 297C emulation

55X computer must be strapped for a 0140 / 01279PX 

Analog
S-TEC 55X, 60-2, 65, 60PSS ST-360 emulation (ST-360) altitude/vertical speed selector altitude 
Discrete
(P2-23 must be GROUNDED).

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page E-20
E.21 GAD 43e – Analog Radar Altimeter Compatibility

Mfr Model Data Format Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information

Analog
ALT-50A
Discrete
Collins
Analog
ALT-55B
Discrete
Analog 
KRA 10/10A
Honeywell Discrete
(Bendix King) Analog 
KRA 405 Auxiliary Output #1 must be used.
Discrete
Analog
AA-100 Precision Output must be used.
Discrete
Analog
Sperry AA-100A Precision Output must be used.
Discrete
Analog
AA-200 Precision Output must be used.
Discrete

E.22 GAD 43e – Synchro ADF Receiver Compatibility

Interface to ADF receivers not listed below can still be approved under G600 AML STC SA02153LA-D if all of the following conditions are met:
• The ADF receiver is approved to TSO-C41( ) (Airborne Automatic Direction Finding (ADF) Equipment);
• The ADF receiver has a synchro bearing TO station output. This output must comply with the ARINC 407 synchro electrical specification.
• The installation of the ADF receiver was previously FAA-approved.
• The interface check for the ADF receiver described in Figure 5.8.8 has successfully been completed.

Mfr Model Data Format Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information

Honeywell Existing KI 225-04 indicator
KR 85 Analog Only KI 225-04 indicator supported
(Bendix King) must be retained.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page E-21
E.23 GAD 43e – DME Compatibility

Mfr Model Data Format Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information

DME-42 ARINC 568 [1] Must be strapped to match tuning source
Collins
DME-442/4000 ARINC 429
KDM 706(A) Digital [2] GDU 620/GAD 43e is Master DME Display/Control
Honeywell
KN 62/64 Digital
(Bendix King)
KN 63 Digital [2] GDU 620/GAD 43e is Master DME Display/Control

[1] Only installations that use CSDB tuning and have a single DME tuning source are supported (i.e. only one nav radio can be used to tune the DME).
[2] The GAD 43e can accept either serial or parallel tuning data, which it will forward to the KN 63 or KDM 706(A) DME. A list of approved tuning
sources appears below.

Acceptable Tuning Sources (for use with KN 63 or KDM 706(A) DME)

Tuning sources not listed below can still be approved under G600 AML STC SA02153LA-D if all of the following conditions are met:
• The VHF NAV receiver is approved to TSO C36( ) (Localizer) and C40( ) (VOR).
• The VHF NAV receiver supports King serial tuning, or 2x5 / Slip Code / Shifted BCD parallel tuning.
• The installation of the VHF nav receiver was previously FAA-approved.
• The interface check for the DME receiver described in Section 5.8.21 has successfully been completed.

Manufacturer Model Data Format Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information

400W/500W Series King Serial
Garmin
GTN 6XX/7XX King Serial

Honeywell (Bendix King) KX 170B/175B Parallel Slip Code Tuning

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page E-22
E.24 GAD 43e – Marker Beacon Receiver Compatibility
Interface to marker receivers not listed below can still be approved under G600 AML STC SA02153LA-D if all of the following conditions are met:
• The marker beacon receiver is approved to TSO-C35( ) (Airborne Radio Marker Receiving Equipment).
• The marker beacon receiver has active high discrete outputs for inner, middle, and outer marker lamps.
• The installation of the marker beacon receiver was previously FAA-approved.
• The interface check for the marker beacon receiver described in Section 5.8.22 has successfully been completed.

Mfr Model Data Format Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information

Collins VIR-32/33 Discrete
Garmin GMA 35/340/347/350 Discrete
Honeywell (Bendix King) KMA 24/26/28 Discrete
PS Engineering PMA 6000/7000/8000 Discrete

E.25 Stall Protection and Warning Unit (Fast/Slow Indication) Compatibility

Mfr Model Data Format Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information

EMCA SPWG92 ARINC 429 [1]

[1] Prior to beginning installation, contact Garmin regarding availability of the ARINC 429 Fast/Slow enablement card.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page E-23
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page E-24 Rev. L
APPENDIX F INTERCONNECT DIAGRAMS

Figure F-1. Power, Lighting and Configuration Module Interconnect (Single GDU)
Figure F-2. Power, Lighting and Configuration Module Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)
Figure F-3. Power/Config Module/OAT – GDC 74( )/GRS 77/GMU 44 Interconnect
Figure F-4. Attitude and Air Data Interconnect (Single GDU)
Figure F-5. Attitude and Air Data Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)
Figure F-6. GPS Source Interconnect 400W/500W/480 (Single GDU 620)
Figure F-7. GPS Source Interconnect 400W/500W/480 (Dual GDU 620s)
Figure F-8. Navigation Receiver Interconnect (Single GDU 620)
Figure F-9. Navigation Receiver Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)
Figure F-10. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Honeywell (Bendix/King)
Figure F-11. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – S-TEC
Figure F-12. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Century
Figure F-13. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Collins
Figure F-14. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Cessna
Figure F-15. Audio Interconnect
Figure F-16. GDL 69/69A Interconnect
Figure F-17. Traffic Advisory System Interconnect
Figure F-18. ADF Interconnect
Figure F-19. External Switches (GPSS)
Figure F-20. Mid-Continent Electric Standby Attitude Indicator Interconnect (Integral Battery)
Figure F-21. Mid-Continent Electric Standby Attitude Indicator Interconnect (External Battery)
Figure F-22. Stormscope Provisions Interconnect
Figure F-23. Weather Radar Interconnect
Figure F-24. Serial Altitude Output Interconnect
Figure F-25. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Sperry
Figure F-26. GAD 43/43e - Power and G600 Interconnect
Figure F-27. GAD 43/43e Honeywell (Bendix-King) Autopilot Interconnect
Figure F-28. GAD 43/43e – Collins Autopilot Interconnect
Figure F-29. GAD 43/43e – Synchro Heading Interconnect
Figure F-30. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Bendix
Figure F-31. GSR 56 Iridium Interconnect
Figure F-32. Radar Altimeter (ARINC 429) Interconnect
Figure F-33. External Video Interconnect
Figure F-34. GPS Source Interconnect - GTN 6XX/7XX (Single GDU 620)
Figure F-35. GPS Source Interconnect - GTN 6XX/7X (Dual GDU 620s)
Figure F-36. HSDB Ethernet Interconnect (Single GDU 620)
Figure F-37. HSDB Ethernet Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)
Figure F-38. GAD 43/43e – Century Autopilot Interconnect
Figure F-39. Miscellaneous Equipment Interfaces
Figure F-40. GAD 43e S-TEC Autopilot Interconnect
Figure F-41. GAD 43e Navigation Receiver (Analog) Interconnect
Figure F-42. GAD 43e Radar Altimeter (Analog) Interconnect
Figure F-43. GAD 43e DME Interconnect
Figure F-44. GAD 43e Marker Beacon Receiver Interconnect
Figure F-45. GAD 43/43e Cessna Autopilot Interconnect

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-1
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-2 Rev. L
0(7$/$,5&5$)7
$1'1210(7$//,&9)521/<,167$//$7,216

*'83)'0)' 3)'
3

$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* (66(17,$/%86

$ 9'&
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
$ 9'&

$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $,5&5$)7

$,5&5$)7*1' $:* *5281'

&21),*02'8/(3:5 5('
&21),*02'8/(*1' %/. &21),*
&21),*02'8/('$7$ <(/ 02'8/(
&21),*02'8/(&/2&. :+7

/,*+7,1*%86+, 72$,5&5$)7

/,*+7,1*%86/2 /,*+7,1*%86

1210(7$//,&$,5&5$)7
(;&(379)521/<,167$//$7,216

*'83)'0)'
3 3)'

$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $:* (66(17,$/%86
$ 9'&
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* )
$ 9'&
796

$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $,5&5$)7

$,5&5$)7*1' $:* *5281'

&21),*02'8/(3:5 5('
&21),*02'8/(*1' %/. &21),*
&21),*02'8/('$7$ <(/ 02'8/(
&21),*02'8/(&/2&. :+7

/,*+7,1*%86+, 72$,5&5$)7

/,*+7,1*%86/2 /,*+7,1*%86

Figure F-1. Power, Lighting and Configuration Module Interconnect (Single GDU)
Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-3
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
V
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'

%27+32:(5/($'6$1'%27+*5281'/($'6$5(5(48,5('

&21),*85$7,2102'8/(,602817(',17+(%$&.6+(//2)7+(3&211(&725

&21),*85$7,2102'8/(+$51(6686(6$:*:,5(6&217$&766833/,(':,7+&21),*85$7,21
02'8/(0867%(86(')25&211(&7,1*&21),*85$7,2102'8/(+$51(66723

7+(*'80867%(&21),*85(')257+(&255(&7/,*+7,1*%8692/7$*( 9'&9'&9'&
259$& 12'$0$*(:,//2&&85,)7+(81,7,6&21),*85(',1&255(&7/<$0$18$//,*+7,1*
&21752/237,21,6$/62$9$,/$%/(5()(5727+(3267,167$//$7,21&21),*85$7,21
352&('85(

237,21$/&211(&7,21,)127&211(&7('7+(*'8/,*+7,1*0867%(&21),*85('72
$8720$7,&$//<&203(16$7()25$0%,(17/,*+7,1*&21',7,21686,1*,763+272&(//$0$18$/
/,*+7,1*&21752/237,21,6$/62$9$,/$%/(5()(5727+(3267,167$//$7,21&21),*85$7,21
352&('85(

7+(*'80867%(217+(6$0(32:(5%86$67+(*56$1'*'& 7+(*'80867127
%(217+($9,21,&632:(5%86

&,5&8,7%5($.(56+28/'%(/$%(/('$66+2:1

,)7+($,5&5$)7'2(6127+$9($1³(66(17,$/´%86&211(&772$%867+$75(&(,9(632:(5$6
6221$67+(%$77(5<0$67(5,67851('215()(5726(&7,21)25$'',7,21$/,1)250$7,21

5()(5726(&7,21)253$57180%(56$1'7$%/(.,1$33(1',;.)25$,5&5$)702'(/
63(&,),&,1)250$7,215()(5726(&7,21)25,1)250$7,2121,167$//,1*7+(796)86(
$/7(51$7(/<7+()86(0$<%(,167$//('217+(*5281'6,'(2)7+(796&211(&7796$7*'8
$66+2:1796),61275(48,5(')25$//$,5&5$)702'(/6

3 *'8


$ )86(
)

&XW796OHDGVWR 3/
6WULSHRQ796PXVWEHWRZDUG
796 SRZHUEXV
V &211(&772
6+,(/'%/2&.

5()(572$33(1',;3)257%0$,5&5$)7

Figure F-1. Power, Lighting and Configuration Module Interconnect (Single GDU)
Sheet 2 of 2

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-4 Rev. L
0(7$/$,5&5$)7
$1'1210(7$//,&9)521/<,167$//$7,216

*'83)'0)'
3 3)'
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* (66(17,$/%86
$:* $ 9'&
$,5&5$)732:(5
$ 9'&

$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $,5&5$)7

$,5&5$)7*1' *5281'
$:*

&21),*02'8/(3:5 5('
&21),*02'8/(*1' %/. &21),*
&21),*02'8/('$7$ <(/ 02'8/(
&21),*02'8/(&/2&. :+7

/,*+7,1*%86+, 72$,5&5$)7

/,*+7,1*%86/2 /,*+7,1*%86

3
(7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7287%
6

*'83)'0)'
3
(7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287%
(7+(51(7287$
6
&'86<67(0,'3*0
*5281'

3 3)'
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $9,21,&6250$,1%86

$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $ 9'&
$ 9'&
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $,5&5$)7
$,5&5$)7*1' *5281'
$:*

&21),*02'8/(3:5 5('
&21),*02'8/(*1' %/. &21),*
&21),*02'8/('$7$ <(/ 02'8/(
&21),*02'8/(&/2&. :+7

/,*+7,1*%86+, 72$,5&5$)7
/,*+7,1*%86
/,*+7,1*%86/2

Figure F-2. Power, Lighting and Configuration Module Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)
Sheet 1 of 4

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-5
0(7$/$,5&5$)7±$/7(51$7(&21),*85$7,21 3&21/<
3)'$
*'83)'0)' $9,21,&6%86
3 $ 9'&
&5
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
$:*
$,5&5$)732:(5 3)'%

$9,21,&6%86
$ 9'&
&5
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $,5&5$)7
$,5&5$)7*1' *5281'
$:*

&21),*02'8/(3:5 5('
&21),*02'8/(*1' %/. &21),*
&21),*02'8/('$7$ <(/ 02'8/(
&21),*02'8/(&/2&. :+7

/,*+7,1*%86+, 72$,5&5$)7
/,*+7,1*%86
/,*+7,1*%86/2

3
(7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7287%
6

*'83)'0)'
3
(7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287%
(7+(51(7287$
6
&'86<67(0,'3*0
*5281' 3)'$
$9,21,&6%86
3 $ 9'&
&5
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
$:*
$,5&5$)732:(5 3)'%

$9,21,&6%86
$ 9'&
&5

$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $,5&5$)7

$,5&5$)7*1' *5281'
$:*

&21),*02'8/(3:5 5('
&21),*02'8/(*1' %/. &21),*
&21),*02'8/('$7$ <(/ 02'8/(
&21),*02'8/(&/2&. :+7

/,*+7,1*%86+, 72$,5&5$)7
/,*+7,1*%86
/,*+7,1*%86/2

Figure F-2. Power, Lighting and Configuration Module Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)
Sheet 2 of 4

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-6 Rev. L
1210(7$//,&$,5&5$)7
(;&(379)521/<,167$//$7,216

*'83)'0)'
3 3)'

$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $:* (66(17,$/%86
$ 9'&
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* )
$ 9'&
796

$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $,5&5$)7

$,5&5$)7*1' $:* *5281'

&21),*02'8/(3:5 5('
&21),*02'8/(*1' %/. &21),*
&21),*02'8/('$7$ <(/ 02'8/(
&21),*02'8/(&/2&. :+7

/,*+7,1*%86+, 72$,5&5$)7

/,*+7,1*%86/2 /,*+7,1*%86

3
(7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7287%
6

*'83)'0)'
3
(7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287%
(7+(51(7287$
6
&'86<67(0,'3*0
*5281'

3 3)'
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $9,21,&6250$,1%86

$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $ 9'&
$ 9'&
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $,5&5$)7
$,5&5$)7*1' *5281'
$:*

&21),*02'8/(3:5 5('
&21),*02'8/(*1' %/. &21),*
&21),*02'8/('$7$ <(/ 02'8/(
&21),*02'8/(&/2&. :+7

/,*+7,1*%86+, 72$,5&5$)7

/,*+7,1*%86/2 /,*+7,1*%86

Figure F-2. Power, Lighting and Configuration Module Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)
Sheet 3 of 4

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-7
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('

V
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'

%27+32:(5/($'6$1'%27+*5281'/($'60867%(&211(&7('

&21),*85$7,2102'8/(,602817(',17+(%$&.6+(//2)7+(3&211(&725

&217$&766833/,(':,7+&21),*85$7,2102'8/(0867%(86(')25&211(&7,1*&21),*85$7,21
02'8/(+$51(66723

7+(*'80867%(&21),*85(')257+(&255(&7/,*+7,1*%8692/7$*( 9'&9'&9'&
259$& 12'$0$*(:,//2&&85,)7+(81,7,6&21),*85(',1&255(&7/<$0$18$//,*+7,1*
&21752/237,21,6$/62$9$,/$%/(5()(5727+(3267,167$//$7,21&21),*85$7,21
352&('85(

237,21$/&211(&7,21,)127&211(&7('7+(*'8/,*+7,1*0867%(&21),*85('72
$8720$7,&$//<&203(16$7()25$0%,(17/,*+7,1*&21',7,21686,1*,763+272&(//$0$18$/
/,*+7,1*&21752/237,21,6$/62$9$,/$%/(5()(5727+(3267,167$//$7,21&21),*85$7,21
352&('85(

*'80867%(&211(&7('',5(&7/<72*'8,7,61273(50,77('72&211(&7
$127+(5'(9,&( (**'/$ %(7:((1%27+*'86

86($,5&5$)7*5$'(&$7(*25<(7+(51(7&$%/(7+(6(,1&/8'(7+()2//2:,1*
0$18)$&785(5 31
3,&:,5($1'&$%/( ( $:*
3,&:,5($1'&$%/( ( $:*
(/(&7521,&&$%/(63(&,$/,67 $:*
1RWUHFRPPHQGHGGXHWRODUJHUZLUHGLDPHWHU$:*LVSUHIHUUHG

&,5&8,7%5($.(56+28/'%(/$%(/('$66+2:1

,)7+($,5&5$)7'2(6127+$9($1³(66(17,$/´%86&211(&772$%867+$75(&(,9(632:(5$6
6221$67+(%$77(5<0$67(5,67851('215()(5726(&7,21)25$'',7,21$/,1)250$7,21

$77+(*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'6
0867%(/(667+$1

5()(5726(&7,21)253$57180%(56$1'7$%/(.,1$33(1',;.)25$,5&5$)702'(/
63(&,),&,1)250$7,215()(5726(&7,21)25,1)250$7,2121,167$//,1*7+(796)86(
$/7(51$7(/<7+()86(0$<%(,167$//('217+(*5281'6,'(2)7+(796&211(&7796$7*'8
$66+2:1796),61275(48,5(')25$//$,5&5$)702'(/6

Figure F-2. Power, Lighting and Configuration Module Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)
Sheet 4 of 4

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-8 Rev. L
0(7$/$,5&5$)7
$1'1210(7$//,&9)521/<,167$//$7,216

*56$+56
3
$+56

$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $:* (66(17,$/%86 6,1*/(*5625*56
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $ $9,21,&6250$,1%86 *56
9'&
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $:*
$,5&5$)7*1' $:*

&21),*02'8/(3:5 5('
&21),*02'8/(*1' %/. &21),*
&21),*02'8/('$7$ <(/ 02'8/(
&21),*02'8/(&/2&. :+7

*08
3 0$*1(720(7(5
56,1$
56,1%
V

56287
0$*1(720(7(53:5287
0$*1(720(7(5*5281'
V

$5,1&,1$
$5,1&,1%
V

*'& $'&
3
$5,1&287%
$5,1&287$ $'&
V
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* (66(17,$/%86 6,1*/(*'&25*'&
$ $9,21,&6250$,1%86 *'&
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* 9'&

2$732:(5 :+7
2$7352%(,1+, %/8 *73
2$7352%(,1/2 251 2$7352%(
V

&21),*02'8/(3:5 5('
&21),*02'8/(*1' %/. &21),*
&21),*02'8/('$7$ <(/ 02'8/(
&21),*02'8/(&/2&. :+7

Figure F-3. Power/Config Module/OAT – GDC 74( )/GRS 77/GMU 44 Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 4

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-9

0(7$/$,5&5$)7±$/7(51$7(&21),*85$7,21

*56$+56
3
$+56$ $
$9,21,&6%86
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
$ 9'&

$+56% %
$9,21,&6%86
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
$ 9'&

$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $:*
$,5&5$)7*1' $:*

&21),*02'8/(3:5 5('
&21),*02'8/(*1' %/. &21),*
&21),*02'8/('$7$ <(/ 02'8/(
&21),*02'8/(&/2&. :+7

*08
3 0$*1(720(7(5
56,1$
56,1%
V

56287
0$*1(720(7(53:5287
0$*1(720(7(5*5281'
V

$5,1&,1$
$5,1&,1%
V

*'& $'&
3
$5,1&287%
$5,1&287$ $'&$ $
V
$9,21,&6%86
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* 9'&
$
$'&% %
$9,21,&6%86
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
$ 9'&
$,5&5$)7*1' $:*

2$732:(5 :+7
2$7352%(,1+, %/8 *73
2$7352%(,1/2 251 2$7352%(
V

&21),*02'8/(3:5 5('
&21),*02'8/(*1' %/. &21),*
&21),*02'8/('$7$ <(/ 02'8/(
&21),*02'8/(&/2&. :+7

Figure F-3. Power/Config Module/OAT – GDC 74( )/GRS 77/GMU 44 Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 4

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-10 Rev. L
1210(7$//,&$,5&5$)7
(;&(379)521/<,167$//$7,216

*56$+56 3 $+56
(66(17,$/%86 6,1*/(*5625*56
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $:*
$ $9,21,&6250$,1%86 *56
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* ) 9'&
796
*5621/<

$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $:*
$,5&5$)7*1' $:*

&21),*02'8/(3:5 5('
&21),*02'8/(*1' %/. &21),*
&21),*02'8/('$7$ <(/ 02'8/(
&21),*02'8/(&/2&. :+7

*08
3 0$*1(720(7(5
56,1$
56,1%
V

56287
0$*1(720(7(53:5287
0$*1(720(7(5*5281'
V

$5,1&,1$
$5,1&,1%
V

*'& $'&
3
$5,1&287%
$5,1&287$ $'&
V
(66(17,$/%86 6,1*/(*'&25*'&
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $:* $9,21,&6250$,1%86 *'&
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* ) $
9'&

796
*'& 21/<

$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $:*
$,5&5$)7*1' $:*
2$732:(5 :+7
2$7352%(,1+, %/8 *73
2$7352%(,1/2 251 2$7352%(
V

&21),*02'8/(3:5 5('
&21),*02'8/(*1' %/. &21),*
&21),*02'8/('$7$ <(/ 02'8/(
&21),*02'8/(&/2&. :+7

Figure F-3. Power/Config Module/OAT – GDC 74( )/GRS 77/GMU 44 Interconnect

Sheet 3 of 4

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-11
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('

*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
V

%27+32:(5/($'6$1'%27+*5281'/($'6$5(5(48,5('7+(63/,&(0867%(,16,'(7+(
&211(&725%$&.6+(//

&21),*85$7,2102'8/(,602817(',17+(%$&.6+(//2)7+(/58&211(&725

&21),*85$7,2102'8/(+$51(6686(6$:*:,5(6&217$&766833/,(':,7+&21),*85$7,21
02'8/(0867%(86(')25&211(&7,1*&21),*85$7,2102'8/(+$51(66723253

)25$6,1*/(*'8,167$//$7,21&211(&77+(&,5&8,7%5($.(5727+((66(17,$/%86

)25$'8$/*'8,167$//$7,21&211(&77+(&,5&8,7%5($.(5)257+(6<67(0/58727+(
(66(17,$/%86)257+(6<67(0/58¶67+(7+(&,5&8,7%5($.(50$<%(&211(&7('727+(
$9,21,&6250$,1%86

&,5&8,7%5($.(56+28/'%(/$%(/('$66+2:1/$%(/$66<67(025$6$335235,$7()25
'8$/*'8,167$//$7,216 ,(³$+56´µ$+56³$'&´25³$'&

,)7+($,5&5$)7'2(6127+$9($1³(66(17,$/´%86&211(&772$%867+$75(&(,9(632:(5$6
6221$67+(%$77(5<0$67(5,67851('215()(5726(&7,21)25$'',7,21$/,1)250$7,21

$7*56$1'*'& &211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'
/($'60867%(/(667+$1

/580867%(*5281'(',17+(,167580(173$1(/$5($

5()(5726(&7,21)253$57180%(56$1'7$%/(.,1$33(1',;.)25$,5&5$)702'(/
63(&,),&,1)250$7,21$/7(51$7(/<7+()86(0$<%(,167$//('217+(*5281'6,'(2)7+(796
5()(5726(&7,21)25,1)250$7,2121,167$//,1*7+(796)86(&211(&7796$7*56
$1'*'& $66+2:1)25'8$/*'8,167$//$7,216796,61275(48,5('21*5625
*'&
3 *56
3 *'&
6SOLFHPXVWEHORFDWHGLQVLGH 6SOLFHPXVWEHORFDWHGLQVLGH
FRQQHFWRUEDFNVKHOO FRQQHFWRUEDFNVKHOO

)86( )86(
$ ) $
)

&XW796OHDGVWR 3/ &XW796OHDGVWR 3/

796 6WULSHRQ796PXVWEH 796 6WULSHRQ796PXVWEH

WRZDUGSRZHUEXV WRZDUGSRZHUEXV
V &211(&772 V &211(&772
6+,(/'%/2&. 6+,(/'%/2&.

7+(:,5,1*6833/,(':,7+7+(*730$<%((;7(1'(',)7+(6833/,(':,5(/(1*7+,6127
68)),&,(17)25$3$57,&8/$5,167$//$7,21

7+($/7(51$7(&21),*85$7,210$<21/<%(87,/,=(',1$,5&5$)77+$70((77+()2//2:,1*
&5,7(5,$ L +$9(7:225025(*(1(5$7256$1' LL +$9($7/($677:2$9,21,&6%86(67+$7&$1
%((/(&75,&$//<,62/$7(')520($&+27+(5

7+(*'& 0$<%(32:(5(')520$%$77(5<%86,167($'2)$9,21,&6%86,)7+(*'&,6
&211(&7('7227+(5$,5&5$)76<67(067+$71(('$,5'$7$%()25(7+($9,21,&6%86(6$5(
6:,7&+('21

5()(572$33(1',;3)257%0$,5&5$)7

Figure F-3. Power/Config Module/OAT – GDC 74( )/GRS 77/GMU 44 Interconnect

Sheet 4 of 4

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-12 Rev. L
0(7$/$,5&5$)7
*'83)'0)' *56$+56
3 3
$5,1&,1$ $5,1&287$
$5,1&,1% $5,1&287%
V V
56,1 *3656287
56287 *3656,1
56*1' 6,*1$/*1'
V V
56287 *3656,1

56*1' 6,*1$/*1'
V V

1& $+566<67(0,'3*0
1& $+566<67(0,'3*0
1& 6,*1$/*5281'

*'& $'&
3

$5,1&,1$ $5,1&287$
$5,1&,1% $5,1&287%
V V
56,1 56287
56287 56,1
56*1' 56*1'
V V

1& $'&6<67(0,'3*0
1& $'&6<67(0,'3*0
1& 6,*1$/*5281'

1210(7$//,&$,5&5$)7
*'83)'0)' 3 3 *56$+56
$5,1&,1$ $5,1&287$
$5,1&,1% $5,1&287%
V V

56,1 *3656287
ȍò:
56287 *3656,1
5
56*1' 6,*1$/*1'
V V
56287 *3656,1

56*1' 6,*1$/*1'
V V

1& $+566<67(0,'3*0
1& $+566<67(0,'3*0
1& 6,*1$/*5281'

*'& $'&
3

$5,1&,1$ $5,1&287$
$5,1&,1% $5,1&287%
V V
56,1 56287
56287 56,1
56*1' 56*1'
V V

1& $'&6<67(0,'3*0
1& $'&6<67(0,'3*0
1& 6,*1$/*5281'

Figure F-4. Attitude and Air Data Interconnect (Single GDU)

Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-13
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
V
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
$7*'8*56$1'*'& &211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(
6+,(/'/($'60867%(/(667+$1
7+,6&211(&7,21,621/<5(48,5(',)*36,6&211(&7('727+(*'8
5()(5726(&7,21)253$57180%(565()(5726(&7,21)25,1)250$7,2121,167$//,1*
7+(5(6,6725

Figure F-4. Attitude and Air Data Interconnect (Single GDU)

Sheet 2 of 2

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-14 Rev. L
0(7$/$,5&5$)7 ZR$LU'DWD6ZLWFKLQJ

*'83)'0)' *56$+56
3 3
$5,1&,1$ $5,1&287$
$5,1&,1% $5,1&287%
V V
56,1 *3656287
56287 *3656,1
56*1' 6,*1$/*1'
V V
56287 *3656,1
56*1' 6,*1$/*1'
V V
$+566<67(0,'3*0
1& $+566<67(0,'3*0
6,*1$/*5281'

*'& $'&
3
$5,1&,1$ $5,1&287$
$5,1&,1% $5,1&287%
V V
56,1 56287
56287 56,1
56*1' 56*1'
V V
$'&6<67(0,'3*0
1& $'&6<67(0,'3*0
6,*1$/*5281'

*'83)'0)' *56$+56
3 3
$5,1&,1$ $5,1&287$
$5,1&,1% $5,1&287%
V V
56,1 *3656287
56287 *3656,1
56*1' 6,*1$/*1'
V V
56287 *3656,1
56*1' 6,*1$/*1'
V V
1& $+566<67(0,'3*0
$+566<67(0,'3*0
6,*1$/*5281'

*'& $'&
3
$5,1&,1$ $5,1&287$
$5,1&,1% $5,1&287%
V V

56,1 56287
56287 56,1
56*1' 56*1'
V V
1& $'&6<67(0,'3*0
$'&6<67(0,'3*0
6,*1$/*5281'

Figure F-5. Attitude and Air Data Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)
Sheet 1 of 4

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-15
0(7$/$,5&5$)7 ZLWK$LU'DWD6ZLWFKLQJ

*'83)'0)' *56$+56
3 3
$5,1&,1$ $5,1&287$
$5,1&,1% $5,1&287%
V V
56,1 *3656287
56287 *3656,1
56*1' 6,*1$/*1'
V V
56287 *3656,1
56*1' 6,*1$/*1'
V V
$+566<67(0,'3*0
1& $+566<67(0,'3*0
6,*1$/*5281'

3)'
$,5'$7$
$'& 3 *'& $'&
$5,1&287$
$5,1&,1$
$5,1&,1% $5,1&287%
V
V
$'& $'&6<67(0,'3*0
1& $'&6<67(0,'3*0
6,*1$/*5281'

56,1 56287
56287 56,1
56*1' 56*1'
V V

*'83)'0)' *56$+56
3 3
$5,1&,1$ $5,1&287$
$5,1&,1% $5,1&287%
V V
56,1 *3656287
56287 *3656,1
56*1' 6,*1$/*1'
V V
56287 *3656,1
56*1' 6,*1$/*1'
V V
1& $+566<67(0,'3*0
$+566<67(0,'3*0
6,*1$/*5281'

*'& $'&
3
$5,1&287$
$5,1&287%
V
$5,1&,1$ $5,1&287$
$5,1&,1% $5,1&287%
V V

56,1 56287
56287 56,1
56*1' 56*1'
V V
1& $'&6<67(0,'3*0
$'&6<67(0,'3*0
6,*1$/*5281'

Figure F-5. Attitude and Air Data Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)
Sheet 2 of 4

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-16 Rev. L
1210(7$//,&$,5&5$)7

*'83)'0)' 3 3 *56$+56

$5,1&,1$ $5,1&287$
$5,1&,1% $5,1&287%
V V

56,1 *3656287
ȍò:
56287 *3656,1
5
56*1' 6,*1$/*1'
V V

56287 *3656,1
56*1' 6,*1$/*1'
V V
$+566<67(0,'3*0
1& $+566<67(0,'3*0
6,*1$/*5281'

*'& $'&
3
$5,1&,1$ $5,1&287$
$5,1&,1% $5,1&287%
V V
56,1 56287
56287 56,1
56*1' 56*1'
V V
$'&6<67(0,'3*0
1& $'&6<67(0,'3*0
6,*1$/*5281'

*'83)'0)' *56$+56
3 3
$5,1&,1$ $5,1&287$
$5,1&,1% $5,1&287%
V V
56,1 *3656287
56287 *3656,1
56*1' 6,*1$/*1'
V V
56287 *3656,1
56*1' 6,*1$/*1'
V V
1& $+566<67(0,'3*0
$+566<67(0,'3*0
6,*1$/*5281'

*'& $'&
3
$5,1&,1$ $5,1&287$
$5,1&,1% $5,1&287%
V V

56,1 56287
56287 56,1
56*1' 56*1'
V V
1& $'&6<67(0,'3*0
$'&6<67(0,'3*0
6,*1$/*5281'

Figure F-5. Attitude and Air Data Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)
Sheet 3 of 4

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-17
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('

*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
V

$7*'8*56$1'*'& &211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(
6+,(/'/($'60867%(/(667+$1

5()(5726(&7,21)253$57180%(565()(5726(&7,21)25,1)250$7,2121
,167$//,1*7+(5(6,6725

6:,7&+0867%(02817('$'-$&(1772*'8

6:,7&+0867%(,//80,1$7('$1'/$%(/('$66+2:15()(5726(&7,21)2568,7$%/(
6:,7&+(6
3)'
$,5'$7$
$'& JUHHQ
$'& DPEHU

Figure F-5. Attitude and Air Data Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)
Sheet 4 of 4

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-18 Rev. L
*$50,1 *36

*36:
*'83)'0)' *1&: *36:
*16 *16: *16:
3 3 3 3 3
56,1 56287 0$30;
56*1' *1' *1' *5281'
V

7,0(0$5.,1$ 7,0(0$5.287
*36 7,0(0$5.,1%
7,0(0$5.287
V

$5,1&,1$ *36287$ *$0$

$5,1&,1% *36287% 12)3
V

$5,1&287$ *36,1$
*$50,1*'8
$5,1&287% *36,1%
V

*36
*$50,1

*36:
*1&: *36:
*16 *16: *16:
3 3 3 3
*36,1$
*$50,1*'8
*36,1%

56,1 56287 0$30;

V

7,0(0$5.,1$ 7,0(0$5.287
*36 7,0(0$5.,1% 7,0(0$5.287

V
*36287$ *$0$
$5,1&,1$
$5,1&,1% *36287% 12)3
V

127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
V
$7*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'60867%(/(66
7+$1&211(&727+(56+,(/'*5281'672$,5&5$)7*5281':,7+$66+257$&21'8&725$6
35$&7,&$/
,)21/<21(1$9,*$725,6,167$//(':,5($66+2:1)25*36
)25*'86(783,7(065()(5726(&7,21
)251$9,*$7256(783,7(065()(572$33(1',;(
7+(7,0(0$5.%&211(&7,21 3 ,61275(48,5(')257+(::6(5,(681,76$1'0867%(
/()781&211(&7(',17+(,167$//$7,21$6,1*/(&21'8&7256+,(/'(':,5(0$<%(86(')257+(7,0(
0$5.,17+,6&$6(
)253,16,'(17,),(':,7+³*1'´&211(&7:,5(72*5281'$77+(5($52)7+(81,7
,)$7$:6(48,33(':6(5,(681,7,6,167$//(',70867%(&211(&7('$6*36±21/<7$:6
$1181&,$7,216)520*36$5(',63/$<('217+(3)',)7:27$:6(48,33('81,76$5(,167$//('7+(
7$:6(48,33('81,77+$7,6&211(&7('727+($8',23$1(/0867%(&211(&7('$6*36
5()(5720$18)$&785(5¶6'2&80(17$7,21)25&203/(7(3,1287$1',17(5&211(&7,1)250$7,213,1
28762)27+(581,766+2:1)255()(5(1&(21/<
5()(5(1&(),*85(6)$1'),)$*71;;;;1$9,*$725,6,167$//('
'()$8/7$5,1&,138732576+2:1,7,65(&200(1'('7+$77+('()$8/7,1387%(87,/,=(':+(1(9(5

3266,%/(+2:(9(57+,6)81&7,210$<%(&21),*85('21$127+(5$9$,/$%/($5,1&,1387 ,13876
21/< 5()(5726(&7,21)25'(7$,/621+2:72&21),*85(7+($5,1&,13876

Figure F-6. GPS Source Interconnect 400W/500W/480 (Single GDU 620)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-19
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-20 Rev. L
*36
*$50,1


*36:
*1&: *36:
*'83)'0)' *16 *16: *16:
3 3 3 3 3
$5,1&287$ *36,1$ *$50,1*'8
$5,1&287% *36,1%
V
56,1 56287 0$30;
56*1' *1' *1' *5281'
V

7,0(0$5.,1$ 7,0(0$5.287
*36
7,0(0$5.,1% 7,0(0$5.287
V

$5,1&,1$ *36287$ *$0$

$5,1&,1% *36287% 12)3
V

56,1
V

7,0(0$5.,1$
*36
7,0(0$5.,1%
V

$5,1&,1$

$5,1&,1%
V

*'83)'0)' 3
56,1
56*1'
V
*36
7,0(0$5.,1$ *$50,1
*36
7,0(0$5.,1%
V
*36:
$5,1&,1$ *1&: *36:
$5,1&,1% *16 *16: *16:
V
3 3 3 3
56,1 56287 0$30;
V

7,0(0$5.,1$ 7,0(0$5.287
*36 7,0(0$5.287
7,0(0$5.,1%
V
$5,1&,1$ *36287$ *$0$

$5,1&,1% *36287% 12)3
V

$5,1&287$ *36,1$
*$50,1*'8
$5,1&287% *36,1%
V

Figure F-7. GPS Source Interconnect 400W/500W/480 (Dual GDU 620s)

Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-21
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
V
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
$7*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'60867%(/(667+$1&211(&727+(5
6+,(/'*5281'672$,5&5$)7*5281':,7+$66+257$&21'8&725$635$&7,&$/
)25,167$//$7,216:,7+'8$/*'8V7:268,7$%/(*366(16256$5(5(48,5('
)25*'86(783,7(065()(5726(&7,21
)251$9,*$7256(783,7(065()(572$33(1',;(
7+(7,0(0$5.%&211(&7,21 3 ,61275(48,5(')257+(::6(5,(681,76$1'0867%(/()781&211(&7(',1
7+(,167$//$7,21$6,1*/(&21'8&7256+,(/'(':,5(0$<%(86(')257+(7,0(0$5.,17+,6&$6(
)253,16,'(17,),(':,7+³*1'´&211(&7:,5(72*5281'$77+(5($52)7+(81,7
,)$7$:6(48,33(':6(5,(681,7,6,167$//(',70867%(&211(&7('$6*36±21/<7$:6$1181&,$7,216)520*36$5(
',63/$<('217+(3)',)7:27$:6(48,33('81,76$5(,167$//('7+(7$:6(48,33('81,77+$7,6&211(&7('727+($8',2
3$1(/0867%(&211(&7('$6*36
5()(5720$18)$&785(5¶6'2&80(17$7,21)25&203/(7(3,1287$1',17(5&211(&7,1)250$7,213,128762)27+(581,76
6+2:1)255()(5(1&(21/<
5()(5(1&(),*85(6)$1'),)$*71;;;;1$9,*$725,6,167$//('

'()$8/7$5,1&,138732576+2:1,7,65(&200(1'('7+$77+('()$8/7,1387%(87,/,=(':+(1(9(53266,%/(+2:(9(5
7+,6)81&7,210$<%(&21),*85('21$127+(5$9$,/$%/($5,1&,1387 ,1387621/< 5()(5726(&7,21)25'(7$,/6
21+2:72&21),*85(7+($5,1&,13876

Figure F-7. GPS Source Interconnect 400W/500W/480 (Dual GDU 620s)

Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-22
$5,1&
1$9 1$9
*$50,1

*'8 *1& *71 *71 *16 *16: *16:
3 3 3 3 3 3 3

$5,1&,1 $ 925,/6287$
1$9 925,/6287%
$5,1&,1 %
V

56
1$9251$9
*$50,1

6/
*'8 3LQ
3
1$9 56287 5;'
25 56,1 7;'
1$9 56*1' 6(5,$/*5281'
V

127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
$7*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'60867%(
/(667+$1&211(&727+(56+,(/'*5281'672$,5&5$)7*5281':,7+$66+257$
&21'8&725$635$&7,&$/,1$&&25'$1&(:,7+/58,167$//$7,21,16758&7,216
,)21/<21(1$95(&(,9(5,6,167$//(':,5($66+2:1)251$9
)25*'86(783,7(065()(5726(&7,21
)251$9,*$7256(783,7(065()(572$33(1',;(
21/<21(6/0$<%(&211(&7('727+(*'8,7&$1%(&21),*85('$61$925$61$9,)
1$9,6&21),*85(')25$1$5,1&1$96285&(
V
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
)25*1&25*711$9,*$7256&211(&76+,(/'726+,(/'%/2&.*5281'127$,5)5$0(*5281'
'()$8/7$5,1&,138732576+2:1,7,65(&200(1'('7+$77+('()$8/7,1387%(87,/,=('
:+(1(9(53266,%/(+2:(9(57+,6)81&7,210$<%(&21),*85('21$127+(5$9$,/$%/($5,1&
,1387 ,1387621/< 5()(5726(&7,21)25'(7$,/621+2:72&21),*85(7+(
$5,1&,13876

Figure F-8. Navigation Receiver Interconnect (Single GDU 620)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-23
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-24 Rev. L
$5,1&
1$9
*$50,1

3,/27¶6*'8 *1& *71 *71 *16 *16: *16:

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

$5,1&,1$ 925,/6287$
1$9 925,/6287%
$5,1&,1%
V


$5,1&,1$
1$9
$5,1&,1%
V

&23,/27¶6*'8
1$9
3 *$50,1

$5,1&,1$ *1& *71 *71 *16 *16: *16:
1$9
$5,1&,1% 3 3 3 3 3 3
V


$5,1&,1$ 925,/6287$
1$9 925,/6287%
$5,1&,1%
V

56
3,/27¶6*'8
3
1$9 56287
25 56,1
1$9 56*1' 1$9251$9
V
*$50,1

6/
&23,/27¶6*'8 3LQ
3
1$9 56287 1& 5;'
25 56,1 7;'
1$9 56*1' 6(5,$/*5281'
V

Figure F-9. Navigation Receiver Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)

Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-25
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('

*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
V

$7*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'60867%(
/(667+$1&211(&727+(56+,(/'*5281'672$,5&5$)7*5281':,7+$66+257$
&21'8&725$635$&7,&$/,1$&&25'$1&(:,7+/58,167$//$7,21,16758&7,216

,)21/<21(1$95(&(,9(5,6,167$//(':,5($66+2:1)251$9

21/<21(6/0$<%(&211(&7('727+(*'8,7&$1%(&21),*85('$61$925$61$9,)
1$9,6&21),*85(')25$1$5,1&1$96285&(

)25*'86(783,7(065()(5726(&7,21

7+(6/0867%(&211(&7('$67+(6$0(1$9,*$7,216285&(72%27+*'8V ,($61$921
%27+*'8V25$61$921%27+*'8V

)251$9,*$7256(783,7(065()(572$33(1',;(

)25*711$9,*$7256&211(&76+,(/'726+,(/'%/2&.*5281'127$,5)5$0(*5281'

'()$8/7$5,1&,138732576+2:1,7,65(&200(1'('7+$77+('()$8/7,1387%(87,/,=('
:+(1(9(53266,%/(+2:(9(57+,6)81&7,210$<%(&21),*85('21$127+(5$9$,/$%/($5,1&
,1387 ,1387621/< 5()(5726(&7,21)25'(7$,/621+2:72&21),*85(7+(
$5,1&,13876

&211(&7,21)5201$95$',2&$1%(0$'(72%27+*'8V2521/<&211(&7('7221(*'8 (,7+(5
3,/27¶625&23,/27¶6 $1'1$9,*$7,21,1)250$7,21&5266),//('727+(27+(5*'8',5(&7
&211(&7,2172($&+*'8,635()(55('&5266),//237,216+28/'21/<%(86(',)7+(5($5(
$1,168)),&,(17180%(52)*'8$5,1&,13876726833257$//$5,1&,17(5)$&(6,1$
3$57,&8/$5,167$//$7,21

Figure F-9. Navigation Receiver Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)

Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-26
$8723,/27
*$50,1 +21(<:(// %(1',;.,1* $8723,/27
*'8 .$3
.$3
.$3 .$3 .)& .)& .)&
.)&
.&
.& .& .& .& .&
.& .&3
3 3 3 3 3; 3; 3 3 3 3
3

$3+($',1*(5525+, ; ; + +'*'$780+,
$3+($',1*(5525/2 0 +'*'$780/2
V
$3&2856((5525+, : : : &56'$780+,
$3&2856((5525/2 06 &56'$780/2
V

/$7(5$/)/$*287 /$7'(9)/$*
/$7(5$/)/$*287 /$7'(9)/$*
V
/$7(5$//()7287 8 8 & /$7'(9/7
/$7(5$/5,*+7287 $ /$7'(957
V

9(57,&$/)/$*287 & *6'(9)/$*

9(57,&$/)/$*287 < ' *6'(9)/$*
V
9(57,&$/83287 9 0 *6'(983
9(57,&$/'2:1287 . *6'(9'2:1
V
*366(/(&7
',6&287 *366(/(&7 *1' *36
,/6*36$3352$&+
',6&287 % % $$ ,/6(1(5*,=( $3,1

$5,1&287$ $
*36,1
$5,1&287% %
V
+'*&56'$7809$/,'
Q F &203$669$/,'
',6&287Q

$5,1&,1[$ [ $
287
$5,1&,1[% [ %
V

$3$&5()+, + 9$&+=5()+,
$3$&5()/2 9$&+=5()/2
V

V
3:55()
+21(<:(// 9*5()
= =
%(1',;.,1*
.9*
3
72*$' 237,21$/
9$&+=5()+, (
9$&+=5()/2 %

Figure F-10. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Honeywell (Bendix/King)

Sheet 1 of 7

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-27
.)&$8723,/27
+21(<:(// %(1',;.,1* $8723,/27
*$50,1
*'8 .)& .)& .)& .)&

.0& .&3 .0& .&3

.&3 RU
.&3 RU
DQGEHORZ
.0& DQGDERYH DQGEHORZ
.0& DQGDERYH
3 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3

$3+($',1*(5525+, +'*'$780+,
$3+($',1*(5525/2 +'*'$780/2
V
$3&2856((5525+, &56'$780+,
$3&2856((5525/2 &56'$780/2
V
/$7(5$/)/$*287 1$99$/,'
/$7(5$/)/$*287 1$99$/,'
V
/$7(5$//()7287 /$7'(9/7
/$7(5$/5,*+7287 /$7'(957
V

9(57,&$/)/$*287 *6'(9)/$*
9(57,&$/)/$*287 *6'(9)/$*
V
9(57,&$/83287 *6'(983
9(57,&$/'2:1287 *6'(9'2:1
V
*366(/(&7

',6&287 *366(/(&7 *1' *36
,/6*36$3352$&+
',6&287 ,/6(1(5*,=( $3,1

$5,1&287$ $
$5,1&,1 (),6
$5,1&287% %
V
+'*&56'$7809$/,'
Q &203$669$/,'
',6&287Q
$5,1&,1[$ [ $
)/7&175/'$7$
$5,1&,1[% [ %
V

$3$&5()+, 9$&+=5()+,
$3$&5()/2 V


V

+21(<:(//
%(1',;.,1*
.9*
3
9$&+=5()+, (
9$&+=5()/2 %

Figure F-10. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Honeywell (Bendix/King)

Sheet 2 of 7

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-28
.)&$8723,/27
*$50,1 $8723,/27
+21(<:(//
*'8 %(1',;.,1*
.)&
$,5&5$)7+=$&
5()(5(1&(92/7$*( .&3
3 - -73 -%3

$3$&5()+, 9$&+=5()+,
$3$&5()/2 9$&+=5()/2
V
$3+($',1*(5525+, +'*'$780+,
$3+($',1*(5525/2 +'*'$780/2
V
$3&2856((5525+, &56'$7806,1
$3&2856((5525/2 &56'$7806,1
V
/$7(5$/)/$*287 /$7'(9)/$*
/$7(5$/)/$*287 /$7'(9)/$*
V
/$7(5$//()7287 /$7'(9/7
/$7(5$/5,*+7287 /$7'(957
V

9(57,&$/)/$*287 *6'(9)/$*
9(57,&$/)/$*287 *6'(9)/$*
V
9(57,&$/83287 *6'(983
9(57,&$/'2:1287 *6'(9'2:1
V
,/6*36$3352$&+
',6&287 ,/6(1(5*,=( $3,1
72*'8
&,5&8,7%5($.(5
&2856('$780&26
&2856('$780&26
0Ÿ 35()/77(676:,7&+
ó:$77

72.$&73$1'
3 .'&-5
$3%$&.&2856(
',6&287 1& 1&

%$&.&2856(
5(/$< 72*'8
12 12 &,5&8,7%5($.(5
$37(67

Figure F-10. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Honeywell (Bendix/King)

Sheet 3 of 7

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-29
.,$',
RQFRSLORW¶VVLGH 3

&0'%$55(75$&7 3
52//&0'%$5,1 0
3,7&+&0'%$5,1 /
237,21$/
&0'%$55() 1 +21(<:(// %(1',;.,1*
$8723,/27

.)& .)& .)& .)& .)&

*$50,1 .&3
Z;; .&3
*'8 .& .& .& $GDSWHU&DUG DQGEHORZ
3 3 3 3; 3; 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
)'(1$%/(,1 S S &0'%$55(75$&7

)'52//5,*+7 & (( (( 52//&0'%$5287

)'52///()7
V

)'3,7&+83 ( %% %% 3,7&+&0'%$5287
)'3,7&+'2:1 $ ) ) &0'%$55()
V

$8723,/2725,*,1$//<+$',167580(176

.&,$',
RQFRSLORW¶VVLGH 3

&0'%$55(75$&7 5
52//&0'%$5,1 7
3,7&+&0'%$5,1 3
237,21$/
&0'%$55() :

72$8723,/27
&,5&8,7%5($.(5
+21(<:(// %(1',;.,1* $8723,/27
.)& .)& .)&
)86($25/(66
*$50,1 .&3
Z;; .&3
*'8 $GDSWHU&DUG .&3 DQGEHORZ
3 .Ÿó:$77
3 3 - -73 -%3 3 3 3
)'(1$%/(,1 S &0'%$55(75$&7

)'52//5,*+7 (( 52//&0'%$5287
)'52///()7
V

)'3,7&+83 %% 3,7&+&0'%$5287
)'3,7&+'2:1 ) &0'%$55()
V

$8723,/2725,*,1$//<+$',167580(176
Figure F-10. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Honeywell (Bendix/King)
Sheet 4 of 7

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-30
)/,*+7',5(&725'8$/*'8,167$//$7,216
*$50,1
*'8 3
)'(1$%/(,1

)'52//5,*+7
)'52///()7
V

)'3,7&+83 +21(<:(// %(1',;.,1* $8723,/27

)'3,7&+'2:1
V .)& .)& .)& .)& .)&
.&3
Z;; .&3
*$50,1 .& .& .& $GDSWHU&DUG DQGEHORZ
*'8 3 3 3 3; 3; 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
V V
)'(1$%/(,1 S S &0'%$55(75$&7

)'52//5,*+7 & (( (( 52//&0'%$5287

)'52///()7
V

)'3,7&+83 ( %% %% 3,7&+&0'%$5287
)'3,7&+'2:1 $ ) ) &0'%$55()
V

$8723,/2725,*,1$//<+$',167580(176

*$50,1
*'8 3
)'(1$%/(,1

)'52//5,*+7
)'52///()7
V
72$8723,/27
)'3,7&+83 &,5&8,7%5($.(5 $8723,/27
)'3,7&+'2:1 +21(<:(// %(1',;.,1*
V
.)& .)& .)&
)86($25/(66 .&3
Z;; .&3
*$50,1 $GDSWHU&DUG .&3 DQGEHORZ
.Ÿó:$77
*'8 3 3 3 - -73 -%3 3 3 3
V V
)'(1$%/(,1 S &0'%$55(75$&7

)'52//5,*+7 (( 52//&0'%$5287
)'52///()7
V

)'3,7&+83 %% 3,7&+&0'%$5287
)'3,7&+'2:1 ) &0'%$55()
V
$8723,/2725,*,1$//<+$',167580(176

Figure F-10. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Honeywell (Bendix/King)

Sheet 5 of 7

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-31
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('

*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
V

$77+(*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'6
0867%(/(667+$1&211(&727+(56+,(/'*5281'672$,5&5$)7&+$66,6:,7+$66+257$
&21'8&725$635$&7,&$/

5()(5(1&(6(&7,21)25*'8$8723,/27&21),*85$7,21

&211(&7,216$5(5(48,5('21/<)257+26(,138767+$77+($8723,/27&20387(568332576

217+(.)&&211(&7%27+7+($3+($',1*(5525/2$1'$3&2856((5525/2723,1021
7+(.)&&211(&77+($3+($',1*(5525/2723,10$1'7+($3&2856((5525/2723,16

$3$&5()(5(1&(&211(&7,216727+(*'8$5(1(('('21/<,)7+($8723,/275(48,5(67+(
$&5()(5(1&(

)25'8$/*'86<67(06&211(&77+()'6,*1$/672*'8$66+2:1$//27+(5$8723,/27
6,*1$/66+28/'%(&211(&7('21/<72*'8

1(:**,167$//$7,216086786(7+(+'*&569$/,' ',6&5(7(287387)5207+(*'8
)25(;,67,1***,167$//$7,216,7,6$&&(37$%/(72*5281'7+(&203$669$/,'',6&5(7(
,1387:+(17+(*'8,6,167$//('7+($8723,/2786(67+,6,138772'(7(50,1(7+(9$/,',7<
2)7+(+($',1*$1'&2856('$780 (5525 6,*1$/65()(572$33(1',;()25$'',7,21$/
,1)250$7,21

12786('

(),6(1$%/('.&;&20387(5 31 ,61276833257('

)/,*+7',5(&725:,5,1*72(;,67,1*$',0867%(',6&211(&7(',)7+,6,1',&$725,686('$6$
67$1'%<,167580(17)257+(*'8,)7+,6,1',&$725,6%(,1*5(/2&$7('727+(&23,/27¶6
6,'(:,5,1*0$<%(&211(&7(',13$5$//(/727+,6$',7+(:,5,1*727+,6$',0867%(
&211(&7(',1$&&25'$1&(:,7+7+(0$18)$&785(5¶6,16758&7,2167+,6$',0867%(/2&$7('
21,1$&&25'$1&(:,7+6(&7,21

$&5()(5(1&($33/,&$%/(727+(.)&21/< :,7+.&387,/,=,1*;;$'$37(5&$5'
)25,167580(176

,)7+()/,*+7',5(&725,6%(,1*',63/$<('217+(&23,/27¶6$',7+,6)/,*+7',5(&725$/,*10(17
0867%(&255(&7/<$'-867(',1$&&25'$1&(:,7+7+(0$18)$&785(5¶6,16758&7,21635,2572
0$.,1*$1<$'-8670(176727+(*'8

)25'8$/*'8,167$//$7,216)/,*+7',5(&725:,5,1*0867%(',6&211(&7(')5207+((;,67,1*
$',

*'8)'(1$%/(,13870867%(38//('83727+(6$0(&,5&8,7%5($.(5$67+($8723,/27
&20387(5,125'(572(1685(7+$77+(&200$1'%$56$5(5(029(':+(17+($8723,/27
&20387(5,612732:(5('83

,)7+(.&,$',,6&211(&7(',13$5$//(/727+(*'87+(38//835(6,6725,6127
5(48,5('

,)7+(5$7,1*2)7+($8723,/27&,5&8,7%5($.(5,6*5($7(57+$1$$1,1/,1(:,//%(
5(48,5('723527(&77+(:,5,1*727+(*'87+()86(0867%(,167$//('$77+(32,177+$7
32:(5,63,&.('2)))257+(38//835(6,6725,)7+(5$7,1*2)7+($8723,/27&,5&8,7
%5($.(5,6$25/(6612)86(,65(48,5('

,)7+(*$',686('725(3/$&(7+($',$1'7+(:,5,1*727+((;,67,1*$',,65(029('(1685(
7+$7*5281'5()(5(1&(3,165(0$,1-803(5('$66+2:1

Figure F-10. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Honeywell (Bendix/King)

Sheet 6 of 7

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-32 Rev. L
,)7+(*$',686('725(3/$&(7+(.9*7+(9$&5()(5(1&(:,//%(3529,'('%<7+(
*$'5()(572),*85())25$'',7,21$/,1)250$7,21

,)7+(02'(&21752/3$1(/'2(612768332577+(1$9)/$*7+(6(2873876)5207+(*'8
0$<%(/()781&211(&7('

'()$8/72873873,16+2:1,7,65(&200(1'('7+$77+('()$8/7287387%(87,/,=('
:+(1(9(53266,%/(+2:(9(57+,6)81&7,210$<%(&21),*85('21$127+(5$9$,/$%/(
',6&5(7(2873875()(5726(&7,21&)25'(7$,/621+2:72&21),*85(7+(',6&5(7(
2873876

7+(.&,,1',&$725&217$,16$7(67%877217+$7,686('72,1,7,$7(7+(.)&6(/)7(67,)
7+(.&,,1',&$725,65(029('$1(;7(51$/020(17$5<6:,7&+0867%(,167$//('72
5(3/$&(7+()81&7,212)7+(.&,7(676:,7&+7+(6:,7&+6+28/'%(/$%(/('³$37(67´

7+($5,1&'$7$,686(')257+(9$/,')/$*6

7+(5(,612'()$8/7&21),*85$7,21)257+,6',6&5(7(287387$18186('',6&5(7(287387
0867%($66,*1('727+,6)81&7,215()(5726(&7,21&)25'(7$,/621+2:72&21),*85(
7+(',6&5(7(2873876

7+(5(,612'()$8/7&21),*85$7,21)257+,6$5,1&,1387$18186('$5,1&,1387
,1387621/< 0867%($66,*1('727+,6)81&7,215()(5726(&7,21)25'(7$,/621
+2:72&21),*85(7+($5,1&,13876

7+(.)&$1'$%29(86($5,1&)257+()/,*+7',5(&725$1''21275(48,5(
$1$/2*)/,*+7',5(&725&211(&7,216

5()(5726(&7,21)25$5,1&2873876(77,1*6

$'',7,21$/,17(5)$&(672+21(<:(// %(1',;.,1* $8723,/27686,1*7+(*$'H$5(6+2:1

,1),*85()

27+(5$8723,/27,1387686(7+(9$&5()(5(1&()257+($1$/2*$77,78'()5207+(
*$'H5()(572),*85()

Figure F-10. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Honeywell (Bendix/King)

Sheet 7 of 7

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-33
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-34 Rev. L
$8723,/27

67(& $8723,/27
*$50,1 67(& 67(&
67(& 67(& 67(&
*'8 67(& 67(&; 366

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5)*& 3)*& 3 3 3 3
$3+($',1*(5525+, +'*'$780+,

$3+($',1*(5525/2 +'*'$780/2
V

$3&2856((5525+, &56'$780+,

$3&2856((5525/2 &56'$780/2
V
/$7(5$/)/$*287 /$7'(9)/$*
/$7(5$/)/$*287 /$7'(9)/$*
V
/$7(5$//()7287 /$7'(9/7
/$7(5$/5,*+7287 /$7'(957
V

9(57,&$/)/$*287 *6'(9)/$*
9(57,&$/)/$*287 *6'(9)/$*
V
9(57,&$/83287 *6'(983
9(57,&$/'2:1287 *6'(9'2:1
V
*36$1181&,$7(
',6&287 *36667((5,1*

*366(/(&7

',6&287 *3675$&.*$,1

,/6*36$3352$&+
',6&287 /2&6:,7&+

$5,1&287$ $
*366'$7$,1
$5,1&287% %
V
56$ $ $/76(/%$52$/7
56% %
56
V
1& $/76(/-803(5

1& *5281'
1& '**5281'675$3

1& *5281'

1& 12+($',1*6<67(0$

1& 12+($',1*6<67(0%

Figure F-11. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – S-TEC

Sheet 1 of 6

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-35
$5,1&±67(&
$8723,/27
67(&
*$50,1
*'8 67(&

3
3
$5,1&287$ $'$+56 $5,1&5;$
$5,1&287% $'$+56 $5,1&5;%
V
3,/27¶63)' $5,1&5;$
3,/27¶63)' $5,1&5;%
*$50,1
*'8
3
$5,1&287$ $'$+56 $5,1&5;$
$5,1&287% $'$+56 $5,1&5;%
V

)/,*+7',5(&725±67(&
*$50,1
*'8 3
)'(1$%/(,1

)'52//5,*+7
)'52///()7
V

)'3,7&+83
)'3,7&+'2:1 $8723,/27
V
67(&
67(&

*$50,1 3 3
*'8 3
V V
)'(1$%/(,1 )')/$*

)'52//5,*+7 5675287
)'52///()7 95()
V

)'3,7&+83 3675287
)'3,7&+'2:1
V

Figure F-11. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – S-TEC

Sheet 2 of 6

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-36 Rev. L
)/,*+7',5(&725±6,1*/(*'8,167$//$7,216
$',
RQFRSLORW¶VVLGH

67(& $8723,/27
*$50,1 67(& 67(&;
*'8 3 3 3 3 3
)'(1$%/(,1 )'/2*,&287

)'52//5,*+7 52//67((5,1*6,*
)'52///()7 6,*5()
V
)'3,7&+83 3,7&+67((5,1*6,*
)'3,7&+'2:1 6,*5()
V

1& 9'&3$5$//$;327
1& 3,7&+675&(17(5,1*
1& )'327*5281'

67(& $8723,/27
67(&
5)*& 3)*& 237,21
1& 9'&3$5$//$;327
1& 3,7&+675&(17(5,1*
1& )'327*5281'

67(& 67((5,1*+25,=21
*$50,1 ,17(5)$&(
*'8 67
31
3 3
)'(1$%/(,1 )'(1*$*(

)'52//5,*+7 52//&0'
)'52///()7
V

)'3,7&+83 3,7&+&0'
)'3,7&+'2:1
V

Figure F-11. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – S-TEC

Sheet 3 of 6

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-37
)/,*+7',5(&725±'8$/*'8,167$//$7,216

*$50,1
*'8 3
)'(1$%/(,1

)'52//5,*+7
)'52///()7
V

)'3,7&+83 67(& $8723,/27

)'3,7&+'2:1
V 67(& 67(&;
3 3 3 3
1& 9'&3$5$//$;327
*$50,1 1& 3,7&+675&(17(5,1*
*'8 1& )'327*5281'
3
V V
)'(1$%/(,1 )'/2*,&

)'52//5,*+7 52//)'67((5,1*
)'52///()7 6,*5() 52//)'
V

)'3,7&+83 3,7&+)'67((5,1*
)'3,7&+'2:1 6,*5() 3,7&+)'
V

*$50,1
*'8 3 67(& $8723,/27
67(&
)'(1$%/(,1
5)*& 3)*& 237,21
)'52//5,*+7 9'&3$5$//$;327
1&
)'52///()7 1& 3,7&+675&(17(5,1*
V )'327*5281'
1&
)'3,7&+83
)'3,7&+'2:1
V

67(& 67((5,1*+25,=21
,17(5)$&(
*$50,1 67

*'8 3 3
V V
)'(1$%/(,1 )'(1*$*(

)'52//5,*+7 52//&0'
)'52///()7
V

)'3,7&+83 3,7&+&0'
)'3,7&+'2:1
V

Figure F-11. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – S-TEC

Sheet 4 of 6

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-38 Rev. L
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('

V
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'

$77+(*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'6
0867%(/(667+$1&211(&727+(56+,(/'*5281'672$,5&5$)7*5281':,7+$66+257$
&21'8&725$635$&7,&$/

5()(5(1&(6(&7,216$1')25*'8$8723,/27$1')/,*+7',5(&725&21),*85$7,21

&211(&7,216$5(5(48,5('21/<)257+26(,138767+$77+($8723,/27&20387(568332576

$/76(/-803(56+28/'127%(,167$//(',)7+(*'8,63529,',1*7+($/7,78'(35(6(/(&7
)81&7,21:+(17+(*'8,686(')257+($/7,78'(35(6(/(&7)81&7,21,7(08/$7(67+(6
7(&6$ 31 $/7,78'(6(/(&725$/(57(5

)25'8$/*'86<67(06&211(&77+()'6,*1$/6727+(6$0(3,1621*'8$6:(//$//
27+(5$8723,/276,*1$/66+28/'%(&211(&7('21/<72*'8

7+(67 31)257+(., ,65(48,5('7268332577+()/,*+7',5(&725',63/$<)520

7+(67(&$1'$8723,/276

)/,*+7',5(&725:,5,1*72(;,67,1*$',0867%(',6&211(&7(',)7+,6,1',&$725,686('$6$
67$1'%<,167580(17)257+(*'8

)'/2*,&287387)5207+(; 3 0867127%(&211(&7('72675(027($1181&,$725

3 ,)7+(67:$635(9,286/<,167$//('7+(:,5(&211(&7,1*7+(;&20387(53
72$1181&,$72530867%(5(029('25&$33('$1'672:('

7268332577+()/,*+7',5(&725,17(5)$&(:,7+7+(*'87+(3,/27$&&(66,%/(3$5$//$;
327&211(&7,2160867%(5(029(' 6,1&(7+(*'8)/,*+7',5(&72535(6(17$7,21,621$1
/&'',63/$<7+(5($5(123$5$//$;,668(6

12786('

7+($8723,/27³*3675$&.*$,1´,13870$<%(&211(&7('727+(*'8³*36$1181&,$7(´
287387 3 ,167($'2)7+(³*366(/(&7´287387 3

,)7+(*'8,65(3/$&,1*$',5(&7,21$/*<52(1685(7+$77+(³'**5281'675$3´-803(5,6
5(029('

,)7+(*'8,6%(,1*,167$//(',1$1$,5&5$)77+$7+$'12+($',1*6<67(0(1685(7+$77+(
³12+($',1*6<67(0´-803(5,65(029('

&211(&727+(53,167+$7$5(1276+2:1,1$&&25'$1&(:,7+7+(0$18)$&785(5¶6
,16758&7,216

7+()/,*+7',5(&725&$1127%(',63/$<('21$1$',217+(&23,/27¶66,'(%(&$86(7+(5(,612
:$<72$'-8677+()/,*+7',5(&7252))6(7)257+,6$',$)7(57+(3$5$//$;327,65(029('

&211(&7,216727+(366$5(21/<217+(3*)&&211(&7257+(5*)&&211(&725,6127
86('

'()$8/72873873,16+2:1,7,65(&200(1'('7+$77+('()$8/7287387%(87,/,=('
:+(1(9(53266,%/(+2:(9(57+,6)81&7,210$<%(&21),*85('21$127+(5$9$,/$%/(
',6&5(7(2873875()(5726(&7,21&)25'(7$,/621+2:72&21),*85(7+(',6&5(7(
2873876

7+(5632570867%(&211(&7('72*'8,1'8$/*'8,167$//$7,216

,17(5)$&(727+(67(&,621/<6833257(')25'8$/*'8,167$//$7,216

6((6+((7)2567(&,17(5&211(&76

Figure F-11. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – S-TEC

Sheet 5 of 6

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-39
81,76:,//127+$9($&211(&7,210$'(72+'*(5525/2)5207+(*'8
81,76:,//+$9($&211(&7,210$'(72+'*(5525/2)5207+(*'8

$5,1&287387)250$70867%(6(772³')&65()(5(1&(6(&7,21)25025(
,1)250$7,21

)25$//9$5,$1762)7+($8723,/276125()(5(1&(6,*1$/6+$//%(&211(&7(')25
7+(+'*'$780,17(5)$&($1'12$1$/2*&56'$780,17(5)$&(6+$//%(&211(&7('7+(
&2856('$780,63529,'('9,$$5,1&

5()(5726(&7,21)25$5,1&2873876(77,1*6

56:,5,1*,621/<5(48,5(':+(186,1*7+(*'8)25$/7,78'(35(6(/(&7,7,6127
5(48,5(',)86,1*7+(*$'H)25$/79635(6(/(&7

Figure F-11. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – S-TEC

Sheet 6 of 6

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-40 Rev. L
$8723,/27
$8723,/27
&(1785<
&HQWXU\ &HQWXU\ &HQWXU\ &HQWXU\ &HQWXU\ &HQWXU\
,, ,,, ,9
*$50,1 &' &' &' &' &' &' &' &' &' &' &'
*'8 3
$3+($',1*(5525+,
+($',1*'$780+,
$3+($',1*(5525/2 +($',1*'$780/2
V
$3&2856((5525+, &2856('$780+,

$3&2856((5525/2 &2856('$780/2
V

/$7(5$/)/$*287 /$7'(9)/$*
/$7(5$/)/$*287 /$7'(9)/$*
V

/$7(5$//()7287 % % /$7'(9/7
/$7(5$/5,*+7287 $ $ /$7'(957
V

9(57,&$/)/$*287 *6'(9)/$*
9(57,&$/)/$*287 *6'(9)/$*
V

9(57,&$/83287 % *6'(983
9(57,&$/'2:1287 $ *6'(9'2:1
V
,/6*36$3352$&+ /2&6:,7&+
',6&287
$3$&5()+, N+](;&,7$7,21

$3$&5()/2 N+](;&,7$7,21
V

$/7,78'(&$3785(
(1%
(1%

Figure F-12. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Century

Sheet 1 of 7

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-41
5$',2&283/(56
5$',2&283/(5
&(1785<
72&2162/($03/,),(5 & &&
*$50,1 $57,),&,$/+25,=21 &0 &0&
*'8 (;,67,1*:,5,1*5(7$,1(' &' &'
3 &'72'*
72$03 72'*

$3$&5()+, & ' 52//(;&,7$7,21

NŸ

7 ) ( 52//(;&,7$7,21

NN

$ $ +($',1*6,*1$/

$3+($',1*(5525+, NŸ
$3+($',1*(5525/2 1&
7 % % 52//&20021
$3&2856((5525+, 1& P+ —)
NN
$3&2856((5525/2 1& ' '*(;&,7$7,21
( '*(;&,7$7,21

5$',2&283/(5
&(1785<

& &
*$50,1 &' &'
&'72'*
*'8 3 72$03 72'*

$3$&5()+, ' ( 52//(;&,7$7,21

NŸ

( ' 52//(;&,7$7,21
7
NN

$ $ +($',1*6,*1$/

$3+($',1*(5525+, NŸ
$3+($',1*(5525/2 1&
% ) 52//&20021
7
NN

% % &2856(6,*1$/

$3&2856((5525+, NŸ
$3&2856((5525/2 1&
% & 52//&20021
7
NN

Figure F-12. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Century

Sheet 2 of 7

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-42
)/,*+7',5(&725±'8$/*'8,167$//$7,21

*$50,1
*'8
3

)'(1$%/(,1 1&
)'52//5,*+7
)'52///()7
V

)'3,7&+83
)'3,7&+'2:1
V

*$50,1 &(1785< $8723,/27

*'8
,9
3
V V
&' &' &'
)'(1$%/(,1 1&
)'52//5,*+7 52//67((5,1*
)'52///()7 52//&20021
V

)'3,7&+83 $:* $:* 3,7&+67((5,1*

)'3,7&+'2:1 $:* $:* 67((5,1*&20021

V

Figure F-12. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Century

Sheet 3 of 7

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-43
)/,*+7',5(&7256,1*/(*'8:,7+$',
$', &$',
&
RSWLRQDOLQVWDOORQFRSLORW¶V
VLGH
&' &'
52//67((5,1* +
52//&20021 (

3,7&+67((5,1* - $:*

67((5,1*&20021 ) $:*

*$50,1 &(1785< $8723,/27

*'8
3 ,9
&' &' &'
)'(1$%/(,1 1&
)'52//5,*+7 52//67((5,1*

)'52///()7 52//&20021
V

)'3,7&+83 $:* $:* 3,7&+67((5,1*

$:*
)'3,7&+'2:1 $:* $:* 67((5,1*&20021
V

Figure F-12. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Century

Sheet 4 of 7

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-44
)/,*+7',5(&7256,1*/(*'8:,7+287$',

*$50,1 &(1785< $8723,/27

*'8
,9
3
&' &' &'
)'(1$%/(,1 1&
)'52//5,*+7 52//67((5,1*
)'52///()7 52//&20021
V

)'3,7&+83 $:* $:* 3,7&+67((5,1*

)'3,7&+'2:1 $:* $:* 67((5,1*&20021

V

Figure F-12. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Century

Sheet 5 of 7

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-45
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
V
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'

$77+(*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'6
0867%(/(667+$1&211(&727+(56+,(/'*5281'672$,5&5$)7*5281':,7+$66+257$
&21'8&725$635$&7,&$/

5()(5(1&(6(&7,21)25*'8$8723,/27&21),*85$7,21

&211(&7,216$5(5(48,5('21/<)257+26(,138767+$77+($8723,/27&20387(568332576

)25'8$/*'8,167$//$7,216&211(&772*'821/<7+(6(3,16$5(127&211(&7('
21*'8

6((6(3$5$7('5$:,1*)255$',2&283/(5:,5,1*

63/,&(%27+:,5(672*(7+(5,1723,1%2)&'72$03

86(0,/77<3(7)6==75$16)250(575,$'0$*1(7,&6316325(48,9$/(1775,$'317<
375$16)250(50$<$/62%(86('%87,61275(&200(1'(')251(:*'8,167$//$7,216

7+(&(1785<,95(48,5(6$1,62/$7,21',2'(72%(,167$//('217+(/2&$/,=(56:,7&+,1*,1387
$66+2:1

$8723,/27
*$50,1 &(1785<
*'8 &'
3 3
,/6*36$3352$&+
',6&287 /2&6:,7&+
125
(48,9

5(029((;,67,1*)/,*+7',5(&725:,5,1*)520$77,78'(,1',&$725$1'672:1($57+(3,/27¶6
*'83

7+(N+](;&,7$7,216,*1$/,61(('('21/<)25$&$8723,/276

)25&(1785<$8723,/2767+$7'2127+$9(7+($/7,78'(35(6(/(&725,167$//('5287(
3529,6,21$/:,5(6)520&'$1'672:1($5321%$&.2)7+(3,/27¶6*'8

'()$8/72873873,16+2:1,7,65(&200(1'('7+$77+('()$8/7287387%(87,/,=('
:+(1(9(53266,%/(+2:(9(57+,6)81&7,210$<%(&21),*85('21$127+(5$9$,/$%/(
',6&5(7(2873875()(5726(&7,21&)25'(7$,/621+2:72&21),*85(7+(',6&5(7(
2873876

(1685($1<-803(56$7&'3,16$1'$5(5(029('72&21),*85(&20387(5)25
16'$

)25'8$/*'86<67(06&211(&77+()'6,*1$/672*'8$66+2:1$//27+(5$8723,/27
6,*1$/66+28/'%(&211(&7('21/<72*'821/<21(252+05(6,67256+$//%(
,167$//('5(*$5'/(662)6,1*/(25'8$/,167$//$7,21

)/,*+7',5(&725:,5,1*72(;,67,1*$',0867%(',6&211(&7(',)7+,6,1',&$725,686('$6$
67$1'%<,167580(17)257+(*'8,)7+,6,1',&$725,6%(,1*5(/2&$7('727+(&23,/27¶6
6,'(:,5,1*0$<%(&211(&7(',13$5$//(/727+,6$',7+(:,5,1*727+,6$',0867%(
&211(&7(',1$&&25'$1&(:,7+7+(0$18)$&785(5¶6,16758&7,2167+,6$',0867%(/2&$7('
,1$&&25'$1&(:,7+6(&7,21

Figure F-12. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Century

Sheet 6 of 7

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-46 Rev. L
86(5(6,6725315(* 255(1 3(50,/35) &+$66,60281732:(55(6,6725
0((7,1*7+()2//2:,1*63(&,),&$7,216
2+0)25&(1785<,9$1'9'&6<67(06:,7+&(1785<$1'25$2+0
)259'&6<67(0686,1*7+(&(1785<25$8723,/276
0,1,08032:(55$7,1*2):$776
0$;,08072/(5$1&(2)
/2&$7(5(6,6725210(7$//,&6(&21'$5<6758&785(:,7+,1,167580(173$1(/$5($1($5*'8

,)7+(&$',,6&211(&7(':,7+7+(*'87+(252+05(6,67250867127
%(,167$//('
,)7+()/,*+7',5(&725,6%(,1*',63/$<('217+(&23,/27¶6$',7+,6)/,*+7',5(&725$/,*10(17
0867%(&255(&7/<$'-867(',1$&&25'$1&(:,7+7+(0$18)$&785(5¶6,16758&7,21635,2572
0$.,1*$1<$'-8670(176727+(*'8

21/<&211(&7(')25&(1785<,9)/,*+7',5(&725

21/<&211(&7(')25&(1785<$1'&(1785<)/,*+7',5(&7256

Figure F-12. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Century

Sheet 7 of 7

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-47
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-48 Rev. L
$8723,/27
*'83)'0)'RU $8723,/27
&2//,16
*'83)'0)' &20387(5
$3 $3&%&(
$3&$* )+-
+ .$ )*& )<'
- - - - - - - - -
3
$3+($',1*(5525+, +'*(5525+,
$3+($',1*(5525/2 +'*(5525/2
V

$3&2856((5525+, &56'$780+,
$3&2856((5525/2 &56'$780/2
V
/$7(5$//()7287 /$7'(9/7
/$7(5$/5,*+7287 /$7'(957
V
9(57,&$/83287 *6'(983
9(57,&$/'2:1287 *6'(9'1

/$7(5$/)/$*287 1$9//)/$*
/$7(5$/)/$*287 1$9//)/$*
V
9(57,&$/)/$*287 *6+/)/$*
9(57,&$/)/$*287 *6+/)/$*
V

/$7(5$/683(5)/$*287 1$9//)/$*
1& 1$9//)/$*

9(57,&$/683(5)/$*287 *6+/)/$*
1& *6+/)/$*

,/6*36$3352$&+ /2&)5(4*1'
',6&287

9$&+=5(),
$3$&5()+, 9$&+=5(),,
$3$&5()/2 9$&,1/2
V

$,5&5$)7+=$&
5()(5(1&(92/7$*(

Figure F-13. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Collins

Sheet 1 of 4

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-49
$',$ )/,*+7',5(&725±6,1*/(*'8,167$//$7,216
RQFRSLORW¶VVLGH 237,21$/
,19,(:%,$6 %% )/,*+7
&2//,16 &21752/3$1(/
52//67557 X
)&3$
52//675&20 W
-
3,7&+675'1 Z ,19,(:%,$6
3,7&+675&20 Y

&2//,16$36
$8723,/27
*$50,1 &20387(5
*'8 $3&%&(
3 $3&$* )+-
)*& )<'
)'(1$%/(,1
- - - - - -
)'52//5,*+7 52//67((557
)'52///()7 52//67((5/7
V
)'3,7&+'2:1 3,7&+67((5'1
)'3,7&+83 3,7&+67((583
V

$',
RQFRSLORW¶VVLGH &2//,16
)'&9

3

2))02'( =
237,21$/
52//&0'5,*+7 8
52//&0'/()7 7
9'&
3,7&+&0'83 )
3,7&+&0''2:1 N $8723,/27
&2//,16$3

*$50,1 1& + .$

*'8 - - -
3
2872)9,(:
)'(1$%/(,1 2872)9,(:
5(/$<
)'52//5,*+7 52//67((557
)'52///()7 6,*&20 .
V

)'3,7&+'2:1 6,*&20 .

)'3,7&+83 3,7&+67((5'1
V

Figure F-13. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Collins

Sheet 2 of 4

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-50
*$50,1 )/,*+7',5(&725'8$/*'8,167$//$7,216
*'8 3
)'(1$%/(,1 )/,*+7
&2//,16 &21752/3$1(/
)'52//5,*+7 )&3$

)'52///()7
V -
)'3,7&+'2:1 ,19,(:%,$6
)'3,7&+83
V

&2//,16$36
$8723,/27
*$50,1 &20387(5
*'8 $3&%&(
3 $3&$* )+-
V V )*& )<'
)'(1$%/(,1
- - - - - -
)'52//5,*+7 52//67((557
)'52///()7 52//67((5/7
V
)'3,7&+'2:1 3,7&+67((5'1
)'3,7&+83 3,7&+67((583
V

*$50,1
*'8
3

)'(1$%/(,1

)'52//5,*+7
)'52///()7
V
9'&
)'3,7&+'2:1
)'3,7&+83 $8723,/27
V
&2//,16$3

*$50,1 1& + .$

*'8 - - -
3
2872)9,(:
)'(1$%/(,1 2872)9,(:
5(/$<
)'52//5,*+7 52//67((557
)'52///()7 6,*&20 .
V

)'3,7&+'2:1 6,*&20 .
)'3,7&+83 3,7&+67((5'1
V

Figure F-13. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Collins

Sheet 3 of 4

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-51
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
V

$77+(*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'60867%(/(667+$1&211(&727+(56+,(/'
*5281'672$,5&5$)7*5281':,7+$66+257$&21'8&725$635$&7,&$/
5()(5(1&(6(&7,21)25*'8$8723,/27&21),*85$7,21
&211(&7,216$5(5(48,5('21/<)257+26(,138767+$77+($8723,/27&20387(568332576
7+(25,*,1$/0&6+($',1*<$:5$7(6<67(008675(0$,1,17+($,5&5$)7,125'(5723529,'(7+(<$:5$7($1'&203$66021,725,13876
727+($8723,/27,)$<56<$:5$7(6(1625,6,167$//(',70$<%(5(3/$&('%<7+(*$'H$66+2:1,1),*85()
)25'8$/*'86<67(06&211(&77+()'6,*1$/672*'8$66+2:1$//27+(5$8723,/276,*1$/66+28/'%(&211(&7('21/<72*'8
&211(&7/$7'(9)/$*6)520+72.$)25.$6<67(0621/<
6((675$33,1*,1)250$7,21,1,167$//$7,21%22.3$*( 5(9,6('-81(.$675$33,1*237,216 $1'3$*( 5(9,6('
0$5&++675$33,1*237,216 675$3)251(*$7,9(/2*,&/2&$/,=(5)5(48(1&<6,*1$/,1387$/7(51$7,9(/<&211(&7$5(/$<72
,19(577+(6,*1$/)5207+(*'8)25$&7,9(+,*+287387
,7,61(&(66$5<72,167$//$5(/$<72,19(577+(32/$5,7<2)7+(³2872)9,(:´6,*1$/)520$&7,9(/2:72$&7,9(+,*+)25,1387,1727+(

*'886(0025025(48,9$/(175(/$<&2,/0867127'5$:025(7+$1P$

,)7+(237,21$/&23,/27¶6$',,6,167$//('7+(³2))02'(´6,*1$/0867%(',6&211(&7(')5207+($8723,/27 - $1',62/$7('86,1*$
5(/$<$66+2:1

)/,*+7',5(&725:,5,1*72(;,67,1*$',0867%(',6&211(&7(',)7+,6,1',&$725,686('$6$67$1'%<,167580(17)257+(*'8±7+(
',63/$<2)7+()/,*+7',5(&7250867%(',6$%/(',17+,6&$6(,)7+,6,1',&$725,6%(,1*5(/2&$7('727+(&23,/27¶66,'(:,5,1*0$<%(
&211(&7(',13$5$//(/727+,6$',$1'7+()/,*+7',5(&7250$<%((1$%/('7+(:,5,1*727+,6$',0867%(&211(&7(',1$&&25'$1&(:,7+
7+(0$18)$&785(5¶6,16758&7,2167+,6$',0867%(/2&$7(',1$&&25'$1&(:,7+6(&7,21

)25'8$/*'8,167$//$7,216)/,*+7',5(&725:,5,1*0867%(',6&211(&7(')5207+((;,67,1*$',

&211(&7(,7+(57+(/2:/(9(/)/$*6257+(683(5)/$*6'2127&211(&7%27+6(762))/$*6,1$3$57,&8/$5,167$//$7,21
'()$8/72873873,16+2:1,7,65(&200(1'('7+$77+('()$8/7287387%(87,/,=(':+(1(9(53266,%/(+2:(9(57+,6)81&7,210$<%(
&21),*85('21$127+(5$9$,/$%/(',6&5(7(2873875()(5726(&7,21&)25'(7$,/621+2:72&21),*85(7+(',6&5(7(2873876
',2'(72%(31125(48,9$/(17

Figure F-13. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Collins

Sheet 4 of 4

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-52
02'(
*$50,1 &(661$
&21752//(5
*'8 3 ,)&6 ,)&6 ,)&6 ,)&6
$8723,/27 6$ 6$ 6$ &$$ &20387(5$03
-3 -3 -3 3. 3. 3.
$3+($',1*(5525+, ( ( ( +'*(5525+,
$3+($',1*(5525/2 & & & +'*(5525/2
V
+'*(5525+,

+'*(5525/2

$3&2856((5525+, 9 9 9 1$9&56'$780+,
$3&2856((5525/2 N N N 1$9&56'$780/2
V
E E E 1$9&56'$780+,

P P P 1$9&56'$780/2
7
NN
/$7(5$//()7287 7 7 7 1$9/
/$7(5$/5,*+7287 8 8 8 1$95
V
= = = 1$9/

D D D 1$95

9(57,&$/83287 1 1 1 1$9*683
9(57,&$/'2:1287 3 3 3 1$9*6'1
V

G G G 1$9*683

I I I 1$9*6'1
$8723,/279'& 5 5 5 1$9925/2&5<
; ; ; 1$9925/2&5<

,/6*36$3352$&+
',6&287 6 6 6 1$9925/2&5<571
< < < 1$9925/2&5<571
9(57,&$/683(5)/$*287 *6683(5B)/$*
*6683(5B)/$*
/$7(5$/683(5)/$*287 1$9683(5B)/$*
1$9683(5B)/$*

/$7(5$/)/$*287 1&
/$7(5$/)/$*287 1&

9(57,&$/)/$*287 1& $8723,/27

9(57,&$/)/$*287 1& &20387(5
&(661$
,)&6 ,)&6 ,)&6
&$)' &$)' &$)'
-3 -3 -3

$3$&5()+, ( ( ( 9$&+=
$3$&5()/2 ) ) ) 9$&+=5(7851
V

Figure F-14. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Cessna

Sheet 1 of 5

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-53
$8723,/27
02'(
&(661$ &21752//(5
*$50,1
%,)&6 %,)&6 %,)&6 %
*'8 6$ &$$)' 6$ &$$)' 6$ &$$)' &$$)'
3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3 -3

$3+($',1*(5525+, '&+'**<52,1
$3+($',1*(5525/2 '&+'**<52,1
V
$3&2856((5525+, '&&2856('$780,1
$3&2856((5525/2 '&&2856(6,*,1
V
$&&2856('$780

$&+'**<52,1

/$7(5$//()7287 925/2&6,*1$/ /7

/$7(5$/5,*+7287 925/2&6,*1$/ 57
V
1$9925/2& /7

1$9925/2& 57

9(57,&$/83287 *66,*1$/ 83

9(57,&$/'2:1287 *66,*1$/ '1
V
1$9*66,* 83

1$9*66,* '1
,/6*36$3352$&+
',6&287 925/2&5(/$<571
1$9/2&*1'
1$9/2&*1'
/$7(5$/)/$*287 1&
/$7(5$/)/$*287 1&

9(57,&$/)/$*287 1&
9(57,&$/)/$*287 1&

Figure F-14. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Cessna

Sheet 2 of 5

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-54
$',
RQFRSLORW¶VVLGH &(661$ )/,*+7',5(&725±6,1*/(*'8,167$//$7,216
*$ *$

3 - 237,21$/
&0'%$519,(:

&0'%$557
&0'%$5/75()(5(1&(

&0'%$583
&0'%$5'1
02'(6(/(&725
&20387(5$03
&(661$
%,)&6 %,)&6 %,)&6 ,)&6
*$50,1 6$ 6$ 6$ &$$
*'8 3 - - - - - - 3. 3.

)'(1$%/(,1 )'&20387(521

)'52//5,*+7 $',52//%$5
)'52///()7 6,*1$/&2002152///7
V

)'3,7&+83 $',3,7&+%$5
)'3,7&+'2:1 $',3,7&+'1
V

*$50,1
*'8 3 )/,*+7',5(&725'8$/*'8,167$//$7,216
)'(1$%/(,1

)'52//5,*+7
)'52///()7
V

)'3,7&+83
)'3,7&+'2:1
V 02'(6(/(&725
&20387(5$03
&(661$
%,)&6 %,)&6 %,)&6 ,)&6
*$50,1 6$ 6$ 6$ &$$
*'8 3 - - - - - - 3. 3.
V V

)'(1$%/(,1 )'&20387(521

)'52//5,*+7 $',52//%$5
)'52///()7 6,*1$/&2002152///7
V

)'3,7&+83 $',3,7&+%$5
)'3,7&+'2:1 $',3,7&+'1
V

Figure F-14. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Cessna

Sheet 3 of 5

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-55
)/,*+7',5(&7253529,6,216
72*'8
,1'8$/,167$//$7,216

02'(
&(661$ &21752//(5
,)&6 ,)&6 ,)&6
6$ 6$ 6$
-3 -3 -3
72*'8
- - - $',&0'%$5/()7
*'8,1
. . . $',&0'%$5&20021
'8$/,167$//$7,216
/ / / $',&0'%$55,*+7

Figure F-14. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Cessna

Sheet 4 of 5

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-56 Rev. L
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('

*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
V

$77+(*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'6
0867%(/(667+$1&211(&727+(56+,(/'*5281'672$,5&5$)7*5281':,7+$66+257$
&21'8&725$635$&7,&$/

5()(5(1&(6(&7,21)25*'8$8723,/27&21),*85$7,21

&211(&7,216$5(5(48,5('21/<)257+26(,138767+$77+($8723,/27&20387(568332576

)25'8$/*'8,167$//$7,216&211(&772*'821/<7+(6(3,16$5(127&211(&7('21
*'8

-803(5,65(48,5(')25'&+($',1*&2856((55256,*1$/6

7+(,/6*36$3352$&+',6&5(7(2873870867$/62%(&211(&7('727+(%$&.&2856(5(/$<±
5()(5720$18)$&785(5¶6'2&80(17$7,21)25$'',7,21$/'(7$,/6

86(75,$'75$16)250(5317<3256,0,/$57+,675$16)250(5,61275(48,5(')257+(
&(661$,)&6,13876

672:3529,6,21$/)/,*+7',5(&725:,5,1*1($532)7+(*'8)25'8$/*'8
6<67(0663/,&(:,5,1*$1'672:1($532)($&+*'8

781(5(6,67$1&(327621+($',1*(5525+,$1'&2856((5525+,72(1'2)75$9(/,125'(5
12772$))(&77+(+($',1*$1'&2856((55256,*1$/6

0$,17$,1(;,67,1*&211(&7,21%(7:((1$8723,/27&20387(5$1'02'(6(/(&725

27+(5&203$7,%/()/,*+7',5(&725$',¶60$<%(87,/,=('

)/,*+7',5(&725:,5,1*72(;,67,1*$',0867%(',6&211(&7(',)7+,6,1',&$725,686('$6$
67$1'%<,167580(17)257+(*'8±7+(',63/$<2)7+()/,*+7',5(&7250867%(',6$%/('
,17+,6&$6(,)7+,6,1',&$725,6%(,1*5(/2&$7('727+(&23,/27¶66,'(:,5,1*0$<%(
&211(&7(',13$5$//(/727+,6$',$1'7+()/,*+7',5(&7250$<%((1$%/('7+(:,5,1*72
7+,6$',0867%(&211(&7(',1$&&25'$1&(:,7+7+(0$18)$&785(5¶6,16758&7,2167+,6$',
0867%(/2&$7(',1$&&25'$1&(:,7+6(&7,21

7(50,1$7(6,*1$/:,5(726+,(/'$1'$,5)5$0(*5281'&211(&7*5281':,7+$66+257$
&21'8&725$635$&7,&$/

'()$8/72873873,16+2:1,7,65(&200(1'('7+$77+('()$8/7287387%(87,/,=('
:+(1(9(53266,%/(+2:(9(57+,6)81&7,210$<%(&21),*85('21$127+(5$9$,/$%/(
',6&5(7(2873875()(5726(&7,21&)25'(7$,/621+2:72&21),*85(7+(',6&5(7(
2873876

:,5,1*,6,167$//('$&5266%27+1$9$1'1$9$8723,/27,13876$&&25',1*/<7+(1$91$9
/,*+7('6:,7&+/(*(1'0867%(2%/,7(5$7('68&+7+$7$1<1$96285&(,1',&$7,21217+(
$8723,/2702'(&21752//(5,6+,''(1)5209,(:

Figure F-14. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Cessna

Sheet 5 of 5

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-57
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-58 Rev. L
*'83)'0)'RU $8',23$1(/
*'83)'0)' *$50,1 36(QJLQHHULQJ %HQGL[.LQJ
*0$ 6/ *0$ *0$ 30$ 30$ .0$
*0$ 6/0 30$ .0$ .0$
3
3 3 %RWWRP - - %RWWRP - %RWWRP 3
+, 7 7 7 +, 816:,7&+('
$8',2287
/2 *QG/XJ *QG/XJ *QG/XJ /2 $8',2,1
V

$8',2,1+,%,7,1

$8',2$&7,9(287
',6&5(7(287

0,;,1*$8',26,*1$/686,1*5(6,67256

%()25(02',),&$7,21 $)7(502',),&$7,21

(;,67,1*/58 $8',23$1(/ (;,67,1*/58 5 $8',23$1(/

$8',2287 +, 816:,7&+(' $8',2287 +, 816:,7&+('

/2 $8',2,1 /2 $8',2,1
5
*'8

$8',2287
V

Figure F-15. Audio Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-59
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('

*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
V

$7*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'60867%(
/(667+$1

86(7+($8',2,1+,%,7,1 ',6&5(7(,138772,1+,%,7*'8$85$/$/(576:+(1$+,*+(5
35,25,7<6<67(0,63/$<,1*$8',20(66$*(6

86(7+($8',2$&7,9(287 ',6&5(7(28738772,1+,%,7$85$/$/(576)520/2:(535,25,7<
6<67(06:+(1(9(57+(*'8,63/$<,1*$8',20(66$*(6

)81&7,21127&855(17/<,03/(0(17('

,)$8',23$1(/'2(6127+$9($1$9$,/$%/(816:,7&+(',1387$8',2)520*'80867%(
0,;(':,7+$1(;,67,1*$8',26285&(86,1*5(6,6725672,62/$7(7+($8',2287387)520($&+
/58$7<3,&$/9$/8()250,;,1*5(6,67256,6ȍó:7+($8',2/(9(/62)(;,67,1*$8',2
6285&(6:,//+$9(72%(5((9$/8$7('$)7(50,;,1*5(6,67256$5(,167$//('

)25'8$/*'8,167$//$7,21621/<&211(&77+($8',2287387$1'$662&,$7('',6&5(7(6
)520*'8/($9(7+($8',2287387$1'',6&5(7(6)520*'881&211(&7('

,)7+(7$:6%)($785(,17+(*'8,6(1$%/('7+($8',2,13870867%(816:,7&+('$1'
81087('

'()$8/72873873,16+2:1,7,65(&200(1'('7+$77+('()$8/7287387%(87,/,=('
:+(1(9(53266,%/(+2:(9(57+,6)81&7,210$<%(&21),*85('21$127+(5$9$,/$%/(
',6&5(7(2873875()(5726(&7,21&)25'(7$,/621+2:72&21),*85(7+(',6&5(7(
2873876

7+(+,*+6,'(2)7+(*0$$/(57,1387,6213

Figure F-15. Audio Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-60 Rev. L
*'83)'0)'RU
*'83)'0)' *'/$
3 3
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
6 6

*'83)'0)'
3
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%

(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
6 6

127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
V
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
$7*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'
/($'60867%(/(667+$1&211(&77+(6+,(/'*5281'6$77+(*'/$72,76
&211(&725%$&.6+(//,1$&&25'$1&(:,7+*'/$,167$//$7,21,16758&7,216
86($,5&5$)7*5$'(&$7(*25<(7+(51(7&$%/(7+(6(,1&/8'(7+()2//2:,1*

0$18)$&785(5 31
3,&:,5($1'&$%/( ( $:*
3,&:,5($1'&$%/( ( $:*
&DUOLVOH,7 $:*
1RWUHFRPPHQGHGGXHWRODUJHUZLUHGLDPHWHU$:*LVSUHIHUUHG

(7+(51(73257250$<%(86(',167($'7+(32577+$7,686('0867%((1$%/('
,1&21),*85$7,2102'(5()(5727+(*'/,167$//$7,210$18$/)25$'',7,21$/
'(7$,/6
5()(5(1&(),*85(6)$1'))25+6'%$5&+,7(&785(

Figure F-16. GDL 69/69A Interconnect

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-61
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-62 Rev. L
&211(&7,216727$67&$6,

*'83)'0)'
3

$5,1&,1$
$5,1&,1%
V

3

7$67(67
7,67$667$1'%<
75$)),&$'9,625<6<67(0
/&200 +21(<:(//
.7$ .7$
*'83)'0)' 75& 75& .0+ .0+
3 3 3 - -
$5,1&,1$ $
$5,1&,1% $5,1&287
%
V

3

7$67(67 )81&7,21$/7(67
237,21$/
7,67$667$1'%< 67$1'%<23(5$7(
72*36
3 1$9,*$725 6

V

$5,1&287$ $ $5,1&,1 /6
$5,1&287% % +($',1*$/7,78'(

V 237,21$/
$ $5,1&,1 /6
% $/7,78'(

$5,1&+($',1*
237,21$/ &21),*675$33,1*
*56$+56 675$3&20021
3
237,21$/
$5,1&287$ $ $5,1&,1 +6
$5,1&287% % +($',1*$77,78'(
V

&211(&7,216727&$'7$6

*'83)'0)'
3

$5,1&,1$

$5,1&,1%
V

$9,'<1( 7&$'75$)),&6<67(0
*'83)'0)' 7$6[[
%;
3 3 SLQ

$5,1&,1$ $
$5,1&7;
$5,1&,1% %
V
72*36
3 1$9,*$725 6

V

$5,1&287$ $ $5,1&5; /6

$5,1&287% % $/7+'*
V 237,21$/

Figure F-17. Traffic Advisory System Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 5

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-63
&211(&7,21672*76;;

*'83)'0)'
3

$5,1&,1$
$5,1&,1%
V

3

7,67$667$1'%<

7$67(67

*'83)'0)' 3 3 *76;;

$5,1&,1$ $5,1&287$
+6
$5,1&,1% $5,1&287%
V V

3
3

7,67$667$1'%< 23(5$7(67$1'%<
7$67(67 6(/)7(676(/(&7

(7+(51(7,1$ Q $,5*5281'
Q 6<67(067$7869$/,'
(7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7287$ Q
(7+(51(7287% Q
3
6
Q (7+(51(7287$
Q (7+(51(7287%
Q (7+(51(7,1$

72*36 Q (7+(51(7,1%
1$9,*$725 6 6
3
V

$5,1&287$ $5,1&,1$ /6
$5,1&287% $5,1&,1%
V 237,21$/ V +($',1*$/7,78'(

Figure F-17. Traffic Advisory System Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 5

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-64 Rev. L
&211(&7,216727,6

*'83)'0)'
3
$5,1&,1$
$5,1&,1%
V

3
7,67$667$1'%<

7,66285&(
*$50,1
75$16321'(5
*'83)'0)' *7;
*7;
3 3
$5,1&,1$ $
$5,1&287
$5,1&,1% %
V

3
7,67$667$1'%< 7,6&211(&76(/(&7

3
237,21$/
$5,1&287 $ $ $5,1&,1 /6
*(1(5$/3853 % % $/77(03+'*
RU')&6 V 63'6(/&56

*'& $'&
3
237,21$/
$5,1&287$ $ $5,1&,1 /6
$5,1&287% % $/7,78'(
V

Figure F-17. Traffic Advisory System Interconnect

Sheet 3 of 5

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-65
127(6

$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
V

$7*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'60867%(/(66
7+$1&211(&727+(56+,(/'*5281'672$,5&5$)7&+$66,6:,7+$66+257$&21'8&725$6
35$&7,&$/
21/<21(75$)),&6285&(0$<%(&211(&7('727+(*'8
)25*'86(783,7(065()(5726(&7,21
)257$67,66(783,7(065()(572$33(1',;(
7+(6(237,21$/',6&5(7(&211(&7,216$5(1275(48,5(',)7+(*'8,6&21),*85(')25µ
(;7(51$/&21752/¶,17+,6&$6(7+(*'8:,//127&21752/7+(75$)),&$'9,625<6<67(0
23(5$7,21
,)21/<$6,1*/(*'8,6%(,1*,167$//('&211(&7$66+2:1)25*'83)'0)'
)25+21(<:(//75$)),&6<67(067+(³)81&7,21$/7(67´$1'³67%<23(5$7(´',6&5(7(,13876727+(
75$)),&&20387(50867%(&211(&7('7221(',63/$<21/<

,)'(6,5('$/7,78'($1'+($',1*0$<%(3529,'('%<7+(*'8727+(6.<:$7&+6<67(0$1<
$9$,/$%/($5,1&,13876217+(75$)),&&20387(50$<%(86(',)7+26(6+2:1$5($/5($'<86('
7+(75$)),&6<67(00$<+$9(72%(&21),*85('72$&&(37$/7,78'($1'+($',1*9,$$5,1& /2:
63((' 5()(5727+(0$18)$&785(5¶6,167$//$7,210$18$/)25$'',7,21$/,1)250$7,21
,)'(6,5('$/7,78'($77,78'($1'+($',1*0$<%(3529,'('%<7+(*'86<67(0727+(+21(<:(//

75$)),&6<67(07+(+21(<:(//75$)),&6<67(0:,//127$&&(37+($',1*$77,78'($1'$/7,78'(21$
6,1*/($5,1&,1387&216(48(17/<+($',1*$77,78'( +,*+63((' $1'$/7,78'( /2:63((' 0867
%(3529,'('726(3$5$7(,138767+(75$)),&6<67(00867%(&21),*85('72$&&(37$5,1&
$/7,78'(+($',1*$1'$77,78'(
,)'(6,5('$/7,78'(7(03(5$785(+($',1*63(('$1'6(/(&7('&2856(,1)250$7,210$<%(

3529,'('%<7+(*'8727+(75$16321'(57+(*7;:,//+$9(72%(&21),*85('72$&&(37
7+,6,1)250$7,219,$$5,1& ³()$':$/7´63(('6(7720$7&+*'8287387 ,)7+(*'8,6
7+(21/<$/7,78'(6285&()257+(*7;,7,65(&200(1'('7+$77+(*7;$/62%(
&211(&7('',5(&7/<727+(*'& 627+$77+(75$16321'(5:,//&217,18(5(3257,1*$/7,78'(,1
7+((9(172)$*'8)$,/85(
75&62)7:$5(9(56,2125+,*+(5,65(48,5('

7+(6(675$366(77+(+($',1*,13876285&(72$5,1&5()(5727+(0$18)$&785(5¶6,167$//$7,21
0$18$/)25$'',7,21$/675$33,1*,1)250$7,21

)25'8$/*'8,167$//$7,21621/<$5,1&2873876)520*'8$1'$+566+28/'%(
&211(&7('727+(7,67$66<67(0$5,1&2873876)520*'825$+566+28/'127%(
&211(&7('727+(7,67$66<67(0

7+(*'80867%(6(772³6.<:$7&+´$1'³(;7(51$/&21752/´0867%(6(/(&7('
$1(;7(51$/81,7&$3$%/(2)',63/$<,1*75$)),&$1'&21752//,1*7+(7&$',65(48,5(',1$'',7,2172

7+(*'8 (*$::25$9,'<1(',63/$<
)257+(7&$'72$&&(37$5,1&+($',1*$1'$/7,78'(352&(66253125/$7(5,6

5(48,5('7+(%8663(('0867%(7+(6$0()25$5,1&5;$1'5;

7+(*7;0867%(&21),*85(')25³$'&:$/7´ /2:63(('
'()$8/72873873,16+2:1,7,65(&200(1'('7+$77+('()$8/7287387%(87,/,=(':+(1(9(5
3266,%/(+2:(9(57+,6)81&7,210$<%(&21),*85('21$127+(5$9$,/$%/(',6&5(7(2873875()(5
726(&7,21&)25'(7$,/621+2:72&21),*85(7+(',6&5(7(2873876
86(21/<$,5&5$)7*5$'(&$7(*25<(7+(51(7&$%/(7+(6(,1&/8'(7+()2//2:,1*

0$18)$&785(5 31
3,&:,5($1'&$%/( ( $:*
3,&:,5($1'&$%/( ( $:*
&DUOLVOH,7 $:*
1RWUHFRPPHQGHGGXHWRODUJHUZLUHGLDPHWHU$:*LVSUHIHUUHG

127(12786('
-803(5&$1%(,167$//('$66+2:1720$.(75$)),&6<67(075$16,7,217223(5$7(,)1227+(5³21

*5281'´,1',&$7,21,6$9$,/$%/(

Figure F-17. Traffic Advisory System Interconnect

Sheet 4 of 5

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-66 Rev. L
5()(5(1&(),*85(6)$1'))25+6'%$5&+,7(&785(

,)$5,1&287,6%(,1*86('%<$127+(5/58,7,6$&&(37$%/(7263/,&(7+($5,1&:,5,1*72($&+

/5872*(7+(5

'()$8/7$5,1&,138732576+2:1,7,65(&200(1'('7+$77+('()$8/7,1387%(87,/,=(':+(1(9(5

3266,%/(+2:(9(57+,6)81&7,210$<%(&21),*85('21$127+(5$9$,/$%/($5,1&,1387 ,13876
21/< 5()(5726(&7,21)25'(7$,/621+2:72&21),*85(7+($5,1&,13876

&211(&7,21)52075$)),&6<67(0&$1%(0$'(72%27+*'8V$66+2:12521/<&211(&7('7221(*'8
(,7+(53,/27¶625&23,/27¶6 $1'75$)),&,1)250$7,21$1'&21752/&5266),//('727+(27+(5*'8
',5(&7&211(&7,2172($&+*'8,635()(55('&5266),//237,216+28/'21/<%(86(',)7+(5($5($1
,168)),&,(17180%(52)*'8$5,1&,13876726833257$//$5,1&,17(5)$&(6,1$3$57,&8/$5
,167$//$7,21

Figure F-17. Traffic Advisory System Interconnect

Sheet 5 of 5

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-67
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-68 Rev. L
*'8 6,1&26$')
3)'0)'
3
$');&26,1
$')<6,1,1
$')'&5(),1

$')9$/,',1

$')5(&(,9(5
+21(<:(// &2//,16
*'8
3)'0)' .5 .') $')$%
.)6
3 3 3 3
$');&26,1 % '&;&26
$')<6,1,1 $ '&<6,1
$')'&5(),1 ' '&'&5()

'&<6,1
237,21$/
$')9$/,',1 & 683(5)/$* $')/2&.

6<1&+52$') $')5(&(,9(5
+21(<:(//
*$'H$GDSWHU
.5
.,
3 3
$')%($5,1*; $ $')%($5,1*;
$')%($5,1*< % $')%($5,1*<
$')%($5,1*= & $')%($5,1*=

3
9$&5(),1+, ( 9$&5(),1+,
9$&287/2 ' 9$&287/2

$,5&5$)79$&+=
` 5()(5(1&(92/7$*(
Figure F-18. ADF Interconnect
Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-69
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
)25*'86(783,7(065()(5726(&7,21
,)&211(&7,1*$1$')5(&(,9(5:+,&+'2(61273529,'(683(5)/$*287387/($9(3
81&211(&7('27+(5:,6(&211(&7$66+2:121&(7+(*'8,6&21),*85(')25$3$57,&8/$5
02'(/2)$')7+(³683(5)/$*´%2;217+(*'86+28/'%(&+(&.('2581&+(&.('$6
$335235,$7(,)7+(683(5)/$*6,*1$/,6&211(&7('727+(*'87+(³683(5)/$*´%2;6+28/'%(
&+(&.('
7+(683(5)/$*287387,621/<3529,'('%<$1'9(56,2162)7+(
.5$')5(&(,9(5
7+(683(5)/$*287387,621/<3529,'('%<9(56,212)7+(.')$')5(&(,9(5
&211(&7,216$5(6+2:1)25$%2772002817('$17(11$)25$72302817('$17(11$',6&211(&7
:,5()5203$1'&211(&7723
.,,167$//$7,2121/<
.,1(('672%(5(7$,1('
6<1&+52$1*/(,1',&$7(6%($5,1*7267$7,21

Figure F-18. ADF Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-70 Rev. L
$3+($',1*'$7806:,7&+ 237,21$/

*'83)'0)'
3

*366(1$%/(,1 1&

+'*
*'83)'0)'
3
*366(1$%/(,1
*366
237,21$/

127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
V
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
6:,7&+0867%(/2&$7('$61($5$635$&7,&$/727+($8723,/2702'(&21752/3$1(/
6:,7&+0867%(/$%(/('$66+2:1 $3+'*'$780 $3+'*'$780
,)³$3+'*'$780´:,//127),7,7,6 *366 *366
$&&(37$%/(72/$%(/7+(6:,7&+
+'*
SXVKEXWWRQ +'*
³$3'$780´ LOOXPLQDWHGVZLWFK WRJJOHVZLWFK
7+(³+'*´$1'³*366´/$%(/60$<%(6:$33(')5207+(326,7,2166+2:1
)251(:'8$/*'8,167$//$7,216'2127&211(&76(&21'*'8 *366&21752/,1)250$7,21,6
6(1772*'89,$&5266),//*'8Y25/$7(5 )25(;,67,1*,167$//$7,216,7,6$&&(37$%/(
72/($9(:,5(&211(&7('727+(6$0(3,121%27+*'8V
7+(237,21$/³+'**366´6:,7&+,621/<5(48,5(')25,167$//$7,2167+$787,/,=(7+(*'8$6$
*3652//67((5,1*&219(57(5$1'$5(&21),*85(')25',6&5(7(*366+'*&21752/,167$//$7,216
&21),*85(')25+'*.(<*366+'*.(<&21752/25:,7+$8723,/2767+$787,/,=($5,1&*366'2
1275(48,5(7+,66:,7&+5()(5726(&7,21)25$'',7,21$/,1)250$7,21

Figure F-19. External Switches (GPSS)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-71
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-72 Rev. L
0(7$/$,5&5$)7
67$1'%<
$77,78'(,1',&$725 67%<
0&,;; 06(3 $77

$,5&5$)732:(5 & $:* (66(17,$/%86
$,5&5$)7*1' $ $:* $ 9'&
$ 9'&

$,5&5$)7
*5281'

/,*+7,1*%86+, % 72$,5&5$)7

/,*+7,1*%86/2 ' /,*+7,1*%86

67$1'%<
1210(7$//,&$,5&5$)7
$77,78'(,1',&$725 67%<
0&,;; 06(3 $77

$,5&5$)732:(5 & $:* (66(17,$/%86
$
$:*
675,3(217960867%(
72:$5'32:(5%86 $,5&5$)7
796 *5281'
796 3,1&211(&725
$66<
$,5&5$)7*1' $ 796 796 TW\

675,3(21796
0867%(72:$5'
&211(&725

/,*+7,1*%86+, % 72$,5&5$)7

/,*+7,1*%86/2 ' /,*+7,1*%86

Figure F-20. Mid-Continent Electric Standby Attitude Indicator Interconnect (Integral

Battery)
Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-73
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*81/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
V
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
32:(5:,5(66+$//%(7:,67('3$,5:,7+12025(7+$16,;,1&+(6817:,67('$7(,7+(5(1'
7+(0&,%$&.83$',0867%(&21),*85(')257+(&255(&7/,*+7,1*%8692/7$*( 9'&9'&
9'&259$& 3/($6(6((,167$//$7,210$18$/)25/,*+775$<$66(0%/<237,216
0,'&217,1(17,167580(1760$18$/180%(5
,)7+(5(,6025(7+$121((66(17,$/%867+(%$&.83$',$1'**0867%(,167$//('21
6(3$5$7((66(17,$/%86(6
5()(5726(&7,21)253$57180%(56$1'7$%/(.,1$33(1',;.)25$,5&5$)702'(/
63(&,),&,1)250$7,21$/7(51$7(/<7+()86(0$<%(,167$//('217+(*5281'6,'(2)7+(796
796),61275(48,5(')25$//$,5&5$)702'(/65()(5726(&7,21)25,1)250$7,2121
,167$//,1*796)5()(5726(&7,21)25,16758&7,21621&5($7,1*7+(796$66(0%/<
&211(&7796V$767$1'%<$',$1'(66(17,$/%86$66+2:1

67$1'%< 06(3
$77,78'(
,1',&$725 & (66(17,$/%86
$
)86(
) $ 0$;
)86(
&XW796OHDGVWR 3/ ) $
:,5(6+$//
%($:* 796
6WULSHRQ796PXVWEH 796 0$;
WRZDUGSRZHUEXV $66<
&211(&772 796
$,5)5$0(
*5281'

Figure F-20. Mid-Continent Electric Standby Attitude Indicator Interconnect (Integral

Battery)
Sheet 2 of 2

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-74 Rev. L
0(7$/$,5&5$)7
67$1'%< (0(5*3:56833/<
$77,78'(,1',&$725 0'
0&, 06)6

$,5&5$)732:(5 & $:* *<5232:(5

$,5&5$)7*1' $ $:* *<52*5281'
*<52/,*+7,1*/2:
/,*+7,1*%86+, % *<52/,*+7,1*+,*+
(;7(51$/
6(1625
*1'
$1181&,$7,21 $8720$7,&,1387
&21752/81,7 237,21$/
$,5
0'
$1181&,$7,2132:(5 $1181&,$7,2132:(5
$1181&,$7,21*5281' $1181&,$7,21*5281'
67%<%87721 67%<%87721
*5((1$1181&,$7,21 *5((1$1181&,$7,21
5('$1181&,$7,21 5('$1181&,$7,21
$0%(5$1181&,$7,21 $0%(5$1181&,$7,21
:+,7($1181&,$7,21 :+,7($1181&,$7,21

72$,5&5$)7 /,*+7,1*%86+,

/,*+7,1*%86 /,*+7,1**5281'
67%<
$77

(66(17,$/%86 $,5&5$)732:(5
$ 9'& $,5&5$)7*5281'
$ 9'& $,5&5$)7
*5281'

Figure F-21. Mid-Continent Electric Standby Attitude Indicator Interconnect (External

Battery)
Sheet 1 of 3

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-75
1210(7$//,&$,5&5$)7
(0(5*3:56833/<
67$1'%< 0'
$77,78'(,1',&$725
0&, 06)6
/,*+7,1*%86+, % *<52/,*+7,1*+,*+

*<52/,*+7,1*/2:
$,5&5$)7*1' $ $:* *<52*5281'
$,5&5$)732:(5 & $:* *<5232:(5
)
675,3(217960867%(
72:$5'32:(5%86
796
(;7(51$/
6(1625
*1'
$1181&,$7,21
&21752/81,7 $8720$7,&,1387
0' $,5 237,21$/
$1181&,$7,2132:(5 $1181&,$7,2132:(5
$1181&,$7,21*5281' $1181&,$7,21*5281'
67%<%87721 67%<%87721
*5((1$1181&,$7,21 *5((1$1181&,$7,21
5('$1181&,$7,21 5('$1181&,$7,21
$0%(5$1181&,$7,21 $0%(5$1181&,$7,21
:+,7($1181&,$7,21 :+,7($1181&,$7,21

72$,5&5$)7 /,*+7,1*%86+,

/,*+7,1*%86 /,*+7,1**5281'
67%<
$77

(66(17,$/%86 $,5&5$)732:(5
$ $,5&5$)7*5281'
$,5&5$)7
*5281'
796 3,1&211(&725
$66<
796 796 TW\

675,3(21796
0867%(72:$5'
&211(&725

Figure F-21. Mid-Continent Electric Standby Attitude Indicator Interconnect (External

Battery)
Sheet 2 of 3

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-76 Rev. L
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*81/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
V
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'

32:(5:,5(66+$//%(7:,67('3$,5:,7+12025(7+$1,1&+(6817:,67('$7(,7+(5(1'

7+(81,7¶6/,*+7,1*,13870867%(&21),*85(')257+(&255(&7/,*+7,1*%8692/7$*( 9'&
9'&9'& 3/($6(6((,167$//$7,210$18$/)256:,7&+6(/(&7,21237,2160,'&217,1(17
,167580(1760$18$/180%(5

,)7+(5(,6025(7+$121((66(17,$/%867+(%$&.83$',$1'**0867%(,167$//('21
6(3$5$7((66(17,$/%86(6

,167$//(508676(/(&799259/,*+7,1*217+(0'%$77(5<02'8/(3/($6(6((
,167$//$7,210$18$/)256:,7&+6(/(&7,21237,2160,'&217,1(17,167580(1760$18$/
180%(5

0$<%(86(',167($'2)&211(&7,1*3,727$1'67$7,&32576$*5281'213,1:+(17+(
$,5&5$)7,6,1)/,*+7:,//$//2:)25)8//$8720$7,&%$&.8332:(5:+(1$,5&5$)732:(5,6
/2676((,167$//$7,210$18$/)25&21),*85$7,215(48,5(0(1760,'&217,1(17,167580(176
0$18$/180%(5

5()(5726(&7,21)253$57180%(56$1'7$%/(.,1$33(1',;.)25$,5&5$)702'(/
63(&,),&,1)250$7,21$/7(51$7(/<7+()86(0$<%(,167$//('217+(*5281'6,'(2)7+(796
796),61275(48,5(')25$//$,5&5$)702'(/65()(5726(&7,21)25,1)250$7,2121
,167$//,1*796)5()(5726(&7,21)25,16758&7,21621&5($7,1*7+(796$66(0%/<
&211(&7796V$767$1'%<$',$1'(66(17,$/%86$66+2:1

0'

(66(17,$/%86
$
)86(
) $
:,5(6+$//
%($:* 796 0$;
$66<
796
675,3(21796
0867%(72:$5'
67$1'%< 06(3 &211(&725
$77,78'(
,1',&$725 &
)86(
) $
0$;
&XW796OHDGVWR 3/

6WULSHRQ796PXVWEH 796
WRZDUGSRZHUEXV
&211(&772
$,5)5$0(
*5281'

7+(0'32:(56833/<0867%(02817(':,7+,17+(,167580(173$1(/$5($,11210(7$//,&
$,5&5$)7,135(6685,=('$,5&5$)77+(0'0867%(02817(',135(6685,=('$5($

Figure F-21. Mid-Continent Electric Standby Attitude Indicator Interconnect (External

Battery)
Sheet 3 of 3

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-77
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-78 Rev. L
6,1*/(*'8,167$//$7,21
*'8',63/$<6$1'&21752/6672506&23(
:;
672506&23(
3
*'83)'0)'
56B*1'

3
3
56*1'
56,1 567;
56287 565;
V

*'8',63/$<6672506&23('$7$21/<

*'83)'0)' :;
672506&23(
3 3
56*1' 56B*1'
56,1
56287 1& V
3
567;
565;

72672506&23(
&21752/$1'',63/$<

'8$/*'8,167$//$7,21

*'83)'0)' :;
6(&21'$5< 672506&23(
3 3

56*1' 56B*1'
56,1
56287 1& V
3
567;
565;
*'83)'0)'
35,0$5<

3
56*1'
56,1
56287
V

NOTE
This feature is currently not implemented. However, provisional wiring for the interface
defined above may be installed. If installing provisional wiring, ensure that existing
display still controls the Stormscope.

Figure F-22. Stormscope Provisions Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-79
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('

*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
V

$7*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'60867%(
/(667+$1&211(&727+(56+,(/'*5281'672$,5&5$)7&+$66,6:,7+$66+257$
&21'8&725$635$&7,&$/

672506&23()81&7,21,6127&855(17/<,03/(0(17(',1*'8

5(&(,9(&+$11(/,172672506&23(0867%(/()7&211(&7('727+(&855(17672506&23(
',63/$<,17+($,5&5$)7817,/7+(*'8672506&23()81&7,21,6,03/(0(17('7+(*'8
:,//1273529,'(&21752/2)7+(672506&23(

,)'8$/*'8V$5(,167$//('21/<21(*'8 7+(35,0$5< &$1&21752/7+(672506&23(

%27+*'8V&$1%(86('72',63/$<672506&23('$7$(,7+(5*'8250$<%(
&211(&7('$67+(35,0$5<672506&23(',63/$<

Figure F-22. Stormscope Provisions Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-80 Rev. L
*$50,1:($7+(55$'$56,1*/(*'8,167$//$7,216

*$50,1:($7+(5
*'83)'0)' *:; *:; 5$'$5
3 3 3
$ $
(7+(51(7287 (7+(51(7,1
% %
$
$ (7+(51(7287
(7+(51(7,1 %
%
V V
57212))
6,*1$/*5281'

*$50,1:($7+(55$'$5'8$/*'8,167$//$7,216

*$50,1:($7+(5
*'83)'0)' *:; *:; 5$'$5
3 3 3
$ $
(7+(51(7287 (7+(51(7,1
% %
$ $ (7+(51(7287
(7+(51(7,1 %
%
V V
$ 57212))
(7+(51(7,1
% 6,*1$/*5281'
$
(7+(51(7287
%
V

*'83)'0)'
3
%
(7+(51(7,1
$
%
(7+(51(7287
$
V

NOTE
Weather radar functionality is only available with GDU 620 version 3.00 and later.

Figure F-23. Weather Radar Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 4

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-81
$5,1&:;56,1*/(*'8,167$//$7,216

:($7+(55$'$557
+21(<:(// %(1',;.,1*
5'6 5'6 5'5 5'5

*'83)'0)' 56$ 56$ $57 $57

3 3 3 3 3
$ $ $5,1&287
$5,1&,1 :($7+(5
% %
V
$ $ $5,1&,1
$5,1&287 % &21752/
%
V
:;5$'$521

',6&2871 Q 57212))

1& 675876:,7&+,1
$
$5,1&,17(50
%

$5,1&:;5'8$/*'8,167$//$7,216

:($7+(55$'$557
+21(<:(// %(1',;.,1*
5'6 5'6 5'5 5'5

*'83)'0)' 56$ 56$ $57 $57

3 3 3 3 3

$
$5,1&,17(50
%
$ $ $5,1&,1
$5,1&287 % &21752/
%
V
:;5$'$521 Q 57212))
',6&2871
$
$5,1&,1
%
V

*'83)'0)'
3
V

$ $ $5,1&287
$5,1&,1 :($7+(5
% %
V
$ $ $5,1&,1
$5,1&287 % &21752/
%
V
:;5$'$521 Q 57212))
',6&2871
1& 675876:,7&+,1
$ 1&
$5,1&,17(50
% 1&

Figure F-23. Weather Radar Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 4

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-82 Rev. L
0(7$/$,5&5$)721/<
$5,1&:;5±$5,1&67$%,/,=$7,21

:($7+(55$'$557
+21(<:(//
*$50,1 %(1',;.,1*
*56$+56 3 5'5 5'5
$57 $57

3 3

$5,1&287$ $$ 3,7&+52//,1$

$5,1&287% %% 3,7&+52//,1%
V

127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('

*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
V

$7*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'60867%(
/(667+$1&211(&77+(6+,(/'*5281'6$77+(*:;72,76&211(&725%$&.6+(//,1
$&&25'$1&(:,7+*:;,167$//$7,21,16758&7,216

127(12786('

86($,5&5$)7*5$'(&$7(*25<(7+(51(7&$%/(7+(6(,1&/8'(7+()2//2:,1*
0$18)$&785(5 31
3,&:,5($1'&$%/( ( $:*
3,&:,5($1'&$%/( ( $:*
&DUOLVOH,7 $:*
1RWUHFRPPHQGHGGXHWRODUJHUZLUHGLDPHWHU$:*LVSUHIHUUHG

127(12786('

127(12786('

:($7+(55$'$5,1)250$7,21)5207+(*:;:,//21/<%(',63/$<('21*'812:($7+(5
5$'$5,1)250$7,21:,//$33($521*'8

7+(:;5$5,1&,1387,6817(50,1$7('

,)7+(*'8,67+(21/<(48,30(17217+($5,1&287387%86)5207+(:($7+(5
5$'$525,),7,6'(6,5('7287,/,=(7+(*'8,17(51$/7(50,1$7,215(6,6725,167$//7+(
7(50,1$7,21-803(56+2:17+,6/(1*7+2)7+,6-803(56+28/'127(;&(('´,)08/7,3/(
3,(&(62)(48,30(17$5(217+($5,1&%8621/<21(7(50,1$7,215(6,67256+28/'%(
87,/,=('$77+(/$67/58217+($5,1&%86

$7:($7+(55$'$581,7&211(&76+,(/'*5281'672$,5&5$)7&+$66,6:,7+$66+257$
&21'8&725$635$&7,&$/

7+(*'80$<%(&211(&7('$6,1',&$72525,1',&$725'2127&211(&77+(*'8
$6,1',&$7255()(5726(&7,21)25'(7$,/621+2:72&21),*85(*'8',63/$<+($'

,)7+(675876:,7&+,1387,6&211(&7('727+(:;5',6&211(&7,77+(*'8:,//
$8720$7,&$//<&200$1'7+(:;57267$1'%<8321/$1',1*7+,6$/62$//2:67+(3,/2772
78517+(:;52135,25727$.(2))

Figure F-23. Weather Radar Interconnect

Sheet 3 of 4

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-83
63/,&(0867%(0$'(:,7+,12)&211(&725%$&.6+(// :,7+,1&211(&725%$&.6+(//,6
35()(55('

12',6&5(7(287387,6$66,*1('%<'()$8/7$18186('$&7,9(/2:',6&5(7(2873870867%(
&21),*85(')257+,6)81&7,215()(5726(&7,21&)25'(7$,/621+2:72&21),*85(7+(
',6&5(7(2873876

'()$8/728738732576+2:1,7,65(&200(1'('7+$77+('()$8/7287387%(87,/,=('
:+(1(9(53266,%/(+2:(9(57+,6)81&7,210$<%(&21),*85('21$5,1&287387
5()(572*'8,167$//$7,210$18$/6(&7,21)25'(7$,/621+2:72&21),*85(7+(
$5,1&2873876

7+(:,5,1*727+(:($7+(55$'$5570867%(29(5%5$,'(',17+(5$'20($5($35,2572
(17(5,1*7+(0(7$/)86(/$*(250(7$/:,1*

5()(5(1&(),*85(6)$1'))25+6'%$5&+,7(&785(

$5,1&287&$1127%(86(',)7+(*$',6,167$//('

,)$5,1&2870867%(86('%87%(,1*86('%<$127+(5/58,7,6$&&(37$%/(7263/,&(7+(
$5,1&:,5,1*72($&+/5872*(7+(5
$77,78'(,1)250$7,21,61273529,'('727+(*:;29(57+(+6'%,17(5)$&(67$%,/,=$7,21

'$7$0867%(3529,'('727+(*:;29(5$6(3$5$7($1$/2*25$5,1&,17(5)$&(

Figure F-23. Weather Radar Interconnect

Sheet 4 of 4

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-84 Rev. L
*$50,1 75$16321'(5
*'83)'0)'
*7; *7;
*7; *7;
3
3 -
56,1
56287
56*1'
V

127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
V
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
$7*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'60867
%(/(667+$1
)25*'86(783,7(065()(5726(&7,21
)2575$16321'(56(783,7(065()(572$33(1',;(
5()(5720$18)$&785(5¶6'2&80(17$7,21)25&203/(7(3,1287$1',17(5&211(&7
,1)250$7,213,128762)27+(581,766+2:1)255()(5(1&(21/<
,)3266,%/($1$5,1&,17(5)$&(6+28/'%(86('723529,'($/7,78'(,1)250$7,21
5()(572),*85())25$'',7,21$/,1)250$7,21 ,)7+($5,1&,17(5)$&(,686('7+,6
56&211(&7,21,61275(48,5('

Figure F-24. Serial Altitude Output Interconnect

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-85
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-86 Rev. L
$8723,/27

$8723,/27
*'83)'0)'RU 63(55< &20387(5
*'83)'0)' 63=$ 63=
)= 63 )= 63
)'&RPSXWHU $3&RPS )'&RPSXWHU $3&RPS
-$ -% -% -$ -% -%
3

$3+($',1*(5525+, +'*(5525+,
$3+($',1*(5525/2
V

$3&2856((5525+, &56'$780+,
$3&2856((5525/2 +'*&56'$780/2
V
/$7(5$/683(5)/$*287 /$7683(5)/$*
/$7(5$//()7287 /$7'(9/7
/$7(5$/5,*+7287 /$7'(957
V
9(57,&$/683(5)/$*287 *6683(5)/$*
9(57,&$/83287 *6'(983
9(57,&$/'2:1287 *6'(9'1

,/6*36$3352$&+ /2&)5(4*5281'
',6&287
$3$&5()+, 9$&287387
$3$&5()/2 $&32:(5*5281'
V

7227+(5$9,21,&6

Figure F-25. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Sperry

Sheet 1 of 4

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-87
)/,*+7',5(&725±6,1*/(*'8,167$//$7,216
$8723,/27
63(55<
63=$ 63=
)= )=
$', 63(55< -$ -% -$ -%
RQFRSLORW¶VVLGH +=
9287387
3 52//%,$62872)9,(:
)':$51)/$* **
)':$51)/$* ++ 9287387
3,7&+%,$62872)9,(:
52//&0'375 V
52//&0'375 W 1& +,
52//375
/2: *$,16(/
3,7&+&0'375 S &200
3,7&+&0'375 T
237,21$/ 1& +,
3,7&+375
/2: *$,16(/
&200
*$50,1
*'8 /2:/(9(/)'&9$/,'
3 6,*1$/*5281'

)'(1$%/(,1 )'&9$/,'

)'52///()7 52//)'&200$1'
)'52//5,*+7 52//)'&200$1'
V
)'3,7&+'2:1 3,7&+)'&200$1'
)'3,7&+83 3,7&+)'&200$1'
V

Figure F-25. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Sperry

Sheet 2 of 4

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-88
)/,*+7',5(&725'8$/*'8,167$//$7,216

$8723,/27
63(55<
63=$ 63=
*$50,1 )= )=
-$ -% -$ -%
*'8 3
9287387
)'(1$%/(,1 52//%,$62872)9,(:

)'52///()7 9287387
)'52//5,*+7 3,7&+%,$62872)9,(:
V
)'3,7&+'2:1 1& +,
52//375
)'3,7&+83 /2: *$,16(/
V &200

1& +,
3,7&+375
*$50,1 /2: *$,16(/
*'8 3
&200
V V
)'(1$%/(,1 )'&9$/,'

)'52///()7 52//)'&200$1'
)'52//5,*+7 52//)'&200$1'
V
)'3,7&+'2:1 3,7&+)'&200$1'
)'3,7&+83 3,7&+)'&200$1'
V

Figure F-25. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Sperry

Sheet 3 of 4

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-89
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
V

$77+(*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'60867%(/(667+$1&211(&727+(56+,(/'
*5281'672$,5&5$)7*5281':,7+$66+257$&21'8&725$635$&7,&$/
5()(5(1&(6(&7,21)25*'8$8723,/27&21),*85$7,21
&211(&7,216$5(5(48,5('21/<)257+26(,138767+$77+($8723,/27&20387(568332576
(;,67,1*$&7,9(+,*++'*9$/,'6,*1$/)520+6,72)'&20387(50867%(6833/,('',5(&7/<)520'*21&((;,67,1*+6,,65(029('
)25'8$/*'86<67(06&211(&77+()'6,*1$/672*'8$66+2:1$//27+(5$8723,/276,*1$/66+28/'%(&211(&7('21/<72*'8
)/,*+7',5(&725:,5,1*72(;,67,1*$',0867%(',6&211(&7(',)7+,6,1',&$725,686('$6$67$1'%<,167580(17)257+(*'8±7+(
',63/$<2)7+()/,*+7',5(&7250867%(',6$%/(',17+,6&$6(,)7+,6,1',&$725,6%(,1*5(/2&$7('727+(&23,/27¶66,'(:,5,1*0$<%(
&211(&7(',13$5$//(/727+,6$',$1'7+()/,*+7',5(&7250$<%((1$%/('7+(:,5,1*727+,6$',0867%(&211(&7(',1$&&25'$1&(:,7+
7+(0$18)$&785(5¶6,16758&7,2167+,6$',0867%(/2&$7(',1$&&25'$1&(:,7+6(&7,21
(1685(7+$77+(3,7&+52//67((5,1**$,1-803(56$5(&211(&7('$66+2:1
(1685(7+$77+(7+(3,7&+52//%,$62872)9,(:-803(56$5(&211(&7('$66+2:1

)25'8$/*'8,167$//$7,216)/,*+7',5(&725:,5,1*0867%(',6&211(&7(')5207+((;,67,1*$',

'()$8/72873873,16+2:1,7,65(&200(1'('7+$77+('()$8/7287387%(87,/,=(':+(1(9(53266,%/(+2:(9(57+,6)81&7,210$<%(
&21),*85('21$127+(5$9$,/$%/(',6&5(7(2873875()(5726(&7,21&)25'(7$,/621+2:72&21),*85(7+(',6&5(7(2873876

Figure F-25. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Sperry

Sheet 4 of 4

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-90
0(7$/$,5&5$)7
$1'1210(7$//,&9)521/<,167$//$7,216

*$'RU
*$'H$'$37(5 *$'$
3
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $9,21,&6%86
$
$,5&5$)7
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* *5281'

*$'%
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $9,21,&6%86
$
$,5&5$)7
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* *5281'

3 *56$+56

$5,1&,1$ $5,1&287$
$5,1&,1% $5,1&287%
V V

*'83)'0)'
3

56,1 56287
56287 56,1
56*1' 56*1'
V V

3

$5,1&287$ $5,1&,1$
$5,1&287% $5,1&,1%

V V V

V

*'8
3 ,),167$//('
$5,1&,1$
$5,1&,1%
V
*$'HRQO\

Figure F-26. GAD 43/43e - Power and G600 Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-91
1210(7$//,&$,5&5$)7
(;&(379)521/<,167$//$7,216

*$'RU
*$'H$'$37(5 3 *$'$

$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $9,21,&6%86

) $

796
$,5&5$)7
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* *5281'

*$'%
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $9,21,&6%86
) $

796
$,5&5$)7
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* *5281'

*56$+56
3

$5,1&,1$ $5,1&287$
$5,1&,1% $5,1&287%
V V

*'83)'0)'
3

56,1 56287
56287 56,1
56*1' 56*1'
V V

3

$5,1&287$ $5,1&,1$
$5,1&287% $5,1&,1%

V V V

V

*'8
3 ,),167$//('
$5,1&,1$
$5,1&,1%
V
*$'HRQO\

Figure F-26. GAD 43/43e - Power and G600 Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 3

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-92 Rev. L
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('

*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
V

µ$,5&5$)732:(5¶,6,17(51$//<',2'(,62/$7(')520µ$,5&5$)732:(5

&211(&7,1*$6(&21'32:(5,1387,6237,21$/

&,5&8,7%5($.(56+28/'%(/$%(/('$66+2:1,)*$',6)(')5207:232:(56285&(6
&,5&8,7%5($.(566+28/'%(/$%(/('µ*$'$¶$1'µ*$'%¶

7+(*$'6+28/'%(217+(6$0(32:(5%86$67+($8723,/27

5()(5726(&7,21)253$57180%(56$1'7$%/(.,1$33(1',;.)25$,5&5$)702'(/
63(&,),&,1)250$7,215()(5726(&7,21)25,1)250$7,2121,167$//,1*7+(796)86(
$/7(51$7(/<7+()86(0$<%(,167$//('217+(*5281'6,'(2)7+(796&211(&7796$7*$'
$66+2:1
*$'
3

$ )86(
)

&XW796OHDGVWR 3/
6WULSHRQ796PXVWEHWRZDUG
796 SRZHUEXV
V &211(&772
6+,(/'%/2&.

$5,1&&211(&7,21,667,//5(48,5('(9(1,)12786,1*$77,78'( *<52 25+($',1*287387

)81&7,2162)*$'H

$5,1&&211(&7,2121/<5(48,5(',)$1$/2*1$9 9/2& $1$/2*5$'$5$/7,78'(256<1&+52

$'),6&211(&7('727+(*$'H'2127&211(&7,)7+(6()81&7,216$5(127%(,1*87,/,=('

)25*'86(783,7(065()(5726(&7,21

7+(5(,612'()$8/7&21),*85$7,21)257+,6$5,1&,1387$18186('$5,1&,1387
,1387621/< 0867%($66,*1('727+,6)81&7,215()(5726(&7,21)25'(7$,/621
+2:72&21),*85(7+($5,1&,13876

&211(&7,21)520*$'H&$1%(0$'(72%27+*'8V$66+2:12521/<&211(&7('7221(
*'8 (,7+(53,/27¶625&23,/27¶6 $1'*$'H1$9,*$7,21$')5$'$5$/7,78'(,1)250$7,21
&5266),//('727+(27+(5*'8',5(&7&211(&7,2172($&+*'8,635()(55('&5266),//
237,216+28/'21/<%(86(',)7+(5($5($1,168)),&,(17180%(52)*'8$5,1&,1387672
6833257$//$5,1&,17(5)$&(6,1$3$57,&8/$5,167$//$7,21

5()(572$33(1',;3)257%0$,5&5$)7

Figure F-26. GAD 43/43e - Power and G600 Interconnect

Sheet 3 of 3

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-93
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-94 Rev. L
$8723,/27±$WWLWXGH6RXUFH5HSODFHPHQW ZDV$',
*$50,1 $8723,/27
*$' +21(<:(// %(1',;.,1*
.$3 .$3 .)& .)&
.)& .)&
.&; .& .& .& .&3
0& )&
3 3; 3; 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3,7&+$&287+, < \ 3,7&+$77,78'(+,
3,7&+$&287/2 3,7&+52//$77'/2
V

52//$&287+, && 52//$77,78'(+,
52//$&287/2
V
9$&5(),1+, Z 9*(;&,7$7,21
9$&5(),1/2 V 9*5()
HLWKHU RU

9$&5(),1+, & 9*(;&,7$7,21
9$&5(),1/2 = 9*5()
V 3:55()

% ' $3',6&


12
$77,78'(9$/,' 5()(572$8723,/27 ,)7+(*$',687,/,=('723529,'($77,78'(,1)250$7,2172
1& 1&
5(/$< ',6&211(&7',$*5$0 7+($8723,/27&20387(57+($8723,/27',6&211(&76,*1$/
&20 )25($&+$8723,/27 0867*27+528*+7+(*$'72$//2:7+(*$'72
02'(/ ',6&211(&77+($8723,/27:+(15(48,5('

Figure F-27. GAD 43/43e Honeywell (Bendix-King) Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 14

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-95
$8723,/27±$WWLWXGH6RXUFH5HSODFHPHQW ZDV$', FRQW¶G

+21(<:(// $8723,/27
*$50,1 %(1',;.,1*
*$'
.)&
ZR.$
.&3
Z;;
$GDSWHU&DUG
3 3 3
3,7&+$&287+, \ 3,7&+$77,78'(+,
3,7&+$&287/2 V *<52&20021
V

52//$&287+, && 52//$77,78'(+,
52//$&287/2 ++ *<52&20021
V
9$&5(),1+, Z 9*(;&,7$7,21
9$&5(),1/2 ) 9* 3:5 5()
V
M $3',6&


12 5()(572$8723,/27 ,)7+(*$',687,/,=('723529,'($77,78'(,1)250$7,2172
$77,78'(9$/,' ',6&211(&7',$*5$0 7+($8723,/27&20387(57+($8723,/27',6&211(&76,*1$/
1& 1& )25($&+$8723,/27 0867*27+528*+7+(*$'72$//2:7+(*$'72
5(/$<
&20 02'(/ ',6&211(&77+($8723,/27:+(15(48,5('

Figure F-27. GAD 43/43e Honeywell (Bendix-King) Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 14

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-96
$8723,/27±$WWLWXGH6RXUFH5HSODFHPHQW ZDV$', FRQW¶G

*$50,1 +21(<:(// $8723,/27

%(1',;.,1*
*$'
.)& Z.$
.&3 .$
Z;; $XWRSLORW
$GDSWHU&DUG 0RQLWRU
3 3 3 3
3,7&+$&287+, 3,7&+$77,78'(+,
3,7&+$&287/2 1 *<52&20021
V \ 3,7&+*<52 + 571

V++ 3 3,7&+52//5()

52//$&287+, 52//$77,78'(+,
52//$&287/2
V && 52//*<52 + 571

9$&5(),1+, Z ) 9*(;&,7$7,21
9$&5(),1/2 ) 9* 3:5 5()
V
M $3',6&

H[LVWLQJZLULQJ VKRZQIRUUHIHUHQFHRQO\
12 5()(572$8723,/27
$77,78'(9$/,' ',6&211(&7',$*5$0 ,)7+(*$',687,/,=('723529,'($77,78'(,1)250$7,2172
1& 1& )25($&+$8723,/27
5(/$< 7+($8723,/27&20387(57+($8723,/27',6&211(&76,*1$/
&20 02'(/ 0867*27+528*+7+(*$'72$//2:7+(*$'72
',6&211(&77+($8723,/27:+(15(48,5('

Figure F-27. GAD 43/43e Honeywell (Bendix-King) Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 3 of 14

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-97
$8723,/27±$WWLWXGH6RXUFH5HSODFHPHQW ZDV$',.9*
+21(<:(// %(1',;.,1* $8723,/27
*$50,1
.)&
*$' ZR.$ .)& ZR.$ .)&
3 .&3 .&3 .$& .&3
729$&+= Z;; )OLJKW $XWRSLORW )OLJKW
9$&5(),1+, $,5&5$)732:(5 $GDSWHU&DUG &RPSXWHU &RPSXWHU &RPSXWHU

9$&5(),1/2
3 3 - -73 73 3 3
3,7&+$&287+, \ 3,7&+$&+,
3,7&+$&287/2 V 3,7&+$&/2
V

52//$&287+, && 52//$&+,

52//$&287/2 ++ 52//$&/2
V
9$&5(),1+,
9$&287+, V Z
9$&5()+,
9$&287/2

&20 %% 9*9$/,'
$77,78'(
1&
9$/,'5(/$<
12

9'&287
)257+($%29($8723,/2767+(5(,6121(('725287(7+($8723,/27
',6&211(&76,*1$/7+528*+7+(*$'

Figure F-27. GAD 43/43e Honeywell (Bendix-King) Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 4 of 14

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-98
$8723,/27±$WWLWXGH6RXUFH5HSODFHPHQW ZDV$',.9*

*$50,1 +21(<:(// %(1',;.,1*

$8723,/27

*$' .)& Z.$ .)& Z.$
3 .&3 .$ .&3 .$& .$
729$&+= Z;; $XWRSLORW )OLJKW $XWRSLORW $XWRSLORW
9$&5(),1+, $,5&5$)732:(5 $GDSWHU&DUG 0RQLWRU &RPSXWHU &RPSXWHU 0RQLWRU

9$&5(),1/2
3 3 3 - -73 73 3
3,7&+$&287+, 3,7&+$&+,
3,7&+$&287/2 5 5 3,7&+$&/2
V \ 3,7&+*<52 + 571
V 6 6 3,7&+*<52 & 571

52//$&287+, 52//$&+,
52//$&287/2 1 1 52//$&/2
V && 52//*<52 + 571
++ 3 3 52//*<52 & 571

9$&287+, Z ) ) 9$&5()+,
9$&5(),1+, V
9$&287/2

&20 %% 9*9$/,'
$77,78'(
1& 1&
9$/,'5(/$<
12
H[LVWLQJZLULQJ VKRZQIRU
9'&287 UHIHUHQFHRQO\
)257+($%29($8723,/2767+(5(,6121(('725287(7+($8723,/27
',6&211(&76,*1$/7+528*+7+(*$'

Figure F-27. GAD 43/43e Honeywell (Bendix-King) Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 5 of 14

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-99
$8723,/27',6&211(&7±.$3$1'.$3.)&
72$3&% 72$3 75,0
$3',6&5(/$< :$51,1*
(;,67,1* 621$/(57
12 1& 12 1&
72*$'&%
.&;$3&20387(5

.$325.$3.)&
$3',6&6: & & ',6(1*
(;,67,1*
3;
*$50,1 96:,7&+('3:5,1

*$' 3 (1*
%
$3',6&
12
$77,78'(9$/,'5(/$<
&20 $3',6&
5(/$<
(;7(51$/
25
72$3&% 72$3 75,0
:$51,1*
621$/(57

72*$'&%
.&;$3&20387(5

.$3.)&25.)&
$3',6& ',6(1*
75,0,175 3;
*$50,1 (;,67,1* 96:,7&+('3:5,1

*$' 3 (1*
%
$3',6&
12
$77,78'(9$/,'5(/$<
&20 $3',6&
5(/$<
(;7(51$/

Figure F-27. GAD 43/43e Honeywell (Bendix-King) Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 6 of 14

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-100
$8723,/27',6&211(&7±.$3.)&
72$3&% $3',6&5(/$<
(;,67,1*
1&
&
72*$'&% 12 .&02'(

$3',6& &
12
&21752//(5
75,0$50 ',6(1* 1&
.$3.)&
(;,67,1*
*$50,1 &
12 3

*$' 3 (1*
1&
' $3',6&
12
$77,78'(9$/,'5(/$<
&20
$3',6&
5(/$< 72237,21$/
(;7(51$/ <$:$;,6

$8723,/27',6&211(&7±.)&
72
72$8723,/27 3,7&+52//
6(5926&% 3,7&+75,0$1'
237,21$/<$:
6(5926 .&)/,*+7
72*$'&% &20387(5
$3',6&75,0 ',6(1* .)&
,17(56: 3
*$50,1 (;,67,1*

*$' 3 (1*
$3',6&

12
$77,78'(9$/,'5(/$<
&20 $3',6&
5(/$<
(;7(51$/

Figure F-27. GAD 43/43e Honeywell (Bendix-King) Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 7 of 14

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-101
$8723,/27',6&211(&7±.)&

72$8723,/27
)/,*+7',5(&725&%
.&3)/,*+7
72(/(&75,&
72*$'&% 75,03:5 &20387(5
$3',6& $3',6& ',6(1* .)&
75,0,17537 75,0,17537 3
*$50,1 6:,7&+ 6:,7&+

*$' 3 237,21$/ (;,67,1* (1*
96:,7&+(' $3',6&

12
$77,78'(9$/,'5(/$<
&20 $3',6&
5(/$<
(;7(51$/

$3',6&
6:,7&+ (6
(;,67,1*
$8723,/27',6&211(&7±.)&
*$'86('725(3/$&(.,$', &23,/27

72$8723,/27&%
.$ 3,/27
72*$'&% 75,0$'$37(5
3 ',6(1*

*$50,1 (0(5*$3<'',6&

*$' 3 (1*

12
$77,78'(9$/,'5(/$<
&20 $3',6&
5(/$<
(;7(51$/

Figure F-27. GAD 43/43e Honeywell (Bendix-King) Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 8 of 14

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-102
$8723,/27±%DUR&RUUHFWLRQ5HSODFHPHQW
$8723,/27
+21(<:(// %(1',;.,1*
.$3
.$3 .)& .)& .)&
.& .$6% .&
[[[RQO\ .$6&
*$50,1 3 3 3% 3 3 3&
*$' 3
1&
<$:5$7(%$52&255287 %$526(7 ,1
%$52;3'55()(5(1&(
<$:5$7(%$52&255*1'
V

$8723,/27±5DWH*\UR5HSODFHPHQW ZDV.5*
$8723,/27
+21(<:(// %(1',;.,1*
.)& .)& .)& .)&

*$50,1 .& .&3 .$& .&3

<DZ&RPS )OLJKW&RPS $XWRSLORW&RPS $XWRSLORW&RPS
*$' 3 3 3 3 3 73 %3 3 3
<$:5$7(%$52&255287 ; <$:5$7( +,*+
<$:5$7( /2
<$:5$7(%$52&255*1' & =
V

12 $3,17(5/2&.
$3,17(5/2&.5(/$< 1& 1&
&20

+21(<:(// $8723,/27
%(1',;.,1*
.)&
*$50,1 .& .&
<DZ&RPS.&
*$'
3 3 3 3;
<$:5$7(%$52&255287 <$:5$7( +,*+
<$:5$7( /2
<$:5$7(%$52&255*1' &
V
<$:$1181&,$7(

<'$1181&,$7(,1

Figure F-27. GAD 43/43e Honeywell (Bendix-King) Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 9 of 14

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-103
$8723,/27±.$6%5HSODFHPHQW
$8723,/27
+21(<:(// $1181&,$7253$1(/
%(1',;.,1*
.)&
.$

3
6(5,$/&/2&.
6(5,$/'$7$
6752%(

*$50,1 $8723,/27
+21(<:(//
*$'H %(1',;.,1*
.$3
.)&
.&
.&
3;
3
6752%(
$/735(6(/(&7&/2&. / 6(5,$/&/2&.
$/735(6(/(&7'$7$ - 6(5,$/'$7$
V

$/735(6(/(&7$''5 . 6(5,$/$''5
$/735(6(/(&7$''5 0 6(5,$/$''5
V

Figure F-27. GAD 43/43e Honeywell (Bendix-King) Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 10 of 14

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-104
$8723,/27±.$6&5HSODFHPHQW +21(<:(//
$8723,/2702'(
%(1',;.,1*
&21752/3$1(/
.)&
.)&
.0&

33
6(5,$/&/2&.
6(5,$/'$7$

*$50,1 $8723,/27
*$'H
+21(<:(//
%(1',;.,1*
.)&
.)&
.&3
3 3 3
$/735(6(/(&7&/2&. 6(5,$/&/2&.
$/735(6(/(&7'$7$ 6(5,$/'$7$
V

$/735(6(/(&7$''5 &200$'5
$/735(6(/(&7$''5 &200$'5
V

$/726&,1387

Figure F-27. GAD 43/43e Honeywell (Bendix-King) Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 11 of 14

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-105
$8723,/27±.$65HSODFHPHQW 0(7$/$,5&5$)721/<
*$50,1 $8723,/2702'(
+21(<:(// &21752/3$1(/
*$'H %(1',;.,1*
.)&
.&
3 3 3
$/76:,7&+,1 ) $/76:,7&+287
)'6:,7&+,1 & )'6:,7&+287
9(5775,06:,7&+,1 9(5775,06:,7&+287

+21(<:(//
%(1',;.,1*
.'&$'&
(;,67,1*$,5&5$)7:,5,1* .)&21/<
< 9(5775,06:,7&+,1

$8723,/27
+21(<:(//
%(1',;.,1*
72(;,67,1*
$,5&5$)7:,5,1* .)& .)&
.& .&3
3 3 - -
$/7/,*+7 G G $/7/,*+7
*6/,*+7 M M *6/,*+7

9(5775,06:,7&+287 D D 9(5775,06:,7&+,1
$/76:,7&+287 [ [ $/76:,7&+,1
)'6:,7&+287 $$ $$ )'6:,7&+,1

*2$5281'6:,7&+ / / *2$5281'6:,7&+

*$6:
(;,67,1*

Figure F-27. GAD 43/43e Honeywell (Bendix-King) Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 12 of 14

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-106
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('

V
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'

$7*$'H&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'60867
%(/(667+$1&211(&727+(56+,(/'*5281'672$,5&5$)7&+$66,6:,7+$66+257$
&21'8&725$635$&7,&$/

)25*$'H6(783,7(065()(5726(&7,21

:,5,1*6+2:1)253,7&+52//$&$1'9$&5(),1,65(&200(1'('+2:(9(5,7,6$&&(37$%/(
7286((;,67,1*:,5,1*)5207+(*<52,167$//$7,21 ,)(;,67,1*:,5,1*,687,/,=('3,1723,1
&217,18,7<6+28/'%(9(5,),('%(7:((17+(*'8$1'$8723,/27&20387(5

5(/$<&217$&766833257$0$;,0802)$03(5(66:,7&+,1*$1'$03(5(6&217,18286
&855(17

,167$//(;7(51$/$3',6&211(&75(/$<,172$3',6&211(&7&,5&8,7$66+2:1(;7(51$/$3
',6&5(/$<&217$&76086768332577+(0$;,080&855(177+528*+7+($3',6&211(&7
:,5,1*

$//:,5(6)5205(/$<72$3',6&,13870867%(2)7+(6,=(63(&,),(',17+($8723,/27
,167$//$7,210$18$/7268332577+(&855(17/2$')5207+(',6&211(&7&,5&8,7

7+(<$:5$7(6(77,1*0867%(³121(´726833257%$52&255(&7,21287387

,)7+((1&2',1*$/7,0(7(5,6%(,1*5(3/$&('$%/,1'(1&2'(50867%(86('726833/<*5$<
&2'($/7,78'(727+($8723,/27

32:(5727+(621$/(570867127%(,17(55837('%<7+((;7(51$/*$'H$3',6&5(/$<

,)'8$/$3',6&75,0,175376:,7&+(6$5(,167$//(',167$//7+(*$'(;7(51$/5(/$<
%(7:((17+(.&3$1'),567$3',6&75,0,175376:,7&+

7+(*$'H,17(51$/5(/$<µ12¶&217$&7 3 ,6&211(&7('727+(µ&20¶&217$&7

3 :+(17+(*$'$77,78'(287387,69$/,'$1'23(127+(5:,6(

,)7+(*$'H,686('725(3/$&(7+($',$1'7+(:,5,1*727+((;,67,1*$',,65(029('
(1685(7+$7*5281'5()(5(1&(3,165(0$,1-803(5('$66+2:1

3 5(/$<&217$&71& 0$<%(/()723(1:+(1,17(5)$&,1*727+(.)&$8723,/27%87

0867%(*5281'('$66+2:1:+(1,17(5)$&,1*727+(.)&

Figure F-27. GAD 43/43e Honeywell (Bendix-King) Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 13 of 14

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-107
:+(1(9(53266,%/((;,67,1*6285&(62)9$&6+28/'%(87,/,=(')257+,65()(5(1&(,1387
,),7,6'(6,5('7287,/,=($127+(59$&5()(5(1&(,167($'2)7+(*$'H&211(&7$6
6+2:1%(/2:7+(9$&6285&(7+$7,687,/,=('0867352'8&($6,1862,'$//2:12,6(
:$9()250±$648$5(:$9(,6127$&&(37$%/(7+(9$&287387)5207+(*$'H&$1
6285&(83720,//,$0362)&855(17

*$'H 3 $8723,/27

9$&287+, 1&
9$&5(),1+, 9$&5()+,
9$&/2 9$&5()/2
V
9$&5(),1+, 1&
9$&5(),1/2 1& 72$,5&5$)79$&
5()(5(1&(

RU
*$'H 3 $8723,/27
9$&287+, 1&
9$&5(),1+, 9$&5()+,
V
9$&/2
9$&5(),1+, 1&
9$&5(),1/2 1& 72$,5&5$)79$&
5()(5(1&(

:+(1,167$//,1*7+(*$'H$6$1$77,78'(6285&(,1$1,167$//$7,2187,/,=,1*7+(.$
$8723,/27021,7257+(*$'H3,7&+$1'52//2873876$5(&211(&7('727+(.$$6
6+2:1$1'127',5(&7/<727+()/,*+7&20387(5$//27+(5&211(&7,216727+(.$$5(
5(7$,1('$6,6

7+,6287387&$121/<%(86('723529,'(%$52&255(&7,21,1)250$7,2125<$:5$7(
,1)250$7,21$1'127%27+6,08/7$1(286/<

,)7+(*$'H,686('723529,'(%$52&255(&7,21727+($8723,/277+($8723,/270867%(
5(&$/,%5$7('727+($/7,78'(6285&(5()(5726(&7,21

7+(9'&287387)5207+(*$'H&$16285&(83720,//,$0362)&855(17

7+(*5281'5()(5(1&($73,6$/6286('%<7+(.'&7+(&211(&7,21727+(.'&
0867%(/()7,17$&7$63$572)7+,602',),&$7,21

7+(.$$.$3$$1181&,$7253$1(/,612/21*(55(48,5('6,1&(02'(,1)250$7,21,6
75$160,77('727+(*'89,$$5,1&&216(48(17/<7+($1181&,$7253$1(/,6127
6+2:1$6&211(&7('727+(&/2&.$1''$7$%86(6

:+(17+(.5*5$7(*<52,65(029('$1'5(3/$&('%<7+(*$'H30867%(
&211(&7('',5(&7/<723;$66+2:1

27+(5$8723,/27,1387686(7+(9$&5()(5(1&()257+(&2856($1'+($',1*'$7806
5()(572),*85()

$/7,78'(26&,//$7256,*1$/72.&30867%(5(7$,1('

,167$//$7,216:,7+7+(.16)/,*+70$1$*(0(176<67(0$5(1276833257('

(;,67,1*&211(&7,21672$,5&5$)7:,5,1*0867%(5(7$,1('(1685(02'($1181&,$7,216$5(
67,//'5,9(1%<7+($8723,/27

(;,67,1*&211(&7,21672237,21$/.$$1181&,$7250867%(5(7$,1(' ,),167$//('

Figure F-27. GAD 43/43e Honeywell (Bendix-King) Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 14 of 14

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-108 Rev. L
*$50,1 $8723,/27
*$'H &2//,16

$3&$(+-
)*& )<'
3
- -
3,7&+'$7$; 3,7&+'$7$,,;
3,7&+'$7$< 3,7&+'$7$,,<
3,7&+'$7$= 3,7&+'$7$,,=
V
3,7&+'$7$,;
3,7&+'$7$,<

52//'$7$; 52//'$7$,,;
52//'$7$< 52//'$7$,,<
52//'$7$= 52//'$7$,,=
V
52//'$7$,;
52//'$7$,<

<$:5$7(287 <$:5$7(6,*

<$:5$7(287 <$:5$7(6,*
V
$77,78'(9$/,'287 *<529$/,'

9'&287 72
$77,78'(9$/,'&20021 *'8

9$&+=5(),
9$&5(),1+, 9$&+=5(),,

9$&5(),1/2 9$&,1/2
V

$,5&5$)79$&+=
5()(5(1&(92/7$*(

$/7,78'(35(6(/(&7,17(5)$&(
$8723,/27
*$50,1 &2//,16
*$'H $36)*6
*$'RU $3&$(
3 *$'$ )&3 +-
)&3$ )*& )<'
35(6(/(&702132:(5 $9,21,&6
$
%86 - - -
35(6(/(&7021287 $/735(021
$/7,78'((5525287 :+7 $/735((5525
$/7,78'((5525287 %/8 $/735((5525
V
',6&5(7(287
.12%,1027,21
.12%,1027,21

Figure F-28. GAD 43/43e – Collins Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-109
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('

V
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'

$7*$'H&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'60867
%(/(667+$1&211(&727+(56+,(/'*5281'672$,5&5$)7&+$66,6:,7+$66+257$
&21'8&725$635$&7,&$/

21/<63(&,),&$3602'(/6:,//$&&(37$77,78'()5207+(*$'H6((6(&7,21(IRU
&203$7,%,/,7<,1)250$7,21

)25*$'H6(783,7(065()(5726(&7,217+(<$:5$7(6(77,1*0867%(09'(*
6(&726833257$36

9$&+=5()(5(1&(32:(5)257+(*$'H*'8$1'$8723,/270867%()5207+(
6$0(6285&($1',13+$6(

:+(1(9(53266,%/((;,67,1*6285&(62)9$&6+28/'%(87,/,=(')257+,65()(5(1&(,1387
,)7+((;,67,1*+=5()(5(1&(,6%(,1*5(029(')5207+($,5&5$)77+(*$'H&$1%(
86('$67+(9$&+=5()(5(1&($6)2//2:6

*$'H 3
9$&5(),1+,
9$&287+, 72$8723,/27*'8$1'27+(5(48,30(17
9$&287/2 5(48,5,1*$9$&5()(5(1&(
V

9$&5(),1+, $,5&5$)79$&
9$&5(),1/2 +=32:(5
V

7+(9$&287387,6&$3$%/(2)6833/<,1*8372P$$79$& 9$ 7227+(5(48,30(17

,)7+($36+$6$38/6('<$:5$7(,1387 (*)5207+(0&6 7+(17+,6&211(&7,21727+(

*$',61275(48,5('

7+(9'&287387)5207+(*$'&$16285&(83720,//,$0362)&855(17

72*$'H0$,132:(5,1387 3 5()(572),*85()

7+(*$'&$1127%(86('723529,'(7+($/7,78'(35(6(/(&725)81&7,21:,7+$1<$36
&20387(57+$7&855(17/<86(67+(35($/7,78'(35(6(/(&725

$'',7,21$/,17(5)$&(672&2//,16$8723,/27686,1*7+(*$'H$5(6+2:1,1),*85()

Figure F-28. GAD 43/43e – Collins Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-110 Rev. L
+($',1*
9$&5()(5(1&(,1$,5&5$)787,/,=('

*$'$+56$'$37(5 3 ,17(5)$&,1*(48,30(17

+'*6<1&+52287; ;
+'*6<1&+52287< <
+'*6<1&+52287= =
V $5,1&
6<1&+52
+'*9$/,'287 9$/,' +($',1*,1
9$&5(),1+, +, 9$&
9$&/2 /2 5()
V
9$&287+, 1&
9$&5(),1+, 1&
9$&5(),1/2 1&
$,5&5$)79$&+=
5()(5(1&(92/7$*(

+($',1*
9$&5()(5(1&(5(029(')520$,5&5$)7

*$'$+56$'$37(5 3 ,17(5)$&,1*(48,30(17

+'*6<1&+52287; ;
+'*6<1&+52287< <

+'*6<1&+52287= =
V
$5,1&
+'*9$/,'287 9$/,' 6<1&+52
+($',1*,1
9$&5(),1+,
9$&287+, +, 9$&
9$&/2 /2 5()
V

9$&5(),1+,
$,5&5$)79$&+=
9$&5(),1/2
V

127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
V
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
$7*$'*'8$1'*56&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'
/($'60867%(/(667+$1&211(&727+(56+,(/'*5281'672$,5&5$)7&+$66,6:,7+$66+257$
&21'8&725$635$&7,&$/
)25*$'H6(783,7(065()(5726(&7,21
'(9,&(67+$7&211(&7727+((;,67,1*+($',1*6<1&+520$<%(&211(&7('727+(*$'+($',1*
6<1&+5228738766+,(/'('7:,67('75,3/(3$,5,65(&200(1'('%87(;,67,1*:,5,1*0$<%(86('
287387,6*5281'(':+(1+($',1*,69$/,'23(127+(5:,6(
237,21$/&211(&7,21127$//6<67(067+$787,/,=(6<1&+52+($',1*$&&(37$+($',1*9$/,'
,1387
:+(1(9(53266,%/((;,67,1*6285&(62)9$&6+28/'%(87,/,=('7+(9$&287387)5207+(
*$'&$16285&(8372P$2)&855(17

Figure F-29. GAD 43/43e – Synchro Heading Interconnect

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-111
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-112 Rev. L
$8723,/27

%HQGL[
$8723,/27
0& 0'
( ) $
*'8 &RPS$PS &RPS$PS *
3 3 3 3 3 3
$3+($',1*(5525+, +'*'$7+¶

$3+($',1*(5525/2 +'*'$7&
V 7
NN

$3&2856((5525+, &56'$7+¶

$3&2856((5525/2 &56'$7&
V 7
NN
/$7(5$//()7287 925/2&/7,1
/$7(5$/5,*+7287 925/2&57,1
V

9(57,&$/83287 *683
9(57,&$/'2:1287 *6'1
V

9'&

1&
/2&

,/6*36$3352$&+
',6&287

/2&5(/$<
$3$&5()+,
$3$&5()/2
V

$,5&5$)79$&+=
5()(5(1&(92/7$*(

Figure F-30. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Bendix

Sheet 1 of 3

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-113
$', (;,67,1*:,5($1')'6:,7&+
RQFRSLORW¶VVLGH PXVWEHUHWDLQHG
&ROOLQV
2))
)'9
3 3 9'&

2))02'( = 21
)/,*+7
)'52//5,*+7 8 ',5(&725
)'52///()7 7
237,21$/
)'3,7&+83 )
)'3,7&+'2:1 N
$8723,/27
%HQGL[0' &20387(5
)Z
*$50,1
)'$GDSWHU
*'8 3 3 3
)'(1$%/(,1 )'(1*

)'52//5,*+7 )'52//&0'57
)'52///()7 )'52//&0'/7
V
)'3,7&+83 )'3,7&+&0'83
)'3,7&+'2:1 )'3,7&+&0''1
V

)/,*+7',5(&725±'8$/*'8,167$//$7,216
(;,67,1*:,5($1')'6:,7&+
PXVWEHUHWDLQHG
2))
*$50,1
*'8 3 9'&

)'(1$%/(,1 21
)/,*+7
)'52//5,*+7 ',5(&725
)'52///()7
V

)'3,7&+83
)'3,7&+'2:1
V $8723,/27
%HQGL[0'
)Z
*$50,1
)'$GDSWHU
*'8 3 3 3
V V
)'(1$%/(,1 )'(1*

)'52//5,*+7 )'52//&0'57
)'52///()7 )'52//&0'/7
V

)'3,7&+83 )'3,7&+&0'83
)'3,7&+'2:1 )'3,7&+&0''1
V

Figure F-30. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Bendix

Sheet 2 of 3

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-114 Rev. L
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('

*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
V

$77+(*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'6
0867%(/(667+$1&211(&727+(56+,(/'*5281'672$,5&5$)7&+$66,6:,7+$66+257$
&21'8&725$635$&7,&$/

5()(5(1&(6(&7,21)25*'8$8723,/27&21),*85$7,21

&211(&7,216$5(5(48,5('21/<)257+26(,138767+$77+($8723,/27&20387(568332576

86(75,$'75$16)250(5317<325(48,9$/(17,1620(,167$//$7,216(;,67,1*
75$16)250(56 &2//,1631 0$<%(86('

,7,61(&(66$5<72,167$//$5(/$<72,19(577+(32/$5,7<2)7+(³,/6*36$3352$&+´6,*1$/
)520$&7,9(/2:72$&7,9(+,*+)25,1387,1727+(()&20387(5$03/,),(5

)/,*+7',5(&725:,5,1*72(;,67,1*$',0867%(',6&211(&7(',)7+,6,1',&$725,686('$6$
67$1'%<,167580(17)257+(*'8,)7+,6,1',&$725,6%(,1*5(/2&$7('727+(&23,/27¶6
6,'(:,5,1*0$<%(&211(&7(',13$5$//(/727+,6$',7+(:,5,1*727+,6$',0867%(
&211(&7(',1$&&25'$1&(:,7+7+(0$18)$&785(5¶6,16758&7,2167+,6$',0867%(/2&$7('
21,1$&&25'$1&(:,7+6(&7,21

&211(&7*'872(;,67,1*)/,*+7',5(&7256:,7&+$66+2:1*'8)'(1$%/(,1,6$&7,9(
+,*+

)25'8$/*'86<67(06&211(&77+()'6,*1$/672*'8$66+2:1$//27+(5$8723,/27
6,*1$/66+28/'%(&211(&7('21/<72*'8

,)7+()/,*+7',5(&725,6%(,1*',63/$<('217+(&23,/27¶6$',7+,6)/,*+7',5(&725$/,*10(17
0867%(&255(&7/<$'-867(',1$&&25'$1&(:,7+7+(0$18)$&785(5¶6,16758&7,21635,2572
0$.,1*$1<$'-8670(176727+(*'8

)25'8$/*'8,167$//$7,216)/,*+7',5(&725:,5,1*0867%(',6&211(&7(')5207+((;,67,1*
$',

(;,67,1*)/,*+7',5(&7256:,7&+0867%(5(7$,1('

$'',7,21$/'523'2:15(6,672560$<%(5(48,5('72(1685(7+$77+(+($',1*$1'&2856(
(55256,*1$/6727+(( &20387(5$03/,),(5$5(:,7+,17+(&255(&723(5$7,1*5$1*(
5()(572%(1',;,%3$57,167$//$7,210$18$/0&$)&63$5$*5$3+
³7528%/(6+227,1*352&('85(6)2535()/,*+7&+(&.287´

7+($8723,/27&20387(50867%(&21),*85(')25$&2//,1631 )'&9 +6,,125'(572

+$9(7+(&255(&7+($',1*$1'&2856((5525 '$780 6,*1$/627+(5:,6($'',7,21$/
$'-8670(176:,//%(5(48,5('5()(572%(1',;³,%0'$)&6,167$//$7,210$18$/´
6(&7,21,,3$5$*5$3+³)/,*+7&+(&.$1'&$/,%5$7,21´)25$'-8670(1767+$7&$1%(0$'(,1
7+(*25$)/,*+7&21752//(55()(572,%3$5$*5$3+³3267,167$//$7,21
&+(&.287´)25$'',7,21$/,1)250$7,21

7+(9$&+=(;&,7$7,21)257+($8723,/27 3 $1'7+(9$&+=5()(5(1&(

92/7$*()257+(*'8 3 0867%(,13+$6(:,7+($&+27+(5)253523(5)(('%$&.2)
7+(+($',1*$1'&2856((55256727+($8723,/27&20387(5

'()$8/72873873,16+2:1,7,65(&200(1'('7+$77+('()$8/7287387%(87,/,=('
:+(1(9(53266,%/(+2:(9(57+,6)81&7,210$<%(&21),*85('21$127+(5$9$,/$%/(
',6&5(7(2873875()(5726(&7,21&)25'(7$,/621+2:72&21),*85(7+(',6&5(7(
2873876

Figure F-30. Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Bendix

Sheet 3 of 3

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-115
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-116 Rev. L
*$50,1 *$50,1
*'8 *65
3 3
*6567$786,1 67$786',6&5(7( 287

3
*655(027(3:5 ,5,',805073:521

56,1 56287
56287 56,1
56*1' 6,*1$/*5281'
V V

$8',23$1(/

7(/0,&$8',2287+, *65$8',2,1+,
7(/0,&$8',2287/2 *65$8',2,1/2
237,21$/
7(/$8',2,1+, *65$8',2287+,
7(/$8',2,1/2 *65$8',2287/2
V

127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
V
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
$7*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'60867%(
/(667+$1&211(&77+(6+,(/'*5281'6$77+(*6572,76&211(&725%$&.6+(//,1
$&&25'$1&(:,7+*65,167$//$7,21,16758&7,216
'()$8/72873873,16+2:1,7,65(&200(1'('7+$77+('()$8/7287387%(87,/,=(':+(1(9(5
3266,%/(+2:(9(57+,6)81&7,210$<%(&21),*85('21$127+(5$9$,/$%/(',6&5(7(287387
5()(5726(&7,21&)25'(7$,/621+2:72&21),*85(7+(',6&5(7(2873876
237,21$/$8',2&211(&7,216$5(5(48,5(',)7+(3+21()($785(2)7+(*65,687,/,=('

Figure F-31. GSR 56 Iridium Interconnect

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-117
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-118 Rev. L
*$50,1 6,1*/(5$'$5$/7,0(7(5
*'8
,),167$//('
3
5$'$/7386+727(67
Q
',6&2871

$5,1&,1$
$5,1&,1% 5$'$5
V
)5(( $/7,0(7(5
)/,*+7 &2//,16 +21(<:(//
*$50,1 5$ 5$& .5$%
*'8
3 3 3 3
5$'$/7386+727(67
Q 8 386+727(67,1
',6&2871
V
$5,1&,1$ % $5,1&287$
$5,1&,1% & $5,1&287%

V

'8$/5$'$5$/7,0(7(56

5$'$5
)5(( $/7,0(7(5
)/,*+7 &2//,16 +21(<:(//
*$50,1
*'8 5$ 5$& .5$%
3 3 3 3
5$'$/7386+727(67
Q 8 386+727(67,1
',6&2871

$5,1&,1$ % $5,1&287$
$5,1&,1% & $5,1&287%
V

5$'$5
)5(( $/7,0(7(5
)/,*+7 &2//,16 +21(<:(//
*$50,1 5$ 5$& .5$%
*'8
3 3 3 3
5$'$/7386+727(67
Q 8 386+727(67,1
',6&2871

$5,1&,1$ % $5,1&287$
$5,1&,1% & $5,1&287%

Figure F-32. Radar Altimeter (ARINC 429) Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-119
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('

*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
V

$7*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'60867%(
/(667+$1&211(&727+(56+,(/'*5281'672$,5&5$)7*5281':,7+$66+257$
&21'8&725$635$&7,&$/

7+(5(,612'()$8/7&21),*85$7,21)257+,6',6&5(7(287387$18186('',6&5(7(287387
0867%($66,*1('727+,6)81&7,215()(5726(&7,21&)25'(7$,/621+2:72&21),*85(
7+(',6&5(7(2873876

)5(()/,*+75$5$'$5$/7,0(7(5 31;;;;;

,)'8$/*'8V$5(,167$//('7+(5$'$5$/7,0(7(50867%((1$%/('21%27+*'8V

)25*'86(783,7(065()(5726(&7,21

'()$8/7$5,1&,13876+2:127+(5$5,1&,1387 ,1387621/< 0$<%(86(',167($'

5()(5726(&7,21)25'(7$,/621+2:72&21),*85(7+($5,1&,13876

&211(&7,21)5205$'$5$/7,0(7(5&$1%(0$'(72%27+*'8¶6$66+2:12521/<&211(&7('
7221(*'8 (,7+(53,/27¶625&23,/27¶6 $1'5$'$5$/7,78'(,1)250$7,21$1'&21752/&5266
),//('727+(27+(5*'8',5(&7&211(&7,2172($&+*'8,635()(55('&5266),//237,21
6+28/'21/<%(86(',)7+(5($5($1,168)),&,(17180%(52)*'8$5,1&,13876726833257
$//$5,1&,17(5)$&(6,1$3$57,&8/$5,167$//$7,21

7+(63(('6(/(&7 352*5$03,1 3 0867%(/()723(1)25$/2:63(('$5,1&

287387,)+,*+63(('23(5$7,21,6'(6,5('7+(&255(6321',1**'8$5,1&,13870867
%(6(772+,*+63(('

Figure F-32. Radar Altimeter (ARINC 429) Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-120 Rev. L
&20326,7(9,'(2'(9,&(±6,1*/('8$/*'8,167$//$7,216

*$50,1*'8 RU &$0(5$6<67(0
0D[9L]
3 (96
-
&20326,7(9,'(2,1 5* 9,'(2287
&20326,7(9,'(2571 9,'(2571

127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('

)25*'86(783,7(065()(5726(&7,21

86(5-&$%/(25(48,9$/(17&$%/(:,7+2+0&+$5$&7(5,67,&,03('(1&(

5()(572$33(1',;( ( )255(675,&7,21621&$0(5$,167$//$7,21$1'/2&$7,21

,)7+(&'86<67(0,',6$/62*2,1*723,13*5281',7727+(6+,(/'%/2&.,167($'
5()(572),*85())25'(7$,/6

Figure F-33. External Video Interconnect

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-121
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-122 Rev. L
'8$/*71,17(5&211(&7±6,1*/(*'8

*'83)'0)' 3 *71;;;;

3

(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V V

3 3
56,1 56287
56*1' 56*1'
V V
7,0(0$5.,1$ 7,0(0$5.287$
*36 7,0(0$5.,1% 7,0(0$5.287%
V V

$5,1&,1$ $5,1&287$
$5,1&,1% $5,1&287%
V V

$5,1&287$ $5,1&,1$
$5,1&287% $5,1&,1%
V V

*71;;;;
3
$5,1&,1$

$5,1&,1%
V
56,1 56287
56*1' 56*1'
V V

*36 7,0(0$5.,1$ 7,0(0$5.287$

7,0(0$5.,1% 7,0(0$5.287%
V V
$5,1&287$
$5,1&,1$
$5,1&,1% $5,1&287%
V V
3 3
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V V

V
6<67(0,'352*5$0

Figure F-34. GPS Source Interconnect - GTN 6XX/7XX (Single GDU 620)
Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-123
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
V
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
$7*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'60867%(/(66
7+$1&211(&727+(56+,(/'*5281'672$,5&5$)7*5281':,7+$66+257$&21'8&725$6
35$&7,&$/
,)21/<21(*71;;;;,6,167$//('&211(&7$66+2:1)25*71
)25*'86(783,7(065()(5726(&7,21
)251$9,*$7256(783,7(065()(572$33(1',;(
,)$7$:6(48,33('*71;;;;81,7,6,167$//(',70867%(&211(&7('$6*71±21/<7$:6
$1181&,$7,216)520*71$5(',63/$<('217+(3)',)7:27$:6(48,33('81,76$5(,167$//('7+(
7$:6(48,33('81,77+$7,6&211(&7('727+($8',23$1(/0867%(&211(&7('$6*71
5()(5720$18)$&785(5¶6'2&80(17$7,21)25&203/(7(3,1287$1',17(5&211(&7,1)250$7,21
3,128762)27+(581,766+2:1)255()(5(1&(21/<
5()(5726(&7,21)25+6'%$5&+,7(&785(5(48,5(0(176
86($,5&5$)7*5$'(&$7(*25<(7+(51(7&$%/(7+,6,1&/8'(67+()2//2:,1*

0$18)$&785(5 31
3,&:,5($1'&$%/( $:*
(/(&7521,&&$%/(63(&,$/,67 $:*

'()$8/7$5,1&,138732576+2:1,7,65(&200(1'('7+$77+('()$8/7,1387%(87,/,=(':+(1(9(5
3266,%/(+2:(9(57+,6)81&7,210$<%(&21),*85('21$127+(5$9$,/$%/($5,1&,1387 ,13876
21/< 5()(5726(&7,21)25'(7$,/621+2:72&21),*85(7+($5,1&,13876

Figure F-34. GPS Source Interconnect - GTN 6XX/7XX (Single GDU 620)
Sheet 2 of 2

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-124 Rev. L
'8$/*71,17(5&211(&7±'8$/*'8
*71;;;;
*'83)'0)' 3
3

(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V V
3 3

$5,1&287$ $5,1&,1$
$5,1&287% $5,1&,1%
V V
56,1 56287
56*1' 56*1'
V V
7,0(0$5.,1$ 7,0(0$5.287$
*36 7,0(0$5.,1% 7,0(0$5.287%
V V

$5,1&,1$ $5,1&287$
$5,1&,1% $5,1&287%
V V
56,1
56*1'
V
7,0(0$5.,1$
*36 7,0(0$5.,1%
V

$5,1&,1$
$5,1&,1%
V

*'83)'0)' 3
56,1
56*1'
V
7,0(0$5.,1$
*36
7,0(0$5.,1%
V
*71;;;;
$5,1&,1$ 3
$5,1&,1%
V
56,1 56287
56*1' 56*1'
V V
7,0(0$5.,1$ 7,0(0$5.287$
*36
7,0(0$5.,1% 7,0(0$5.287%
V V

$5,1&,1$ $5,1&287$
$5,1&,1% $5,1&287%
V V

$5,1&287$ $5,1&,1$
$5,1&287% $5,1&,1%
V V
3 3
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V V

V
6<67(0,'352*5$0

Figure F-35. GPS Source Interconnect - GTN 6XX/7X (Dual GDU 620s)
Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-125
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
V
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
$7*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'60867%(/(66
7+$1&211(&727+(56+,(/'*5281'672$,5&5$)7*5281':,7+$66+257$&21'8&725$6
35$&7,&$/
)25,167$//$7,216:,7+'8$/*'8V7:268,7$%/(*366(16256$5(5(48,5(',)%27+$5(127*71
1$9,*$72567+(17+(27+(5*361$9,*$7250$<%(&211(&7('$6*36:,7+7+(&255(6321',1*3,16
&211(&7(',1/,(82)*71
)25*'86(783,7(065()(5726(&7,21
)251$9,*$7256(783,7(065()(572$33(1',;(
,)$7$:6(48,33('*71;;;;81,7,6,167$//(',70867%(&211(&7('$6*71±21/<7$:6
$1181&,$7,216)520*71$5(',63/$<('217+(3)',)7:27$:6(48,33('81,76$5(,167$//('7+(
7$:6(48,33('81,77+$7,6&211(&7('727+($8',23$1(/0867%(&211(&7('$6*71
5()(5720$18)$&785(5¶6'2&80(17$7,21)25&203/(7(3,1287$1',17(5&211(&7,1)250$7,21
3,128762)27+(581,766+2:1)255()(5(1&(21/<
5()(5726(&7,21)25+6'%$5&+,7(&785(5(48,5(0(176
86($,5&5$)7*5$'(&$7(*25<(7+(51(7&$%/(7+,6,1&/8'(67+()2//2:,1*
0$18)$&785(5 31
3,&:,5($1'&$%/( $:*
(/(&7521,&&$%/(63(&,$/,67 $:*

'()$8/7$5,1&,138732576+2:1,7,65(&200(1'('7+$77+('()$8/7,1387%(87,/,=(':+(1(9(5
3266,%/(+2:(9(57+,6)81&7,210$<%(&21),*85('21$127+(5$9$,/$%/($5,1&,1387 ,13876
21/< 5()(5726(&7,21)25'(7$,/621+2:72&21),*85(7+($5,1&,13876

Figure F-35. GPS Source Interconnect - GTN 6XX/7X (Dual GDU 620s)
Sheet 2 of 2

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-126 Rev. L
*$50,1:($7+(5
*:; *:; 5$'$5
*'83)'0)'
3 3 3
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V V

(7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7287$ 3 *'/$
(7+(51(7287%
V (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7287%
(7+(51(7,1$
*76;; (7+(51(7,1%
3 V

(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V

Figure F-36. HSDB Ethernet Interconnect (Single GDU 620)

Sheet 1 of 5

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-127
+6'%±6,1*/(*'86,1*/(*71±:,7+287*:;,17(5&211(&7

*'83)'0)' *71;;;; *76;;

3 3 3 3

(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V V V V

(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7287%
V V

*'/$
3
(7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287%
(7+(51(7287$
V
(7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7287%
(7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1%
V

Figure F-36. HSDB Ethernet Interconnect (Single GDU 620)

Sheet 2 of 5

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-128
+6'%±6,1*/(*'86,1*/(*71±:,7+*:;,17(5&211(&7
*$50,1:($7+(5
*:; *:; 5$'$5
*'83)'0)'
3 3 3

(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V V

*71;;;; *'/$
3 3 3

(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V V V V

*76;;
3
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V V

Figure F-36. HSDB Ethernet Interconnect (Single GDU 620)

Sheet 3 of 5

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-129
*$50,1:($7+(5
*:; *:; 5$'$5
3 3
(7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1%
*'83)'0)' *71;;;; *36 (7+(51(7287$
3 3 3
(7+(51(7287%
V
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1% 3 *'/$
V V V

(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V V V V

*71;;;; *36
3 3
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V V V

(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7287%
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7,1$ *76;;
3
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7,1%
V V (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7287%
V

Figure F-36. HSDB Ethernet Interconnect (Single GDU 620)

Sheet 4 of 5

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-130
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
V
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
$7*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'60867%(/(66
7+$1&211(&727+(56+,(/'*5281'672$,5&5$)7*5281':,7+$66+257$&21'8&725$6
35$&7,&$/
5()(5720$18)$&785(5¶6'2&80(17$7,21)25&203/(7(3,1287$1',17(5&211(&7,1)250$7,21
3,128762)27+(581,766+2:1)255()(5(1&(21/<
5()(5726(&7,21)25+6'%$5&+,7(&785(5(48,5(0(176
86($,5&5$)7*5$'(&$7(*25<(7+(51(7&$%/(7+,6,1&/8'(67+()2//2:,1*
0$18)$&785(5 31
3,&:,5($1'&$%/( $:*
(/(&7521,&&$%/(63(&,$/,67 $:*

+6'%32576(/(&7,2166+2:1$5(68**(67,216±$1<)5((+6'%325721$1/580$<%(86('81/(66
63(&,),&$//<5(48,5('%<7+(0$18)$&785(5¶6,167$//$7,21'2&80(17$7,21
,)$*'/$,6127,167$//('7+(*76;;6+28/'67,//%(&211(&7('',5(&7/<727+(*71;;;;
(7+(51(73257250$<%(86('7+(32577+$7,686('0867%((1$%/(',1&21),*85$7,2102'(
5()(5727+(*'/,167$//$7,210$18$/)25$'',7,21$/'(7$,/6

Figure F-36. HSDB Ethernet Interconnect (Single GDU 620)

Sheet 5 of 5

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-131
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-132 Rev. L
+6'%±'8$/*'8ZLWKRXW*71RU*:;,17(5&211(&7
*'83)'0)' *'/$
3 3

(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%

(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287% *76;;
V V 3 3

(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V V V

*'83)'0)'
3
(7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287%
(7+(51(7287$
V 3

(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
V V

Figure F-37. HSDB Ethernet Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)

Sheet 1 of 9

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-133
+6'%±'8$/*'8ZLWKRXW*71ZLWK*:;±35()(55(',17(5&211(&7

*$50,1:($7+(5
*:; *:; 5$'$5
*'83)'0)'
3 3 3

(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V V

(7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7287%
V

*'83)'0)' *'/$ *76;;

3 3 3

(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V 3 V V


(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
V V

Figure F-37. HSDB Ethernet Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)

Sheet 2 of 9

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-134
+6'%±'8$/*'8ZLWKRXW*71ZLWK*:;±$/7(51$7(,17(5&211(&7
'212786()251(:,167$//$7,216

*'83)'0)' *'/$
3 3

(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$ *$50,1:($7+(5
*:; *:; 5$'$5
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V V 3 3 3

(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V V V

*'83)'0)' *76;;
3 3

(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V 3 V V

(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
V V

Figure F-37. HSDB Ethernet Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)

Sheet 3 of 9

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-135
+6'%±'8$/*'86,1*/(*71 *36 ZLWKRXW*'/,17(5&211(&7
*$50,1:($7+(5
*:; *:; 5$'$5
*'83)'0)' *71;;;; *36
3 3 3 3 3

(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V V V V

(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$ *76;;
3
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
V V (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7287$
*'83)'0)' (7+(51(7287%
3 V

(7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287%
(7+(51(7287$
V

Figure F-37. HSDB Ethernet Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)

Sheet 4 of 9

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-136
+6'%±'8$/*'86,1*/(*71 *36 ZLWK*'/,17(5&211(&7
*$50,1:($7+(5
*:; *:; 5$'$5
*'83)'0)' *71;;;; *36
3 3 3 3 3

(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V V V V

(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7287%
V V

*'83)'0)' *'/$
3 3
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7287%
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7287$
V V


(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1% *76;;
V 3 3
V
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V V

Figure F-37. HSDB Ethernet Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)

Sheet 5 of 9

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-137
+6'%±'8$/*'86,1*/(*71 *36 ZLWKRXW*:;,17(5&211(&7

*'83)'0)' *'/$
3 3
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V V
(7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7287% *71;;;; *36
V 3
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
*'83)'0)' (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
3
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
(7+(51(7,1% V V

(7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287%
(7+(51(7287$ *76;;
V 3 3

(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V V V V

Figure F-37. HSDB Ethernet Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)

Sheet 6 of 9

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-138
+6'%±'8$/*'86,1*/(*71 *36 ZLWK*:;,17(5&211(&7
*$50,1:($7+(5
*:; *:; 5$'$5
*'83)'0)'
3 3 3

(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V V
(7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7287% *71;;;; *36 *'/$
V
3 3
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
*'83)'0)' (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
3
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
(7+(51(7,1% V V

(7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7287%
(7+(51(7287$ *76;;
V 3 3

(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V V V V

Figure F-37. HSDB Ethernet Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)

Sheet 7 of 9

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-139
+6'%±'8$/*'8'8$/*71,17(5&211(&7
*$50,1:($7+(5
*:; *:; 5$'$5
3 3

(7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1%
*'83)'0)' *71;;;; *36 (7+(51(7287$
3 3 3
(7+(51(7287%
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$ V
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1% 3 *'/$
V V V

(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V V V V

*'83)'0)' *71;;;; *36

3 3 3
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287%
V V V V


(7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7287%
(7+(51(7287$ (7+(51(7,1$ (7+(51(7,1$ *76;;
3
(7+(51(7287% (7+(51(7,1% (7+(51(7,1%
V V V (7+(51(7,1$
(7+(51(7,1%
(7+(51(7287$
(7+(51(7287%
V

Figure F-37. HSDB Ethernet Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)

Sheet 8 of 9

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-140
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
V
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
$7*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'60867%(/(66
7+$1&211(&727+(56+,(/'*5281'672$,5&5$)7*5281':,7+$66+257$&21'8&725$6
35$&7,&$/
5()(5720$18)$&785(5¶6'2&80(17$7,21)25&203/(7(3,1287$1',17(5&211(&7,1)250$7,21
3,128762)27+(581,766+2:1)255()(5(1&(21/<
5()(5726(&7,21)25+6'%$5&+,7(&785(&216,'(5$7,216
,)$*'/$,6127,167$//('7+(*76;;$1'*:;6+28/'67,//%(&211(&7('',5(&7/<727+(
*71;;;;
86($,5&5$)7*5$'(&$7(*25<(7+(51(7&$%/(7+,6,1&/8'(67+()2//2:,1*

0$18)$&785(5 31
3,&:,5($1'&$%/( $:*
&DUOLVOH,7 $:*

+6'%32576(/(&7,2166+2:1$5(68**(67,216±$1<)5((+6'%325721$1/580$<%(86('81/(66
63(&,),&$//<5(48,5('%<7+(0$18)$&785(5¶6,167$//$7,21'2&80(17$7,21
(7+(51(73257250$<%(86('7+(32577+$7,686('0867%((1$%/(',1&21),*85$7,2102'(
5()(5727+(*'/,167$//$7,210$18$/)25$'',7,21$/'(7$,/6
7+,6$5&+,7(&785(,635()(55('%(&$86(7+(/2662)$6,1*/(/58:,//1275(68/7,1&203/(7(/266
2):($7+(5,1)250$7,21,17+(&2&.3,7
'2127&211(&77+(*:;',5(&7/<72*'825*71;;;;,1'8$/*'8,167$//$7,216
,)7+(*'/$,6127,167$//('7+(*760867%(&211(&7('',5(&7/<72*'8
,)7+(*'/$,6127,167$//('7+(*760867%(&211(&7('',5(&7/<72*'8

Figure F-37. HSDB Ethernet Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)

Sheet 9 of 9

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-141
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-142 Rev. L
$8723,/27±$WWLWXGH6RXUFH5HSODFHPHQW
*$50,1 $8723,/27
*$'
&(1785<
&HQWXU\ &HQWXU\ &HQWXU\ &HQWXU\

3
&' &' &' &'

3,7&+'&287 3,7&+6,*
52//'&287 52//6,*
'&5(),1 52//5()
6

$8723,/27',6&211(&7±&(1785< Z'LVFRQQHFW6ZLWFK
*$50,1 $8723,/27
*$'
&(1785<
&HQWXU\

3
&'
&'
12 $3',6&6:
$3,17(5/2&.
1& $3',6&*1'
5(/$< &20
$3',6&6:
237(;,67,1*

$8723,/27',6&211(&7±&(1785< ZR'LVFRQQHFW6ZLWFK
*$50,1 $8723,/27
*$'
&(1785<
&HQWXU\

3
&'
&'
12 $3',6&6:
$3,17(5/2&.
1& $3',6&*1'
5(/$< &20

Figure F-38. GAD 43/43e – Century Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-143
$8723,/27',6&211(&7±&(1785<
*$50,1 $8723,/27
*$'
&(1785<
&HQWXU\ &HQWXU\

3
&' &'
&'
12 $3',6&6:
$3,17(5/2&.
1& $3',6&*1'
5(/$< &20
$3',6&6:
75,0&0' 237(;,67
$3',6&

$8723,/27',6&211(&7±&(1785<
*$50,1 $8723,/27
*$'
&(1785<
&HQWXU\

3
&'
&'
12 $3',6&6:
$3,17(5/2&.
1& $3',6&*1'
5(/$< &20
$3',6&6:
75,0&0' 237(;,67
$3',6&

127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
V
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
$7*$'&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'60867%(
/(667+$1&211(&727+(56+,(/'*5281'672$,5&5$)7&+$66,6:,7+$66+257$&21'8&725
$635$&7,&$/
)25*$'6(783,7(065()(5726(&7,21
:+(1,17(5)$&,1*:,7+&(1785<$8723,/276*$'31&$1127%(86('
(;,67,1*$8723,/27:,5,1*6+2:1,1:,7+'$6+('/,1(6)255()(5(1&(21/<
,)237,21$/$3',6&6:,7&+,6,167$//('5(029(7+((;,67,1*&21'8&725)520&'$1'
&211(&7727+(*$',17(5/2&.5(/$<:,5,1*$66+2:1
,)237,21$/$3',6&6:,7&+,6127,167$//('5(029(-803(5%(7:((1&'3,16 $1'
,167$//:,5,1*727+(*$',17(5/2&.5(/$<$66+2:1
5(029(7+((;,67,1*&21'8&725)520&'$1'&211(&7727+(*$',17(5/2&.5(/$<$6
6+2:1

Figure F-38. GAD 43/43e – Century Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-144 Rev. L
0HJJLWW 67(&&REKDP (QJLQH,QVWUXPHQWDWLRQ'LVSOD\6\VWHP

*$50,1*'8 '$7$$&48,6,7,2181,7
0(**,77
'$8
3 - -
$5,1&287$ $$ ,1&$
$5,1&287% %% ,1&%
V

*366285&( Q *366285&(6(/(&7
',6&2871

*$50,1*'8

3
$5,1&287$ $$ ,1'$
$5,1&287% %% ,1'%
V

(0&$6WLFN3XVKHUDQG:DUQWRQH*HQHUDWRU

*$50,1*'8 67$//3527(&7,21
(0&$ :$51,1*81,7
63:*
3[ 3
$5,1&,11$ [ $5,1&287$ $2$
$5,1&,11% \ $5,1&287% $2$
V
V

*$50,1*'8

3[
$5,1&,11$ [
$5,1&,11% \
V

127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('

)25*'86(783,7(065()(5726(&7,21

,)$1$8723,/27,6&211(&7('72$5,1&2877+(:,5,1*727+(0(**,77(,'60$<127%(
63/,&(',1727+($5,1&2873257

12',6&5(7(287387,6$66,*1('%<'()$8/7$18186('$&7,9(/2:',6&5(7(2873870867%(
&21),*85(')257+,6)81&7,215()(5726(&7,21&)25'(7$,/621+2:72&21),*85(7+(
',6&5(7(2873876

7+(*366285&( $&7,9(/2:',6&5(7(:,5('$66+2:16<1&+521,=(67+(6(/(&7,212)
1$9,*$7,216<67(025217+(3)':,7+7+(',63/$<2)*36253$5$0(7(56217+((,'6
:,5,1*)5207+(1$9,*$725727+((,'6)25*36'$7$,6127&29(5('81'(57+,667&

7+(5(,612'()$8/7&21),*85$7,21)257+,6$5,1&,1387$18186('$5,1&,1387
,1387621/< 0867%($66,*1('727+,6)81&7,21$1'6(772³)$676/2:/2:63(('
5()(5726(&7,21)25'(7$,/621+2:72&21),*85(7+($5,1&,13876

*'8&211(&72560867%(29(5%5$,'(',1$&&25'$1&(:,7+6(&7,211
Figure F-39. Miscellaneous Equipment Interfaces

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-145
67(& $8723,/27

366 ;

*$'H 3)*& 237,21
3)*& 237,21
3)*& 237,21
3
3 &211 &211 &211
96&0' 96&0'
966(/(&7&75/ 0$18$/966(/(&7
$/7+2/' $/7(1*$*(
$/76(/-803(5
*5281'

(;,67,1*
$3',6&6:
',6&:,5,1*

$8723,/27
$9,21,&6%86
3,/27 $
$3',6&
75,0,175
&23,/27 6:,7&+(6
(;,67,1*

127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('

V
*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'

-803(50867%(,167$//('726(/(&767(&3;$/7,78'(9(57,&$/63(('6(/(&725

237,21&211(&725,63$572)7+(67(&$8723,/27+$51(66

Figure F-40. GAD 43e S-TEC Autopilot Interconnect

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-146 Rev. L
*$'H
3
+21(<:(// %(1',;.,1* &2//,16 9+)1$95$',2
$5,1&287$

$5,1&287% .1 .;% .;$$ .; 9,5
V
.;%
3$ 3$ 3 3
3 3 3 3$ 3$ 3 3

925/2&&20326,7(+, % + + 925/2&&20326,7(287
925/2&&20326,7(/2 *1' *1' *1' 925/2&&20326,7(287/2
V

*/,'(6/23(83 3 6 6 *6'(9,$7,2183
*/,'(6/23('2:1 7 7 *6'(9,$7,21'2:1
V

*/,'(6/23()/$* 8 8 *6)/$*
*/,'(6/23()/$* 5 5 5 *6)/$*
V

*/,'(6/23(9$/,'287 ,/6(1(5*,=(
,/6&20021
3
*/,'(6/23(9$/,',1
,/6(1(5*,=(,1

+21(<:(// %(1',;.,1* &2//,16 9+)1$95$',2

.1 .;%
.;%
.;$$ .; 9,5
3$ 3$
3 3 3 3$ 3$ 3 3 3 3

925/2&&20326,7(+, % + + 925/2&&20326,7(287
925/2&&20326,7(/2 *1' *1' *1' 925/2&&20326,7(287/2
V

*/,'(6/23(83 3 6 6 *6'(9,$7,2183
*/,'(6/23('2:1 7 7 *6'(9,$7,21'2:1
V

*/,'(6/23()/$* 8 8 *6)/$*
*/,'(6/23()/$* 5 5 5 *6)/$*
V

*/,'(6/23(9$/,'287 ,/6(1(5*,=(
,/6&20021
3
*/,'(6/23(9$/,',1
,/6(1(5*,=(,1

Figure F-41. GAD 43e Navigation Receiver (Analog) Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-147
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('

*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
V

$7*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'60867%(
/(667+$1&211(&727+(56+,(/'*5281'672$,5&5$)7*5281':,7+$66+257$
&21'8&725$635$&7,&$/

1263(&,),&&21),*85$7,21,65(48,5(')257+(*$'H+2:(9(57+(*$'H0867%(
&$/,%5$7('727+(63(&,),&5(&(,9(5 5()(5726(&7,21

7+(*'80867%(&21),*85('7286(³*$'H´)251$9$1'251$9 $6$33/,&$%/( )25

*'86(783,7(065()(5726(&7,21

9+)1$9,*$7,21,1)250$7,21,66(17)5207+(*$'H727+(*'829(5$1$5,1&
,17(5)$&(7+,6'$7$0$<%(3529,'('7221(25%27+*'8¶6,1$'8$/*'8,167$//$7,215()(5
72),*85())25$5,1&:,5,1*,1)250$7,21

7+(1$95(&(,9(5'2(61273529,'($9/2&&20326,7(/23,1&211(&77+(9/2&&20326,7(/2
:,5(72*5281'$77+(1$95(&(,9(5

.;1$981,76+$9('8$/*/,'(6/23(287387686(³180%(5('´25/(77(5('3,16127
%27+:+(1(9(53266,%/(86($18186('6(72)3,16

.;%.;%'2127+$9($*/,'(6/23(28738786($6(3$5$7(*/,'(6/23(5(&(,9(572
'5,9(7+(6(,13876217+(*$'H

*/,'(6/23(&211(&7,216$5(21/<5(48,5(',)7+(1$95(&(,9(5&217$,167+(237,21$/
*/,'(6/23(5(&(,9(5

Figure F-41. GAD 43e Navigation Receiver (Analog) Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-148 Rev. L
*$50,1 5$'$5$/7,0(7(5
*$'H
63(55< +21(<:(// &ROOLQV
3 %(1',;.,1*
$5,1&287$ $$ .5$ .5$ $/7$
$5,1&287% $$ $$$
57$ 57
.5$$ $/7%
V - $- $- 3 3 3

5$'$/79$/,',1 < 6 5$'$/79$/,'

3
5$'$5$/7,78'(,1+, 1 ' ' % $1$/2*5$'$/7+,
5$'$5$/7,78'(,1/2 : % % J $1$/2*5$'$/7/2
V

*$50,1
*'8
3
5$'$/7386+727(67
Q 7 * * 8 6(/)7(67,1
',6&2871
+ 7(67$,'

*$50,1
*'8
,),167$//('
3
5$'$/7386+727(67
Q
',6&2871

127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('

*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
V

$7*$'($1'*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'
/($'60867%(/(667+$1&211(&727+(56+,(/'*5281'672$,5&5$)7*5281':,7+$6
6+257$&21'8&725$635$&7,&$/

5$'$5$/7,78'(,1)250$7,21,66(17)5207+(*$'H727+(*'829(5$1$5,1&
,17(5)$&(7+,6'$7$0$<%(3529,'('7221(25%27+*'8V,1$'8$/*'8,167$//$7,215()(5
72),*85())25$5,1&:,5,1*,1)250$7,21

)25*$'($1'*'86(783,7(065()(5726(&7,21

,)'8$/*'8V$5(,167$//('7+(5$'$5$/7,0(7(50867%((1$%/('21%27+*'8V

&211(&7,21725$'$5$/7,0(7(5&$1%(0$'(72%27+*'8¶6$66+2:12521/<&211(&7('72
21(*'8 (,7+(53,/27¶625&23,/27¶6 $1'5$'$5$/7,78'(6(/)7(67&21752/&5266),//('72
7+(27+(5*'8',5(&7&211(&7,2172($&+*'8,635()(55('&5266),//237,216+28/'
21/<%(86(',)7+(5($5($1,168)),&,(17180%(52)*'8$5,1&,13876726833257$//
$5,1&,17(5)$&(6,1$3$57,&8/$5,167$//$7,21

7+(5(,612'()$8/7&21),*85$7,21)257+,6',6&5(7(287387$18186('',6&5(7(287387
0867%($66,*1('727+,6)81&7,215()(5726(&7,21&)25'(7$,/621+2:72&21),*85(
7+(',6&5(7(2873876

7+(+,$1'/2:2873876$5(5(9(56(',125'(572$//2:7+(*$'H72&255(&7/<,17(535(7
7+($1$/2*92/7$*(%(,1*287387%<7+($$

$-3,1%,6/2:6,'(2)'+327(17,20(7(5
Figure F-42. GAD 43e Radar Altimeter (Analog) Interconnect

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-149
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-150 Rev. L
+RQH\ZHOO %HQGL[.LQJ ±6HULDO7XQLQJ

1$9

&/2&.%86
'$7$%86
51$9&+1/5467

'0(&20021

1$9

&/2&.%86
'$7$%86
51$9&+1/5467

'0(&20021

*$50,1 '0(75$16&(,9(5
*$'H .'0 $ .1
3 3 3
'0(&/.+, ) &/2&.%86
V
'0('$7$+, '$7$%86
V
'0(51$95467
V 32:(521
'0(&201$9
'0(&201$9
'0(+2/' ( +2/'
'0(5467+, ' '0(5(4
V
'0(&/./2
'0('$7$/2
'0(5467/2
*5281'

Figure F-43. GAD 43e DME Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 4

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-151
+RQH\ZHOO %HQGL[.LQJ ±3DUDOOHO7XQLQJ
'0(75$16&(,9(5
*$50,1 .'0 $ .1
*$'H 3 3
3 32:(521
'0(&/.+, ) &/2&.%86
V
'0('$7$+, '$7$%86
V
'0(5467+, ' '0(5(4
V
'0(+2/' ( +2/'
'0(&/./2
'0('$7$/2
'0(5467/2
*5281' 1$9

'0(&201$9 '0(&20021
'0((;7781(00$0
'0((;7781(00(0
'0((;7781(00&0
'0((;7781(00'0 6+,)7('%&'[
'0((;7781(..$. 256/,3&2'(
'0((;7781(..(. 781,1*)250$7
'0((;7781(..&.
'0((;7781(..'.
'0((;7781(.,1

1$9

6+,)7('%&'[
256/,3&2'(
781,1*)250$7

'0(&201$9 '0(&20021

Figure F-43. GAD 43e DME Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 4

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-152 Rev. L
+RQH\ZHOO %HQGL[.LQJ .1
*$50,1 '0(
*$'H .1
3
3 3
'0(&/.+, &/2&.%86
V
'0('$7$+, '$7$%86
V
'0(5467+, 1 '0(5(4
V

'0(&/./2
'0('$7$/2
'0(5467/2
*5281'

&ROOLQV'0(
'0(
$5,1&
&2//,16
*$50,1
'0( '0(
*$'H
3 3

3

'0($5,1&,1$ 6(5,$/'$7$DE$

'0($5,1&,1% 6(5,$/'$7$DE%
V

&ROOLQV'0( &6'%7XQLQJ
*$50,1 '0(
*$'H '0(
3 3

'0(&/.+, &/2&.+,
'0(&/./2 &/2&./2
V 6+,(/'
'0('$7$+, '$7$+,
'0('$7$/2 '$7$/2
V 6+,(/'
'0(6<1&,1+, 6<1&+,
'0(6<1&,1/2 6<1&/2
V 6+,(/'
&+$1$/2*:,5(6(/(&7
675$33,1*&20021
6(5,$/3$5$//(/781(6(/

Figure F-43. GAD 43e DME Interconnect

Sheet 3 of 4

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-153
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('

*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
V

$7*'8&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'60867%(
/(667+$1&211(&727+(56+,(/'*5281'672$,5&5$)7*5281':,7+$66+257$
&21'8&725$635$&7,&$/

)25*$'H$1'*'86(783,7(065()(5726(&7,21

,)'8$/*'8V$5(,167$//('$//&21),*85$7,21,6'21(21*'8'0('$7$,6
$8720$7,&$//<&5266),//('72*'8

,)21/<21(1$95$',2,686('72781(7+('0(7+(5$',20867%(&211(&7('$61$9251$9
$6$335235,$7()257+(,167$//$7,21

%27+1$95$',26086786(7+(6$0(3$5$//(/781,1*)250$7

'0(&$121/<%(781('%<$6,1*/(1$95$',2 1$9251$9 ,)&6'%781,1*,687,/,=(',1

7+(,167$//$7,21

/($9(3$1'323(1,),7,6'(6,5('72',63/$<,1)250$7,21)520'0(&+$11(/ 1$9

&211(&73723,),7,6'(6,5('72',63/$<,1)250$7,21)520'0(&+$11(/ 1$9

'0((;7(51$/781,1*/$%(/6$5(25'(5('%&'[6/,3&2'(

',2'(72%(1

,)781,1*6285&(+$6,17(51$/,62/$7,21',2'(67+((;7(51$/,62/$7,21',2'(66+2:1
$5(1275(48,5('

'0(&+0867%(781('%<1$9$1'&+0867%(781('%<1$9

Figure F-43. GAD 43e DME Interconnect

Sheet 4 of 4

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-154 Rev. L
0$5.(5%($&21
*$50,1 +21(<:(// 5(&(,9(5
&2//,16 *$50,1 36(1*,1((5,1*
*$'H %(1',;.,1*
9,5 *0$
*0$ *0$ 30$ 30$ .0$ .0$
*0$ 30$ .0$
3 - - - - %RWWRP - %RWWRP 3

,11(50.5(;7/$03,1 & & ,11(50.5/$03287

0,''/(0.5(;7/$03,1 0,''/(0.5/$03287
287(50.5(;7/$03,1 287(50.5/$03287

127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('

*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
V

1263(&,),&&21),*85$7,21,65(48,5(')257+(*$'H,125'(5723529,'(0$5.(5%($&21
$1181&,$7,216217+(*'8

Figure F-44. GAD 43e Marker Beacon Receiver Interconnect

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-155
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-156 Rev. L
$8723,/27±$WWLWXGH6RXUFH5HSODFHPHQWIRU&HVVQD$
&RPSXWHUV

$8723,/27
&(661$$
&RPSXWHUV &RPSXWHUV
$3 $3
&QWUO8QLW $LU'DWD &QWUO8QLW $LU'DWD
&RPS &RPS
*$50,1 &$$
&$ $&$
&$$
&$ $&$

*$'
- - - - - - - - - -
3
3,7&+$&287+, 3,7&+,1
3,7&+$&287/2 *1' *1'
V
3,7&+52//7(67
52//$&287+, 52//,1
52//$&287/2 *1' *1'
V
9$&5(),1+, 9+]
9$&/2 9+]5WQ
V

^
9$&5(),1+, 9+]
9$&/2 9+]5WQ
V
12 $:* (1*$*(,17/.
$77,78'(
9$/,'5(/$<
&20 $:* *<529$/,'

([LVWLQJ
$FWXDWRU
,QWHUORFN
&LUFXLWU\
(1*$*(
,17(5/2&.6

Figure F-45. GAD 43/43e Cessna Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 5

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-157
$8723,/27±$WWLWXGH6RXUFH5HSODFHPHQWIRU&HVVQD$
&RPSXWHUVDQG

$8723,/27
&(661$$
&RPSXWHU &RPSXWHU
$3 $3
&QWUO8QLW $LU'DWD &QWUO8QLW $LU'DWD
&RPS &RPS
*$50,1 &$$
&$ $&$
&$$
&$ $&$

*$'
- - - - - - - - - -
3
3,7&+$&287+, 3,7&+,1
3,7&+$&287/2 *1' *1'
V
3,7&+52//7(67
52//$&287+, 52//,1
52//$&287/2 *1' *1'
V
9$&5(),1+, 9+]
9$&/2 9+]5WQ
V
^
9$&5(),1+, 9+]
9$&/2 9+]5WQ
V
12 $:* (1*$*(,17/.
$77,78'(
9$/,'5(/$<
&20 $:* *<529$/,'

([LVWLQJ
$FWXDWRU
,QWHUORFN
&LUFXLWU\
(1*$*(
,17(5/2&.6

Figure F-45. GAD 43/43e Cessna Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 5

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-158
$8723,/27±$WWLWXGH6RXUFH5HSODFHPHQW
&HVVQD%%%,)&6 7\SH,)$

&(661$ $8723,/27
%%
%,)&6

*$50,1 &RPSXWHU 0RGH

$PSOLILHU 6HOHFWRU
*$' &$$)' 6$
3 $77,78'(
7(676:,7&+ - - -
3,7&+$&287+, &
V 1& 3,7&+,1

12

3,7&+52//7(67

52//$&287+, 52//,1
52//$&287/2
V
+=5()+
+=5(7851
9$&5()+ V
9$&5()&
^
12 $3',6$%/(,1
$77,78'(
9$/,'5(/$<
&20 1& +]([W2VF
(;,67,1*$3
',6$%/(,1

Figure F-45. GAD 43/43e Cessna Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 3 of 5

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-159
$8723,/27±$WWLWXGH6RXUFH5HSODFHPHQW
&HVVQD% 7\SH$)$

&(661$ $8723,/27
%
&RPSXWHU &RQWURO
*$50,1 $PSOLILHU 8QLW
&$$)' &$
*$'
3 $77,78'(
7(676:,7&+ - - - -
3,7&+$&287+, &
V 1& / 3,7&+,1

12

3,7&+52//7(67

52//$&287+, 52//,1
52//$&287/2
V

9$&5()+ +=5()+
9$&5()& +=5(7851
V

^
12 $ $3',6$%/(,1
$77,78'(
9$/,'5(/$<
&20 +]([W2VF
1&
(;,67,1*$3
',6$%/(,1

Figure F-45. GAD 43/43e Cessna Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 4 of 5

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-160 Rev. L
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('

*5281''(6,*1$7,2166+,(/'%/2&.*5281'$,5)5$0(*5281'
V

$7*$'H&211(&76+,(/'*5281'6727+(&211(&725%$&.6+(//7+(6+,(/'/($'60867
%(/(667+$1&211(&727+(56+,(/'*5281'672$,5&5$)7&+$66,6:,7+$66+257$
&21'8&725$635$&7,&$/

)25*$'H6(783,7(065()(5726(&7,21

:,5,1*6+2:1)255()(5(1&(21/<5(7$,1(;,67,1*7(67:,5,1*%(7:((1&20387(5$1'
&21752/81,7$66+2:1

63/,&(,172(;,67,1*$,5&5$)7:,5,1*$66+2:1'$6+('/,1(66+2:(;,67,1*:,5,1*)25
5()(5(1&(21/<

3,7&+$77,78'(7(676:,7&+12786(',1$//,167$//$7,216)25,167$//$7,216:+,&+86($1
$&&(/(5$7,216(16257(676:,7&+&,5&8,77+(*$'³3,7&+$&287+,´3,10867%(',5(&7/<
&211(&7('727+('(3,&7('³3,7&+,1387´3,1217+($8723,/27

5(029((;,67,1*:,5,1*)5207+(³$3',6$%/(,1´3,1$1'&211(&77+,65(029(':,5,1*727+(
*$'³$77,78'(9$/,'5(/$<&20´3,1

3,10867%(81&211(&7(')25$//,167$//$7,216,)$*$,1',&$725:$635(9,286/<
,167$//('9(5,)<7+$7:,5,1*213,1,65(029('

*$'$77,78'(9$/,'5(/$<%(&20(63$572)(;,67,1*,17(5/2&.&,5&8,7$6'(3,&7('63/,&(
,172(;,67,1*$&78$725,17(5/2&.:,5,1*$6'(3,&7('*$'$77,78'(9$/,'5(/$<,65(48,5('
)25$//,167$//$7,216(9(1,)35(9,286*<52','12787,/,=(*<529$/,'&,5&8,7 ,(*
5()(572$,5&5$)7:,5,1*',$*5$0672(1685(7+$7$&78$725,17(5/2&.&,5&8,7,63523(5/<
5(7$,1('

Figure F-45. GAD 43/43e Cessna Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 5 of 5

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page F-161
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page F-162 Rev. L
APPENDIX G MAGNETIC INTERFERENCE SURVEY
G.1 Introduction
The magnetic interference survey is used to identify a location within an aircraft with acceptable levels of
magnetic interference where the GMU 44 can be correctly installed. This appendix describes the materials,
precautions, setup, and procedures required to successfully conduct the magnetic interference survey.
G.1.1 Required Materials
The following items are required to complete the magnetic interference survey.

NOTE
Installation software may require the user to install the latest version of Windows Installer
which can be downloaded from www.microsoft.com.

Desktop or Laptop PC
A Desktop or laptop PC is required to run the GMU 44 Location Survey (GLS) software. This PC must
meet the hardware and software requirements listed in Table G-1.

Table G-1. PC Minimum Requirements

Operating System Windows 2000 SP4, or XP
Processor Speed 850 MHz
Hard Drive Free Memory 500 MB
RAM Memory 256MB
Screen Resolution 1024 x 768
CD-ROM Drive
WinZip (or equivalent file extraction utility)

NOTE
The user must have administrative rights on the PC in order to install the GLS software.

GMU 44 Location Survey Tool Software P/N 006-A0240-00

GMU 44 Location Survey Tool software P/N 006-A0240-00 is required to perform the magnetic
interference survey. This software is supplied as an installation package P/N 006-A0241-00 (refer to
Section G.2 for details on downloading and installing this software).
DC Power Supply
A DC power supply capable of supplying 12 VDC/200 mA is required to supply power to the GMU 44
Magnetometer during the magnetic interference survey.
RS-232 to RS-485 Converter
An older model laptop or PC equipped with an RS-232 jack but no RS-485 jack may require a converter to
connect to the GMU 44. A suitable converter is B&B Electronics Model 422LP9R (or equivalent).

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page G-1
Stopwatch (or watch with second hand)
A stopwatch or watch with a second hand is required monitor exercise start and stop times during the
survey sequence.
GMU 44 Test Cable
Fabricate a test cable in accordance in accordance with one of the drawings in either Figure G-1 or
Figure G-2. The cable shown in Figure G-1 should work in most cases. If the laptop or PC has an RS-232
jack but no RS-485 jack, an R2-232 to RS-485 converter and the cable shown in Figure G-2 are both
required.

*08
0$*1(720(7(5
)$%5,&$7('7(67&$%/(
OHQJWKDVUHTXLUHGIWPD[

*$50,1
*08
5(' 9
QF
729'&
56,1
$:*
32:(5
932:(5,1
6833/<
32:(5*5281' $:* %/. *1'
6+,(/'*1'

7256
56287$ QF $:* &203257
56287% $:* 21/$3723
6+,(/'*1' 253&
SLQ
'VXE
- 3 IHPDOH
127(6
3,6*$50,1&211(&725.,731$/7(51$7(/<3&$1%(0$'(86,1*$1$03
&211(&72531
:,5($:*6+2:1,60,1,080:,5($:*&211(&7256:,//$&&2002'$7(8372$:*:,5(
',5(&7&211(&7,2172$/$3723253&0$<127:25.,1$//&$6(6 (63(&,$//<:,7+2/'(53&V
,17+,6&$6(86(7+(&$%/(7+$7$//2:6&211(&7,21727+(3&86,1*$1567256
&219(57(5

Figure G-1. Magnetic Interference Survey Setup with Direct Connection to PC

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page G-2 Rev. L
*08
0$*1(720(7(5 )$%5,&$7('7(67&$%/(
OHQJWKDVUHTXLUHGIWPD[

*$50,1
*08
5(' 9 729'&
56,1 QF
$:*
32:(5
932:(5,1
6833/<
32:(5*5281' $:* %/. *1'
6+,(/'*1' QF

56287$
56287% 56 56 7256
6+,(/'*1' &219(57(5

56$ 56 72&20

$:*
56%
325721
- 3 $:*
/$3723
SLQ 253&
'VXE
PDOH

3,1&211(&7,21'(3(1'(1721'(9,&(86('
FRQQHFWLRQVIRU% %/35VKRZQ
127(6
3,6*$50,1&211(&725.,731$/7(51$7(/<3&$1%(0$'(86,1*$1$03
&211(&72531
:,5($:*6+2:1,60,1,080:,5($:*&211(&7256:,//$&&2002'$7(8372$:*:,5(
$68,7$%/(&219(57(5,6% %(/(&7521,&602'(//35
Figure G-2. Magnetic Interference Survey Setup Using RS-232 to RS-485 Converter

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page G-3
G.2 GLS Software Installation Procedure
This installation package will install the GMU 44 Location Survey Tool P/N 006-A0240-00 software on
the laptop or PC used to run the GLS software. To install the software perform the following steps:
1. Open the folder containing the GLS installation files, as shown in Figure G-3.

Figure G-3. GLS Tool Install Files

2. Double-click in the ‘install.bat’ file to begin the setup process. A DOS window similar to
Figure G-4 will open and indicate the progress of the installation. For some installations a
Windows Installer error message like the one in Figure G-5 may appear. Before proceeding, the
user must install the latest version of Windows Installer, which can be downloaded from
www.microsoft.com.

Figure G-4. Install Progress Window

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page G-4 Rev. L
Figure G-5. Windows Installer Error Message

NOTE
The installation of the MATLAB Runtime environment may take several minutes.

3. If your computer does not already have MATLAB Runtime 7.6 installed, an InstallShield Wizard
window will appear. If window indicates a new installation as shown in the green box at left in
Figure G-6, proceed to Section G.2.1. If the window indicates modification to an existing
installation as in the blue box at right in Figure G-6, proceed to Section G.2.2. If no InstallShield
Wizard window appears, proceed to Section G.2.1.

Figure G-6. MATLAB Runtime 7.6 Installation or Modification

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page G-5
G.2.1 New MATLAB Installations
Click ‘Next’ and follow the setup instructions. For some installations a MATLAB Runtime error message
may appear as shown in Figure G-7. The Garmin GLS tool does not require the software listed in the error
message. Click ‘OK’ to continue installation. Click ‘Finish’. Proceed to Section G.2.3.

Figure G-7. .NET Framework Message

G.2.2 Existing MATLAB Installations

Click ‘Next’. The window shown in Figure G-8 will appear. Leave ‘Modify’ selected and click ‘Next’,
‘Next’ and ‘Install’ to install the required components. For some installations, a MATLAB Component
Runtime error message shown in Figure G-7 above may appear. The Garmin GLS tool does not require the
software listed in the error message. Click ‘OK’ to continue installation. Proceed to Section G.2.3.

Figure G-8. Existing MATLAB Modification Window

G.2.3 Completing the GLS Tool Software Installation

The Install Wizard will complete the setup of the MATLAB
Runtime. Click ‘Finish’. The setup wizard will continue and install
the GMU 44 Location Survey Tool software. Follow the remaining
instructions and click ‘Finish’ to complete the installation. Select
‘Finish’ to complete the installation. A shortcut icon similar to the
one in Figure G-9 will appear on your desktop. The GLS Tool Figure G-9. GLS Tool Shortcut
software is now ready to use.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page G-6 Rev. L
G.3 Conducting the GMU 44 Location Survey
This section describes the setup and procedure required to successfully complete the GMU 44 location
survey using the GLS software tool.
G.3.1 Aircraft and GMU 44 Setup
Prepare the aircraft and GMU44 for the location survey by completing the following steps:
1. Prepare a detailed survey sequence list with start and stop times for exercising all aircraft
components and devices that may affect the operation of the GMU 44 magnetometer through
movement of ferrous metal parts or electrical inductance. Aircraft components included on the list
will vary depending on aircraft model. An example survey sequence is given in Table G-2.
2. Position the aircraft in a magnetically quiet area. This step may involve repositioning large metal
objects including aircraft and ground support equipment away from the survey area.
3. Level the aircraft.
4. Position the GMU 44 in the aircraft location to be surveyed and secure it within ±5ºof level about
the aircraft pitch and roll axes using non-ferrous materials. It is preferable (but not required) to
align the GMU 44 forward direction with the aircraft heading.

CAUTION
Do not permanently install the GMU 44 prior to successfully completing the GMU 44
location survey. An unsurveyed location may be unsuitable for permanent installation and
cause the GMU 44 to function incorrectly.

NOTE
In rare instances, the GLS Tool magnetic survey will pass but the installation will fail the
magnetometer calibration during the post installation checkout. This is usually due to a
constant magnetic field present in the aircraft (e.g. the aircraft structure is magnetized).
Contact Garmin for assistance if this occurs.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page G-7
Table G-2. Example Survey Sequence
A/C Reg.: _______________ Survey data file name:___________________________________
Elapsed time Elapsed time
Action
(sec) (min:sec)
0 0:00 Test begins (calibration period – no activity permitted)
20 0:20 Calibration period ends
30 0:30 Aileron full right
40 0:40 Aileron full left
50 0:50 Aileron level
60 1:00 Rudder full right
70 1:10 Rudder full left
80 1:20 Rudder neutral
90 1:30 Elevators full up
100 1:40 Elevators full down
110 1:50 Elevators neutral
120 2:00 Flaps down
140 2:20 Flaps up
160 2:40 Landing gear up
180 3:00 Landing gear down
190 3:10 Speed brake up
200 3:20 Speed brake down
210 3:30 Navigation lights on
220 3:40 Navigation lights off
230 3:50 Landing lights on
240 4:00 Landing lights off
250 4:10 Taxi lights on
260 4:20 Taxi lights off
270 4:30 Air conditioning on
280 4:40 Air conditioning off
290 4:50 Landing lights and taxi lights on
300 5:00 Landing lights and taxi lights off
310 5:10 Strobes on
320 5:20 Strobes off
330 5:30 Recognition lights on
340 5:40 Recognition lights off
350 5:50 Turn on all wingtip lights simultaneously
360 6:00 Turn off all wingtip lights simultaneously
370 6:10 Beacon on
380 6:20 Beacon off
390 6:30 Autopilot engaged in a pitch and roll mode (to engage servo clutches)
400 6:40 Autopilot disengaged.
410 6:50 Pitot heat on
420 7:00 Pitot heat off
430 7:10 End of test

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page G-8 Rev. L
G.3.2 GLS Tool Setup Procedure
Set up the GLS hardware and software by completing the following steps:
1. Power up the aircraft with the standard power architecture ON (master switch, avionics bus, etc.).
2. Connect the test harness to the correct PC COM port and a 12 v DC, 200 mA limited power supply
as shown in either Figure G-1 or Figure G-2 above.
3. Open the Garmin GLS tool by double-clicking the shortcut. The main GLS tool window, shown in
Figure G-10, will appear.

NOTE
It may be necessary to adjust your screen settings in order to display the tool screen
properly on your laptop or PC. Consult your operating software instruction manual for
instructions on how to change screen settings.

4. Click ‘Sources’ under the ‘File’ menu. Select the appropriate COM port and click ‘OK’. This step
is only required for the initial setup and does not need to be completed for subsequent use of the
GLS tool software.

Figure G-10. GLS Tool Main Window and Data Source Window

NOTE
The ‘Input File’ field is a legacy software feature and is not used during normal GLS tool
operation.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page G-9
5. Click ‘Preferences’ under the ‘File’ menu. In the window shown in, ensure that installation type is
set to ‘GRS77/Fixed Wing’, and click ‘OK’.

Figure G-11. GLS Preferences Window

NOTE
Installation type MUST be set to ‘GRS77/Fixed Wing’. Selecting ‘GRS77 Helicopter’ or
‘GSU73’ will cause the GLS tool to produce erroneous survey results.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page G-10 Rev. L
When the correct COM port is selected and power is applied to the GMU 44, the GLS tool will begin
displaying real-time magnetic interference data in a graph set like the one in Figure G-12. The window
displays interference data in two columns. The left column shows all data points after the most recent reset.
The right column displays deviation data points from the past five seconds. Percentage and milliGauss
value vertical scales will automatically adjust throughout GLS tool operation.

$5HODWLYHPDJQHWLFLQWHUIHUHQFHDVDSHUFHQWDJHRIPD[LPXPDOORZDEOHLQWHUIHUHQFH
%$EVROXWHPDJQHWLFLQWHUIHUHQFHDERXWWKHDLUFUDIW;<DQG=D[HV

Figure G-12. Real Time Magnetic Interference Graph Set

G.3.3 GLS Tool Operation
Before beginning the survey, ensure that all items listed on the test sequence are in their pre-exercise states
(e.g. control surfaces neutral, flaps up, lights off). Perform the survey by completing the following steps.

NOTE
It is recommended that the magnetic interference survey be conducted by a team of two
people. The first person, stationed at the PC, operates the GLS software and calls out
survey sequence exercises. The second person, stationed in the aircraft cockpit, performs
the exercises.

NOTE
Ensure that the aircraft is not disturbed for the first 20 seconds of the magnetic
interference survey. Magnetometer tilt is calibrated during this critical period and aircraft
or operator motion may cause the GLS tool to incorrectly report magnetic interference or
magnetometer tilt.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page G-11
1. Click the ‘F4 Strt Suvy’ button on the left side of the raw data window or press the F4 key to begin
recording data. This will initiate a 20-second calibration process accompanied by a countdown
timer at the bottom of the raw data window (circled in green on Figure G-13) as well as a periodic
chime sound. As the calibration period ends, upper and lower magnetic interference threshold lines
will appear in each of the graphs, as shown in Figure G-14.

Figure G-13. Survey Initiation

,17(5)(5(1&(
7+5(6+2/'
/,1(6

0,1,0,=($,5&5$)7
',6785%$1&(6
'85,1*7+,63(5,2'

Figure G-14. Graphical Display of GMU 44 GLS Calibration Period

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page G-12 Rev. L
2. After the calibration period ends, perform each exercise on the survey sequence sheet. Perform
each exercise at its specified elapsed time and for its specified duration. This will help ensure
correct identification of magnetic field deviation sources after the survey is complete.
3. Monitor the magnetic field deviation on each axis throughout the survey. If relative or absolute
deviation levels exceed thresholds, mark the survey sequence exercises during which these
deviations occurred. Interference caused by aircraft component exercises will appear in the real
time data graphs, similar to the example shown in Figure G-15. Acceptable interference examples
are circled in green, while interference that exceeded thresholds is circled in red.
4. When all exercises in the survey sequence have been completed, click the ‘F6 Save Data’ button
on the left side of the raw data window or press the ‘F6’ key to stop recording data. Save the data
file when prompted. Record the data file name on the test sequence sheet.

Figure G-15. Real Time Display of Magnetic Interference Events

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page G-13
G.3.4 GLS Data Analysis Procedure
To analyze survey data, click the ‘F11 Rvw Data’ button on the left side of the raw data window or press
the F11 key. Select the appropriate file in the window that appears and click ‘Open’. Unless data files are
renamed, the most recently saved data file will be the default selection for opening. At this point, a DOS
window like the example in Figure G-16 will appear and remain open while survey results are viewed.

Figure G-16. Data Review DOS Window

Survey data and results will be displayed in graph format in two windows. The title bars of both windows
will indicate a passed or failed survey. If the magnetic survey fails, then the GMU 44 location under
consideration should be considered unreliable until positional adjustments of the magnetometer or other
aircraft components help to achieve a survey pass. If the survey passes, then the GMU 44 location is under
consideration is suitable for permanent magnetometer installation. When finished reviewing survey data,
select the DOS window and press the ‘Enter’ key or close the data review windows individually.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page G-14 Rev. L
G.3.4.1 Magnetic Tilt Display
The magnetic tilt (MagTilt) window, an example of which is shown in Figure G-17, displays GMU 44 tilt
about the X and Y axes during the magnetic interference survey. MagTilt graphs are automatically saved as
bitmap (.bmp) files in the same directory as the source data file, with the same name as the source data file.
Verify that X Tilt (Roll) or Y Tilt (Pit) did not exceed ±5° from calibrated level during the survey. If tilt
exceeded ±5° from level about either axis during the survey, relevel the aircraft and ensure that the
GMU 44 is level and secure in its survey location, then conduct the magnetic interference survey again. If
tilt did not exceed ±5° from level about either axis during the survey, proceed to the next section.

Figure G-17. Magnetic Tilt Display (Survey Passed)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page G-15
G.3.4.2 Magnetic Field Display
The magnetic field (MagField) display, examples of which are shown in Figure G-18 and Figure G-19,
shows GMU 44 magnetic field deviations about the X, Y, and Z axes. In the case of a passed survey, the
display title bar and graph plot text will indicate passed status, as shown in Figure G-18. In the case of a
failed survey, the MagField display will indicate the axis (or axes) and threshold(s) about which the survey
failed, as well as highlighting the data points that exceeded thresholds in magenta. Examples of failed data
points are circled in red in Figure G-19. To determine which aircraft component exercise may have caused
the survey to fail, follow these steps:
1. Identify the time period during which the failing deviation occurred. An example interference
event is bracketed by dashed blue lines in Figure G-19.
2. Identify the aircraft component exercise performed during this time period on the survey sequence
sheet corresponding to the most recent survey. In the example sheet shown in Table G-2, flap
extension, occurring between 120 seconds and 150 seconds, may have caused the interference
event highlighted in Figure G-19.
3. If the magnetic interference cannot be remedied, another GMU 44 location should be selected and
surveyed. Refer to Section 6.1 for additional information on troubleshooting and correcting a
GMU 44 magnetometer installation.

Figure G-18. Magnetic Field Display (Survey Passed)

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page G-16 Rev. L
Figure G-19. Magnetic Field Display (Survey Failed)

G.4 (moved to G.3)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page G-17
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page G-18 Rev. L
APPENDIX H MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTALLATIONS
H.1 Panel Patches for GDU 620 and Accommodation of Oversize Indicators
In some installations, once the cutout is made for the GDU 620, there is insufficient material remaining on
the instrument panel on which to affix nut plates. If at least four nut plates have sufficient material for
attachment directly to the instrument panel, it is acceptable to use patch plates for the remaining one or two
nut plates. Patch plates may be installed as described in Figure H-1.
In some installations, once the cutout is made for the GDU 620, there is no material remaining between
adjacent instrument cutouts. This usually occurs for oversize indicators, such as the King KI 256. If this
occurs for one instrument, it is acceptable to install angle brackets or custom adaptor plate, as described in
Figure H-1.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page H-1
,167580(173$1(/

02',),('

75,03/$7(

(;,67,1*,167580(17

*'8',63/$<

1(:/2&$7,21
)25.,

'(6,5('5(68/7

,1$'(48$7(0$7(5,$/
7202817&251(5
1873/$7()25*'8
',63/$<

1(:&87287
,167580(173$1(/ )25.,
0$7( 5,$/%5($.

)52179,(:&87287(;$03/(

06 1873/$7( 6((&251(51873/$7(

06$' ;5,9(7 '(7$,/
; )$56,'(7+583$1(/
$1'$'$37(5 06 1873/$7(
06$' ;5,9(7 ;
; 25(48,9$/(17
&86720.,
$'$37(53/$7(

06 1873/$7(
06$' ;5,9(7
; )$56,'(7+583$1(/
$1'$'$37(5
5($59,(:$'$37(53/$7((;$03/(

06 1873/$7(
06$' ;5,9(7 ;
25(48,9$/(17

02',),('$/80,180$1*/(
6(($1*/('(7$,/
02',),('$/80,180$1*/(
6(($1*/('(7$,/
7:2$1*/(6$5(5,9(7('72*(7+(5
(48$/*$3',67$1&(

5($59,(:$1*/(6833257(;$03/(
127(6
5(&200(1'('5,9(7+$5':$5(7202817$1*/(6,606$' ;,))/86+,6
5(48,5('2506 $' ;,)+($'&/($5627+(5,7(06
)$%5,&$7(&86720$'$37(53/$7()25., 3/$7(086787,/,=($7/($677:22)7+(
*'802817,1*/2&$7,216$1'+$9(3529,6,216726(&85(7+(., 727+(3$1(/
$'',7,21$/$77$&+0(176727+(3$1(/ ,(5,9(76 ,65(&200(1'(')25($6(2)
,167$//$7,210$7(5,$/,60,17+,&.1(667257$/80,180

Figure H-1. Instrument Panel Patches

Sheet 1 of 2

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page H-2 Rev. L
5,9(7*$3,6“
&251(53$7&+3/$7(
5,9(7 ; 7+583$7&+3/$7($1'3$1(/
5,9(7 ; 7+583$7&+3/$7($1'1873/$7(
5,9(7 ; 7+583$7&+3/$7(1873/$7($1'3$1(/
,167580(173$1(/
9,(:/22.,1*$)7
*'8)$67(1(5
/2&$7,21 +2/()256&5(:

(;,67,1*&87287
5,9(7*$3,6“

,17(5,25('*(2)

0,172('*(
75,03/$7(
7<3,&$/

1873/$7(
1($56,'( &251(51873/$7('(7$,/

,17(5,25('*(2)
;;
75,03/$7( 75,03/$7( ,167580(173$1(/
127(6 9,(:/22.,1*$)7
5(&200(1'('+$5':$5(237,216)25$66(0%/<

+$5':$5( 63(&,),&$7,216
5,9(76 06$' ;
1873/$7(6 0 ) 0 . 0 . 25)

$3$7&+3/$7(0$<%(5(48,5(')25$1<*'8)$67(1,1*/2&$7,21'(3(1',1*8321
7+(5$:23(1,1*2)7+(,167580(173$1(/0$7(5,$/7+(0$7(5,$/2)7+(3$7&+3/$7(
6+28/'%(0,17+,&.1(66$/80,180 775,07+(3$7&+3/$7(72$92,'
&217$&7:,7+(;,67,1*,167580(176$1'0$7&+7+(3$7&+,11(5('*(727+(23(1,1*
2)7+(75,03/$7(7+5((5,9(766+28/'3(1(75$7($1'6(&85(7+(3$7&+3/$7(727+(
3$1(/)2//2:7+(',0(16,21$/*8,'(/,1(63529,'('

&25526,21&2$7)$%5,&$7('3$576:,7+=,1&&+520$7(35,0(5$//685)$&(6

',$7+58+2/( )25(,7+(506$' ; ',$7+58+2/( )25(,7+(5

2506$' ;5,9(7 &6.‘;ƒ
)2506$' ;5,9(721/< 7<3,&$/ 47<$5720((7/(1*7+
7<3,&$/ 47<$5720((7/(1*7+

',0$ ',0$

',0$ ',0% ',0$ ',0%

0,1 ‘7+58+2/(
',$+2/( )2502817,1*$1*/(723$1(/
0,1 :,7+06$' ;5,9(7
;
0,1

7$/80,180$1*/(
$1' ;;;; 7+. 1873/$7(02817,1*3$77(51
/(*/(1*7+0$<9$5< 7$/80,180$1*/( $1'0$7(5,$/&/($5$1&($5
$1' ;;;; 7+. )256&5(:
/(*/(1*7+0$<9$5<

$1*/('(7$,/ $1*/('(7$,/
., 6,'( *'86,'(

+$5':$5( ',0$ ',0%

0,10$;
5,9(76 ',0%
6&5(:6 ',0%

Figure H-1. Instrument Panel Patches

Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page H-3
H.2 Bolster Modification for Standby Instruments
In some installations there is unused space in the bolster immediately below the instrument panel. If the
location meets the requirements for the location of 3 1/8 inch Standby Instruments (refer to
Section 2.5.11.2), it may be desirable to install one or more standby instruments in the bolster. It is
acceptable to rework the bolster and cut holes in the subpanel as shown in Figure H-2.

$9$,/$%/( $9$,/$%/( 68% 3$1(/

'5$)7 '5$)7
'(37+2)68% 3$1(/
72%2/67(5('*(
'(37+2)68% 3$1(/
72%2/67(5('*(

&/26(287 9,(:/22.,1*'2:1
'(6,5('5(68/7

('*(2)%2/67(5 3+<6,&$/',67$1&(0$<%(/,0,7('
%<$'-$&(17(48,30(17

/,0,7,1*3+<6,&$/
3$5$0(7(56

),1$/75,00('&/26(287
('*(2)%2/67(5

9,(:/22.,1*)25:$5'
'(6,5('5(68/7
127(6

:+(1$68% 3$1(/,6&5($7(')2586(,1$%2/67(5726867$,1$'(48$7(9,6,%,/,7<,7,6,03257$17
720$.(7+(&87 287217+(%2/67(5/$5*(57+$17+(68% 3$1(/685)$&($5($7+,6:,//&5($7($
'5$)7$1*/(,17+(),%(5*/$66&/26(2873$57$&78$/3+<6,&$/6,=(2)7+(&87 287:,//'(3(1'8321
9$5,286&2&.3,7)$&725635,0$5,/<:+$727+(5'(9,&(6$5($'-$&(17727+(6(/(&7('/2&$7,21$1'
7+('(37+',))(5 (1&(%(7:((17+(68% 3$1(/$1'%2/67(5

),;785(3/$7(:,7+,167580(17
02817,1*+2/(66+2:121
3$&.$*,1* 5(/($6( 7$3( 68% 3$1(/
&2$7(':,7+
02/'5(/($6(:$;

‘7+58;

(;,67,1*$,5&5$)7
68% 3$1(/
%(+,1'7+(
%2/67(5 %2/67(5

75,0/,1(21%2/67(5 5
5(029(0$7(5,$/72&5($7(
23(1,1*)25&/26(287
(;$03/(),;785(3/$7(
,629,(: 0$7(5,$/$/80,1803/$7(25 3/<:22'
'(9(/230(172)&/26(287$1' 68% 3$1(/ (;$03/(6+2:1,6)257:2,167580(176
',0(16,2166+2:1 )255()21/<$&78$/
',0(16,216:,//'(3(1'8321,167580(17686('

127(6

%2/67(5,6,167$//(',1$,5&5$)7)257+,623(5$7,21
)$%5,&$7($),;785(3/$7(7+$7&217$,167+(02817,1*+2/(3$77(51 6 )257+(,16758 0(17 6 72%(
02817(',17+(%2/67(5
75,0%2/67(5723529,'('(6,5(''5$)7$1*/(,1&/26(2873$577(0325$5,/<$)),;7+(),;785(
3/$7(21727+((;,67,1*$,5&5$)768% 3$1(/)25:$5'2)7+(%2/67(5&(175$//</2&$7(7+(3/$7(72
7+(&87287,17 +(%2/67(5
0$7&+'5,//7+(,167580(1702817,1*+2/(6)5207+(),;785(3/$7(21727+(68% 3$1(/
5(029(7+(),;785(3/$7($''5(/($6(7$3($1'02/'5(/($6(:$;727+(68% 3$1(/$1'),;785(
3/$7(

Figure H-2. Bolster Modification for Standby Instruments

Sheet 1 of 2

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page H-4 Rev. L
253/<&/27+
)25&/26(2873$57

(;,67,1*$,5&5$)7
68%3$1(/6758&785(
%(+,1'7+('$6+%2/67(5
%2/67(5

),;785(3/$7(

6&5(:187
;

,629,(:
'(9(/230(172)&/26(287$1'68% 3$1(/

127(6

/$<'2:1253/<&/27+,13/$&(&/27+2168% 3$1(/6+28/'%(/<,1*)/$73(5)25$7(&/27+$768% 3$1(/

+2/(/2&$7,216)25,167580(176,16(57),;785(3/$7()$67(1:,7+6&5(:67+$7$5(35( &2$7(':,7+02/'
5(/($6(:$;
75,0('*(62)&/27+6 221(&$17$3(7+(:(7&/27+'2:1727+(),5677$3(/$<(521%2/67(57235(9(177+(
*/$66&/27+)5206$**,1*38//7+(*/$66287:$5'72&5($7($*22')250:,7+287:5,1./(6256$*67$3(
7+(5(68/7$17&/27+6(&85(/<72+2/'7+(6+$3($6,7&85(6&85(, 13/$&(

),1$/75,00('&/26(287

,629,(:
'(9(/230(172)&/26(287$1'68% 3$1(/

127(6

86,1*$,535(6685(%(7:((17+(1(:&/26(287$1'7+(%2/67(5*(17/<5(029(7+(1(:/<)250('3$57
3((/2))$//7+(7$3()5207+(%2/67(5$1'68% 3$1(/&/($1$//3$576
,17+(68% 3$1(/$1'&/26(2873$57&872877+(/$5*(+2/(65(48,5(')25($&+,167580(177(0325$5,,/<,167$//
7+(,167580(176729$/,'$7(7+(23(1,1*6$5(6$7,6)$&725<
86(%2'<$1'*/$=,1*3877<)25),//,1*685)$&(6217+(&/26(287),1,6+7+(685)$&(6$1'('*(6:,7+6$1'
3$3(5817,/$60227+),1,6+,6$&&203/,6+(' :,7+*5,73$3(5
35,0($1'3$,177+(&/26(287720$7&+7+(%2/67(5&2/25

Figure H-2. Bolster Modification for Standby Instruments

Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page H-5
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page H-6 Rev. L
APPENDIX J LIGHTNING ZONING
J.1 Purpose
This appendix provides lightning zoning diagrams for various types of aircraft to facilitate correct
placement of the GMU 44 and GTP 59. Additional restrictions related to the placement of the GMU 44 and
GTP 59 can be found in Section 2.5.11.5 and Section 2.5.11.7, respectively.
J.2 Severity of Lightning Zones
The zoning levels correspond to the severity of lightning strikes and probability of occurrence on the
aircraft. The order of severity starting with the safest zone is Zone 3, 2A, 2B, 1C, and 1A/1B. The 
GMU 44 and GTP 59 must not be installed in Zones 1A, 1B, 1C or 2B.
J.3 Aircraft Zoning Diagram
All diagrams in this appendix use the legend shown in
Figure J.3.1. The zoning described herein is split into
wings, fuselage and empennage. For the particular
airframe, the applicable wings, fuselage and empennage
zoning should be merged to get a complete zonal
definition. The zoning figures applicable to any particular Figure J-1. Lightning Zoning Legend
model are found in Table K-1 in Appendix K. If there is a
region of overlapping zones, the more severe zone should
always be applied (e.g., if Zone 2A and 1A overlap in a region, then the overlapping region should be
considered Zone 1A). For a list of the order of severity of zones see Section J.2. Examples of complete
lightning zoning diagrams can be found in Section J.4.
J.3.1 Wings
The different zoning for wingtips and wings are contained in the following subsections.
J.3.1.1 Wingtips
J.3.1.1.1 Aircraft Not Limited to VFR Operation

NOTE
This zoning section is applicable to those aircraft models that are not limited to VFR
operation only in Table K-1 in Appendix K. For zoning of models limited to VFR operation
only refer to Section J.3.1.1.2.

Zoning of various types of wingtips is shown in Figure J-2. Figure J-2A shows zoning for straight
wingtips. Figure J-2B shows zoning for curved wingtips. The zones are similar to those of straight
wingtips. The main difference is that Zone 1 extends from the outboard edge of the wing past the tangent
point of the chord and 0.5 m inboard.
Figure J-2C shows zoning for winglets. Note that the winglet figure shows a flattened winglet. Winglet
classifications are very similar to those of curved wingtips. The main difference is that Zone 1 extends
from the outboard edge of the wing past the tangent point of the winglet and 0.5m inboard.
Figure J-2D shows zoning for tip tanks. The rule that applies to tip tanks is very similar to that of the
curved wing. The main difference is that Zone 1 extends 0.50m past the inboard edge of the tip tank.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page J-1
A (STRAIGHT WINGTIP) B (CURVED WINGTIP)

C (WINGLET) D (TIP TANKS)

Figure J-2. Zoning for Wingtips on Aircraft Not Limited to VFR Operation

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page J-2 Rev. L
J.3.1.1.2 Aircraft Limited to VFR Operation
This zoning section is applicable to those aircraft models that are limited to VFR operation only in
Table K-1 in Appendix K. For zoning of models that are not limited to VFR operation only refer to
Section J.3.1.1.1.

NOTE
The aircraft must have a position light in the wing tip area as a pre-requisite for this STC.

If there is no position light on the wing, then no Zone 3 exists and the GTP 59 cannot be installed on this
particular aircraft. For those aircraft identified as VFR in Table K-1 in Appendix K the following criteria is
used to determine the Zone 3 area:
• Zone 1A/1B finishes as shown in Figure J-2 OR 0.5m inboard from the inboard edge of the
position light, whichever is the greater distance from the outboard edge of the wing tip as shown in
Figure J-3.
• Zone 2A/2B extends a total of 2.1m inboard of zone 1A/1B.
• Zone 3 extends inboard of zone 2A/2B from the wing tip and stops at another zone 1A/1B or
2A/2B determined from other areas of Section J.3.2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page J-3
.

STRAIGHT WINGTIP) B (CURVED WINGTIP)

C (WINGLET) D (TIP TANKS)

Figure J-3. Zoning for Wingtips on Aircraft Limited to VFR Operation

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page J-4 Rev. L
J.3.1.2 Landing Gear
The landing gear is considered Zone 1A. The struts that connect the landing gear to the wings are 
Zone 2A. Each side of landing gear is zoned individually. If there is a single strut connecting the landing
gear to the wing, then the inboard and outboard edges of the landing gear should be used for zoning instead
of using the connection point of the wing and the strut. In addition to the zoning shown in Figure J.3.1, the
zoning described for the fuselage and wings also applies. The floats for a float-mounted fuselage have not
been zoned because they do not influence the zoning of the bottom of the fuselage. Neither the GTP 59 nor
the GMU 44 can be mounted on landing gear, including floats, or its struts.

Figure J-4. Zoning for Wings Affected by Landing Gear

J.3.2 Fuselage
This section describes the zoning for several different types of fuselages. Only the fuselage and sometimes
the wings are pictured in these diagrams - the empennage is zoned in Section J.3.3. Aft of every Zone 2A is
a 0.15m Zone 2B (e.g. Zone 2A is followed by a 0.15m Zone B). Although these Zone 2B areas are marked
on the diagrams, sometimes their widths are not defined (0.15m should be used in these cases). The
horizontal stabilizer of the tail is NOT zoned because neither the GTP 59 nor the GMU 44 can be mounted
there. In addition, neither the GTP 59 nor the GMU 44 can be mounted within 0.5m of the rear-most point
of the fuselage. Section J.3.3 explains the conditions under which the GTP 59 or GMU 44 can be mounted
on the vertical stabilizer. Although all diagrams show low wing aircraft, the same zoning can be applied to
high wing aircraft. The values d1 and d2 are defined as follows:
d1 = 1.3m (51.2”)
d2 = 2.6m (102.4”)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page J-5
J.3.2.1 Single Propeller Aircraft
Zoning of low or high wing aircraft with single propellers is shown in Figure J-5. The area of the nose
immediately aft of the propeller is Zone 3. The 0.6m distance should be measured from the outboard-most
edge of the fuselage or the tip of the propeller, whichever is longer. Figure J-5A shows the case where the
propeller is longer while Figure J-5B shows the case where the propeller is shorter than the width of the
fuselage. Figure J-7 shows the case of an aircraft with a curved fuselage. The portion of the fuselage that
extends 1.3 m aft of the propeller blades is Zone 1C. However, the bottom centerline is Zone 2A, and it is
acceptable to mount the GTP 59 there.

A (PROPELLER DIAMETER IS LARGER THAN FUSELAGE WIDTH)

B (PROPELLER DIAMETER IS SMALLER THAN FUSELAGE WIDTH)

C (SIDE VIEW)
Figure J-5. Zoning for a Single Propeller (Low- or High-Wing)

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page J-6 Rev. L
A

Figure J-6. Zoning for a Low- or High-Wing Canard with a Rear-Mounted Propeller

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page J-7
A

NOTE
The bottom centerline is Zone 2A, and it is acceptable to mount the GTP 59 there.

Figure J-7. Zoning for a Low- or High-Wing Aircraft with a Curved Lower Fuselage

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page J-8 Rev. L
J.3.2.2 Aircraft with Multiple Propellers
Zoning of low or high wing aircraft with twin front-mounted propellers is shown in Figure J-8. The text
below assumes the aircraft fuselage and wing are constructed of metal. Note that Zone 2A can overlap onto
the nacelles if they are within 0.6 m outboard of the fuselage.
Zoning of low or high wing aircraft with rear-mounted twin propellers is shown in Figure J-9. The text
below assumes the aircraft fuselage and wing are constructed of metal.
For an empennage with a third engine the GTP 59 cannot be located in the empennage. Therefore the
zoning for this third engine area has been omitted from the diagrams below. The GTP 59 and GMU 44 for
this aircraft should be located in Zone 3 or Zone 2A on the bottom of the fuselage and wings.

B
Figure J-8. Zoning for Front-Mounted Twin Propellers (Low- or High-Wing)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page J-9
A

NOTE
Although the engine nacelles are shown as Zone 3, they may be Zone 2A if the engine falls
within the Zone 2 area of the wing (within 0.6m outboard from fuselage edge).

Figure J-9. Zoning for Rear-Mounted Twin Propellers (Low- or High-Wing)

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page J-10 Rev. L
A

NOTE
Nothing can be mounted in the tail boom of the aircraft.

Figure J-10. Zoning for Front- and Rear-Mounted Propellers (Low- or High-Wing)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page J-11
A

B
Figure J-11. Zoning for High-Wing with Front and Rear Propellers Mounted Above
Fuselage

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page J-12 Rev. L
A

Figure J-12. Zoning for Low- or High-Wing Canard with Twin Jet Engines

J.3.2.3 Biplanes
Figure J-13 shows how biplanes can be classified using the figures from above. The top and bottom of both
wings will be zoned using Figure J-3, while the fuselage and the mid-sections of the wing can be zoned
using Figure J-5.

Figure J-13. Zoning for Single-Propeller Biplane

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page J-13
J.3.3 Empennage
If the GTP 59 and GMU 44 cannot be mounted in other areas of the aircraft that are Zone 3 locations, it is
acceptable for metal aircraft with one of the three traditional empennages shown in Figure J-10 to mount
the GTP 59 or GMU 44 in the Zone 2A area of the tail. However, the GTP 59 or GMU 44 cannot be
mounted on/under any non-conducting surfaces. If the complete empennage of the aircraft being
considered does not match those shown in Figure J-10 then it should be mounted in allowed areas defined
for the fuselage and wings. If only portions of the empennage shown below match then the same rule
applies and the GTP 59 or GMU 44 cannot be installed in the empennage. Note that it is allowable for only
the horizontal stabilizer tips to differ from those shown in Figure J-10. The GTP 59 cannot be located in
the horizontal stabilizer of the empennage. Neither the GTP 59 nor the GMU 44 can be mounted in the tail
of a composite empennage.

A B C

D (APPLIES TO A) E (APPLIES TO B AND C)

Figure J-14. Zoning for Empennage

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page J-14 Rev. L
J.4 Example Lightning Zoning Diagrams
This section contains sample lightning zoning diagrams for typical aircraft.

Figure J-15. Example Lightning Zoning for Single Engine Aircraft

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page J-15
Figure J-16. Example Lightning Zoning for Twin Engine Aircraft

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page J-16 Rev. L
APPENDIX K MODEL-SPECIFIC INFORMATION
This appendix provides the following information for every model listed on the Approved Model List:
• Whether or not an electric standby attitude indicator or ESIS can be used in a particular aircraft
model
• The lightning zoning figures from Appendix J that are applicable to a particular aircraft model
• Suitable lightning zones for installation of the GTP 59 Temperature Probe and GMU 44
Magnetometer in a particular aircraft model. Refer to Section 2.5.11.5 and Section 2.5.11.7 for
additional information.
• Any notes related to a particular aircraft model.
In addition, if Table K-1 states that additional lightning protection is required for a particular model, details
of the protection required for each particular aircraft model can be found in Table K-2.

NOTE
Any aircraft model listed in Table K-1 and not explicitly called out as nonmetallic by an
end note should be considered an all-metal aircraft.

NOTE
In Table K-1, aircraft models listed in rows shaded gray are limited to VFR only with the
G600 installed.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page K-1
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page K-2 Rev. L
Table K-1. Aircraft Model Specific Information
Lightning Zone Type
Aircraft Make Standby (refer to Appendix J) GTP 59 GMU 44
(TCDS Holder)  Aircraft Model Designation Indicator Notes
Wing Fuselage Empennage Location Location
[common name or previous make] [12]
Figure No. Figure No. Figure No.
Aermacchi S.p.A Zone 3, Zone 3,
F.260, F.260B, F.260C, Electric or
(Aermacchi S.p.A) J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
F.260D, F.260E, F.260F Pneumatic
[Siai Marchetti] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Aermacchi S.p.A S.205-18/F, S.205-18/R,  Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Aermacchi S.p.A) S.205-20/F, S.205-20/R, J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Siai Marchetti] S.205-22/R, S.208, S.208A [1] [2] [5] [7]
Aero Commander Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Dynac Aerospace Corp) 10, 10A, 100, 100A, 100-180 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Aero Commander; Volaire] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3,
Aeromere Zone 2A INSTALLATION APPROVED
Zone 3 FOR VFR OPERATION ONLY
(Aeromere S.A.) Falco F.8.L Pneumatic J-3, J-4 J-5 J-15 (fuselage
[4]
[Falco] only) [8]
[6]
Aeronautica Macchi Aerfer
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Aeronautica Macchi S.p.A. and Aerfer- Electric or
AM-3 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Industrie Aerospaziali Meridionali S.p.A.) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
[LASA]
Aerostar Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or Ensure compliance with AD 74-
(Aerostar Aircraft Corporation) PA-60-700P (Aerostar 700P) J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic 25-02 if applicable.
[Piper/Smith] [1] [2] [5] [7]
PA-60-600 (Aerostar 600), 
Aerostar Zone 3, Zone 3,
PA-60-601 (Aerostar 601),  Electric or Ensure compliance with 
(Aerostar Aircraft Corporation) J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
PA-60-601P (Aerostar 601P), Pneumatic AD 74-25-02 if applicable.
[Piper/Smith] [1] [2] [5] [7]
PA-60-602P (Aerostar 602P)
Alexandria Aircraft
(Alexandria Aircraft LLC) Electric or Not Zone 2A Zone 2A
17-30, 17-31, 17-31TC J-5 J-15 [8] [10]
[Bellanca Aircraft Corp; Viking Aviation, Pneumatic Allowed [1] [3] [5]
Inc.; Bellanca, Inc.]
Alexandria Aircraft
(Alexandria Aircraft LLC) Electric or Not Zone 2A Zone 2A
17-30A, 17-31A, 17-31ATC J-5 J-15 [8] [10]
[Bellanca Aircraft Corp; Viking Aviation, Pneumatic Allowed [1] [3] [5]
Inc.; Bellanca, Inc.]
Atlantic Coast Seaplanes LLC
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Atlantic Coast Seaplanes LLC) G-21C, G-21D, G-21E, Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[A.G. McKinnon; Viking Air Limited; G-21G Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aero Planes, Inc; Aero Planes, LLC]

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page K-3
Table K-1. Aircraft Model Specific Information
Lightning Zone Type
Aircraft Make Standby (refer to Appendix J) GTP 59 GMU 44
(TCDS Holder)  Aircraft Model Designation Indicator Notes
Wing Fuselage Empennage Location Location
[common name or previous make] [12]
Figure No. Figure No. Figure No.
BN-2A-2, BN-2A-3,
BN-2A-6, BN-2A-8,
B-N Group LTD.  BN-2A-20, BN-2A-21, Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(B-N Group Limited) BN-2A-26, BN-2A-27, J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Pilatus Britten-Norman Limited] BN-2B-20, BN-2B-21, [1] [2] [5] [7]
BN-2B-26, BN-2B-27,
BN-2T, BN-2T-4R
B-N Group LTD.  J-8
BN2A MK. III, Zone 3, Zone 3,
(B-N Group Limited) Electric or Bottom
BN2A MK. III-2, J-2, J-4 Not Allowed Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Pilatus Britten-Norman Limited; Pneumatic Fuselage
BN2A MK. III-3 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Britten-Norman (Bembridge) Limited] Only
B-N Group LTD.  J-15 Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or BN2A-III cannot mount the GTP
(B-N Group Limited)  BN-2, BN-2A J-2, J-4 J-8 (see note Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic on the empennage
[Pilatus Britten-Norman Limited] column) [1] [2] [5] [7]
Beech
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) Electric or
58PA, 58TCA J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Hawker, Beech Aircraft Company; Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Raytheon Aircraft Company]
Beech
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) Electric or
58P, 58TC J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Hawker, Beech Aircraft Company; Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Raytheon Aircraft Company]
Boeing
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(The Boeing Company) Electric or
NOMAD NA-260 (T-28A) J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Rockwell International; North American Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aviation]
BC-1A, AT-6 (SNJ-2),
Boeing AT-6A (SNJ-3), AT-6B,
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(The Boeing Company) AT-6C (SNJ-4), Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Rockwell International Corporation; AT-6D (SNJ-5), Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
North American] AT-6F (SNJ-6),
SNJ-7, T-6G
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna 172M, 172N, 172P, 172Q, Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A [9]
(Cessna Aircraft Company) 172R, 172S Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
172RG, R172K J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A [9]
(Cessna Aircraft Company) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
177, 177A, 177B J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Cessna Aircraft Company) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page K-4
Table K-1. Aircraft Model Specific Information
Lightning Zone Type
Aircraft Make Standby (refer to Appendix J) GTP 59 GMU 44
(TCDS Holder)  Aircraft Model Designation Indicator Notes
Wing Fuselage Empennage Location Location
[common name or previous make] [12]
Figure No. Figure No. Figure No.
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
177RG J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Cessna Aircraft Company) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
180, 180A, 180B, 180C, Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
180D, 180E, 180F, 180G, J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A [9]
(Cessna Aircraft Company) Pneumatic
180H, 180J, 180K [1] [2] [5] [7]
182, 182A, 182B, 182C,
182D, 182E, 182F, 182G,
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna 182H, 182J, 182K, 182L, Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Cessna Aircraft Company) 182M, 182N, 182P, 182Q, Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
182R, 182S, 182T, R182,
T182, TR182, T182T
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna 185, 185A, 185B, 185C, Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A [9]
(Cessna Aircraft Company) 185D, 185E, A185E Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna 190, 195 (LC-126A, B, C), Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Cessna Aircraft Company) 195A, 195B Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
206, P206, P206A, P206B,
P206C, P206D, P206E,
TP206A, TP206B, TP206C,
TP206D, TP206E, U206,
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna U206A, U206B, U206C, Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Cessna Aircraft Company) U206D, U206E, U206F, Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
U206G, TU206A, TU206B,
TU206C, TU206D, TU206E,
TU206F, TU206G, 206H,
T206H
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
207, 207A, T207, T207A J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Cessna Aircraft Company) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
208 (208A), 208B J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Cessna Aircraft Company) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
210, 210A, 210B, 210C,
210D, 210E, 210F, T210F,
210G, T210G, 210H, T210H,
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna 210J, T210J, 210K, T210K, Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Cessna Aircraft Company) 210L, T210L, 210M, T210M, Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
210N, P210N, T210N, 210R,
P210R, T210R, 210-5 (205),
210-5A (205A)

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page K-5
Table K-1. Aircraft Model Specific Information
Lightning Zone Type
Aircraft Make Standby (refer to Appendix J) GTP 59 GMU 44
(TCDS Holder)  Aircraft Model Designation Indicator Notes
Wing Fuselage Empennage Location Location
[common name or previous make] [12]
Figure No. Figure No. Figure No.
310, 310A (USAF U-3A),
310B, 310C, 310D,
310E (USAF U-3B), 310F, Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
310G, 310H, E310H, 310I, J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Cessna Aircraft Company) Pneumatic
310J, 310J-1, E310J, 310K, [1] [2] [5] [7]
310L, 310N, 310P, T310P,
310Q, T310Q, 310R, T310R
320, 320A, 320B, 320C, Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
320D, 320E, 320F, 320-1, J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Cessna Aircraft Company) Pneumatic
335, 340, 340A [1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
336 J-2, J-4 10 Not Allowed Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Cessna Aircraft Company) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
337, 337A (USAF 02B),
337B, T337B, 337C, 337E,
T337E, T337C, 337D,
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna T337D, M337B (USAF 02A), Electric or
J-2, J-4 10 Not Allowed Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Cessna Aircraft Company) 337F, T337F, 337G, Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
T337G,337H, P337H,
T337H,
T337H-SP
401, 401A, 401B, 402, 402A,
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna 402B, 402C, 411, 411A, Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Cessna Aircraft Company) 414, 414A, 421, 421A, 421B, Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
421C, 425
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
404, 406 J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Cessna Aircraft Company) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
441 J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Cessna Aircraft Company) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
A185F J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Cessna Aircraft Company) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
F172D, F172E, F172F,
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna F172G, F172H, F172K, Electric Or
J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A [9]
(Cessna Aircraft Company) F172L, F172M, F172N, Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
F172P, FP172D
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric Or
F177RG J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Cessna Aircraft Company) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page K-6
Table K-1. Aircraft Model Specific Information
Lightning Zone Type
Aircraft Make Standby (refer to Appendix J) GTP 59 GMU 44
(TCDS Holder)  Aircraft Model Designation Indicator Notes
Wing Fuselage Empennage Location Location
[common name or previous make] [12]
Figure No. Figure No. Figure No.
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric Or
F182P, F182Q, FR182 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Cessna Aircraft Company) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
F337E, FT337E, F337F, Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
FT337F, F337G, FT337GP, J-2, J-4 10 Not Allowed Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Cessna Aircraft Company) Pneumatic
F337H, FT337HP [1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
FR172K J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Cessna Aircraft Company) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Cessna
Electric or
(Cessna Aircraft Company) LC40-550FG, LC41-550FG, Zone 3 Zone 3
Pneumatic J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 [8] [10]
[Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing; LC42-550FG [4] [6]
[13]
The Lancair Company]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
T303 (Crusader) J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Cessna Aircraft Company) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
J-8 For
Tube and
T-50 (Army AT-17
Cessna Not Fabric; Zone 2A Zone 2A
and UC-78 Series; Pneumatic Not Allowed [8] [10] [14]
(Cessna Aircraft Company) Allowed otherwise [1] [3] [5]
Navy JRC-1)
not
allowed
Refer to Section H.2 for
Electric or information on Bolster
Cirrus Design Corporation Zone 3 Zone 3
SR20, SR22 Pneumatic J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Modification for standby
(Cirrus Design Corporation) [4] [6]
[13] instruments.
[8] [10]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric Or
Costruzioni Aeronautiche Tecnam srl P2006T J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
CPAC, Inc.
(CPAC, Inc.) Zone 3, Zone 3,
112, 112TC, 112B, 112TCA, Electric or
[Commander Aircraft Co.; Gulfstream J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
114, 114A, 114B, 114TC Pneumatic
Aerospace; Gulfstream American; [1] [2] [5] [7]
Rockwell Int’l]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cub Crafters Electric or
CC18-180, CC18-180A J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A [8] [10]
(Cub Crafters, Inc.) Pneumatic
[1] [3] [5]

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page K-7
Table K-1. Aircraft Model Specific Information
Lightning Zone Type
Aircraft Make Standby (refer to Appendix J) GTP 59 GMU 44
(TCDS Holder)  Aircraft Model Designation Indicator Notes
Wing Fuselage Empennage Location Location
[common name or previous make] [12]
Figure No. Figure No. Figure No.
Zone 3, INSTALLATION APPROVED
DA 40 , DA 40F
Zone 2A FOR VFR OPERATION ONLY if
Diamond VFR Version (With no Zone 3
Pneumatic J-3, J-4 J-5 J-15 (fuselage Diamond SB OSB 40-004/3 is
(Diamond Aircraft Industries GmbH) lightning protection per SB [4]
only) not incorporated.
OSB 40-004/3)
[6] [8]
Must have Diamond SB OSB
Diamond Zone 3 Zone 3
DA 40 , DA 40F Pneumatic J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 40-004/3 incorporated.
(Diamond Aircraft Industries GmbH) [4] [6]
[8] [10] [14]
Zone 3,
Zone 2A INSTALLATION APPROVED
Diamond Zone 3
DA 20-A1, DA 20-C1 Pneumatic J-3, J-4 J-5 J-15 (fuselage FOR VFR OPERATION ONLY
(Diamond Aircraft Industries Inc.) [4]
only) [8]
[6]
Zone 3,
Electric or Zone 2A
Diamond Zone 3
DA 42 Pneumatic J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 (fuselage [8] [10]
(Diamond Aircraft Industries Inc.) [4]
[13] only) 
[6]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Dornier Electric or
Do 27 Q-6 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Dornier-Werke G.m.b.H.) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Dornier Electric or
Do 28 A-1, Do 28 B-1 J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Dornier-Werke G.m.b.H.) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Dornier Luftfahrt GmbH Electric or
Do 28 D, Do 28 D-1 J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Dornier Luftfahrt GmbH) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3,
Dornier Seastar
Zone 2A INSTALLATION APPROVED
(Dornier Seastar GmbH & Co KG) Zone 3
Seastar CD2 Pneumatic J-3, J-4 11 J-15 (fuselage FOR VFR OPERATION ONLY
[Dornier Composite Aircraft GmbH & Co. [4]
only) [8]
KG]
[6]
EADS-PZL “Warszawa-Okęcie” PZL-104 WILGA 80, Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(EADS-PZL “Warszawa-Okęcie” S.A.) PZL-104M WILGA 2000, J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Panstwowe Zaklady Lotnicze] PZL-104MA WILGA 2000 [1] [2] [5] [7]
EADS-PZL “Warszawa-Okęcie” Zone 3, Zone 3,
PZL-KOLIBER 150A,  Electric or
(EADS-PZL “Warszawa-Okęcie” S.A.) J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
PZL-KOLIBER 160A Pneumatic
[Panstwowe Zaklady Lotnicze] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Extra
EA-300, EA-300/L, EA-
(Extra Flugzeugproduktions Electric or Not Zone 2A Zone 2A
300/S, J-5 J-15 [8] [10]
- und Vertriebs- GmbH) Pneumatic Allowed [1] [3] [5]
EA-300/200
[Extra Flugzeugbau GmbH]

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page K-8
Table K-1. Aircraft Model Specific Information
Lightning Zone Type
Aircraft Make Standby (refer to Appendix J) GTP 59 GMU 44
(TCDS Holder)  Aircraft Model Designation Indicator Notes
Wing Fuselage Empennage Location Location
[common name or previous make] [12]
Figure No. Figure No. Figure No.
Extra
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Extra Flugzeugproduktions Electric or
EA-400 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A [8] [10]
- und Vertriebs- GmbH) Pneumatic
[1] [3] [5]
[Extra Flugzeugbau GmbH]
Zone 3
FFT-GmbH Zone 2A INSTALLATION APPROVED
SC01 B-160 Gyroflug Speed Zone 3
(FFT Gesellschaft fur Flugzeug Pneumatic J-3, J-4 J-6 Not Allowed (fuselage FOR VFR OPERATION ONLY
Canard [4]
& Faserverbund-Technologie GmbH) only)  [8]
[6]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Found Aircraft Canada, Inc. (Found Electric or
FBA-2C3 (Expedition E350) J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Aircraft Canada, Inc.) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
FBA-2C, FBA-2C1 (Bush Zone 3, Zone 3,
Found Aircraft Canada, Inc. Electric or
Hawk), FBA-2C2 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Found Aircraft Canada, Inc.) Pneumatic
(Bush Hawk XP) [1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Found Brothers Electric or
FBA Centennial “100” J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Found Aircraft Canada, Inc.) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
GA8 Airvan (Pty) Ltd Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(GA 8 Airvan (Pty) Ltd) GA8, GA8-TC320 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Gippsland Aeronautics Pty. Ltd] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3,
Electric or Zone 2A
GROB Zone 3
G120A Pneumatic J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 (fuselage [8] [10]
(GROB-WERKE) [4]
[13] only) 
[6]
Zone 3,
GROB
G115, G115A, G115B, Zone 2A INSTALLATION APPROVED
(GROB-WERKE) Zone 3
G115C, G115C2, G115D, Pneumatic J-3, J-4 J-5 J-15 (fuselage FOR VFR OPERATION ONLY
[BURKHART GROB Luft- und Raumfahrt [4]
G115D2, G115EG only) [8]
GmbH & Co. KG]
[6]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Grumman Grumman G-21, Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Gulfstream American Corporation) Grumman G-21A Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Gulfstream American G-44 (Army OA-14, Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Gulfstream American Corp) Navy J4F-2), G-44A, J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Grumman] SCAN Type 30 [1] [2] [5] [7]

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page K-9
Table K-1. Aircraft Model Specific Information
Lightning Zone Type
Aircraft Make Standby (refer to Appendix J) GTP 59 GMU 44
(TCDS Holder)  Aircraft Model Designation Indicator Notes
Wing Fuselage Empennage Location Location
[common name or previous make] [12]
Figure No. Figure No. Figure No.
35-33, 35-A33, 35-B33,
35-C33, 35-C33A, E33,
Hawker Beechcraft GMU 44 installation in
E33A, E33C, F33, F33A, J-15  Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) Electric or empennage not allowed for
F33C, G33, H35, J35, K35, J-2, J-4 J-5 (see note Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon Pneumatic V-Tail models.
M35, N35, P35, S35, V35, column) [1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company] [11]
V35A, V35B, 36, A36,
A36TC, B36TC
Hawker Beechcraft
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) Electric or
F90 J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company]
Hawker Beechcraft
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) 18D, A18A, A18D, S18D, Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-8 Not Allowed Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon SA18A, SA18D Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company]
95, B95, B95A, D95A, E95,
Hawker Beechcraft 95-55, 95-A55, 95-B55,
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) 95-B55A, 95-B55B (T-42), Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon 95-C55, 95-C55A, D55, Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company] D55A, E55, E55A, 56TC,
A56TC, 58, 58A, G58
3N, 3NM, 3TM, JRB-6,
Hawker Beechcraft D18C, D18S, E18S, RC-45J, 
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) E18S-9700, G18S, H18, Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-8 Not Allowed Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon C-45G, C-45H, TC-45G Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company] (SNB-5P), TC-45H, TC-45J,
or UC-45J (SNB-5)
Hawker Beechcraft
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) 45 (YT-34), A45 (T-34A or Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon B-45), D45 (T-34B) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company]
Hawker Beechcraft
D50, D50A, D50B, D50C, Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) Electric or
D50E, E50 (L-23D, RL-23D), J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon Pneumatic
F50, G50, H50, J50 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company]
Hawker Beechcraft
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) 50 (L-23A), B50 (L-23B), Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon C50, D50E-5990 Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company]

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page K-10
Table K-1. Aircraft Model Specific Information
Lightning Zone Type
Aircraft Make Standby (refer to Appendix J) GTP 59 GMU 44
(TCDS Holder)  Aircraft Model Designation Indicator Notes
Wing Fuselage Empennage Location Location
[common name or previous make] [12]
Figure No. Figure No. Figure No.
Hawker Beechcraft 19A, B19, M19A, 23, A23,
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) A23A, A23-19, A23-24, B23, Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon C23, A24, A24R, B24R, Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company] C24R
Hawker Beechcraft
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) Electric or
76 J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company]
Hawker Beechcraft
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) Electric or
18A, S18A J-2, J-4 J-8 Not Allowed Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company]
Hawker Beechcraft
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) D17S (Army UC43, UC-43B, Electric or
J-2, J-4 14 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A [8] [10]
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon Navy GB-1, GB-2), SD17S Pneumatic
[1] [3] [5]
Aircraft Company]
Hawker Beechcraft
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) Electric or
G17S J-2, J-4 14 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A [8] [10]
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon Pneumatic
[1] [3] [5]
Aircraft Company]
Hawker Beechcraft
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) 35, A35, B35, C35, D35, E35, Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-5 Not Allowed Zone 2A Zone 2A [11]
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon F35, G35 Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company]
65(L-23F), A65, A-65-8200,
65-80, 65-A80, 65-A80-8800,
65-B80, 65-88, 65-90,
65-A90, 65-A90-1 (JU-21A or
Hawker Beechcraft U-21A or RU-21A or RU-21D
Zone 3, Zone 3, Installation is not compatible with
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) or U-21G or RU-21H), Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A aircraft equipped with Rockwell
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon 65-A90-2 (RU-21B), Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7] Collins ProLine 21 avionics.
Aircraft Company] 65-A90-3 (RU-21C),
65-A90-4 (RU-21E or
RU-21H),70, B90, C90,
C90A, C90GT, C90GTi, E90,
H90 (T-44A)
Hawker Beechcraft
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) Electric or
60, A60, B60 J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company]

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page K-11
Table K-1. Aircraft Model Specific Information
Lightning Zone Type
Aircraft Make Standby (refer to Appendix J) GTP 59 GMU 44
(TCDS Holder)  Aircraft Model Designation Indicator Notes
Wing Fuselage Empennage Location Location
[common name or previous make] [12]
Figure No. Figure No. Figure No.
Hawker Beechcraft 99, 99A, 99A(FACH), A99,
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) A99A, B99, C99, 100, A100 Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Beech Aircraft Company; (U-21F), A100A, A100C, Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Raytheon Aircraft Company] B100
A100-1 (U-21J), 200, 200C,
Hawker Beechcraft A200, A200 (C-12A), A200
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) (C-12C), A200C (UC-12B), Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Beech Aircraft Company; B200, B200C, B200C (C-12F Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Raytheon Aircraft Company] or UC-12F or UC-12M or 
C-12R)
Hawker Beechcraft
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) Electric or
77 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Beech Aircraft Company; Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Raytheon Aircraft Company]
Hawker Beechcraft
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation)  Electric Or
T-34C (34C) J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company]
Helio Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Helio Aircraft, LLC) HST-550, HST-550A J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Alliance] [1] [2] [5] [7]
H-250, H-295 (USAF U-10D),
Helio HT-295, H-391 (USAF J-2, J-4 Zone 3, Zone 3, H-800 only: Neither GMU 44 nor
Electric or
(Helio Aircraft, LLC) YL-24), H-391B, H-395 (see J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A GTP 59 can be mounted on
Pneumatic
[Alliance] (USAF L-28A or U-10B), notes) [1] [2] [5] [7] aircraft wing
H-395A, H-700, H-800
DGA-15P (Army UC-70,
Howard Zone 3, Zone 3,
Navy GH-1, GH-2, GH-3, Electric or
(Howard Aircraft Foundation) J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A [8] [10]
NH-1), DGA-15J (Army Pneumatic
[Jobmaster Co] [1] [3] [5]
UC-70B), DGA15W
Interceptor
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Interceptor Aircraft Corporation) 200, 200A, 200B, 200C, Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Prop-Jets, Inc.; Aero Commander; 200D, 400 Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5 [7]]
Meyers]
JGS Properties, LLC
(JGS Properties, LLC) Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
[Quartz Mountain Aerospace, Inc.; 11E J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
Luscombe Aircraft Corporation; Land-Air [1] [2] [5] [7]
& Leasing, Inc.; Richard S. Kettles]
Electric or
Liberty Not Zone 3 Zone 3
XL-2 Pneumatic J-2, J-4 J-15 [8] [10]
(Liberty Aerospace Incorporated) Allowed [4] [6]
[13]

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page K-12
Table K-1. Aircraft Model Specific Information
Lightning Zone Type
Aircraft Make Standby (refer to Appendix J) GTP 59 GMU 44
(TCDS Holder)  Aircraft Model Designation Indicator Notes
Wing Fuselage Empennage Location Location
[common name or previous make] [12]
Figure No. Figure No. Figure No.
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Lockheed 12A (Army UC-40, UC-40A, Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-8 Not Allowed Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Lockheed Aircraft Corporation) Navy JO-1, JO-2) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Lovaux Ltd Not
OA7 Optica Series 300 Pneumatic J-2, J-4 Not Allowed Zone 2A Zone 2A [14]
(FLS Aerospace Ltd. (Lovaux) Ltd.) Allowed
[1] [2] [5]
M7 Aerospace Zone 3, Zone 3,
SA26-T, SA26-AT, SA226-T, Electric or
(M7 Aerospace LP) J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
SA226-AT, SA226-T(B) Pneumatic
[Fairchild Aircraft Incorporated] [1] [2] [5] [7]
M7 Aerospace Zone 3, Zone 3, Limited to non-SFAR 41 aircraft
Electric Or
(M7 Aerospace LP) SA227-TT J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A with gross takeoff weight of
Pneumatic
[Fairchild Aircraft Incorporated] [1] [2] [5] [7] 12,500 lbs or less
Bee Dee M-4, M-4, M-4C,
M-4S,M-4T, M-4-180C,
M-4-180S, M-4-180T,
M-4-210, M-4-210C,
M-4-210S, M-4-210T,
M-4-220, M-4-220C,
M-4-220S, M-4-220T,
M-5-180C, M-5-200,
M-5-210C, M-5-210TC,
M-5-220C, M-5-235C,
M-6-180, M-6-235, M-7-235,
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Maule MX-7-235, MX-7-180, Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A [8] [10]
(Maule Aerospace Technology, Inc.) MX-7-420, MXT-7-180, Pneumatic
[1] [3] [5]
MT-7-235, M-8-235,
MX-7-160, MXT-7-160,
MX-7-180A, MXT-7-180A,
MX-7-180B, M-7-235B,
M-7-235A, M-7-235C,
MX-7-180C, M-7-260,
MT-7-260, M-7-260C,
M-7-420AC, MX-7-160C,
MX-7-180AC, M-7-420A,
MT-7-420, M-4-180V,
M-9-235

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page K-13
Table K-1. Aircraft Model Specific Information
Lightning Zone Type
Aircraft Make Standby (refer to Appendix J) GTP 59 GMU 44
(TCDS Holder)  Aircraft Model Designation Indicator Notes
Wing Fuselage Empennage Location Location
[common name or previous make] [12]
Figure No. Figure No. Figure No.
Micco Aircraft Co., Inc. 
(MICCO Aircraft Company, Inc.)
[Meyers Aircraft Company; Interceptor
Corporation; Interceptor Corporation; Zone 3, Zone 3,
MAC-125C, MAC-145,  Electric or
Prop-Jets Incorporated; Nydia Meyers J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
MAC-145A, MAC-145B Pneumatic
Trust; Ralph Haven; [1] [2] [5] [7]
The New Meyers Airplane Company;
Estumkeda, Ltd.; LanShe Aerospace,
LLC; Aero Acquisitions LLC]
MU-2B, MU-2B-10,
MU-2B-20, MU-2B-15, Zone 3, Zone 3,
Mitsubishi Electric or TCDS A2PC
MU-2B-30, MU-2B-35, J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Mitsubishi Heavy Industries, Ltd.) Pneumatic [15]
MU-2B-25, MU-2B-36, [1] [2] [5] [7]
MU-2B-26
MU-2B-25, MU-2B-35,
Mitsubishi Zone 3, Zone 3,
MU-2B-26, MU-2B-36, Electric or TCDS A10SW
(Mitsubishi Heavy Industries, Ltd.) J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
MU-2B-26A, MU-2B-36A, Pneumatic [15]
[Mitsubishi Aircraft International Inc.] [1] [2] [5] [7]
MU-2B-40, MU-2B-60
Mooney Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Mooney Aircraft Corporation) M22 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Mooney Airplane Company, Inc.] [1] [2] [5] [7]
M20, M20A, M20B, M20C,
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Mooney M20D, M20E, M20F, M20G, Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Mooney Airplane Company, Inc.) M20J, M20K, M20L, M20M, Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
M20R, M20S, M20TN
Rallye 100S, Rallye 150ST,
Rallye 150T, Rallye 235E,
Morane Saulnier Zone 3, Zone 3,
Rallye 235C MS880B, Electric or
(S.O.C.A.T.A. - Groupe Aerospatiale) J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
MS885, MS894A, MS893A, Pneumatic
[Rallye] [1] [2] [5] [7]
MS892A-150, MS892E-150,
MS893E, MS894E
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Morane Saulnier M.S.760, M.S.760A, Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-12 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(S.O.C.A.T.A. - Groupe Aerospatiale) M.S.760B Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Nardi Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Nardi S.A.)  FN-333 J-2, J-4 J-7 Not Allowed Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Siai Marchetti] [1] [2] [5] [7]

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page K-14
Table K-1. Aircraft Model Specific Information
Lightning Zone Type
Aircraft Make Standby (refer to Appendix J) GTP 59 GMU 44
(TCDS Holder)  Aircraft Model Designation Indicator Notes
Wing Fuselage Empennage Location Location
[common name or previous make] [12]
Figure No. Figure No. Figure No.
Navion 
(Sierra Hotel Aero, Inc.)
[North American Aviation, Inc.; Ryan
Aeronautical Company; Navion, Division
Navion (L-17A),
of Tusco Corporation; Base Industries,
Navion A (L-17B) or (L-17C), Zone 3, Zone 3,
Incorporated; Navion Aircraft Corporation; Electric or
Navion B, Navion D, J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Cedric R. Kotowicz; Navion Rangemaster Pneumatic
Navion E, Navion F, [1] [2] [5] [7]
Corporation; Jimmie Thompson; Charles
Navion G, Navion H
L. Klinger; Diamond Aero Enterprises,
Inc.; Navion Holdings, Inc.; Navion Aircraft
Company, Ltd; Navion Aircraft LLC; Sierra
Hotel Aero, Inc.]
Pacific Aerospace Limited Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Pacific Aerospace Limited) 750XL J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Pacific Aerospace Corp.] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Piaggio Electric or
PIAGGIO P-180 J-2, J-4 J-13 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Piaggio Aero Industries S.p.A) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Piaggio Zone 3, Zone 3,
P.166, P.166B, P.166C, Electric or
(Industrie Aeronautiche e Meccaniche) J-2, J-4 J-9 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
P.166 DL3 Pneumatic
[Piaggio & Co.] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Piaggio Electric or
P.136-L2 J-2, J-4 J-9 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Piaggio & C.) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Piaggio Electric or
P.136-L, P.136-L1 J-2, J-4 J-9 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Piaggio & C.) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
The GDU 620 connector that is
Zone 3, Zone 3, directly connected to the SPWU
Pilatus Electric or
PC-12, PC-12/45 PC-12/47 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A must be overbraided in
(Pilatus Aircraft Ltd) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7] accordance with Section N.2.
[16]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Pilatus Electric or
PC-6/B2-H4 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Pilatus Aircraft Ltd) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
PC-6, PC-6-H1, PC-6-H2,
PC-6/350, PC-6/350-H1,
PC-6/350-H2, PC-6/A, Zone 3, Zone 3,
Pilatus Electric or
PC-6/A-H1, PC-6/A-H2, J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Pilatus Aircraft Ltd) Pneumatic
PC-6/B-H2, PC-6/B1-H2, [1] [2] [5] [7]
PC-6/B2-H2, PC-6/C-H2,
PC-6/C1-H2

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page K-15
Table K-1. Aircraft Model Specific Information
Lightning Zone Type
Aircraft Make Standby (refer to Appendix J) GTP 59 GMU 44
(TCDS Holder)  Aircraft Model Designation Indicator Notes
Wing Fuselage Empennage Location Location
[common name or previous make] [12]
Figure No. Figure No. Figure No.
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Pilatus Electric or
PC-7 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Pilatus Aircraft Ltd.) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Piper Zone 3, Zone 3,
PA-46-310P, PA-46-350P, Electric or
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.)  J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
PA-46-500TP Pneumatic
[The New Piper Aircraft, Inc.] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Piper Aircraft, Inc. PA-23, PA-23-160,  Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.)  PA-23-235, PA-23-250, J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[The New Piper Aircraft, Inc.] PA-E23-250 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Piper Aircraft, Inc. Zone 3, Zone 3,
PA-24, PA-24-250, Electric or
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.)  J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
PA-24-260, PA-24-400 Pneumatic
[The New Piper Aircraft, Inc.] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Piper Aircraft, Inc. Zone 3, Zone 3,
PA-42, PA-42-720, Electric or
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.)  J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
PA-42-1000 Pneumatic
[The New Piper Aircraft, Inc.] [1] [2] [5] [7]
PA-28-140, PA-28-150,
PA-28-151, PA-28-160,
PA-28-161, PA-28-180,
PA-28-235, PA-28S-160,
Piper Aircraft, Inc.  Zone 3, Zone 3,
PA-28R-180, PA-28S-180, Electric or
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.)  J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
PA-28-181, PA-28R-200,  Pneumatic
[The New Piper Aircraft, Inc.] [1] [2] [5] [7]
PA-28R-201, PA-28R-201T, 
PA-28RT-201,
PA-28RT-201T,
PA-28-201T, PA-28-236
Piper Aircraft, Inc. Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.)  PA-44-180, PA-44-180T J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[The New Piper Aircraft, Inc.] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Piper Aircraft, Inc. Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) PA-30, PA-39, PA-40 J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[The New Piper Aircraft, Inc.] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Piper Aircraft, Inc. Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.)  PA-31-300 J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[The New Piper Aircraft, Inc.] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Piper Aircraft, Inc. Zone 3, Zone 3,
PA-31 (-310), PA-31-325, Electric or
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.)  J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
PA-31-350 Pneumatic
[The New Piper Aircraft, Inc.] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Piper Aircraft, Inc. PA-31P, PA-31T, PA-31T1,  Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.)  PA-31T2, PA-31T3, J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[The New Piper Aircraft, Inc.] PA-31P-350 [1] [2] [5] [7]

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page K-16
Table K-1. Aircraft Model Specific Information
Lightning Zone Type
Aircraft Make Standby (refer to Appendix J) GTP 59 GMU 44
(TCDS Holder)  Aircraft Model Designation Indicator Notes
Wing Fuselage Empennage Location Location
[common name or previous make] [12]
Figure No. Figure No. Figure No.
PA-32-260, PA-32-300,
PA-32S-300, PA-32R-300,
PA-32RT-300,
Piper Aircraft, Inc. PA-32RT-300T, Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.)  PA-32R-301(SP), J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[The New Piper Aircraft, Inc.] PA-32R-301(HP), [1] [2] [5] [7]
PA-32R-301T, PA-32-301,
PA-32-301T, PA-32-301FT,
PA32-301XTC
Piper Aircraft, Inc. Zone 3, Zone 3,
PA-34-200, PA-34-200T,  Electric or
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.)  J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
PA-34-220T Pneumatic
[The New Piper Aircraft, Inc.] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Piper Aircraft, Inc. Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.)  PA-38-112 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[The New Piper Aircraft, Inc.] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Polskie Zaklady Lotnicze Spolka zo.o Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Polskie Zaklady Lotnicze Spolka zo.o.)  PZL M26 01 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[PZL Mielec] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Reims Aviation S.A. Electric or
F406 J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Reims Aviation S.A.) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Short Brothers & Harland Ltd. SC-7 Series 2, Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-8 Not Allowed Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Short Brothers & Harland Ltd.) SC-7 Series 3 Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Sky International
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Sky International, Inc.)  A-1, A-1A, A-1B, A-1C-180,  Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A [8] [10]
[Christen Industries; Aviat, Inc.; White A-1C-200 Pneumatic
[1] [3] [5]
International, LTD.; Pitts]
Zone 3,
Zone 2A INSTALLATION APPROVED
Slingsby Aviation Ltd. Zone 3 FOR VFR OPERATION ONLY
T67M260, T67M260-T3A Pneumatic J-3, J-4 J-5 J-15 (fuselage
(Slingsby Aviation Ltd.) [4]
only) [8]
[6]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
SOCATA TB9, TB10, TB20, TB21, Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(SOCATA - Groupe Aerospatiale) TB200 Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
SOCATA Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(SOCATA)  TBM 700 (TBM850) J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A [17]
Pneumatic
[EADS SOCATA] [1] [2] [5] [7]
SOCATA, S.A. Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(SOCATA, S.A.) GA-7 (Cougar) J-2, J-4 [7] J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Grumman] [1] [2] [5] [7]

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page K-17
Table K-1. Aircraft Model Specific Information
Lightning Zone Type
Aircraft Make Standby (refer to Appendix J) GTP 59 GMU 44
(TCDS Holder)  Aircraft Model Designation Indicator Notes
Wing Fuselage Empennage Location Location
[common name or previous make] [12]
Figure No. Figure No. Figure No.
STOL
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Sky Enterprises, Inc.) Electric or
RC-3 J-2, J-4 J-7 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Republic; Sol Amphibian; Seabee; Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Trident; TwinBee]
STOL Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(STOL Aircraft Corporation) UC-1 J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[United Consultants; Republic; Twin-Bee] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Symphony Aircraft Industries Inc. Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Symphony Aircraft Industries Inc.) OMF-100-160, SA 160 Pneumatic J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A [8] [10] [14]
[OMF] [1] [2] [5]
TKEF Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(The King’s Engineering Fellowship Model 44 J-2, J-4 J-9 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
(TKEF)) [1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Trident Electric or
TR-1 J-2, J-4 J-7 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Viking Air, Ltd) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3,
Triton Aerospace LLC
Electric or Zone 2A
(Triton Aerospace LLC) Zone 3 
A500 Pneumatic J-2, J-4 10 Not Allowed (fuselage [8] [10]
[Triton America LLC; AAI Acquisition, Inc.; [4]
[13] only)
Adam Aircraft]
[6]
True Flight Holdings LLC
(True Flight Holdings LLC)
[American Aviation Corporation;
Grumman American Aviation Corporation; Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
Gulfstream American Corporation; AA-1, AA-1A, AA-1B, AA-1C J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
Gulfstream Aerospace Corporation; [1] [2] [5] [7]
American General Aircraft Corporation;
American General Aircraft Holding
Company, Inc.; Tiger Aircraft LLC]
True Flight Holdings LLC
(True Flight Holdings LLC)
[American Aviation Corporation;
Grumman American Aviation Corporation; Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
Gulfstream American Corporation; AA-5, AA-5A, AA-5B, AG-5B J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
Gulfstream Aerospace Corporation; [1] [2] [5] [7]
American General Aircraft Corporation;
American General Aircraft Holding
Company, Inc.; Tiger Aircraft LLC]

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page K-18
Table K-1. Aircraft Model Specific Information
Lightning Zone Type
Aircraft Make Standby (refer to Appendix J) GTP 59 GMU 44
(TCDS Holder)  Aircraft Model Designation Indicator Notes
Wing Fuselage Empennage Location Location
[common name or previous make] [12]
Figure No. Figure No. Figure No.
560-F, 680, 680E, 680F,
680F, 680FL, 680FL(P), Zone 3, Zone 3,
Twin Commander Electric or
680T, 680V, 680W, 681, 685, J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Twin Commander Aircraft LLC) Pneumatic
690, 690A, 690B, 690C, [1] [2] [5] [7]
690D, 695, 695A, 695B, 720
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Twin Commander Electric or
700 J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Twin Commander Aircraft Corporation) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Twin Commander Electric or
500-B, 500-U, 500-S, 560-E J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Twin Commander Aircraft LLC) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Twin Commander Electric or
500, 500-A, 520, 560, 560-A J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Twin Commander Aircraft LLC) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Viking Air Limited
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Viking Air Limited) DHC-6-1, DHC-6-100,  Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Bombardier Inc.; de Havilland Inc.; Twin DHC-6-200, DHC-6-300 Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Otter]
Viking Air Limited Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Viking Air Limited) DHC-3 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Bombardier Inc.; de Havilland Inc.; Otter] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Viking Air Limited
(Viking Air Limited) Zone 3, Zone 3,
DHC-2 Mark I, DHC-2 Mark Electric or
[deHavilland Aircraft of Canada, Limited; J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
II, DHC-2 Mark III Pneumatic
Boeing of Canada, Ltd. (de Havilland [1] [2] [5] [7]
Div.); deHavilland Inc.; Bombardier Inc.]
Vulcanair S.p.A. Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Vulcanair S.p.A.)  AP68TP 600 “Viator” J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Partenavia] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Vulcanair S.p.A. Zone 3, Zone 3,
P68, P68B, P68C, P68C-TC, Electric or
(Vulcanair S.p.A.)  J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
AP68TP 300 “Spartacus” Pneumatic
[Partenavia] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Vulcanair S.p.A.  P68 “Observer”,  Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Vulcanair S.p.A.)  P68 TC “Observer”, Pneumatic J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A [14]
[Partenavia] P68 “Observer 2” [1] [2] [5] [7]
Vulcan Air S.p.A. Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Vulcanair S.p.A.) SF600, SF600A J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Siai Marcheetti S.r.I.] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
WACO Electric or
YMF J-2, J-4 J-14 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A [8] [10]
(The WACO Aircraft Company) Pneumatic
[1] [3] [5]

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page K-19
Table K-1. Aircraft Model Specific Information
Lightning Zone Type
Aircraft Make Standby (refer to Appendix J) GTP 59 GMU 44
(TCDS Holder)  Aircraft Model Designation Indicator Notes
Wing Fuselage Empennage Location Location
[common name or previous make] [12]
Figure No. Figure No. Figure No.
WSK “PZL-MIELEC” OBR 
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(WSK PZL MIELEC and OBR SK Electric or
MIELEC) PZL M20 03 J-2, J-4 J-8 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
[PZL]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Zenair Electric or
CH2000 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Zenair Ltd.) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
ZLIN Aircraft a.s. Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(ZLIN Aircraft a.s.) ZLIN 526L J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A [8] [10]
Pneumatic
[Moravan National Corporation] [1] [3] [5]
ZLIN Aircraft a.s. Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(ZLIN Aircraft a.s.) Z-242L, Z-143L J-2, J-4 J-5 J-15 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Moravan a.s.] [1] [2] [5] [7]
[1] The GTP 59 cannot be installed on Zone 2A composite areas.
[2] The GTP 59 must be bonded to the aluminum skin. Refer to Section 3.2.6.1 for details.
[3] The GTP 59 must be bonded to the metallic tube structure. Refer to Section 3.2.6.2 for details.
[4] The GTP 59 must be isolated from the aircraft ground plane. Refer to Section 3.2.6.3 for details.
[5] The GMU 44 must be bonded to the aircraft ground plane. Refer to Section 3.2.4.2 for details.
[6] The GMU 44 must be isolated from the aircraft ground plane. Refer to Section 3.2.4.2A for details.
[7] The GMU 44 may be mounted in the wingtip provided that certain criteria are met. Refer to Section 2.5.11.5.2 for details.
[8] Nonmetallic aircraft.
[9] Model may require modifications to fit GDU 620. Refer to Section 2.5.11.3 for information.
[10] Requires lightning protection. Refer to Table K-2 for additional details.
[11] Refer to Section 2.5.11.3 for information regarding possible instrument panel replacement.
[12] Aircraft models with “Electric” listed in the “Standby Indicator” column are eligible to install the electric indicators specified in Section E.1, unless
otherwise specified in this table.
[13] Not eligible to use L3 Communications ESI-1000 or ESI-2000 as a standby indicator.
[14] Not eligible for dual G600 installation.
[15] Aircraft checklist must be modified. Refer to Section 5.11.3.1 for additional information.
[16] Prior to beginning the installation, contact Garmin regarding the availability of the ARINC 429 Fast/Slow enablement card.
[17] Refer to Appendix P for RVSM eligibility.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page K-20
Table K-2 provides detailed information about the lightning protection components that are required for
installation of a Mid-Continent standby attitude indicator (refer to Section E.1) in particular aircraft
models. Only non-metallic models are listed. A ‘Y’ in the LRU column indicates that a TVS and fuse
combination is required for that LRU; an ‘N’ indicates that the TVS and fuse combination is not required.
The interconnect diagrams showing how the TVS and fuse are connected for a particular LRU are found in
Appendix F. If an electric Mid-Continent standby attitude indicator is utilized, it may require one or two
TVS/fuse combinations, depending upon the aircraft model. These TVS components are listed as TVS1
and TVS2, and correspond to the reference designators called out on the Mid-Continent standby attitude
indicator interconnect diagram in Appendix F.
Aircraft models that are limited to VFR operation only are not required to have TVSs and associated fuses
installed. Consequently, these models do not appear in Table K-2.

Table K-2. Lightning Protection Requirements

TVS Req'd on LRU Power Input?
Aircraft Make
MCI Standby
(TCDS Holder) Aircraft Model Designation Notes
Attitude Ind GDU GRS GDC GAD
[common name or previous make]
TVS1 TVS2
Alexandria Aircraft
(Alexandria Aircraft LLC) 17-30, 17-31, 17-31TC,
Y N N Y Y Y [1] [2]
[Bellanca Aircraft Corp; Viking 17-30A, 17-31A, 17-3A1TC
Aviation, Inc.; Bellanca, Inc.]
Cessna
(Cessna Aircraft Company) LC40-550FG, LC41-550FG,
Y Y Y Y Y Y
[Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing; LC42-550FG
The Lancair Company]
Cessna T-50 (Army AT-17), and UC-78
Y N N Y Y Y [1] [2]
(Cessna Aircraft Company) Series; and Navy JRC-1
Cirrus Design Corporation
SR20, SR22 Y Y Y Y Y Y
(Cirrus Design Corporation)
Cub Crafters
CC18-180, CC18-180A Y N N Y Y Y [1] [2]
(Cub Crafters, Inc.)
Diamond
DA 40 , DA 40F (IFR) Y Y Y Y Y Y
(Diamond Aircraft Industries GmbH)
Diamond
DA 42 Y Y Y Y Y Y
(Diamond Aircraft Industries Inc.)
Extra
(Extra Flugzeugproduktions- und EA-300, EA-300/L, EA-300/S,
Y N N Y Y Y [1] [2]
Vertriebs- GmbH) EA-300/200
[Extra Flugzeugbau GmbH]
Extra
(Extra Flugzeugproduktions- und
EA-400 Y N N Y Y Y [1] [2]
Vertriebs- GmbH)
[Extra Flugzeugbau GmbH]
GROB
G120A Y Y Y Y Y Y
(GROB-WERKE)
Hawker Beechcraft 
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) D17S (UC43, UC43B, GB-1, GB-2),
Y N N Y Y Y [1] [2]
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon SD17S
Aircraft Company]

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page K-21
Table K-2. Lightning Protection Requirements
TVS Req'd on LRU Power Input?
Aircraft Make
MCI Standby
(TCDS Holder) Aircraft Model Designation Notes
Attitude Ind GDU GRS GDC GAD
[common name or previous make]
TVS1 TVS2

Hawker Beechcraft
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation)
G17S Y N N Y Y Y [1] [2]
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon
Aircraft Company]
Howard DGA-15P (UC-70, GH-1, GH-2,
(Howard Aircraft Foundation) GH-3, NH-1),DGA-15J (UC-70B), Y N N Y Y Y [1] [2]
[Jobmaster Co] DGA-15W
Liberty
XL-2 Y Y Y Y Y Y
(Liberty Aerospace Incorporated)
Bee Dee M-4, M-4, M-4C,M-4S,
M-4T, M-4-180C, M-4-180S,
M-4-180T, M-4-210, M-4-210C,
M-4-210S, M-4-210T,M-4-220,
M-4-220C, M-4-220S,M-4-220T,
M-5-180C, M-5-200,M-5-210C,
M-5-210TC, M-5-220C,M-5-235C,
M-6-180, M-6-235, M-7-235,
Maule MX-7-235, MX-7-180,
Y N N Y Y Y [1] [2]
(Maule Aerospace Technology, Inc.) MX-7-420,MXT-7-180,MT-7-235,
M-8-235, MX-7-160, MXT-7-160,
MX-7-180A, MXT-7-180A,
MX-7-180B, M-7-235B, M-7-235A,
M-7-235C, MX-7-180C, M-7-260,
MT-7-260, M-7-260C, M-7-420AC,
MX-7-160C, MX-7-180AC,
M-7-420A, MT-7-420, M-4-180V,
M-9-235
Sky International
(Sky International, Inc.) A-1, A-1A, A-1B, A-1C-180,
Y N N Y Y Y [1] [2]
[Christen Industries; Aviat, Inc.; A-1C-200
White International, LTD.; Pitts]
Symphony Aircraft Industries Inc.
(Symphony Aircraft Industries Inc.) OMF-100-160, SA 160 Y N N Y Y Y [1] [2]
[OMF]
Triton Aerospace LLC
(Triton Aerospace LLC)
A500 Y Y Y Y Y Y
[Triton America LLC; AAI
Acquisition, Inc.; Adam Aircraft]
WACO
YMF Y N N Y Y Y [1] [2]
(The WACO Aircraft Company)
ZLIN Aircraft a.s.
(ZLIN Aircraft a.s.) ZLIN 526L Y N N Y Y Y [1] [2]
[Moravan National Corporation]
[1] TVS is not required on GDU 620.
[2] TVS2 is not required for electric standby ADI

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page K-22 Rev. L
APPENDIX L GMU 44 MOUNTING IN NON-METALLIC WINGTIP
L.1 Overview
In some installations it is desirable to mount the GMU 44 magnetometer in the wingtip of a metal aircraft
that has non-metallic (e.g. fiberglass) wingtip covers. If this is the case, the following requirements must be
met:
• The aircraft must have wingtip navigation lights installed.
• Heavy overbraid must be installed over the wiring from the GMU to the entry into the wing.
• The overbraid must be terminated at this wing entry point using a #10 terminal lug and stud.
• The GMU 44 must be mounted to a metal rib that does not enclose a fuel bay.
• There must be at least one intermediate rib between the rib that encloses the fuel bay and the rib on
which the GMU 44 is installed.
• The GMU 44 mounting bracket must be electrically bonded to the wing using a minimum of five
fasteners or rivets.
• The GMU 44 must be electrically bonded to the mounting bracket.
L.2 Materials Required but Not Supplied
The following materials (or equivalents) are required to install the GMU44 in a non-metallic wingtip:
• Tinned copper flat braid, 3/4”, QQB575F36T781 (recommended)
OR
Tinned copper tubular braid, 7/16”, QQB575R30T437
• Electrical tie-down strap, adjustable, MS3367-{1, 2, or 7}-X
• Terminal lug, #10, uninsulated, MS20659-130
• Terminal stud, #10
L.3 Overbraid Fabrication and Installation
The length of overbraid required is approximately equal to the length of the J441 service loop (measured
from the wing rib to the collar of J441) plus 14 inches.
Refer to Figure L-1 and Figure L-2 while completing the following overbraid installation procedure:
1. Disconnect P441 from J441.
2. Slide the overbraid over J441 and its service loop.
3. Reconnect P441 to J441.
4. Pull the braid over the GMU cable, connector, and service loop.
5. Roll back approximately 1.5 inches of the outboard end of the overbraid.
6. Leaving the rolled-back portion free, secure the outboard end of the overbraid around the GMU
cable collar with an electrical tiedown strap.
7. Fold the free overbraid ends back over the tiedown strap and cable and secure them to the cable
with two additional tiedown straps. Refer to Figure L-1.
8. Terminate the inboard end of the overbraid in accordance with one of the two methods in
Section L.3.1.
9. Secure the overbraid pigtail to a #10 terminal stud. Refer to Section L.3.2 for stud location
instructions.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page L-1
L.3.1 Overbraid Termination Methods
Overbraid must be terminated with a #10 lug by one of the two following approved methods. Whichever
method is used, overbraid pigtail length must not exceed two inches. Refer to Figure L-1.
Method A
1. Carefully separate overbraid wire strands by hand to create an opening in the overbraid for passage
of the GMU 44 connector and cables.

CAUTION
Do not cut an opening in the overbraid strands. Loose overbraid wire ends can chafe the
cable and cause the GMU 44 to malfunction.

2. Trim the overbraid pigtail to a maximum length of two inches.

3. Terminate the braid pigtail in a #10 terminal lug.
Method B
1. Comb out a maximum of two inches of overbraid pigtail.
2. Twist the pigtail and terminate it in a #10 terminal lug.
L.3.2 Overbraid Terminal Bonding
Electrical bond preparation for all aluminum-to-aluminum interfaces must be done in accordance with
SAE ARP1870 section 5.1 and 5.5. The overbraid terminal lug must be electrically bonded to a #10 stud
installed in accordance with AC43.13-1B Section 11-189, as well as the following restrictions:
1. If possible, use an existing tooling hole to install the stud.
2. If no suitable tooling hole exists, use an existing fastener (#10 or larger).
3. If there is no suitable fastener, install a new #10 stud as follows:
a) When adding a new stud hole to the rib, the center of the hole must be located a minimum of
one inch away from any existing, non-stiffened rib hole.
b) The new stud hole must be located such that the terminal lug face, neck, or attaching
hardware will not intrude into the flange bend radius of any rib edge or stiffened rib hole.
Refer to MS20659 for terminal lug dimensions.
4. Verify overbraid terminal bonding by checking resistance between the overbraid and the rib.
Resistance should be less than 2.5 mΩ.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page L-2 Rev. L
29(5%5$,'
44%57
25
44%)7

0$;
*08

&211(&7253-

29(5%5$,''28%/('%$&.

(/(&75,&$/7,('2:1675$3
06;

3/&6

127(6

7(50,1$//8*
06
5HIHUWR6HFWLRQ/
IRU*08

RYHUEUDLGLQVWUXFWLRQV

5HIHUWR6HFWLRQ/
IRUDSSURYHGRYHUEUDLGWHUPLQDWLRQPHWKRGV

Figure L-1. GMU 44 Overbraid Installation

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page L-3
29(5%5$,'

*08

0867%((/(&75,&$//<
%21'('7202817,1*%5$&.(7

,620(75,&9,(:

9,(:$$
:,1*7,39,(: 02817,1*%5$&.(70867%(
(/(&75,&$//<%21'('725,%
/22.,1*,1%2$5' 86,1*$7/($67

)$67(1(565,9(76

$
$7/($6721(5,%%(7:((1
*08/2&$7,21$1')8(/%$<

29(5%5$,'
5(48,5('21$//*08&$%/,1*(;7(1',1*
3$670(7$/5,%7+$7,6)857+(67287%2$5'

,167$//

*5281',1*+$5':$5(,1$&&25'$1&(:,7+$& %
$ 0(7$/5,%
6(&7,21

,)7+(5(,6$1(;,67,1*+2/(/2&$7(',1$1$335235,$7(
$5($,70$<%(87,/,=(')257+(*5281',1*+$5':$5(27+(5:,6(
$1(;,67,1*)$67(1(5 25/$5*(5 0$<%(86(' ,)7+(5(,612
(;,67,1*+2/(86$%/()257+,6385326(7+(1'5,//$1''( %855$

+2/(
06
7(50,1$//8* 25(48,9$/(17
5()(5726(&7,21
)25(/(&75,&$/%21',1*5(48,5(0(176
7(50,1$//8*)$&(25&211(&7,1*+$5':$5(0867127,17(5)(5(:,7+
%(1'5$',862)5,%('*(62567,))(1('+2/(6 678'+2/(0867%(
/2&$7('$0,1,0802)
)5208167,))(1('+2/(6
5()(57206
)25/8*',0(16,216

Figure L-2. GMU 44 Overbraid Termination

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page L-4
APPENDIX M ADVANCED AIRSPEED SETTINGS
(GDUTM 620 SOFTWARE VERSION 5.00 OR LATER)
M.1 Overview
The Advanced IAS Tape mode allows the configuration of the Airspeed Tape to match any airspeed
indicator. Color bands, markings, and bugs may all be individually configured. As an additional option,
Vne may be configured as fixed or variable, with up to ten altitude and IAS level pairs entered in variable
mode.
M.2 Configuration Page Layout
In Configuration mode, on the Airframe
Configuration page, select the IAS TAPE field, and
set the field value to ADVANCED. This will set the
Airspeed Configuration page, shown in Figure M-1,
to the advanced Configuration mode.
M.3 Arc Ranges
M.3.1 Configuration
The information listed in Table M-1 must be
obtained for every installation. Figure M-2 illustrates
airspeed tape arc ranges for the GDU 620. The
POH/AFM column lists a suggested location for
obtaining this information. If arc ranges are not
shown on the airspeed indicator being replaced for
the aircraft then they should be set as OFF. Vne,
whether fixed or variable, will be displayed as the
beginning of the red/white striped band (barber pole)
on the IAS tape.
Figure M-2 shows a visual correlation between arcs
defined in POH/AFM Type data and those
configured in the GDU 620. These ranges must
match the Type Data (POH/AFM) for the specific
aircraft being modified.
Figure M-1. Airspeed Configuration Page

NOTE
If the airspeed values are listed in the Type Data (POH/AFM) for both indicated airspeed
(IAS) and calibrated airspeed (CAS) use the IAS values.

NOTE
Do not configure two arc ranges to overlap each other in the configuration page. Gaps are
acceptable between ranges, but overlaps are not acceptable.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page M-1
Table M-1. Advanced Airframe Specific Configuration Data – Arc Ranges

POH/AFM
Arc Color Description Note
Section
RED Must be set to ON, with Max value equal to the Min
low speed awareness 2-Limitations
(LOW SPEED) value of the white band (Vs0)
Set the Min value to the bottom of the POH/AFM
defined range.
If WHITE and GREEN arcs overlap, set the Max
value to the beginning of the WHITE/GREEN arc.
If White and GREEN arcs do not overlap, set the
Max value to the top of the POH/AFM defined
WHITE full flap operational range 2-Limitations range.
If the WHITE arc range is not shown on the ASI
being replaced:
1)Set Min value to the stall speed in landing config-
uration (Vs0)
2)Set Max value as the max flaps extended speed
(Vfe).
If the HALF WHITE arc range is not shown on the
standard operational ASI being replaced, set to OFF.
HALF WHITE 2-Limitations
range This may sometimes be called a “narrow WHITE
arc.”
If a WHITE/GREEN arc is not shown on the ASI
overlap between standard being replaced, set to OFF
WHITE/GREEN operational and flaps 2-Limitations
If WHITE and GREEN arcs overlap, configure to
operational ranges
the range they overlap within.
If the GREEN arc is not shown on the ASI being
replaced, set to OFF.
If WHITE and GREEN arcs overlap, set Min value
standard operational to the Max of WHITE/GREEN.
GREEN 2-Limitations
range If the YELLOW arc is defined, set to the Min of the
YELLOW arc (Vno)
If the YELLOW arc is NOT defined, set Max value
to Vno/Vne
If the YELLOW arc is defined, set to ON, with Min
value equal to Maximum structural speed (Vno).
caution / smooth air oper-
YELLOW 2-Limitations Max value should be configured to Vne, or the
ational range
highest value of Vne if variable.
If the YELLOW arc is not defined, set to OFF.

never exceed speed / If defined as a fixed value, set to FXD, and enter
max operating speed / POH/AFM defined Vne/Vmo as the Min value.
Vne/Vmo/Mmo 2-Limitations
max operating mach If variable with altitude, set to VAR and set over-
number speeds in accordance with Section M.5.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page M-2 Rev. L
$LUVSHHG7DSH$UF5DQJHV $LUVSHHG7DSH$UF5DQJHV
)RU9QH$LUFUDIW )RU9PR0PR$LUFUDIW
1RWWR6FDOH 1RWWR6FDOH

9QH 9PR

*'8 32+$)0
<(//2: 'HILQHG
$5&5$1*( <HOORZ$UF

9QR

*'8
*5((1
,QFUHDVLQJ,$6

,QFUHDVLQJ,$6
$5&5$1*(

9IH 9IH

32+$)0
'HILQHG
*UHHQ$UF
*'8 *'8 32+$)0
:+,7(*5((1 +$/):+,7( 'HILQHG
$5&5$1*( $5&5$1*( 7KLQ:KLWH$UF
32+$)0
'HILQHG
:KLWH$UF

9V 9V

*'8 *'8 32+$)0

:+,7( :+,7( 'HILQHG
$5&5$1*( $5&5$1*( :KLWH$UF

9V 9V

*'8 *'8
5(' 5('
$5&5$1*( $5&5$1*(

Figure M-2. Airspeed Tape Arc Range Diagrams

M.3.2 Example
For an example, Section 2 (Limitations) of the Beech Bonanza (A36) POH/AFM defines a white arc (61-
124 KIAS), green arc (68-167 KIAS), and a yellow arc (167-205 KIAS). As the white and green arcs
overlap, they must be entered in separately.
• Where there is no overlap in the POH/AFM defined white arc range, configure the WHITE field
to this range (61-68 KIAS).
• Where there is overlap of the POH/AFM defined white and green arcs, configure the
WHITE/GREEN field to this range (68-124 KIAS).
• Where there is no overlap in the POH/AFM defined green arc, configure the GREEN field to this
range (124-167 KIAS).
• As the POH/AFM defined yellow arc does not overlap any other arcs, configure the YELLOW
field to this range (167-205 KIAS).
M.4 Markings and Bugs
The information obtained in Table M-2 and Table M-3 must be obtained for each installation. The
POH/AFM column lists a suggested location for obtaining this information. If a marking is not defined for
the aircraft then it should be set as OFF. These marking must match the Type Data (POH/AFM) for the
specific aircraft being modified.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page M-3
NOTE
If the airspeed values are listed in the Type Data (POH/AFM) for both indicated airspeed
(IAS) and calibrated airspeed (CAS) use the IAS values.

Table M-2. Advanced Airframe Specific Configuration Data – Markings

POH/AFM
Marking Description Note
Section
A small white triangle – mean- If defined in POH/AFM, set to
WHITE TRIANGLE 2-Limitations
ing varies by airframe given value. Else, set to OFF.
Typically marks the minimum Lower red radial on ASI of
controllable airspeed in for 3-Emergency light twins
RED BAR
twin engine aircraft with only Procedures set to 0 Kt (off) for single
one engine operational (Vmca) engine aircraft
Blue radial on ASI of light
Typically marks the single twins
3-Emergency
BLUE BAR engine best rate of climb
Procedures Set to 0 Kt (off) for single
speed for a twin engine aircraft
engine aircraft
If a fixed Red/White Bar, (not
Varies – sometimes used as a a barber pole) is shown on
RED/WHITE BAR 2-Limitations
fixed point Vne marking the current ASI, set to given
value. Else, set to OFF.
maximum landing gear Set to 0 Kt (off) for fixed gear
Vle 2-Limitations
extended speed aircraft

Table M-3. Advanced Airframe Specific Configuration Data – Bugs

POH/AFM
Bug Description Note
Section
3-Emer- Optional
GLIDE glide speed gency Proce-
dures set to 0 Kt (off) if not listed in the POH/AFM

Optional
4-Normal
Vr Reference airspeed typically set to rotation speed
Procedures
set to 0 Kt (off) if not listed in the POH/AFM
Optional
4-Normal set to 0 Kt (off) if not listed in the POH/AFM
Vx best angle-of-climb speed
Procedures if there are two speeds listed (gear up/gear
down), use the speed listed for gear down
Optional
4-Normal set to 0 Kt (off) if not listed in the POH/AFM (if
Vy best rate-of-climb speed
Procedures there are two speeds listed (gear up/gear
down), use the speed listed for gear up)

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page M-4 Rev. L
M.5 Overspeeds

NOTE
The OVERSPEEDS window does not appear unless Vne/Vmo/Mmo is set to VAR in the
ARC RANGES window.

M.5.1 Configuration
If the aircraft has a designated Mmo/Mmo Level, or is specified
as having a Vne / Vmo which varies with altitude, set the ARC
RANGES Vne/Vmo/Mmo field to VAR, and configure the
GDU 620 airspeed tape to the aircraft specifications using the
OVERSPEEDS window, shown in Figure M-3. If only the
Mmo/Mmo Level, or the variable Vne is defined, then those
fields that are undefined, respectively, should be set to OFF.
The Mmo and Mmo Level fields define a minimum altitude
where Mmo is a limiting factor on performance. Above the
Mmo Level, Mmo may define the start of the barber pole. The
Vne/Vmo altitude and IAS section defines limitations on IAS at
specified altitudes. The first ALT/IAS point entered will define
Vne/Vmo at all altitudes below the altitude specified.
If Vne/Vmo is only defined once, then this single point should
be entered with the ALT field being the aircraft’s operating Figure M-3. OVERSPEEDS
ceiling. Window
However, if Vne/Vmo is defined as varying with altitude, then at least two points will be required – the last
two of which will define a linear line for all altitudes past the last point entered. As such, the last point
entered must define Vne/Vmo at the aircraft’s operating ceiling.
These overspeed configurations must match the Type Data (POH/AFM) for the specific aircraft being
modified.

NOTE
If the POH/AFM defines multiple Vne points, and the last point defines Vne at the aircraft
operating ceiling, the POH/AFM defined points must be used to configure the GDU.

NOTE
If the Vne is defined as varying with altitude, and the Vne at the operating ceiling is not
defined, then the last ALT/IAS point entered must be calculated at the aircraft’s operating
ceiling as a linear line from the last ALT/IAS point. In all cases, the last point entered
must define Vne/Vmo at the operating ceiling.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page M-5
M.5.2 Overspeeds Configuration Examples
Example 1
An example Columbia 400 POH/AFM, in Section 2-Limitations, defines Vne as 230 KIAS, and at FL250
as 174 KIAS. As such the configuration should be entered as follows:
• 12,000FT at 230KT
• 25,000FT at 174KT.
Example 2
Hypothetically, if the Vne was not defined at the operating ceiling, the configuration would then rely on the
POH/AFM Section 2-Limitations statement that Vne decreases by 4.4 KT per 1,000 FT of altitude above
12,000 FT. Here the calculation for Vne at the aircraft operating ceiling would be:
Vne= 230 KT – [(25,000FT – 12,000FT) * 4.4 KT / 1,000 FT] = 172.8 KT.
As such, the configuration entered would be:
• 12,000FT at 230KT
• 25,000FT at 173KT
M.6 GDU 620 Airspeed Tape Configuration Examples
This section compares two examples of GDU 620 airspeed tape configuration with their respective
existing ASI configuration and tape definitions.

NOTE
In all cases, the specific aircraft’s Type Data (POH/AFM) must be considered the
definitive source for Arc Range, Marking, and Bug configuration values.

NOTE
While the configuration shown is taken from the POH/AFM defined values, all airspeed
bugs are pilot configurable from the first AUX page on the MFD.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page M-6 Rev. L
M.6.1 Beechcraft Bonanza A36 (example)

AFM Definitions
Marking Value AFM Section
White arc 56-123 KIAS
Green arc 62-166 KIAS
2-Limitations
Yellow arc 166-204 KIAS
Red line 204 KIAS
Vle 153 KIAS 2-Limitations
3-Emergency
Glide 110 KIAS
Procedures
Vr 70 KIAS
4-Normal
Vx 78 KIAS
Procedures
Vy 96 KIAS

CURRENT ASI
Figure M-4. Current ASI and Tape Markings

Figure M-5. Equivalent IAS Tape and Airspeed Configuration Page

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page M-7
M.6.2 Columbia 400 (example)

POH/AFM Definitions
POH/AFM
Marking Value
Section
White arc 60-117 KIAS
Green arc 73-181 KIAS
2-Limitations
Yellow arc 181-230 KIAS
Red line 230 KIAS

3-Emergency
Glide 108 KIAS
Procedures

Vr 110 KIAS

4-Normal
Vx 82 KIAS
Procedures
Vy 110 KIAS
Vne [1] 230 KIAS
2-Limitations
Vne @ FL250 174 KIAS
[1] Decrease 4.4 knots for each 1000
ft above 12,000 ft (Press. Alt.)
CURRENT ASI
Figure M-6. Current ASI and Tape Markings

9QH .7#)/

9QH .7#)/

Figure M-7. Equivalent IAS Tape and AIRSPEED CONFIGURATION Page

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page M-8 Rev. L
APPENDIX N HIRF AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION IN METALLIC
AIRCRAFT
N.1 ARINC 708 Weather Radar Interface
When interfacing the GDU 620 to an ARINC 708 weather radar (WXR), additional overbraid is required
over any WXR cabling in the radome area prior to entering the metal fuselage or metal wing (refer to
Section 2.5.24). Any wiring for weather radar configuration modules does not require overbraid as part of
this STC. This section describes how to install the overbraid for the WXR cabling.

NOTE
Refer to Appendix K to determine if an aircraft model is classified as metal or non-
metallic.

N.1.1 Materials Required but Not Supplied

The following materials (or equivalents) are required to install WXR cabling overbraid in the radome area:
• Tinned copper flat braid, 3/4”, QQB575F36T781 (recommended)
OR
Tinned copper tubular braid, 7/16”, QQB575R30T437
• Electrical tie-down strap, adjustable, MS3367-{1, 2, or 7}-X
• Terminal lug, #10, uninsulated, MS20659-130
• Terminal stud, #10 (not required if existing fastener is used).
N.1.2 Overbraid Installation Procedure
Refer to Figure N-1 and Figure N-2 while completing the following overbraid installation procedure.

NOTE
The length of overbraid required is approximately equal to the length of the WXR cabling
in the radome area (measured from the bulkhead to the WXR R/T connector) plus six
inches.

NOTE
Figure N-2 shows cable overbraid for a bulkhead-mounted WXR. For a wing pod WXR
installation, WXR cabling must be continuously overbraided from the WXR R/T connector
until it enters the metal wing.

1. Remove the backshell from the WXR R/T connector and save for re-installation. This will reduce
the overall width and allow the overbraid to be slid over the cable without the need to unpin the
connector.
2. Slide the overbraid onto the cable from the WXR R/T to the bulkhead.
3. Reinstall the WXR R/T connector backshell.
4. Roll back approximately 1.5 inch of the of the overbraid end at the WXR R/T connector.
5. Leaving the rolled back portion free, secure the outboard end of the overbraid around the WXR
connector or cable with an electrical tie-down strap.
6. Fold the free overbraid ends back over the tie-down strap and secure them to the cable with two
additional tie-down straps.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page N-1
7. At the bulkhead end of the overbraid, comb out a maximum of two inches of braid, twist it, cut to
length if necessary, and terminate it in a #10 terminal lug. Refer to Figure N-1.
8. Secure the overbraid pigtail to a #10 terminal stud. Refer to Section N.1.3 for overbraid bonding
instructions.
N.1.3 Overbraid Terminal Bonding
Electrical bond preparation for all aluminum-to-aluminum interfaces must be done in accordance with
SAE ARP1870, sections 5.1 and 5.5. The overbraid terminal lug must be electrically bonded to a #10 stud
installed in accordance with AC43.13-1B Section 11-189, as well as the following restrictions:
1. If possible, use an existing tooling hole to install the stud.
2. If no suitable tooling hole exists, use an existing fastener (#10 or larger).

NOTE
Installation of a stud into a pressure bulkhead is not authorized under this STC. If a new
stud must be installed into a pressure bulkhead, additional approval for installation of the
stud will be required.

3. If there is no suitable fastener, install a new #10 stud as follows:

a) When adding a new stud hole to the bulkhead, the center of the hole must be located a
minimum of one inch away from any existing, non-stiffened hole.
b) The new stud hole must be located such that the terminal lug face, neck, or attaching
hardware will not intrude into the flange bend radius of any edge or stiffened hole.
Refer to MS20659 for terminal lug dimensions.
4. Verify overbraid terminal bonding by checking resistance between the overbraid and the bulkhead.
Resistance should be less than 2.5 mΩ.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page N-2 Rev. L
29(5%5$,'
44%57
25
44%)7

0$;

Figure N-1. WXR Cable Overbraid Installation

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page N-3
%8/.+($'

29(5%5$,'

:($7+(55$'$5570867%(
(/(&75,&$//<%21'('72%8/.+($'

,167$//*5281',1*+$5':$5(,1$&&25'$1&(:,7+$&%6(&7,21,)7+(5(,6$1(;,67,1*
+2/(/2&$7(',1$1$335235,$7($5($,70$<%(87,/,=(')257+(*5281',1*+$5':$5(±27+(5:,6($1
(;,67,1*)$67(5 25/$5*(5 0$<%(86(',)7+(5(,612(;,67,1*+2/(2568,7$%/()$67(586$%/(
)257+,6385326(7+(1'5,//$1''(%855$+2/(

067(50,1$//8* 25(48,9$/(17

Figure N-2. WXR Overbraid Termination

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page N-4 Rev. L
N.2 Stick Pusher and Warntone Generator Interface (PC-12)
Each GDU 620 connector that interfaces directly to the Stick Pusher and Warntone Generator (SPWG)
must be terminated and overbraided as described in this section (e.g. Figure F-39, EMCA SWPG).
N.2.1 Materials Required but Not Supplied
The following materials (or equivalents) are required to install overbraid:
• Tinned copper flat braid, 3/4”, QQB575F36T781 (recommended)
OR
Tinned copper tubular braid, 7/16”, QQB575R30T437
• Shield terminators P/N S03-XX-R-9035-100 (Raychem)
• Silicone fusion tape (Garmin P/N 249-00114-00)
• Hose clamp (MS35842, SAE J1508 (Type F, I or M) or Fed Spec A-A-52506 (Type F, I or M))
N.2.2 Overbraid Installation Procedure
1. Cut a piece of overbraid to a length of 12 ± 1”.
2. Slide this overbraid over the wire bundle and down out of the way of future work.

NOTE
This step may be performed after the wire bundle is terminated to the GDU 620 connector.

3. Terminate the shields as described in Section 3.4.2.1.1, using the PREFERRED METHOD. Use
shield terminators P/N S03-xx-R-9035-100 (Raychem). These terminators use shield drain wires
that are uninsulated and braided, unlike the terminators that use shield drain wires that are
insulated.
4. Insert all of the required wires into the GDU 620 connector. Refer to Figure N-3.
5. Separate the individual wires entering the connector into two halves. Wrap each half in silicone
fusion tape (Garmin P/N 249-00114-00) where the wires will be underneath the strain relief. Refer
to Figure N-3.
6. Wrap bundle with three layers of silicone fusion tape from approximately three to five inches from
the back of the connector. Refer to Figure N-3.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page N-5
GDU 620 3.0
Connector

Shield
Drains Shield
Terminators
Overbraid

Silicone Fusion Tape

Figure N-3. Wire Termination in GDU 620 Connector

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page N-6 Rev. L
7. Fold connector end of overbraid out and back so it can be positioned close to the plug as shown in
Figure N-4. Slide the overbraid back up into its final position and fasten its end to the wire bundle
with three layers of silicone fusion tape. Refer to Figure N-4.
8. Approximately 3” from where the braid is fastened with silicone fusion tape, poke a series of holes
around (circumferentially) the overbraid and pull the individual shield terminations out. Pull them
out so that they are evenly distributed around the bundle. Refer to Figure N-4.

Silicone Fusion Tape

Overbraid

Shield Terminators

Silicone Fusion Tape

3.0

Figure N-4. Shield Termination and Overbraid Preparation

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page N-7
9. Cut the braided shield drains to a length of 3" ± 0.5”. Arrange the individual braids
circumferentially around the bundle. Use three layers of silicone fusion tape to secure them. The
shield braid should be in direct contact with the overbraid. Refer to Figure N-5.

Silicone Fusion Tape

Overbraid

Silicone Fusion Tape

Figure N-5. Shield Termination Placement

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page N-8 Rev. L
10. Fold the excess braid back so that the connector strain relief will clamp over the folded end. The
open end must enclose the shield terminations. Trim off any frayed overbraid. Using the three
strain relief screws, fasten the folded end of the braid to the connector strain relief, being careful
not to pinch any wires. The middle screw of the strain relief should go through the overbraid. Refer
to Figure N-6.

Silicone Fusion Tape

Overbraid

Silicone Fusion Tape

Figure N-6. Overbraid Placement

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page N-9
11. Secure the end of the fold with three layers of silicone fusion tape and continue to wrap the
overbraid with silicone fusion tape until 1.5” back from the strain relief. Refer to Figure N-7.
12. Install a hose clamp 2” back from the connector strain relief. Ensure that the hose clamp is not
installed on the shield terminators. The clamp should compress the individual shield drains to the
overbraid. Refer to Figure N-7.

Overbraid

Hose Clamp

Silicone Fusion Tape

1.5

Shield terminators should be

within this area

Figure N-7. Hose Clamp Placement

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page N-10 Rev. L
13. Wrap the hose clamp with three layers of silicone fusion tape to prevent chafing against adjacent
harnesses. Refer to Figure N-8.

Overbraid

Silicone Fusion Tape

6.0

Figure N-8. Final Assembly

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page N-11
This page intentionally left blank

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page N-12 Rev. L
APPENDIX P RVSM GROUP AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
FOR TBM 700 SERIES AIRCRAFT
TBM700 (850) series aircraft that comply with the installation guidance in this appendix are eligible for
RVSM Group approval.
P.1 Group Approval
The G600 TBM700 series RVSM Group Approval is applicable to eligible aircraft that are modified in
accordance with the G600 Installation Manual, Appendix P, 190-00601-06, Rev. L or later FAA approved
revision. Eligible aircraft for the G600 TBM700 series RVSM Group Approval are TBM700A, B, C and N
(TBM850) series variants (S/N 014-433). TBM700 series aircraft with G1000 Integrated Flight Decks
installed in accordance with Socata Modification Sheet MOD70-0276-00 used for retrofit of A, B, & C
series aircraft and MOD70-0176-00 used for N (TBM850) series aircraft are not eligible for G600 RVSM
group approval.
P.2 System Description
A G600 system must be installed on the pilot’s side and an AM-250 installed (or retained) on the copilot’s
side. The G600 system must use the GDC 74B with the Static Source Error Correction (SSEC) enabled.
P.2.1 Prerequisite Installations
The following equipment must be previously installed.
• KFC 275 or KFC 325 Autopilot
• AM-250 altitude measurement system installed on copilot’s side
• A transponder with altitude reporting capability
• Static ports identified in Table P-1 must be installed and comply with the required surface
conditions and alignment tolerances
• The Pitot-static systems must pass the required service checks
Installation of this equipment is beyond the scope this document, and should be installed in accordance
with manufacturer instructions and Socata SB 70-120-34 or other approved data.
P.2.2 RVSM Approved Configuration
Aircraft modified in accordance with this STC which comply with this appendix, qualify for operation in
RVSM airspace as a group in accordance with Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR)
Part 91, Appendix G, Operations in Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum (RVSM) Airspace, and FAA
Advisory Circular 91-85, Authorization of Aircraft and Operators for Flight in Reduced Vertical
Separation Minimum Airspace. Data in this appendix takes precedence over other guidance in this manual.
Other features or interfaces not specified this appendix may be installed in accordance with this manual.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page P-1
67$1'%<
$/7,0(7(5 &23,/27
3,/273)'0)'',63/$< $'& $'& $/7,0(7(5 $/7
*'8 $'& $0

$'&
67$1'%<
$,563((' $/7+2/' ;31'5
*'&% 26&,//$725 237,21$/
$/7

.&3

;31'5

$,5'$7$
$&&(/(5$7,216
$/735(6(/(&7 96 $/7&$3785(
6,*1$/6 *$'H $/7+2/'(1*$*(

(TXLSPHQW,QVWDOOHGSHU .'&
*67&

([LVWLQJ(TXLSPHQW

Figure P-1. TBM700 RVSM System Diagram

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page P-2
P.2.3 RVSM Required Avionics Check
The following avionics and equipment are required for RVSM eligibility.

Table P-1. Required Equipment

Hardware Software
Min No.
Installed Part Number
Description Part Number Description Version [1]
[1]
ADC #1/ADC #2 Refer to
1 N/A N/A N/A
Switch Section 2.4.2.3
1 AM-250 70259N01D01 N/A N/A N/A
Main Board SW 006-B0876-01 2.01
1 GAD 43e 011-02349-00
Software 006-B1176-03 2.12
1 GDC 74B 011-01110-01 Software 006-B0261-19 3.09
1 GDU 620 011-01264-( ) Main Software 006-B0498-4B 6.11
1 GMU 44 011-00870-00 Software 006-B0224-00 2.01
1 GRS 77 011-00868-10 Software 006-B0223-23 3.03
1 KCP-220 [2] 065-00064-0008 N/A N/A N/A
1 Transponder [3] N/A N/A N/A
2 Static Port T700A3415017101 N/A N/A N/A

[1] Later approved software versions as defined in the STC Equipment List
(P/N 005-00313-AY) may be used.
[2] Installed as part of the KFC 275 or KFC 325 autopilot system.
[3] Transponder must have altitude reporting capability.

P.2.4 Required Interfaces and Functions for RVSM

The G600 must display the flight director, provide altitude preselect/vertical speed functionality, provide
altitude altering, and have the SSEC enabled in accordance with Table P-2 and Table P-3. This appendix
only applies to RVSM specific requirements; other G600 interfaces specified in this manual are optional
for the installation.

NOTE
The KAS 297C is removed and the Altitude Preselect function is provided by the GAD 43e.

Table P-2. RVSM Required Interfaces

G600 Interfaces Interconnect Drawing(s) Configuration Checkout

Section 5.5.10,
Autopilot Flight Director Figure F-10 Section 5.8.5
Section E.4
Figure F-26, Sheet 1 Section 5.5.9,
GAD 43e for Altitude Preselect Section 5.8.5
Figure F-27, Sheet 10 Section E.20

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page P-3
Table P-3. RVSM Required Functions

G600 Interfaces Configuration Checkout Notes

Section 5.5.6
Altitude Alerter Section 5.2.6 NORMAL or HIGH PERF
Section 5.10.1
SSEC (TBM700/850) Section 5.5.5.11 Section 5.8.2 Enablement Card per Table 2-2

The connection of a GDU 620 to an audio panel is required for Altitude Alert tones. Refer to Section E.17
for approved audio panels. The audio must be verified as described in Section 5.5.6.
P.2.5 AM-250 Implementation
The AM-250 must be retained or installed on the co-pilot’s side. Installation of the AM-250 is beyond the
scope of this document; refer to the manufacturer’s instruction and Socata SB 70-120-34. The copilot’s
AM-250 altitude hold oscillator signal must be connected to the autopilot computer. The altitude hold
oscillator signal was supplied by the pilot’s AM-250 in a previous RVSM configuration (Ref. 70-120-34).
To connect the co-pilot’s AM-250 as required, remove and stow the previously installed altitude hold
oscillator signal wires from the KCP 220. Connect the co-pilot’s AM-250 Plug 1, Pins 26 and 34 to the
autopilot computer KCP 220 Plug 2, Pin 12 (Refer to Socata drawing T700 C 34 16 502). Connect the
ADC 1/ADC 2 switch as shown in Figure P-2.
3)'$,5'$7$
*'83)'0)' 3
3 $'& *'&%$'&
$5,1&287$
$5,1&,1$
$5,1&,1% $5,1&287%
V
V
$'&

3
3 $0$'& 0

3 $5,1&287$
.&3 $ 3 $5,1&287%
V

$/726&/,1 $8723,/27287
$8723,/275(7

1& /()75,*+7

127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('

6+,(/'/($'60867%(/(667+$1

672:255(029($//27+(50+]$/7,78'(26&,//$725:,5,1*35(9,286/<&211(&7('72.'&
$0 5(029(' 25.$6 5(029(' 21/<7+('(3,&7('$/7,78'(26&,//$725:,5,1*
0$<5(0$,1&211(&7('

6:,7&+0867%(02817('$'-$&(1772*'8

6:,7&+0867%(,//80,1$7('$1'/$%(/('$66+2:15()(5726(&7,21)2568,7$%/(
6:,7&+(6

3)'
$,5'$7$
$'& JUHHQ
$'& DPEHU

Figure P-2. ADC/AM-250 Interconnect

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page P-4 Rev. L
P.2.6 Pitot-Static Connections
The G600 and Standby Instruments
must be connected in accordance with )25:$5'
Section 2.5.5, Section 2.5.11.6, and 35(6685(
%8/.+($'
Section 3.2.5.1 to the Pitot-static
systems as shown in Figure P-3. The 287

GDC 74B must be connected to the #1

(0*

Pitot-static system to supply altimetry ,167580(17

3$1(/
data for altitude display, altitude

alerting, and altitude preselect. The
AM-250 altimeter must be connected
67$1'%<,167580(176
to the #2 Pitot-static system to supply *'8
altitude hold oscillator data to the *'&%
$0
autopilot systems. The standby 3,727 (0(5*(1&<67$7,&
instruments must be connected to the 6285&(6(/(&725
#2 Pitot-static system. 3,727

P.2.7 Transponder '5$:,1*

127726&$/(
Transponder #1 must be connected to
the GDU 620 in accordance with
Figure P-4. Refer to Figure F-17 and
Figure F-24 for additional transponder
setup guidance.
Transponder #2, if installed, must be 67$7,& 67$7,&
67$7,& 67$7,&
connected to the AM-250. Refer to (0(5*(1&< $)735(6685(
Socata SB-70-120 Figure 5 or other 67$7,& %8/.+($'
approved data for more information. Figure P-3. G600 RVSM Pitot-Static Connections

NOTE
Do not connect the GDC 74B to either transponder.

*'83)'0)' 75$16321'(5
56287 56,1
56*1'
V

25

*'83)'0)' 3 75$16321'(5

$5,1&287 $ $ $5,1&,1
*(1(5$/3853 % %
V

Figure P-4. RVSM Altitude Interconnect

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page P-5
P.3 Checkout
P.3.1 Electrical System
Perform interface and functional check-outs for all relevant G600 electrical loads, interfaces and functions
installed in accordance with this manual and Table P-2.
Check the power distribution wiring by selecting EMER using the ESS BUS TIE selector. The primary
flight data displayed on the GDU 620 must remain operational.

NOTE
G600 display of ancillary functions (i.e. Rad Alt, MB, ADF, DME) may be lost when
EMGER is selected.

Verify ADC 1/ADC 2 switch lighting and colors comply with Sec. 2.4.2.3. When the G600 and AM-250
are operating normally and a GPS signal has been established, engage ADC 2 using the ADC 1/ADC 2
switch. Verify the following annunciations are displayed:
• PFD- OAT Red X
• PFD- TAS Red X
• PFD- CHECK ATTITUDE
• MFD Alert- ADC1 ALT EC – ADC1 Altitude Error Correction is unavailable.
Engage ADC 1 using the ADC 1/ADC 2 switch. Verify that the annunciations listed above are removed
from the flight displays.
P.3.2 Pitot-Static Systems
The #1 and #2 Pitot-static systems, as well as calibration of the AM-250, must meet the criteria in the
following sections. The air data tests and surface checks are required following the initial installation. The
G600 system must be maintained in accordance with the G600 System Instructions for Continued
Airworthiness (P/N 190-00601-00).
P.3.2.1 Air Data Test
The air data systems must be tested and maintained in accordance with Socata Maintenance Manual except
as follows.
The following altimeter checks must be used in lieu of the Socata Maintenance Manual 34-11-00,
Table 503 and Section 5.8.2.3 with the following exceptions:
• For paragraph (b)(1)(i) Scale Error, use of Table P-4 instead of 14 CFR 43, Appendix E, Table I.
• Do not perform paragraph (b)(1)(iv), Friction.
• Do not perform paragraph (b)(1)(vi), Barometric Scale Error.
The following Air Data and Altitude Alerter Tests are to be performed in conjunction with any other
regulated tests. The Air-Data test must be performed on both pilot and copilot systems with a calibrated
Pitot-static test set with a combined accuracy/repeatability specification of less than ±20 feet for the test
altitude range.
1. Connect the Pitot-static tester to the aircraft left and right Pitot and static ports in accordance with
Socata Maintenance Manual section 34-11-00. Note that the standby altimeter is connected to the
copilot side static system and it is not SSEC corrected.
2. Perform a Pitot-static system leak check of each system as described in Socata Maintenance
Manual section 34-11-00 and file the results with the aircraft maintenance records.
3. Verify that the altimeter baro-setting is 29.92 in Hg (1013.25 mBar) on both sides.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page P-6 Rev. L
4. Verify the Altitude Alerter annunciation and alert tones at test level of 29,000 feet during the Air
Data test. To set the altitude bug and alerter, press the ALT button and rotate the lower left knob on
the PFD.
5. Simulate the altitudes and airspeeds for each condition shown in Table P-4.
6. Record the altitude displayed on the GDU 620 and AM-250 for each condition on Table P-4.
7. Verify that the indicated altitudes are within allowable tolerances.
8. File the results with the aircraft maintenance records.
If either the pilot or copilot air data system does not meet the tolerances specified, maintenance checks
should be performed on the air data system or the Pitot-static system.

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page P-7
Table P-4. Air Data Test Points

Test Point Altitude Tolerance Range (ft)

Nominal Altitude
Altitude Airspeed Air Data 1 Air Data 2
(with SSEC) (ft)
(ft) (kts) actual actual
-20 to 20 -20 to 20
0 0
0
24 to 64 24 to 64*
150 44*
980 to 1020 980 to 1020
1000 40 1000
2007 to 2057 2007 to 2057
2000 120 2032
4009 to 4059 4009 to 4059
4000 120 4034
8008 to 8068 8013 to 8063
120 8038
8000 8129 to 8249 8194 to 8244
300 8219
10029 to 10089 10034 to 10084*
10000 150 10059*
11007 to 11077 11012 to 11072
11000 120 11042
13025 to 13105 13035 to 13095
13000 150 13065
14027 to 14107 14037 to 14097
14000 150 14067
16055 to 16145 16070 to 16130
16000 180 16100
18100 to 18190 18115 to 18175
18000 210 18145
20009 to 20103 20026 to 20086
120 20056
20035 to 20129 20052 to 20112*
20000 150 20082*
20277 to 20371 20294 to 20354
300 20324
29005 to 29149 29042 to 29112
120 29077
29041 to 29185 29078 to 29148*
29000 150 29113*
29375 to 29519 29412 to 29482
300 29447
33018 to 33162 33049 to 33131
120 33090
33059 to 33203 33090 to 33172*
33000 150 33131*
33447 to 33591 33478 to 33560
300 33519
* Test points and tolerances correspond with Socata Maintenance Manual 34-11-00,
Table 503.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page P-8 Rev. L
P.3.2.2 Surface Checks
The TBM700 series aircraft with RVSM privilege require external checks per Socata Maintenance Manual
05-10-01, ATA 53 for Standard and Progressive inspection intervals. Refer to Socata Maintenance Manual
53-00-00 for fuselage surface check procedures.
P.3.3 RVSM In-Flight Altitude Hold Check
In addition to the autopilot performance checks specified in Section 5.10.2.5, RVSM operation requires
that the autopilot system accurately maintain the acquired altitude during non-turbulent, non-gust cruise
conditions. The autopilot must be shown to meet the performance specification of the following in-flight
altitude hold test.
1. Verify the following conditions (normal RVSM cruise flight):
◦ Altitude FL290 to FL310
◦ Altimeter setting 29.92 in Hg (1013 HPA)
◦ Autopilot altitude hold engaged
◦ Non-turbulent, non-gust conditions
2. Record the data specified in Table P-5 from the primary cockpit displays every 5 minutes for a
minimum flight segment of 30 minutes in length. The maximum altitude deviation shown on the
display throughout the test should not exceed ±65 feet.
If the aircraft fails to hold altitude to this tolerance, repeat the check ensuring that the airspeed remains
constant and the air remains stable during the entire test. If the test still fails, perform maintenance checks
on the G600 system, then repeat the test. RVSM operations are prohibited until the autopilot is capable of
maintaining altitude within ±65 feet of the selected cruise altitude.

Table P-5. Altitude Hold Check Log

Aircraft S/N: Pilot:
Date: En route to:
Pilot Copilot
Time (hr:min)
Altitude (ft) Airspeed (kt) Altitude (ft) Airspeed (kt)
0:00
0:05
0:10
0:15
0:20
0:25
0:30
0:35
0:40
0:45
0:50
0:55
1:00

190-00601-06 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. L Page P-9
P.4 Updating Aircraft Documentation
In the aircraft logbook, make an entry recording installation of the G600 MFD/PFD System in accordance
with 190-00601-06, Appendix P, Airworthiness Approval of TBM700 Series Aircraft in RVSM Airspace.
Ensure that the TBM700/850 RVSM G600 AFMS (190-00601-34) Revision 2 or later is inserted in the
Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) or Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH).

NOTE
G600 Pilot’s Operating Handbook (P/N 190-00601-01) must be Revision J or later.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06

Page P-10 Rev. L